erry wh MON Gyn aay nnesrate ve >a Y re ASIEAA ITI IERR ARI TUSSE OUTST ED SUUDST TEED Erte pea pr alte PDE OST TTU C eet OTD CD OOO TEEIEILES: OUP CU TEES ED peeg’ stpetne et! ; terete ws Deedirtrespvevi tere ' Pr Peorrepaytaner events ie vag » Wp eevee gy Ye STINT PO Pi Per er ete nye’ Pe rere riye Se VO ery DPLetet eae’ see oe eT ee DeoRND PES SDVERD LL OMADUH ERE Tbe EDP PaSSELIRUR SUSE STISSIEOSS IEE ION eee aD POUT CUD Dera nati edD CED Mt TENT TNs EEE OU Laser eee EDD Herren setifis soit pitttiesstriietee ECE en any STEIN SPULELS SY Dopey sabre vatED® esr any Pousyvereestsesiney Peters e be Peery e bbe PPPOE SUN ee TEESE Sp DD SE TT rae Vyas tase ype ee Wy Eu atuaney ety yy pry tyy Dinners HS EE errr ten Tce en eS Te) sere prneeny, PoP ereePaEP eee tas? sare hres tor eney, SEDO eT Ov HAY tr artes HHP Crossvoutvatertasesoottenstenes tnesesceeey US RARERMESAES SERED TUDE SSRRISER UT ITES IEE SIL PS EE er trey of eioty HEU SE neti 8 SU eysevty citer tysetsen diy) tess DNTP eneeees aU Thee ede toate. ee r PPTs eet ayy) POEs ar eevee rrr tee Carrey prea yy eg eet) treprrvbynns phopeynes ND pute APPEL EONIDY fy SPPVNND NCH eee Pe sy as any Hv grt ey sot perros a ydnyee as Mererparene eee eae esses rege ys sNipverssag oor tes DPE reer yeayy Seon steers nye peyeireyery US vepernneataes Wyseevery yyy ssyyernt copie Heavy ees Heyer roy eee yi Ee Aryvaysesseey Puayysea yee) 8 pse seeryooyyeane Se tape erent ey Herein tay Seinen tyre Ventre rnc trey " Vyvsrea ia vaspvarenye ry Seve y eres sriteyeorsseretaa ster yy BDAY yee rate Vesey te taerernny PRUE SEED RENEE PeTaN I) Aenea yey Sete rb eonty aooee sites fay vita treet sey Ps PH psaneeyy her aeti sos SOs eta uae tn) Tyee Dey y a Thetis yiyeents HAPPSN trees tas Ct Hvregeee ayer Shoah HDs Att vinnie Myereiss Tater sete VEN CSSA TATE PEE EE SNe ee Huei HADES AEN REE Ee a MASE ESRD PHO ERE TED pasa egy EE LARD E AON nS Es oye puree AiR VEN tea te : TURP RSe EE MISTER ARR Hyer cary Deverayrrrrcrnned DVS ELD, POD EEE OLLIE ep eD EER JVELERIN EON) veer erasers re tep ee OSES eee ROR Sey PSCLOP AV TNS Aveo NRE NED we styetagyy Pes ay: CO ym rieresirer SVaS tage ts pierre bee peogene Ver rere Dvir tye Uyitee ees wees Peoeee spent yery ride ey ” vorveynreyyy ithe Derrireay ere ares Dae Serenity Doi tte ye Sterterye vee syectyse Perper eroye Ps aan suey 7 RR taeas ees STEEP Nr ge Voyervereeer ny Wy yet raressoyy eet Cyetoarsyere vethenyee OPER eS a ty Re vse sheer SY er: THe ey ree yu yorsny PE aa Conye SHGuant p See TEL PANE LTIRE LA TEESTERTISESE ' UES Oot types Aeon BO OO Oey LVedtays DYE svar MMC Te By Vey SEO Leet, SON Erp SECS OT ay DSR ieee i) #83) yitan ty se yearn tna: sy eooasayee’s Vepvaprttn He maironsane: NO eee ta Fiyieties EEE PPUS ETNA EYES Hine vaVay baal riss HAD wer eksty ECM PPADS EES VL ESD FANT TEbeya Sereay eed eet MMs Pore ny MASH) ant OEY Perea rave PORES AY) tS say Tot HO TEETER TOS , PSSA ERS Oo ES RENO) Pe) teyt PERE ER TESTO aa sie AULT ne TO) ‘ : LAPSE INT, ST MY ERLE RELY Cartas SEVER SAS EUM EEA UD ED be SITY PHOT Ce tg bapa AP ERKELEP ELT SETA KEE BU Gon 0 ein iis) ah tu PESTO T IELTS TA ET i ett CESSES INS Veal fea eat Ny Heeeendanetnsttt ERED man Dare - eh beebeeel veers ree NTT Pe sire shheey (Desay Yann peal PKK DP TE Liga pnery weet toe syd tye TITRE vy'tviteges KEKY eet Ba ie ata nay Ve aaleay AR ae Oss yoipreeteresprters vey Win Soe out, " UPR Peers: PRPS Sher fay ryspertte eee trey ) vee ay Hr ey eee ee vee treree HyneHe NO ey een i) 15) SOO Hae TCR ene veto Laney Bi SE ey (ty sree teat! Mh Hens yea as a Y VOC ete tits’ ,) VY5st ayia TG tte Yt MEST G iy era th Heute! Teenie ean eh i oe) n tian i Vevey VEEL eh tyy CAPINNY YES TRAY | MR “ SOS Con tn Verve BSP TIKAN tty HIME Vise He San OVE) ANY 1 Arey i HOO aul ces) Wel Revert seventy WO a CDE DTT MSN ce eh SY Tea 3) 3 eee ake USE SEER IAT ten VIET nab ny Varadan sy aa gad ne des. tg fAeNn ety ny NAVEEN Cr eo SEEMS EEE POL YAN NON re rans Db tts HORA CT et SUMS IRE IRATE IR RD EDD OMAP CRRA SRS STUER PEED Fie te PPE eat a aR) SVSORDY ONO REOERT! SEE TET TY ever iT asy) ran NOE NY Verrevnereays egy NV dyad vrshess eres ey) veh bed Peay REIT oy HO era ey STISNE IEE TST TESTES TH eae TE A PEE) taaile TPEXNOYSN EC UREX VERS PENT HT) TENA TREES LIT 1) Sendae DUET TITTLE UTP EA STEN TREE) PIsPSURI SSIS TIOTSYL CISTI EET Ly Ih) COTE O AEDT Ger ibertbre iba ed USMeCUL I eRSS TSR SURES TUEE POPES EET} UTEIESU ETAT IVERUSERY CL LRRERERLER END Freee bbe) (teu PP ciserdas DabegaVe aad, eas Fen) YSeRIYY ET! wee, ato " ot va van Cry ay " ibid " Geena Gabis OTT) ‘ ay) Hecey tae wey Vey ae SOOO Pa TEA ELRUEER SUAS RCTS LPLMR ET YU ES CTS orn TEATRO ECA th 5 PO PED Unni VENT TTP TOE NITSRIV TEST TELTSLET ET They i VaA NIL HYVES vests! Sr PEEED) LOND ne EEE ELT LOS PRUNE ITNT) ey vars ey ¢ Wi ibae prt) iret SPUDUAUMETERAA Coat PERM es dre (bee TELE CUA I gE E Ea PACER aa re ee erties OE PTD RSet TY EERSTE CORNER TS ab aaeity vayaed any Teaber tay tenn hayes i tan vanes’ in rT} u a TUNER TERETE) a ” Carries WFISLTIE) i) Sra sy ase yaa, nes Piess Se eee SS enti " at Clary Se TENET LINE ENN be LO, Svea Cy. NLS Ey on WA BD ATCO a : Wer Cae, we EELL {i “Ur ait Tihs oyu rf Whee thane Oe eer Oey PORT Cen {UR a ere terl Deeb ee Thea abe Liss thisday (oshidt Tightqa ite cn ce? cree MELEE LOY ee Re aera i if ik go tabi AP rier SLOSS fe Wenn RUUD sya DNRAAER ULI ANC CE on pci Hevea reget} gery AUER OKASED Huth St Ate 1D ig B Smithsonian Institution Libraries Given in memory of Elisha Hanson by Letitia Armistead Hanson a ne i ey iy NUA THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE PUN Ge Wis iResal Ee) Ni© INA EME N EDITOR: GILBERT H. GROSVENOR ASSOCIATE EDITORS WILLIS L. MOORE A. W. GREELY O. H. TITTMANN W J McGEE C. HART MERRIAM O. P. AUSTIN ELIZA RUHAMAH SCIDMORE DAVID T. DAY IDA M. TARBELL CARL LOUISE GARRISON MARCUS BAKER VOL. XIV—YEAR 1903 PUBLISHED BY THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY HuBBARD MEMORIAL HALL WASHINGTON, D. C. SMT ASOD NOV 9 1981 LIBRARIES 1903, ~ CONTENTS Page The Work of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey ; by O. H. TITTMANN............-46- I jacles iby Sk ise JBAGHNDIR SS Coben omesedead see Sabo a Ces one oO Rue ener menor anet rice naar 9 PN OLCSEOMMVEMEZ Ie] ager tersy tere ee ee er alove tev ctei erates ay Seve ten bclerat es cuavsteysney Storer ele eneyevste leases aleslatshe 17 AUT MianOGlinginora iio Jaye Ceo aby. oogcosc0Gns oosdob daeaccode, goood 4500 beaded 21 IDI? SHVGIA TEIN 5 a goa Gibladeha itd Boa CEO RIG Ho ELON ciel acre E CE ree eee ae ietn 26 cali ODELH ESN OLE PPO enreryyestreie cae eye ccie scion (ers feta e aici e ole eters) erate /asclcionste me elero ley afoselerecasesovelets 29 Plan for Climbing Mount McKinley ; by ALFRED H. Brooks and D. I. REABURN...... 30 What the United States Government Does to Promote Agriculture............-+++-+--+- 35 ‘CERTAPINGC INGIZI5 6 Sdobe Hoaadone Dead e OC GEO ORS eGo OR ODS eS OooTd Sa mnao caesar 39 Is Germany the Cause of Denmark’s Refusal to Sell Her West Indian Possessions?. . 39 The Amount of Water Hidden Beneath the Surface............00---cceeeeeeceeeees 39 MOU ALPE TIZES wyateneel seer erefer lay states cverces acoso veh teks ciel cisteuetsionstcieierniete sien aula reislauclalaigeiadimeretersts 4o SiH OGhinbiES KS NHS dogs qasecesOeUaRO aE GoOmee son ORO saOEatoeD lipo dear DOO bpUaGCOS 4o Government Maps Recently Issued...... Rae creche erat iver severe bic ysiai ae tsca\ins sags /=is ahuiensreretore ines 41 Testing the Currents of Lake Erie; by E. I). MOSELEY...........2-----2++2-2-00e- 41 RECO MTAD MI CPPALE ATT Meee a ee ase nite tree eta eR CLT eel ead Nope skausve) tus ais here ee eco 42 mebuenWcandaserotectorate’ (Sin Harry, Johnston) sep sree seers aces eels 42 “G Alvaubanels, I=iorTS) MGewel tin /Asoose(ee,) (8, AL, IGWCS)) os gacocecodnesoadoduqs0qdsadnacdS 43 peoTo pelea CHraniky Gy Carpenter) miles mera salaicac ot talcde elayel tne era)aleve cee ake ccapesedenora si oetorens 43 WAL RGI ol xora Oe Iago” (“Arner Wt, 13, N(eiisbn)) oop oapsdcoodaesouaupeadasondocua0sac 43 “The Land of the Amazons”? (Baron de Santa Anna Nery) ...........-...000ee0e-- 43 ethan o ewan dSwNCALSETOMIe yr pays: raicvayeraievor eve siereadel orc ales, Gecialeseue nie aralavwloes ey sheloven avererscrers 43 “ Iptwineienness ((\ytlibewen ISt, Zuexeaaveles)) 5 coccodacocdaeco0snen os5s05G0b0C Bddoovove 44 Neitionell Coqmmpine See teeasusonsdooa udend soce 0 bad oneenaD nEUtenorracedeGuecRe oro 44 Members of the National Geographic Society..........2...2-eceeee cece renee eeeeee Appendix The Great Turk and His Lost Provinces; by WIL1IAM E. CURTIS... ......-..--+-e0-e- 45 The Work of the U. S. Hydrographic Office; by W. H. H. SOUTHERLAND..... ......-. 61 WihyaGreatisalt WakesHas) Kallen)" byl). El. MURDOCH)... .2).- ceedaecsece cesses 75 CeOEEM Me INGIES 55 bodédoedadoccsGHoddOUN So pu CSAC OCC Ao AE RCMEemn eT SEC Or anno aG 77 American Claims in the Antarctic; by EDWIN SWIFT BALCH........... 0. .se--00s 77 ReclamanioukonpAnidslyandsntis Calitonnasreeeneercu acne occ ee boeken ene 78 PLAS Kea tip SOUT Cl atay eID 1S ULE weer tele eis ericle rere tereeete ii crave ie i eveversieneles« cvaculalajeltavayerensihe evel eevecelots 79 Recent Maps and Publications by the U. S. eroleeienl SWRVAVocbonodoaooddosoddooa 79 Tia Der WES oo ooo cdcoounoedpogaaoodudoouDadaaunooupTempoonbAcaudaanotoason Lay OO Rgclasmaieoal Or tine sbi BMG, oo ogpoudpedss God eDeuE On soe cose poddaoHoDDdoouoDss 81 (Cormiimengler INO ome IB, IRBWAT oo dadce couedubooosdneuddabenadcaoboeddoncoguencnogDes 81 The Magnetic Work of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey................-.-..08 81 “igHae Norin ele IsGeChOal, a googagoopbanadcapabneodoDooNdocH A adCoobO4DOInOdAD 82 Mica pspotie G tate trial air yer reves yeseisie avers ca las cfe 7s 28 oveksl revels /alelsioxeso sveueto everepeleseisvolanetahaeceaferats 82 ‘Tne Camige IigiiBom Crees, co opogg eonedooooebcHocdbNUDeGDO Godo50C0dabOScboO 82 Report of the Brown-Harvard Expedition to Labrador in 1900...... .............-- 82 Decisions of the U. S. Board on Geographic Names...............0-0be00+ ceveeces 82 See cee Cm I LCLALTITC Mee teeee PP Meret yaya eves oi sie) a fae (aus eis (9 !oa wl, sheer ssciatalaiaielslvy eysyahcusiave sisiatedsetotersislete 83 ittetmeakeNatotalebar ku (iJao:) Dillet) er nts)<)-tey-1-a)-)2|-layelaloin) slelebeselcleie’shetelelste\areierelorste 83 “Commercial India in 1902’” (Bureau of Statistics).......... ceccccescccceccecsse 83 (111) IV Tue Nationa GrocrarHic MAGAZINE Page List and Catalogue of U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Publications.:.............- 83 SO PATA OLA yy, 7) cu hapete Siepemie ern VAGa Biss sensi els) als orstavwin VSS SORTER ME EE REE eee 83 Wersteell Ccoparyoewe SoSeo7, ceases aacodae o eadnecgs coae=s0 soocandeudzobenD ooNC> 84 The Canadian Boundary ; by JoHN Ww. Foster sist stale dei avalavessbets shakalere tiers etere erates eens 85 Mountains on Unimak Island, Alaska; by FERDINAND WESTDAHL.........--.---+---+- gI Opening of the Alaskan Territory ; by HARRINGTON EMERSON...........2.+00+e0-00-0: 99 he sB orests|of.iGanad are yar tech oveicis cin sea erie. avs oiesslosetaiss ore Eee ROR EE Ene OR ecrnes 106 Work ini:theibar! Southey occ e reals abacaie st C cio tevarcta eee eo mone CER Eee eee 109 @heories of iMolcanicHAction yes alos ae ave select el eee see eee ein ae 110 GeographicuNotes serra racist fi tayaie\sicyarehaveizrele(voipi she reictere ei Potente Cle atte efor eee EE ter SETS III AhesHoundenotsthesomithsonan) lnstitutionee eee ere eee ee ee Corer ee eee eee eee ree III GazetteerofathepPhilippines erry oes serene ee eee een een eee Eee EE EEErEe 112 DhesDevelopmentioflCubas cs. 625d shai cleiecaiseisyoea=jseee cers) ae. 0 Un eeea eRe 112 AdimMlysabiaASs loy7 (C, IBV MP WOON poo goccnosacsoqcaDocouncodS GoacgeoTooSseccee 114 BureaujotsHorestry saws e lccis sisjeresa ele seielerores Capelerere eieles Seiaia pero aceite ele reee II5 Arcentina-Chil esBoundanyeAward sneer eee ere eee eee eereee eee eeerrn - T15 phieyAlas|anyBoundanye Dis plte wee e eee aee treet cere eerie nericoes a) ipobecounds 116 Wind Velocity and Fluctuations of Water Level on Lake Erie................-..--- 116 he Pittshuro, CoallMistricti4- sciences sreteieieeee sleseae cis oe ee eee eee eee eee 116 AdaS NES, Jews, lor As We IMUMCEE Go oooopaccdunbobacesoOD.UEEaUbOFes Sa00G005 116 Division of Hydrology of the U. S. Geological Survey .............--2+--22+- sees 116 ferrin ge Pish eriesys tava. t css) Seva ie ayers ievepveid every Son reae ioe aPC eee Eee eee cle Gee 117 Navigation of the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea..................-----+--- 117 Neg kava IlonGleray INES 5666 dcHac000bs 000d 5a6500480550070950000006 pisielce Serenata 117 JD) gil dbp LA Chto nyebiomomuc Goon coo MeCeo RCO Conner anAGasoae seacobeodeoddbEdscsooc II7 Proceedings of the Section of Geology and Geography of the American Association forehnesAdvancenentoMSClencCeeEe etree ere hore aoe eee Eee EEL Eeeee II7 Soya, O, 12, ANTASIN 5 sooocccncco ses Nae aN ne ee MO RO Se te A aA Goole 117 Wikio SAS Ot INGwr Words GES, oogcacognosco nag aaccoadcnoGGOs Soud0ees502+25000 5 tits) Wigs OF UNS Pap. wos05 conescousoduasaanogDEeoGeaso [ess 300 SpadOanSS Ss SL Dis tunbancesmnunthe Wes tein dics Heme eel elie ete ete irre 118 By aly UAGIESS Goa4 oaccocenuos ves voucou sD aduobOnOnoaeScdsoeSaUcoseIaSSsOrON coscdS 118 Ceoramyo meal Soeisn7 Oi Wes IASC ..o5505 socc00es0 So0d0dads soe sonsecssa506 Soe atts} Salmon and Salmon Fisheries of Alaska...... ...... -..-.--- BBW oU DOB deOeSs ees 118 ishin ssingthehSouthhoeaislan d SaeeaE ent neeeeee eee rei eee ene 118 American Geographical Society.............- HERG ASBE omdOnS ean auodoomnorocaoueD 118 Geosraphichviteratures pee e Roeper eee cereale ratte it eit 119 “Handbook of Birds of the Western United States’? (Florence Merriam Bailey)..... 119 “The Tragedy of Pelée’’ (George Kennan).......... ..... BEA OT one San ERA OOS & II9 “The American Cotton Industry’’ (T. M. Young)...............---+ --+ee+-+---- 120 “‘Vear-Book of the Department of Agriculture Ig0I”’............+----- +--+. +e+-s- 120 IBYoO)ids) INGAAS so acossocousS SosacsHNoy go5052¢0s07 0009 ovagesoododosdoce Godosas 121 “Japanese Oyster Culture’’ (Bashford Dean).......... LAUR Ee NGS yA rs SS eer 122 Publications by the U. S. Geolagical Survey. ............ 6222 esse eee e neces cee 122 Atppalachiankorest Resenye user e ree rieee ener eee irr Sah Shes ome eco wae 123 By-Laws of the National Geographic Society......,..-.-+--. 02+ seer eee : 123 Reindeer in Alaska; by GILBERT H. GROSVENOR........ ..2-:-++2---0 ++ eee: epee yl 27) RaleishiRocks nyo a h6 Ae Ne WEIN RE Soya reerciats RET EAN dete ana een eee dado 148 emegnene ing Yucatan Fiber; by E. H. THOMPSON...... - - ----+-+ +++ sees 15° A Report of the Eruption of the Soufriére of St yaa 1812; from the Evening ewe Ok fiers Ho, WA oo bocsoavenadocnooo400 Sena PR SSO Samodots.) Boers Hiden stale 158 GONTENTS CORT APT CHINOLES ategetetetetre myn ete teray ates eicketene ieuslele avai « esi jecateseistakelsiayeajaie eitaneveya scoteterepstonsicueiziel Explorations Among the Wrangell Mountains, Alaska........... sedodacganocnooce: Seansicin Aviercghe WegrxeMsein, 5 t5cag5epdobacbegeasooueadeassnandspedeporenadesoade Sinyay Of. wae Cral (Canyon Ge eydeocode eco noo SOs dncemen ean emcee eocenmoen Cntr Geography in the University of Chicago ............... Jan BORA GOOM ERAS oo con ue EbITePASCentrormi tery eres tamper ssrteiatelciete eiclelsve tsi «lois lel esevaetei ys) ciate atsy ais ‘eve se eheietersyeuelelas Irrigation Plans in Five States........-......2-:0--- Ga ABSA C ODES Ca OMBO ONO A ado internalliConmercelofsthe United Statestaa.ss-- eee ere a bY Jeondabe oo 06 IN@eleveceretoyel Tn \WWAxomaniorer Zhayel (Coykoravalo, 5-4 ccancoagodocddansodoodooonauDGsq00GKCS WeparimMentions CommercesandWaborseren cocci ciel ein oeil-leiacieeieliaies iets The Possibilities of Southern Appalachian Streams..............-.00:00 eee cece e eee Mera JRANSS, bloc oso nasuanso SoU UT BormeE bes OdonoM eu babode oAoMeDadedaner cis bmon er PRL CR SATIN OSELS CALE Reon Tey nd Se say. ahora as anor oret ted beye nceuelinie, sit iiareiavallars syunvateceveusierees Mae Cupstag Of aS WMerAnMesY oo poocdodobdospoumee eas bape voacuuenouase esp oucooDoUdS FIMoaren, Wizio, Wiraines IDINCE 66 poops sooobdooooGobabOnOOOUbODUSHoGodoDDOODDEOC A Map of the Dairy Region of New York State boodoge cbpog eooasoouG 08 Aganeood The United States—Land and Waters ; by Cyrus C. ADAMS..........-..-.2-0 sees e eens The Conquest of Bubonic Plague in the Philippines.................00ee cece ee eee eee IK ROVSAeTUS wa ENS Clsy Ot Wari, sscogcsagobancoodeododcudcodn voougusonccooonudds Ati erIcanpDevelopmention the: bhilippinessanan-seereceiteeine eer ciaciereas sees cir Benpier hie Gardentot thesPhilippinesi-ncs-see peers ias elise leitken eit ai Hine Brathisia Goymtin olen IWsqorsebtilorn,ocoboo ce cconegdsuoudoc eno boosumagnodaddssnOI000eD (Ceo orap li cpNOteseteyyarerparsterciereaisteye ate cet see estate toa eta UN eu csatcVoder sl eve siepateyereca’ ‘vale euslanciels'sjepea%s IBLE CATE OLMHOLES Ehyateyee teiaty terse iraceaies i | an betceteustelers cee skoiensyerncietine [ube alrers ale dakelapsasyshevsye bnepNewalbrans-CanadayRatlwaiycic) mis wee ceeice acti se eile cree sie clersieke scicio ele Ex PediOMetopbunkestan wwe s ye cea ents afe reve kt ctor iah cle eiakelnie Srorerey Heke oie Sea wlSiayere : (CeolocicaliSurnveyseeeeoeieee roe eee SHG: chide ta cue bd da peer mor em S pooosocane GeologicalrustarnyoteNewnVorka Cityeer tiie en eee ciiciine scaeieclciiiiscie hues odaksVevelopinpy Machines) ier Leeper cic cee ccc Nation alm Geographicnsociebys mec ervey versicioce iets chevorctoie oie sle alsseveisicave oiersvereieca crete sie Annual Excursion of the National Cenaeniite SHH Hycosbagepoosososcusococases as IDK GERAACIENISOIE So edo dos Oats GAO ERO EOE H GOO RS COSCO RE ree eR ITE mS arisen Mei Gall Wemorialy Awardees ete cee) se eraeyieciee aie ddwodwauuloset da padbocopoooogted CGeoora Pi CBLCLAcuTe wp yyy ern ter irate evn eae ele/cece ee Sell i a)elei aie italeleiele verezelatsselelayarae C6 Awaqeneciuien” (IBtakynbo Ghyntie NS) oo so oscodadodeauondoodoauuuaesmoonpsoeouces 4656 (CeolopicpanrohiNewm Vonks tates otra lence ei oe oe nin oe eel eee The Tetrahedral Principle in Kite Structure; by ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL........... Appendix of Seventy Illustrations of Kites and Structures used by Alexander Graham Bell. Notes on the Preceding Illustrations ; by ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL............---+.. Wie Zier leranduthe National Geographic Socieby-j-\ecl- ose clio cise eee nie leek ile ie GCOSTADHICHNOLES ei teppere te err terse ot ee ere SET See Siac ave level iol elu tsnepes sieves Sle) cieesin = elepalsleresetaren> acelenste National GecoocrapiiCESOGlebyzmidsrereieverceraictehee ore) International Geographic Congress............. EDISGOROpN RADAR OARS: lon nb aos onbOo a GeographicuNotes ey oles seeps ote roves ke votes cha tolevosile ae ekg OLS e Re Ee OMEe : Geolocicalexplorationnnprastenty Asia seee eee eee ere er rer er eer nner The Norwegian Expedition to the Magnetic North Pole by Roald Amundsen. ....... Me etrah edralleite yang) cea aca Sais oer aidin aiclaeineeshe state a telceetne rere tre: aU ee eee ees IRV) IVS Brnl Was Wravhusel Seaitss.occcosonsososegagccoscdsseses 6000 o508 36 conse: Summer School of Geology and Geography at Cornell Unriversitsy, pocpeogezsoga0ce Bs The Swedish South Polar Expedition..... pocoornoc aD OODSU aE DOIOOSDoesCRS7 OSo500>2 het GeosxraphicallSocietyzom lisbour epee eee eer eee ee Eee Eee Eee Ere ee eee Eee eEe Case Gowan loli Isqosabtaoyn 565650 605000 00000 ad cooN Sea beDOOOZAaNO 6056 DeD005 dhe NationaliGeographic Societys Hlager) -eeeeer eee eee seen er eee ee eee eee SVenwlLledinusuei bli cations aeee een eee eC eee Coe eer ere eee eeocrere MhevArctio lity treet ceo se seccndy heer otty sy) ete ake te SU ere ee Eve seeps Robert vhs sei le sasycseyrrcserare sere esters HERE En AN baounonomAcdsonedanese Peres shhepReproductivesheriodsinktheslobsteLaee ere er eee eee EOE eee Eee ere ete omer ree The Alaskan Boundary Dispute ....... ....... Be ebebaouTON ASOD ouORDODSbeUOU0Nse° MherAscentiof MountiMcKanleysse 2 se) sie eeee ae CE a see ae ae Geographic Miteraturess a5 sisi Ceon jacks oe OSE CEE OE eer ee cir ee ““A Teacher’s Manual of Geography ’’ (Charles McMurry) ..................------. “The Alaska Frontier’’ (Thomas Willing Balch)................. ES an eae SOLD caronyan Wiese) (Ceyal iyeemaloe)\ 5 accesso 522 so Sg065es 900008 00000020905 “Complete Geography’ (Ralph S. Tarr andl sehear M. WIMMER) oa cosonsedeeosc0cs “Through the Heart of Patagonia’? (H. Hesketh Pritchard).............. .......- Wass Geological Survey, Publications onAllaskass)s-\eile e see eee eee eee ieee The United States—Her Industries; by O. P. AUSTIN.............-. Ee sete ey ore Pee sea Aas IGaretoyslneatorn OF Hae WWE - 4 osde socacaay » doGQvEesa20050005000 5008 are eee Rainfall and the Level of Lake Erie; by KH. l. MOSELHY........:.....-. ..-.-.+....... (GeographicyNotes Ere eeret er ae eecrne rece erare 26 29 S60 oocboUSdODSCUNRE The Railroads and Forestry........... shot esbebaseosd quae nsaad ooodooatone oooboT Woe IReaiINy AAAS Cis) WEY cocacncs a6 ovoasegeocsodoooasodae toon soogs eb oDoOsOc06 The United States—Her Mineral Resources; by C. KIRCHHOFF. . ......-.---..------- Expedition into Texas of Fernando del Bosque; by BETTY B. BREWSTER......... .-.-.. shiesHardy Catal pasuerre cet eee ESHER HERR AA EOUSo UNE QuoDeE soo gobo baoae cou do mOOgeS iE xplorabionspin@libe tance nee ene ere omer r Oren te creer eee nee etter ener ce Gardening in Northern Alaska; by MIDDLETON SMITH .... ......-. ©. e-+e 5 s-e--eo » Excavations at Abydos............. : Sa TAO SOE a OMS AS Pep O aware paste isttpererstereteie CeopreyonlS WOES .6q06 doadcsoe sonagkoddoowdcoosoodbododsccgs Kisco dosooccocsss : Foreign Commerce of the United States in 1903 ..................--:-- forodawoas : White Population of the Chief British Colonies ...... ........... Beis aa alia pei ae eats Aare ekuniabbaye Ot Iwill, ococGsdscodescssas 6 ooodsersoasnoesODODIGONS DoDsaD0AGNRC The Geographical Distribution of Insanity in the United States ; by WILLIAM A. WHITE. Resin Aral Tas INOyddA INVES o6 ccnscccoss coco seo Hen oodESedND obacoDD=DIDOFDODUCbORDNS The Influence of Forestry upon the Lumber Industry of the United States ; by OVERTON Wo TRIS 5 sonncnop0 ones cabo NNGoaanOODOsOOONRoODDOSUST DAS IaNHOsGsdG0NG900 SoDHO OS (Cosa INUES. ss onsosddasoaa sasccaascsod20005 coooDodesbe00 adgosao00D0s gac06c0 (COPS TmO’ FBS. oo cone Sones o0cnedooDeonDno Od DSGDDTd DONT COO OD DASEY2q000LESE0 ContTENTS VII Page SLeawill OF ane Ibajosoenl Wiens, 6. soodsove || sobosuood wsbedeeoonbas puadbondepes 388 Highth International Geogtaphic Congress..............-000.000052 cee ees SOS Pouibiay Ae CanqeSo 400 te poonadoncgeeunoeseee nas seo gb CARO ten erEEe eee Herne 3GO. (Cigale Wolemets IDE Eid ENWES. oooeocgoe on Hem abooucabouaEEddon mEponnonanaes 390 rim srationvintopuse) WmitediStatessecrmcie cine cisiscyils lsfaleievsisie) siete eisis ofel= le elel=ivale« e 391 Wi, Sh Ceolloysiteail Sirkyeyy JEMebieewCN, .66qc0c00 nodGooeKsod0GGeoGcDUDRSUOoSODUoonGS 391 A North Polar Expedition.............. JOBS Od TOS HEH Om ab Da man Sp AEC ee mm bae ers ees On Nas Ageeaie OF Wits Qoreenc te Raa u conde ee ACCOM OPS nce tlies lah oie rn Gro rs Smee Dee gaia tee ce 391 Directory of Officers and Councillors of Geographic Societies of the United States Ba ees 392 The Wrangell Mountains, Alaska; by WALTER C. MENDENHALL.........-....---- 0005+ 395 Rabberpelantationsmn Wexicorand| Central vAmertcalyiijeecl- eiseielel si alle sie scree 409 Wae Zigeilere Rollare lasrqoeabibioinle ca saaniqus sab oen ey ae ac: GSES Sens | incite nace nero Aree a er 414 The Mining Bureau of the Philippine Islands ; by CHARLES H. BURRITT................- 418 Record Ascents in the Himalayas.......... a Sein dd BARES CUPS IGE CREE aU O Ree 420 sblresNewn Cone on Mont PELEe.s asrrcileas. teayiicie ies sieheisiste) alee duel vicizueucle wiles wace cs uae 422 PMlaS ane BOln dary CCISlOM recycle sisclsneis | eicieaietebe racine | clecete sthsteyrerebavese ouch aye chekeisgat' eee A 23 Rickard sUrqubart|Goodet-aaq-scecte 9) ceeee snes We Rchalsaisisia dO ome ora idee el sco. cient National Georrapiic SOCleby awh ans el kesn coh tuy cicverets ersraeteleaiede situa teleraselefoicie cys ersteievesece cbeys 425 Unsuccessful Ascent of Mount McKinley and Mount Sorata..... er Peis Pe ois ston seast Aa eas 425 PES RG. COlOSIGAINSUtVeyen eavea sclera is sicetevnte. oclaiae emia eo ebanjeale tere vere Bees eu ca Meieiere Reis isiee ne 425 Ceoaraphiemiitera tunes yale sree cseo sian sretauiel dah) water shebe eveis isin sleceete SCHOO OEN DOS DOR AMEE 425 “Elements of Geology’’ (Joseph Le Conte) SG Soe OO A Deol ceecepyea tlt cit ia 425 BaGcocrapiiy, of Com»menrcevs (Spencer whrotter) rye isiseontercis ieliieleiterel te 426 ““The Philippine Islands, 1493-1803’ (Edited by Emma Helen Blair and James A. FRO DELESOU ey rercpenh pore balete eaters Nan eHan eh WAU arasn guy castatsnis el ont lacs) Sealed ev fos iayaeledeo eisyeveecteee Ma, See 426 “The Training of Wild Animals’’ (Frank C. Bostock)............. ... ues Bea doce Cez aphexaswua (Georger bai GAaLrisOM) i. say eo cseciee sie nisin sie salah eioterei ale aleie lsc e eevee poos 05 CAH Program of Meetings of National Geographic Society, 1903-1904..............00e eee eee 428 The Value of Arctic Exploration ; by Commander ROBERT E. PEARY.................. 429 Surveying the Philippine Islands; by GEORGE R. PUTNAM...........-.000000-- eee eee 437 Viera Gilt CLT a Diyas CAUMIY AUNID) RIES WS bose reve eipi cre teveyerclalas a essere ep ook. choo tele eh Cmiack nto ye ace UAE Ie 441 INGrerone Minis Glaciers: iby) Ga Kei GILBERT ews se cisic elses eveteleleeinjeyeleerne inte ee 444 The Grape-Growing Industry of the United States ....... .....-.-22. cece cette eee eee 445 PHAGES CiauGSan 5 gaqsos GbE, lOO OOOO OUT EROS OCS areca Cra eterna ers BEG a Renamed ae 451 Notes on Panama and Colombia... ....... B65 SS tio LIOR PE OCHRE REECE RTO EI IBIS ee) AG 458 The U. S. Signal Corps....... 5 Gu yo EKO.8 381.00 050 COS He ON Lei Re ote Sadoowsp acdc. 467 CIA DING IVKEEIRS. cocosoc bao. seodccoouedscccoonO Adon ad oomaneanponcacHoane sacs 468 “The Island of Formosa ’”’ Gane W. Davidson).........: Shaladioua doedoodusdegae 468 “The South American Republics’’ (Thos. C. Dawson) ...............-222--s00-- AG “Tn Search of a Siberian Klondike’’ (Washington B. Vanderlip) .................. 472 PE OO SPC COLE Can alate Clete tei crete els alain ssaleveteyeaiee Un eteenhersuinlamies des SAS Py 2 472 Recent Publications of the WU: S: Government... 2... .225255.052522005 Sete trees) cesses 474 GUS IE Ole JUGS IRAN IDOI Pa Mapishowinsisiteroh thes Chineseijade mines: er a.:)-neleeeee renee creer eeeratnnas os Maplotveastern@shurkestanigerer tice act se icetro De nC nee eee Ee eee emer ee Genet 13 Map showing geographical relation of Venezuela to the Isthmian Canal routes........... 18 IVA Wi Oli Cara Casca see eel tetec.! uibyals cic evalu (so tibpes Seegeaehere Draie ety Senet anes Speyer mee eee Ca ea 19 The Port of Maracaibo................... Aievakoy be ktnica lial Soca ps ope Seater een Pe Satemnstons 20 The University—Caracas. . Sten Je tajaie ene a Bhan diay ee ee ele au ge ESET RSS ley ae nD Rte ayes tes Gl ca at a ee 21 Watkins Glen ; a gorge carv =e rom pede 3 Grail, Rea BOs a RRO RESO cece eaeey 22 A pebbly rock carved by rain ; Russian River, Cailtorentin nap Jepdacniocsucopooe coGo%0000s 23 Rock edges and waste slopes, Grand Canyon of the Colorado River, Arizona............. 24 The last house in Riggs, Oregon, a village overwhelmed by dunes. . ~—............... 25 Planting grass to stop the drifting of sand, near Provincetown, Cape Cod, Mass.......... 25 A traveling beach on the shore of Lake Ontario ........ ............. Suess Gods S060 26 Dye Suen sachin iin iris Sanh, Qroeldsiolbin.. soosssegss+s00c00000 oasqse0ce0s Hoodorases- 27 Outline map of Peary’s sledge routes and surveys........:.......-.-.. .:+------s- ~ 28 WeD OF Wee WiClkainlesy MEO, INOS 5a00 onagscas wooosacsasoaccuenacassns00gs00000" 32 Pilot chart of the North Atlantic Ocean (22 x 32 inches) ...... ...... ..... .... Supplement AN@lewishucemeteny. OS Mids ne peers meter ea eee eerie AMeyonbaomscusonsodoo 49 Government hotels, Bosnia...... .......... .....-...-. > BOoG0s0a06 Gaon cces won FO The ancient Greek Monastery of St John of Rifle TBlgeacia, Be aR bios padoonodGD. oodHsaes 53 Soflaythetcapital of sBuloariayn,.niscaeeciel ete oe eee eee ccc renee 54 House of the Sobranye (Bulgarian National Assan), Sofa ee eae Base he ae 57 Princeskerdinand ofvBul sania eer sae oe hacen eae nee eee ee 58 Uta INS GPINOSHOMSIIMPE GES Ooo she opsoecse ouogdSs so bodaDooDUOdEboudeasndonpoOSAC 59 Map showing different Alaskan ihommdloray lines claimed by United States and Canada..... go Outline map of Unimak Island ..... His Rees Sb exe Sci Sled COMET EIL ASIN ema Ordos G6 92 Shishaldin from anchorage just west of Biramacies OOo ROA Ae ShSACOHBS nacwmocotdsube 66 93 View of Shishaldin from near Pankof. ..... bb bo) MARAE Ha asus Sos SeAM esse oode 94 View of Shishaldin from west side of Otter Cove.......................-.........---0:- 97 View of Pogromni, Faris, and Westdahl peaks from Unimak Pass, ..... .............-- 98 Winter freighting overland, Dawson, Yukon Territory ....... -.... 1... 0 .. esses . 00 Wancdineythrougheth els iitatyN On ey eer ener eerie eet meee nee eee - 100 Hauling the United States mail with nefindlas, Nowe Alaskar otis: fy eatitin ae eee eer 102 Winterireightingsonkthecewiyalke deyind ermiam teeta eee eee 103 Freight boat on the Niukluk River—carries 7 tons..... Date Riores SAE GTS Se eacrere 104 Map showing stations of the four South Polar expeditions,.... .............. > eS0006 108 DineReEKen Sooner aS rei eHG OX (CHO occas cocoon Seeesnocoesodsenesuscosseomscooces Il3 Chart showing annual precipitation at Salt Lake City and water level of Great Salt Lake. 114 Herd of reindeer crossing/a riverin' Siberia) = 222) ea... s- ee acees eee aaa Frontispiece Reindeer on the Siberian beach waiting to be loaded on the Bear..... Ain Weis erostes AE, Reindeerberd) Sibeniasas -casiis.clissc Win sss te ieee Se IR EE EES ROSE CREE care 12 Unloading reindeer, St Lawrence Island, Alaska... ........... eg dais iste eS rete ele ee cts 130 Outline map showing government reindeer eee InPAdaskalek cereale a eteyameras lee ay cnet 131 Mr T. ly. Brevig starting on a family sleigh ride, Teller reindeer station................. 132 A enpelniarse nll TSA Wa SWEINS Sh og docbood009 000) bog coro aeougbouse shopesodes 133 Breakin oyappatheraroughyd Cep\SnOwWarisey tlt tet let sleet eee else ee eee 134 Malkcinteanemmdeenlelllerrein deer stat OT mln secret tert eile petite eie errreettiele 135 Lisr oF ILLUSTRATIONS 1X Page Freighting with reindeer, Cape raisin of Wales SAAS SIBERIA Ciein pi gbodasck, logoenede 136 Traveling deerback through deep snow....-.5...-0 100.0 cence eee cee eect erence ence nes 137 RUGhine th GUNTER. oogacdooousecbannauns coe HHeGsoscCuODOd GangebosoogonubeonoRclco 138 Reindeer tethered during a halt................... UG BNR IR eR ere tue paca Oma ee oir 139 LA Siosiskin Yyenayn Bhool Cente bon oo) puooocodoooocunosoa MbbcooucBnoosusUODOd GboDG 140 Lieutenant Bertholf mounted on a reindeer, showing the ability of the reindeer to carry DUG) POWAGIS s ooniddocoorgorpenovdomagodgnoVObnE Homo eDES CODD UUEMoOOds Cos bUpUDaLOGG 141 Reindeer digging up the snow to get the moss beneath..................- ees eeeceee ¢ Wie A Siberian, the owner of 10,000 head of reindeer, and a Cossack official..........-...... 143 Pupils of public school, Cape Prince of Wales, 1902............-.00eeee eres cece nace | LAV Residence of Congregational missionary, Cape Prince of Wales, Alaska....: ........... 147 RANIGIEA ROSS sobcbcoo- sdocuros, sdddnaansadee se osaumaecade copcdodaHDOdEOCUGHadashaonaco 148 Seldonapacksonmw l/l sole rr yep tavernas tinal pein pave scinvalinrsaievn raaeladalapetsvayeyaMstuaxaiehevaeyeuanovenct 149 A wild variety of agave found in the deep forests of Yucatan. ............... -+.:. ao. digi! A field of young sisal plants—two years O1d ......... eee e cece eet te eee tenes 152 A native in the interior cleaning the fiber by the ancient method ....................... 153 Tresses of the sisal fiber cleaned by the pacché ; native implements for cleaning fiber .... 154 Drying sisal fiber at one of the large plantations—Yucatan ...............00e cece ee eee 155 Balesvotssisaletiberreadyafor SHipmentcy (ter lala elidel clelaltekete icles) cieiedstotelerero/eisieisidi level sioiels 156 Wapitus Lake and Dutch Miller Pass, Washington ......................4-4. .. Frontispiece Noon eethespalmettos: of pol oxic alte semiwicetee| sven icleicl sie lole sievaponnie escusials!alohalcictcin cesar weal snc evere 174 In the white pine forests of Michigan .... .. .......-.....2005. balotol ooneDbcoubHD ae 5 Portland, Oregon, Mt Hood in the distance.............0. cece eee eee ene e eee ee 177 Qubtheshishsplains: awestermiKansasiyereejeleis/-lale slo). iaiciaveiele claieistieloioie) teres rererneye cucierey ieiene 178 Ayheldiotiwatermelons western) Kansas): aja.) eis eis scree eretneiier cic rielciee ene aeleel spay Cele els > 179 A band of 2,000 sheep grazing on the mountain slopes, Oreron BART nMOS COST oes oso 180 Combined harvester-thresher on one of the vast wheat fields of the West............:... 181 Map showing navigable rivers of the United States. ............22..- cece cece eee e ees 183 Typical cholera house, over filthy open drain, Manila................. 0.00. e cence teens 188 Typical native water-closets........ Suh D MUD TCH oes oe nace el aeo bem aaeiE pete Ne BS speaor, Ks) AGE y DIcAluCholeray center: map tats)etese) oisgsie spec) Tact iessusi stcieve ciel aisle bie she cbud dishetakn ens ehetome heute tes 190 Farola district after burning of infected buildings.................0006 cece eee eee eens I9E Native market, showing ‘‘shacks’’ backing up against filthy open drain.... ........... 192 MAAS OAABITIAL CC Covey tapegetars ahevres elope ote taverehonel eaton te cre teu tease lovetselovede azieie alate Mekaistater te reumoecrevniare 193 Board of health for the Philippine Islands and presidents of provincial board of health... 194 Street work, carried on by Filipinos under American inspectors..............-. .... ... 196 Carretonorntreisht cartidrawny Dy/a) (Cara baOv eye tiele ice) be)-tr)-elersictcteele eres icles alee 198 HLALLO Wt Op antl el Cut Or TCE varelejsisce/= ies talctore eich tev ele leic aterayriaie eVelebetauet eras Hey crousrareicnokay ena eros ator 199 Sime Kiiys mS. Sovospedd oo nuadoOnDabooDaecanos orp Aros MeTOadonre Got D arianiolmam amare as 200 Primitive Agriculture. Tagbanua women harvesting rice, Calaminanes Islands.... ..... 202 Igorrote climbing a tree fern, Benguet. ....... .... PRUE DU NCOP OB HS SHIN) Gatco 204 HRP empities when otle tive prey esi rcreretsiets sess ce sysraccitvauess apavoprisverararalcyetelsrsdeyn sinks a cieraniel stareiaue cus 205 The Igorrote town of Cabayan, Benguet, Iuzon....................... «. arn dabceraeorta ees 206 i-ortote mice terraces, Cabayan,, bengitet, Luzon) tl rece ei eis ee ee celeste. sce 207 mucineh of the Gaddanes;\ Isabela; Tyizony 4). 2. ee indies ecnee he clea cee ae eee nee: 208 Adult Negrito woman, showing relative size.... ............0..-002000e pera cating Mens 209 Map showing route of new Trans-Canadian railway ...........0 02. e eee cece eee eee 214 LEEETENG lave UES age) apie be 06 6 OO CTOs ARO DORN EUR DIIS Ber Sue Cheat Ain ioe ee A NRT 221 Triangular box kite..... SoD GHT Er UD Rew MOB te OO nina rae feknpia Honk Bh aa Hain Ol Aree ears ee 222 Compound triangular kite 5 Dt medatentane dualecell Swmyaeriitetvats cca stexsjerevoly loysiayvaieteiern wvapnverslcemebeenela co eseo nao ne avail eevee 224 x Tue Narionat GreocraPHic MAGAZINE 3 Page Petrah Edral/frarives: pyar te ve we sree revere Le cea ears are ean eee le arate aoa a Epa sh eee 225 Hour-celleditetrahedralikcite sempre eerie tata ent eee ee One eee mee 226 Sixteen-celledutetrahedralvkite ser peer ere ee eee sn etre eee een nee eer eee 342)? 226 Metrahed ral evtEs: 2) susarccatsyscscckaysuor citer olay Wave oun Baraat oy cabo OaE. LOTSA DAE eee 227 Phe aerodrome kites ha ysasvocnsces tate avse seeisesesi aad | Abapetn ceyehoneet ape ere ore eos eee 228 The aerodrome kite just rising into the air when pated TA, ENNIS, cogeosocss nacccanses 229 Aerodrome Weitelimthey aires. csc scicev essa sik sony elace dates svaec cote gic fouele ey towe tes Senet ret eeprom ees 230 Polos tint o tkite yn spaycise, feiayevevcensetayess eevee, wate alata ae eee etna 2h AE CARS ae Oey VA SR Set eae ea 230 Body of multicellular giant kite; triangular box kite Panes ono Mioostatnonioaduonicoccoce[s 232 Different views of a Pteciales faenite PAN 5n poaconcadgge0cnd027500008002095G000200005 233 Multicellular giant kite rising in the air................. PE eoaa aS te SeeaspaoOsoaCOS 20007 234 Building a windbrake of tetrahedral cells......... ye baer stat MDRE a eo Hate SAR tees Leto 235 A completed windbrake showing method of use............... 00-22 e eee e cece cece eceees 236 Observation house ; views of a winged boat........................ - I Sl gehen atk, areata 237 Wiewsotvatetrahedrall winged boat... .- 149544 eeeee ieee ere 238 Wiewsjofsainon-capsizablekiters see eeee ee eee eee eee bee eee EEE nee ee eee 239 Views illustrating mode of studying behavior of bodies in the air..... ...............-- 240 Views illustrating experiments with kites formed of open tetrahedral cells. ........-.... 241 Views illustrating experiments to determine relation of center of gravity to center of sur- facesinhthying structures: «<<. crac cds ee eee ee eee eae ere Saapapacoceos 242 Views illustrating experiments with varying arrangement of cells.................---.-- 243 Views illustrating experiments with varying number of cells..............:-2...00.000- 244 Views of a multicellular kite having six sets of cells and of a giant kite having three itwelvesided cells apc ios cic /fesicccls arartetahert catechol er rake See eee ie eee g6b0000 245 Views of a hexagonal kite and a twelve-sided kite....... 02.0... oes eee eee eee ee eee 246 Wiewsiofvaipaddlewheelikitesn semen seeeerienicnsciie ct tice RRHGe ane cnhonaonet 247 Prospecting for gold in Alaska with reindeer as pack animal................... ieaseetae 256 LO La VON ID SXol\ 5 cena REEMA Ean Mette cate cicks Ugs ql aL DOOROGOCOOn. InouD0 08 4000 260 A steam plow in the great valley of California....... ....... yet cievey reeset: CET BGO COC 265 Front view of a steam harvester-thrasher used on the Pacific coast ............ -..--- -- 266 Rear view of steam harvester-thrasher..........-...--202-.-22 ceeeeeeee cence Sdopod08 267 Between the walls of 100,000 sacks of wheat at Mission, Oregon ..................--+-- 269 Sackedi wheatiawaitingushipment oe eies eee ream cence eee ce te 270 A portion of the grain fleet in Portland Harbor, Oregon ...... ......-.-2.---2+--+-:- 271 Thrashing rice with a steam thrasher in southwestern Louisiana ............... -..----- 273 Harvesting rice in southwestern Louisiana.... ...... 22-00... eee eee ee eee eee 274 Avheldtofipumpkins!srown) for seeds eepeeeee eee eee erence eae ee caer arene 276 A field of silverskin onions on Bloomsdale farm, Philadelphia ....... ..- Se eae 277 Cattleibeingsfattenedifonjexport- ser ee eee eee Erne ee Ce eee eee ener area 278 A colossal Californian pumpkin. ..... hy Salt SER eae es eee aM ar cleiele ei Siac oreo tae cree 280 AugiantCaliforniankpotatomvines eee aCe Eee ECE Cee EEE EOE EEE ECE eee een 281 Pawledus Chait. ah iags i saxsiece sv auaceies! versecten ake AYO ENC ee Eo icsteiee eres Oersser tererens 283 Hloodiscene Marion wAtk» March O03 hese einer ee ee eee erate eee 286 Camps of negro refugees, flood of March, 1903.. ..... ....--2+--+--- nadeapacendsyaod 288 Metrahedralikiteincthesain: 6c. cesoaie lorcet eee ee eee eee eceeienre 294 Diagram showing value of manufactures in ithe United States, r810-I900...............-. 303 Diagram showing increase in value of manufactures, I810-1900...............---.---0+- 304 Diagram showing value of manufactures per capita, I810-1900.........-2-22-2 eee eee eee 304 Diagram showing value of manufactures in United States, I810-1900...............--+- 303 Diagram showing increase in value of manufactures, 1810-1840, and in each decade from 1840-1900 booorodoosdcenoggd0n[g aabaoDdagoOd0N DODDEOES KDOGDOD sODOLoOHONOGO Codes 304 List or ILLUsTRATIONS XI Page Diagram showing number of persons in each 1,000 engaged in manufacturing and agri. LIES MIO ZOTOOOM METI sana ne yey cle larl ote faiueatavert ehatalsteieieretste eseoieiee salsisiale sic teal eteleves esi oelelapatetels 305 Diagram showing total number of persons engaged in manufactures and agriculture, RES HECLIVE yap a7, OU QOO Peeper ACT ies sieliiciare etavel Srelcul svc niet ebera ove ovarni ened cl ste yateretlavaia acsiMleriyera Siaveltets 305 Diagram showing value of products of manufacture and agriculture, respectively, 1870-1900. 306 Diagram showing value of manufactures exported, 1800-1902........--...0.02-22000+ 306 Diagram showing per cent which manufactures formed of imports and exports, 1820-1902. 307 Diagram showing distribution of exports of manufactures in Ig0I........ ..-.--. -.--e- 308 Diagram showing value of manufacturers’ raw material imported and per cent which it forme diofetotalumportsy 1820-1902 fev.) .yoretei-reicieieis lel ais ei eteie el areieia sicieiieon elaine lal) eel 309 Diagram showing relative value of manufacturers’ material and all other importations, TRBO=T1C CA, 9. db6-4 bad EO ORO SEES HOOT toe CR BER CR nO CG ei TaC ae SCE anette nEonc Meine 309 Diagram showing growth of exports of domestic products and share which manufactures Horie dsoteth atatotal MT S7O—lOOTevaiaclcvearecnlncs ne send are ierereles eter eloael scala loge creda naka 310 Diagram showing total value of manufactures exported, 1870-1901, and the share which Motikandestee lb formedtotthatitotalery: rey iete seks cise ay eel slelel eee oles arctaervo ieee eieterelete se = 311 Diagram showing exports of manufactures of iron and steel, 1870-Ig0I ...............-- 311 Diagram showing progress in the principal manufacturing industries, 1870-I90I.... .... 312 Diagram showing value of manufactures in France, Germany, United Kingdom, and (havi! Shemnas, idshtoy aisle), sitstslsy atsley ou booocuddoumeonalaeceueuodauoooda ooaeeoobduas 313 Diagram showing growth of manufactures in France, Germany, United Kingdom, and United States, 1840-1894.......... Ss Vovadaisasvehsusveeh avail aston SN alae ep Rud ch ey nee apa te Laage Sikes CaM ee 314 Diagram showing coal production of Germany, United Kenedoat Bad United States, 1875-Ig0l..... J GUTOR DOD EBOCA SCOR ORD Sbtie RAB OS ECO COMO SRT DS TAREE Docks OUI arS CannErSn 315 Diagram showing relative growth in coal production in Germany, the United Kingdom, the United States, and all other countries, I870-Ig01......... ccc eeee eee tte e eee 316 Diagram showing pig-iron production of Germany, United Kingdom, and United States, TSU FAC Cibo dacs bd bHe COCA OCOD ACO FICO CS IRD CCR CB EIC ROE aS In CAZES DOE cen 317 Diagram showing steel production of Germany, United Kingdom, and the United States, LFATCCG ova o GOP O OOS HOE CH OUHOG ONO STDC STO a Ory oe RR CEETIES 5 ct oRr tr ei Semeur PERE Let 317 Diagram showing copper production of Germany, Spain, Japan, and the United States, TARR Chisy ao yok DOO a RUG HOMO D OO DOO RO OCOO UBS CUCBUSE GAAS RAR acer RE nee SEIN HORE 318 Diagram showing cotton production of the world, 1902.........0..... 0200-2 e ee cee eee ees 318 Diagram showing miles of railway in the United Statesand Europe, 1850, 1870, 1880, 1902. 319 Grove of mango trees, between Cabo Rojo and Joyua, P. R....... 6. eee eee cee eee eee 321 Branch of mango tree with fruit, Tapachula, Mexico...... ...........02-.-22- (ee ee sees 323 Manrotriit; showing) method of packing 35.5 <1) eine lle) olnyareln ese oles elass «iasoreioo eraie)« paon, eee LL 2ine@ Merde (MINED) Scag eoandeoci.osd codmodepanodonenoRanoed pete MPa seth a i Pe ca lefayel cast 326 Mango fruit, showing method of peeling (matural size). ........ 0.0.00... eee eee ee 326 Congratulatory letter to Robert E. Peary from Peary Arctic Club. Map... ............ 330 Posts from the planting of 1890, Yaggy plantation.................-. 02. eee cee eee 1.2 349 Trees which were not cut back when young—planting of 1891 . .......-.....+2 0.05200. 350 Wood of the hardy Catalpa after lying ninety years in water . ...........-.--- +0000 351 A twenty-year old plantation of hardy Catalpa, southern Iowa....... .........--+-0005- 352 Outline map showing ratio of total insane per 100,000 population, Census 1880. ........ 362 Outline map showing number population for each insane person, Census 1880.. .... .... 363 Outline map showing location of cities having a population of 50,000 or more, Census 1890. 367 Outline map showing ratio of total insane per 100,000 population, Census 1890........... 368 Outline map showing white insane only, Census 1880. ........2.. 00 eee eee eee eee tenes 375 Outline map showing number colored population for each colored insane, Census 1880 ... 376 The cross-section of a Giant Sequoia............ .. Pa niceic anor doi ee Geol ine rine rots 383, SRNR SEMEL STOO SMAN e111 EES CC LLOL EAs ofa afe njsiaa talss clace eae; cis ct epsve faye nioorol Sie cieiey ave la sioxerie ole) =jeioichegne sists 385 XII Tue NationaL GrocraPHic MaGAZINE ‘ Page Guillemot eggs—St Paul Island, Pribiloff group.......... ........-- rye eiaie 3 Lisstsy atc ae 387 Skull and tusks of the imperial mammoth discovered in the sands of western Texas ..... 389 Panorama of the Wrangell Mountains (414 x 42 inches)..........-.-.....--- _... Frontispiece Mount Wrangell..... avian Honoenoepode moe i afiece aie apehela/eSlay ahSibysta a pve oh e Eee RRIE Sree ee By > Ra 397 Mount Drums y elses see meine colnet oe oe RA eamnREEo Pans mili monty Pos 3 bist en a ry AA 401 Snider’s Peak, as seen from the west............ ..22...---20-- cece \ epee se nae eae 404 AU plantation) on Castillagrubber trees), 4-6 ee cee aee ee epee nec eae eee eee -. 408 Mnative tappingya) Castilla rubberitree:s 4-45 e ee eee en eee ee eee Eee eee ene eee 410 Native method of coagulating the milk of the rubber tree (4 fireetres) Bobo ohonwec de 34>0- 4It Clusters of ripe fruit of the Castilla rubber tree ..... Cb a ees oF eee eee AI2 Members of the Ziegler Polar Expedition.......... . PUN Ie iSeries tech: Eos aici: 414 Some of the dogs of the Ziegler Polar Expedition:.... ..............-. BASRA Veen soc AIS Avdeck:scene'onithe Amerika: 6 i4 ssc eco sacle seen ie eine ae an) ae 415 S. S. Amerika of the Ziegler Polar Expedition..............-...---- SSelebier pes nae eee 416 Embarking the Siberian ponies at Solombala, Siberia ....... ..-..--..0:--02-- eeeeeeee 4IT The new spine of Mont Pelée from the basin of the Lac des Palmistes.................. 422 The top of the new spine of Mont Pelée from the crater rim..................--...--... 423 Richard Urquhart: Goode ytd Solel ei aay, ote fer vas fa ep eneeyPeRev ss Fare ga 424 Surveying party crossing a river on an improvised raft............--2-.-.20----. 20000 437 Landing from an outrigger through the surf............ ..220..- ee eee eee ees eee ee 438 U. S. Coast and Geodetic steamer Pathinder.............. etic bit Jon Bu wialacian cee eee 439 Triangulation party starting out from Manila.....................-2. 2.20 ee eee eee scl e a AAO A. Panoramic view of Muir Glacier in May, 1903. ................ .2+- «-- Se AE Nea 442 B. Panoramic view of Muir Glacier in May, 1903. -......-...---..- 205 cece eee eee eee 443 Sketch map of Muir Inlet and front of Muir Glacier, showing positions of the ice front in TSGO)}andsin May}, T9O3 2): aye 24sec ys pessie ew pete aie wi ste aba e aS Ee RS ae oe erate alee oe le ari e era Fae 444 Picking grapes in) California’ 25. Sop Vi intsns (ic acre ni oveles Mic evel Nae OSLER altel eae et epee tear 446 Rickinparaisinigrapes inCaliforniayeeeee eee eee eeeee eae E eee eee ene eeee 447 Dyin oyseedlessiraisins in! Californiarere ee jose eee ee ee eRe eet teers teers 448 Stemming raisins in California.......... Seo aro melesacaer>,6 Bneaoels SAMBA IR SaS sac 449 Packing raisins in layers in California............ .......2..2-.-2---- Sooo a0 SEoR toa aa 25 450 The largest piece of carbon ever found. Actual SIZES Bhs ae a ene sosbogesocoosee coos: 453 Rrocessiof breaking, thelicarbons.jaepericha- ae- cise eee eee eee ee eee . 454 Carbon shown on opposite page as finally broken into pieces for drills..... .. SHED ROO: 455 Diamond (SAwANs.(ape.oh \eicle eg ony he ss oeeiel a ots es aI Geto ees ae iene ele eee aye UA hae ene es 456 An uncompleted section of the Panama Canal............-.....--20er eee eter nia 459 Canal cutting through massive basaltic rock..............--.-.2+-+-0+--- Ra dbo deras aoc 459 Panama Bay: The Island of Tobago, famous for its delicious pineapples................. 460 Washerwomen, Isthmus of Panama................ BRC sre Nn as ode sake ae cas 460 Panama : Interior of ruins of old cathedral...............2-.--.2 0-5 se eesees Fees 461 Panama: This tower alone remains to mark the site of the great city of the sixteenth GSMGPEGoos60 odnogous sosepabs soo soo QboOC CUM Pood oSSEncCCuS sac. cadoosl ssoupesasa4 461 A‘street Of Colom y ays se sg ho edo seS SAE Saleen rele aes OT ai ee ta 7a) steer 463 Colon : Driveway of Christofer Colon, the canal suburb.................-0.0.-22- eee eeee 463, Colon : Residence of the superintendent of the Panama Railway Company at the entrance (oy tin Op bartasete sty (ane ee a See EMER MARAE MORNE Puna oes na Son Jo oo aomOnNOee 465 Panama Bay: The Island of Naos, terminus of the "Baste miail Tine ery tiaeeia state 465 Houses of the vRalamancantindianss.iee eee cee eee mee eee eit ects 467 Typical vegetation of the Isthmus of Panama ............2......- 2 cece eee e eee eee 467 Wandin gon Botelyhobagoneerariaiccecaceciccenetre GS TSN EE Batata torrets ots overs 1 SACS} Scenes on the island of Botel Tobago, Formosa .. . ....... . ee see eee e cece eee eee eee 471 Y THE Y NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC \ MAGAZIN Vol, XIV JANUARY, 1903 CONTENTS THE WORK OF THE U.S. COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY, BY 0. H. TITTMANN, SUPERINTENDENT |. : JADE. BY S. E. EASTER. ILLUSTRATED SOME NOTES ON VENEZUELA. ILLUSTRATED A ‘ AN INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. ILLUSTRATED DR SVEN HEDIN. ILLUSTRATED PEARY ON THE NORTH POLE. ILLUSTRATED ' PLAN FOR CLIMBING MOUNT McKINLEY. BY ALFRED H, BROOKS AND D. L. REABURN. WITH MAP : WHAT THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT DOES TO PRO- MOTE AGRICULTURE .. ‘ IS GERMANY THE CAUSE OF DENMARK’ Ss REFUSAL TO SELL HER WEST INDIAN POSSESSIONS? . : ° GEOGRAPHIC NOTES . ‘ GEOGRAPHIC LITERATURE : . . : : : : . NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY . 44 MEMBERSHIP LIST NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY suceieisent Published for the National Geographic Society By McClure, Phillips & Co., of New York $2.50 a Year 25 Cents a Number Eatered at the Post-office in Washington, D. C., as Second-class Mail Matter. CT] xaonan, | GEOGRAE ke f i | : ae : _MAGAZINE _ “E 1ee - &_N ILLUSTRATED MONTHLY, ublished for” He | As Nationa, Grocrapuic Society, of Washing- ‘ton, D. C., by McCrurz, Pours & Co. ~ All communications should be addressed to the ~ - Managing Editor of the Narionar GEOGRAPHIC _ Magazine, Corcoran Building, Washington, D.C. .— - Business communications may also be addressed tom - McClure, Phillips & UO vat Le East awe St, ae _ New York City. | eo oe 25 CENTS A NUMBER; ae 50 A YEAR ‘ation Chiat HENRY GANNETT Chief Geographer, U.S. Geological Survey aie: Managing, Editor: GILBERT H. GROSVENOR : CS He VERS 3 ¥ z ¢ ree : Associate Editors ee aie - @ENERAL A.W: GREELY cei ; A ‘WILLIS L. ‘MOORE Chief Signal Officer, U. S. emg. Chief of the Weather Bureau, U. oh Sie ee, Depariment of BENS © wi moaee hein a y S50, TIPE MANE © oe eS nologist in , Bure 5 : ee a American Brnoleey: i ae td latte ons = s Coast pa (© HART MERRIAM tt” °. P. AUSTIN ete Spee -. Chief of the Biological Survey, U. Ss. Sarees Chief of ae \Purcau: SE ae Deparinent of Scheie bbe Sense ergot U. ip saber Lee RG oie eres DAVID T. DAY DAVID J, BILL I eer = ; Chief of the Divition of Mineral sat Assistant Secretary of Stale Momence A Resources, U.S. Dh La facet chad ee ELIZA RUHAMAH SCIDMORE_ See IDA M. TARBELL As? oe Pant ~ Author of ‘Java, the Sueded of the Cet ey Author” of “Life oF ebeteon. rake - Bast,” etc. Bie he pe AIC of Lincoln," eke. pe 2 CART, DOUIBE: GARRISON > MARCUS BAKER. ae z trans U.S. Geological Survey ee oe. reas ee cog ‘Schoo, of, Wash Sa WASHINGTON, D.C. Wor XIV; No. 1 a mae U.S. COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY~* By O. H. Tirtmann, IVE years from now the Coast and KF Geodetic Survey may celebrate the centenary of the act creat- ing it, for it was in 1807 that Congress passed ‘‘An act for surveying the coasts of the United States.’’ The President was authorized and requested to cause a survey to be taken of the coasts of the United States, in which shall be desig- nated the islands, shoals, with the roads and places of anchorage within 20 leagues of any part of the shores of the United States, and also the respective courses and distances between the prin- cipal headlands, together with such other matters as he may deem proper for completing an accurate chart of every part of the coasts within the ex- tent aforesaid. He was also to cause such examinations and observations to be made with respect to Saint Georges Bank and any other bank or shoal and the soundings and currents beyond the distance aforesaid to the Gulf Stream as in his opinion may be especially sub- servient to the commercial interests of the United States. To Professor Patterson, of Philadel- phia, is due the credit of having urged the undertaking, and to President Jef- *An address before the National Geographic Society, WASHINGTON GEOGIRAIPIENIC MAGAZINE, JANUARY, 1903 Bu SUPERINTENDENT ferson and Secretary Gallatin of having interested themselves and given their support to the suggestion of Professor Patterson. In 1807 the coasts of the United States extended from the eastern bound- ary of Maine to the northern boundary of Florida, for the latter still belonged to Spain. The coast of Louisiana be- tween the Sabine and the Mississippi had recently been acquired, and gave to the United States a small, if impor- tant, strip of coast onthe Gulf. These, then, were the coasts which at that time were deemed needful to be surveyed in the interests of commerce. Not that no charts existed of the regions in ques- tion; Des Barres, His British Majesty’s Surveyor General for the Colonies, had begun the good work, which was inter- rupted by the War of the Revolution, but at best the results of his surveys were meager, insufficient, and inaccu- rate. ITS INCEPTION may be worth while to call atten- tion to and to dwell for a moment on e unusual but eminently practical and s nsible measures that were taken to November 21, 1902. 2; Tue Nationa GrocraPpHic MaGAZzINne bring the Survey into existence after it had been authorized by Congress. Mr Gallatin’s first step was to invite the opinion of scientific men as to the plans to be adopted, in a circular setting forth the objects to be attained. ‘Thir- teen replies were received, and these were referred to a committee of the American Philosophical Society, which recommended the adoption of the plan submitted by Mr Hassler. We shall presently see that 36 years later another committee of learned men, called to- gether to reorganize the Survey, affirmed and adopted the scientific methods of Hassler and adapted them to the larger work devolved on the Survey by the extension of our domain. It thus hap- pens that in the case of the Coast Survey the most competent authorities of the times were consulted to prescribe the principles on which the work was to be carried out. This later generation of men may well be thankful for the pre- vision of the two statesmen who gave direction to the work, and for the wis- dom of those who conceived in those early days the broad lines on which the work was to be conducted; for though the methods have been modified, changed, and perfected, the principles then prescribed have guided the Survey ever since. THE NEED FOR A COAST SURVEY The problem before the Survey was to perform a national as well as an in- ternational duty. It behooves every country, in the interests of humanity, to safeguard the lives and property which are continually at stake on the great highways of commerce along the shores of the oceans; and the first step toward the fulfillment of this obligation is to map the coasts and chart the waters, in order that the mariner may have before him a graphic guide of the routes he must follow to insure the safety of the lives and property committed to his charge. The high seas claim their victims through fogs and storms and collisions, but to the experienced navi- gator the open ocean is a place of safety, while a proximity to the coasts, even where surveys and light-houses have minimized the risks, inspires feelings of grave responsibility and even of dread of hidden dangers, of unknown cur- rents, and of collisions where busy commerce concentrates in narrowing lines the coming and departing ships. Mr Hassler, whose plan was adopted, was a Swiss by birth, a man of great learning and well qualified by experi- ence to outline the scientific principles on which an extended survey was to be conducted. Histask was a difficult one, . for neither men trained in the profession nor instruments were to be had in our country, nor was there a common ap- preciation of the importance of the work at that time. He went to England in 1811 to procure instruments, but the war with that country deferred the ac- complishment of his purpose. It was not until 1816 that he was appointed Superintendent, and though he immedi- ately began his operations with vigor they were cut short by the practical abolition of the Survey two years later through the revocation of the authority to employ civilians on the work. Its connection with the Treasury Depart- ment ceased, and the country became dependent for its charts on the private enterprise of the Messrs Blunt, of New York, and on fitful and unsystematic surveys made under the Navy Depart- ment. On the recommendation of the Secretary of the Navy the original act of 1807 was revived and the Survey was resumed in 1832 under Mr Hassler’s di- rection, and it was again placed under the Secretary of the Treasury, only, however, to be retransferred to the Navy in 1834. ‘This arrangement again proved to be unsatisfactory, and in 1836 the Survey was finally placed under the Treasury Department. Tue U. S. Coast anp Gropetic Survey g Suggestions for changing its status were again made, and its condition of apparent unstable equilibrium prompted Congress to take the matter in hand. Reference has already been made toa committee which was appointed by act of Congress in 1843 to reorganize the Survey. It consisted of six commis- sioned officers—that is, two officers of the Navy, four of the U. S. Topograph- ical Engineers, all experienced in the work of the Survey, and three civilians. The act of Congress provided that the work should be conducted in accordance with the plan of reorganization of this committee, but prescribed that as many army and navy officers should be em- ployed upon the work as would be com- patible with the successful prosecution of the work. At the same time the committee made the following recommendation : “« Resolved, ‘That inasmuch as the ob- ject and purpose of the survey of the coast refers principally to the commer- cial interests of the country, and as all the laws of Congress in relation to the same contemplate the employment of civilians and officers of the army and navy upon said work, it is the opinion of this board, and they do hereby re- spectfully recommend, that it should be under the control and considered a part of the Treasury Department.”’ The President’s formal approval of the plan of reorganization and of the recommendation just recited placed the Survey under the Treasury Department, where it has remained ever since. Before describing its present organi- zation, it must be explained why the original one was gradually modified by the withdrawal of army and navy officers from participation in its work. During the Mexican war the with- drawal of all the navy officers was threatened, and nearly all the army offi- cers were withdrawn. At the outbreak of the civil war in 1861 all army and navy officers were withdrawn and the connection of the Army with the Survey ceased altogether. The navy officers. did not return until about 1870, but as the needs of the country required the continuation of the Survey, its execu- tion was entrusted entirely to civilians during these years. At the outbreak of the Spanish war the progress of the Survey was again endangered by the sudden withdrawal of all the navy officers and enlisted men of the navy. With the concurrence of the Secretary of the Navy, Congress made provision to put the Survey onan entirely civil basis. Its present organi- zation may be described as follows: PRESENT ORGANIZATION The head of the Survey, called the Superintendent, reports to the Secretary of the Treasury. The Superintendent is charged with full responsibility in every respect for all the work of the Bureau. He is aided in such of his duties as cannot be delegated to officers of lower rank in the organization, by an Assistant Superintendent, who acts as Superintendent in his absence. Hight officers or groups of officers re- port directly to the Superintendent and Assistant Superintendent, viz: The assistant in charge of the office. The inspector of hydrography and topography. Inspector of geodetic work. Inspector of magnetic work. The disbursing officer. Editor. Chiefs of field parties. Heads of suboffices. The first four of these officers have a general supervision over all the opera- tions of the Survey indicated by their designation, each acting as an advisory officer to the Superintendent in regard to the specified portions of the work. The chiefs of field parties and the heads of suboffices have direct charge of all operations in the field. f 4 Tue NarronaL GrocrapHic MaGAZzinE Each field party is a temporary or- ganization which is created for a specific operation by an order of the Superin- tendent, which makes one of the officers of the field force the chief of party, and if necessary assigns to him as subordi- nates one or more other officers from the same force. ‘The party is disbanded when the work assigned to it has been completed. If the party is for duty on land, the remainder of the organization of the party, the hiring of recorders, laborers, drivers, etc., is left entirely to the chief of party. If the party is for duty on a vessel, the assignment of an officer of the field force to command the vessel carries with it necessarily the command of the whole force on board the vessel, including watch and deck- officers as well as crew. Congress has provided for over roo field officers, of which number about 77 are subject to ship or shore duty, and are also subject to office duty between field seasons, while about 30 are mainly engaged in hydrographic surveying and ship duty. The Survey has its own fleet of twelve steamers and six sailing vessels, aside from launches and other small craft. There are at present two suboffices, each in charge of a field officer report- ing directly to the Superintendent, viz., at San Francisco, California, and Ma- nila, Philippine Islands. The purpose of these suboffices is to aid in the prompt dissemination of information, to serve as storage depots, and to save traveling expenses by providing points at which the field officers may be temporarily as- signed to office duty between the seasons. At the Manila suboffice the publication of preliminary charts is authorized. DUTIES OF THE OFFICE FORCE The inspector of hydrography and topography, reporting directly to the Superintendent, has general supervision over the classes of field work indicated by his title, places before the Superin- tendent plans for such work, makes the necessary inspection in the field to insure that the Superintendent’s orders are car- ried out economically and effectively, and is especially charged with the super- vision of all matters relating to the ships and their personnel. The Coast Pilot, a publication in several volumes, giving full description of the coast from the mariner’s point of view, sailing direc- tions, warnings as to dangers to navi- gation, and other information of special value to navigators, is prepared under his direction. The inspector of geodetic work, re- porting to the Superintendent, is charged with the duty of preparing plans for the ‘field operations of triangulation, astro- nomical determinations and precise leveling, and of making inspections of parties in the field, and of records and correspondence received at the office from field parties, with a view of insuring that the field operations are in accord- ance with the Superintendent’s orders, are of the desired degree of accuracy, and are efficient and economical. The inspector of magnetic work, re- porting to the Superintendent, is charged with similar duties in regard to the mag- netic work of the Survey. The assistant in charge of the office, reporting to the Superintendent, super- vises the work of the office at Washing- ton, is charged with the disbursement of all moneys allotted for that office, is responsible for the safety and arrange- ment of archives and property, and receives all money paid to the Survey for charts and other publications. As the official head of the office, the chiefs of the following divisions of the office force report to him: Computing Divis- ion, Magnetic Division, Tidal Divis- ion, Drawing and Engraving Division, Chart Division, Library and Archives Division, Instrument Division, and Mis- cellaneous Division. Each of these di- visions, under the direction of the assist- Tue U. S. Coast anp GEoDETIC SURVEY 5 ant in charge of the office, prepares replies for the Superintendent’s signa- ture to such parts of the correspondence as falls within its particular field, and also furnishes such information and equipment to field parties as it is within their power to furnish. In the computing division all com- putations in connection with triangula- tion, astronomical determinations, and precise leveling are made, appropriate registers of results are kept, and the results prepared for publication as rap- idly as possible. The magnetic division and the tidal division deal similarly with the compu- tations and publications of magnetic and tidal results respectively. The drawing and engraving division is divided into five sections : The photographing section, engaged in reducing, enlarging, and reproducing drawings for various purposes. The drawing section, engaged in mak- ing from the original topographical and hydrographical field sheets the office drawings, which are the original from which charts are produced, either by engraving on copper or by photolithog- raphy. The engraving section, engaged in copper-plate engraving. The electrotype section, engaged in producing from the original engraved copper plates by electrotype process the copper plates actually used in printing the charts. The printing section, engaged in printing charts from the copper plates (the lithograph printing is done by con- tract outside of the organization). The chart division is divided into two sections. The hydrographic section is engaged in completing unfinished hy- drographic sheets sent in from the field, in the correction of charts, especially with reference to aids to navigation (lights, buoys, etc.), preparation of monthly Notices to Mariners in regard to this matter, and the inspection of charts in their various stages of prepa- ration. The chart section is engaged in applying such hand corrections to charts at the last opportunity before issuing as has become necessary on ac- count of such changes, principally in aids to navigation, as have taken place after the chart was printed, and with the clerical work connected with the issue and sale of charts. The library and archives division has charge of the library of the Survey and the archives in which all hydrographic and topographic sheets and all the original records and computations are stored. The instrument division has charge of all the instruments and general prop- erty. Many of the best of the new in- struments for the Survey are designed and made in this division, and it is con- tinually engaged in repairing and re- modeling necessary to keep the instru- ment outfit at a high standard of effi- ciency. The miscellaneous division is charged with the purchase and distribution of all supplies required for use in the office and of such supplies as are furnished to field parties on requisition ; also with the making of requisitions for printing and binding, the custody of blank forms, stationery, etc., and the distribution of the reports of the Superintendent and of all other publications of this Bureau, with the exception of charts. As already noted, the accounting di- vision, at the head of which is the dis- bursing officer, is not a division of the office in the sense of reporting to the assistant in charge of the office. The disbursing officer makes all disburse- ments on account of the Survey, with the approval of the Superintendent ; renders a monthly account of all dis- bursements to the Auditor for the Treas- ury Department for audit by him, ren- ders a statement of expenditures and balances to the Superintendent when- ever required to do so, suspends returns 6 Tue NationaL GrocRAPHiIc MAGAZINE for correction, or disallows, under the Superintendent’s direction, all items of expenditures irregular in form or in con- travention of law or regulations, and refers to the Comptroller of the Treas- ury for decision all questions of law in- volving a payment to be made by him. The editor, reporting to the Superin- tendent, compiles the administrative part of the annual report and acts as editor in connection with all other pub- lications of the Survey except the charts. THE EXTENSION OF FIELD WORK The acquisition of Florida and Oregon in 1819 and of Texas and California soon after the reorganization of the Survey before described vastly extended the operations, and in view of the de- .sirability of connecting the surveys of the Pacific and Atlantic coasts, a trans- continental triangulation was authorized in 1871. Hight years later, in recogni- tion of one of its functions, the name of the organization was changed to a of Coast ‘and ‘Geodetic Survey. When Alaska was purchased in Tera the charting of its vast and intricate shore line was added to the duties of the Survey, and still more recently, in con- formity with and in pursuance of the established policy, its labors were ex- tended, to use the phraseology of the law, to all ‘‘ the coasts under the juris- diction of the United States,’’ in order to include Porto Rico, Hawaii, Guam, the Samoan Islands, and the Philippines. The plan of reorganization contem- plated a chain of triangles along the coasts which should unite and coordi- nate all the localsurveys. Astronomical observations were to fix the geographical . position of the triangulation, and the differences of longitude between some of principal stations and Europe were to ke determined. The topography was to be carried in- land as far as would subserve the pur- poses of commerce and defense, and, resting upon the data thus obtained, soundings were to be made along the shores and seaward to insure the safety of commerce. Such was the simple scheme, but there were inherent in it certain requirements for the accomplish- ment of which extended researches in many branches of science were needed, and there were inherent in it also possi- bilities for greater usefulness to the na- . tion and the world than the mere attain- ment of the immediate objects sought. It was foreseen that the triangulation if carried out with sufficient care would ultimately form the basis of a national trigonometric survey. [he great ex- _ tent of territory to be covered indicated that the triangulation would be used to determine the size and figure of the earth, which is the ultimate base of di- mensional astronomy. ‘The need of compasses on the charts compelled the determination of at least one of the elements of the earth’s magnetism and astudy of the law of its variation. The rise and fall of tides required observa- tions along the coasts which would dis- close the law of their periodicity in order that predictions could be made long in advance; a needful regard to bench- marks to which the tides were referred would betray the subsidence or rise of the land. Observations on tidal and ocean currents were needful to supple- ment the other information on the charts. The determination of astro- nomical positions required the perfec- tion of existing star places, and thus practical astronomy was stimulated, and when the importance of the geodetic function of the Survey was recognized by law, the pendulum, by means of which the figure of the earth can be determined, was employed in gravity research. Deep-sea soundings and incidental physical observations and dredgings contributed no little to our knowledge of marine life. Tue U.S. Coast anp GEopDETIC SURVEY 7 WORK DONE BY THE SURVEY What the Survey has accomplished in the 70 years of its active existence may be broadly stated as follows: It has carefully mapped about 30,000 miles of topography and sounded out minutely nearly 300,000 square miles of water, while its deep-sea soundings cover a little less than a million square miles. The results of this work are shown on about 500 charts of unrivaled accuracy and beauty. But it must not be forgotten that its energies have been largely devoted to resurveys required by the constantly shifting bottoms of our southern shores. Bearing this fact in mind, it may be stated that is has completed a first survey of the Atlantic, Gulf, and Pacific coasts of the United States. It has observed tides at thou- sands of stations, and publishes annually in advance predictions not only for our own coasts, but for all the ports of the world to which our shipping is likely to go. It has covered an area of between three hundred thousand and four hun- dred thousand square miles with its net- work of triangulation, and has incident- ally completed the measurement of an arc of the parallel traversing our country from ocean to ocean, and has meastired an oblique are extending from Maine to Louisiana. It has run many thousand miles of precise levels. It has determined transatlantic longi- tudes and covered the country with a homogeneous system of astronomically determined points. It has taken an active part in the delimitation of na- tional and state boundaries. It has undertaken the study of the law of the earth’s magnetism, and made observations for determining the decli- nation, dip, and intensity at many sta- tions throughout our domain. It has published and maintains Coast Pilot volumes of the Atlantic and Pacific coasts and parts of Alaska. In regard to the present activity of the Survey,afew words will prove of interest. The completion of the transcontinental triangulation and that of the oblique are has rendered it possible to adopt a single system of geographic coordinates for all points in this country which have been trigonometrically determined, and the office is engaged in the great and useful task of making the computations and preparing them for publication. Coop- eration between the Lake Survey and the Coast Survey has resulted in the adoption by the former of the same sys- tem, and the necessary computations to bring about this unification have been made. At the same time, a comprehen- sive investigation of the deflections of the plumb-line throughout the area cov- ered by the triangulation is in progress, and one of its immediate results will be to guide the Survey in making future . gravity researches. A few years ago Congress authorized, by increased appropriation and legisla- tion, the extension of the magnetic sur- vey of the country. Magnetic observa- tories, equipped with the most modern and economical appliances, are being maintained—one in Maryland, one in Kansas, one at Sitka, Alaska, and one in Hawaii. ‘These observatories, at the formal request of the German govern- ment, are cooperating, in common with others under foreign governments, with the German and British South Polar Expeditions by making simultaneous observations. At the American observ- atories the magnetic instruments record photographically day and night the changes of the magnetic forces. Rapid progress has been made in the accumu- lation of magnetic data, their discussion, and publication. Meridian lines to aid surveyors are being established at or near county seats of the several states. ‘There has just been issued a comprehen- sive volume of declination tables and isogonic charts. As a member of the International 8 Tue Nationa GrocrapHic MAGAZINE Geodetic Association, the Coast and Geo- detic Survey supervises the maintenance of two astronomical observatories estab- lished exclusively for the purpose of observing the variation of latitude. The Tidal Division has made good progress not alone in the reduction of tidal observations and in the publica- tion of predictions, but has devoted at- tention to the theoretical investigations needful in this important and difficult branch of applied science. The Coast Pilot Division issued last year a new Coast Pilot of Southeastern Alaska. It has in preparation another volume of the Pacific coast from San Diego to Puget Sound, and has just completed, in the field, an examination .. of the coast from Eastport to Point Judith. The triangulation along the g8th meridian is progressing with remarka- ble rapidity in consequence of carefully devised plans, which prescribed the method to be followed along efficient and economical lines without any sacri- fice of accuracy. During the last season an axial distance of about 400 miles was measured, which in itself constitutes an are of no mean extent. Speed trial courses based on the tri- angulation of the Survey have been laid out in various localities at the re- quest of the Navy Department. At the request of the states of Penn- sylvania and Maryland, a remarking of Mason and Dixon’s line has been un- dertaken by the Survey in cooperation with commissioners from those states, and the work is nearly finished. Two officers of the Survey were ap- pointed by the United States Supreme Court to take part in the remarking of the disputed boundary between Virginia and ‘Tennessee, and this work has reached a conclusion. The work of determining trigonomet- rically light-houses and beacons along the coasts of Maine and Massachusetts erected or rebuilt since the original tri- angulation was made, and elsewhere, was taken up and a junction was made between the secondary coast triangula- tion near Beaufort, South Carolina, and the oblique are near the northeastern corner of Georgia. Revisionary hydrographic surveys were made in Nantucket Sound, in New York Bay and in the Chesapeake Bay and its tributaries, as well as on the Gulf coast, and new hydrographic develop- ments were made on the coasts of Porto Rico. PORTO RICO In the survey of that island great progress has been made. ‘The entire shoreline of Porto Rico, Vieques, and Culebra Islands has been mapped. A triangulation extending from Mona Is- land on the west to St Thomas on the east has been made. It encircles the island of Porto Rico and traverses it in the direction from San Juan to Ponce. Surveys of all the ports have been made and are either published or in process of publication. A corrected general chart of Porto Rico and adjacent waters em- bodying all the work done has been en- graved on copper and isin the printer’s hands, anda series of 4 charts on a scale of I : 100,000 is rapidly being prepared and two of these will soon be issued. Tidal and magnetic observations have been made at numerous points. The harbor charts which have been pub- lished or which are about to appear are those of San Juan, Fajardo, Culebra, Port Mulas, Bahia Honda, Ponce, Guy- anilla, Guanica, and Mayaguez. The hydrography of by far the greater part of the south coast has been finished, and great progress has been made on the west coast, but more especially on the east coast, which is the scene of the coming naval maneuvers. ‘There an area of no less than 400 square miles has to be sounded out with minute accu- racy, owing to the importance of the locality and the irregularities of the Jape 9 bottom which accompany coral forma- tions. ALASKA In Alaska, Cross Sound and Icy Straits have been surveyed and much work has been accomplished in Prince William Sound, which promises to become one of the most important regions commer- cially in Alaska. During the last sea- son two survey vessels were at work in that Sound. A chart of Fox Island Passes and the dangerous region of the Sannak Islands has been published. One of the surveying vessels was em- ployed in a chronometric longitude ex- pedition to determine respectively the geographical positions of the eastern end of St Lawrence and the western end of Nunivak Islands, and a success- ful termination of the expedition has been announced. IN THE PHILIPPINES In the Philippines most gratifying pro- gress has been made under the direction of Mr. George R. Putnam, a gifted and energetic officer of the Survey. An office was established at Manila, and it was organized to publish the prelimin- ary results of the work accomplished with the least possible delay. The sub-office at Manila has published over thirty charts, many of them orig- inal surveys. It has availed itself of the facilities afforded by the cable and telegraph lines recently established and has determined the telegraphic longi- tude of the principal ports of the archi- pelago. Tidal and magnetic observa- tions have been made and sailing direc- tions have been printed in pamphlet form in addition to the continued issue of Notices to Mariners which were given to the public with great expedition. A small ship called the Research was pro- vided by the island authorities for the use of the survey, and a larger vessel has been actively engaged there for over a year. JADE By S. E. EasTer ADE, which has been found in every part of the world—China, Burma, New Zealand, Alaska, Mexico, and central Europe—is the best illustration of the universal passion of all primitive peoples for the possession of green stones. From pre- historic times to the last looting of Peking, jade has been a treasure most highly prized and eagerly sought. ‘The most famous quarries of jade are those of the Karakash Valley, in Chinese Turkestan, from which the chief sup- plies of the Chinese Emperors were drawn. Much confusion has arisen from the too general application of the term ‘“jade’’ to kindred mineral substances, such as saussurite, chloromelanite, pec- tolite, serpentine, and fibrolite or silli- manite, and Dr Fischer has collected one hundred and fifty specimens of stones carelessly called jade. Properly speaking, jade only includes zephrite, a variety of amphibole, and jadeite, one of the pyroxene group. Nephrite, which occurs more fre- quently than jadeite,and the best-known quarries of which are those of Chinese Turkestan, is, according to Dana, a tough, compact, fine-grained tremolite (or, in green specimens, actinolite), breaking with a splintery fracture and glistening luster. Its specific gravity is 1O 2.96-3.1, and it varies in color from wax white, cream white, green white, green- ish gray to pale green, passing through many gradations to the very darkest green, in which variety iron protoxide 1s present up to 6 or 7 per cent. Jadeite, which occurs in the Mogoung District, in Upper Burma, and in the Province of Yun-nan, China, is essen- tially a metasilicate of sodium and alu- minium and has a specific gravity of 3-33-3-35 and a hardness of 6.5-7. Its luster is subvitreous and its fracture splintery, while in color it varies even more than nephrite. It may be gray green, bluish green, bluish gray, clear gray, orange yellow, smoky green, passing to black (the latter resembling the nephrite of Siberia), smoky white, - white with green tints and splotches, and apple green; also, but rarely, vio- let and mauve. All the green tints are, as arule, much brighter than those of nephrite. ‘The so-called ‘‘ jewel jade,”’ the Chinese fez ¢siz (kingfisher—feather color), is jadeite of an intense emerald hue. Itisseldom found, and then gener- ally in thin veins and often much flawed. Itis said to be harder than ordinary jade- ite. Much of it is taken to Canton, where it is converted into jewelry. In earlier times, this apple-green jade was not so highly valued as the darker olive shades, while the Emperors of the Ming Dynasty (1368-1664) esteemed pale bluish-green specimens above all others, and white next held imperial and Manchu fancy. Both nephrite and jadeite have a waxy, Oily surface and take a high polish in the hands of oriental artisans. When modern European machinery is used, a dazzling, mirror-like surface is obtained. Though generally opaque or translucent, there is a very rare variety known as ‘‘camphor jade,’’ from its appearance, which resembles a much- flawed crystal, and is actually transpar- ent in spots. Under the name of “oceanic jade,’’ Damour describes a ) Tue Nationa, GeocrarpHic MaAGaziIne variety found in New Caledonia and the Marquesas Islands, ‘‘ which pos- sesses a somewhat silky luster, due to exceedingly delicate fibers which tray- erse the mass, and which has a specific gravity of 3.18.”’ Collectors of jade objects of the pres- ent day have given much attention to distinguishing, by means of the scien- tific tests of specific gravity, analysis, and microscopical examination, be- tween true nephrite and jadeite and the numerous substances which, so far as outward appearances go, resemble them. The common and predominant charac- teristic of all the stones to which the name jade from time to time has been applied is their tenacity. Their com- pactness of texture and extreme tough- ness recommended them in prehistoric times as the best materials from which to manufacture tools with sharp cutting edges. Since jade in its natural state was for a long time vainly sought in Europe, many scholars concluded that the jade implements found in the Swiss lake dwellings, or the materials from which they were made, must have been brought from the quarries in Turkestan. If, it was argued, jade were a product of the countries in which these imple- ments were found, how did it happen that it was never discovered by the races who succeeded the men of the Palzo- lithic Age? ‘There is no evidence of jade having been employed by the Greeks and Romans for any purpose, nor was it known in medizeval times. As it was only through its introduction from Mexico by the Spaniards that modern Europe was made aware of its existence, it was questioned whether Aryan wanderers could have brought these jade objects with them from the Kuenlun Mountains. Professor Max Muller asks: If the Aryan settlers could carry with them so ponderous a tool as their language, what is surprising in their having carried along, preserved from generation to generation, such JADE handy and valuable instruments as these jade celts? Lengthy discussions were waged as to how this ‘‘ venerable witness to the brotherhood and intercommunication of the human race’’ first found its way into Europe, and the famous ‘‘ nephrite question’’ long divided European sci- entists. By many it was insisted that jade implements were brought by migra- tory tribes from the cradle of their race in Asia, the perfect fitness of the mate- rial to the uses to which it was put, as well as the inherent preciousness of the stone, rendering such instruments of sufficient value to be prized and pre- served throughout the many genera- tions who lived and died ere the long march ended. Other investigators held that jade celts, or the material for making them, were objects of actual commerce be- tween Europe and the Orient; but Sir John Lubbock considers it more prob- able that they were passed from hand to hand and tribe to tribe by a system of primeval barter. Asa parallel case, he cites theétumuli of the Mississippi Valley, where the same mound often contains copper from Lake Superior, mica from the Alleghanies, shells from the Gulf, and obsidian from Mexico. The discovery of jade implements in Swiss lake villages followed long after their occurrence in a stone tomb in Normandy, in caves in Brittany and at Mentone, in the tumulus of Mont St Michel, and in southern Italy. Schlie- mann found thirteen jade celts in the Tuins of ancient Troy. One of these celts and one other found in Crete are the only white celts so far found in Europe. ‘The British Museum possesses one Babylonian cylinder of jade, and also a gold necklace with a small jade celt as a pendant. Both faces of the pendant are occupied by Gnostic for- mula engraved in Greek characters. The formulze are cut in the outline of a wreath of fourteen leaves, the ends Il being tied together with four ribbons, oun which are engraved different combi- nations of the Greek vowels, while each leaf is emblazoned with a holy name. The other face of the celt is covered with an inscription in eight lines. This celt, which is supposed to have come from Alexandria and, judging from the character of the lettering, to date from the third or fourth century, is the only known specimen of jade bearing indis- putable marks of either Greek or Roman workmanship. It wasacelt originally, however, and not an object of Greek manufacture. There is no ancient name for jade in any European language. Its name is derived from the Spanish pzetra de hijada, ‘‘stone of the loins,’’ a refer- ence, doubtless, to the Aztec supersti- tion that jade was the surest protection against diseases of the loins. Jade has been known to the Chinese since the earliest times as )z, or ‘‘the gem.’’ ‘They class the different kinds of jade under seventy-seven heads, but for the mineral itself they have no dis- tinct, generic name. It is the typical precious stone, the gem. ‘Throughout every age they have attached an extra- ordinary value to it, comparing it to ““the subtle matter of the rainbow con- creted and fixed under the form of a stone,’’ and regarding it as the most beautiful substance in which human thought can embody itself. Confucius explained this by telling one of his dis- ciples that ‘‘in the eyes of wise men its polish and its brilliancy represent virtue and humanity, and its perfect compact- ness and extreme hardness the safe- guards of intelligence; the angles of jade, which, seeming sharp yet do not cut, represent justice ; the little buttons which hang from the hat or belt, as if about to fall, represent ceremony and politeness ; the sound—pure, sustained, and prolonged—which it gives forth when struck and which ceases suddenly, represents music ; the impossibility for 2 the bad shades to hide the beautiful, or the beautiful the bad, represents loyalty; the defects under the surface, yet ap- parent, represent sincerity ; its luster, like that of the rainbow, represents the firmament ; its wonderful material, ex- tracted from the mountains and waters, represents the earth; cut into Kuei or Chu, without other embellishment, it symbolizes virtue, and the price at which all the world values it symbolizes truth.”’ This passion for jade, the classic or poetic color of which is white in China, causes Chinese writers to use the word figuratively whenever they wish to in- Tue NationaL GrocraPHic MAGAZINE dicate anything very white, very pure, or very perfect. In the language of compliment no word of praise rises- above that which likens beauty to jade, and the loftiest thought, as well as the highest morality, are compared to it. References are constantly made to it in poetry, as in the Emperor Kien-lung’s. verse— “While the waning moon in the westward. hangs like an orb of jade.” The most ancient of the Chinese clas- sical books, the Shu King, or Book of Historical Documents, relating to the period B. C. 2357 to 627, mentions jade - } UKAKSHAL NW A : y' (e@/KHOLAN lj? Py e3es: (7), ~ 23760" 74 f 23210* ° 20 Scale of miles 40 60 80 100 Preliminary Survey Map of the Khotan Valley, Site of the Chinese Jade Mines. Dr M. A. Stein, H. M. Indian Educational Service. By Printed by Courtesy of Dr. M. A. Stein and Royal Geographical Society, London. Jape as one of the articles of tribute of the Province of Yung Kan, which embraced neatly all the present provinces of Shenhsi and Kan-su, and extended in- definitely northward to the desert. It is an old saying with the Chinese that ‘‘jadestonecomesfrom the Kuenlun Mountains, in the Province of Khotan,’’ and in the history of the T’ang Dynasty (618-906) reference is made to a yearly tribute of 500 pieces of jade sent to the Emperor by the king of that re- mS) Loose boulders of jade are often car- ried down by the force of the current in the Karakash and tributary streams, and they eventually become embedded in the soft clay banks or are deposited in the bed of the river. This ‘‘ water jade’’ is highly valued by the Chinese carvers, as its rough journey is a severe test of hidden flaws, which might other- wise cause the block to fall to pieces after much labor has already been ex. gion. Travelers describe the jade quarries as situated on the south face of the Kuenlun Mountains, in the main valley of the upper part of the Karakash River, south of the city of Khotan. They extend for a mile or more in length, and in this space are the entrances of at least a hundred tunnels which tiddle the mountain side in every direction, and in some cases pierce through the mountain to the fur- ther side. ‘The mineral is found in veins of varying thickness, in width from a few inches to ten feet, but so seamed and cracked as to make it difficult to find a piece even afewinchesthick which Eastern ‘Turkestan. is not badly flawed. Until the mid- dle of the last century China main- tained her authority over eastern Turkestan, including Yarkand and Khotan. The people, however, were Mohammedan, and in 1852 they suc- ceeded in throwing off the Chinese yoke by a general uprising, in which all the officials were massacred. ‘The jade workers, who were Chinese, probably fled from the quarries at this time and shared the fate of their countrymen. Their clothing, implements, and rem- nants of food were left in their haste, and were seen by Cayley when he vis- ited the quarries in 1871. Work has since been resumed, but too many of the expert carvers and workmen were killed during the rebellion for the industry to recover its former preéminence. After the Map of Dr M. A. Stein, Indian Educational Depart- ment. Geographical Society and Dr M. A. Stein. Reprinted by courtesy of the Royal pended on it. It is obtained either by digging the boulders out of the banks or by divers specially trained for the work. An inspector always accompa- nies these diving parties, whose duty it is to mark each lump as it is brought up, estimate its value, and finally ship the jade to Peking. Such pieces bring three times the price of quarried speci- mens of similar size and color. In many rivers of eastern Turkestan jade pebbles are found in abundance. The word ‘‘kash,’’ so often found in the names of rivers and places in this region, means ‘‘ jade’’ in Toorkee, and there seems little reason to doubt the 4 existence of the mineral along the whole of the Kuenlunrange. Much difficulty is experienced in tracing the veins, owing to the shifting sands. A huge dike of nephrite embedded in the rocky banks of the Raskemdaria, on the eastern slope of the Pamir, was an- other source from which the Chinese formerly drew large supplies of jade. They extracted it by lighting large fires on the rock and then throwing water on it when it became thoroughly heated. The rock was abandoned some years ago in consequence, it is said, of the illness of a member of the Imperial family, who was taken sick after having slept on a bed made of Raskem nephrite. A large block of the stone which was then on its way to Peking was putin chains and” thrown onthe roadside at Kutcha, where it still remains. It was from this ridge on the Raskemdaria that the monolithic tombstone of Tamerlane wascut. This famous tomb of darkest-green jade stands in a half-ruined mosque at Sam- arkand, and is 7 feet 8 inches long, 17 inches wide, 14 inches high, and weighs about 1,800 pounds. It is broken through the middle, but is well pol- ished, completely covered with inscrip- tions, and rests on a white marble base. In addition to this and the Karakash quarries, the Chinese also obtained jade from deposits in Yun-nan, Kan-su, Shen-se and Quang-se, and other prov- inces of China. Many mines through- out China are owned by private indi- viduals, who keep the existence of their quarries secret, fearing the extortions of the government. Jade has also been found in fair abund- ance on the shores of Lake Baikal, Si- beria. ‘The South Kensington Museum possesses a large, water-worn, well pol- ished boulder from this region, weigh- ing more than half a ton. The Chinese use the utmost care in carving jade. The workman having determined from the natural form of the block, and its visible and probable Tae Nationa GEoGraPHic MAGAZINE flaws, into what object he will carve it, fixes it on a lathe and gives it the gen- eral outline. The interior is then hol- lowed out by first drilling, with dia- mond-pointed needles, innumerable lit- tle holes all over the surface which is to be broken away. When this is com- pletely honeycombed the partitions are broken down by being sharply tapped with a hammer. ‘Too hard a tap might develop some hidden flaw and shatter the half-finished object. The piece is finally polished with corundum. The harder the stone and the more difficult the cutting, the more brilliant the polish it is capable of acquiring. It is claimed the jade is softer when freshly taken from the quarries. So great is the dif- ficulty of carving jade that an elaborate piece may represent a lifetime’s labor. In Kienlung’s ateliers, in the Summer Palace at Peking, the workmen suc- ceeded each other without interruption night and day. Even thenmany years were occupied in completing a single piece. Jade is becoming more and more appreciated as a material for interior decorative construction by the splendor- loving Russians. By cutting the stone into sections an eighth of an inch thick it is employed for the panelling of walls and chimney pieces, and even window panes—the translucent pieces showing the most exquisite shading and cloud- ing. European and American collections owe many of their finest specimens to the plunder taken from the Summer Palace in Peking in 1860, when the enor- mous collections of the Emperor of China were at the mercy of the French and British forces, who were ordered to burn and destroy all the buildings. The palace ateliers, having long been declining in activity and in the quality of their productions, had in a measure ceased jade-cutting a few years previous to the sacking of the Summer Palace, because the tribute of jade from the Jape Turkestan mines did not come to Peking during the Mohammedan rebellion. The imperial ateliers have not been maintained since 1860, but the treas- ures of jade again gathered at the Sum- mer Palace were promptly sold or sent home by the Russian, English, and Italian troops, who in turn occupied that demesne in 1900 and 1901. ‘The Winter Palace, the temples within the imperial inclosure, and the princes’ palaces, in Peking, yielded up an enor- mous treasure of jade in rg00, nearly all of which has found its way since to Europe and America. The uses to which jade has been put by the Chinese are almost endless. Discs of the stone, which when struck give forth a clear, resonant note, are used as temple gongs and musical instruments. Ritual vessels are made of it, and it is to this fact that Paléologue attributes the peculiar veneration in which the Chinese hold the stone. ‘Tablets in- scribed with sacred writings, bowls and vases of fantastic form and intricate de- sign, statuettes of Buddha, perfect alike in conception and execution, candelabra, boxes, pencil-holders and all the para- phernalia of the writing-table, as well as buckles, bracelets, rings, hooks, but- tons, and other ornaments, are all wrought with untiring patience and matchless skill from the same intract- able material. Carved works of jade seldom bear any marks such as are seen on porcelain, whereby a date is indt- cated. Sometimes objects are inscribed with a poem or quotation, which may afford some clue to the date. All such marks are comparatively rare, and the style of ornamentation is generally the only guide. Extreme simplicity of de- sign and purity of form characterize the earliest examples, while those of later periods are often marvels of fantastic and ornate decoration. The Chinese rarely embellish their jade carvings with other substances, possibly owing to their excessive admi- ns ration for the stone and the symbolism with which they surrounded it. The Hindus saw in jade, however, only a green background for encrustations of many-tinted gems and gold. It af- forded them opportunities for the dis- play of their cunning, as jewelers, to combine the softly shaded tones of the jade with rubies, diamonds, and other stones, as well as scarcely less brilliant enamel. As a material for artistic workmanship, jade was only known in India from the time of the Moguls, who encouraged its employ- ment unstintingly. The arts of cary- ing in frost-like open-work and of in- laying, which found such perfect ex- pression in the Taj Mahal, were lavished in miniature on jade cups, beetle-boxes, sword and dagger hilts, and turban or- naments, for which there was an unfail- ing demand at court. Work ofa less elaborate character was sometimes exe- cuted, and a large jadeite tortoise found in a water-tank at Allahabad is now in - the South Kensington Museum. It is bluish gray in color, highly polished, and nearly 20 inches long. Although mines of jadeite exist in Burma, the Hindus probably drew the greater part of their supply from central Asia, and much of that now sold by them as Yarkand jade is only chloromelanite and serpentine. When Captain Cook visited the mid- dle island of New Zealand the natives told him it was called Te Wahi Pounanu, or ‘‘the place of the green stone,’’ be- cause all of their much-valued green stones came from that island. In old atlases the island is still called Tavai Poenammo, a corruption of the native name. ‘The natives, like the primitive inhabitants of Europe, fashioned weap- ons called ‘‘Meri’’ from the coarser varieties. Like the celts of the Lake- dwellers, too, many of their implements show traces of having been formed by sawing. ‘There isa large block of New Zealand jade in the British Museum re- 16 taining the cutter’s grooves, and the New York Museum of Natural History contains a similar piece from a primitive Alaskanworkshop. Of the finer and more translucent specimens of jade the New Zealanders carved their ‘‘tiki.’’ These objects were worn about the neck, and are said by some to have been title deeds of land, as well as venerated charms and symbols of ancestor worship. There is a grotesque figure of New Zealand jade in the British Museum which was evi- dently carved with much care. The eyes are inlaid in mother-of-pearl. Jade implements, chiefly celts. have been found along the entire coast of British Columbia and Alaska from the Straits of Fuca to the Arctic Sea, and arrow-heads have been brought from the Arctic coast of both Alaska and Siberia. Such stone implements were highly valued by the Indians, who in some cases still preserve them, although they no longer use them. The majority of jade celts which owe their origin to this region have been discovered in In- dian graves, in shell heaps, and on the sites of former villages. Whether the jade thus employed was brought from Asia or found on the spot was for a long time an open question. The discovery of the mineral 77 szfw in the vicinity of the Fraser River and in rolled pieces on the Lewes branch of the Yukon has placed its origin beyond dispute. Jade was known to the Aztecs as the ‘divine stone,’’ and was valued next to the emerald, with which it was often confused by the early Spaniards. Asa religious symbol, it was placed on the altars. It was carved by the Aztecs in the form of parrots’ heads, fish, etc., and worn as a charm against kidney troubles and epilepsy. ‘This supersti- tious esteem for the medicinal qualities of the stone was carried to Europe by the Spaniards, and at one time there existed jade merchants in Paris who sold medals of jade as a remedy for these diseases. [he Aztecs also carved Tue Nationa GEoGrRaPHic MAGAZINE masks from jade, which were used in the temples to cover the face of the most illustrious of the gods when the King fell itl, They did not remove them until the recovery or death of the patient. At other times these masks served as a decoration of the temple walls. _ InCentral and South America similar uses for jade and jade-like stones ob- tained, and, as in every other quarter of the globe where the stone was known and used, it was held in an esteem amounting, in many cases, to actual reverence. Collections of jade are found in nearly all the great museums of Europe, per- haps the most notable being that of the South Kensington Museum, which pos- sesses superb examples of the jewel- inlaid Indian jade. The specimens in the British Museum are valuable chiefly from a mineralogical and archeological point of view. A number-of choice pieces are owned by the Musée Ethno- graphique in the Louvre and the Musée Guimet, in Paris. The Musée Chinois at Fontainebleau owes its fine collection of jade to the gifts of French officers to the Hmpress Eugenie after their return from the campaign in China in 1860. *Jade objects which have been presented to the imperial family of Russia are ex- hibited in the Peter the Great Gallery at St Petersburg. Among the treasures of the Sultan in the old Seraglio at Con- stantinople are many sword hilts and other small objects of jade. Although these museums contain many individually fine specimens of jade, no one of them possesses a truly complete collection. American col- lectors of Orientals have long shown their appreciation of the beauty of jade objects, and the collections of Messrs Brayton Ives, Henry Walters, Thomas Waggaman, and Frederick Ames con- tain many unique and perfect examples of the jade carver’s art. It was left for an American, Mr Heber Bishop, of New Some Notes oN VENEZUELA 17 York,* to make the first comprehensive and general collection of jade. The Bishop collection recently presented to the Metropolitan Museum of Art in *On December 10, 1902, since this article was written, Mr. Bishop died at his residence in New York City. By the terms of his will ample provision has been made for the preser- vation of his famous collection in a special room of the Metropolitan Museum of Art. SOME NOTES \ Y ENEZUELA was the first part of the American continent sighted by Columbus. During his third voyage, in 1498, he first saw the coast from the Island of Trinidad, and thought that it was another island; but the fresh water of the Gulf of Paria, whose shores he coasted for several weeks, soon con- vinced him that great continental rivers were pouring into the gulf, and that the vast Asiatic continent at last stretched before him. Sickness prevented him from making extended explorations of the coast and sent him back to Hispan- iola. The following year Alonzo de Ojeda, accompanied by the celebrated Amerigo Vespucci, traced a greater extent of the Venezuelan coast. It was Ojeda who gave the country its present name— Venezuela.* ‘“Proceeding along the coast, he ar- rived at a vast, deep gulf resembling a tranquil lake, entering which he beheld on the eastern side a village, the con- struction of which struck him with sur- prise. It consisted of twenty large houses shaped like bells and built on piles driven into the bottom of the lake, which in this part was limpid and of * Washington Irving: ‘‘ Life and Voyages of Christopher Columbus and the Voyages and Discoveries of the Companions of Columbus.”’ Five vols. Vol. IV, p. 166. G. P. Putnam’s Sons, New York. that city embraces every variety of the stone, and includes examples by pre- historic and primitive jade workers as well as the greatest gem-cutters of the Mogul and Chinese courts. Years of work have been devoted to the descrip- tive catalogue of this collection, which will be the authoritative work on the subject. ON VENEZUELA little depth. Each house was provided with a drawbridge and with canoes, by which communication was carried on. From these resemblances to the Italian city, Ojeda gave to the bay the name of the Gulf of Venice, and it is called to the present day Venezuela, or Little Venice. "The Indian name was Coqui- bacoa.’’ After a small skirmish Ojeda ‘‘sent a~ detachment of twenty-seven Spaniards on avisit to theinterior. Fornine days they were conducted from town to town and feasted and almost idolized by the Indians, who regarded them as angelic beings, performing their natural dances and games and chanting their tradi- tional ballads for their entertainment. ‘The natives of this part were dis- tinguished for the symmetry of their forms; the females in particular ap- peared to the Spaniards to surpass all they had yet beheld in the New World for grace and beauty. Neither did the men display in the least degree that jealousy which prevailed in the other parts of the coast. ‘“ By the time the Spaniards set out on their return to the ship the whole country was aroused, pouring forth its population, male and female, todo them honor. Some bore them in litters or hammocks, that they might not be fatigued with the journey, and happy was the Indian who had the honor of ‘ 18 Tue NarvrionaL GeocGRAPHIC MaGaZINE Veen Seer ea eAmeeeM JAMAICA the West Indies and Florida Outline Map Showing Geographical Relation of Venezuela to the Isthmian Canal Routes, to SomE NorTres ON VENEZUELA bearing a Spaniard on his shoulders across a river. Others loaded them- selves with the presents that had been bestowed on their guests, consisting of rich plumes, weapons of various kinds, and tropical birds and animals. In this way they returned in triumphant pro- cession to the ships, the woods and shores resounding with their songs and shouts.”’ Venezuela has a larger area than the combined areas of the great States of 19 The republic has three zones—hot, temperate, and cool—according to the elevation of the land. The lowlands in the northwest are very torrid. Here great quantities of coffee and cacao are raised, which form the largest agricul- tural exports of the country. The cacao is sent mainly to France, Ger- many, and Spain, and the coffee, which averages a yearly crop of 55,000 tons, to the United States. South and east of the lowlands, extending eastward to Ca- A View of Caracas Texas, Kentucky, Tennessee, Alabama, Mississippi, Louisiana, Oklahoma, and Arkansas. In figures its area amounts to about 590,000 square miles. ‘The population is 500,000 less than that of Massachusetts. In 1891 it was 2,323,- 527. The capital, Caracas, has 75,000 inhabitants, Maracaibo 35,000, La Guaira 15,000; and Barcelona about 13,000. About one person out of every one hundred is pure white, while the others are descendants of black slaves, mulattoes, etc., and Indians. racas, are high mountains. where, the climate being temperate, most of the people live. Caracas, the capital, is 3,000 feet above the sea. Trade winds prevent the extremes of heat suffered in the corresponding latitude of north- ern Africa. The mean temperature at Caracas is only 71°.2 Fahr. On the coast it averages from ten to twelve de- grees higher. Vast llanos, or great plains, stretch south of the mountains, making splen- did runs for cattle. South again of the Tue Nationa, GerocrapHic MaGaAZzIne 20 OqivovlvyyY JO Og tJ, An Inrropucrion To PuysicaAL GEOGRAPHY 2 It The University—Caracas plains, beyond the Orinoco, are vast forests, from which the natives get rub- ber, tropical woods, and vanilla. There are also gold diggings south of the Ori- noco, which yielded over $600,000 for export in 1g00. Almost nothing is manufactured be- yond the cheapest grades of goods. The larger share of the imports come from the United States—$3,271,000 worth in AN 1901, consisting of flour, lard, hardware, and cotton goods, on all of which a heavy duty was levied. England and Germany send the next largest amount of goods. Venezuela sent in return to the United States in 1901 $6,645,000 worth of coffee, cacao, and skins, all en- tering free of duty. The annual revenue of Venezuela is about $7,500,000, ob- tained mainly from customs duties. PSE RODwWeHION WO PAYSIGAL GEOGRAP EY = URING the last few years the general public has felt a deeper interest in the facts of the earth—in what the earth is and what it hides—than it has probably ever expe- rienced before. ‘The fearful upheavals in Martinique, St Vincent, and Guate- mala, attended by a general natural un- rest throughout the globe, have aroused a wide spread desire to understand what *An Introduction to Physical Geography. By Grove Karl Gilbert and Albert Perry Brigham. With 263 illustrations. Pp. 380. 514 x8 inches. New York: D. Appleton & Co. 1go2. 22, is known—little though that knowledge is—of the mysterious forces writhing under the earth’s crust. The coal strike in the United States has aroused an in- terest of a different character—an in- quiry as to what coal is and how it hap- pens to be stored in certain localities aud not in others as well. ‘lhe pro- longed and successful agitation for irri- gation in the West and for forest reser- vations has also had its share in arousing the public to other questions relating to physical geography, as, for instance, weathering and soils, forests and rain- fall. THe Nationa GroGraPHic MAGAZINE Therefore a book about Physical Geography, written in a simple and in- teresting manner and not loaded down with innumerable technical terms which are of value to the specialist but not to the general public, is especially wel- come. Such a volume has recently been written by Messrs G. K. Gilbert and A. P. Brigham, and published by Messrs D. Appleton & Co., of New York. The authors modestly call the work “An Introduction to Physical Geogra- phy.’’ It is planned especially as a text-book for schools and has already gained much success. A second edi- From Gilbert’s and Brigham ’s ‘‘ Introduction to Physical Geography.” D. Appleton & Co. Figure No. 1—Watkins Glen ; a Gorge Carved from Beds of Shale AN INTRODUCTION TO tion was called for within a few weeks of the publication of the first. But the volume will gain a wider field than the ordinary text-book, for it will ap- peal to that growing class of amateurs who have been seeking a plain but fascinating description of the present and past facts of the earth. The treatment, so far as possible, is concrete.. Wherever practicable, each PuysicaL GEOGRAPHY 23 Figure No. 1 is a picture of the noted Watkins Glen, which during the pro- cess of time a small stream has carved in the soft rock of the mountain. In some places the stream has cut to a depth of 200 feet ; sometimes the gorge is scarcely more than ro feet wide, and at others broadens into large amphi- theaters, in which one’s voice echoes and reéchoes with weird effects. The From Gilbert's and Brigham1's ‘‘ Introduction to Physical Geography.” D. Appleton & Co. Figure No. 2.—A Pebbly Rock Carved by Rain; Russian River, California subject is opened with a type case, illustrated by a picture of some graphic example. About one-half of the book is given to the lands. ‘The relation of organisms to the earth is introduced wherever appropriate. Two hundred and sixty-three illus- trations, all very well chosen and ad- mirably engraved, accompany the text. By permission of the publishers, six typical illustrations are reproduced in this Magazine. chasm is at the head of Seneca Lake, New York, from which, winding and curving abruptly, it penetrates Glen Mountain for a distance of three miles. Figure No. 2 is a graphic example of the effect of rain wash. Rain has soaked and softened the rock: then little rills have started, and have grad- ually worn deep channels of their own making the high pinnacles. Figure No. 3 illustrates the differ- ent kinds of rock, some hard and some DA, Tue Natrona, GrocraPpHic MaGAZINE From Gilbert's and Brigham’s “‘ Introduction to Physical Geography.’’ D. Appleton & Co. Tigure 3.—Rock Edges (limestone and sandstone) and Waste Slopes (concealing shale). Grand Canyon of the Colorado River, Arizona AN INTRODUCTION To PHysIcaL GEOGRAPHY 25 From Gilbert’sand Brigham’s ‘‘ Introduction to Physical Geography.” D. Appleton & Co. Figure 4.—The Last House in Riggs, Oregon, a Village Overwhelmed by Dunes. soft, of which almost every mountain is made. Figure No. 4, an exaniple of wind work, shows a substantial house in Ore- gon nearly buried by drifting sand. In Chinese Turkestan, Sven Hedin has recently discovered the ruins of great temples where flourished 2,000 years ago cities with a high degree of culture and civilization. Here in the heart of Asia populous cities and lakes have been buried beneath drifting dunes. Figure No. 5 shows how some of the people of Cape Cod, Massachusetts, check the advance of the sand by plant- ing grass, which binds the sand and keeps the wind from lifting it. Common olean- ders are used for this purpose in Ber- muda. Where no effort has been made to check its advance, a dune has been known to migrate as much as 70 feet in one year. The authors of ‘‘An Introduction to Physical Geography’’ are very well Attempts to hold the sand back by fences were unsuccessful From Gilbert’s and Brigham’s “Introduction to Physical Geography.” D. Appleton & Co. Figure No. 5.—Planting Grass to Stop the Drifting of Sand, near Province- town, Cape Cod, Mass. 26 From Gilbert's and Brigham’s “Introduction to Physical Geography.” A Traveling Beach on the Shore of Lake Ontario. THe NatTionaL GrocGRAPHic MAGAZINE D. Appleton & Co. The stones originally angular beconie rounded as the waves roll them along known in the scientific world. Mr Gil- bert, geologist of the U. S. Geological Survey, is a past president of the Ameri- can Association for the Advancement of Science. He was the recipient of the Wollaston Prize of the Geological So- ciety of England in 1899, aud is the au- thor of ‘‘Geology of Henry Mountains,” “Lake Bonneville,’ ete. Mr Brigham is head of the department of geology in Colgate University and the author of a well-known text-book of geology. IDR WISIN, TsUsDIUN HE distinguished Swedish ex- plorer, Dr Sven Hedin, who ended his last famous expedition to Central Asia in December, 1901,* is at present receiving one continuous series *See the National Geographic Magazine for March, 1902, page 96. of ovations throughout Europe. He has given lecturing tours in Sweden, Russia, Denmark, England and Scot- land, and after New Year’s commences a tour in Germany, France, Austria and Hungary, and Norway. It had been hoped that he would visit Amer- ica this winter, but he writes that his Dr Sven HeEpIn AG Hi Hid Photo by Dahllof, Stockholm Dr Sven Hedin in His Study, Stockholm 28 Tue Nationa, GrocrRaPpHic MAGAZINE bok 50" sitesee. PEARY'S K Soo FARTHEST COAST | C, Washington - 2 ORG Kane Melville VOCKWOODKI wee Wild Fa. Land MARY MURRAY | Hazen toe \ en Land Gli ORE Sia Cc. Neumayer S ig A As ¢ MARKHAM, BEAUMONT 1qt 7, = (FARTHERST yicroria Tylor NA WARD HUNT 1. STN seph Henr. 7 e *ic-02 i) ay & Milne B. 2.Alfred Ernes GRA ' FT.CONGER WIN FGARFIELD) pazbn E.5: COAST GRIN Ks Ko Aw C. Constitut, \ WASHINGTON LAND \s yt pyaiee Glacier PAYER HARBOR Shy WINTER QRS.19.01-02! ELLESMERE LAND ¢-sapele SS WAALE SD. C.Parry y N. LINCOLN CARY 18. cy. 6 ¢ Clarence Hd, NOES . 9 . Melville © * Glacier Str CUO ° Ve 7 7 MELVILLE COBOURG |. 7 Cork BAY Red Hd. JONES SOUND | | 1) | wanes Resurveys of Coast Lines xxxxxxSurveys of New Coast Line ------ Sledge Routes to the North ++ Supply Caches Republished from the Bulletin of the American Geographical Society of New York Outline Map of Peary’s Sledge Routes and Surveys Prary oN THE NortrH POLE engagements in Europe make a trip across the Atlantic impossible this year. Sven Hedin was born in Stockholm, February 19, 1865. He was educated at the universities of Upsala, Berlin, and Halle, and from the last received the honorary degree of Ph.D. His first journey of exploration was in 1885-86, from Persia to Mesopotamia ; in 1891 he traveled in Turkestan ; dur- ing 1892-’95 he traveled right across Asia from Russia to Peking, penetrat- AG) ing Tibet and studying the Lob-nor district. The results he published in a splendid volume, ‘‘ Through Asia’’ (Harper and Bros.). His latest and most important expedition was begun in 1899, and has yielded valuable in- formation about the geography of Chi- nese Turkestan and Tibet, and of the cities which flourished in the Lob-nor region 2000 years ago and have long since been buried beneath the desert sands. PAIR QIN Wiss, INOS leOQuUL IE: Geographic Society November 29, 1902, Commander Robert E. Peary stated very emphatically that he be- lieved the North Pole could be reached by making Cape Hekla, in northern Grinnell Land, the starting point for the sledging trip north. ‘The average distance of Peary’s four Arctic sledge journeys over the ice is slightly greater than the distance from Hekla to the Pole and back. _ If the next arctic ex- plorer will make Cape Hekla his base, will pass the winter there, and starting from that point in spring fight his way as many miles northward over the ice as Peary averaged in his four journeys under equal conditions, he will gain the Pole itself and have ample time to re- turn before the ice pack becomes im- passable. To quote from Mr. Peary’s address : - “There are two facts I wish to bring to your attention, not in a boastful manner, but as bearing upon the feasi- bility of reaching the Pole. First, the average air-line distance from start to finish of four sledge journeys which I have made in high arctic latitudes is the same as the distance from the north- ern shore of Grinnell Land to the Pole. Second, the air-line distance from start to finish of my 1900 sledge journey is [: a lecture before the National such that had my starting point been in the same latitude as that of Abruzzi it would have taken me to the Pole, or had my starting point been in the same latitude as Nansen’s or on the northern shore of Grinnell Land, it would have carried me beyond the Pole. ‘“Tt may seem to indicate overconfi- dence to state boldly that the Pole can be reached, and yet it is a fact, even though the struggle for it has been going on unsuccessfully for years and years. Each time we have come a little nearer, each time we have learned a little more, and I say to you here to- night that it is not an impossibility ; that it can be done, and that it is no more difficult than many of the great projects which we see being pushed to completion every day and which require money, persistence, hard work, and some ability to bring the full fruition. ‘The man who can secure a starting point in early spring on the northern coast of Grinnell Land, who’ has with him the proper party and the proper equipment and experience, will held within his grasp the last geographical prize that the earth has to offer—the prize which will rank with the prize which Columbus won for himself and his countrymen, a fame which will last as long as human life exists on the globe.’’ 30 PLAN FOR CLIMBING THe NationaL GrocGRAPHIC MAGAZINE IMEIE IMGCIKIONIE Ey By Atrrep H. Brooks anp D. L. REABURN OF THE U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY URING the past summer the writers were engaged in a re- connaissance surveyin Alaskat which extended from the Pacific coast through the Alaskan Range and along its western base to Yukon waters. ‘The route of travel lay close to the foot of Mt McKinley, and though it was no part of the plan to ascend the mountain, for which there was neither time nor facilities, time was taken to climb its slopes to snow line, and the members of the party were undoubtedly the first white men to approach the summit. The Alaskan Range is a rugged mountain mass which extends to the northeast from the vicinity of Lake Clark, and sweeping around the great Sushitna Basin forms the watershed be- tween Cook Inlet on the southeast and the Kuskokwim and T'anana waters on the northwest. On the east and°south it rises by a series of foothills from the Sushitna River lowland and on the west it falls off abruptly to a gravel-fioored plateau, which slopes gradually toward Kuskokwim waters. The southern end ot the range has not been explored, but the peaks probably have attitudes of from 7,000 to 9,000 feet, while to the northward the relief increases very much and the range culminates in Mt McKinley, over { 20,000 feet in height, and Mt Foraker, fourteen miles to the southwest, about 17,000 feet. To the northeast the range includes a number of peaks which are from 10,000 to 14,000 feet high, Mt Hayes, lying between the headwaters of the Cantwell and Delta rivers, being the highest. The crest line of the range lies near its western margin. In 1898 Eldridge and Muldrow § sur- veyed the Sushitna River, while Men- denhall traversed the eastern end of the range; Spurr and Post crossed the southern end, and Peters and Brooks explored the region to the north along the Tanana River. In the following year, Lieut. Joseph S. Herron, U.S.A..,]|| made an exploration in the southern part of the Alaskan Range and also of a part of the Kuskokwim basin. ‘These investigations, together with the ex- plorations carried out by the writers, have outlined this great mountain mass, which, as has been shown, contains sev- eral of the highest peaks on the conti- nent. The results of these surveys have given not only geographic data, but also thrown much light on the conditions of travel, distribution of timber, and on the climate of this province. The time, therefore, seems now ripe to plan an ascension of Mt McKinley. Mt McKinley (latitude 63° 04’, lon- gitude 151°, see map) lies in about the center of the range, measured in a northeast-southwest direction, and its summit is only about ten miles distant * Published by permission of the Director of the United States Geological Survey. +A report embodying the results of this expedition is now in preparation. {The final adjustment of surveys have not yet been made, so that the exact altitudes can not now be given. § For reports on these expeditions see Vol. VII, Twentieth Annual Report, U. S. Geol. Survey. || ‘‘ Explorations in Alaska in 1899.”’ March, 1go!. War Dept., Adjutant-General’s Office, No. XNNT, PLAN FoR Ciimpine Mt McKiIntey from the western margin and between forty and fifty miles from the eastern margin of the mountains. It is evi- dent, therefore, that an expedition to climb the mountain should approach it from the northwest. This is especially true as the gravel-floored plateau on the northwest side of the range is, for the most part, above timber and, as it affords good traveling, gives ready access to the base of the mountains, where good grass is plentiful. The mountain itself is dome-shaped and has two summits two miles apart, differing about 1,000 feet in altitude, the southernmost being the highest. Its northwestern slope is drained by a large glacier, which discharges into a river tributary to the Toklat. The most -feasible route to the top of the mountain is probably across this glacier or by a ridge which separates it from a glacier flowing to the west and draining into the Tatlathna River. The topo- graphic map now being prepared will aid the climbers, but some preliminary exploratory work to pick out the best route would have to be done. The ascent of the mountain itself would not seem to present serious difficulties to experienced mountain climbers. The fact that the snow line is about 7,000 feet, instead of being nearly at sea-level, as at St Elias, gives the Mt McKinley ascent a decided advantage. “The upper limit of spruce timber is about 2,500 feet, but willow sufficient for fuel is found up to 4,000 feet. Pack-horses could find ample grass up to 3,500 feet, and by a careful choice of route could probably be taken up to snow line, on the slope of the mountain. While the writers must disclaim any personal knowledge of high mountain climbing, yet their study of the ques- tion would lead them to believe that Mt McKinley could be ascended by making one camp at the base and three on the slopes. The base camp would be within the zone of grass and fuel, 31 the next at snow line, and the other two at convenient points between the snow line and the summit. The actual ascent of the mountain will present the difficulties, toils, and dangers with which the experienced mountaineer is familiar and against which he will prepare himself as far as possible. A very serious difficulty for which the average mountaineer might be less prepared is the long and difficult journey to the base of the mountain. Though Mt McKinley in an air line is only about 150 miles distant from tide water, yet to reach its northwest base from Cook Inlet necessitates a journey of at least 400 miles. This distance was traversed by the writers in about two months, but the progress was less rapid than it would have been except- ing for the necessity of carrying on sur- veys and of exploring for aroute. The party, consisting of seven men, made the journey on foot, while twenty pack- horses, most of which were loaded with provisions, carried the outfit. The time required for the journey and the energy spent in overcoming obstacles, such as chopping trails, traversing swamps, and crossing rivers, makes the reaching of the base of Mt McKinley a serious un- dertaking. Our experience and knowledge of the region would lead us to propose three general plans for reaching the northwest foot of the mountain from which, as had been shown, the ascent should best be made. The first two plans involve a summer journey only, while the third would take a year for its execution. An examination of the map (page 32) will show that Mt McKinley lies about half way between the navigable waters on Cook Inlet and the Yukon River, which is navi- gated by river steamers. Either of these could be used as a point of de- parture for the long inland journey. If the project to climb the mountain were to be accomplished in one season, BD Tue Nationa GsrocrapHic MaGaZzine tilatsoce A TA Dy» AV) ayy S72 6111N, OS A VS “7 Wayans 7 g 63g AN ele ines 1 Dy) 7 \\yy 4, Ty : a ty, POUIPT, “thy 7A et. MEL O, Hager Ahonhe.. Scale 4 “a C2 720 ° ~~ — Route. «5. Geoleyzica7. Survey Party. PLAN FoR Crimpinc Mr McKINLey the base could be reached from either Cook Inlet or from the Yukon from near the mouth of the Tanana. If the Cook Inlet route were chosen, the party should land at Tyonek be- tween the 15th of May and the rst of June, equipped and provisioned for a three and a half months’ journey. The journey from Seattle to Cook Inlet takes about ten days by ocean steamer. For a party of seven men twenty horses would be needed, and every ad- ditional man would require about three additional horses. From T'yonek a boat would be dispatched with a part of the provisions to meet the party at the Skwentna, so as to lighten the bur- den of the horses and to aid in crossing the river. From this point the boat would be sent to the Keechatno, a central fork of the Yentna, and here again would be used for crossing. The pack-train would take a northerly course from Tyonek, crossing the Be- luga near the head of tide water, and thence heading directly for the lower canyon on the Skwentna; then after crossing the Keechatna would follow our trail across the Alaskan Range by way of Rainy Pass at the head of Happy River. After reaching the Kuskokwim waters it would turn to the northeast and follow the base of the range, the route being identical with that followed by our party. If such a party had exceptionally good luck (and season were an early one), it might reach the base of the mountain by the first of July. Here a camp would be established at the upper limit of timber, where good grass would be found for the horses. Climatic condi- tions permitting, a month could then be spent in exploring and ascending the mountain. The quickest way out of the country would probably be to the northward, either to the mouth of the Cantwell or to the mouth of the Toklat, from which point a boat could probably be secured to the Yukon. In 318 the absence of any boat, a raft would be constructed and in a few days the current would carry the party to the Yukon. ‘The cost of such an expedi- tion could be approximated at $15,000 for a party of ten men. The second plan is to go to Dawson by rail and steamer and thence down the Yukon to the mouth of the Tanana by steamer. In the event of an early season, the party would leave Skagway on Lynn Canal about June rst, which can be reached by steamer from Seattle in four days, and the mouth of the Tanana could be reached by the middle of June. From this point, if possible, a steamer should be secured to take the party, outfit, and several horses one or two hundred miles up the Toklat to the head of steamboat navigation. ‘The continuation of the journey would be by canoes or small boats, which would carry the supplies, while the horses . would be sent across country. When the river became too shallow for canoe transportation the horses would be utilized to portage the outfit to the base of the mountain. It is expected that the expedition would be ready to begin the ascent of the mountain by the middle of July. ‘The cost of an ex- pedition by the Yukon route can be estimated at about $12,000. As an introduction to the third plan it may be said that in an expedition of this kind the party is liable to be worn out by the difficulties incident to the journey to the base of the mountain. The necessity of carrying provisions for the entire trip limits the size of the party, and hence the daily tasks must be shared by all its members. Under even the best conditions, the matter of chopping trails, building bridges, cross- ing rivers, the incessant annoyance by mosquitoes, has a telling effect on the strength of the men, in the, course of even a few weeks. It would, there- fore, be advisable, if possible, to. fur- nish each man with a saddle horse if S4r the overland route is taken, and thus save his strength for the task of ascend- ing the mountain. ‘These extra horses would, however, involve an additional expenditure of $1,000 or $2,000. The same holds true in regard to the trip from the Tanana with canoes, where the energies of the party would be spent in portaging and in dragging the canoes up against swift currents. Such work is very hard and before very long will have a marked effect on even the strongest. It is possible, therefore, that if the base of Mt McKinley was reached by either of these routes, the energy of the members of the party would be at a low ebb and not at all equal to the task _ of making the ascent. It should also be noted that by the two plans proposed the base of the mountain would not be reached earlier than the first or middle of July. The midsummer is very un- favorable for reaching the summit, as it is usually shrouded in clouds, and clear days are very exceptional. The clearest weather and most favorable conditions will be found in June. In view of these facts, it is quite pos- sible that even the best chosen and best equipped party would not be successful in the ascent of the mountain. It is the belief of the writers that success could only be assured by wintering a party in the region and transporting the provisions and outfits to the base of the mountain during the winter and early spring, when dogs could be used. With such a plan it would be possible to reserve the strength of the members of the party for the actual ascent. The writers would propose that a party be outfitted with a year’s provisions, which should be sent to the mouth of the Ta- nana by steamer, either by way of Daw- son or St Michaels. From this point a steamer should be chartered to carry the expedition to the head of steamboat navigation on the Toklat. This could probably be accomplished by the first of July, and the party could spend the re- Toe Nationa, GreocraPHic MaGAZzInE mainder of the open season in boating the outfit up the Toklat and in estab- lishing the winter camp at some con- venient point. nas During the winter, with the aid of dog teams, an advance party would es- tablish a camp at timber line near the base of the mountain, and also cache provisions at convenient points on the - lower slopes of the mountain. ‘This being accomplished during the winter months, when transportation is easy by means of dog teams, the party would be prepared to take advantage of the clear weather of June to make the as- cent, which, as has been shown, is a very important consideration. A modification of this plan would be to take a steamer up the Kuskokwim, which is known to be navigable as far as the forks, and very probably above. The objection to the Kuskokwim route is that it involves a very long steamboat journey, probably five hundred or six hundred miles, up a river about which very little is known. The mouth of the Kuskokwim lies out of the usual routes of travel, and the river is not easily ac- cessible compared with the Yukon. The chief point is to obtain steamboat navigation to as near a point to the base of the mountain as possible, then estab- lish a base camp, and distribute the sup- plies during the winter months. It probably would be advisable to take a few horses for the winter trip, as they could be utilized for transportation both during the summer and winter. If this was done feed would have to be carried for winter use, though, time permitting, it would be possible to cut grass for hay. The winter plan does not necessitate the entire parties spending a yearin the undertaking. It would be possible for one section to prepare the way during the summer and early winter months, while another joined them in March or April by traveling from Dawson with dog teams. Tue Unirep StTatTEs AND AGRICULTURE It is the belief of the writers that if the winter trip were undertaken there would be every reason to anticipate a successful result for the expedition. The objection to the plan is, of course, the time which would be required, and also the very heavy additional expense. While it is difficult to estimate the cost of the winter party, it is safe to say that it would not be less than $25,000 and might easily be double that amount. Inclosing, the writers would strongly urge that if the expedition is under- taken that it be put under the direction of a man who is not only an experienced 315 mountaineer but who has also had long training in frontier life and exploratory work, for the success of the expedition must depend in a very large measure on its leadership. They would also urge the necessity of having ample funds to thoroughly equip the party, and that each member be especially chosen for the work in hand. It is hoped that this article may encourage the organ- ization of an expedition, so that the eredit for the ascension of the highest peak on the continent may fall to some American mountaineer. WHAT THEUNITEDSTATES GOVERNMENT DOES TO PROMOTE AGRICULTURE tion that no government in the world does so much as the United States to promote the agricultural in- terests of the country. A tea has been imported which is now being grown successfully in South Carolina. In a short while enough Sumatra tobacco will be grown in Connecticut to satisfy the American market, which has been paying $6,000,000 annually to import Sumatra tobacco. A new variety of long staple cotton, having nearly double the value of the old variety, has been created; new wheats and new rices have been introduced, and even a new orange, which will resist frost more vigorously than those now grown in Florida. ‘These are only a few instances of products which are now being suc- cessfully raised within the United States as a result of the watchfulness and teaching of the Department of Agricult- ure. ‘The fixed capital of agriculture in the United States amounts to twenty billions of dollars, or four times that invested in manufactures. How the LT may be stated without exaggera- American farmer and the consumer are protected and assisted by expert care may be seen from the following ab- stract of the last annual report of Hon. James Wilson, Secretary of Agricul- ture, who has done more for the agri- cultural interests of the United States than any man in its history : INSPECTION OF MEAT The Bureau of Animal Industry has made nearly 60,000,000 ante-mortem inspections for the year, at a cost of a fraction over one cent each. ‘The num- ber of post-mortem inspections was nearly 39,000,000. The meat-inspec- tion stamp was affixed to over 23,000, ooo packages of meat products, and the number of certificates of ordinary in- spection issued for meat products for export, exclusive of horseflesh, was 32,744. The quantity of pork exam- ined microscopically and exported ex- ceeded 33,000,000 pounds. Altogether, the value of exports of animals and ani- mal productions for the year amounted to $244,733,062. 36 LONG STAPLE COTTON One of the greatest needs in improv- ing the cotton industry in the United States has been to secure a long staple upland variety of good quality and pro- ductiveness. Several varieties of the ideal type have been produced, and the past year’s experiments show conclu- sively that these varieties can be made permanent. Egypt and South Africa are waking up to their possibilities in cotton production, and we must develop and grow better and more productive varieties than will be grown by our competitors. AMERICAN TEA The work on the growing of Ameri- can tea was continued during the year at Pinehurst, near Summerville, S. C., in cooperation with Dr Shepard. ‘There are now about 100 acres in tea gardens. The yield of tea in these gardens last year was about 4,500 pounds and this year will be about 9,000 pounds of mar- ketable tea. During the year careful attention was given to reducing the cost of the production of tea, with very sat- isfactory results. A tea farm will be established in Texas if suitable land and cooperation can be secured. LAND-GRANT COLLEGES Statistics of attendance at the land- grant colleges show over 42,000 students enrolled, an increase over the previous yearof 7 percent. The attendance for the four-year course in agriculture in- creased more than 26 per cent. The Secretary points to the marked success of agricultural high schools in Min- nesota and Nebraska as an indication that there is a demand for agricultural courses with those afforded in various manual arts in the city high schools. He states that all over the country farmers are sending their children to public high schools and paying for their tuition. ~ pound. THe Nationa, GrocRapHic MaGaZzINg GROWING SUMATRA TOBACCO The commercial success of the shade- grown Sumatra tobacco in the Connect- icut Valley has now been fully assured, and the plan adopted by which last year’s crop, after being carefully cured and sorted under the direction of the department’s experts, was catalogued and offered for sale at public auction, under the supervision of the committee of tobacco brokers, with Hon. E. Stevens Henry, M. C., as chairman, proved highly satisfactory. The ordinary to- bacco grown in the open fields in Con- necticut brings from 18 to 20 cents a ‘The average price paid for the shade-grown tobacco was $1.20 a pound. The cost of this tobacco, baled and ready for market, averaged 5112 cents a pound. The net profit per acre on the best crop raised on a lot of about six acres exceeded $1,000 per acre. The reports from cigar manufacturers show that the leaf of this Connecticut, grown Sumatra tobacco has successfully stood the test of manufacture. At the present time the department is advising and instructing thirty-eight growers in Connecticut and Massachu- setts cultivating 645 acres of shade to- bacco. It may be said of this line of department work that it has demon- strated our ability to produce a leaf for which about $6,000,000 have annually been paid to foreign countries. The tobacco situation in Texas and Ohio has been thoroughly studied with a view to the production of a desirable type of filler tobacco equal to the im- ported Cuban leaf, and it is believed that by careful methods of cultivation, fermentation, and assorting this can be done. In fact, leaf has actually been grown that cannot be distinguished from the imported Cuban when prop- erly fermented. EXPORTS OF FRUIT He reports investigations having for Tuer Unitrep STaTEs AND AGRICULTURE their purpose the extension of the ex- port trade in fruits and vegetables, and improvement in methods of handling these products for foreign and domestic use. Several experimental shipments have been made to European markets. The results have been fully satisfactory, the net returns in most cases exceed- ing domestic values. The net returns are largely influenced by the kind of packages and methods of packing and shipping. The examination of imported food products for the purpose of determin- ,ing whether they contain substances injurious to life has been continued by the Bureau of Chemistry. Particular attention has been given to the adul- terations of olive oils, with the object of securing an honest market for do- mestic oils now compelled to compete with cheaper and adulterated oils. Im- portant investigations have been made in the sugar laboratory with a view to improving the quality and quantity of table sirups. WEATHER BUREAU WARNINGS The past year affords gratifying evi- dence of the value of forecast warnings of the Weather Bureau in saving life and property. Ample testimony is af- forded that the value of property thus saved from loss amounts to many times the cost of maintaining the Bureau. The Secretary urges the desirability of extending the distribution of daily fore- casts coextensively with the rural free delivery. Of the 10,000 rural free de- livery routes existing August 1, 1902, it has been found possible to serve only 1,000. To make the distribution co- extensive with the rural free delivery would, he estimates, cost about $100,000. APPALACHIAN FOREST RESERVE The Secretary enters an earnest plea for the establishment of the Appala- chian Forest Reserve. He states that the water power, at an aggregate annual ow, value of $20,000,000, is being gradually destroyed through increasing irregular- ity in the flow; that the soils washed down from the mountain slopes are ren- dering annually less navigable the Ohio, Tennessee, Mississippi, and other rivers. These are'the results of the deforesta- tion of these .mountain slopes. He states that the rate of land erosion on these slopes from which the forest cover has been removed is as great now ina single year as during ten centuries when covered with primeval forests. WORK IN FORESTRY Interest in forestry and a perception of its possibilities as a great national resource have developed so swiftly in the United States that the discrepancy between the capacity for government service of this branch of the department and its opportunities was never so great as now. During the past year the Bu- reau of Forestry has notably increased its store of knowledge on which all for- estry depends and has made large gains in introducing practical management of forests of both public and private owner- ship. Its field-work has engaged 162 men and has been carried on in forty- two states and territories. Extensive studies were made of com- mercial trees during the year, and studies of the forest and its industrial relations were made in Michigan, Kentucky, Ohio, Texas, New Mexico, Arizona, South Dakota, Wyoming, Montana, California, and Iowa. STUDY OF SOILS The soil survey has been greatly ex- tended, and the division of soil manage- ment started during the year gives promise of highly important results. The Bureau of Soils now employs a force of over one hundred persons, seventy-five of whom have had scien- tific training. "The usefulness of this bureau has been greatly extended by cooperation with state institutions, ex- 38 periment stations, boards of agricul- ture, and geological surveys, as well as with other bureaus and divisions of this department of the government. An assistant has been furnished to the War Department to organize a soil survey in the Philippines. The area surveyed and mapped during the fiscal year was over 14,500 square miles, or not far from 10,000,000 acres, making a total survey to date of over 14,500,000 acres, This area is distributed in twenty-five states and territories and in Porto Rico. PUBLICATIONS The publication work of the depart- ~ ment has been unprecedently active. The total number of publications is- sued was 757. The total number of pages of new matter edited for publi- cation was 81,184. The aggregate number of copies of all publications issued was 10,586,580. Of this num- ber 6,150,000 were Farmers’ Bulletins, and of these the Congressional distri- bution took 4,289,126. Including the Year-book and other reports paid for by special appropriations, the cost of the publication work amounts to about $800,000, but the number of publica- tions is still inadequate to supply the demand. GROWTH OF INDUSTRY The Secretary concludes his report with some interesting figures illustra- tive of the magnitude of the agricul- tural industry. In 1900 the fixed capital of agriculture was about twenty billions of dollars, or four times that invested in manufacture. In that year there were nearly five million seven hundred and forty farms in the country, covering eight hundred and forty-one million acres, four hun- dred and fifteen millions of which con- sisted of improved land. According to the returns of the last census, about forty million people, or more than half THe NarionaL GrocraPHic MAGAZINE of the total population in 1g00, resided on farms. Of the twenty-nine million persons reported as engaged in gainful occupations, ten million—more than a third—were employed in agricultural pursuits. The produce of American agriculture in 1899, including farm animals and other products, aggregated nearly five billion dollars. The most valuable crop was Indian corn, $828,- 000,000; then hay and forage, $484,- 000,000; then cotton, $324,000,000 ; wheat returned $370,000,000, and oats $217,000,000. The animals sold and slaughtered during the year were val- ued at over $900,000,000, the products of the dairy gave $472,000,000, while poultry and eggs returned -over $281, - 000,000. The concluding statement of the Secretary is that results in the work of the government for agricul- ture are justifying expenditures, and “the future will still further show the value of science applied to the farm.”’ EXTRACT FROM PRESIDENT ROOSE- VELT’S MESSAGE TO CONGRESS, DECEMBER, 1902 In no department of governmental work in recent years has there been greater success than in that of giving scientific aid to the farming population, thereby showing them how most efh- ciently to help themselves. There is no need of insisting upon its importance, for the welfare of the farmer is funda- mentally necessary to the welfare of the Republic as a whole. In addition to such work as quarantine against animal and vegetable plagues, and warring against them when here introduced, much efficient help has been rendered to the farmer by the introduction of new plants specially fitted for cultiva- tion under the peculiar conditions exist- ing in different portions of the country. New cereals have been established in the semi-arid West. For instance, the practicability of producing the best types of macaroni wheats in regions of GrocraPHic Nores an annual rainfall of only ten inches or thereabouts has been conclusively dem- onstrated. ‘Through the introduction of new rices in Louisiana and Texas, the production of rice in this country has been made to about equal the home demand. Inthe southwest the possi- 39 bility of regrassing overstocked range lands has been demonstrated; in the north many new forage crops have been introduced, while in the east it has been shown that some of our choicest fruits can be stored and shipped in such a way as to find a profitable market abroad. GEOGRAPHIC NOTES IS GERMANY THE CAUSE OF DEN- MARK’S REFUSAL TO SELL HER WEST INDIAN POSSESSIONS ? (Clea has always wanted a naval station in the West Indies, but has been unable to obtain one on account of the Monroe Doctrine. Some years ago Denmark offered to sell the Danish West Indies to the United States, but the United States Congress did not accept. Recently an- other treaty was made and ratified by the United States Congress, but this time, for some unknown, mysterious reason, Denmark refused tosell. Why? It is well known that Germany has always wanted Denmark, and if by some peaceable means the kingdom of Denmark should become a State of the German Empire, the Danish West In- dies would not have changed sovereigns, but yet the German fleet could have its station there. Would the Monroe Doctrine interfere with this arrangement ? THE AMOUNT OF WATER HIDDEN BENEATH THE SURFACE HE amount of water within the crust of the earth, says Professor Charles S. Slichter, in a paper entitled “The Motion of Underground Waters,”’ recently published by the U. S. Geolog- ical Survey, is enormous, amounting to 565,000 million million cubic yards. This vast accumulation, if placed upon the earth, would cover its entire sur- face to a uniform depth of from 3,000 to 3,500 feet. His estimate is based upon the supposition that the average depth which waters can penetrate be- neath the surface is six miles below the land and five miles below the ocean floor. Experiments have shown that not only sands and gravels are porous, but rocks supposed to be solid and com- pact may be traversed by water. Even so hard a rock as Montello granite, selected for the sarcophagus of the tomb of General Grant on account of its great strength, shows a porosity of 0.23 per cent. The most productive water-bearing rocks are found to be the porous sandstones, and in some cases limestones whose inner texture has been chemically dissolved. ‘The great mass of ground water slowly percolates through sand and gravel de- posits, sandstone, and other porous ma- terial under a wide extent of territory. Though its motion carries it but a frac- tion of a mile ina year, this ground water is so widespread and often so ac- cessible as to be of the greatest economic importance. The water supply in many sections of the United States depends on an un- derstanding of the water deep beneath the surface. Hence the study of un- derground water conditions is one of the most important works of the U.S. Geological Survey. It is carried on in arid regions, where water for irrigation is of the greatest value. In the middle west, where grazing and successful 40 farming largely depend on it, and in the east, where an unpolluted supply for domestic and municipal use is yearly becoming a more serious problem. LOUBAT PRIZES HROUGH the generosity of the Duke of Loubat, whose interest in American studies is well known, two prizes, to be called the Loubat Prizes, have been established at Columbia Uni- versity, to be awarded every five years for the best original works dealing with North America at any period preceding the Declaration of Independence. The value of the first prize is not less than one thousand dollars, and that of the second prize not less than four hundred dollars, and the competition is open to all persons, whether citizens of the United States or of any other country. These prizes are offered in the year 1903, and the undersigned have been delegated to act as a Committee of Award. Original manuscripts, books, and pamphlets offered in competition may be sent to any member of the com- mittee prior to June, 1903. The con- ditions of the award are as follows: (a) That the work submitted shall treat of the history, geography, or nu- mismatics of North America prior to 1776, or of some topic comprised within these general subjects. (6) That it shall embody the results of original research, be written by a single person, and be submitted by the author himself. (c) That it be written in the English language. (d) That if a printed work, it shall have been published for the first time not prior to 1898, and if in manuscript, the author shall agree to publish the work within one year from the date of the award. (e) That the committee is empowered to withhold one prize or both if no works, or but a single work, be deemed worthy of the award. Tue NarionaL GrocrapHic Macazine (7) That all works submitted shall be placed, after the award, in the library of Columbia University, and that five copies of the prize-winning works shall be presented to Columbia University for distribution according to the conditions prescribed in Mr. Loubat’s deed of gift. (g) It is furthermore requested that all copies printed subsequent to the award should bear upon the title-page the words: LouBAT PRIZE. Columbia University, in the City of New York. Competitors should address all com- munications to any of the undersigned: Professor William M. Sloane, Colum- bia University (chairman )—History. Dr Alexander Graham Bell, President National Geographic Society—Geog- raphy. Dr George N. Olcott, Lecturer on Roman Archeology, Columbia Univer- sity—Numismatics. SUBDUING THE NILE ECEMBER, 1902, marked the opening of the great Nile reser- voir and dam, which will increase by one-fourth the farming land of Egypt. Stated differently, Egypt before the reservoir was built had about 10,500 square miles of arable land stretching along the Nile; the resevoir will give her 2,500 square miles more, so that this great work will add an area twice the size of Rhode Island to the farming land of the country. Chalmers Roberts in ‘‘ The World’s Work’”’ for December presents a capital article on this enor- mous engineering task so successfully achieved. The following paragraphs may be quoted: * “Tt is estimated that the permanent benefit resulting will reach $100,000, 000. There will be added to the revenue from the sale of water and from taxation on *The Worlds Work. Vol. 5, No. 2. Sub- duing the Nile. By Chalmers Roberts. GeocrRaPHic Nores the irrigated lands $10,000,000. ‘The government will further realize consid- ‘erable sums from the sale of reclaimed public lands and indirect revenues trace- able to the country’s augmented pro- ducing capacity. Egypt is virtually rainless, but wherever the Nile water can be regularly supplied to the soil the most beautiful crops follow, which, like cotton and sugar, command high prices because of their excellence. With a reliable water supply, farming in Egypt can be pursued with practically certain success. Four or five hundredweight of long staple cotton per acre may be expected, which, owing to its excellence, easily sells for two cents a pound more than American cotton sells for, which in its turn does not average two hun- dredweight to the acre. Even with the general depression of sugar in the world’s markets Egyptian agriculture is confident of obtaining similar advan- tages for its cane product. “Tt is useless to tell most people that the reservoir at Assuan will contain I,000,000,000 tons of water. ‘This res- ervoir, according to Sir Benjamin Baker, will hold more than enough water to make one year’s full domestic supply to every city, town, and village in the United Kingdom, with its 42,000,000 inhabitants. During the three or four summer months when the Nile is low, and the needs of cultivators are great- est, the flow from the reservoir will be equivalent to a river double the size of the Thames in mean annual flood con- dition. ““ Here will be created in the heart of the African desert a lake having two or three times the superficial area of Lake “Geneva, in Switzerland, and throwing back water for a distance of 140 miles.”’ GOVERNMENT MAPS RECENTLY ISSUED NUMBER of topographic maps of portions of New York State have just left the press of the United 41 States Geological Survey and are avail- able to the public. ‘They are maps of the Phelps, Weedsport, Morrisville, and Waverly quadrangles, in the central portion of the State; the Canajoharie, Willsboro (Lake Champlain), and Oys- ter Bay quadrangles in eastern New York, and the Lockport and Niagara Falls and vicinity quadrangles in the western portion. The survey has also issued a new and accurate topographic map of portions of Sauk, Columbia; and Adams counties, Wisconsin, on either side of the Wis- consin River between Filbourn and Portage. ‘The map is known as that of the Briggsville quadrangle and is on a scale of about one inch to the mile. A map of portions of Marathon, Lincoln, and Langdale counties, in the center of the State, is now in press. The Geological Survey has also re- printed its topographic map of part of the Lake Michigan shore known as the Racine sheet, which includes the cities of Racine and Kenosha and about ten miles of the country to the west. It is on the same scale as that of the Briggs- ville quadrangle and forms an excep- tionally accurate map of the region. TESTING THE CURRENTS OF LAKE ERIE. HE past season 80 bottles have been set adrift in and near San- dusky Bay in order to learn about the currents. To attract attention, a small board, painted orange and black, was attached to each bottle, and inside a notice to the finder offering him a small reward to report place and time of find- ing; also a map of the bay and neigh- boring portion of Lake Erie, on which the finder could mark the spot. So far, 44 of the bottles have been heard from. When found within two or three days, as frequently occurred, the course the bottle had taken could generally be accounted for by examin- ing the wind record for the period it 42 was floating and a day or two before. Inside the bay the course of the bottle depends largely on whether water is en- tering or leaving the bay, and this de- pends mainly on the direction and velocity of the wind compared with the way it has been blowing for some hours or days before. The bottles displaced about 700 cubic centimeters and, except the first 26, GEOGRAPHIC The Uganda Protectorate. By Sir Harry Johnston. With 506 illustra- tions from drawings and photographs by the author, 48 full-page colored plates by the author, and 9 maps. Two vols. Pp. 1018. 8 x rOinches. New York: Dodd, Mead & Co. 1902. $12.50 net. This is one of the most important works relating to Africa that has been published in recent years. The com- pletion of the Uganda Railway during the past year, opening this vast equa- torial province to direct communication with the world, makes the work spe- cially timely. Sir Harry Johnston de- scribes the tremendous work done by the British government toward pacify- ing and educating the Uganda peoples. The task is costing many millions of pounds sterling, but the commercial profits that will ensue will, in his opin- ion, far outbalance the expense. ‘The larger part of the two volumes is de- voted to a description of the varied races, the animals, and the plant life in the protectorate. An unusual feature are fifty colored plates from drawings by Sir Harry Johnston and over 500 illustrations from photographs taken by him during his twenty months of exploration in Uganda. The following extract from the author’s preface gives a very good idea of the protectorate : “The territories which are comprised Tue Nationa, GerocraPpHic MAGAZINE were weighted with sand to make them sink beneath the board. In a few in- stances bottles one, three, and five feet beneath the surface were started simul- taneously. An account of these experiments will be published in the next annual report of the Ohio Academy of Science. EK. L. MosEerey. Sandusky, Ohio, December 15, 1902. LITE RAD URE within the limits of the Uganda Pro- tectorate during the time of my admin- istration of that portion of the British sphere in East Africa certainly contain within an area of some 150,000 square miles nearly all the wonders, most of the extremes, the most signal beauties, and some of the horrors of the Dark Continent. Portions of their surface are endowed with the healthiest climate to be found anywhere in tropical Africa; yet there are also some districts of ex- treme insalubrity. “The Uganda Protectorate offers to the naturalist the most remarkable known forms amongst the African mammals, birds, fish, butterflies, and earth-worms, one of which is as large as a snake and is colored a brilliant verditer-blue. In this protectorate there are forests of a tropical luxuriance only to be matched in parts of the Congo Free State and in the Cameroons. Prob- ably in no part of Africa are there such vast woods of conifers. “There are other districts as hideously desert and void of any form of vegetation as the worst part of the Sahara. There is the largest continuous area of marsh to be met with in any part of Africa, and perhaps the most considerable area of tableland and mountain rising continuously above 6,000 feet. Here is probably reached the highest point on the whole of the African continent, namely, the loftiest GEOGRAPHIC snow peak of the Ruwenzori range. Here is the largest lake in Africa, which gives birth to the main branch of the longest river in that continent. There may be seen here perhaps the biggest extinct voleano in the world—Elgon. The protectorate, lying on either side of the equator, contains over a hundred square miles of perpetual snow and ice. It also contains a few spots in the rela- tively low-lying valley of the Nile, where the average daily heat is perhaps higher than in any other part of Africa. “Within the limits of this protector- ate are to be found specimens of nearly all of the most marked types of African man—Congo pigmies and the low, ape- like types of the Elgon and Semliki for- ests; the handsome Bahima, who are negroids as much related to the ancient Egyptians as to the average negro; the gigantic Turkana, the wiry, stunted Andorobo, the Apollo-like Masai, the naked Nile tribes, and the scrupulously clothed Baganda. ‘These last again are enthusiastic, casuistic Christians, while other tribes of the Nile province are fanatical Mohammedans. ‘The Bahima are, or were, ardent believers in witch- craft. The Basoga polytheists are bur- ‘dened with a multiplicity of minor dei- ties, while the Masai and kindred races have practically no religion at all. “Cannibalism lingers in the western corners of the protectorate, while the natives of the other parts are importing tinned apricots or are printing and pub- lishing in their own language sumniaries of their past history. ‘This is the coun- try of the okapi, the whale-headed stork, the chimpanzee, and the five-horned gi- taffe, the rhinoceroses with the longest horns, and the elephants with the big- gest tusks.”’ Animals Before Man in America. By F. A. Lucas. Illustrated. Pp. 285. 5 x 734 inches. New York: D. Ap- pleton & Co. 1902. $1.25 net. So little is generally known of the LITERATURE 4.3 animals that ages ago lived on the American continent that this book by Mr Lucas will be very welcome, espe- cially as it is written in simple, untech- nical language. Europe. By Frank G.Carpenter. With maps and illustrations. Pp. 456. 5% x7% inches. New York: Amer- ican Book Co. 1902. 7oc. This volume is one of Carpenter’s geographical readers for children. It is a simple, reliable, and interesting de- scription of the countries of Europe. A Ribbon of Iron. By Annette M. B. Meakin. Illustrated. Pp. 320. 5% x 8 inches. Westminster: Archibald Constable & Co. New York: E. P. Dutton & Co. 1902. $2 net. Miss Meakin describes the incidents and sights of a trip on the Siberian Railway in 1900, just before the Boxer troubles. The Land of the Amazons. Translated from the French of Baron de Santa- Anna Nery by George Humphery. With illustrations and map. Pp. 405. 6xg inches. Jondon: Sands & Co. New York: E. P. Dutton & Co. I9Ol. The first edition of this standard work on Brazil appeared in 1884; a second edition followed in 1899. ‘The author gives a very complete account of the nature of the country, of the character and life of the inhabitants, native and foreign, and of the explorations of the Amazon. Mr Humphery has made such a free and smooth translation that the fact that the work is a translation does not appear. Strange Lands Near Home. Illustrated. Pp. 138. Boston: Ginn &Co. 1902. W.E. Curtis, H. Butterworth, Fred- erick Schwatka, and other entertaining authors contribute to this little volume 4.4 brief sketches of Mexico, the West In- dies, and South America. makes an attractive reader for young people. William H. Alexander, Observer of the U. S. Weather Bureau, is the author of a bulletin entitled ‘‘ Hurricanes, espe- cially those of Porto Rico and St Kitts,”’ recently published by the Bureau. The chapter headings are: Theories as to the Origin and Movements of RotaryStorms; The book. THe NationaAL GEoGRAPHIC MaGAZINE Premonitory Signs of the Existence and. Movement of a Hurricane; The Ap- proach and Passage of a West Indian Hurricane — Suggestions Relative to Preparations for the Storm; Barometers, Their Care and Their Use; The United States Weather Bureau in the West In- dies; Porto Rico and its Hurricanes; St Kitts and its Hurricanes; Brief Histor- ical Notes on West Indian Hurricanes, Earthquakes, etc. NATIONAI GEOGRAPHIC SOG ina November 21, 1902. Dr G. K. Gilbert, of the Board of Manogers, in the chair. Mr O. H. Tittmann gave an address on the ‘‘ Work of the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey,’’ of which he is the honored Superintendent. The address is published in full in this number. At the con- clusion of the paper Dr Gilbert stated that the address was so complete that he doubted whether there were any points upon which questions could be asked. If members present, however, ,jhad any questions to present, they were welcome to do so. " There being no questions, Dr Gilbert said that he would like to ask how the valuable charts and maps published by the Coast and Geodetic Survey could be obtained by the pub- lic. Mr Tittmann replied that a certain num- ber of each edition were allotted to Congress- men and Senators for distribution among their constituents, and also a few copies were given to libraries. If a citizen was not able to obtain a map through his Congressman or Senator, he could purchase it from the Survey for a nomi- nal sum. November 14, 1902.—Vice-President W. J. McGee, LL.D, in the chair. Dr David T. Day, Chief of the Division of Mineral Resources of the U. S. Geological Survey, gave an illus- trated address on ‘‘ The Coal Resources of the United States.’’ November 22, 1902.—Dr G. K. Gilbert in the chair. Commander Robert E. Peary, U.S.N., gave an illustrated address on his ‘‘ Explora- tions in the Arctics, 1898-1102.”’ ANNOUNCEMENTS. REGULAR MEETINGS. January 2.—Annual meeting. Reports and elections. January 16.—‘‘ The Work of the Hydro- graphic Office, Navy Department.’? Com- mander W. H. Southerland. January 30.—‘‘ The Work of the Office of Experiment Stations, Agricultural Depart- mentee) DryAv Care: February 13.—‘‘The Work of the Census Office.”’” Hon. William R. Merriam. February 27.—‘‘ The Work of the Naval Ob- servatory.’’ Capt. Charles H. Davis. March 13.—‘‘The Work of the Geological Survey.’’ Hon. Charles D. Walcott. March 27.—‘‘The Work of the Library of Congress.’’ Hon. Herbert Putnam. POPULAR LECTURES January 9.—‘‘ The Turk and His Rebellious. Subjects.” Mr William E. Curtis. (Illus- trated. ) January 23 —‘‘ The Tragedy of Saint Pierre.’” Mr George Kennan. (Illustrated. ) February 6.—‘‘ From New York to London by Rail via Bering Strait... Mr Harry de Windt. February 20.—‘‘The Geographic Distribu- tion of Insanity in the United States.”’ Dr W. A. White, Director of the Binghampton State Hospital, New York. Provisional arrangements have also been made for lectures on Colombia and the Isth- mian Canal; America Before the Adyent of Man; Russia of Today (by Paul du Chaillu),. and a lecture by Mr John Muir. The Lenten Course of five lectures will be delivered in Columbia Theater, F street, near Twelfth, at 4.20 o’clock, on Wednesday after- noons of February 11, 18, 25, and March 4, 11. The subject of this course and the speakers assigned for the special topics will be an- nounced in a later program. MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY* (CORRECTED ‘tO DECEMBER I, 1902) ALABAMA JoHN, Sam’] Will. (Samuel Williamson), Room 3 20213 1 ave. 2725 Highland ave., Birmingham Lang, James H. (James Henry), Ala. Polytechnic Inst. College st., Auburn McCatuey, Henry, University of Alabama Metz, P. H. (Patrick Hughes), Ala. Polytechnic Institute. Auburn Puiuuirs, J. H. (John Herbert), High School Bldg. 2251 7 ave., Bir- mingham Searcy, J. T. (James Thomas), Tuscaloosa SHACKELFORD, HE. M. (Hdward Madison), State Normal College. Troy Smit, Eugene A. (Eugene Allen), University of Alabama Wirson, M. C. (Marshall Clarke), 648 Poplar st., Florence Wrnan, W.S. (William Stokes), University of Alabama ARIZONA Braxn, Wm. P. (William Phipps), University of Arizona. Tucson Burns, Wm. G. (William Gunton), U.S. Weather Bur. Office. Phoenix CHANDLER, A. J. (Alexander John), Mesa Kernnepy, Harry M. (Harry M ). Phoenix Ors, T. W.(Theodore Weld), 129 Cortezst. 117 N. Pleasant st., Prescott Owen, Wm. O. (William O——), U.S. Ex. Surveys. Williams ARKANSAS Purpun, A. H. (Albert Homer), University of Arkansas. ‘Fayetteville Ricutsein, J. R. (Jacob Riley), 800 Louisiana st. 615 West 16 street, Little Rock *In May, 1902, by amendment to the by-laws of the Society, a class of Fellows was established. The election of Fellows is vested in the Board of Managers. No Fellows have yet been elected, nor will any elections be made before January 1, 1903. ey MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY ¢ CALIFORNIA ARCHIBALD, James F. J. (James F—— J——), 966 18 street, Oakland ARNOLD, Ralph, Stanford University. 427 Lytton ave., Palo Alto Bascock, EK. 8. (Elisha Spurr), Mer. Hotel del Coronado. Coronado Baker, Lucius, P. O. Drawer 2596, Fresno Beit, Aaron H. (Aaron Hayden), corner 3 and G. 128 F st., Kureka Bensamin, Edward H. (Edward Hewlett), 331 Pine st.,San Francisco. 927 Filbert street, Oakland Berts, Rev. Joseph M. (Joseph M——,), Arcade Depot. Los Angeles Briaxer, Anson 8. (Anson Stiles), 6 California st.,San Francisco. 22351 Piedmont avenue, Berkeley Brake, Mrs Charles T. (Harriet W——), 2235 Piedmont Way, Berkeley Be R, J. C. (John Casper), Stanford University Briper, Norman, 217 South Broadway, Los Angeles. 100 Grand avenue, Pasadena Carpenter, Ford A.(Ford Ashman), U. 8. Weather Bureau Office, 1326 F street. 8655 2 street, San Digan CHAMBERLAIN, J. F. (James Franklin), State Normal Suhosl, Los Angeles. 40 South Hudson avenue, Pasadena Comstock, Theodore B. (Theodore B Coucu, Capt. Thomas, Oroville CunnincHam, H. L. (Harry Louis), 819 Market St., San Francisco. Crellin Hotel, 10 and Washington streets, Oakland Davinson, George, 530 California st. 2221 Wash’n st., San Francisco Duptey, William R. (William Russel), Leland Stanford, Jr., University Karon, F. W. (Frederic Ward), 216 Bush st., San Francisco. Redwood Erskine, Alfred M. (Alfred M——), Orange Grove Boulevard, Pasadena Hsrrevya, T. H. d’ (Theophilus Hope d’), Calif. Inst. for Deaf., Berkeley Firzaerap, R. M. (R ), 313 14 street, Oakland ), Los Angeles FoiiansBer, A. W. (Alonzo Walter), 202 Sansome street. 2426 Pine street, San Francisco Fosuay, James A. (James A——), 515 South Broadway. 2341 Scearff street, Los Angeles Giuuts, J. L. (James Louis), State Capitol Bldg.’ 12207 st., Sacramento Grirson, J. C. (Jewett Castello), 575 13 street, Oakland Grapy, Theodore, 2809 Kelsey street, Berkeley GrirFIin, Lieut. T. D. (T D—, Navy Yard, Mare Island Hamuin, Homer, Room 408 Byrne Block, 255 S. Broadway.-.1021S, Union avenue, Los Angeles HANDBURY, MAO H. (Thomas Henry), 809 Market st., San Francisco Harvey, F. H. (Frederic Hall), Galt Heanion, M. C. (Michael Charles), Room 12 McKie Building, 1023 5 St. NE. cor. 5 and D sts., San Diego. Brewster Hotel, cor. 4 and C sts. . CALIFORNIA 3 Heap, D. P. (David Porter), 69 Flood Building, 809 Market street. 2410 Steiner st., San Francisco Hincarp, H. W. (Hugene Woldemar), University of California. 2728 Bancroft Way, Berkeley Hupparp, Samuel, 98 Montecito avenue, cor. Lee street, Oakland Hurcurinson, Lincoln, University of California. 2727 Bancroft Way, Berkeley Hype, F. A. (F A——),415 Montgomery street, San Francisco Jacoss, Joseph, General Offices S. P. Co., San Francisco Kemprr, Louis, vu. s. N., Hotel Metropole, Oakland Kennarp, W. J. (W—— J——), M. R. C. P., Ventura Kurr, Mark B. (Mark Brickell), Grass Valley Keyes, W.S. (Winfield Scott), NW. cor. Post and Stockton streets, San Francisco Kinney, Abbot, 256 8. Spring street (Stimson Block), Los Angeles. 428 Ocean avenue, Santa Monica Knowtes, H. J. (A J ), 1167 Oak street, Oakland Lawson, Andrew C. (Andrew C——), University of California. 2461 Warring street, Berkeley Linrencrantz, A. (Augustus), 359 Telegraph avenue, Oakland Loueurines, R. H. (Robert Hills), University of California. Berkeley McCurcuHeon, H. J. (H J ), San Francisco McKen, J. R. (James Robert), Bardsdale McKevert, C. H. (Charles Henry), Santa Paula McLauauuin, Frank, Santa Cruz Maxwe tt, George H. (George H——), Claus Spreckles Building, San Francisco Mitts, Mrs C. T. (Susan Lincoln), President Mills College, Mills College Mirern, H. G. (Henry George), Rancho Santa Clara del Norte, Ventura Morse, Fremont, Room 39 Appraiser’s Building, cor. Washington and Sansome streets. 1641 Bush street, San Francisco Murr, John, Martinez NrwearpEN, Geo. J. (George Joseph), u. s. a., Ft. Mason, San Francisco Newsom, J. F. (John Flesher), Stanford University Otps, W. J. (Wilbur Jason), 4183 8. Grand avenue, Los Angeles Parsons, Edward T. (Edward Taylor), 118 2 st. Occidental Hotel, cor. Montgomery and Sutter streets, San Francisco Pisrce, Harry, 728 Montgomery street. 712 Pine street, San Francisco Prerra, Leopoldo Schiappa, Ventura Porrreo, M. V. (Matthew Vincent), 819 Market street, San Francisco. 2915 Van Buren avenue, Alameda Power, Geo. C. (George Coffin), 152 Main st. Kalorama st., Ventura Rernstein, J. B. (Jacob Bert), 217 Sansome street. 906 Ellis street, San Francisco 4 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Reiter, Geo. C. (George Cook), U.S. F. S. “ Wisconsin,” San Francisco Riorpan, D. M. (Denis Matthew), 404 Bradbury Building. 822 South Alvarado street, Los Angeles Rirrer, Wm. BE. (William Emerson), University of California. 2434 Durant avenue, Berkeley Rocxwet1, W. 1. (William Lincoln), 2129 17 street, Bakersfield Roperrs, Aug. F. (Augustus Frederick), Coast Survey Office. 2516 Broadway, San Francisco Rust, Frank N. (Frank Nelson), 122 W. 3st. 137 N. Olivest., Los Angeles ScHuyieEr, Jas. D. (James Dix), 257 South Spring st. 419 West Wash- ington street, Los Angeles ScuwatKa, Mrs Ava J. B. (Ava J— B——), Los Angeles Smeppere, W. R. (William Renwick), 224 Sansome street. 1611 Larkin street, San Francisco Stanton, J. C. J Clark), C. E., Rio Vista Srepuens, F, (Frank), University and Fillmore avenue, San Diego Symmes, Frank J. (Frank Jameson), 725 Mission street. 630 Harrison street, San Francisco Tapor, H. F. (A F——), Sunnyside Van Linw, C. C. (Charles C——), President State Normal School, Chico Von per Ropp, Alfred, 121 Lake street, Oakland Vroman, A. C. (Adam Clark), 60 EK. Colorado st. 188 E. Colorado street, Pasadena West, Major Frank, 1714 Van Ness avenue, San Francisco Wirxinson, W. (Warring), Institution for Deaf and Blind, Berkeley Woon, H. P. (Henry Patton), 1519 D street. 1111 Cedar st., San Diego COLORADO Anperson, George G. (George Gray), 1255 Gayloro street, Denver Brrsecker, C. H. W. (Carl Herman Walter), 952 Downing ave., Denver Brrrnoup, Edward L. (Edward Louis), Washington ave. 1 st., Golden Brackmer, H. M. (H M—-), Geddings Building, Colorado Springs Boprisu, F. V. (Frederick Valentine), Doyle Block, 307 Victor avenue. 319 S. 5 street, Victor Boynton, G. M. (G M——.), Coaldale. Hayden Creek Bryant, W. H. (William Henry), 621 EK. and C. Block, 17 and Curtis streets. 1107 Pearl street, Denver Buikiey, Frank, 407 and 408 Equitable Bldg. 901 Logan ave., Denver Buixkuey, Fred. G. (Frederick Groendycke), Equitable Building. 965 Pennsylvania avenue, Denver CampBELL, Peter, Register United States Land Office, Akron CarHart, W.S. (W s ), Engineer of Mining, Coaldale Cuoarrr, Joseph K. (Joseph Kittredge), 814 Boston Building, cor. 17 and Champa streets. 1720 Sherman avenue, Denver COLORADO 5 Coox, E. H. (Hzekiel Hanson), Ph. D., 818, 819, 820 Equitable Building, Denver. 2429 12 street, Boulder Craery, F. W. (Francis Whittemore), Colorado College. 1715 Wood avenue, Colorado Springs Curupert, L. M. (Lucius Montrose), Boston Building, cor. 17 and Champa streets. 1550 Logan avenue, Denver Fetiows, A. L. (Abraham Lincoln), Room 10 State Capitol Building. 1159 Logan avenue, Denver Ferris, Cornelius, Jr., Rohling Block, Fort Collins Frnneman, Nevin M. (Nevin Melancthon), Univ. of Colorado, Boulder Harr, Edward L. (Hdward Lawrence), 409 Bennett avenue, National Annex Block, Rooms 5,6,and7. 140 W. Masonic ave., Cripple Creek Harpcastir, Thos. H. (Cfhomas Hughlett), Boston Building, 835 17 st. Charline place, 1429 Pennsylvania avenue, Denver Hits, Victor G. (Victor Gardiner), 879 Bennett avenue. 423 E. Carr avenue, Cripple Creek Hopkins, W. J.(W J ), Olney Jayne, W. A.(\Walter Addison), 416 McPhee Building. Denver Club. 17 and Glenarm streets, Denver Kettry, Walter 8. (Walter S——), Leadville Korie, Frank M. (Frank M——), Box 641, Victor Lay, H. C. (A C ), Telluride Loyetanp, Francis W. (Francis William), 908-909 Equitable Building, 17 and Stout streets. 1252 Corona street, Denver Lunpsrrom, John E. (John Emil). 11 Gazette Building. 3819 Cheyenne road, Loraine, Colorado Springs McReynorps, O. O. (Orval Omar), 709 Equitable Building, 775 17 street. 1715 Vine street, Denver Manp, Walter, The Denver Club, Denver Mrcuersen, Henry, The Tremont, 416 16 street, Denver Mourron, A. B. (Arthur Billings). 709 Ernest & Cramner Building, cor. 17 and Curtis streets. 1250 Logan avenue, Denver Preaco, Wm. (William), City Hall. 2007 Greenwood street, Pueblo Pearce, Harold V. (Harold V ), 1880 Gaylord st. west, Denver Prarce, Richard, Argo Preston, Porter J. (Porter J—), Las Animas Reep, H. W. (1 W—), Ouray Rocers, Henry T. (Henry Treat), Boston Building, cor. Champa and 17 streets. 1739 East 13 avenue Rocers, Platt, McPhee Building, cor. 17 and Glenarm streets. 1524 Washington avenue, Denver Snyper, Zachariah X, 928 9 street, Greeley Srapiteron, William, Editor Denver Republican, Denver Tears, Daniel W. (Daniel Wade), 614 Boston Building, 17 and Champa streets. 1200 Williams street, Denver, 6 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Warp, Dr W.S. (W S—), 202 Boston Block, Denver West, Geo. H. (George Henry), 56 Railroad Building, 1515 Larimer st., Denver. 714 10 street, Greeley Wetmore, Edward D. (Edward Ditmars), Warren, Pa. Broadmoor, Colorado Springs Wiis, Frank G. (Frank G ), Cripple Creek Woops, F. M. (Frank Milo), Mining Exchange Building. 1806 N. Cas- cade avenue, Colorado Springs Woopson, Miss E. T. (EH T—.), 238 West 2 avenue, Denver CONNECTICUT Barroii, Com’dr Henry H. (Henry Harris), u.s. x., 9 Elm st., Norwalk Bartiert, Charles G. (Charles G——), Black Hall BrxiEr, James W. (James Wilson), Pastor Second Cong] Church. 5 Broad street, New London Brewer, Wm. H. (William Henry), 4 Sheffield Hall, Grove and Pros- pect streets.. 418 Orange street, New Haven BrinsMabDk, William G. (William Gold), The Ridge, Washington Butter, Maj. J. Hartwell (John Hartwell), u.s. a., 276 Laurel street, Hartford CatHoun, John E. (John Edward), Cornwall ConicitEuGH, Mrs Kmma Shaw, Journalist and Lecturer, 238 Gano street, Providence, R. I. Thompson CorweEtL, Mrs Thomas L. (Thomas Lavender), 49 Seymour ave., Derby Dana, Edward 8. (Edward Salisbury), 4 Peabody Museum. 24 Hill- house avenue, New Haven Davis, Mrs Mary R. (Mary R. Gale), Training School, Clinton avenue: 971 Fairfield avenue, Bridgeport Drank, Chas. W. (Charles Winslow), 938 Main street. 555 Noble avenue, Bridgeport Emmry, H. C. (Henry Crosby), 270 Crown street, New Haven Farnuam, W.S. (Wallace Strong), 1184-1138 Tremont Building, Boston, Mass. South Windsor Forp, Dr W. J. (William J——), Washington Gop, C. L. (Charles Lockwood), Cream Hill, West Cornwall Gorp, T. 8. (Theodore Sedgwick), Cream Hill, West Cornwall Graves, Henry 8. (Henry Solon), 360 Prospect street. 3837 Humphrey street, New Haven. Grecory, Herbert KE. (Herbert Ernest), Peabody Museum, Yale Univer- sity, High street. 399 Berkeley Hall, Yale University, New Haven Horcukiss, H. Stuart (Henry Stuart), Secretary L. Candee Rubber Co. 55 Hillhouse avenue, New Haven Jupp, Edwin D. (Edwin Dale), 389 Allyn st. 58 Garden st., Hartford CONNECTICUT 7 MacCurpy, George Grant, Room 9, Peabody Museum. 237 Church street, Hew Haven Perkins, J. Deming (J Deming), Litchfield Quincy, Miss Mary Perkins, 47 Hillhouse avenue, New Haven Rice, Wm. North (William North), Wesleyan University. 31 College place, Middletown Rogpinson, Chalfant (James Francis Chalfant), Yale University. 68 Trumbull street, New Haven Sace, Jno. H. (John Hall), Portland Sauispury, Mrs Evelyn MacCurdy, 237 Church street, New Haven Sanrorp, Geo. B. (George Bliss), Litchfield StrorcKkeL. Carl, Norfolk SroucHton, Bradley, 102 Havemeyer Hall, Columbia University, 116 street, New York. 339 Prospect street, New Haven Toumey, J. W. (James William), 360 Prospect street. 459 Prospect street, New Haven Tyier, Morris F. (Morris Franklin), Woodbridge Hall, Wall street. 33 College street, New Haven DELAWARE Avis, Capt. E. $8. (Edward Spaw), u. s. A., Delaware College, Newark my r > . ® oC Leisen, Theodore A. (Theodore Alfred), 1621 Lovering avenue. 2204 Gilpin avenue, Wilmington DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA ABBE, Cleveland, Weather Bureau. 2017 I street Aspe, Cleveland, Jr. 2017 I street Apert, 8. T. (Silvanus Thayer). 725 18 street Acker, Wm. J. (William Jacob). The Iowa, 13 and O streets AckrrMan, A. A. (Albert Ammerman). Care of Navy Department Ackiey, S. M. (Seth Mitchell). 2002 R street Appison, Clare G. (Mrs Murray Addison). 1765 N street ADLER, Cyrus, Smithsonian Institution. 1706 S street Attes, Milton E. (Milton Everett). 1307 Clifton street ALEXANDER, T. H. (Thomson Hankey), 607 7 street. 1711 Q street Atvorp, Major Henry E. (Henry Elijah), Dept. of Agric. 900 B st. SW Ames, Alfred H. (Alfred Heno). 1760 Q street Anprews, Byron, 339 Pennsylvania avenue. 1473 Park street Anprews, Geo. L. (George L.). 2400 Columbia road AnpreEws, Mrs Jennie Parker. The Colonial Hotel APLIN, 8. A. (Stephen Arnold), Geol. Survey, 1330 Fst. 1917 I street AsPINWALL, J. A. (John Abel), St. Thomas P. E. Ch. 17 Dupont circle 8 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Austin, O. P. (Oscar Phelps), 1333 F st. (Bu. of Stat.). 1620 Mass. ave AveRILL, F. L. (Frank Lloyd), Office Sup. Arch. 1479 Columbia road Ayres, H. B. (Horace Beemer). U.S. Geological Survey Ayres, Miss Susanne Caroline. 1813 13 street Bass, Cyrus C. (Cyrus Cates), Geol. Survey. 1118 Rhode Island ave Bacon, Samuel H., 404 7 street. 1326 Columbia road Batzey, Chas. B. (Charles Brooks), 911 F street. 1424 Staughton street Batiey, Mrs F. H. (Anna Bailey). 1815 Riggs place Batnry, Lt. Cmdr. F. H. (Frank Harvey), Bu. Steam Eng. 1815 Riggs pl Battery, Vernon, Department of Agriculture. 1854 Kalorama avenue Bairp, Cmdr. G. W. (George Washington), Navy Dept. 1505 R. I. ave Bairp, James W. (James Wooster), War Dept. 734 Flintst., Brightwood Baker, Frank, National Zoological Park. 1728 Columbia road Baker, Marcus, 1439 K street -- 1905 16 street Bautpwin, David H. (David Henry), Geol. Survey. 1000 24 street Baupwiy, M. W. (Marcus Wickliffe), Bu. Eng. and Pr. 3000 13 street Baupwin, 8. Torrey (Stephen Torrey), Navy Department. 925 S street Batpwin, Wm. D. (William Dickson), 25 Grant place. 1734 Q street Bauuinasr, M. F. or Minnie F. (Minnie Fazio). The Riggs House Battocu, G. W. (George Williamson), 1006 F st. 2445 Brightwood ave Barser, A. W. (Amherst Willoughby), G. L. Off. 703 Hast Capitol st Barnarb, E. C. (Edward Chester), Geol. Survey. 1807 G street — Barnarp, Job, U.S. Court-House. 1306 Rhode Island avenue Barnum, Miss Charlotte C. (Charlotte C——). Coast Survey Barrineton, Wm. L. (William Leadbeater). 3014 N street Barrier, Lt. Cmdr. Charles W., vu. s. n. Navy Department Bartiett, Miss Harriet. 122 East Capitol street Barter, John R. (John Russell), Navy Department. 1622 21 street Barton, L. Leland (Leslie Leland), 604 H street Bassprt, Frank H. (Frank Howard), War Department. 2209 13 street Barren, R. Grosvenor (Robert Grosvenor), 1317 F street. 501 13 street Baurr, L. A. (Louis Agricola), Coast and Geod. Survey. 1925 I street Baytor, J. B. (James Bowen). Coast and Geodetic Survey Braman, George H. (George Herbert). 2232 Massachusetts avenue Beaman, W. M. (William Major), Geol. Survey. The Maury, 19 & G sts Bess, H. C. (Edward Crosby), Geol. Survey. 1227 11 street Becx, William H. (William Henry), 1424 N. Y. ave. The Bancroft Becker, Edmund, Light-House Board. 1815 Yale street Bett, Aileen A. (Aileen Adine). 1521 35 street Bett, Alexander Graham. 1331 Connecticut avenue Bei, A. Melville (Alexander Melville). 1525 35 street Bett, Charles J., 1405 G street. 1327 Connecticut avenue BELL, Bvt. Brig. Gen. Geo. (George). 1909 G street DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 9 Breve, H. Oliver, M. D. (Edward Oliver), The Farragut. 922 17 street Benxert, M. V. (Melitta Viola), P. O. Dept., Room 222. 2010 35 street Benner, Frank VY. (Frank Vincent). The Arlington Bennett, Walter J. (Walter James), 24 and M sts. 1248 Princeton st Brnson, Berry (Berry Greenwood). 341 Trumbull street Beremann, H. H. (Henry Hermann), 5117 street. 1444 Bacon street . Bernavov, Lieut. J. B. Navy Department Berry, James, Weather Bureau. 14 3 street SE Bickrorp, Capt. Nathan, 914 F street. 32 Quincy street Bren, Morris, General Land Office. Takoma Park, D. C BicEiow, Frank H. (Frank Hagar), Weather Bureau. 1625 Mass. ave Biceiow, Otis, Avenel, Md. 1501 18 street Bincuam, Judge EK. F. (Edward Franklin), Court-House. 1907 H street Bincuam, D. J. (David Judson), vu. s. A., retired. Bisserr, Peter. “Twin Oaks,” Woodley lane Buacxk, H. Campbell (Henry Campbell). 2516 14 street Bratir, H. B. (Herbert Buxton), Geol. Survey. 3025 16 street Buatr, John 8. (John Sylvanus), 1416 F street. 1820 I street Bioop, Ellen E. (Ellen Elizabeth), P.O. Dept. 516 East Capitol street Biount, Henry F. (Henry Fitch), 1405 G st. The Oaks, 3101 31 street Biowers, Miss Etta (Miss Hosetta), Census Office. 602 M street SE BoarpMan, Wm. J. (William Jarvis). 1801 P street Boarman, Mrs. L. M. (1. M ye 1104 Maryland avenue SW Bonp, Mary E. (Mary Eachus), Blake School. 818 New Jersey avenue Bonp, 5. R. (Samuel Robert), 321 4% street. 13 Iowa circle Borrrneav, John B. (John Baptiste). 315 A street NE BourGeat, Mrs B. kK. (Bella Kilbourn), Lib. of Cong. 1629 R street Boutpin, E. D. (Ellie Daniel), General Land Office. 1211 13 street Bourquin, Katharine, P. O. Department. 2118 Wyoming avenue Boycr, Lizzie F. (Klizabeth Ficklen). The Grafton BraprorD, R. B. (Royal Bird), Navy Department. 1522 P street Bravery, Geo. L. (George Lothrop). 1503 21 street Brapiey, Mrs Laura A. (Laura Ann). 936 I street Brewer, Clara G. (Clara Gertrude). The Stratford, Mt. Pleasant BrickenstEINn, J. H. (John Henry), Patent Office. 1603 19 street Bricut, Rich’d R. (Richard Riggs), Navy Dept. 218 Maryland ave. NE Brisrou, Rey. Dr. Frank M. 330 C street Brirron, Alex. (Alexander), Glover Bldg., 1419 F street. 18365 street Bropir, Basil M. (Basil M——), Treasury Dept. 1330 New York ave Brooxs, Alfred H. (Alfred Hulse), Geol. Survey. 1820 Wallach place Brooks, N. M. (Newton May), P. O. Department. 224 A street SH Brown, Miss Rachel C. (Rachel Cuthbert), Bu. Ind. Aff. 1008 N st Brown, Geo. H. (George Hay), Off. Pub. Bdgs.& Gds. 1357 Roanoke st Brown, Geo. W. (George Whitfield), 1406 G st. 1710 Connecticut ave 10 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Brown, L. K. (Lewis Kirk), Treasury Department. 134 C street SE Brown, L. 8. (Lorenzo Starr). 705 15 street Browne, Aldis B. (Aldis Birdsey), 1419 F street. 1528 P street Browne, Alice Key. The Portland Brumpaueu, G. M., M. D. (Gaius Marcus). 905 Massachusetts avenue Bucx, Miss Ada P. (Ada Pamelia). 635 Maryland avenue NE Burt, H. L. (Herbert Luther), Off. Chief of Engineers. 1701 V street BuLktry, Barry, Bond building, 14and N. Y.ave. Barton’s, 15 st near H Bumpureey, M. H. (Marvin H ), care J. C. Burrows, U.S. Senate Bumsreap, Albert H. (Albert Hoit), Geol. Survey. 734 12 street Bunker, William Mitchell, Room 19, 1417 G street. Hotel Normandie Burcue t, N. L. (Norval Landon), 1325 F street. 1102 Vermont avenue Burpert, 8. 8. (Samuel Swinfin), 925 F St. Glencarlyn, Va Burperr, Walter W., 1307 F street. 1026 Vermont avenue Bureuss, C. H. (Charles Hyde), 1341 8 street. 1333 8 street Burr, W. H. (William Henry). 1539 14 street Burt, G. Rodney. 218 C street Burier, W. H. (William Henry), 609 C street. 200 8 street SW Bynum, Maud. 1742 Q street Byrnes, Eugene A, (Eugene Alexander), Patent Office. 2539 18 street CaLEr, Samuel Prescott, War Department. 1828 H street CALLAHAN, John, Wash. & Norf. Str. whf., foot 7 street. 2817 14 street CaLvert, Edgar B. (Edgar Bassett), Weather Bureau. The Landmore Catvo, J. B. (Joaquin Bernardo), Costa Rican Legation. 21115 street CAMPBELL, Miss Anna. 924 D street SW CaMPBELL, William 8. (William Shaw). 1841 R street Capps, Naval Constructor W. L. Navy Department Careton, M. A. (Mark Alfred), Dept. of Agric. 1715 Lincoln ave. NE Carmopy, John D. (John Doyle), 314 9 street. 1211 Vermont avenue Carpenter, Frank G. (Frank George). 1318 Vermont avenue Carr, Wilbur J. (Wilbur John), Department of State. The Gladstone Carr, W. K. (William Kearny), 1008 F street. 1415 K street Carrot, Mitchell (Alexander Mitchell), Columbian Univ. ‘The Cairo Carter, W. F., Treasury Department. 1320 Emerson street Carver, Frank N. (Frank Noble), 1416 F street. 1431 L street CatiLin, Capt. Robert. 1428 Euclid place CHAMBERLAIN, Miss Jane E. 3 Grant place CHaAmBeErs, Lieut. E. B. (Emmet Butler). 6 1 street NE CHANDLER, G. V. (George Vose), Patent Office. 213 C street SE Cuapman, R. H. (Robert Hollister), Geol. Survey. 2055 Florida avenue Cuerry, Chas. H. (Charles Henry), Winder Building. 1115 S street Curster, Major James, v. s. A., retired. 601 21 street CueEsrEr, Josephine M. (Miss Josephine M.). 1016 11 street DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA i Curckerina, J. W. (John White). . The Portner Curtron, Robt. 8. (Robert S. ), State Dept. 225 Delaware avenue NE Cuuss, Mrs C. F. (Caroline F——). 1721 Corcoran street CiaFtLtn, Price Colby, 907 F street. 1117 O street Ciacerr, Chas. W. (Charles William), 422 5 street. 803 A street SE Crapp, J. M. (John Martin). 1024 Vermont avenue Crark, Charles 8. (Charles Shedd), Dennison School. The Manhattan CrarKk, Egbert A., D. D. 8. (Egbert Asahel). 600 13 street Ciarkr, S. A. (Samuel Asahel), Law Librarian. General Land Office Cray, Gen. Cecil, Department of Justice. 4 1513 S street Creaver, F. M. (Frank M.), Weather Bureau. 2311 M street Corr, T. L. (Theodore Lee), 18 Corcoran Bldg. 1615 Florida avenue Concer, Miss Florence W. (Florence West), Station C. 1141 N. H. ave Coo.iper, L. A. (Louis Arthur), 1403 F street. 1423 Welling place Corra, Luis F. (Luis Felipe). 1704 Q street CornisH, Major G. G. (G G ). 225 1 street SH Corson, Geo. E. (George Edgar), War Department. 1154 17 street Corton, John B. (John B ))s Sun building CoviLun, Frederick V.(Frederick Vernon), Dept. Agr. 1836 Californiaave Cowsrtt, Arthur, Wyatt building, 1403 F street. 634 I street NE Cox, W. P. (William Porter), 532 17 street. 315 Florida avenue Cox, W. V. (William Van Zandt), 2d Nat. Bk. Emery pl., Brightwood Coyte, B. J. (Bernard J e 834 13 street Crane, Augustus, Jr., 604 14 street. 1344 F street Crew, J. H. (James Hart), Room 510, P. O. Dept. 1532 9 street Cripter, Hon. Thos. W. (Thomas Wilbur). Crossy, Oscar T. (Oscar Terry), Atlantic Building. Cleveland Park . Cross, Whitman (Charles Whitman), Geol. Survey. 2138 Bancroft pl Crowe.t, Mrs Anna 8. (Anna Silliman). 938 I street CuLBertson, Mrs Anna G. 32 Grant place Cummines, H. 8. (Horace Stuart), Kelloge Building. 1756 K street Curry, J. L. M. (Jabez Lamar Monroe). 1736 M street Curry, W. W. (William Wallace), Pension Building. 1510 9 street Curtis, Henry A. (Henry Adams), Winder Building. Takoma Park Curtis, William E. (William Eleroy), Post Bldg. 1801 Connecticut ave CusHtna, 5. C. (Sallie Corwin). 320 Indiana avenue Custis, Geo. W. N. (George Washington Neale). 110 East Capitol street Custis, J. B. Gregg (James Bayard Gregg). 912 15 street Dati, Wm. H. (William Healey), Smithsonian Institution. 1119 12 street Darton, N. H. (Nelson Horatio), Geol. Survey. Daveuerty, Rev. Jerome, S.J., Georgetown College. Georgetown Univ: Davenport, J. L. (James La Roy), Bureau of Pensions. 2501 14 street Davis, Arthur P. (Arthur Powell), 1330 F street. 2212 1 street 12 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Davis, Mrs Jennie T. (Jennie Taylor), Geol. Sur. 3323 Holmead ave Dawes, Charles G. (Hon. Charles Gates) Dawson, Thos. F. (Thonias Fulton), Star Building. 2572 University pl Day, David T. (David Talbot), Geol. Survey. 1302 R street Dr Catnpry, Wm. A. (William Augustin), War Dept. 914 Farragut sq De Menrirr, J. H. (John Henry). 1335 Vermont avenue DrrweiLrr, F. M. (Frederick May), 420-422 11 street. --504 I street Devine, John T. (John T—). The Shoreham, 15 and H streets Devereux, Mrs M. (Maria). 3016 Dumbarton avenue Devirr, G. R. (G— R »s 7 and D streets Dewey, George. 1747 Rhode Island avenue Dewey, Lyster H. (Lyster Hoxie), Dept. of Agric. 1837 Wallach pl Dicxins, Capt. F. W. (Francis William), vu. s. N. 1334 19 street Dickson, Med. Insp. 8. H. Samuel Henry), u.s. n., Marine Bar.. 732 21 st Dinter, J. S. (Joseph Silas), Geol. Survey. 1454 Staughton street Donen, Arthur J. (Arthur J ), 1403 F street. Hotel Stratford DorrMAnnN, Rev. J. E. A. (Rev. John E—— A——). 927 Westminster st Donn, Edw. W. (Edward William), 913 G street. 1708 16 street Dorre.ue, Ed. (Edward), 721 14 street. 928 I street Dovatass, Mrs Helen. Cedar Hill, Anacostia Downtne, Mrs Mary. 1006 11 street Doy tr, John T, eae Thomas), Civil Service Com. 2104 Wyoming ave Du Bors, Chas. L. (Charles Lamartine), Gen. Land Off. 1421 Chapin st Durrretp, Will Ward, Coast Survey. 1631 Q street Dumont, Jas. A. (James Allen), Treasury Dew 2009 Kalorama ave Duncan, D. Wallace (David Wallace), Off. Aud. P.O. Dept. 1155 st. NE DUMGANED, Chas. C. (Charles Coltman), 317-319 9 street. 1300 17 st Duron, Maj. Clarence Edward. War Department Dyr, P. E. (Peleg Edwin), 514 11 street. 1403 L street Dynr, Miss Nellie C. (Ellen Cooper). 1702 9 street EKasrsriine, H. V. (Horace Virgil), War Department. 1541 9 street Epson, Jno. Joy (John Joy), 900 F street. 1324 16 street Epwarps, Thos., Jr., 225 Pa. ave. SE. 18 North Carolina ave. SE EimBecx, William, Coast Survey. 1106 New York avenue Expriver, G. H. (George Homans), Geol. Survey. Chevy Chase, Md Emmons, 8. F. (Samuel Franklin), 1830 F street. 1721 H street Enocus, Mrs Annie H. Erpacu, John, Geol. Survey. 122 3 street SE Esrasproox, Leon M. (Leon M ). 1026 17 street Evermann, Barton W. (Barton Warren), Fish Commission. 412 T street Ezporg, Richard (Count Richard von). 918 N street Farrrietp, W. B. (Walter Browne), Coast Survey. 1717 DeSales street Fatriny, Frances 8. (Frances Sarah). Ridge road Hast DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 13 Farasepr, L. T. (Louis T.), Bureau of Pensions. 313 Hast Capitol street Farquuar, Henry, Census Office. 1615 Florida avenue Frounkr, Charles M. (Charles Mather). 2013 Massachusetts avenue Fisker, Rey. A. S. (Asa Severance). 1340 Q street Fiscuer, E. G. (Ernst Georg), Coast Survey. 436 New York avenue Fisuer, Robert J. (Robert Strettle Jones), 614 F st. 1915 Kalorama ave Frren, C. H. (Charles Hall), Geol. Survey. 3062 Q street Frren, Henry W. (Henry Winslow). 1518 Connecticut avenue Freea, James E. (James Edwin), 1406 G st. 1747 Rhode Island ave Fiercuer, Miss A. C. (Alice Cunningham). 214 1 street SH Frrrcuer, L. C. (Louis Cass), Geol. Survey. Chapin flats, 1415 Chapin st Friercumr, Robert, M. D., Medical Museum. The Portland Frinr, Weston, Public Library. The Westover, 16 and U streets Frynn, H. F. (Harry Franklin), Coast Survey. 31 B street SE Foor, Morris J. (Morris Julius), War Department. 1729 HL street Forney, Edward O. (Edward Otis), Patent Office. 514 FE street Forwoop, Gen. W. H. (W H—.). 1425 Euclid place Fosrer, Miss E. B. (Ellen Burroughs). 1402 Binney street Forsyrn, Geo. A. (George Alexander). 1509 Rhode Island avenue Foster, John W. (John Watson). 1525 18 street Fowrrr, Edwin H. (Edwin Horatio), Coast Survey. 1126 East Cap. st Fratrey, L. A. (Leonard August), Navy Pay Office. The Gloucester PRANKENFIELD, H. C. (Harry Crawford), Weather Bu. The Buckingham Frencu, Geo. N. (George Norris), Treasury Department. 1884 I street Frencu, Owen B., Coast Survey 2212 F street Frispy, Prof. Edgar. 1607 31 street Funnier, Chf. Jus. M. W. (Melville Weston), Supreme Court. 1801 F st Futon, H. K. (Horace Kimball), 314 9 street. 1211 Vermont avenue Gaar, N. P. (Nathaniel Parker), Seaton School. 1126 5 street Gan, Thos. M. (Thomas Monroe), 1414 F street. 1314 L street Gauaupet, EH. M. (Edward Miner), Gallaudet College. 1 Kendall Green Gannett, Henry, U.S. Geol. Survey. 1881 3 street Gannett, S.S. (Samuel Stinson), Geol. Survey. 2556 University place GarnterR, Madeleine A.(Madeleine Adelaide), P.O. Dept. 1829 Oregonave Garriott, E. B. (Edward Bennett), Weather Bureau. 1248 Princeton st Garrison, Miss Carl L..(Carl Louise), Phelps School. 1300 Lydecker ave Gares, Merrill E. (Merrill Edwards), 1429 N. Y. ave. 1315 N. H. ave Garscunr, Albert S. (Albert Samuel), Bureau Ethnology. 2020 15 street Grsson, George, 15th street and Pennsylvania avenue. 1434 R. I. avenue GiiBert, Mrs C. E. (C—— Evelyn). 1455 Missouri avenue Giipert, G. K. (Grove Karl), Geol. Survey. 1919 16 street GiLiamM, Frank, Weather Bureau. Cleveland Park, D. C, Gitert,. Alfred 8. (Alfred Silas), Philadelphia. 1614 20 street 14 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY GiLMAN, Daniel C. (Daniel Coit), 1439 K street. 614 Park avenue, Balto Grover, C. C. (Charles Carroll), Riggs National Bank. 20 Lafayette sq Guover, John J., Department of Justice. 1505 R street Goprrey, E. D. (Eliasaph Dayid), Pension Office. 942 Westminster st GoLtpMAN, H. A. (Edward Alphonso), Department of Agriculture. Goong, Rich’d U. (Richard Urquhart), Geol. Survey. Lanier Heights GoruHAM, Geo. C. (George Congdon), Bond Building. 1763 Q street Grauam, Andrew B. (Andrew Butler), 1230 Pa. ave. 1407 16 street Grauam, Agnes M. (Agnes Montgomery). 17382 Connecticut avenue GraHam, Mrs J. A. (J. A ). 2000 H. street Granpprey, Maj. Clement de. 1918 H street Grant, Alex. (Alexander), P. O. Department. 1347 L street Graves, Edward. 927 Massachusetts avenue Greety, A. W. (Adolphus W.), War Department. 1914 G street GREEN, Bernard R. (Bernard Richardson), Lib. of Cong. 1738 N street Green, Darius A. (Darius Alonzo), Navy Department. 1123 17 street GREENE, Dr Edw. L. (Edward Lee), Catholic University. Brookland GREENE, Samuel H. (Samuel Harrison). 1320 Q street GreeENnkE, Mrs Wallace (Josie Craig). 904 S street Griswotp, H. A. (Henry Adams). Maple avenue, Anacostia Grosvenor, Gilbert H. (Gilbert Hovey), Corcoran Bldg. 1328 18 street Hackney, Fielder Poston, 2806 Pa. ave. 2602 Pennsylvania avenue Haener, A. B. (Alexander Burton), Court-House. 1818 H street Hagur, Arnold, Geol. Survey. 1724 I street Hatt, C. L. or Cyrus L. (Cyrus Lyman). 1554 Yale street Hat, Sam’! K. (Samuel Kellogg), Govt. Printing Office. 421 H street Hatt, W. L. Bureau of Forestry Hamittron, Dr William, Bureau of Education. 1023 Vermont avenue Hamtuin, Teunis S. (Tennis Slingerland). 1806 Connecticut avenue Hansen, John (J. A. H. John). 704 7 street Harprine, Miss Gena R. (Gena Russell). The Shoreham Harpwick, 8. H., Southern Railway Co. 1315 New Hampshire avenue Haran, Justice John M. (John Marshall), Sup. Court. 1401 Euclid pl Harris, W. T. (William Torrey), Bureau of Education. 13803 P street Harrison, Miss Carrie. 1322 14 street Hart, A. (Abraham), 420 7 street. ' 2005 Kalorama avenue Hart, Amos W. (Amos Winfield), 625 F street. 717 10 street Harvey, Lt. Col. Philip F., Dep. Surg. Gen., u.s.a. Surg. Gen. Office Haven, Henry L. (Henry Langdon), 623 F street. 2005 I street Haw tery, John M. (John Mitchell), Navy Department. 1514 R street Hay, E. B. (Edwin Barrett), 1425 N. Y. avenue. 1512 Corcoran street Hay, John, State Department. 800 16 street Hay, W. P. (William Perry). 311 F street DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 15 ’ Haypen, Lieut. Everett. Navy Department Hayes, C. Willard (Charles Willard). Geological Survey Hazarp, Daniel L. (Daniel Lyman), Coast Survey. 1445 Mass. avenue Hazverr, Isaac. The Hamilton, 14 and K streets Heap, J. F. (John Frazier). 2015 R street Hearp, Hon. A. (Augustine). 921 18 street Hearst, Mrs Phebe A. (Phebe Apperson). 1400 N. H. avenue Heaton, A. G. (Augustus George). 1618 17 street Heprick, Henry B. (Henry Benjamin), Naval Obser’y. 2301 32 street Heerr, Col. A. (Anthony). 2026 Hillyer place Hetrterin, Giles F. (Giles Fabian), 1203 F street. 926 B street SW Henperson, C. W. (Charles W ), 507 12 street. The Chapin Henperson, Julia (Julia Doty), Indian Office. * 1826 G street Henperson, John B., Jr. (John Brooks), 1416 F st. 1601 Florida ave Henperson, Miss N. (N ). Address unknown. Henpers, M. (Matthew), General Land Office. The Garfield, 901 13 st Hennic, Frederick, Washington Barracks. 1831 5 street Henry, A. J. (Alfred Judson), Weather Bureau. 1322 Columbia road Henry, E. 8. (Edwin Stanton), Patent Office. 1320 Columbia road Hersert, Hon. H. A. (Hilery Abner), 1419 G street. 1612 21 street Herron, Joseph 8. (Joseph Sutherland), War Department. The Donald Herron, Wm. H. (William Harrison), Geol. Survey. 1508 Q street Heuvercn, Christian, 26 and Water streets. 1307 New Hampshire ave Hickey, Susanna G. (Susanna Goode), Harrison School. 1202 Q street Hicks, Frederick C. (Frederick C——). Library of Congress Hirston, Mrs Walter. The Concord Hicernson, Rear Admiral F. J. Treasury Department Hi, E. J. (Ebenezer J ), House Reps. The Cochran. Norwalk, Conn Hint, David J. (David Jayne), Department of State. 1313 K street HinpmarsH, W. B. (Walter B.), Light-House Board. 823 Hast Cap. st Histor, Dr William, 1400 H street. 1404 L street Hircucock, A. 8. (Albert Spear), Dept. of Agric. 80 R street Hrrz, John, Volta Bureau. 1709 35 street Hopces, J. W. (John Walter). 201 2 street SE Hopexins, W. C. (William Chandler), Coast and Geodetic Survey. HorcersBercer, Mrs Nora, Central High School. 924 Massachusetts ave Horsroox, Theodore Lewis, 1420 New York avenue. Cleveland park Hotpen, Henry P. (Henry Prichard), Bureau of Pensions. 1211 I street Houuicer, Frank 8S. (Frank Samuel), War Department. 1112 N. Y.ave Ho.tmeap, Alfred H. (Alfred H ), Interstate Com. Com. The Iowa Homes, W. H. (William Henry), National Museum. 1444 Staughton st Hox, H. P. R. (Henry Peter Renouf), Treasury Dept. Takoma Park Hopkins, Archibald, Court of Claims. 1826 Massachusetts avenue Hopkins, James H. (James Herron). 1324 18 street 16 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Hopxins, Martha G., Bureau Engraving and Printing. 2034 G street Hornsiower, Jos. C. (Joseph Coerten), 1509 H street. 1402 M street Hosier, F. M. (Francis Marion), Bu. of Nay., Navy Dept. 12045 street Hoven, Franklin H. (Franklin Horatio), Atlantic Bldg. 1815 T street Houeu, Helen M. (Helen Maria), 1330 F street. 332 Indiana avenue Hovey-Kine, Alvin, Bureau of Statistics. 1732 21 street Howarp, A. L. (Arcturus Lee). 124 5 street Howarp, L. O. (Leland O.), Department of Agriculture. 1336 30 street Howe tt, Edwin E. (Edwin Eugene), 612 17 street. 20382 G street Hoyt, Henry M. (Henry Martyn), Dept. of Justice. 1516 K street Hupparp, Mrs Gardiner Greene. “Twin Oaks.” Woodley lane Hurcuins, Stilson. 1603 Massachusetts avenue Hume, Frank, 454 Pennsylvania avenue. 1235 Massachusetts avenue Hurcneson, David, Library of Congress. 401 B street NE Hurcuison, Miss Jessie EH. (Jessie Elizabeth), P.O. Dept. 305 D street Huxrorp, Maj. W. P. (William Pitkin), Atlantic Bldg. 1806 H street Hypr, Miss E. R. (Eliza Reed), Off. Comp. Cur., Treas. Dept. 1326 I st Hype, John, Department of Agriculture. Lanier Heights Hynson, Laurence M. (Laurence Maxwell), Corcoran Bldg. 6238. C. ave Ipr, George R. (George Russell), Patent Office. 801 A street SE Jackson, Sheldon, Bureau of Education. The Concord, 1701 Oregon ave James, Mrs Sarah S. (Sarah Stubbs). 1517 O street Janson, Ernest N., Navy Department. 802 Rhode Island avenue JEWELL, Claudius B. 1324 Vermont avenue Jounson, A. B. (Arnold Burges), Treasury Department. Jounson, Arthur EH. (Arthur Edward), War Dept. 1833 Vermont ave Jounson, Enoch G. (Hnoch George), House of Reps. 1827 Corcoran st Jounson, Frank E. (Frank Evan), Treasury Department. 1845 R street Jounson, Theo. H. (Theodore Halfdan), Geol. Survey. 1115S st Jounson, Willard D. (Willard Drake), Geol. Survey. Jounsron, James M. (James Marion), Riggs Nat’l Bank. 1628 K street Jounston, John A. (John ——). 1752 Q street Jones, Dr EH. S. (Edward Salmon), Treasury Department. The Cairo Jones, Louise Tayler. 1340 21 street Jones, Col. W. A. (William Albert), Balto. and Phila. 1800 Conn. ave Jupp, Geo. H. (George Herbert), 420-422 11 street. 511 3 street NE Kasson, John A. (John Adam). 1726 I street KATTELMANN, Carl. 715 7 street KAUFFMANN, 8. H. (Samuel Hay), 1101 Pa. ave. 1421 Mass. ave Kertier, Mrs William. The Portner, 15 and U streets Ketty, Joseph T., D. D. (Joseph Thomas). 1367 Kenesaw street DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 17 Kemper, Chas. E. (Charles ), Treasury Dept. 1310 Riggs street Kenpatt, Frederick A. (Frederick Albert), 538 15 st. 1455 W street KeEnpatt, Maj. H. M. (Henry Myron), u.s. a. Soldiers’ Home KENNAN, George. The Mendota Kern, J. Q. (Josiah Quincy), Winder Bldg.,17 and F sts. 507 6 street Kresry, Bessie J. (Bessie Juliet). 2025 Massachusetts avenue Kimpatt, Dr E.G. (Hphraim Gardner), Jefferson Sch’l. 1204 Mass. ave Kripa, H. H. (Herbert Harvey), Weather Bureau. 317 T street Kimpatt, 8. I. (Sumner I ), Life-Saving Service. 1516 R. I. ave Krye, Frank B. (Frank Bockins). 1442 Rhode Island avenue Kine, F. H. (Franklin Hiram), Bu. of Soils, Dept. Agric. 2059 street SW Kine, George A. (George Anderson), 728 17 street. 1611 28 street Kirsy, Chf. Eng. Absalom, v. s. N. 405 C street SE Kraxrine, A. (Alfred), Hydrographic Office, Navy Dept. 1137 N. J. ave Knapp, Martin A. (Martin Augustine), Sun Building. The Portland Konrrperr, E. A. (Egon Anthony). 2234 Q street Krarmer, Charles. 735 7 street Kesar, Stephen J. (Stephen Joseph), 1330 F st. 628 East Cap. street Kumtrr, B. W. (Benjamin Walter), Civil Serv. Com. Kensington, Md Kumter, Mrs J. P. E. (Abigail Goulding). 2005 Massachusetts avenue Kurtz, Dr John. 3142 P street Lacey, E. A. The Octagon Lampert, T. A. (‘Tallmadge Augustine), 410 5 street. 1219 Mass. avenue Lamstn, James B. (James Baird), 1415 New York avenue. 714 21 street Lanper, Mrs J. M. (Jeane Margaret). 45 B street SE Lanpon, Mrs Hal. ., Paymaster General’s Office. Lanaitue, H. D. (Harold Douglas), Geol. Survey. Lane ey, S. P. (Samuel Pierpont), Smithsonian Inst. Metropolitan Club LanspurGH, Julius, 512 9 street. ; Cochran Hotel Larner, Philip F., 918 F street. 1746 P street Law, Mary A., box 464, Station G. 101 North Carolina avenue SE Leg, Rey. Thomas S. Lee (Thomas Sim). 1739 Rhode Island avenue Leirer, L. Z. (Levi Zeigler). Dupont Circle Lerru, Chas. A. (Charles Augustus), Dept. of Agric. 1461 Fla. ave Lemon, Dr H. T. A. (Hanson Thomas Asbury). 629 G street Lenman, Miss I. H. (Isobel Hunter). 1100 12 street Lesu, W. W. (William Williams), Winder Building. 210 T street Lesrer, F. A. (Frederick A ), Corcoran Building. 1512 I street Leyerine, Thos. H. (Thomas Henry), War Department. 1435 Chapin st Lewis, Fulton, 1335 F street. 3033 Irving place Linpenkont, A. (Adolphus), Coast Survey. 19 4 street SE LinDENKOHBL, H. (Henry), Coast Survey. The Iowa, 13 and O streets Ltnkins, Geo. R. (George Reiss), 507 E street. 1925 G street 9 18 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Lisner, A. (Abraham), 11 and G streets. 1723 Massachusetts ayenue ~ LircHFIeELp, Grace Denio. 2010 Massachusetts avenue Litrett, Frank B. (Frank Bowers), Naval Observatory. 1825 13 street Lrrrir, Charles W.(Charles William), P.O. Department. 3110 13 street Lrrrir, Norton M. (Norton Mitchell), 1210 F street. 1123 Dartmouth st LirtLEnAes, G. W. (George Washington), Hydro. Off. 2132 Le Roy pl Lorrus, Edward (Edward Herbert), Siamese Legation. Arlington Hotel Lona, C. C. (Charles C.), Dept. of Justice. “Argyle,” 14 Street road Lorp, Miss Cora A. (Cora Adella), Post-Office Dept. 1243 N. J. avenue Lorp, Daniel W. (Daniel Walter), Patent Office. 1333 Q street Lorine, Mrs Charlotte. The Colonial Lorurop, Alvin Mason, 11 and F streets. 1303 K street Low, James P. (James Patterson), Treasury Dept. 1328 Corcoran street Lupineron, M. I. (Marshall I——), War Department. 1818 Q street LueBKert, Otto J.J.(Otto James John), Bureau of Forestry. 1804 R st Lum, W. David (W—— David). 128 S street Lusk, Maj. Jas. L. (James Loring), War Department. 1709 21 street Lyman, Chas. (Charles Lyman), Treasury Dept. 1248 New Jersey ave McBripg, Miss Marguerite. 450 Pennsylvania avenue McCasp, Thos. (Thomas), Depot Q. M. Office. 206 Kentucky ave. SE McCatu, Mrs Samuel W. 1703 Q street McCammon, Jos. K. (Joseph Kay), Bond Building. 1524 19 street McCenry, Miss Mary E. (Mary Elizabeth). The Shoreham, 15 and H sts McCormick, Jas. (James), Geol. Survey. Hotel Stratford McConnett, Mrs M. R. (Matilda R ). 201 East Capitol street McCreary, Albertus. 1116 F street McGrr, W J, Bureau of American Ethnology. 1901 Baltimore street McGitt, Mary C. (Mary Cecilia). 1345 Corcoran street McGrata, John KE. (John Edward), Coast Survey. 1016 Vt. ave McGuire, F. B. (Frederick Bauders), Corcoran Art.Gal’y. 1833 Conn. aye MckKnay, Fred. G. (Frederick George). 1220 New Hampshire avenue McKekr, Thos. H. (Thomas Hudson), House of Reps. 7 Grant place McKenney, Wm. A. (William Archer), 1405 G street. The Mendota McKim, Randolph H. (Randolph Harrison). 1621 K street McLanauan, G. Wm. (George William). 1601 21 street McLaueutin, Dr Thomas N. (Thomas Notley). 1226 N street McLean, N. E. L. (Nellie Ellis Louise), Dennison School. 913 French st McManus, A. B. (Augustine Boas), Navy Department. 814 22 street McNair, E. L. (Eugene Long), 1330 F st.,(U.S.G.S.). 931 K street McReynotps, F.W. (Frederick Wilson), Fendall Bldg. 1437 Staughtonst McWirr1am, Janet, Thomson School. 2142 K street Macraruanp, H. B. F. (Henry Brown Floyd), District bldg. 1816 F st Mappox, Samuel, 340 Indiana avenue. 1715 H street DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 19 Magruper, John H. (John Holmes), 1152 Conn. ave. 1843 S street Mauierr, Miss Anna S. (Anna Smith). 1454 Rhode Island avenue Manning, Van. H. (Vannoy Hartrog), Geol. Survey. 3112 Q street Marinpin, Henry L. (Henry Louis), Coast Survey. Woodside, Md Maraquez, Dr L. Cuerro. Address wnknonn. Martin, Artemas, Coast Survey Office. 915 N street Marvin, C. F. (Charles Frederick), Weather Bureau. 1404 Binney street Mason, Mrs M. L. (Marie Louise). 45 B street SH MarruHns, Francois EK. (Francois Emile), Geol. Survey. The Varnum Marrues, Gerard H. (Gerard Hendrik), Geol. Survey. The Varnum Marrineity, Wm. F. (William Francis), 435 7 street. 1616 H street Mauro, Philip, 620 F street. 1616 22 street May, Heber J., Washington Loan and Trust Co. 1414 21 street Maynarp, Geo. C. (George Colton), National Museum. 1407 15 street Maynarp, W. (Washburn), Treasury Department. The Portner Mayo, Mrs C. L. (Cordelia Lucy). 906 14 street. Meres, Jno., Jr. (John). 5325 2 street SE MELVILLE, Geo, W. (George Wallace), Navy Department. 1720 H street Merriam, C. Hart (Clinton Hart), Biological Survey. 1919 16 street Merriman, Geo. B. (George Benjamin), Naval Obs. 1122 Vermont ave Mesny, A. B. Le(Arthur Bonamy Le Patourel), Navy Dept. The Mendota Meyer, John H. F. 904 23 street Micnener, L. T. (Louis Theodore), Pacific Building. 1624 19 street MipprerTon, Arthur E. H. (Arthur Edward Henry), 51511 st. 1833 15st Mires, Gen. Nelson A. (Nelson Appleton), u.s. A., War Dept. 1786 N st Miirr, Mrs Almy. 941 H street Miter, EH. H. (Eleazar Hutchinson). 1109 M street Mitts, Anson. 2 Dupont circle Mirick, H. D. (Henry Dustin), 1417 New York avenue. 1302 N street MircHet, Guy Elliott, Room 6, 1419 F street. The Randolph Mircue.t, Hon. John L. 32 B street NE Monvett, Hon. Frank Wheeler, House of Reps. Dewey Hotel Moors, F. L. (Frederic Lawrence), 1403 F street. 1680 31 street Moors, Willis L. (Willis Luther), Weather Bureau. 1616 5 street Morris, M. F. (Martin Ferdinand), Court of Appeals, D.C. 1314 Mass. ave Morsetit, Wm. F. (William F ), Geol. Survey. 1810 5 street Moron, Geo L. (George Luton), Room 256, Patent Office, 1310 Q street Moses, Emma R. (Emma Richardson), Treas. Dept. 1404 Bacon street Moses, H. C. (Henry Clark), 1100 F street. 1322 19 street Mossgs, W. H. (William Henderson), 11 and F sts. 2129 Wyoming ave Mosman, A. T. (Alonzo Tyler), Coast and Geod. Survey, 228N.Jave.SE Motrin, Mrs N. R. (Nellie Ristine). 1340 21 street Murcu, B. W. (Ben Wilton), Force School. 627 Florida avenue NE Morty, A. EK. (Arlington Elliott), Geol. Survey. 1911 2 street 20 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Morray, B. P. (Bentley Philander), War Department. 10 5 street NE Murray-Aaron, Dr Eugene. 1839 Summit avenue, Lanier Heights Murcuirr, Hon. Howard, House of Representatives. Willard Hotel Myers, Mrs Mary H. (Mary Hewitt). The Portland Myvtineer, C. (Caroline), Navy Department Library. 1012 15 street Nautir, R. M. (Robert Mason), Room 512, P. O. Dept. 1016 15 street Nerpuam, Chas. W. (Charles Willis), Col. Law Bldg. 1428 Mass. ave Netson, I. W. (Edward William). Department of Agriculture Nerspit, Leo H., Coast Survey. 227 New Jersey avenue SH Nerwcomp, Simon. 1620 P street Newe tt, F. H. (Frederick Haynes), Geol. Survey. 1829 Phelps place Nipxack, Lieut. Albert P. (Albert Parker), u.s.n. Navy Department Nimmo, Joseph, Jr. 1831 F street Noyes, Crosby 8. (Crosby Stuart), Evening Star. Sligo, Md. Noyes, Theo. W. (Theodore Williams), 1101 Pa. ave. 1730 N. H. ave OxpEeRHOLsER, Harry C. (Harry Church), Dept. Agric. 1505 Howard aye O'Brign, Robert L. (Robert Lincoln), 1403 F st., Wyatt Bldg. 250419 st Oapen, H. G. (Herbert Gouverneur), Coast Survey. 1610 Riggs place Otnery, Edward B. (Edward Beekman), Gen. Land Office. 310 E street Osaoop, C. N. (Charles Nathan), 1317 F street. 17138 P street Oscoop, Wilfred H. (Wilfred Hudson), Dept. Agric. 925 Westminster st O’Tooir, Mary B. (Mary Byrne), Treasury Dept. ~ 2494 Pa. avenue Owen; Fred. D, (Frederick. Denison), War Department. 3 Grant place PaGE, James, Hydrographic Office. 1708 H street Paar, Thomas Nelson, New Hampshire avenue and R street Paine, W. T. (Walter Taylor), General Land Office. 140 F street SE Parnrer, Mrs U. H. (Linda Avery). 1825 13 street Patmer, T. 8. (Theodore Sherman), Dept. of Agriculture. 1604 18 st Parxer, D. (Daingerfield). 1506 21 street Parker, E. Southard, 613 15 street. 1758 Connecticut avenue Parker, EK. W. (Edward Wheeler), New York, N. Y. 1728 Riggs place Parker, Myron M. (Myron Melvin), 1418 F street. 1020 Vermont ave Parker, R. Wayne (Richard Wayne), Newark, N. J. 1501 Mass. ave Parsons, Francis H. (Francis Henry), Library of Cong. 2101 street SE Parten, J. D. (John Dewhurst), 720 15 street. 2212 R street Parrrrson, Eliza T. (Mrs Albert M.). 20 Iowa circle Parrerson, Mrs Flora W.( Flora Wambaugh),Dept.Agric. The Albemarle Parrerson, Miss M.A. (Melvina A.). The Mendota, 20 st.and Kala. ave Parrerson, Miss M. EH. (Marie E.) : 1100 Vermont avenue Payne, Jas. G. (James George), Court House. 2112 Massachusetts ave Payson, L. EH. (Lewis Edwin). 1229 Massachusetts avenue DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA al Prapopy, W. F. (William Frederick), Coast Survey. 918 L street Prate, Dr A. C. (Albert Charles), National Museum. 605 12 street Prarson, R. A. (Raymond Allen), Dept. of Agriculture. The Clifton PEELLE, Stanton J. (Stanton Judkins), Court of Claims. The Concord PeLiEw, Henry EH. 1637 Massachusetts avenue Penney, Mrs W. H. (Mrs William Henry). 420 C street SH PENFIELD, Hon. W. L. (William Lorenzo), State Dept. Dewey Hotel Prruam, A.S. (Aurestus Sidney), Pension Bureau. 905 Westminster st Perkins, E. T., Jr. (Edmund Taylor). Geological Survey Perkins, Frank Walley, Coast and Geod. Survey. 1344 Vermont avenue Perkins, Geo. C. (George Clement). U.S. Senate Perkins, H, C. (Henry Cleveland). 1701 Connecticut avenue Perers, EH. T. (Kdward T.), Dept. of Agriculture. 131 E street Prerers, Lt. Comdr. Geo. H. (George Henry), u.s.n. 1854 Columbia road Peters, Wm. J. (William John). Geological Survey Prau, Jas. A. (James A ys Coast and Geodetic Survey Patiuiirs, W. F. R. (William Fowke Ravenel), Weather Bu. 1418 L st Pierce, Josiah, Jr., Atlantic Building, 928 F street. 1325 Mass. avenue Pruuine, J. W. (John Walter), 917 F street. 1301 Massachusetts avenue PrycnHor, Gifford, 930 F street. 1615 Rhode Island avenue Prees, F. H. (Dr Felix Hughes), Pension Office. 437 Mass. avenue Pirrs, Geo. B. (George Bassett), 507 E street. 144 C street NE Prant, George H., Jr. 1429 New York avenue Prarr, O. H. (Orville Hitchcock), U. 8. Senate. The Arlington Portner, Robert. 1104 Vermont avenue Porter, C. M. (Cyrus Montgomery), Post-Office Dept. 522 D street NE Powe tt, Mrs A. G. (Altha Gibbs). The Cairo, 1629 Q street Powe tt, Mrs Randolph (Diana Kearny). . 1734 K street Pratt, Electus A. (Electus A——). 1828 13 street Presie, Edward A., Dept. of Agriculture. The Virginia, 2120 G street Prescorr, Ben., Post-Office Department. 26 Grant place Prescorr, Rey. Philip M. (Philip Maxwell). The Sherman, 15 and L sts Prewitt, Dr G. T. (George Thompson), 511 10 street. 103 2 street NE PrinDiE, Rear Admiral F. C., u. s. . The Cairo Procror, Hon. Redfield, U. S. Senate. 1535 L street Proury, C. A. (Charles Azro), Sun Bldg. The Portner, 15th and U sts Putsirer, Wm. H, (William Henry). The Grafton, 1189 Conn. avenue Putnam, Herbert, Library of Congress. 1834 I street RapcuiFrre, Wallace, N. Y. Ave. Presbyterian Church, 1200 K street Raupu, Dr Wm. L. (William Legrange), National Museum, ‘The Portner Ratston, Jackson H. (Jackson Harvey), Bond Bldg. Hyattsville, Md Ramsay, Wm. (William), 1221 F street. 1502 Kenesaw avenue Ranp, Pay Inspector Stephen, v. s. N. Ebbitt House 22 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Ranpatit, A—— E—. Congress Heights Rank, J. E. (Jeremiah Eames), Howard Univ. University campus Rankin, John M..(John McClure), Atlantic Bldg. 1903 Kalorama ave RAVENEL, W. de C. (William de Chastignier), Nat. Mus. 1611 Riggs st Raymonp, Prof. Geo. L. (George Lansing). 1810 N street Reapurn, D. L. (De Witt Lee), Geol. Survey. 1807 G street Reap, Miss Jane. 3028 N street Repway, Capt. George, General Land Office. 1328 Columbia road REIFENRATH, Miss Minnie A. 717 10 street Retuty, Philip K. (Philip Key). 2321 Pennsylvania avenue Remey, George C. (George Collier). 1312 21 street Remp, Miss Lulu. 1726 5 street RueeEs, Wm. J. (William Jones), Smithsonian Inst. Spring and 14 ext RicHarps, Miss J. EH. (Janet Elizabeth H ), Chevy Chase. 1319 Yale st Ricwarps, J. K. (John Kelvey), Dept. of Justice. 13835 Conn. avenue Ricuarps, W. A.(William Alford), General Land Office. 2455 18 street Ricuarps, Wm. P. (William Pemberton)’ 309 Elm street RicHarpson, Alonzo B. (Alonzo Blair), Govt. Hospital for Insane. Ricwarpson, Dr Charles W. (Charles Williamson). 1102 L street Ricuarpson, F. A. (Francis A ). 1308 Vermont avenue Rirrrer, Homer P. (Homer Peter), Coast Survey. U.S.and possessions Rizer, H. C. (Henry Clay), Geol. Survey. 2568 University place Roperts, Ellis H. (Ellis Henry), Office of Treas. U.S. 1313 Mass. ave Roserts, Geo. E. (George Evan), Treas. Dept. 1806 N. H. avenue Roserts, W. F. (William Florian), 730 15th street. 1318 Kenyon street Roperrson, P. W. (Powhatan Wyndham). 2232 Q street Roprinson, Miss A. M. (Anna Mabel). 2004 35 street Roprnson, W. P. (William Pitt). 1789 17 street Roe.xer, C. R. (Charles Rafael), 702 17 street. 1434 Q street Rorssir, T. E. Arlington Hotel Roaers, Walter F. (Walter Forwood), 939 F street. 914 R. I. avenue Romero, Sefior Don José Mexican Legation Romeyn, Major Henry, v.s. A. 714 20 street Runyan, E. G. (Elmer Gardner), Dept. of Agric. 300 R street NE RussELL, Capt. A. H. (Andrew Howland), War Department. Rurrer, Frank R. (Frank Roy), Dept. Agric. 429 N. Carey st., Balto., Md Sanpers, L. M. (Louis Milton). 44 Q street NE Sanprrs, T. B. (Thomas Bradford). 2309 M street SanaeEr, Alice B. (Alice Belle), P. O. Dept. 1029 Connecticut avenue Sareent, R. H. (Rufus Harvey), Geol. Survey. 1728 Columbia road Saunpgers, Wm. H. (William Henry), 1407 F st. 13808 Roanoke street Savary, John. Cosmos Club SaviLie, J. H. (James Hamilton). 1420 17 street DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 23 Scuneiper, T. F. (Thomas Franklin), Bond Bldg. The Cairo, 1615 Q st ScHoEnporn, William EH. (William Ernest), Pat. Off. 1859 Harvard st ScHucHeErtT, Charles, National Museum. 1422 Stauchton street ScipmorgE, Eliza R. (Eliza Ruhamah). 1837 M street Scorr, Miss Fannie T. The Ebbitt House Scort, James A. (James Alexander), Govt. Printing Off. 921 O street Scorr, W. O. N. (William Owen Nixon). 1011 Connecticut avenue Seaman, Wm. H. (William Henry), Room 258, Pat. Office. 1424 11 street Srpeuey, Miss Isabel (Mary Isabel). 1779 Massachusetts avenue Srverence, Miss Bessie E. (Bessie Eva). 1121 14 street Seymour, H. A. (Henry Albert), 913 F street. 1337 Connecticut avenue Seymour, H. W. (Henry W——). 1708 R street Suanps, A. R. (Aurelius Rives). 1819 New York avenue Suwa, N. H. (Nicholas H—), 632 Pennsylvaniaavenue. 1320 12 street SHeEak, Cornelius L.(Cornelius Lott), Dept. Agric. Elmave., Takoma Pk Suipy, L. P. (Leland Perry), Coast Survey. 1617 Marion street SHormakrr, C. F. (Charles Frederick), Treasury Dept. 1303 Yale street SiesBrn, Capt. C. D. (Charles Dwight), Navy Dept. 1632 Riggs place Srivers, Miss Grace 8. (Grace 8 ). 910 L street Simpson, Horton, Hubbard School, 12 and Kenyon sts. 1758 Corcoran st Simpson, Dr J. C., (John Crayke), Govt. Hosp. for Ins. St. Elizabeth’s Srncratr, C. H. (Cephas Hempstone), Coast Survey. . 922 Farragut sq Sater, I. C. (Isaac Cooper). 404 New Jersey avenue Stoane, M. EH. (Mersene Elon), Census Office. 1001 Mass. avenue NE Smatt, J. H., Jr. (John Henry), 621 14 street. 1227 New York avenue Smart, Charles, Surg. General’s Office, War Dept. 2017 Hillyer place Smiuiis, G. F. C., Bureau of Engraving and Printing. 1317 Yale street Smiry, Francis H. 1418 F street Smrru, Geo. Otis (George Otis), Geol. Survey. The Iowa, 13 and O sts Smirxu, Herman W. (Herman Wilson), Weather Bu. 1319 Lydecker ave Smiru, J. Henry (James Henry). _ 1619 17 street SmirxH, Lincoln A. 1527 O street Smiru, Middleton, Department of Agric. 1616 19 street Smiru, Odell 8. (Odell Seymour), Central National Bank. 1336 U street Smiru, Mrs 38. T. (Sterling Tuft). 1626 19 street Suitx, Th. W. (Thomas Wilson). 1 st.and Ind. ave. 616 East Cap. st Syow, Alpheus H. (Alpheus Henry). 1417 Massachusetts avenue Snow, Charles C. (Charles Carleton). 1737 9 street Snowpgn, Lt. Thomas. 1101 24 street Somers, Mrs Elizabeth J——. 1100 M street Sommer, Ernest J. (Ernest Julius), Coast Survey. 1227 O street Souruer, John K. (John Kerfoot). 1806 New Hampshire avenue SourHerLanp, W.H.H. (William Henry Hudson), Hydrographic Office Sowers, Dr Z. T. (Zachariah Turner). 1320 New York avenue 24 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAI GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY SpanHoorp, A. W. (Arnold Werner), Central High School. 1636 16 st Spear, Ellis, 1003 F street. The Manhattan, 1501 Park street Spencer, Jas. W. (James William), Geol. Survey. 906 14 street SPENCER, Mrs Sara A. Spencerian College, 9 and D streets Sperry, Hon. N. D. (Nehemiah Day), House Reps. The Buckingham Sporrorp, A. R. (Ainsworth Rand), Lib. of Congress. 1334 Mass. ave Squire, Capt. G. O. (George Owen), War Dept. Army and Navy Club Srarrorp, Rev. D. J. (Dennis J——). 619 10 street Srantry-Browny, J. (Joseph), 120 B’dway, N. Y. city. 1318 Mass. ave SrarkKWHATHER, Geo. B. (George Briggs), Forest Lk. Cem. Bowen road Sravety, Dr Albert L. (Albert Livingston). 1234 14 street Srern, Robert. Geol. Survey Srettwacen, Edward J. (Mdward James), 1414 F st. Washington Hts SrerHens, John J.(John James), Winder Bldg.,17 and F sts. 1812 13 st SrERNBERG, Geo. M. (George Miller), u.s. a., War Dept. 1440 M street Srerson, Frank O. (Frank Owen), Weather Bureau. 1217 Kenesaw aye Stevens, F. C. (Frederick Charles), 1415.G street. 1628 16 street Srewart, Alonzo H. (Alonzo Hopkins), U.S. Senate. 204 4 street SE Srewart, Joseph, Post-Office Department. 1540 Howard avenue Srockine, Mrs P. M. (Patty Miller), Room 4, Int. Dept. The Westover Srobver, Frank M. (Frank Melancthon), Navy Dept. 2451 18 street Srorer, Alfred J. 501 14 street Sroxes, H. N. (Henry Newlin), Geol. Survey. 3102 U street Sronk, I. 8. (Isaac Scott), 1449 R. I. avenue. 1618 R. I. avenue STrRANAHAN, Wm. (William), Geol. Survey. 113 Grant place Striper, Mrs L. C. (Luke Cheney). 1450 Rhode Island avenue Srrone, Frank, Department of Justice. The Savoy, 2804 14 street StuurmMan, A. W. (Augustus Wesley). 601 I street Sturtevant, Mrs J. A. B. (Jane A—— B——). 1453 Howard avenue SUGENHEIMER, S. (Salomon). 1142 7 street Summers, Milo C. (Milo Colburn), Surg. Gen. Off., War Dept. 3147 st. NE Surron, Frank, Geol. Survey. 25 Lafayette place Swinete, W. T. (Walter Tennyson), Dept. Agriculture. 1410 Q street TatBorr, Dr Robert W. (Robert W——.). 700 14 street Tanner, Mrs M. L. (Mero L——). 1416 N street Tanner, Z. L. (Zera Luther). The Cairo Tapiin, Mrs Horatio N. (Horatio Nelson). 1538 I street Taytor, H. W. (Henry Walton), House of Reps. 100 5 street NE Taytor, James K. (James Knox), Treasury Dept. The Portland Taytor, N. R. (Nathaniel Ratcliffe), 2222 Post-Office st.’ 1426 O street Taytor, Wm. A. (William Alton), Dept. of Agric. 55 Q street NE Tuayer, Rufus H. (Rufus Hildreth), 980 F street. 806 17 street THomps, Mrs A. L. 8. (Adelia L S——). 1324 Massachusetts avenue DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 25 THompson, Prof. A. H. (Almon Harris) Geol. Survey. 1729 12 street Txompson, Mrs John W. 1419 I street Tuompson, Miss Mary Ida. 1539 I street TxHompeson, W. B. (William Baker), 1419 F street. 1621S street Tuursron, Ernest L. (Ernest Lawton), Col. Univ. 1508 Kenesaw ave Tispet, W. P. (Willard Parker). 1746 Q street Tirrmann, O. H. (Otto Hilgard), Coast Survey. 1624 Riges place Topry, George EH. (George E )- 1221 K street TorBert, John B. (John Bryant), Post-Office Dept. 111 C street SE. Torren, G. O., Jr. (George Oakley). 801 19 street Tows.ey, Orson V. (Orson V ). 1905 Kalorama avenue Tratn, Miss Alice Brown. The Olympia TriepeL, Mrs Emma M. V. (Emma Matthews Vaughan), Treas. Dept. 1731 F street. TrimsiA, Matthew, District Building. 1320 Rhode Island avenue Trop, Dr A. C. (Alfred Charles), Dept. of Agric. 1604 17 street TRUESDELL, Geo. (George), 1403 F street. 19 street and Columbia road Tuttocu, Mrs M. B. (Miranda Barney). 121 B street SE Turk, W. A. (William Armstrong), 1300 Pa. ave. 2026 Columbia road Turner, Miss Edith G. (Edith G ), Post-Office Dept. 414 B streetNE. Tweepy, Frank, Geol. Survey. 3416 13 street Tyrer, Richard K. (Richard Knickerbocker), 1307 F st. 1753 N street ULKE, Julius, Jr., Post-Office Department. 1427 U street Urquuart, Chas. F. (Charles Fox), Geol. Survey. Lanier Heights Van Rensse“apr, John. 2 Thomas circle Van Reyren, W. K. (William Knickerbocker). 1021 15 street Van Wicks, W. P. (William Perrine), 1225 Penna. ave. 1757 Q street Vinal, W. Irving (Washington Irving), Coast Survey. 1106 E. Cap. st Vincent, Gen. Thomas N. (Thomas Norris). 1221 N street VouLLant, Gregory de, Russian Embassy. 1829 I street Warnwaicut, D. B. (Dallas Bache), Coast Survey. 1409 Chapin street Waiter, Miss Mary F. (Mary Frances). The Edwards, 816 15 street Watcorrt, Chas. D. (Charles Doolittle), Geol. Sur., 1330 F st. 2117S st Waker, A. M. (Albert Mynard), Geol. Survey. 1808 G street Waker, Capt. Kenzie W. (Kenzie Wallace), u.s. a. Care Adjt. Gen’l Waker, William H. (William H ), 1006 F street. The Concord Watuts, Wm. J. (William James), Eastern High School. 647 E. Cap. st Watpote, F. A. (Frederick Andrews), Dept. Agric. 1834 Kalorama ave Watsn, Helen I. (Helen Ivey), Johnson Sch., Mt P. 1261 Kenesaw ave Wausu, Thos. F. (Thomas Francis), 1420 N. Y. ave. 2020 Mass. ave Warp, Miss Eliza Titus. 5 Grant place 3 26 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Warp, Mrs Fannie B. (Fannie B——). 1111 Massachusetts avenue Warp, H. P. (Hiram P. Ne The Hamilton, 14 and K streets Warper, Mrs R. B. (Gulielma Darland). Howard University Warman, P. C. (Philip Creveling), Geol. Survey, 1330 F st. 3345 16 st Warner, Brainard H. (Brainard Henry), 916 F st. 2100 Mass. avenue Warers, Dr W. E. (William Elkanah), v.s. 4. The Chapin, 1415 Chapin st Watson, J. A. (James Angus), 918 F street. 1454 Howard avenue Wess, H. Randall (Harry Randall), 416-418 5 street. 727 19 street Wess, Capt. Walter D. (Walter D : War Dept. Weser, Geo. W. (George W ), 1509 F street. 210 E street Wesster, Daniel, Genl. Land Office. 3437 Holmead avenue Wesster, N. E., Jr. (Norman Edward), P.O. Dept. 1443 Sheridan ave WEILER, Ferd. (Ferdinand), Treas. Dept. 1316 V street Wetnricu, Wm., Jr. (William). Coast Survey Wetcu, Geo. B. (George Bramwell), 1344 G st. 2011 Wyoming ave Wetxer, P. A..(Philip A.), Comdg. Str. Bache. Coast Survey WELLMAN, Walter, 1413 G street. 1409 21 street We tts, Henry, 1410 G street. The Richmond, 17 and H streets Wetts, S. W. (Stuart Wilder), 1325 14 street. 1347 Q street WESTINGHOUSE, George. Dupont circle WestincHousr, George, Jr. Dupont circle WestincHousk, Mrs George. Dupont circle Wetmore, Geo. Peabody (George Peabody), U.S. Senate. 1609 K street WHEELER, H. W. (Henry Weston), Treas. Dept. 212 Randolph st. NE WHELPLEY, J. D. (James Davenport), 1417 G street. 2118 Conn. ave: Wuire, Miss Elizabeth Walker. 1614 New Hampshire avenue Wuirter, Fletcher, Pension Office. 425 4 street Wuite, Henry, 1231 G street. 2568 University place Wuirtr, J. L. (James Lyall). 3419 Brown street Wuirs, Jno. H. (John Howard). 2111 Bancroft place Wurre, Mabel L. (Mabel Louise), Treas. Dept. 1401 Massachusetts ave Wuitine, Harry C. (Harry Carlyle), Navy Dept. 1919 G street Wuirremore, W. C. (William Clark). 1526 New Hampshire avenue Wuirresry, HE. (Kliphalet), 1429 New York avenue. 8 Lowa circle WuirtLesry, Geo. P. (George Patten), 902 F st. 1430 Staughton street Wieut, Hon. John B. (John Brewer), 1312 F street. 1767 Q street Witcox, Mrs Helen M. (Helen Mary Cleveland). The Arlington Witcox, Walter D. (Walter Dwight). 1526 New Hampshire avenue Witxinson, Dr A. G. (Ahab George), Patent Office. 1526 K street Wuxkrs, Miss Jane. 814 Connecticut avenue Wixins, Hon. Beriah, Washington Post. The Grafton, Conn. ave. near K street. Witiarp, Henry A. (Henry Augustus), 1416 F street. 1333 K street WILLARD, Joseph E. Willard Hotel, Pa. avenue and 14 street DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 27 Witticox, Walter F. (Walter Francis), Census Office. Cosmos Club Wuriams, Henry E. (Henry Eugene), Weather Bureau. The Cameron Witttams, Maj. L. P. (Leander Perry). Supreme Court Wits, Miss Mary E. (Mary Evelyn), Dept. Agric. |The Litchfield Wititams, Richard P. (Richard Pardee), 226 Indiana ave. 219 C street Witits, Bailey, 1830 F street. 2115 Bancroft place Witson, Miss Alisan. The Lenox, L street near 15 street Wirson, H. M. (Herbert Michael), Geol. Survey, 1330 Fst. 1706 21 st Wirson, J. F. (J— F ys 633 East Capitol street Witson, John M. (John Moulder), u.s. 4. 1773 Massachusetts avenue Witson, Miss Laura A. (Laura Augusta), Census Office. 1446 R. L. ave Witson, Nathaniel, 624 F street. 912 17 street Wirson, Thomas, National Museum. 1218 Connecticut avenue Wyss, Fred. H. (Frederick Howard), Census Office. 1446 Staughton st Winston, Isaac, Coast Survey. 1325 Corcoran street Winter, M. A. (Mahlon Alpheus), 339 Penna. avenue. 14S street WInTERHALTER, Lieut. A. G. (A G No Navy Dept. Winters, Louis, 24 and M streets, Weather Bur. 132 C street SE Wotrr, Simon, 926 F street. 1756 Q street Woop, D. W. (David Wesley). The Albany, cor. 17 and H streets Woop, Miss Hattie P. (Hattie Patience). 1301 K street Woop, Brig. Gen. Leonard, u. s. A., 1812 H street. | Metropolitan Club WoopuHutr, Maxwell Van Zandt. 2033 G street Woopwarp, 8. W. (Samuel W—-), 1l and F sts. 2015 Wyoming ave Woopwarp, Thomas P. (Thomas Pursell), 507 E street. 66 M street Woopworts, M. (Milton), Treasury Dept. 1424 8 street Wooster, Walter M. (Walter Mallery), Interior Dept. 1449 Meridian st Worxman, Henry C. (Henry Charles), Patent Office. 1326 Kenesaw ave Worrurneton, A.S. (Augustus Storrs), 416 5 st. 2015 Mass. avenue Wren, H. B. (Harry Bertrand), Weather Bur.,24and M sts. 912 23 st Waieat, Carroll D. (Carroll Davidson), 1429 N.Y. ave. 1845 Vermont ave Waiceut, Miss Elizabeth. 2434 Pennsylvania avenue Wricur, Hallie L. (Hallie Lowndes). 332 Indiana avenue Wirpemany, Frank G. (Frank Gustave), Coast Sur. 124 Mass. ave. NE Wirpemany, J. V. (John Vanderbilt), Lib. of Cong. 124 Mass. ave. NE Wycxorr, Harry, 511 10 street. 1308 Yale street Wyman, Walter, 3 B street SE. The Richmond, 801 17 street Youne, Jno. M. (John MceMurtrie), 1110 Pa. ave. The Hawarden,1419 R st XAnNDER, Henry. 909 7 street Zevenoy, A. (Alexander), Russian Embassy. 1829 I street 28 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY FLORIDA Buty, Cmdr. J. H. (James Henry), vu. s. n.. Light-house Inspector, 7 District, Key West Kennepy, J. A., School for Deaf, Jacksonville MacGonieLr, Rey. Jno. N. (John Nowry), Memorial Presbyterian Church. The Manse, St Augustine Memmincer, C. G., Bartow GEORGIA Boyer, H. B. (Harry Bright), U. S. Weather Bureau, P. O. Building. 225 Taylor street, East Savannah Hatt, B. M. (Benjamin Mortimer), 409-11-13 Temple court. 190 Forest avenue, Atlanta Hanna, H. M. (Howard Melville), 53 River street, Cleveland Ohio. Thomasville RussrELyt-Hownanp, H. F. (H F ), Allatoona Marsury, John B. (John Bayne), Room 1410 Empire Building, cor. Broad and Marietta streets. 21 Garfield place, Atlanta. NortHen, W. J. (William Jonathan), 407 Equitable building. Hotel Majestic, Peachtree street, Atlanta Weeks, J. R. (John Rockwell), Government Building, cor. 3 and Mul- berry streets. 415 New street, Macon IDAHO BLANDFoRD, S. M. (Samuel Mudd), 9103 Main st. 508 13 street, Boise Dins, N.S. (Nathan Shirley), Caldwell Foster, Dr Richard, Weiser Prrrins, I. B. (Ira Burton), Blue Lakes SHELpy, P. P. (Peter Paul), Weiser Taytor, Dr J. M. J M ), Boise Watpron, J. W. (Joseph Winfield), Shoshone Wuey, A. J. (Andrew Jackson), 320 N. 7 street, Boise ILLINOIS Aprecat, F. J. (Franklin Jacob), 315-3821 Wabash avenue. 209 Ash- land Boulevard, Chicago Anprews, Dr KE. Wyllys (Edward Wyllys), 100 State street. 2525 Prairie avenue, Chicago ASHLEY, Osborn, Brown’s Hotel, Chicago Atwoop, Wallace W. (Wallace Walter), University of Chicago. 5450 Ridgewood Court, Chicago ILLINOIS 29 Ayer, Edward Everett, Old Colony Building, 84 Van Buren street. 1 Bank street, Chicago BaBer, Zonia, School of Education, University of Chicago. 5623 Mad- ison avenue, Chicago Barrett, R. L. (Robert Le Moyne), London City and Midland Bank, Threadneedle street, London, Eng. 109 Lake Shore Drive, Chicago Beneston, C. A. (Charles Alfred), 315 Wabash avenue. 1097 Carmen avenue, Chicago Buunt, §. E. (Stanhope English), Rock Island Arsenal Bower, R. A. (Robert A ), 166 Adams st. 822 N. Park ave., Chicago Brackett, Col. William 8. (William S ), 108 Randolph ave., Peoria Brayron, Geo. A. (George A ), 6319 Yale avenue, Chicago Brown, John, Drovers’ National Bank. 3426 Michigan ave., Chicago Burron, W. J. (William Jesse), 378 Wabash avenue. 5648 Madison avenue, Chicago CasweELL, Dr §. J. (Stephen Jesse), 323 West State street. 616 George street, Rockford CuHaALMeErs, W. J. (\W—— J——), 12 st. and Washtenaw avenue, Chicago CHAMBERLIN, T. C. (Thomas Chrowder), University of Chicago. Hyde Park Hotel, Chicago. Cootry, E. L. (Ernest L—), 1010 Security Bldg., 188 Madison street, Chicago Cootry, Lyman E. (Lyman E——), C. E., Chicago Cox, Henry J. (Henry Joseph),Weather Bureau. 6908 Vernon avenue, Chicago Cran, Charles R. (Charles Richard), 10 North Jefferson street. 2559 Michigan avenue, Chicago Dorsry, Geo. A. (George Amos), Field Columbian Museum, Chicago Ecxets, Hon. James H. (James H ), Chicago Exuiort, D. G. (Daniel Giraud), Field Columbian Museum, Chicago Eyans, Lynden (Lynden Edwin Ryder), 107 Dearborn street. 3500 Schiller street, Chicago Fayiti, Henry B. (Henry Baird), 618-100 State street. 188 Lincoln Park Boulevard, Chicago Gaur, Mrs Isabella A. (Isabella A ), 550 Dearborn avenue, Chicago Grant, U.S. (Ulysses Sherman), Northwestern University. 2123 Sher- man avenue, Evanston Grimes, J. Stanley (James Stanley), 1422 Wesley avenue, Evanston Hacar, John M. (John McKim), The Rookery, 217 La Salle street. 5053 Washington avenue, Chicago Harper, William R. (William Rainey), The University of Chicago. 59 street and Lexington avenue, Chicago Harnaway, F. B. (F B ), Rochelle Hivpesranp, Wm. R. (William Richard), 97 Washington street. 1509 Wolfram street, Chicago 30 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Horsrook, Florence, Forestville School, Chicago Howe, Edw. G. (Edward Gardnier), 1004 S. Mathews avenue, Urbana Hupparp, H. M. (Henry Mascarene), 72 East Lake street. 205 Goethe street, Chicago Hun, Robert W. (Robert Woolston), 1121 The Rookery. 614 East Division street, Chicago Humpureys, Henry H. (Henry Hollingsworth), u.s. a., Highland Park, Lake county Ippines, Joseph P. (Joseph Paxson), University of Chicago. 5730 Wooa- lawn avenue, Chicago Jacopson, John, 362 West Erie street, Chicago JoHnson, Miss Isabel (Ruth Isabel), 215 East 42 street, Chicago Kenna, E. D. (Edward Dudley), 77 Jackson st. 46 Astor st., Chicago Lorenz, Frederick A. (Frederick Alexander), 315-321 Wabash avenue. 5733 Kimbark avenue, Chicago Lowe, John W. (John Williamson), 175 Dearborn street. Union Club, 12 Washington place, Chicago Lowry, C. D. (C D—), Ass’t Supt., Board of Education, Chicago McCowen, Mary (Mary Taylor), Bd. of Educat’n. 6550 Yale ave., Chicago Mann, C. E. (C H—), St Charles Maxson, O. P. (Orrin Prescott), 323 West street, Waukegan Mrap, Daniel W. (Daniel Webster), 605 First National Bank Building. 234 South Park avenue, Austin Post-Office, Chicago Murrett, Victor A. G. (Victor Alphonso George), 804 Ashland block. 6757 Parnell street, Chicago Oxtney, Chas. F. (Charles F ), 148 Ohio street, Chicago Patten, Henry J. (Henry J——), Rooms 51-52, Board of Trade. 1851 Chicago avenue, Kvanston Prrt, Charles Emerson, 5817 Madison avenue, Chicago Perry, Thomas O. (Thomas Osborne), 1025 Park avenue, Chicago Puitiies, Dr W. A. (W—— A ), 1711 Hinman avenue, Evanston PimpHo, A. (August Ernst), 6 Madison st. 42 North Grove pl., Chicago Prarcer, Wm. E. (William Emilius), Township High School. 316 South Park street, Streator Ricknr, N. Clifford (Nathan Clifford), Engineering Hall, University of Illinois. 612 West Green street, Urbana Ripetry, D. C. (Douglas Clay), Homan avenue and 18 street. 5945 Ontario street, Chicago Runnetts, Mrs John S. (John § ), 593 N. State street, Chicago Sauispury, Rollin D. (Rollin D——), University of Chicago. 5730 Woodlawn avenue, Chicago ScHopincer, John J. (John James), 4670 Lake avenue, Chicago. Mor- gan Park Seppon, James A. (James A——), 906 Security Building, Chicago ILLINOIS 31 SxirF, Frederick J. V. (Frederick James Volney), Field Columbian Museum, Chicago SmivuH, Mrs Emmeline L. (Emmeline Lukens), 19 Janssen ave., Chicago Surrx, Syl. T. (Sylvester Tunnicliff), Chicago Club, 200 Michigan ave- nue.- 4717 Kenwood avenue Snow, Herman W. (Herman Walderford), Bank of Sheldon. 488 East Court street, Kankakee Spruit, C. (Cornelius), Illinois School for Deaf. 1106 La Fayette avenue, Jacksonville Stoner, George Frederick, Board of Trade, Chicago Uppen, J. A. (Johan August), Augustana College, cor. 38 street and 7 avenue. 1000 38 street, Rock Island Unimann, Wm. B. (William Bell), Corner 2 and Park streets, St Charles Van Scuatck, Miss Ellen, Highland Park Waener, Col. Arthur L. (Arthur Lockwood), a. A. G., U. s. A., Head- quarters Department of the Lakes, Chicago Watz, F. J. (Ferdinand Jackson), U. 8. Weather Bureau, Auditorium Tower. 916 Pullman Bldg., cor. Adams st. and Mich. ave., Chicago West, Frederick T. (Frederick Thomas), 157-159 La Salle street. 613 Division street, Chicago Warre, Trumbull, 1458 Wilson avenue, Chicago” Wircox, Timothy E. (Timothy Erastus), u.s. a., Pullman Bldg., Chicago Witxins, Prof. George 8., Auditorium Building, Chicago Wuson, William J. (William Joseph), 1621 Masonic Temple. 5822 Calumet avenue, Chicago Wiruerow, Mrs T. F., 500 Schiller street, Chicago Woop, L. H. (Leslie Henry), 5747 Drexel avenue, Hyde Park, Chicago INDIANA Burrier, Amos W. (Amos William), Room 52, State House, Indianapolis. 52 Downey avenue, Irvington Buiyrue, W. T. (William Thomas), 41 South Pennsylvania street. The Meridian, 1 Michigan street, Indianapolis Carr, J. W. (John Wesley), High School Bldg. 4389 W. 11 st., Anderson Cooper, Chas. M. (Charles Marion), 243 Kast Washington street. The St Clair, 109 West St Clair street, Indianapolis CuLBertson, Glenn, Hanover College, Hanover Duncan, W. C. (Washington Columbus), 408 Washington street. 1104 Hutchins avenue, Columbus EigenMann, Carl H. (Carl H——), Indiana University. 630 Atwater avenue, Bloomington Evans, 8. G. (S G ), 211 Main street, Evansville Husparp, Lucius, Room 8, Oliver Opera House. 117 Hast Madison street, South Bend 32 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Jounson, Richard O. (Richard Otto), Supt. State School for the Deaf, Indianapolis - Marsters, V. F. (V—— F—., Bloomington Megs, C. L. (C—— L—), Terra Haute Sweeney, Zachary T. (Zachary T——), Commissioner of Fisheries and Game for Indiana, Columbus Taytor, F. B. (Frank Bursley), 2905 Fairfield avenue, Fort Wayne Watpo, C. A. (Clarence Abiathar), Purdue University. 113 S. 9 street, La Fayette INDIAN TERRITORY Bonp, R. I. (R I ), Hartshorne Harper, Dr R. H. (Robert Henry), Afton IOWA Anpberson, F, P. (F—— P——), Epworth Barnes, Rey Frank G. (Frank G ), Epworth Seminary, Epworth Bryer, 8. W. (Samuel Walker), Iowa State College, Ames CALVIN, Samuel, 522 N. Clinton street, Iowa City CuHar.es, Jno. H. (John Herr), 721 Pierce street, Sioux City CHITTENDEN, H. M. (Hiram Martin), 511 13 street, Sioux City Cownig, John, The Capitol. 831 West 4 street, Des Moines Heaty, G. B., Sioux City Hoyt, Dr Frank C., Hospital for Insane. Mt. Pleasant Kyupsen, Grace W. (Grace Whiting), State Normal School. 521 Clay street, Cedar Falls LARRABEE, William, Clermont Leonarp, A. G. (Arthur Gray), Lowa Geological Survey. 1522 9 street, Des Moines Norton, W. M. (William Harmon), Mt Vernon Powers, H. C. (Henry Clay), Hedge’s Station, Sioux City PurssELu, U. G. (Ulysses G——), Government Building. 215 9 street, Sioux City Putnam, W. C. (William Clement), 213 Main street. 2013 Brady street, Davenport RvueteE, Otto M. (Otto Moyer), 18. Locust st. 721 Bluff st., Dubuque Sager, John R. (John Randall), U.S. Weather Bureau. 1415 24 street, Des Moines SuHerier, Julius M. (Julius Mason), Post-Office Building. Kemper Hall, cor. Main and 11 streets, Davenport Sumek, Prof. B., lowa City Srrvens, W. M. (William Myron), 1911 Pierce street, Sioux City KANSAS 33 KANSAS Anperson, T. J. (Thomas Jefferson), 627 Kansas avenue. 215 Clay street, Topeka Austin, Edwin A. (Edwin Atlee), 107 East 6 ave. 913 Clay st., Topeka GrimsLey, G. P. (George Perry), Washburn College, Topeka Haworru, Erasmus, University of Kansas. 1503 Massachusetts street, Lawrence Hepner, H. E., Lakin Jennines, T. B. (Charles Augustus Thorp Buttolph), U. 5. Weather Bureau Office. 324 Willow avenue, Topeka Kettoae, R. S. (Royal Shaw), Tucson, Arizona, Agent of Bureau of For- estry. Fay, Russell County Martin, Geo. W. (George Washington), State Capitol. 1409 Topeka avenue, Topeka Menxr, D. R. (David Ramaley), Main street, Garden City Mounecer, Geo. M. (George Merrick), 6 Madison st., Chicago, Ill. Eureka Rosrnson, A. A. (Albert Alonzo), 422 Olive street, St Louis, Mo. 900 Tyler street, Topeka Russet, W. G. (William Gardner), Russell Smyru, B. B. (Bernard Bryan), State Capitol. 3809 W. 5 street, Topeka Watson, Carrie M. (Carrie M——), University of Kansas, Lawrence Wiper, E. (Edward), Jackson and 9 sts. 1021 Harrison st., Topeka KENTUCKY Brownett, H. G. (Harry Gault), 1900 Brook street. 106 W. Oak street, Louisville Burk, W. E. (William Emmett), Male High School. 1036 Highland avenue, Louisville Coox, Fred W. (Fred W——), 108 E. Kentucky street, Louisville Cox, L. M. (L M——), Ener. and Arch. Club, Louisville GrinstEaD, W. C. (William Campbell), corner Maple and Walnut sts., Danville Mark, E. H. (Edgar Huston),514 West Walnut street. The Rossmore, 748-752 4 avenue, Louisville Rocerrs, Augustus, Kentucky School for the Deaf, Danville Waricut, Miss Carrie M. (Caroline McLean), Semple Collegiate School, 1225-1227 4 avenue. 918 1 street, Louisville LOUISIANA Derpy, G. McC. (George McClellan), 8232 Prytania street. 14 Audubon place, New Orleans Knapp, S. A. (Seaman Ashel), 527 Pujo street, Lake Charles 34 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Morean, Prof. H. A. (H—— A——), Baton Rouge Rose, E. C. (Emerson Clarence), Leland University, 7013 St Charles ave- nue, New Orleans ScorreLp, Miss Margaret, 304 McNeil street, Shreveport MAINE Berry, Alford H. (Alford H——), Portland Boru, Adolph C. (Adolph C——), U.S. Engineer’s Office. Portland Bay.ry, W. S. (William Shirley), Colby College, Waterville Burrowes, Francis S. (Francis S——), U. S. Engineer’s Office, Portland Cary, Austin, Brunswick Cieaves, Henry B. (Henry Bradstreet), 120 Exchange street. Congress Square Hotel, 579 Congress street, Portland Dow, Hon. Fred. N., 12 Monument square, Portland A FrssenpvEN, Francis, 513 Exchange street. 73 Deering street, Portland Foxpes, Charles S. (Charles Scott), 106-112 Commercial street. 72 Emery street, Portland Hii, W. Scott (Winfield Scott), 154 State street, Augusta Hoy, Chas. C. (Charles Chamberlain), St Louis near Boyle avenue. “Beachmere,” Ogunquit, York county Lee, Leslie A. (Leslie Alexander), Bowdoin College. 38 Bath street, Brunswick Mannina, Prentice C. (P—— C——), 129-131 Middle street. Cumber- land Mills, Main street, box 1115, Portland Merritt, Fullerton, 19 State street. 166 Union street, Bangor Moron, Eliza H. (Eliza Happy), 1377 Washington avenue. ‘“ The Cedars,” 365 Allen avenue, North Deering O’Donoeuur, D. OC. (Daniel O’Connell), 537 Congress street. 75 Emery street, Portland Payson, C.H. (Charles Henry),32 Exchangest. 166 Vaughan st., Portland Payson, Geo. S. (George Shipman), 32 Exchange street. 30 Mellen street, Portland Prentiss, Henry M. (Henry Mellen), 52 Broad st. 18 Jefferson st., Bangor Rost, Frederick, First National Bank, 57 Exchange street. Portland Scuorretp, Lieut. Gen. J. M. (John McAllister), u. s. 4., War Depart- ment, Washington. Bar Harbor in summer, St Augustine, Fla., in winter WeymourtH, F. E., Orono Wuire, S. T. (Samuel Thompson), West Paris MARYLAND Ames, J.S. (Joseph Sweetman), Johns Hopkins University. 225 W. Preston street, Baltimore MARYLAND 85 BereianD, Maj. Eric, u. s. A., Central Savings Bank Building. 1116 N. Charles street, Baltimore Cuttps, T. S., D. D. (Thomas Spencer), Rectory, Chevy Chase Care, Isaac M. (Isaac Martin), Abbottstown, Baltimore CriarK, Wm. Bullock (William Bullock), Johns Hopkins University. _ 8 E. Read street, Baltimore Couen, Mendes, 825 N. Charles street, Baltimore » Doans, C. F. (Charles Francis), College Park. Hyattsville Doper, O. G. (Omenzo George), Naval Academy, Annapolis Evprey, Major F. W. (Frederick William), vu. s. a. Sandy Spring, Montgomery County Eris, Charles Manly, Trinity Corners. Elkton Hyans, Lt. Col. A. W. (Andrew. Wallace), u.s. N., 400 Main street, Elkton GoucHer, Jno. F. (John Franklin), Woman’s College. 2313 St. Paul street, Baltimore Hatstep, Dr Wm. 8, 1201 Eutaw Place, Baltimore Harran, Herbert, 516 Cathedral street, Baltimore Haruan, Homer B. (Homer Blakeslee), Office Chief of Engineers, U.S. Army. Washington Grove Harty, Prof. A. G. (Albert Gallatin), Montgomery County. Rockville Haynes, D. F. (David Francis), Chesapeake Pottery, Baltimore. 1715 Park avenue, Baltimore Huspen, Edwin, Hastern avenue and Patuxent street, Baltimore. 731 Colorado avenue, Tuxedo Park, Baltimore county Henpricxson, Prof. W. W., Naval Academy, Annapolis Hopy, A. B. (Albert Berthold), Hoen Building, Baltimore Hurp, Henry M. (Henry Mills), Johns Hopkins Hospital. 599-601 North Broadway, Baltimore Jouannsen, Albert (Albert Heinrich von Kraghlungsfeldt), Johns Hop- kins University, Baltimore Kerr, Mrs Alice M. (Alice Maud), Frederick road, opp. Hilton avenue. “ Cherokee,” Catonsville Kertiy, Howard Atwood, 1418 Eutaw place. 1406 Eutaw place, Baltimore LenMann, G. W. (Gustavus William), 32 South street, Baltimore. ‘‘ The Terraces,’ Mt Washington, Baltimore county Lorp, Eleanor L. (Eleanor Louisa), Woman’s College of Baltimore. 2500 St Paul street, Baltimore Matonr, Miss M. J. (M J——), Hyattsville Mriier, Benj. L. (Benjamin Leroy), Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore Montacur, C. 8. (Calvin Swartz), Garrett Park Moore, Jos. T., Sandy Spring, Montgomery county Miutier, Louis, 47 Chamber of Commerce, Baltimore. Baltimore county Murray, Nicholas, Johns Hopkins University. University Club, Balti- more 36 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOUIETY Nexson, Thos. (Thomas), 122 Prince George street, Annapolis O’Hara, Rev. Wm. L. (William L—), Mt. St. Mary’s P. O. PrerryMan, EK. B. (Elijah Barrett), Md. State Normal School. 1200 La- fayette avenue, Baltimore Rep, Harry Fielding, Johns Hopkins University. 608 Cathedral street, Baltimore Remsen, Ira, John Hopkins University. 12 E. Biddle street, Baltimore Rippie, Rey. D. H. (D H ), Emmitsburg Roacu, Dr Joseph, 611 Park avenue, Baltimore Rosr, Thos. E. (Thomas Ellwood), 2427 W. North avenue, Baltimore Rurienes, J. J. (John Joseph), Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, 9 George st., Hampden, Baltimore. Permanent address, Alton, III. ScuMEckrstEr, L. F. (Laurence Frederick), Geological Survey, 1330 F street, Washington, D.C. 1620 West Lexington street, Baltimore Suarruck, G. B. (George Burbank), Johns Hopkins University, Balti- more. Sudbrook Park Sinz, Lieut. J. L. (J L ), U.S. S. “ Windom.” Baltimore Srerner, Bernard C. (Bernard Christian), Enoch Pratt Free Library, 106 West Mulberry street. 1038 North Eutaw street, Baltimore Wuirs, John T. (John T ), Cumberland WittraMs, Mrs George Huntington, 803 Cathedral street, Baltimore MASSACHUSETTS Apvams, Brooks, 28 Court street, Boston. Quincy Agassiz, Hlizabeth Cary (Mrs Louis), Radcliffe College. 36 Quincy street, Cambridge ALDEN, Col. C. H. (Charles Henry), u.s. a., retired, Newtonville ALLEN, Hon. Charles H. (Charles Herbert), Lowell Auten, L. Mabel (Lucy Mabel), 23 Hudson street, Lynn Arms, Miss Mary KE. (Mary E ), 9 Union street, Greenfield Arnoux, Judge W. H. (W H—), Vineyard Haven Ayer, Dr James B. (James Bourne), 518 Beacon street, Boston Bage, Rufus M., Jr. (Rufus Mather), Brockton High School. 84 Ellis street, Brockton Barrp, Capt. Wm. (William), uv. s. a., Massachusetts Institute of Tech- nology, Boston. 83 Newbury street, Boston Barron, Geo. H. (George Hunt), 30 Trinity place, Boston. 16 Lexing- ton avenue, Cambridge BatcHeuer, Robert, 57 Lincoln st. 55 Commonwealth ave., Boston Beats, Frederick H. (Frederick Hall), Worcester Academy, Worcester Buakg, Clarence John, 226 Marlborough street, Boston Brake, Francis, 125 Milk street, Boston. Weston, Auburndale P. O. Brake, Francis E. (Francis Everett), 95 Milk street. Hotel Bellevue, 21 Beacon street, Boston MASSACHUSETTS 37 Breck, Sam’] (Samuel), vu. s. a., retired, 50 St. Stephen street, Boston Burton, Alfred E. (Alfred Edgar), Massachusetts Institute of Technology. 58 Webster street, West Newton CaBLE, Geo. W. (George Washington), 23 Dryads’ Green, Northampton Cassipy, Arthur B. (Arthur Benjamin), Wollaston CHAMBERLAIN, Alexander F. (Alexander Francis), Clark University. 12 Shirley street, Worcester CuHanpter, F. W. (Francis Ward), Massachusetts Institute of Technology. 195 Marlborough street, Boston CrarKk, Charles N. (Charles Nathaniel), 124 Main street. 207 South street, Northampton Cxiark, John 8S. (John Spencer), 120 Boylston st. 64 Pinckney st., Boston. Copp, J. Storer (J Storer), President Northampton Education Society, Northampton ConpatrH, Laura A. (Laura Anne), Central Street Grammar School. 541 State street, Springfield Conant, Edward EK. (Edward E ), Lake Pleasant Cook, Candace, Fowler School, Sprague street. 506 June st., Fall River Curtis, George Carroll, 64 Crawford street, Boston Dakin, Arthur H. (Arthur Hazard), 30 Court street. 873 Commonwealth avenue, Boston Danrortu, G. H. (George Henry), 45 High street, Greenfield Davis, A. McF. (Andrew McFarland), 10 Appleton street, Cambridge Davis, W. M. (William Morris), Geol. Museum, Harvard University. 17 Francis avenue, Cambridge Dawes, Miss Anna L. (Anna Laurens), 15 Elm street, Pittsfield Day, Mrs Mary Lowell (Mrs C Atwater), P. O. address, care Boston Safe Deposit Co., 87 Milk street, Boston Dr Kats, Courtenay, San Fernando, Dgo., Mexico. 80 Pond street, Jamaica Plain, Boston Dicxryson, Marquis F. (Marquis Fayette), 53 State st., Boston. Brookline Doanz, Geo. EH. (George Emerson), 12 8. Main street. 43 Oak street, Middleboro Dor, Nathan Haskell, 18 Boylston street. ‘“ Hedgecote,” Glen road, Jamaica Plain, Boston Drake, Mrs Louis 8. (Laura Bell), 37 Evergreen avenue, Auburndale Hastman, C. R. (Charles Rochester), Museum of Comparative Zodélogy. 304 Brookline street, Cambridge Haston, Norman 8. (Norman Salisbury), George B. Stone School, Globe street. 458 High street, Fall River Extor, Charles W. (Charles William), 5 University Hall. 17 Quincy street, Cambridge. Exuis, Annie C. (Annie Claflin), 38 Elm road, Newtonville Emerson, B. K. (Benjamin Kendall), Department of Geology, Amherst College. 21 Northampton road, Amherst 38 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Eneier, Edmund A. (Edmund Arthur), Worcester Polytechnic Institute. 11 Boynton street, Worcester FauLkner, Dr George, 29 Greenough ave., Jamaica Plain, Boston Fay, Charles E. (Charles Ernest), Tufts’ College. 92 Professors row, Tufts’ College Fre.p, William L.W. (William Lusk Webster), Milton Academy. Milton Fisumr, Miss B. F. (# ai ), Wellesley College, Wellesley Forses, W. H., 233 Chestnut avenue, Jamaica Plain Futter, Sarah, 178 Newbury street, Boston. Concord street, Newton Lower Falls FursisuH, M. I. (Mauran Irving), Attleboro Falls Frye, Alexis E., 52 Pinckney street, Boston 1728 Mass. ave., D. C. Gack, Mabel Carleton, 50 Pearl street, Worcester Ganona, William F. (William Francis), Smith College. 11 Massasoit street, Northampton Garpner, John L. (John Lowell), 51 Commonwealth avenue, Boston Garrett, H. G. (H G ), Taunton GorssMANN, Charles A. (Charles Anthony), Agricultural College, Amherst GREEN, Samuel Swett, Free Public Library. 12 Harvard st., Worcester GREENE, James D. (James Diman), 18 Chase street, Newton Center GriswoLb, L. S. (Leon Stacy), 238 Boston street, Dorchester Grosvenor, Prof. Edwin A., Amherst GuLutver, F. P. (Frederic Putnam), St. Mark’s School, Southboro Hats, Richard A. (Richard Augustus), Essex Company, 80 Salem street, Lawrence Hatt, Prof. G. Stanley, Clark University, Worcester Hamttn, Charles 8. (Charles Sumner), Ames Building. 2 Raleigh street, Boston Hammonp, John C. (John Chester), 59 Main street. 222 Elm street, Northampton Harpy, Alpheus H. (Alpheus Holmes), 1151 Tremont Building. 445 Beacon street, Boston Hart, Albert Bushnell, 15 Appian Way, Cambridge Hart, Francis R. (Francis Russell), Ames Building, Boston. Milton Harwoop, Herbert J. (Herbert Joseph), 220 Devonshire street, Boston. Littleton, Middlesex County Haruaway, Geo. A. (George Adelbert), corner Harvard and Portland streets. 12 Francis avenue, Cambridge Haypen, John EH. V. (John Ellerton Vassall), 89 Court street, Boston. Hazen, Charles Downer, Smith College, Northampton Brush Hill road, Milton. P. O. address (residence), Mattapan Hearp, Augustine, care T. Frank Noonan, 50 State st., Boston Hearn, D.C. (Daniel Collamore), 110 Boylston street, Boston. 147 Highland avenue, Newtonville + MASSACHUSETTS 39 Hoce, Wm. Jas. (William James), Auburn. 54 Elm street, Worcester Ho.pen, Luther L. (Luther Loud), 296 Washington street, Boston. 9 St John street, Jamaica Plain Houmes, Frederic H. (Frederic Harper), Hyannis State Normal School, North street, Hyannis Horsrorp, Miss Cornelia (Cornelia Conway Felton), 27 Craigie street, Cambridge Hosmer, Ralph §. (Ralph Sheldon), Roxbury Hovey, Horace C. (Horace Carter), 60 High street, Newburyport Howe, Mrs Arabella, 261 Beacon street, Boston Howe tt, Selah, Boston Latin School, Warren avenue, Boston. 9 Kirk street, West Roxbury Husparp, Chas. Eustis (Charles Eustis), 28 State street, Boston. 150 Brattle street, Cambridge Husparp, Dr Frank A. (Frank Allen), 157 High street, Taunton Hupparp, G. G. (G G ), Cambridge Husparp. Jas. M. (James Mascarene), 201 Columbus avenue. 3882 Marlboro street, Boston Hupearp, Paul M. (Paul Masearene), 925 Exchange Building, 53 State street. 3882 Marlborough street, Boston Hutt, Jas. W. (James Wells), 3 North st. 40 Appleton ave., Pittsfield Hunxine, A. W. (Arthur Ward), 374 Stevens street, Lowell Huxtry, Henry Minor, Peabody Museum. 401 Craigie Hall, Cambridge JACKMAN, Prof. Jas. V. (James V——), 183 Lakeside avenue, Marlboro Jaccar, T. A., Jr. (Thomas Augustus); Museum of Geology. Ware Hall 15, Harvard street, Cambridge Kernnepy, Geo. G. (George Golding), Readville Kennepy, Harris, 286 Warren street, Roxbury. Blue Hill avenue and Brush Hill road, Milton Kine, Charles F. (Charles Francis), Dearborn School. 107 Elm Hill avenue, Boston KNEELAND, F. N. (Frederick Newton), 8 Paradise road, Northampton Lakeman, Miss A. M. (Annie Maria), Principal Lane Grammar School. 9 Andrews street, Gloucester Lanza, Gaetano, Mass. Inst. of Technology. 22 West Cedar st., Boston Lawrencr, Wm. H.C. (William Hathaway Clark), Gardner st., Nantucket Litey, Sarah M. (Sarah M ), 048 4th street, South Boston Lixcoun, Mary L. (Mary L ), Rockport Lirrir, A. D. (Arthur Dehon), 7 Exchange place, Boston. 45 Warren street, Brookline LivrLeFriexp, George EH. (George Emery), 67 Cornhill, Boston. 16 Chester street, Cambridge Lorp, Dr EK. C. E. (E C— E—.), Fairfax, Cambridge Lorine, Robert, 192 Devonshire street, Boston 40 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY McCanpuisH, John, 26 Summer st. 239 West Newton st., Boston May, Benj. D. (Benjamin D ), Principal Hale High School, Stow Metiyer, Mary C. (Mary C——), 80 Regent street, Roxbury MenpenuHatt, T. C. (Thomas Corwin), Worcester Menpvum, Lydia, 184 Franklin street, Melrose Highlands Merriman, Rev. Dr D. (D ), 95 Irving street, Cambridge Mitrer, R. T., Jr. (R T—),156 Tremont st. 125 Beacon st., Boston Monroe, WillS. (Will Seymour), State Normal School, 59-63 Court street. 75 Court street, Westfield Morss, Everett, 77 Cornhill. 303 Marlboro street, Boston Murpocs, F. F. (F F ), North Adams Nasu, Louis P. (Louis Philip), 121 Elm street. Morgan street, Holyoke Neirert, W. W. (William Washington), Weather Bureau. The Oxford, 146 Oxford street, Cambridge Nitrs, Wm. H. (William Harmon), Massachusetts Institute of Technol- ogy, 30 Trinity pl. Copley Square Hotel, Huntington ave., Boston O’Brren, Elizabeth, 2280 Massachusetts avenue, Cambridge OumsteED, Frederick Law, Jr., Brookline Oscoop, Edward L. (Edward L—), 221 Beacon street, Boston Parker, Edmund M. (Edmund Morley), 89 State street, Boston. 63 Sparks street, Cambridge Parker, Walter 8. (Walter Scott), Sch. Com. Rooms, Mason street, Bos- ton. Walnut Knoll, Reading Parkinson, Wm. D. (William Dwight), 3 Moody street. 103 Lexington street, Waltham Prcx, Annie 8. (Annie S——), Redpath Lyceum Bureau, 120 Tremont street, Boston PickeRINnG, Edward C. (Edward Charles), The Observatory, Cambridge Pinispury, Lt. Comdr. J. E. (J E—-), 50 Commonwealth avenue, Boston Pork, Dr C. Augusta (Caroline Augusta), 163 Newbury street, Boston Porter, Dwight, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston. 149 Hawthorne street, Malden PousnanD, F. G. (Frederic Grahame), Old Colony Trust Company, Ames Building, Boston. 263 Lafayette street, Salem Pratt, Miss Emma A. (Emma A——), 6 Ashland street, Worcester Pray, Benj. 8. (Benj. 5 ), 53 State street, Boston Pray, James Sturgis, cor. Walnut and Warren streets, Brookline. The Jarvis, 27 Everett street, Cambridge PritcHarpD, Myron T. (Myron T ), 125 School street, Roxbury Prircnert, Henry S. (Henry Smith), Massachusetts Institute of Tech- nology. 3837 Marlboro street, Boston REDFIELD, Julia W. (Julia Wallace), 290 South street, Pittsfield Rice, A. Hamilton (Alexander Hamilton), Harvard Medical School. 389 Beacon street, Boston MASSACHUSETTS 41 Ricwarps. Mrs Ellen H. (Ellen Henrietta Swallow), Massachusetts In- stitute of Technology, 525 Boylston st. 32 Eliot st., Jamaica Plain Ricuarps, Ralph W. (Ralph Webster), Tufts College. 120 Curtis street, West Somerville Roszsins, A. G. (Arthur Graham), Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston. 60 Webster street, West Newton Rosrnson, Albert G. (Albert Gardner), Buckland Rorcu, A. Lawrence (Abbott Lawrence), Blue Hill Observatory, Hyde Park. 285 Commonwealth avenue, Boston Russet, Frank, Harvard University, Cambridge Sargent, C. 8. (Charles Sprague), Arnold Arboretum, Jamaica Plain- Brookline Sawyer, Edward, 60 Congress street, Boston. Bellevue street, Newton Sawyer, J. H. J— H ), Easthampton Sawyer, W. H. (William Henry), 66 Lincoln street. 107 Lincoln street, Worcester ScupprEr, Sam. H. (Samuel Hubbard), Cambridge SuHarptes. 8. P. (Stephen Paschall), Boston. 22 Concord ave., Cambridge SHarruck, Horace B. (Horace Bowditch), 50 Central street. 3866 Ando- ver street, Lowell Smumons, John F. (John Franklin), 1010 Exchange Building, 53 State street, Boston. Hanover. P. O. address, “Assinippi” Srynorr, Chas. P. (Charles Peter), State Normal School. Bridgewater Smruig, Edw. $. (Edward Stetson), 429 Center st. 36 Maple ave., Newton Smrrx, Miss J. Angelina (J—— Angelina), Hopedale Snyper, W. H. (William Henry), Academy. 125 Pa. ave., Worcester Spencer, W. H. (William Henry), D.D.S.,188 Main street. 386 Pomeroy terrace, Northampton Sranwoop, Edward, 201 Columbus ave., Boston. 76 High st., Brookline STERRETT, J. R. S. J-—— R S) ), Amherst Stevens, M. T. (Moses Tyler), North Andover Srrvenson, Holland Newton, Commander, U.S. Navy, Pittsfield Sronn, James S. (James Savage), 234 Marlborough street. Boston Sunttyan, Richard, 27 Kibby street. 35 Brimmer street, Boston Sunicurasr, Prof. C. de (C—— de), Harvard University, Cambridge Swatn, George F. (George Fillmore), Massachusetts Institute of Tech nology. 435 Marlboro street, Boston Tart, Mrs Alphonso, Elm street, Millbury TuHompson, Miss Mary H. (Mary H ), 88 Rutland square, Boston Tuomson, Elihu, General Electric Co., Center street, Lynn. 22 Monu- ment avenue, Swampscott TrtpeEn, Charles J. (Charles J——), P. O. Box 671, Milton Tinetey, Xenophon D. (Xenophon Demosthenes), 13 Hampden street, Gloucester 4 42 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY TownseEnD, H. B. (Edward Britton), 27 Kibby street, Boston. Hawthorn road, Brookline TruESDELL, Waldo B. (Waldo Bromley), Holden TuckERMAN, Charles 8. (Charles Sanders), 1 Court street. 201 Bay State road, Boston W apuin, Horace G. (Horace Greeley), State House, Boston. 118 Woburn street, Reading Warp, Robert De C. (Robert De Courcy), Harvard University, Cambridge Waters, Isabel H. (Isabel Holman), Millbury Watson, Thomas A. (Thomas Augustus), Howard street, Quincy. Quincy avenue, Hast Bramtree Wesper, A. B. (A—— B ), Cambridge Weeks, John W. (John W ), 97 Valentine street, West Newton We.imaAN, Hiller C. (Hiller Crowell),City Library Association, Springfield Wetts, Louisa A. (Louisa Appleton),45 Commonwealth avenue, Boston Wueerter, Leonard, 28 Elm street, Worcester Waitin, Mrs John C. (John C ), Whitinsville Wuittne, 8. B. (Stephen Betts), 11 Ware street, Cambridge Wuitr, Miss Abbie M. (Abbie M ), Farnumsville Wiper, Harris H. (Harris Hawthorne), Zodlogical Laboratory, Smith College, Dryads Green, Northampton Witper, Katherine L. (Katherine Larkin), Elm Hill School, Barre Wiruiston, A. Lyman (Asahel Lyman), cor. Main and King streets. 39 Round Hill, Northampton Wirson, Wm. Power (William Power), 506 Exchange Building, 53 State street. 25 Granby street, Boston Winber, John W. (John White), 186 Congress street, Boston. 78 High street, Newburyport Woop, P. W. (Pliny Williams), 66 Lincoln st. 9 Shattuck st., Worcester Woops, Henry, 33 Summer street, Boston Woops, Rev. Robt. M. (Robert McEwen), Hatfield Woopman, J. Edmund (Joseph Edmund), University Museum, Harvard University, Oxford street. 56 Frost street, North Cambridge. Woopwarp, Frank EF. (Frank Ernest), 36 Union street, Boston. 93 Rockland avenue, Malden Woopworrna, J. B. (Jay Backus), Harvard University. 24 Langdon street, Cambridge Yate, Caroline A. (Caroline Ardelia), Clarke School, Round Hill, North- ampton MICHIGAN Armsrronc, Miss May C., 472 West High street, Detroit Brxspy, Major W. H. (William Herbert), u.s. a., Corps of Engineers, U.S. Engineer Office, Detroit MICHIGAN 43 Gregory, William M. (William Mumford), Jonesville Haske tt, H. EH. (Eugene Elwin), 71 Griswold st. 62 Bagg st., Detroit Hoop, O. P. (Ozni Porter), Mich. Coll. of Mines. Hubbel st., Houghton JmFFERSON, Mark 8. W. (Mark Sylvester William), State Normal Col- lege. 14 Normal street, Ypsilanti Jopuine, J. H. (James Hdmund), Cleveland-Cliffs Iron Co., Ishpeming. Marquette Lang, Alfred C. (Alfred Church), 503 Hollister Block. 408 Grand street §., Lansing Leverett, Frank, 312 North Thayer street, Ann Arbor Marrinpate, W. C., Detroit ParMELEE, H. P. (Horatio Plum), 503 Mich. Trust Bldg., corner Ottawa and Pearl streets. 594 Cherry street, Grand Rapids Perrer, Wm. H. (William Henry), University of Michigan. 554 Thomp- son street, Ann Arbor RussEt1, Israel C. (Israel Cook), 1703 Hill street, Ann Arbor ScHNEIDER, C. F. (Charles Fred), U. 8. Weather Bureau. 741 Ionia st. W., Lansing West, P. C. F. (P—— C—— F——), Calumet MINNESOTA Auten, W. P. (William Prescott), 711 Lincoln avenue, St Paul - Berkey, Charles P. (Charles Peter), University of Minnesota. 1601 7 street southeast, Minneapolis Boynton, Frances L. (Frances Laura), corner Second and Ramsey sts. Hastings, Dakota county Brabtey, Capt. John J. (John Jewsbury), 14th Inf., Fort Snelling Brower, Hon. J. V. (Jacob Vradenberg), Chairman Museum Commit- tee Minnesota Historical Society, St Paul Cox, Ulysses O. (Ulysses Orange), State Normal School, 5 street. 825 Clark street, Mankato Cross, Judson Newell, 600 New York Life Building. Minneapolis GatLuaRD, D. D. (David Du Bose), Providence Building. 1418 Kast Superior street, Duluth GossmAn, Leo A. (Leo Andrew), Spring Valley Green, Samuel B. (Samuel Bowdlear), University of Minnesota, St Anthony Park. 2095 Dooley avenue, St Paul Hatt, C. W. (Christopher Webber), University of Minnesota. 803 Uni- versity avenue southeast, Minneapolis Hoxtn, R. L. (Richard Leveridge), U. S. Engineers’ Office. 55 Western avenue, St Paul KLErBeRGER, Geo. R. (George Reinard), State Normal School. 2035. 4 street, St Cloud 44 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Lockxwoop, Major D. W. (D W ), St Paul Puexps, Wm. F. (William Franklin), 317 Manhattan Bldg., St Paul ReEpFIELD, Wm. W. (William Wallace), Room 8, City Hall. 2637 Port- land avenue, Minneapolis Swenson, Harold, New London Upuam, Warren, Secretary Minnesota Historical Society. 655 Central park, St Paul Wattacr, G. W. (Ga—— W—-), 1721 E. 1 street, Duluth MISSISSIPPI Dasnny, T. G. (Thomas Gregory), Office Levee Board. Mosby Hotel, Clarksdale Dosyns, J. R. (John Robert), 718 North State street, Jackson — Stinson, J. L. J L—), Agricultural College MISSOURI Anperson, R. L. (Robert Lee), Government Bldg.,6 and Broadway. 313 Bird street, Hannibal Brirts, Dr Jno. H. (John Henry), 114 East Franklin street. 127 East Franklin street, Clinton : BroaDHEAD, Prof. G. C. (G C—), 701 South 5 street. Columbia CARPENTER, Geo. O. (George Oliver), Clarke ave. and 10 st., St Louis Carr, Brig. Gen. E. A. (Kugene Asa), u.s. A., St Louis. Care Adjutant General, Washington, D. C. Casry, Major Thos. L. (Thomas Lincoln), Post Office Drawer 71, St Louis CHAUVENET, Louis, 5501 Chamberlain avenue, St Louis Cxussuck, Levi, 721 Olive street. 4147 Russell avenne, St Louis FarrpBanks, J. (Jonathan), corner Center and Jefferson streets. Corner Sherman and Center streets, Springfield Graves, Porter, Central High School, 11 and Locust streets. 717 Elm- wood avenue, Kansas City Guy, Wm. E. (William Evans), 72 Laclede Building. 4380 Westmin- ster place, St Louis Hacerman, James, Wainwright Building. 3654 Pine street, St Louis Hazen, John S. (John Suel), Springfield, Mo., Boonville and Brower. 876 N. Jefferson Trisu, H. C. (Henry Clay), Mo. Botanical Garden, 1920 Old Manchester road, St Louis Lapp, Geo. E. (George Edgar), Missouri School of Mines, Rolla Lercuton, Geo. B. (George Bridge), Monadnock, N. H., and St Louis Marsot, C. F. (C—— F ), University of Missouri. Columbia Mermop, Mrs Augustus 8. (Mary E——), Broadway and Locust, St Louis. Kirkwood MISSOURI 45 Morrison, G. B. (Gilbert Burnet), 15 and Forest streets. 2510 Perry avenue, Kansas City Nixon, Dr J. H. (John Howard), 314 St Louis street, Springfield Ocxrrson, J. A. (John Augustus), 122 N.7 st. 4217 Washington ave. Owen, Miss Luella A. (Luella Agnes), 306 North 9 street, St Joseph Perkins, A. T. (Albert Thompson), 107 Franklin avenue. 4392 Olive street, St Louis Peterson, C. A. (Cyrus Asbury), 816 Olivestreet. 8 Shaw place, St Louis Sampson, F. A. (Francis Asbury), Columbia. Sedalia ScHRENK, Hermann yon, Shaw School of Botany. 5227 Washington avenue, St Louis Sepewick, Lee M. (Lee M ), Beals Building, Kansas City SHEPARD, Edward M. (Edward Martin), Drury College. 1403 Benton avenue, Springfield Simmons, W. D. (Wallace Delafield), Simmon’s Hardward Company, 9 and Spruce streets. 4638 Berlin avenue, St Louis Smurexkins, Allan T. (Allan Thacher), 510 Pine street. 3700 Westminster place, St Louis Stocum, H. N. (Ebenezer N——), Frisco System R. R. 806 Mt Vernon street, Springfield Stuper, Dr Greenfield, 2912 Pine street, St Louis Squire, Willis C. (Willis Clifton), Mechanical Department Offices, Frisco System. 817 Benton avenue, Springfield Taytor, F. W. (Frederic William), World’s Fair. 5570 Cabanne ave- nue, St Louis TuacuHer, Arthur, Roe Bldg., 510 Pine st. 4804 Wash’n ave., St Louis Tirtmann, H. H. (H H , 3726 Washington Boulevard, St Louis Torppen, Dr H. (Hugo), 3117-3119 S. 7 st. 1923 Sidney st., St Louis TrELEASE, Wm. (William), Missouri Botanical Garden, St Louis Vervins, Alfred de, 3923 Delmar Boulevard, St Louis Weesrer, Elma J. (Elma Josephine), 15 and Campbell, Hamilton School. 1205 Hast 31 street, Kansas City Winstow, Arthur, 104 West 9 street, Kansas City Woopwakrp, Calvin M. (Calvin M ), Washington University, St Louis MONTANA Bocrrt, J. V. (J—— V——), Bozeman Brayton, H. M. (H M——, Billings Browne, Arthur B. (Arthur B——), Bearmouth Burret, Alexander, Marysville CuisHoiM, O. P. (O—— P ), Bozeman Ciements, Mrs A. B. (A B—.), Helena Dayiss, John F. (John Francis), Silver Bow Blk., 10 W. Granite st., Butte 46 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Exrop, Morton J. (Morton John), Univ. Mont., 205 E. 5 st. S., Missoula GitLerrr, Edward, Billings GoovaLe, C. W. (Charles Warren), Lewisohn Bldg. 900 W. Quartz st., Butte LatrD, Oliver F. (Oliver F ), Butte Moser, Gust, Forest Supervisor, Ovando Mumerus, Dan. P.(Daniel Perrin),U. S.Surveyor General’s Office, Helena. Wolsey, Meagher county Newton, T. P. (T—— P ), Butte Reap, Wm. (William), Columbia Falls Rogerson, James M. (James Monroe), 31 West Main street. 1 Dell Place, Bozeman Russet, J. R. (James Richard), Butte Free Public Library. 849 West Quartz street, Butte Sizer, F. L. (Frank Leonard), Butte. Helena Stewart, Benj. D. (Benjamin Duane), 508 East Pine street, Missoula Wuiteroor, Dr Robt. M. (Robert Mills), 111 Main street, Bozeman Witson, Mary C., 108 5 avenue, Helena WincHELL, Horace V. (Horace Vaughn), The Lenox, 132 West Granite street, Butte NEBRASKA Barpour, Erwin H. (Erwin Hinckley), University of Nebraska. 1254 R street, Lincoln Brssry, Charles E. (Charles Edwin), University of Nebraska. 1504 8 street, Lincoln Bruce, E. E. (Edward Estell), 401-405 South 10 street. 8 street and Worthington place, Omaha CALDWELL, How. W. (Howard Walter), University of Nebraska. 511 North 16 st., Lincoln Davis, Ellery W. (Ellery Williams), University of Nebraska. 1545 C street Dietz, C. N. (Charles Nelson), 1214 Farnam street. 4288.38 st., Omaha Doann, A. H. (Arthur Hedley), 812 Farnam st. 812 N. 39 st., Omaha Furnas, Robt W. (Robert Wilkinson), 44 South 6 street, Brownville Gorpon, C. H. (Charles Henry), 15 and N streets. 1828 F st., Lincoln Hamivton, Frank T. (Frank T ), Omaha Ho.precr, George W. (George W ), Omaha Ives, W. C. (W C ), 182 North 39 street, Omaha Kitpatrick, Thomas, 1507 Douglas street. 410 North 22 street, Omaha Lewis, A. B. (Albert Buell), University of Nebraska. 1636 K st., Lincoln LoveLanp, G. A. (George Andrew), University’ of Nebraska. 1347 L street, Lincoln McCuHeang, Sarah M. (Sarah Maria), Lone School, 26 and Franklin streets. The Winona, 9 27 street and Dewey avenue, Omaha NEBRASKA 47 Manperson, Charles F. (Charles Frederick), 1001 Farnam street. 38100 Chicago street, Omaha Murpny, Frank, Merchants’ National Bank, Omaha Newton, Wm. (William), 115 Hickory st. 820 Worthington pl., Omaha Pwarse, C. G. (Carroll Gardner), 508 City Hall. 2205 8. 10 st., Omaha Prarr, James H. (James H ), Omaha Club, Omaha Prircuett, Geo. H. (George Edward), 1224 Farnam street. 2124 Cass street, Omaha RoureouaH, Mrs EK. J. (Elmore Jackson), 607 North 40 street, Omaha Suiry, Pierson D. (Pierson D ), St Edwards Stout, O. V. P. (Oscar Van Pelt), University of Nebraska. 1785 Euclid avenue, Lincoln Wrnne, C. K. (Charles Knickerbocker), Deputy Surgeon General, v. s. A., Headquarters Department of Missouri. The Omaha Club NEVADA FRIEND, Chas. W. (Charles William), Carson street. Corner Stewart and King streets, Carson City Fuuron, R. L. (Robert Lardin), 118 West 1 street, Reno Nerwtanps, Hon. F. G. (Francis Griffith), Reno Situ, W. T. (W—— T—), Elko ; Stupss, Joseph E. (Joseph Edward), Nevada State University, Reno Taytor, L. H. (L H——), Carson City NEW HAMPSHIRE Brown, O. B. (Orton Bishop), Berlin FrietcuHer, Robert, 3S. Park street. 42 N. College street, Hanover Harris, T. W. (Thaddeus William), High School Building, Winter st. 57 Elm street, Keene Hirencock, C. H. (Charles Henry), Dartmouth College. Hanover Jounston, J. W. (John Walter), Depot square, Concord. 1819 Elm st., Manchester Lorine, Everett G. (Everett Grey), A. B., principal Hampton Academy and High School, Hampton ScHouter, James, 60 Congress street, Boston, Mass. Intervale Town, Col. F. L. @@'— L ), Laneaster NEW JERSEY Bancrort, Miss M. E. (M E ), The Lindens,” Haddonfield Barr, Harry P. (Harry Perkins), 39 Cortlandt st., N. Y. East Orange Bonnett, Charles I. (Charles Isham), “ Bonnell Building,” 196 Market street. 13 South 9 street, Newark 48 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Brewirton, Major H. F. (Henry Feltus), vu. s. a., 1037 East Jersey street, Hlizabeth CoLLinewoon, F. (Francis), 346 B’way, N. Y. 4148S. Broad st., Elizabeth Cox, Jean W. (Jean Weir), Haddonfield Training School. ‘ The Lin- dens,” P. O. Box 715, Haddonfield Don, 8. Bayard (Samuel Bayard), First National Bank, Hoboken. 170 Scotland Road, South Orange Downs, W. F. (William Fletcher), 75 Fairview avenue, Jersey City Dutcuer, Ass’t Surg. B. H. (Basil Hicks), vu. s. a., Fort Hancock Exxis, Miss A. C. (A—— C ), The Chestnut, Plainfield Farr, Marcus 8. (Marcus Stults), Princeton Univ. 12 Maple st., Princeton Fiemer, J. A. (John Adolph), Main street, Springfield Hattock, Charles, 278 Pacific avenue, Jersey City HorrMan, Samuel V. (Samuel. Verplanck), 91 Madison ave., Morristown Ho.uuisrEr, George B. (George B ), Rutherford Jacospus, D. 8. (David Schenck), Stevens Institute of Technology, Ho- boken. 83 Grand street, Jersey City JENKINS, Weston, ‘renton Kent, Wm. (William), 220 Broadway, New York. 122 Pennington avenue, Passaic Kunnarpt, W. B. (Wheaton Bradish), 1 B’way, N. Y. Bernardsville Lipsey, William, Princeton University. 20 Bayard lane, Princeton Lururr, Agnes Vinton, Newark Normal School. 917 Broad st., Newark McCrurg, C. F. W. (Charles Freeman Williams), Princeton University. 80 University place, Princeton McGraw, James H. (James Herbert), 120 Liberty st., N. Y. Madison McLauentiy, A. J. (Allan Joseph), Ellis Island, New York harbor. 185 Summit avenue, Jersey City MacConne t, C. C. (Charles Curtis), 611 B’way, N. Y. Morristown Marsu, Matilda L. (Matilda Lucille), 600 Park avenue, Paterson Morpeny, Franklin, 148 Chestnut st. 1027 Broad street, Newark Ortmann, A. E. (Arnold Edward), 8 Maple street, Princeton Prorpre, Otto F. (Otto Ferdinand), 15 Donaldson avenue, Rutherford Putman, 8. C. (Samuel Cooper), 515 Broadway, New York. Chester, Morris county. QuAcKENBusH, D. M. (Dexter M——), with Prudential Insurance Co. 887 Lake street, Newark Reintiy, Miss 8. A. (S— ), State Normal School, Trenton Rosrson, Mrs Julia A. (Julia A ), Cranbury Rockxwoop, C. G., Jr. (Charles Greene), Princeton University. 34 Bay- ard lane, Princeton Rorsiine, W. A. (Washington Augustus), 191 W. State street, Trenton Russy, Dr H. H. (Henry Hurd), College of Pharmacy, 115 W. 68 st., New York. Newark NEW JERSEY 49 Sinvester, C. F’. (Charles Frederick), Princeton University. 15 Nassau Hall, Princeton Smock, Dr. J. C. (J-——— C——), Trenton » Srpvens, Frederic W. (Frederic William),46 Macculloch ave., Morristown Swany, Mrs Thomas, Princeton Voornres, Foster M. (Foster McGowan), 142 Broad street. 297 N. Broad street, Elizabeth Wakeman, J. M. (J M ), 118 Washington st., East Orange Watt, Edward, Stevens Institute of Technology, Hoboken. 157 Scot- land Road, South Orange Wesster, Miss Mary EH. (Mary E ), Cranbury Wuirton, John M. (John Milton), 73 William street, New York. 821 Central avenue, Plainfield Winery, Wm. H. (William Halsted), 43 E. 19 street, New York city. 73 Halsted street, Hast Orange Wixuiams, Miss Thyrza C. (Thyrza C——), The Lindens, Haddonfield NEW MEXICO AppEL, D. M. (Daniel Mitchell), major and surgeon U.S. Army, Fort Bayard Kren, A. A. (Alpheus Augustus), Albuquerque Prince, Hon. L. B. (L B—), Santa Fé NEW YORK Asporr, Major Willard, 205 West 57 street, New York City Apams, Cyrus C. (Cornelius Cyrus), 170 Nassau street. 416 W. 118 street, New York City Apams, Geoffrey C. (Geoffrey Charlton), 29 Broadway, New York City. 16 Hemlock place, New Rochelle Axupricu, Wm. S. (William Sleeper), Potsdam ALLEN, J. A. (Joel Asaph), American Museum of Natural History, Cen- tral Park W. The Kenesaw, 202 W. 103 street, New York City ALLEN, Robert G. (Robert G ), Weather Bureau, Lincoln Hall Cam- pus. Cornell Heights, Ithaca Anprrson, A. A. (Abraham Archibald), Bryant Park Studios, 80 W. 40 street. 6 H. 38 street, New York City Bacon, Don H. (Don Henry), 100 B’dway. 13 E. 38 st., New York City Baker, George H. (George H——,), Columbia University, New York City Baxer, R.S. (R b) ), 141 I. 25 st., New York City Barpacn, William, 261 W. 93 street, New York City Barpwin, Evelyn B. (Evelyn Briggs), 60 Liberty street, New York City Batpwin, Wm. H., Jr. (William Henry), 128 Broadway, New York City. 112 Willow street, Brooklyn 50 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Barpwe tt, D. L. (Darwin Long), Stapleton Baxser, A. L. (Amzi Lorenzo), 7 E. 42 street, New York City. “ Bel- mont,” 14 and Clifton streets, Washington, D. C. Barker, Rear Admiral A. 8. (Albert Smith), vu. s. x., Commandant New York Navy Yard and station Barrett, Hon. John, Waldorf-Astoria, New York City Barricer, Brig. Gen. John W. (John Walker), u.s. a., 202 West 103 street, New York City Brpreti, Mrs Edwin A. (Edwin A——), 56 Chestnut street, Albany Berrs, Jessica EH. (Jessica Elizabeth), 213 Bryant street. The Wellesley, Edward and Franklin streets, Buffalo Benepict, Ezra W. (Ezra Wilkins), Warrensburg Benyepicr, W. De L. (W De L ), 48 Cedar street, New York City BrensamMin, Rev Raphael, M. A., Keap Street Temple, Brooklyn. Hotel Premier, 139 East 72 street, New York City Brrnuetmer, Charles L. (Charles Leopold), 120 Franklin street. Hotel Netherland, 5 avenue and 59 street, New York City Bicxmorg, Albert S. (Albert Smith), American Museum of Natural His- tory, Central Park. 130 West 80 street, New York City Bren, Joseph R. (Joseph Rudolph), 140 6 avenue. 3821 West 57 street, New York City Bien, Julius, 140 6 avenue. 321 West 57 street, New York City BisBEE, Joseph B. (Joseph Bartlett), River View Military Academy, Poughkeepsie Bisuop, James L. (James Lord), 135 Broadway. 152 East 37 street, New York City Bisnop, Maria W. (Maria Woodward), 18 Tompkins street, Cortland Brakes, Frederick, 8 1 street, Troy. Waterford Boiiennacen, Marie T. (Marie Theodore), 331 Greene avenue, Brooklyn Bouton, Geo. I. (George Innes), Room 1152, 11 Broadway, N. Y. City Bowen, Clarence W. (Clarence Winthrop), 180 Fulton street. 5 Hast 63 street, New York City Braca, Prof. Jean C. (Jean Charlemagne), Vassar College, Poughkeepsie Brapiey, Elizabeth L. (Elizabeth Lucinda), Geneseo State Normal School, Geneseo Bripeman, Herbert L. (Herbert Lawrence), 292-293 Washington and 317-321 Fulton streets. 604 Carlton avenue, Brooklyn Bricuam, Albert P. (Albert Perry), Hamilton Brown eer, Raymond B. (Raymond Bedell), High School, Far Rocka- away. Cedarhurst, Long Island ButuarpD, William M. (William Merrill), 8302 Madison ave., N. Y. City Burcess, Edward 8S. (Edward Sandford), Normal College, East 68 street. 11 West 88 street, New York City Burke, Mrs B. Ellen (Bridget Ellen), 31 Barclay st., N. Y. City. Malone NEW YORK 51 Burr, J. H. Ten Eyck (Jacob H—— Ten Eyck), the Cazenovia National Bank, Cazenovia Bourtis, Pay Director Arthur, vu. s.n., U.S. Navy Pay Office. 280 Broad- way, New York City Butrer, Louis C., 904 Lexington avenue, New York City Byrne, Col. C. C. (C C ), 48 West 25 street, New York City Canoon, James B. (James Blake), 40 Wall street, New York City. 31 Winyah avenue, New Rochelle Carss, Miss Eliza, Teachers’ College, New York City Cary, Mrs Elizabeth M. L. (Elizabeth Murray Love), 184 Delaware avenue, Buffalo CattTeLi, J. McKeen (James McKeen), Columbia University, West 116 street, New York City. Garrison-on-Hudson Cuark®, Frederic H., U.S. Weather Bureau, Binghamton CriarKeE, John M. (John Mason), State Hall, Albany CoeswELL, W. B. (William Browne), 100 East Washington street. 1009 James street, Syracuse Cotpy, F. M. (Frank Moore), 21 Washington place. 3856 Lexington avenue, New York City Coir, Chas. W. (Charles Wadsworth), High School Building, Steuben and Eagle streets. 3854 Hudson avenue, Albany Comstock, E. (Edward), Rome Concer, Clarence R. (Clarence Rapelje), 37 Liberty st., New York City Conno.iy, Miss Louise, 136 West 109 street, New York City Coox, Frederick A. (Frederick Albert), 687 Bushwick avenue, Brooklyn Cornwatt, Arthur B. (Arthur Bradford), 842 Broadway. 3855 West 118 street, New York City CortHELL, E. L. (Elmer Lawrence), 1 Nassau street, New York City. North Egremont, Mass. CREEVEY, John K. (John K ), 41 Wall street, New York City Crump, S. G. (Shelley Godwin), corner Main and State sts., Pittsford Currier, Enoch Henry, The New York Institution for the Instruction of the Deaf and Dumb, 163 street and Broadway, New York City CurHpertson, David, U.S. Weather Bureau. 490 Normal ave., Buffalo Davison, Mrs George, 22 1 avenue. Gloversville DeLtiensauaGH, F. 8. (Frederick Samuel), 35 West 21 street, New York City. 16 West 61 street Demine, Wm. H. (William Henry), The Continental Iron Works, West and Calyer streets, New York City. 111 Pulaski street, Brooklyn Doner, Richard E. (Richard Elwood), Teachers’ College, Columbia Uni- versity, New York City. Yonkers Dovucuiy, Wm. Howard (William Howard), Troy Doueuas, James, 99 John street. Spuyten Duyvil, New York City Downrne, Ruth E. (Ruth Elizabeth), Teachers’ College, West 120 street, New York City 52 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Draprr, Daniel, New York Meteorological Observatory, New York City. Hastings-on- Hudson Drury, John B. (John B——), 6 Warren street, New York City Dupuy, Guilford, 260 Main street. 104 Garden street, Poughkeepsie Dunn, Robert, care of Commercial Advertiser, New York City Durxer, EF. R. (4 R ), West Park (on Hudson) Dwicut, William B. (William Buck), Vassar College, Poughkeepsie Eastman, Geo. (George), 343-347 State st. 400 Hast avenue, Rochester Eiuers, A. (Anton Frederic), 71 Broadway, New York City. 751 St Mark’s avenue, Brooklyn Kean, Major John, u.s. a., 47 West 12 street, New York City Exiswortn, W. W. (William Webster), 33 East 17 street, New York City EnenisH, N. C. J. (N—— C J——), 107 Broad street, New York City. Elizabeth, N. J. Ewen, C. (Clarence), care A. B. Mills, 127 Avenue D, New York City Farrcuinp, H. L. (Herman Le Roy), University of Rochester, Rochester Eaircuitp, John F. (John Fletcher), 18 E. 1 street, Mount Vernon. 332 Pelhamdale avenue, Pelham Ferrey, W. I. (W I ), 6 William street; Auburn FresseLi, Dr Lewis F., Presbyterian Hospital, New York City Finpiry, William L. (William Luther), 67 Wall street. 31 Hast 63 street, New York City Fiemine, Miss Mary A. (Mary Anne), The Oxford, 452 Pearl st., Buffalo Fox, Paymaster R. E. (Royal Evaungeal), The Solvay Process Co. 303 North Lowell avenue, Syracuse Gace, Hon. Lyman J. (Lyman Judson), New York City GaGg, S. H. (Simon Henry), Stimson Hall, Cornell University Campus. 4 South avenue, Ithaca GentHeE, Mrs K. W. (Martha Krug), pH. p., 109 West 54 street. 152 East 54 street, New York City GERHARD, Wm. Paul (William Paul), c. ., 83 Union square, New York City. 89 Strong place, Brooklyn Girrorp, John C. (John Clayton), 109 Summit avenue, Ithaca Goopricu, E. P. (Ernest Payson), Navy Yard, New York City. 167 Clinton avenue, Brooklyn Goopwin, Emily N. (Kmily Nichols), Public School No. 12. 114 Gates avenue, Brooklyn Grancer, John T. (John Tileston), 1 Broadway, New York City. 1838 Connecticut avenue, Washington, D. C. GRINNELL, Dr. G. B. (G B ), Audubon Park, sta. M, N. Y. City GrossMANN, Arpad L. (Arpad Landor), 222 Broadway. The Beresford, 1 West 81 street, New York City GrosvENor, Edwin P. (Hdwin P ), 414 West 118 street, N. Y. City Gruaan, Major F. C. (Frank Carter), u. s. a., retired, 10 EK. 53 st., New York City NEW YORK 53 Gruver, W. A. (Elbert Asa), 904-922 Lexington ave., New York City Gur, Harry D. (Harry D ), 12 avenue and 58 street, Brooklyn Hate, Geo. D. (George David), Brown’s race and Furnace street. 1059 Lake avenue, Rochester Hattock, Wm. (William), Columbia University. 417 W. 118 st., New York City Hamiuron, Allen, 127 W. 61 street, New York City Hammonp, Mrs John Hays, 32 Riverside drive, New York City Hanaman, C. HE. (Charles Edward), Troy Savings Bank, 2 and State sts. 103 1 street, Troy Harriman, EK. H. (Edward H—), 120 Broadway. 1 E. 55 street, New York City Hawkins, Gen. H. 8. (H—— 8——), 25 EH. 46 street, New York City Heuer, Max, 70 H. 92 street, New York City Het, F. C. (Frank Conrad), 7 Wall street. 66 Madison avenue, New York City Hering, Rudolph, 170 Broadway, New York City. 235 Jefferson avenue, Brooklyn Herman, Mrs Esther, 59 West 56 street, New York City Herzoc, Paul M. (Paul Max), 22 William street. 41 West 68 street, New York City Hiaerns, F. M. (Frederick Marey), 172 West 2 street, Oswego Himes, Albert J. (Albert J ), Oswego Hinman, Russell, 100 East Washington square, New York City. 88 Boulevard Summit, New Jersey Hor, Arthur I. (Arthur Ingersoll), 24 Apley Court, Cambridge, Mass. 11 Kast 36 street, New York City Hor, Mrs Robert, 11 East 36 street, New York City Horsroox, Levi, Box 536, New York City Hopkins, G. B. (George Bates), 52 Broadway. 25 West 48 street, New York City Hopkins, T. C. (Thomas Cramer), Syracuse University. 103 Marshall street, Syracuse Hosmer, E. S. (Edward Sturgis), 32 Nassau street, New York City Houeu, A. L. (Alfred Lacey), 550 Park avenue, New York City Hovey, Bf. O. (Edmund Otis), American Museum of Natural History, 77 st. and Central Park west. 115 West 84 st., New York City Howse, H. C. (Henry Clarence), 100 Broadway, New York City. 54 Cranberry street, Brooklyn Hows, Dr. B. (S B ), Schenectady Howison, Rear Admiral H. L. (Henry Lycurgus), vu. s. N, retired, 72 Ashburton avenue, Yonkers Huspgarp, R. J. (R—— J ), Cazenovia Hurp, Arthur W. (Arthur William), Buffalo State Hospital, Forest ave- nue, Buffalo 54 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Huron, F. R. (Frederick Remsen), Columbia University, 116 street and Broadway. 319 West 107 street, New York City Horton, William Rich, 35 Broadway, New York City Jaccact. A. F. (August Floriano), 141 E. 25 st. 49 W.57 st., N. Y. City James, Darwin R. (Darwin Rush), 123 Maiden Lane, New York City. 226 Gates avenue, Brooklyn JANES, Herbert, 725 6 avenue. 258 West 107 street, New York City Jesup, Morris K. (Morris Ketchum), 195 Madison avenue, New York City Jounson, Frank Edgar, 10 Getty square. 747 Warburton ave., Yonkers Kruiny, W. D. (William Datus), 45 EK. 42 street, New York City. 173 Roberts avenue, Yonkers Kemp, J. F. (James Furman), Columbia University. 211 W. 139 street, New York City KimBa.L, Jas. P. (James P——), Asst. Surg. Gen., u.s. A., Onteora Club, Tannersville j Kinesrorp, T. P. (Thomas Pettibone), 378 W. 1 street, Oswego Lapvur, Pomeroy, New York University. University Heights, New York Lacrover, Eugene, Hotel Margaret, Brooklyn Lanpis, Capt. J. F. Reynolds (John Fulton Reynolds), ist U.S. Cav., West Point Law, B. W. (Benedict Willis), Collins Letson, Miss Elizabeth J. (Elizabeth Jane), Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences, Washington street. 866 Massachusetts avenue LevermMore, Charles H. (Charles Herbert), Adelphi College. 380St James place, Brooklyn Levis, Francis A. (Francis Adelbert), U. S. Revenue Cutter Service. Waverly, Tioga county Lincoin, C. M. (Charles Monroe), New York Herald. 308 West 94 street, New York City Lrysiry, Julius G. (Julius Gilbert), Weather Bureau, Room 33 Custom House, Oneida. 119 West 8 st., Oswego Locan, Walter S. (Walter Seth), 27 William street. 112 Riverside Drive, New York City Low, Hon. Seth, New York City Luppineton, Harriet A. (Harriet Adelaide), Brooklyn Training School for Teachers. 196 Joralemon street, Brooklyn. 40 Dwight street, New Haven, Connecticut Lumuo.tz, Carl (Carl Sophus), American Museum of Natural History. 30 West 11 street, New York City Lyon, Edmund,|Chamber of Commerce, 119 Main street East. 505 Hast Avenue, Rochester McCuure, H. H. (H— H—), Armour Villa Park, Yonkers McCuurg, 8. 8. (S—— S——), 141 Hast 25 street, New York City McCorpy, Caroline G. (Caroline G——), 25 West 19 st., New York City NEW YORK 55 MecNatr, EB. O. (Eben Orlando), 203 Ellicott square, Main street. 957 Delaware avenue, Buffalo Mackey, W. A. (William Akerley), North street, Matteawan Macy, Nelson, 95-97 William street. 707 Park ave., New York City Manpevitir, H. C. (Hubert Carpenter), 159 Lake street. 509 Church street, Elmira Marruiessen, F. W. (F W ), Lasalle Maury, Mytton, Horlings-on-Hudson Mercs, Titus B. (Titus Benjamin), 26 Broadway. 16 H.65st., N. Y. City Menocat, A. G. (A G ), The Forrest, New York City Merriam, Bessie G. (Betsey Greene), Girls’ High School. 84 McDon- ough street, Brooklyn Merritt, F. J. H. (Frederick James Hamilton), New York State Mu- seum, 120 State street. 95 Washington avenue, Albany Miter, J. Martin (J Martin), New York City. 1417 Gstreet, Wash- ington, D.C. Mircnett, Prof. Henry, 179 Madison avenue, New York City Monreomery, Harry EK. (Harry Earl), 31 Erie County Bank Bldg. 949 Delaware avenue, Buffalo ; Morean, T. J. (Thomas Jefferson), 111 5 avenue, New York City. 117 Park avenue, Yonkers Morris, Dr Lewis R. (Lewis R ), 60 W. 58 street, New York City Mvetirr, H. H. (Hermann Henry), Bronxville Morpny, Edward C. (Edward Charles), Cornell University. 130 Hazen street, Ithaca Myrick, J. R. (John Reuchlin), care of Latham, Alexander & Co., 16 Wall street, New York City Netson, Chas. N. (Charles Nicolas), Port Washington, Long Island Netson, E. B. (Edward Beverly), Central New York Institute for Deaf Mutes, Madison street. 711 North Madison street, Rome Netson, George F. (George Francis), Diocesan House, 29 La Fayette place, New York City Norris, Adelaide (Adelaide Julia), Normal School. 70 Le Roy street, Potsdam Norris, Henry D. (Henry D——), 15 West 74 street, New York City Norris, J. Carlton (J Carlton), pH. p., Canandaigua Norman, George, 99 John st., New York City. 182 Amity st., Brooklyn OerrinceR, J. (J ), 117 Woodward avenue, Rochester Ocrrvin, I. H. (Ida Helen), Columbia University. Sherman Square Hotel, 71 street and Broadway, New York City Ouman, August R. (August Reinhold), 15 Warren street. 242 W. 104 street, New York City Oxcorr, E. E. (Eben Erskine), 36 Wall st. 38 W. 39 st., New York City Osporn, Prof. H. F. (H F ), 850 Madison avenue, New York City 56 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Pappock, Miss Bertha L. (Bertha L—), Franklin Academy, Malone Pruenet, C. P. E. (C—— P H—.), Amsterdam Puiuuies, John 8. (John S——), McClure’s Magazine, New York City Prercr, Theo. H. (Theodore Hazletine), 71 Wall street. 3839 W. 85 street, New York City PoHiMAN, Julius, 404 Franklin street, Buffalo Powe ut, Prof. W. B. (William Bramwell), 146 W.104st., New York City Powers, C. V. V. (C——~ V V—), Katonah Pricer, Frank J. (Frank J ), 18 Montgomery place, Brooklyn Prince, J. Dyneley (John Dyneley), Columbia University. 15 Lexing- ton avenue, New York City ProuprFit, F. F. (Frank Ford), Hotel Iroquois, 49 W. 44 street, New York City Puusrrer, W. E. (W—— E——), 91-98 5 avenue, New York City Ranpon, J. B. (J-—— B ), 17 W. 78 street, New York City Repway, J. W. (Jacques Wardlaw), 39 East 4 street, Mount Vernon Reuter, Dr L. (L ), Merck Building. New York City Ruees, Rush, University of Rochester. 440 University ave., Rochester Ricuarps, F. H. (Francis Henry), 9-15 Murray street, New York City. Hartford, Connecticut, and the Waldorf-Astoria, New York City Ricuarpson, C. A. (Charles Albert), Canandaigua Ries. Heinrich, Cornell University. 610 Hast Seneca street, Ithaca Ropert, Col. Henry M. (Henry M ), Army Building, New York City RockwELu, Chas. H. (Charles H ), 40 Benedict avenue, Tarrytown Sarrorp, M. Victor (M Victor), Bureau of Immigration, Ellis Island SHELDON, Miss Grace C. (Grace C ), 42 White Building, Buffalo SHprwoop, John EK. (John Emory), 157 Madisonavenue. 2 High street, Albany Suipron, Capt. James A. (James Ancil), Arty. Corps, u.s. 4., Governor’s Island, New York City Snorkiey, Maj. George, 336 E. 77 street, New York City Stcxies, Gen. D. E. (D E ), 23 5 avenue, New York City Sims, Alfred F. (Alfred F ), Weather Bureau, Albany Smivey, Albert K. (Albert Keith), Lake Mohonk Mountain House, Mo- honk Lake, Ulster county Smirn, Dr Andrew H. (Andrew Heermance), 18 E. 46 st., New York City Smrru, Fredk. D. (Frederick Douglass), 328 D. F. Walker Bldg, Salt Lake, Utah. 217 Hazen street, Ithaca Smrru, Irving B. (Irving Butler), cor. Prospect and Washington streets, Warsaw Smrrx, T. Guilford (Thomas Guilford), 9 German Ins. Bldg., 451 Main street. 489 Delaware avenue, Buffalo Snow, Dr Charles H. (Charles H——), N. Y. University, New York City Saurres, Grant, 41 Wall street. 492 West End avenue, New York City NEW YORK 57 Sranutey-Brown, J. (Joseph), 120 Broadway. Yale Club, 30 W. 44 st., New York City Sranton, John, 11 William street. 419 W. 23 street, New York City Srarr, Frederick W. (Frederick William), foot 28 street. 16 Montgom- ery place, Brooklyn Srrrrens, J. Lincoln (Joseph Lincoln), McClure’s Magazine, 141 E. 25 street. 10 EH. 28 street, New York City Srepuens, Prof. H. Morse (H Morse), Cascadilla place, Ithaca Srrvenson, J. J. (John James), University Heights. 568 West End avenue, New York City Tanner, J. H. (John Henry), Cornell University. ‘‘ The Knoll,’ Cor- nell Heights, Ithaca TarBELL, Miss Ida M. (Ida Minerva), 141 E. 25 street, New York City Tarr, Prof. R. S. (Ralph Stockman), Cornell University, 1 East avenue, Ithaca Taytor, J. M. (James Monroe), Vassar College, Poughkeepsie Taytor, Rev. W. R., D. D. (William Rivers), 13 Prince street, Rochester Tuornpure, Dr R. M. (R M ), Fort Slocum Tuurston, R. H. (Robert Henry), Sibley College, Cornell University. 15 East avenue, Cornell Campus, Ithaca Trur, Miss Mary H. (Mary H ), care F. R. Hazard, Syracuse Trump, Edwd. N. (Edward Needles), Solvay Process Co. 1912 West Genesee street, Syracuse VrrMeutr, C. C. (C—— C——), 208 Broadway, New York City Weep, J. N. (Jonathan Noyes), 71 Water st. 244 Grand st., Newburgh Wetnricu, Moriz, 76 Ashburton avenue, Yonkers Westerve tt, Z. F. (Zenas Freeman), 945 St Paul street, Rochester Weston, Alfred J. (Alfred J ), 590 Palisade avenue, Yonkers Wueeter, W. B. (W B ), 80 Broadway, New York City Wuirr, Wm. Augustus, 197 Montague st. 158 Columbia Hts., B’klyn Wuirney, EH. R. (Eddy R ), High School. 20 North st., Binghamton Witriams, William, 35 Wall st. 1 West 54 street, New York City Witiiamson, Haidee, 18 Kast 48th street, New York City Wrtson, C. I. (Charles Irving), Army Bldg. 86 Madison ave., N. Y. City WirHerser, Frank S. (Frank S ), Fort Henry, N. Y. Youmans, W. J. (W—— J ), 278 Prospect avenue, Mount Vernon Youne, G. W. (George Washington), 59 Cedar street. 28 West 73 street, New York City NORTH CAROLINA Ampier, Dr C. P. (Chase P——), 3-6 Temple court, Patton avenue. Merriman avenue, Asheville Asue, W. W. (William Willard), 628 Hillsboro street, Raleigh 5 58 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Ciaxton, Prof. P. P. (P 1p ), Greensboro Coss, Collier, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill Frssenpren, Reginald A. (Reginald Aubrey), Weather Bureau, Washing- ton. Manter, Roanoke Island Frank, G. W., Jr. (G Wi ), New London HERRMANN, Charles F. von (Charles Frederick Lewis), Fisher Building, | corner Fayetteville st. and Exchange pl. 314 W. Hargett st., Raleigh Homes, Prof. Joseph A. (Joseph A ). University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill Lawrence, Thos. (Thomas), Normal and Collegiate Institute, Asheville McNameg, Charles, Biltmore Massey, W. F. (Wilbur Fisk), Experimental Station, Raleigh Morson, Hugh, corner Jones and Bloodworth sts. E. Jones st., Raleigh OBERHOLZER, G. R. (George Rtiger), Post-Office Building. 301 South Church street, Charlotte Prarr, Joseph Hyde, Chapel Hill Ray, John E. (John Edwin), School for Deaf and Blind. Jones and McDowell streets, Raleigh Rippicx, W. C. (Wallace Carl), West Raleigh Rorsrine, John A. (John Augustus), 184 Cumberland ave., Asheville THompson, D. Matt (David Matt), Bell St. School. P.O.box 145, States- ville TicHr, R. J. (Richard Joseph), room 59, City Hall. 175 Chestnut st., Asheville Wivxss, Jno. (John), 508 W. Icade street, Charlotte NORTH DAKOTA Fierp, John C. (John Charles), Court House, Williston Hatt, Charles Monroe, State Agricultural College. 211 10 st. N., Fargo Jonrs, E. E. (Edward Everett), Buford Kaurman, KE. E. (Elmer Elsworth),Agricultural College. 914 Istave. N., Fargo ' Unio, Captain James, u. s. A., North Dakota Agricultural College. 109 9 street N., Fargo Witiarp, Daniel E. (Daniel Everett), State Normal School, Mayville OHIO BacHte.L, Col. Samuel, Bldg. of Public Works, Columbus Baupwiy, S. Prentiss (Samuel Prentiss), Williamson Bldg. 736 Pros- pect street, Cleveland Bargour, J. L. (John Lewis), 212 5 street, Marietta Brarpsier, Prof. Henry C. (Henry C——), 376 Russell ave., Cleveland Buair, Miss Kate Ruth, Wilmington OHIO 59 Buatr, R. A. (Reuben Almond), 227 Ohiostreet. 321 E. 2 street, Sedalia Cire, Joseph L., Ph. D. (Joseph Leander), U. S. Weather Bureau, The Esmond, 915 Washington street, Sandusky Comrnes, Hon. A. G. (A G ), Oberlin Comstock, F. M. (Frank Mason), Case School of Applied Sciences. 85 Cornell street, Cleveland Cowen, B. R. (Benjamin Rush), U.S. Court House, Federal Building. 2406 Highland avenue, Cincinnati Currier, W.S. (William Sprague), Government Building, corner Michi- gan and St. Clair streets. The Loiston, Monroe and 16 sts., Toledo Cusuine, H. P. (Henry Platt), Western Reserve University. 260 Sibley street, Cleveland Davis, Rey. Thos. K., D. D. (Thomas Kirby), University Library, Wooster Dr Lone, George W. (George Washington), Corning Durron, Chas. F., Jr. (Charles Frederic), West High School. 626 Franklin avenue, Cleveland EexFetp, E. (Elmer), 3 and Main streets, Uhrichsville. 2 and Sherman streets, Dennison Frynn, Benj. H. (Benjamin Harrison), New State Building, Broad, 3 State and High streets. 102 Wilson avenue, Columbus Fosuay, P. Max (Perey Maxwell), 129 Euclid avenue. 73 Kdgewood Place, Cleveland Garrorp, A. L. (A L ), Elyria Grosvenor, C. H. (Charles Henry), House of Representatives, Washing- ton, D. C. Athens Hamann, Dr W. N. (W N—), Dayton Hicks, Frederick C. (Frederick Charles), Univ. of Cincinnati. Norwood Huerr, Miss Susan A. (Susan A ), The Clifton School, Cincinnati Hucues-Marxks, Mrs Ann, Washington School Building, East street East Main street, Hillsboro Hunt, Samuel, Cincinnati Jones, EK. A. (Edmund Adams), 138 East Tremont street, Massillon Kpnerary, James, U.S. Weather Bureau. 6 Linwood street, Cleveland McFaruanp, R. W. (Robert White), High street, Oxford Marrzouer, C. L. (Clement Luther), New Lexington Massrp, D. M. (David Meade), 178. Paint st. 242 W.Waterst., Chillicothe Meck, W. H. (William Henry), Steele High School. 231 W.4st., Dayton Mereatr, Irving W. (Irving Wight), Oberlin Minipr, Charles C. (Charles C ), Superintendent Public Schools, Lima Morsrr, Edmund, 83 Main street. 56 South 7 street, Zanesville Morser, Louis, 218 East 4 street. 382 Hast McMillan street, Cincinnati Monsnat, C. (Cleophas), Tytus Hall, Middletown Mosetey, 1. L. (Edwin Lincoln), High School. 125 Vine st., Sandusky ° 60 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Osporn, A. P. (Arthur Patterson), Wheelersburg OsBorn, Herbert, Ohio State University. 485 King ave., Columbus Pearson, F. B. (Francis Bail), East High School. 125 Wilson avenue, Columbus Prerersiter, Arthur F. M.(Arthur Ferdinand Moritz), East High School. The Herman, 2102 Superior street, Cleveland Prosser, Charles 8. (Charles Smith), Ohio State University. 114 West 10th avenue, Columbus Ranpat., H. O. (Emilius Oviatt), Supreme Court Building. 1025 Oak street, Columbus Ropinson, Joseph, Columbus ScHorpr, W. Kesley (William Kesley), Apollo Building, 5 and Walnut streets. 622 Oak street, Cincinnati SHILLITO, Stewart, Race, 7 & Shillito pl. 250 E. Auburn ave., Cincinnati Suumarp, Miss Lillie, Madisonville Smiry, J.Warren (John Warren), 2155S. Highst. 1422 Oakst., Columbus Taupor, Mignon, 640 Franklin avenue, Columbus Tappan, Rey. David 8S. (David Stanton), President of Miami University. 215 Kast High street, Oxford TuHompson, A. C. (Albert Clifton), Government Building. 2038 Auburn avenue, Cincinnati THRESHER, HW. M. (E M ), Dayton Topp, Joe H. (Joseph Henry), 150 West Liberty street. “ Christmas Knoll,” Wooster Vance, William McK. (William MeK—-), Supt. of Schools, Urbana Van Nus, H. (Hans), 218-220 East 4 street, Cincinnati. Glendale Vorues, Austin W. (Austin Workman), Pomeroy Warrinaton, Geo. H. (George Howard), United Bank Building, 3 and Walnut streets. Queen City Club, Cincinnati Weaver, Rey. Rufus W. (Rufus W ), Middletown Wesster, F. M. (Francis Marion), Wooster Wirson, Stella (Stella Shoemaker), Central High School. 97 North 20 street, Columbus Woop, Herbert C. (Herbert Carroll), East High School, Genesee avenue, 411 East Prospect street, Cleveland Woop, Thomas J. (Thomas John), 121 North Main street, Dayton Wricut, G. Frederick (George Frederick), 145 Elm street, Oberlin OREGON AppLeGatr, Hlmer I. (Elmer Ivan), Klamath Falls Brats, Edw’d A. (Edward Alden), U.S. Custom-house, cor. Park and Couch streets. 2385 Thirteenth street, Portland Capron, Albert J. (Albert Judson), 327-328 Marquam Building. 530 Davis street, Portland OREGON 61 Cottier, Arthur J. (Arthur J-—), Salem’ Doran, Capt. Peter, S. S. Columbia, Portland Ecxerson, Major Theo. J.(Vheodore John), u.s.., 575 Couch st., Portland Gorman, M. W. (Martin Woodlock), 823 3 street. 166 10 street, Portland Hampton, Wm. Huntley, Placer Hawkins, L. L. (Lester Leander), Sherlock Building, 832 3 street. 563 4 street, Portland Paxton, O. F. (Ossian Franklin), Chamber of Commerce Building. Hotel Portland, Portland Sree, Will. G. (William Gladstone), 230 Russell street. 541 Borthwick street, Portland Waite, I. Brook (Thomas Brook), 793 Johnson street, Portland. PENNSYLVANIA AtpBmrt, Chas. H. (Charles H——), State Normal School. 426 Hast 2 street, Bloomsburg ATHERTON, Geo. W. (George Washington), State College Batrp-Huey, Miss H. J. (H J ), The Lorraine, Philadelphia Bascom, F. (Florence), Dalton Hall, Bryn Mawr College. Low Build- ings, Bryn Mawr Brauy, Mrs Walter, Carlisle Briackat, C. R. (Christopher Rubey), 1420 Chestnut st., Phila. Bala Bopine, Win. B. (William Budd), 4025 Walnut street, Philadelphia Booru, F. W. (Frank Walworth), 7342 Rural Lane, Mt. Airy, Phila. Bovuritiinr, Dr Theodore Le, 1625 Diamond street, Philadelphia Brennan, C. M. (Charles Michael), 21 Main st. 383 Summerst., Bradford Bryant, Henry G. (Henry Grier), Room 806, Land Title Building, Broad and Chestnut streets. 2015 Walnut street, Philadelphia Camppett, J. R. (John Russell), 206 Seneca st. 116 W. 2 st., Oil City Carpenter, L. H. (Louis Henry), 2318 De Lancey place, Philadelphia CavenAuGH, Maj. H. G. (H G ), Girard College, Philadelphia Cuampers, F’, T. (Frank Taylor), u.s.n., Navy Yard, League Island Ciapp, Geo. H. (George Hubbard), 325 Water st., Pittsbure. Edgeworth Copman, John E. (John Hagar), Room 796, City Hall, Broad and Market streets. 5739 Spruce street, Philadelphia Cornetius, Rey. 8. (S ), Reed street, Oil City Cox, Alexander B. (Alexander Brinton), Drifton Crosman, Charles $8. (Charles Sumner), The Oaks, Lancaster avenue, Haverford Crourrr, A. L. E. (Albert Louis Edgerton), Pennsylvania Institute for the Deaf. 1406 Germantown avenue, Mount Airy, Philadelphia Docx, Mira L. (Mira Lloyd), 1427 N. Front street, Harrisburg Drown, T. M. (Thomas Messinger), Lehigh University, South Bethlehem 62 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Dutt, Mrs A. P. L. (Helen Boyd), 211 N. Front street, Harrisburg Durrer, Edw. C. (Edward Calvin), Chestnut Hill Academy, Philadelphia Harp, Samuel, 112 West 1 street, Oil City Exxiorr, Charles P. (Charles Pinckney), 62 North Franklin street, Wilkesbarre Eny, Theo. N. (Theodore Heme Broad Street Station, Philadelphia. Bryn Mawr Eyerman, Jno. (John), Oakhurst, Easton Frtton, W. C. (Edgar Conway), 312 Girard Building, Broad and Chest- nut streets, ee Blew erford Fricxinerr, J. R. J Garrert, Miss Mary S. fe y sonith) Belmont ae Menuenent ayenues, Philadelphia Garrett, Philip, 308 Walnut street. Logan Station, Philadelphia Goopr, Dr J. Paul (John Paul), University of Pennsylvania. 218 De Kalb street, Philadelphia GraFr, Matthew A. (Matthew Addison), Beaver street, Sewickley. Shields Grosvenor, Asa W. (Asa Waters), care Pennsylvania Railroad Company. Pittsburg Harcuer, J. B. (John Bell), Carnegie Museum. 38200 Elsmore square, Pittsburg Hazevtine, A. J. ( Tarren Heap, Elizabeth L. (Hlizabeth Lease), 109 W. Chelton ave., Germantown Hetiprin, Prof. Angelo, Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia Hutines, Willis J. (Willis J ), Lamberton Block, Oil City Herr, Mrs A. J. (Nannie Gilmore), 19 North Front street, Harrisburg Hexamer, C. J. (Charles John),419 Walnut street. 819 Corinthian aye- nue, Philadelphia Hormes, Miss Mary 8. (Mary Smith), 1831 North 12 st., Philadelphia lomo, i M. C. (Mary Caroline), Northumberland Hupparp, Russell 8. (Russell Sturgis), 424 Chestnut street, Philadelphia. 228 Manheim street, Germantown JEFFERSON, J. P. (John Percival), 209 2 st. Cor. 2 & Market sts., Warren Kinzer, 8S. L. B. (Stuart Lee Bergstresser), Powelton avenue and 32 st W. Philadelphia. 83 E. Baltimore avenue, Lansdowne Kremer, Chas. D. (Charles Daniel), Linden Hall Seminary, Lititz LrHMAn, George M. (George Mustin), corner Smithfield street and 4 ave., Federal Building. 4512 Center avenue, Pittsburg LockHart, Charles, 541 Wood st. 608 North Highland ave., Pittsburg Loaan, John P. (John Pressley), 516 Crozer Bldg., 1420 Chestnut street, Philadelphia. West Chester Lyman, Benj. Smith (Benjamin Smith), 708 Locust st., Philadelphia McAuurister, Dr Anna M. (Anna M ), 8626 Hamilton st., Philadelphia PENNSYLVANIA 63 McKetyy, Mrs Wm. M. (William } e- nues, Pittsburg Macraw, Adam R. (Adam Reigart), Bedford Marspen, Miss Kate, Lansdowne Marrson, Dr Charles, 3122 Burk street, Philadelphia SRE Mansfield, Lehigh University, South Bethlehem Moreaan, George O. (George O ), P. O. Box 590, Pittsburg Morris, Dr Henry, 313 South 16 street, Philadelphia Morrison, B. G. (Byron Gordon), Sugar Run Oakes, James, care N. Holmes & Sons, Pittsburg OxteHAn, F. H. (Fideleo Hughes), National Transit Co. Building, 507 West 2 street, Oil City Parrerson, J. L. (James Lawson), Chestnut Hill Academy, corner 33 street and Willow Grove ave., Chestnut Hill, Philadelphia Peck, Frederick B. (Frederick Burritt), 23 Pardee Hall, College Hill, Easton Prnrosk, Dr Charles B. (Charles Bingham), 1720 Spruce street, Phila- delphia Penrose, Jr., Richard Alexander Fullerton, 1331 Spruce st., Philadelphia BerrrcoN, O. A. (Olof August), The Carnegie Museum, Schenley Park, Pittsburg Pures, Geo. Morris, State Normal School. 700 South High street, West Chester Pierry, W. J. (William James); American House, Bethlehem Prarr, Lt. Col. R. H. (Richard Henry), v. s. a., Indian School, Carlisle Ramaau, S$. Y. (Samuel Young), West 3 street, Oil City Ranpary, Edw. L. (Edward Locke), 644 East Chelton avenue, Phila- delphia Reep, President George H. (George E——), Dickinson College, Carlisle Rerp, Mrs Henry H. (Henry Hahn), 1425 Chestnut street, Philadelphia Ricuter, Miss Anna R. (Anna R ), 8500 Lancaster avenue, Phila- delphia Roppy, H. Justin (Harry Justin), State Normal School, Millersville Ruppie, John, Mauch Chunk. East Mauch Chunk Sareenr, Harriett B. (Harriett Betsy), 8 South 12 street. 3712 Locust street, Philadelphia Scuarrrer, Nathan C., Department of Public Instruction, Harrisburg Suerrerp, J. M. Gene Maxw ell), High Bridge, New Jersey. 122 N. 2 street, Easton Stocum, Dr Chas. E. (Charles Elihu), Columbia University and Univer- sity of Pennsylyania. 201 Clinton street. Hotel Defiance, Clinton street, cor. First, Defiance, Ohio Smrra, Henry E. (Henry Eagle), Stephen Girard Building, 19 South 12 street. Corner 18 and Spruce streets, Philadelphia 64 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Smitu, Col. Jos. R. (Joseph Rowe), vu. s. 4., 2300 De Lancey st., Phila. SPEAKMAN, Elvira Y. (Elvira Young), State Normal School, South High street, West Chester Stewart, Douglas, Carnegie Muscuni: Pittsburg. 949 Lincoln avenue, Aillegahean? Stewart, Dr W. A. (William Alvah), 105 North Dallas ave., Pittsburg Stone, C. W. (Charles Warren), 310 2 st. 505 Liberty st., Warren Taytor, Harris, Pa. Inst. for Deaf and Dumb. Mt Airy, Philadelphia THompson, Edwin Stanley, Pa. Inst. for Deaf and Dumb, Mt Airy, Phila. Tirrany, Ruth Moulton, 38 South 7 street, Indiana Topp, W. E. Clyde (Walter Edmond Clyde), Carnegie Museum, Pitts- burg. Beaver Travurwine, John C., Jr. (John Cresson), 257 South 4 street. 1111 Wal- nut street, Philadelphia Trorrpr, Spencer, Swarthmore College. 1032 Spruce st., Philadelphia Uprecrarr, A. G. (Alexander Garden), Liberty and Atlantic avenues, East End, Pittsburg Van WaGenwr, J. B. (J—— B—), 256 Frankstown avenue. East End, Pittsburg Vaux, George, Jr., 404 Girard Bldg., Broad and Chestnut streets. 1715 Arch street, Philadelphia Wanpswortn, M. H. (Marshman Edward), Pennsylvania State College Weesster, Frederic S. (Frederic Smith), Carnegie Museum. 632 South Negley avenue, Pittsburg 5 Weimer, Walter E. (Walter Earle), 724 Cumberland street, Lebanon West, Emma F. (Emma Florence), Institute for Deaf and Dumb, Mount Airy, Philadelphia Witson, Joseph M. (Joseph Miller), 1050 Drexel Building. 1106 Spruce street, Philadelphia Witson, Wm. B. (William Bender), 49 st. and Columbia avenue. 8006 Frankford avenue, Philadelphia Wotte, Clarence A. (Clarence A ), Bethlehem Wotverton, S. P. (8 ), Sunbury Woop, Walter, 400 Chestnut street. 1620 Locust street, Philadelphia Woops, Edward A. (Edward Augustus), Frick Building, Pittsburg. 318 Grant street, Sewickley RHODE ISLAND Buck, Walter F. (Walter French), Pawtucket High School. 147 East avenue, Pawtucket Carpenter, C. E. (Charles Edmund), 49 Westminster street, Providence 23 Cottage street, Pawtucket CuEstER, Capt. Colby Mitchel, v. s. x., U.S. Naval War College, Newport RHODE ISLAND 65 Daring, L. M. ), Pawtucket Demine, Charlotte E. (Charlotte Elizabeth), Normal School. 52 Angell street, Providence Dexter, S. Frank (Samuel Francis), 18 Church street, Pawtucket Haston, Fred’c W. (Frederic Willard), 180 Weeden street. 164 East avenue, Pawtucket Exuis, H. B. (Herbert Bradford), 10 Weybosset street. 60 Harvard ave- nue, Providence Freprary, Clarie L. (Clarie Lee), Roosevelt Street Grammar School. 79 Bradford street, Providence Gopparp, Mrs William (Mary Edith), 838 Brown street, Providence Kwacu, M. A. (Mary Alice), 120 Congdon street, Providence Law, Frederick H. (Frederick Houk), Broadway High School. 147 Hast avenue, Pawtucket MacDonatp, William, Brown University. 127 Waterman st., Providence Mowry, Florence P. (Florence Passmore), High School street. 112 Providence street, Woonsocket Moreuy. Maj. Paul St. C. (Paul St. Clair), Guam, Ladrone Hislemnete U.S. Training Station, Newport Nickerson, Edward I. (Edward Irving), 61 Westminster street. 71 Angell street, Providence Pierce, Henry A. (Henry Augustus), 233 Main street. 25 Spring street, Pawtucket Pierce, Almira F. (Almira Fisher), 22 Keene street, Providence Scorr, A. C. (A—— C ), R. I. Col. of Agr. and Mech. Arts, Kingston Smiry, Jr., O. (O—), Pawtucket Surciirre, Adam, 47 Allen avenue, Pawtucket Tenny, Allen, Providence Wicxiunp, Irene E. (Irene Elizabeth), Elm Street School. 15 Grove avenue, Westerly SOUTH CAROLINA Brarpster, Rear Adml. L. A. (Lester Anthony), u.s. N., Beaufort Cortey, J. J. (J J——), Florence Evans, Frank, Spartanburg Lewis, Prof. J. Volney (Joseph Volney), Clemson Agricultural College, Clemson SOUTH DAKOTA Burrows, O. C. (Orville Cooper), U. S. Weather Bureau. East End street, Pierre ; Cuitcorr, E. C. (llery Channing), Agricultural College. 619 10 street, Brookings 66 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Exuis, R. W. (Robert Walpole), Byron place, Hurley GLENN, 8.W. (Samuel Wright), 337 Dakota avenue. Corner 4 and Mon- tana streets, Huron How, A. B. (Andrew Bottolf), Wh, fi, Experiment Station, Brookings DBASE, H. (Hargreaves), U.S. Surveyor General’s Office, 405 Dakota avenue. 1288 3 street, Huron Lay, Corliss W. (Corliss Wilkes), Yankton College, Yankton Saunpers, D. A. (De Alton), State Agric. Col. 1401 9th ave., Brookings Topp, J. E. (James Edward), State University, Vermilion Youne, Clark M. (Clark Montgomery), University Hall, Vermilion TENNESSEE Apams, Lt. Col. M. B. (Milton Butler), u. s. a., 1918 West Broad street, Nashville Barrer, A. T. (Albert Tennyson), City Hall, Market square. 1001 East 9 street, Chattanooga BuiaGpeN, John D. (John D——), Weather Bureau, Memphis Emery, 8. C. (S— C ), Weather Bureau, Memphis Foster, W. F. (Wilbur Fisk), 3 Berry Block, 4013 Church street. 1702 West End avenue, Nashville Furiron, Prof. Wm. M. (William Tenn., Knoxville GuEnn, L. C. (Leonidas Chalmers), Vanderbilt University. 2016 West End avenue, Nashville McDonatp, Hunter, 1915 West Ind avenue, Nashville Maynarp, James, Deaderick Building, Knoxville Srooxespury, William L. (William L ), Harriman Van Deventer, J. (James Thayer), 11 Wall street. 861 Temple ave- nue, Knoxville Wiper, Gen. John T. (John Thomas), U. S. Pension Office, Knoxville Wricut, M. H. (Moses Hannibal), Union sta. 2013 Hayes st., Nashville _ TEXAS Bowin, Edward H. (Edward Hall), 2222 Post-Office street. 2406 24 street, Galveston BRACKENRIDGE, George M. Cuaruiss, C. Fowler (Charles Fowler Jones), cor. Walnut and Jefferson streets, 171 Park Row, Dallas Foriterr, W. W. (W ), El Paso McDonatp, Miss Mary A. (Mary A——), 401 Richmond avenue, San Antonio Monrcomery, R. EF. (Robert Eglinton), 104 West 2 street, Fort Worth Reeper, Geo. (George), U. S. Weather Bureau, Corpus Christi TEXAS 67 Scuuutz, L. G. (Louis G ), cor. Jennings avenue and Texas street. 1004 Lamar street, Fort Worth Scorretp, Miss Sarah C. (Sarah Coates), High School, Maine avenue. 456 Murphy avenue, San Antonio Seetry, W. B. (William Belcher), San Antonio Academy. 1935 North Flores street, San Antonio Smonps, Frederic W. (Frederic William), University of Texas. 208 East 24 street, Austin Suir, J. KE. (James Edward), Belton Taytor, T. U. (Thomas Ulvan), University of Texas. 2012 August street, Austin UTAH Measr, J. H. (J—— H ), Fort Duchesne Herxes, Victor C. (Victor C ), Salt Lake City Harmston, Ed. F. (Edgar Fernando), 106-108 West Uintah avenue. Cor. 5 West st. and Uintah avenue, Vernal Jenkins, Washington, Room 321, Utah Loan and Trust Building, 24 street. 584 1 street, Ogden Jounson, E. (Edward), Dooly Block. 5538S. 4 East st., Salt Lake City Lucr, Joseph, Hardie Cinnabar Mines, B. C. 29 South 6 East street, Salt Lake City Murpocu, L. H. (Lester H—), 601 Dooly Block. 256 West 3 North street, Salt Lake City Near, Wm. Dalton (William Dalton), Salt Lake City High School. Cleddau House, 272 North 2 West street, Salt Lake city Netson, William, 121 South First West street, Salt Lake City THoRNE-THOMSEN, George, State Normal School and University of Utah, Salt Lake City Smiru, J. Fewson (J. Fewson), C. E., Salt Lake City Wacker, Lieut. Kenzie W. (Kenzie W ), Fort Duchesne Witkes, Edmund, 324 and 325 Atlas Block. 131 4 East street, Salt Lake City VERMONT Hemenway, Dr L. H. (Lewis Hunt), Manchester Howarp, Gen. 0. 0. (O— O ), 156 College street, Burlington Proctor, Fletcher D. (Fletcher Dutton), Proctor Ricuarpson, Mrs F. A. (Harriette Byron Taber), 52 Williams street, Burlington Srevens, Wm. Stanford (William Stanford), St Albans 68 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY VIRGINIA Bain, George McK. (George McK ), Norfolk High School, Norfolk Cronk, C. P. (Corydon Pirnie), Weather Bureau, Cape Henry Der Wrrr, Lt. Col. Calvin, Fortress Monroe Dosir, Richard N. (Richard N——), 173 Main st. 82 Bute st., Norfoll GitmER, Wm. W. (William Wirt), u.s.n., Main street, Chatham Hancr, Theo. F. (Theodore F——), Bureau of Pensions. Cherrydale Humpureys, D. C. (David Carlisle), Washington & Lee Univ., Lexington Jones, Jno. T. (John Thomas), Gayton Krisp, Mrs A. FE, City National Bank, cor. Main and Atlantic streets, Norfolk. 517 Mowbray Arch, Ghent McBrypr, J. M. (John MacLaren), Va. Polytechnic Inst., Blacksburg Sweitzer, Lt. C. McG. (Charles McGregor), Leesburg Wessrer, Harrie, W. R. Trigg Company, Richmond Wisp, Capt.W. C.(W 0; ),U.S.S. “Franklin,” Navy Yard, Norfolk WASHINGTON ARNOLD, Sydney, Box 3808, Yakima avenue, North Yakima CARLISLE, Sam’] 8. (Samuel Stuart), Rooms 53-54 Haller Building; NW. cor. 2 ave. and Columbia st. 31 ave. near Jefferson st., Seattle CARROLL, Jas. (James), 84 Yesler Way. Occidental Hotel, corner 3 avenue and Cherry street, Seattle CarRo_., P. P. (Patrick Pittman), 72 Hinckley Block, southwest corner 2 avenue and Columbia street. 1432 16 avenue, Seattle Fisken, John B. (John B——), Washington Water Power Co.,; Spokane GLENDINNING, James, Spokane Jounson, Chas. (Charles), Lakeside Lanpes, Henry, Univ. of Washington. 4503 Brooklyn avenue, Seattle Loomis, Prof. Henry B. (Henry B ), Seattle McKesr, Redick H. (Redick Henry), 606 Minor avenue, Seattle Romine, A. P. (A—— P ), New Whatcom High School, New Whatcom SHEDD, S. (Solon), Washington Agricultural College, Pullman Srewart, Chas. (Charles), Weather Bureau, 705 Riverside avenue. Van Valkenberg Building, 715 Riverside avenue, Spokane Stone, George F. (George Fisher), 157 Yesler Way. 203 14 avenue North, Seattle : Waueu, James C. (James Church), Gates street. 2 street, Mount Vernon WIcKERSHAM, James, Tacoma Youne, E. Weldon (Hdward Weldon), No. 234-285 Pioneer Building. 1023 Columbia street, Seattle WESL VIRGINIA 69 WEST VIRGINIA ASHENBERGER, Albert, Davis ave. Hotel Randolph, R. R. ave., Elkins Bass, Charles M. (Charles Montgomery), Falls Brown, Samuel B. (Samuel Boardman),West Virginia University. 640 North High street, Morgantown DanprivGr, Mrs Danske, Shepherdstown Hopxins, A. D. (Andrew Delmar), West Virginia Agricultural Experi- ment Station. 4381 Willey street, Morgantown Jounson, Prof. Okey, Morgantown Warts, Prof. I. C. (Israel C ), Morgantown WISCONSIN Brown, Frank G. (Frank G ), Madison CoLuin, Geo. L. (George Lucius), Beloit Collegé. 920 College ave., Beloit Der Riemer, Miss Alicia, State Normal Sch. 912 Clark st., Stevens Point Hanks, L. 8. (Lucien Stanley), 7 Pinckney st. 216 Langdon st., Madison Hosorru, L. C. (Ludvig Christian), 817 E. Columbian avenue, Neenah Jounson, J. B. (John Butler), Univ. of Wis. 423 N. Carroll st., Madison MarsHatt, 8. H. (Samuel Hager), Maple Bluff Farm, Madison Merritt, J. A. (James Andrew), Normal School. 1124 Ogden avenue, West Superior Mitrer, B. K. (Benjamin Kurtz), 102 Wisconsin street. 559 Marshall street, Milwaukee Nicuotson, D. P. (Dexter Putnam), Lawrence University. 504 John street, Appleton Onin, John M. (John M ), 762 Langdon street, Madison Paut, Miss Anne M. (Anne M——), 1133 Cass street, La Crosse Pootr, Maj. De W. C. (De W—— C——.), Madison Ricuarpson, H. P. (H P—), 102 Wisconsin street, Milwaukee Suiru, F. C. (Frank Clemes), Richland Center Smirn, Howard L. (Howard Leslie), Law Building, University of Wis- consin. 222 Langdon street, Madison. Srrvens, B. J. (Breese Jacob), Mendota block. 401 N. Carroll street, Madison Van Hisn, C. R. (Charles Richard), Science Hall, University of Wiscon- sin. 630 Francis street, Madison Vinas, Wm. F. (William Freeman), 12 E. Gilman street, Madison WYOMING Bonp, Fred, Capitol Building. 802 East 18 street, Cheyenne Kyigut, Wilbur C. (Wilbur Clinton), University of Wyoming. 914 Grand avenue, Laramie 70 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Man .ey, Frank A. (Frank Austin), Rock Springs, Wyoming Mearns, Edgar A. (Edgar Alexander), Fort Yellowstone Monpe 1, F. W. (Frank Wheeler), House of Representatives, Washing- ton, D. C. Newcastle Mouck, W. E. (William Eaton), Cambria Waaaener, R. A. (Rudolf Andreas), Mammoth Hot Springs. Yellow- stone National Park Wotte, Lewis T. (Lewis Theodore), Cambria ALASKA Anprews, C. L. (Clarence Leroy), U.S. Customs Office, Skagway ForsyTHr, Miss Mell, P. O. Box 68, Skagway GrorGEson, C. C. (Charles Christian), Dept. of Agriculture, Sitka GLENN, Capt. E. F. (a EF ), T'yoonok, Cooks Inlet Jarvis, D. H. (David Henry), Sitka AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND Maxwett, Dr W. (Walter), Sugar Bureau, Bundaberg, Queensland, Aus- tralia Narn, Robert, F. R.G.S. Eng., Hastings, New Zealand BELGIUM AND THE NETHERLANDS Frey, Emil, Berne, Switzerland Hinz, Frank D. (Frank Davis), 766 Xeizersgracht. Amstet Hotel, 1 Tulpplein, Amsterdam, Netherlands Recius, Elisée (Hlisée Jacques), 85 rue Ernest Allard, Institut Géo- graphique. 27 rue du Lac, Bruxelles, Belgium BRAZIL AGNEW, Samuel H. (Samuel H——), Natal Estado do, Rio Grande de Norte, Brazil De Carya.uHo, Alfredo, C. E., Rua Barao de Victoria 19, Pernambuco, Brazil Dery, Orville A. (Orville A——), Sao Paulo. Brazil Dr Metro, Barao Homern, 63 Praca do Republica, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil Forres, Dr Joas Nepomuceno, care of 8. 8. Schindler, Bahia, Brazil Wittirams, H. E. (Horace Elbert), ““A Commissao Geographica e Geo- logica de 8. Paulo,” 14 Visconde do Rio Branco. 99 rua General Jardim, Sao Paulo, Brazil BRITISH COLUMBIA, CANADA, NEWFOUNDLAND, AND NOVA SCOTIA Betxi, Dr Robert, Director Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Canada Bureess, Dy T. J. W. (Thomas Joseph Workman), Protestant Hospital for Insane, Montreal, Quebec, Canada = CANADA, ETC. 71 Caixin, John B. (John Burgess), Fern Hill, Truro, Nova Scotia Camppe Lt, A. M. (Archibald Macdiarmid), Secretary’s Branch, P. O. Dept. 70 Gloucester street, Ottawa, Canada CamPpBeELL, Geo. M. (George Murray), 407 Brunswick street, Halifax, Nova Scotia Crane, Alice Rollins, Dawson City, Yukon, Canada CREELMAN,W. A. (W A ), High Sch., North Sydney, Nova Scotia Currin, P.W. (Peter William), Department of Interior. 114 Gloucester street, Ottawa, Canada Devitrr, Edouard, Dept. of Interior. 60 Lisgar street, Ottawa, Canada Dick, Alexander, Sydney, Nova Scotia Dovutt, Wm. M. (William M ), Room 56, Canada Life Building, Montreal, Canada Dowutina, D. B. (Donaldson Bogart), Geological Survey Department, Sussex st. 289 McLeod st., Ottawa, Ontario, Canada Drewry, W.S. (W— S85 ), New Denver, British Columbia Fawcerr, Thomas, Niagara Falls, Ontario, Canada Fearon, James, Inst. for the Deaf, Gottingen st., Halifax, Nova Scotia Frrcx, A. W. (Andrew Walker), Central Chambers, Elgin street. 500 Willrod street, Ottawa, Canada Friercuer, James, Central Experimental farm, Ottawa, Canada Fosrer, John G. (John Gilman), U. S. Consulate, 108 Granville street. 97 Hollis street, Halifax, Nova Scotia Kine, W. F. (W F ), Department of Interior, Ottawa, Canada Kiorz, Otto J. (Otto Julius), Department of Interior. 437 Albert street, Ottawa, Canada Lonetey, J. W. (J W. ), Halifax, Nova Scotia Lyman, Henry H. (Henry Herbert), F. R. G.S., 884 St Paul street. 74 MeTavish street, Montreal, Canada Mackay, A. H. (Alexander Howard), 201 Hollis street, Halifax. Corner Edward and Church street, Dartmouth, Halifax county, Nova Scotia MacRan, George (George Farquhar), Baddeck, Victoria county, Nova Scotia McCurpy, Arthur W. (Arthur Williams), Baddeck, Nova Scotia McLeop, C. H. (Clement Henry), McGill College. Carlton Road, Mon- treal, Canada Muny, Mrs Alex. G. (Alex. G foundland Oainyir, Comm’r William, Dawson, Yukon Territory, Canada OpprenuerMer, I. (Isaac), Powell street. Hotel Vancouver, Vancouver, British Calumbia Ourram, Fred. P. (Frederick Panton), 148 Hollis street. 16 Hollis street, Halifax, Nova Scotia Prarcr, Wm. (William), Calgary, Alta. Bow Bend Shack, Calgary, Canada ), “ Braehead.”” Harbour Grace, New- 2 MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY SI Pearson, B. F. (Benjamin Franklyn), 45 Sackville street. ‘“‘ Ernscotte,” Franklyn street, Halifax, Nova Scotia Poon, Henry 8. (Henry Skeffington), 162 Pleasant street, Halifax, Nova Scotia : Ross, W. B. (William Benjamin), 41 Barrington street. 74 Morris street, Halifax, Nova Scotia Sanps, H. Hayden (H— Hayden), 167 Stanley st., Montreal, Canada Satnt-Cyr, Arthur, Department of the Interior. 159 Water street, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada SrnEcaL, C. Omer (Clovis Omer), Geological Survey of Canada. 547 Sussex street. No. 62 Daly avenue, Ottawa, Canada Simons, Theodore, Sandor, British Columbia Turts, J. F. (John Freeman), Acadia College. Wolfville, Nova Scotia Wuitcuer, A. H. (Arthur Henry), Topographical Surveys, Department of the Interior, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada COLOMBIA, COSTA RICA, AND VENEZUELA Prirrier, H. (Henry Francis Pittier de Fabrega), Instituto Jisico-Geo- grafico de Costa Rica. San José de Costa Rica, C. A. PLuMAcHER, Capt. EH. H. (Eugene Herman), United States Consul, Maracaibo, Venezuela, South America WirHrow, Charles L. (Charles L ), Prop. Poco Monte Planta. Bocas del Toro, Colombia, South America CHINA AND JAPAN AnpreEws, Mrs Elizabeth 8. (Elizabeth S——), 105 C. Bluff, Yokohama, Japan Gaskin, Miss F. J. (#—— J——), care of Wisner & Co., Shanghai, China O'Leary, Asst. Paym. T. 8. (T—— S8——), U.S. Naval Hospital, Yoko- hama, Japan Suicemt, K. (Keisei), Joshi Gakuin, 33 Kami Ni Bancho, Kojimachiku. 61 Shimo Ni Bancho Kojimachiku, Tokyo, Japan Squires, Herbert G. (Herbert G ), U.S. Legation, Pekin, China ENGLAND Bacon, H. B. (Hackley Bartholomew), Ventnor, Isle of Wight, England Bacon, G. W. (George Washington), 127 Strand, London. 101 Ridgway, Wimbledon, England Breui, Dr William A. (William A——), Pendell Court, Bletchingley. CLARKE, Rev. C. Pickering (Charles Pickering), University College, Sur- rey. Oxon, Holy Trinity Parsonage, Wimbledon, Surrey, England Crover, Richardson, vu. s. N., Naval Attaché, U. 8. Embassy, London, England Co ENGLAND ike Compron, Col. C. E. (Clarles Elmer), u. s. a., London, EK. C., England Herpert-Jonrs, W. (W ), 46 Albany Mansions, London, §. W., England Hoover, Mrs Lou Henry, care of Benick Moreing & Co., 20 Capthall avenue, London, EH. C., England Lanepon, Col. L. L. (L L ), care of J. S. Morgan & Co., 22 Old Broad street, London, E. C., England Scarrr, Walter B. (Walter B ), eare of Brown, Shipley & Co., 123 Pall Mall, London, 8. W., England Workman, Fanny Bullock, care of Brown, Shipley & Co., 128 Pall Mall, London, Eneland FRANCE AND GHERMANY Donen, Col. Theodore A. (Theodore Ayrault), u.s. 4., office 1403, 27 Wil- liam street, New York City. 18 Avenue d’Antin, Paris, France Harper, Giles B. (Giles Bates), United States Embassy, Paris, France. Hotel Columbia, 18 Avenue Kleber, Paris Jackson, John B. (John Brinckerhoff), 68 Unter den Linden. 3 Bis- marckstrasse, N. W., Berlin, Germany Lounat, Due de, 47 rue Dumont d‘Urville, Paris, France Waurrer, And. D. (Andrew Dickson), 68 Unter den Linden. American Embassy, Berlin, Germany HAWAIIAN ISLANDS Bonp, Dr B. D. (Benjamin Davis), Kohala, Hawaii, Territory of Hawaii Surru, Jared G. (Jared Gage), Hawaii Experiment Stat’n, Honolulu, H.T. Tuurston, L. A. (Lorrin Andrews), The Stangenwald, Merchant street. Bates street, Honolulu, Territory of Hawaii Woop, Edgar, Normal School, corner Fort and School streets. Emma street, Fern Place, Hawaiian Islands MEXICO Anprrson, I. M. (I—— M——.), City of Mexico, Mexico Barrineron, Edward, Tierra Blanca, State of Vera Cruz, Mexico Bropin, Walter M. (Walter Martin), Guanajuato, Mexico Burr, G. A. (G— A——), Parral, Mexico Dr Arozarpna, R. M. (R M ), City of Mexico, Mexico Facto, Raf. Garcia y 8., Calle de Ortega 5, City of Mexico, Mexico Furness, Dwight, Guanajuato, Mexico Kineman, Lewis, Gen. Office Mexican Central R’y, City of Mexico, D. F. KirRKLAND, F. S. (F 5 ), Chihuahua, Mexico Lupiow, Edwin, Las Esperanzas, Coahuila, Mexico 6 Ta MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Moynan, John J. (John Jeremiah), 3 Calle de Limantour 7. Avenida Madrid 21, City of Mexico, Mexico Nickerson, H. R. (Hiram Robert), care of Mexican Central Railway, Limited, Firet Bucareti 2, City of Mexico, Mexico Parsons, Dr A. W. (A W ), City of Mexico, Mexico Ripenack, Dr Geo. A. (George A——), care of S. Pearson & Son, Lim- ited, Salina Cruz, Oaxaca, Mexico SrapLes, W. O. (William Oscar), 825 Avenida Juarez. 824 Avenida Balderas, City of Mexico, Mexico Wess, Henry P. (Henry Pusey), Calle Ortega 28. Avenida Londres 635, City of Mexico, Mexico WermPLe, Ross, 1 Calle-de San Francisco 14. 1 Calle de Colon 8, City of Mexico, Mexico : ' PHILIPPINE ISLANDS AHERN, George P. (George Patrick), Forestry Bureau, Manila, Philippine Islands AuLin, Henry T. (Henry Tureman), Headquarters of Constabulary. 119 Malacafian, Manila, Philippine Islands Barrows, David P. (Dayid Prescott), 216 Calle Nueva Malate, Manila, Philippine Islands Barrows, Dr D. P. (D P—), Manila, Philippine Islands Burrrirr, Charles H. (Charles Henry), 358 Calle Cabildo. Hotel de France, 202 Calle Solana, Manila, Philippine Islands CrimMiys, Lieut. Martin L. (Martin L ). Manila, Philippine Islands Founrain, S. W. (Samuel Warren), u.s. a., Zamboanga, Mindanao, Philippine Islands GLAssForD, Major W. A. (William Alexander), Headquarters Division Philippines, 39 Calle Nozaleda, Manila, Philippine Islands Goprrey, Col. B.S. (E SI ), Manila, Philippine Islands ~ Kenty, Lieut. W. Lacy (W Lacy), Manila, Philippine Islands Pravu, James F. (James Francis), U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Ma- nila, Philippine Islands Putnam, G. R. (G R ), Coast and Geodetic Survey, Manila, P. I. Russeiy, Lt. Col. A. H. (Andrew Howland), Ordnance Dept., Manila, P. I. Srepver, EK. Z. (Hdgar Zell), Manila, Philippine Islands Symes, Whitman, care Atlantic, Gulf & Pacifie Co., cor. Malecon Drive and Pasig River, Manila, Philippine Islands Wrient, Lieut. E. 8. (Ez 5 ), Manila, Philippine Islands RUSSIA, SWEDEN, AND ISLAND OF MALTA Crapp, Henry L. (Henry Lyman), Villa Zammit, Island of Malta Greener, Richard T. (Richard Theodore), Vladivostok. House Nor- lander, Pavloski street, E. Siberia, Russia SWEDEN 75 feck, M. de (Maximilien de), Stockholm. Strandviigen, 53, Stockholm, — Sweden WEST INDIES EXANDER, William H. (William H——), 5 Allen street, San Juan, ~ Porto Rico RossweLL, Dr L. Oliver (JA— Oliver), Turks Island, West Indies Gunz, H. (1 ), Caibarien, Cuba O'DonneLt, J. J. (John Joseph), U. 8. Weather Bureau Office. Kirn Cottage, Strathclyde, Barbados, West Indies nyper, Nicholas R. (Nicholas Roland), Fitchfield Hotel, Port Antonio, Jamaica, West Indies ‘Sorernou, Ysidoro, Caibarien, Cuba The JManhattan Press-Clipping Bureau ARTHUR CASSOT, Proprietor NEW YORK (Knickerbocker Building) LONDON COR. FIFTH AVENUE AND 14TH STREET, NEW YORK Will supply you with all personal reference and clippings on any subject from all the papers aud periodicals published here and abroad. Our large staff of readers can gather for you more valuable material on any current.subject than you can get in a lifetime. TERMS: 100 clippings . . $ 500 250 clippings . . . $ 12.00 500 clippings . . . $22.00 1,000 clippings . . . $35.00 4] Messrs. McClure, Phillips & Co. announce the publication on January I, 1903, of the first number of the Journal of Comparative | Literature, | CALIFORNIA | under the editorial management of IS THE MECCA. | GEORGE E. WOODBERRY, SS | P1 ofessor of Comparative Literature in Seekers after rest and recreation | Columbia University ; “4 Jand flowing with milk and honey.” in a bracing climate, amid enchant- | Jj; BS BRSveHER, | ing scenery, surrounded by fruits Assistant Professor of Comparative Litera- | and flowers, are going to California ture in Harvard University ; | this winter in greater numbers than ee Bis (S)PAUNIG AUR NG; ever before. Tutor in Comparative Literature in Columbia University | ‘4 The Journal will be devoted to the interests | | of the comparative method in literary study | NEW YORK CENTRAL LINES. and investigation at home and abroad, and | the most eminent scholars in this field will collaborate with the editors to make it thor- oughly representative. every convenience and luxury. In- {The Journal will be issued quarterly. quire of ticket agents regarding the The price of single numbers will be seventy-five ~ aes cents, and annual subscription will be three dollars. new facilities. Subscriptions and all business communications ‘The way to go is by the The new trains of this system give a fine service, fast time, and afford should be addressed to Fonr-Track Series No. 5, “America’s Nees sys Winter Resorts,’ sent free on receipt of a McClure, Phillips & Company. two-cent stamp by George H. Daniels, s General Passenger 4 re Jentre at 141-155 East 25th Street, New York. Geral ee ONE Aaint, Coamel Cesaital VA circular containing additional informa- tion will be sent on application. WE make a specialty of HIGH GRADE WORK for Scientiric IENTIFIC axo TECHNICAL ICAL PUBLICATIONS VALS oe hi =~ e Ub ere “Grn Sr. oie ge LPHIA PLATES TO PRINT IN ONE OR moRE CoLons MONG PEO SEASONS FAWORITES His Third Success The Two Vanrevels A charmingly romantic and adventurous story of Indiana life in the 40’s. Illustrated in color by Henry Hutt $1.50 “““THE Two VANREVELS” Is NOT ONLY A BETTER BOOK THAN ‘THE GENTLEMAN FROM INDIANA,’ BUT SURPASSES ‘ MOn- SIEUR BEAUCAIRE.’’? Pittshurg Dispatch. By Booth Tarkington MIG Cie Wri, JSG LIDS eG CO,., The Creator of ‘‘ Uncle Remus ” Gabriel Tolliver ‘“ A NOVEL WHICH RANKS Mr. Harris AS THE DICKENS OF THE SouTtH.’’ Brooklyn Eagle. By Joel Chandler Harris $7.50 “The Happiest Time” Little Stories of Married Life By Mary Stewart Cutting ““ AMONG THE BEST WORK EVER DONE BY AN AMERICAN WOMAN IN MODERN FICTION.”’ Pittsburg Post. BT .25 Our Frontier Heroes Border Fights and Fighters By Cyrus Townsend Brady ““ WILL BE ESPECIALLY ATTRACTIVE TO BOYS AND YOUNG MEN.’’ Providence Journal. BT.30 net About the REAL Child Emmy Lou: Her Book & Heart ““THE MAN WHO CAN READ ABOUT HER AND NOT FALL IN LOVE WITH HER AT FIRST SIGHT MUST HAVE SOMETHING WRONG WITH HIM.”’ JN. Y. Sun. By George Madden Martin sex ‘ Fifty pictures y Chas. L. Hinton. $1.50 by Sunes NEw YORK BL OGIRATPIGIIC, {EIB TOTTI INS on Te IM OI 216 The Letters of Daniel Webster Edited by C. H. Van Tyne, Ph.D. This is the definitive edition of the correspondence of the great Ameri- can orator and statesman. Everything concerning the age in which Webster lived and worked is now legitimate matter for history, and the present vol- ume will be of more assistance in completely reconstructing that age for the student of historical research and for the general reader than any other document in existence. Cloth, Svo. Frontispiece portrait. Net, $5.00. Border Fights and Fighters By Cyrus Townsend Brady ““This author makes the long struggle vivid with the characters and deeds of Boone, David Crockett, George Rogers Clark, William Henry Harrison, Houston, Tecumseh and others. While there is reason to believe that the book is historically accurate, the writer has the happy faculty of coloring his narrative with the personality of the great actors and incidents full of romance.’’ The Indianapolis Journal. Cloth, 12mo. 16 full-page pictures and many maps. Net, $1.30. Also in a set with “Colonial Fights and Fighters,’ and “American Fights and Fighters,” by the same author. Three in a box, $4.00. Reminiscences of Sixty Years in Public Affairs By ex-Gov. George S. Boutwell ‘Tt is long since any book has been published from which so much first-hand material for history may be gleaned. We have been able in these notices to give but a faint idea of the extraordinary interest and permanent yalue of Mr. Boutwell’s recollections. They will be ranked among the most precious documents at his disposal by the future historian who shall essay to describe the evolution of the United States during the period contem- porary with the author’s public life.’’ New York Sun. 2 vols. Cloth, Svo. Frontispiece portrait. Net, $5.00. Life of Dickens This book is a condensation of Forster’s official life by George Gissing. It provides what has never before been available, a complete and authoritative life of Dickens within measurable compass. It is not merely an abridgment, since the original work has been thoroughly revised by Mr. Gissing, who has also added much critical matter of his own on Dickens’ works. ‘There are twenty-eight full-page illustrations, which show among other things Dickens’ many homes, haunts, and associates. Cloth, Svo. Illustrated. Net, $2.00. McClure, Phillips & Co., 141 E. 25th St., New York P| a Office Hours: 8.30 A. M. to 5 P. M. Telephone, Main 471 NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY OFFICES Rooms 107, 108 Corcoran Building Fifteenth and F Sts. N. W., Washington, D. C. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL President Wire McG Pik so irs Vice-President JOHN JOY EDSON C © S 5 Treasurer ING Sie ROBINS Gs 5 - Secretary ELIZA R, SCIDMORE 2 - Foreign Secretary BOARD OF MANAGERS 1900-1902 19013-1903 1902-1904 CHARLES J. BELL MARCUS BAKER A. GRAHAM BELL GEORGE DAVIDSON HENRY F. BLOUNT DAVID T DAY WM. M. DAVIS F. V. COVILLE A. W. GREELY JOHN JOY EDSON D. C. GILMAN ANGELO HEILPRIN G. K. GILBERT S. H. KAUFFMANN RUSSELL HINMAN A. J. HENRY WILLIS L. MOORE W J McGEE DAVID J. HILL ISRAEL C. RUSSELL GIFFORD PINCHOT Cc. HART MERRIAM R. D. SALISBURY O. H. TITTMANN The National Geographic Magazine is sent free of charge to all members of the National Geographic Society Recommendation for Membership in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY The following form is enclosed for use in the nomination of persons for membership Please detach and fill in blanks and send to the Secretary Dues: Annual membership, $2; Life membership, $50. If check be enclosed, please make it payable to order of the National Geographic Society, and, if at a distance from Washington, remit by New York draft or post-office money-order. for membership in the Society. THE TARR and McMURKY - Oc GRAPHIES BY Ss. TARR, B. s.F. G.S.A. and FRANK M. McMURRY, Ph.D. ; ‘Contiell intel A Rae College, Columbia University series of Gedevagihies by Prorescore TARR and McMurry is Reriape the only seties of recent years to contain a new method of presentation. These geographies differ from previously pub- lished hooks on the same: Subject, in the following particulars : rit—Causal Trostinent: _This is 4 careful arrangement of the subject-matter in accordance ‘relation to cause and effect. The fact is recognized by the best teachers that physiographic con- any determine the location of human industries, the patie agerl of transportation routes, are treated. at each subject i is dealt with at acine! ronere The authors’ reasons for this innovation are: ies } ence in physligrapiy, industry or customs; that in a treatment by States there is much repetition of thes ume kind of facts to the confusion of the pupils. To avoid the waste of space and the Jack | of per- ry fora Ae tapemion are associated as parts of one story. For instance, lumbering, fishing, etc., e their most detailed treatment in connection with: New England ; coal and iron mining and the Z Other new end” attractive features of this péries might be named; as the final summary at a) the entire subject, the new and convenient form, the use of home geography, the sugges- THE FIVE-BOOK SERIES Part I—isth year) Home Geography 40 cts. Part Il—(sth year) The ones apa we Whole ios ir hs - 40 cts, Part. T—(6th year) North Awicete 75 cts, Past IV—(7th year) Pere South: America, Etc. ; ves. 50 cts. Part V —(8th year) ne cig Aiea with Review of North America a » » 50 cts, We have Ase the above sum. at the disposal of Messrs. Rudolf Eicke- meyer, Jr., C. Yarnall Abbott and William B. Dyer; three of the foremost photographers, to be awarded for the best photographs made with Bausch @ Lomb Lenses and Shutters The awards include eleven classes of subjects, with special awards for Kodaks, Poco, Premo and other hand cameras fitted with our tenis and 3 for professional photographers. ; BOOKLET OF CLASSES AND AWARDS FREE BAUSCH @ LOMB OPTICAL CO., Rochester, N.Y. lOunticpartient of Office Furniture exe plete @ with everything ‘requisite to the furnishing 9 of a modern Office, a Bank, a Committee Combination Book Office Furniture Ghe Sectional Book Case” Is the case for the home or office. Every one has some books which he wishes to oe 2 When there are not enough to fill an ordinary book ‘case, one or two sections may be had at a very stall expense, and as the numbet of volumes increases additional sections can be added—and the book case grows as book space is needed. (Whether you have one 9 section or more, you haye a complete back case. We-carry the ‘ Gunn,” the *‘Casler,”” ¢ and the ‘¢ Danner ”’—each has its special feature—in the most pone: woods and Aaine o “WOODWARD LOTHROP. em York . . Washington - . Paris $1.15 per Section .. . Up Without Glass, in Solid Oak A special finish to suit the woodwork Gr any particular room made to order with- out additional cost. We shall be pleased to have you call and examine them. , THIRD FLOOR ececcececececececeeseeeececesceeceeeee HENRY. ROMEIKE’S ae BUREAU OF PRESS CUTTINGS: 110 Fifth Avenue, New York | Reads every paper of importance published in the Valied: Soke ¢ and through its European agencies in London, Paris, Berlin and Vienna every paper of importance published in Europe and the British Colonies. One subscription on any given subject will bring notices from the United States, and if desired also from the European papers. WRITE FOR TERMS Cee Gl gee ri PRESS OF JUDD & DETWEILER, WASHINGTON, Dy -Gse3 FNATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC AGAZINEJ Vol. XIV FEBRUARY, 1903 No. 2 CONTENTS PAGE PILOT CHART OF THE NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN FOR FEBRUARY, 1903 : ; : i : ; 4 A Supplement w )) THE GREAT TURK AND HIS LOST PROVINCES. BY WILLIAM : E. CURTIS. ILLUSTRATED 4 : : : ; : w THE WORK OF THE U.S. HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE. BY COM- MANDER W.H.H. SOUTHERLAND, U.S.N., HY DROGRAPHER Ae WHY GREAT SALT LAKE HAS FALLEN aw GEOGRAPHIC NOTES w GEOGRAPHIC LITERATURE wv : NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Published for the National Geographic Society By McClure, Phillips & Co., of New York se a Year 25 Cents a Number Batered at the Post-office in Washington, D. C., as Second-class Mall Matter. : ale NATIONAL |_| LE CROGRAPHIIC a _MAGAZINE _{_| N ILLUSTRATED MONTHLY, ‘published for the Ak Nationat Grocrapuic. Society, of Washing. oe ton, D, C, by McCrure, Pumurs & _ All communications should be addressed 0 the Managing Editor of the Nationa Macazine, Corcoran Building, Wash ngton : _ Business communications may also be addr sed to. ~ McClure, Phillips _ & ee at aL Eas New. York City. oo : ars 25. CENTS A NUMBER; ‘Sa. 50 = PattomincChiet a ee 1 2 ae Geographer, O. os Geological Survey “Managing Editor: ‘GILBERT ce GROSVENOR : ue _ Associate Editors - @ENERAL A. w. (GREELY ee a : ye wines & MOORE Te Chief Signal ace U. s. Foe aes ‘WiIMcGEE — aban z i ( Ethnologist in ‘Cae Bares Ca American Zennolegy ¢. HART MERRIAM I eM RC ees of the Biological Seo v. = Ro ie a Ce DAVID J. HILL : : Assistant Seorelary of State ELIZA RUHAMAH SGIDMORE _ A ees ALL the. ane ah th : - Basi,’ "MARCUS BAKER a ea a ae U Ss vaaen Survey” a ee ia Wor. XIV; No. 2 WASHINGTON FEBRUARY, 1903 MAGA ZIUNIE, iEaGRE Ad BURK AND HIs LOST PROVINCES By Witi1am E. Curris HE next, like the last, battle- ground of Europe will be the Balkan Peninsula, a group of petty states lying in the southeastern corner of Kurope, bounded on the north by the Danube River, on the south by Greece and the A/gean Sea, on the east by the Black Sea, and on the west by the Adriatic. It is one of the oldest, yet one of the most primitive, portions of Europe, comprising the ancient Mace- donian Empire. The people are de- scribed by Pliny and Herodotus. ‘They fought Darius the Persian, and Alex- ander the Great. Julius Czesar was planning a campaign against them when he fell in the forum with the dagger of Brutus in his breast. The story of the adventures of the Emperor Trajan among them is carved upon that mar- velous column in Rome. ‘Theirs was the last province to be added to the Roman Empire and the first to go to its dissolution. They then fell into the hands of the Turks, and for century after century submitted to the yoke of the Sultan, and were gradually sub- merged in political, moral, intellectual, and commercial oblivion. The exist- ence of this once powerful people was almost forgotten until the Bulgarian atrocities, as they were called, excited universal horror twenty-five years ago and Russia intervened on the pretext of racial and religious relationship and attempted to take them away from Tur- key ; but the other powers of Europe prevented the Czar from enjoying the fruits of his victory over the Sultan and refused to permit him to have a port upon the Mediterranean. Ancient Macedonia was cut in half. ‘The upper part was made an independent kingdom, called Bulgaria. ‘The lower half, famil- iarly known as Macedonia, was restored to Turkey upon solemn stipulations that the people should have a Christian governor and a just and liberal govern- ment. That territory which appears upon the map as Eastern Roumelia, has recently attracted much attention from the civilized world because of the kid- napping of Miss Stone, an American missionary. BOSNIA AS AN AUSTRIAN PROVINCE Bosnia, the westernmost of the Turk- ish provinces, was placed under the pro- 46 tection of Austria, and has been the scene of a remarkable transformation ° from one of the most unhappy and hope- less places on earth to one of the most peaceful and prosperous. It isthe more interesting because it happens to be the first Turkish province that was ever wellgoverned. Nowhere else in Europe has there been so rapid an increase in population and wealth, and the pictur- esque old towns are taking on an air of activity. While subject to the Turks Bosnia practically vanished from the current of civilization until 1875, when, exasperated by extortion, robbery, ra- pine, murder, and religious persecution, the people rose in rebellion. The pow- ers of Europe placed them under the protection of Austria, which has given the most remarkable exhibition of ad- ministrative reform known to modern history, and has demonstrated the possi- bility of governing alien races by justice and benevolence. “* Where the Turks are, there also are the wolves,’’ isa Bosnian proverb. An- other says: ‘‘ Where the hoof of the Turkish horse strikes, the crops will come up very thin.’’ ‘Those proverbs were illustrated in an unmistakable man- ner in Bosnia, but one who visits that country today can scarcely believe that such conditions existed there only a short time ago. There were no rail- roads and few wagon roads. Brigandage was a recognized profession. Robbery was as common as lying. Murder was not considered a crime, and the number killed by the soldiers or by each other was not recorded. ‘The British consul reported to his government that the average was ten thousand a year. Those who were compelled to travel went in large parties fully armed; farmers dared not build their cabins where they could be seen from the highway, and women never appeared in public alone, because it was unsafe. ‘Today human life is as safe in Bosnia as it is in Illinois, and travel is even safer there, because there Tue Nationa, GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE has never been a train robbery in that country. During the last ten years, out of a population of nearly two millions, the homicides have averaged only six a year, and in 1900 there were only two. There has been no case of highway rob- bery since 1895, and in 1900 but one case of burglary. Other crimes are equally rare. The people are peaceful and con- tented. The cities are filled with new and handsome houses, factories have been built to utilize the water power, a university, colleges, schools of engineer- ing, agriculture, and manual training have been established to qualify the peo- ple to make the most intelligent use of their opportunities. The population is almost evenly divided between the Mos- lem, Orthodox Greek, and Christian churches, with a few thousand Protest- ants and Jews. Members of the differ- ent religions mingle on amicable terms and show mutual respect and toleration. The courts are wisely and justly admin- istered; justice is awarded to every citi- zen regardless of his religion, wealth, or social position; taxes are low and honestly collected and economically dis- bursed. The people have learned for the first time that honest complaints will be patiently listened to, and that wrongs will be remedied. Although the older peasants are still ignorant, backward, and distrustful, the younger generation show enterprise and ambi- tion and are conducting their affairs with intelligence and order. Enlightened Mohammedans have ob- served the advantages of the social, ag: ricultural, and administrative reforms, and while no adult Moslem was ever converted to Christianity, they are adopting the customs and habits of the western world. ‘The lives of the women are becoming enlarged. The wives and daughters of the Turks still wear veils in the streets, but are being released from the degrading position they occupy in all the lands of Islam. THe Great Turk anp His Lost Provinces Under Turkish rule all public wor- ship was forbidden except that of Islam, and Christians and Jews were obliged to say their prayers in secret and pay blackmail to the local magistrates for the privilege. They were known as Rayahs—the word means ransomed— because, meriting death, they purchased permission to live by paying tribute. Western Christians do not appreciate the religious heroism which the poor peasants, not of Bosnia only, but of Bulgaria, Macedonia, and other Balkan provinces, have displayed during the long centuries they have suffered from the persecution of the Turks. They have lived in daily dread of martyrdom, yet have clung to their faith, when at any moment they might have secured safety, prosperity, and position by re- canting and accepting the religion of their oppressors. These conditions still exist in Macedonia, and in Roumania the Jews are suffering more from the Christians than they ever suffered in Bosnia from the Turks. The Christians do not kill with the sword nor destroy with the torch, nor do they steal women for their harems, but they debar their Jewish fellow-beings from labor, drive them to distress and starvation, deprive them of education and the privilege of worship. Through all the centuries that Bos- nia was controlled by the Turks the people were without morality, educa- tion, arts, or sciences, and their indus- try was limited to the supply of their own wants, simply because when they possessed something they did not actu- ally need, it attracted the rapacity of the officials. Occasionally some man like Nikola Tesla, the famous electri- cian, who is a native of Bosnia, broke through the restrictions and found an opportunity to develop his genius else- where; but under the Turks such cases were few. Much of the cruelties endured by the people formerly were due to religious Ae] fanaticism. A peculiar sect of der- vishes, called Ghazi, are holy men who go forth to slay the enemies of the Prophet until they are themselves slain, and as long as such fanatics are allowed to invade Christian communities, there can beno peace. Religious fanatics who commit murder for the faith in Bosnia are sentenced to have their bodies cre- mated afterexecution. ‘This has driven them fromthe country. It is a punish- ment they dread more thandeath. To hang or shoot a Mohammedan is simply to send him to the paradise he is seek- ing, where he will rise again in his nat- ural body in the presence of the Prophet. But if his body is burned or destroyed by any means, it is impossible for him to be translated, and his soul will re- main forever in suspense. Bosnia is broken by high peaks, deep glens, ridges, beautiful wooded hills, winding streams, and rich alluvial basins, which yield large crops of grain and are especially adapted tofruit. The landscape is a series of terraces which slope gradually southward and finally disappear in an archipelago of lovely islands, one of the most enchanting pictures in the universe, whose attrac- tions have been the theme of poets ever since the days of Homer. It was on this coast during the Roman occupation that the Roman Emperor Diocletian erected his magnificent palace, which covered ten acres of ground, and for size, magnificence, and architectural display surpassed all human dwellings. ‘The ruins are still sufficiently well preserved to fascinate the artist, the architect, and the archeologist, but the marble is be- ing rapidly carried away to Italy and Austria for building material. Sarajevo, the capital, is a city of 60,000 inhabitants, reached by a narrow- gauge road winding among the moun- tain gorges like the Colorado railways until it reaches the Adriatic at Metkovic, the port of Bosnia. ‘The journey is in- teresting ; the scenery is picturesque, 48 but that which most attracts the Amer- ican traveler is the transformation of medieval castles into paper mills, tan- neries, cigarette factories, woolen mills, and other practical purposes. Most of these enterprises have been aided by government subsidies, for the Austrians have considered it wise to encourage the introduction of foreign capital and im- migration by offering substantial in- ducements in the way of free land and buildings, exemption from taxation and financial assistance. In this way they have provided employment for the women and others who are incapable of manual labor, and have afforded a ready and profitable market for agri- cultural products. There is excellent water power everywhere. Very little raw material is now shipped from Bosnia. The hides are tanned at home; the wool is woven into blankets, rugs, and carpets; the tobacco is manufact- ured into cigars and cigarettes; the wheat into flour ; the fruit and vegeta- bles are preserved, and all other pro- ceeds of agricultural labor are increased in value and manufactured into market- able merchandise before they leave the country. Prunes are the largest item of export, and $1,500,000 worth were sold in the European markets in 1go1. Beet-sugar factories have now been erected, and experts have been brought from Italy to educate the natives in the cultivation of silk. In Sarajevo the ancient and the mod- ern meet ; the Hast and the West touch hands; the oriental with eternal com- posure listens to the chatter of the Frenchman and regards the gesticula- tions of the Italian with supreme con- tempt. ‘The town is half Turkish and half Austrian. The old part looks like Damascus and the new part like Buda- pest, which, in many respects, is the handsomest city in the world. I was told that Sarajevo contained a larger - variety of types of the original oriental races than even Constantinople, and Tue Nationa, GrocraPHic MAGAZINE that in the bazaars may be seen daily examples of every national costume worn from the Straits of Gibraltar to the Yellow Sea of China; and they all live together 1n peace and harmony, each recognizing the scruples of the other, permitting him to practice in peace the creed and customs of his faith. Sarajevo compares well in architect- ure and in other respects with any other city of its size in Europe or Amer- ica, and will some time be a beautiful and popular place, for it is much favored by nature, and the inhabitants are rap- idly accumulating wealth. There are mosques with minarets and domes, churches of every religion, fine office buildings, apartment-houses, govern- ment edifices, and public institutions. The city hall is a beautiful modern structure of the oriental type, and the Scheriatschule or law college is imposing. The old part of the city consists of crooked and narrow streets, lined with shops and bazaars opening upon the sidewalks, asin all orientaltowns. The merchants and mechanics squat on their haunches or sit cross-legged as they make and sell their wares, but it is not sage for a stranger to purchase souve- nirs of the country in those shops unless he sees them made, b2cause most of the stock comes from the factories of Ger- many, France, and Austria. ‘The dif- ferent trades are governed by guilds, as was formerly the rule throughout Eu- rope. Each guild has a patron saint and a long list of officers, who fix prices and profits, regulate wages, appoint ap- prentices, and decide disputes; but there is no eight-hour law. The busy arti- sans keep at it from daybreak to bed- time, seldom knocking off except to say their prayers at the nearest mosque, or drink a cup of coffee and make a cigar- ette at the nearest café. The population of Bosnia at the time of the revolution is unknown. ‘There had never been a census. More than arg} Tue Great Turk anp His Lost Provinces A Jewish Cemetery, Bosnia 50 two hundred thousand people fled across the border during the ten years previous to the Turko-Russian war to escape the cruelties and extortions of the Turks, and at its close the inhabitants had prob- ably been reduced to less than eight hundred thousand. In 1900 the popu- lation had increased to nearly two mil- lions, and is growing at the rate of about ten per cent a year, including represent- Tue Nationa, GEocRAPHIc MAGAZINE lem recognized the importance of a fact which many rulers in all parts of the world and at all periods have forgotten or overlooked, that conscience and: re- ligion lie deeper than any other influ- ences that affect human action. One of the most novel peculiarities of paternalism is the erection of fine hotels in different parts of the province in order that people who visit the country may Government Hotels, Bosnia atives of every religion, especially Jews from Russiaand Roumania. The Jewish burying ground is a curious place, ordi- nary granite boulders being used for headstones. ‘The government respects the religious scruples of every citizen, and adjusts its laws and judicial pro- ceedings to the requirements of the different faiths. The Austrian states- men who have solved the Bosnian prob- be made comfortable and leave with pleasant impressions. These hotels are well kept, charge reasonable rates, and have not only been one of the most effective influences in bringing capital and new enterprises into Bosnia, but have been a profitable investment to the government. Another interesting and novel feature of the administration concerns the mili- THe Great Turk anp His Lost PRoviIncgEs tary. Every young man must serve five years inthe army. At eighteen he en- ters the active service for two years, and then serves for three years in the reserve corps, which is mobilized for two or three weeks annually for drill and in- struction ; but no Bosnian soldier serves in his own country. He is sent to Austria or Hungary and stationed in some large town, where he can have an opportunity to rub up against the people and learn by imitation what he cannot be taught at home. If he marries an Austrian girl, he is allowed double pay, is exempt from certain guard duty, his wife is permitted to live in the barracks with him, and is employed as a cook or laundress or in some other capacity. Thus a great majority of the young men who leave Bosnia for military serv- ice return with Austrian wives and settle down as valuable citizens in the old towns. On the other hand, all military duty in Bosnia is performed by Austrian soldiers, who are offered similar induce- ments to marry Bosnian girls, and if they settle down in the province per- manently, the government gives them farms or homes. ‘Thus the country is not only being settled by an excellent class of young people, but the ties of relationship are linking it more closely to Austria every year. One of the most interesting towns is Jajce, where St Luke is believed to have lived and died and to have been buried. Helena, the daughter of the last of the ancient kings of Bosnia, was given the remains of the apostle as a part of her dowry, and when Jajce was captured by the Turks, she escaped by a miracle and carried them with her to a convent at Padua, Italy. BULGARIA Bulgaria is about the size and shape of Pennsylvania, with nearly the same population, and its forests and rivers, the mountain ranges and rich valleys that lie between them remind one of 51 the Quaker state. The Danube River forms the northern boundary and car- ries most of the commerce of the coun- try, and along its banks are some fine old Romanruins. Three-fourths of the population are engaged in agriculture and pastoral pursuits, cultivating little farms and following flocks and herds which graze at large. Theoretically all of the land belongs to the state, and those who occupy it pay one-fourth of all their produce for rent and taxes. The principal products are wheat, wool, and the oil of roses, which comes from the provinces bordering on the Black Sea. Philippopolis, a famous old town founded by Philip of Macedon 350 B.C., the second city in population and im- portance, is the center of the industry, and from that point eastward the entire kingdom is arose garden. Roses are cultivated like grapes in France and Italy, so that all of the strength of the sap may go into the flowers, and in the summer women pluck the flowers as they reach maturity. ‘Thousands of tons of rose leaves are gathered annu- ally. The petals are carefully removed and the oil extracted from them by distillation. The oil sells from $50 to ¢g100 a pound, according to its purity and specific gravity. A single drop will perfume a two-ounce bottle of alcohol. The peasants of Bulgaria are indus- trious, ingenious, and intelligent. Both men and women are of fine physique, capable of great endurance, and few are idle, intemperate, or vicious. I saw but three or four beggars all the time I was in Bulgaria, and they were crip- ples. The women do their share of work on the farms, and never seem to be idle a moment. They spin as they walk along the highways and as they sit behind piles of fruit and vegetables in the markets. Most of the shepherds you see from the highways are women and children. The large herds in the mountains are kept by well-grown boys, 52 who sleep in the open air with sheep- skins wrapped around them. Hospitality is based upon the ancient oriental laws. No stranger is ever turned from the door if he comes in peace. The poorest peasant will share blanket and bread without the asking, and no visitor leaves a cabin without being offered a bunch of grapes, a mug of milk, or at least a glass of water. Each family has at least one pair of oxen, forty or fifty sheep, besides cattle, goats, pigs, geese, and chickens. Fruit is plentiful. The southern slopes of the Balkan Mountains are clad with vines, and the grapes produce an excel- lent wine. Tobacco and cotton grow well and all the vegetables known to temperate zones. The great majority of the people be- long to the Orthodox Greek Church ; not more than one-fifth are Moslems. Their patron saint is St John of Ryle, a monk, who lived in a hollow oak in the mountains. A monastery, built upon the site of his retreat, is an enormous building of medieval architecture, fre- quently visited by tourists, who are hos- pitably entertained by the monks. It re- ceived considerable notoriety lately be- cause of areport that Miss Stone was con- cealed there, and a thorough search was made by the soldiers. ‘This profanation of the holy place excited great indigna- tion among the orthodox Greeks, who blamed the American missionaries and threatened reprisals. Its picturesque walls have often shel- tered brigands, and in olden times its secluded situation made it a convenient rendezvous for enterprising gentlemen when tempted by favorable opportuni- ties or oppressed by necessity. In re- turn for their hospitality the monks were liberally supplied with game from the mountains, and are supposed to have received liberal contributions from the booty of their guests. Around the picturesque city of Phil- ippopolis are many ancient ruins, which THe Narionat GrocrapHic MAGAZINE should attract the interest of arche- -ologists, but have thus far received very little attention. Perhaps that is because they are sofar away. In Philippopolis there is quite a colony of Protestants, which last year erected the largest and finest Protestant church in the Balkan States. In Sofia there is another pros- perous Protestant church. The princi- pal school is at Samakov, where Miss Stone had been attending a teachers’ convention before her capture. The most influential woman in Bul- garia is Mrs Ivan Kassuroff, a former pupil of Miss Stone, who is notable as the first woman of social position in that country to enter mercantile business. Her character and abilities have not only carried her through a trying or- deal, but she has gained the respect and confidence of the entire community and has opened the field of commerce for women. When her husband, who was the proprietor of the principal bookstore in Sofia, died, he left her nothing but the good will of his business, and she was compelled to carry it on or become dependent upon others. Although no woman had ever undertaken such a task in Bulgaria, Madam Kassuroff assumed the responsibility. Now every one ad- mires her and is proud of her success, and every hat is lifted when she passes along the street. She is a typical ex- ample of what American ideas, intro- duced by American missionaries, have done for the emancipation and advance- ment of women in the East. The gov- ernment, as well as the public, has ex- pressed its approval, and Madam Kas- suroff is now the official printer and bookseller. Sofia, the capital, is a city of 45,000 inhabitants, situated at the base of Mt Bitosch, a beautiful peak, 7,800 feet high. It covers a considerable area, and looks as if a building boom had been suddenly checked, which is true. Under the reign of Prince Alexander and Stefan Stambuloff, Bulgaria made Vue Great Turx anp His Lost Provinces 53 The Ancient Greek Monastary of St John of Ryle, Bulgaria 54 extraordinary progress, but under the present government very few improve- ments have been made. The business portion of the city will compare well with any place of similar size in France, Germany, or Austria. ‘The business blocks are of modern architecture ; the streets are wide and well kept; there are many apartment-houses similar to those in Vienna; the shops are filled with fine assortments of European goods—patent sweepers and furniture Tue Nationa, GerocraPHic MAGAZINE The national costume is one of the most picturesque in Europe, and their outer -garments are of wool grown and sheared upon their own farms, spun and woven in their own cabins, cut and made by theirownhands. Formerly their cotton goods were imported from England and Germany, but the thrifty Bulgarians have learned the most valuable lessons of economy, and a little patch of cotton is now found beside nearly every cabin, which is planted, picked, ginned, spun, Sofia, the Capital of Bulgaria from Grand Rapids, agricultural im- plements and machinery from our fac- tories, and Armour’s canned goods; but what little commerce we have with the Balkan States is filtered through Austria. In the market places you see the cos- tumes of nearly every oriental race. The Bulgarian is distinguished by the kalpak, a head-dress of lamb’s wool, and the Turk by his fez. The Turkish women wear veils, but the Bulgarian women follow the European customs. woven by the women like wool from their flocks. They are fond of bright colors, and the garments of both men and women are elaborately embroidered. A Bulgarian girl arrayed for her wedding or for a holiday is as pretty and pictur- esque an object as you can find outside of China or Japan, and a Bulgarian dandy isa delight. The sober-minded gentlemen wear long coats of white wool with full skirts and frogs, turbans of lamb skin, and high boots. There is a fine club in Sofia, more im- Tue Great Turk anp His Lost Provinces posing than can be found in any city of 46,000 population in the United States, and it is the center of social life. Dur- ing the reign of Prince Alexander, a military barracks, public printing office, a technical school, a riding academy, and other creditable government buildings were erected. Several mosques have been converted into prisons, markets, warehouses, and arsenals. The largest, only a stone’s throw from the palace, is now being fitted up for a national mu- seum. There are two hotels with com- fortable rooms and excellent tables; electric street cars run in every direc- tion; the streets, public buildings, and houses of the rich are lighted with elec- tricity, and other features of modern civilization are quite as advanced as may be found in any other city of Europe. In the older quarters of the city are seen long rows of ancient wooden houses with latticed windows, and by that sign one may know the residence of a Turk, who thus shields the women of his fam- ily from the public gaze; but there are now comparatively few Moslems in Bul- garia, and they are leaving rapidly. The Berlin conference told the people of Bulgaria that they might choose their own prince, and the National Assembly selected Prince Alexander of Hesse, a nephew of the Czar of Russia, a grand- ‘nephew of Kaiser Wilhelm the Great, and a brother-in-law of Queen Victoria’s daughter Beatrice. He was a great fa- vorite with everybody—brave, unselfish, patriotic, and ambitious to promote the welfare of the people, but too honest and candid to cope with the conspirators by whom he was surrounded. Russia was disappointed because the other powers had deprived her of the fruit of her vic- tory over the Turks, and determined to obtain control of Bulgaria by intrigue. Anxious to preserve its independence, Alexander refused to comply with the Russian demands, encouraged the dem- ocratic spirit of the people, and assumed the leadership of the anti-Russian party. SS) The Russians retaliated by one of the most scandalous conspiracies since the days of the robber barons. The Prince of Bulgaria was kidnapped in his own palace by his own officers, driven over the mountains, and placed upon a Rus- sian yacht in the Danube. European sentiment compelled his restoration and the Czar evaded responsibility, but not one of the Russian officials engaged in the plot was ever even reprimanded. Alexander was enthusiastically wel- comed by the people, but, with charac- teristic frankness telegraphed the Czar that he had received his crown from Russia and was ready to surrender it whenever demanded. The Czar com- pelled Alexander to abdicate, but not until after he had given him a pledge that the Bulgarians would be permitted to manage their own affairs without in- terference—a pledge that has been daily violated. Alexander’s successor and the present Prince of Bulgaria is Ferdinand of Saxe- Coburg and Gotha, a grandson of Louis Philippe of France, and a cousin of nearly every crowned head in Europe. Ferdinand is the opposite of Alexander in character, motives, and ambitions. He is selfish, fond of display, of ex- travagant habits, and the gratification of his own vanity is of greater impor- tance to him than the progress and wel- fare of his people. For the first two or three years he got on without friction, but his queen, Marie Louise of Bourbon, yearned for the social recognition of the court at St Petersburg and was ambi- tious for her children. Through her influence he yielded to the demands of the Czar, and the active ruler of Bul- garia has since been the diplomatic agent of Russia at Sofia, now Mr Bakh- meteff, a diplomatist of great talent and long experience, who is well known in Washington, having married the daugh- ter of the late General Edward F. Beale. Stefan Stambuloff was the greatest man the Balkan States ever produced, 56 and was the Prime Minister of Bulgaria under Prince Alexander and Prince Ferdinand until the latter adopted a pro-Russian policy, when he retired and was succeeded by a man of Russian sympathies. He became the leader of a formidable anti-Russian party, until removed from the whirl of Bulgarian politics by assassination in July, 1895. The assassin was recognized as Michael Stavreff, a pro-Russian politician who was also accused of the murder in 1892 of Mr Vulkovich, a diplomatic agent of Bulgaria at Constantinople, second to Stambuloff in influence among the anti-Russian party. Until October last Stavreff was allowed to go unpunished, and was a familiar figure about the cafés of Sofia. He was pointed out to me and to every one as Stambuloff’s assassin, and appeared to be proud of that notoriety. In October, 1902, he was arrested, tried, convicted, sentenced to death for the two murders by order of Mr Lud- skanoff, Minister of Interior and leader of the Russian sympathizers, who was banished by Stambuloff for treason. Immediately after the sentence of Stav- reff, there appeared upon the streets facsimile copies of letters showing that Ludskanoff had employed him to com- mit the two murders, and similar fac- similes of other letters have appeared at frequent intervals since. It is the popular belief that Ludskanoff, fearing Stavreff’s reckless tongue, attempted to put him out of the way, and that the latter’s friends have disclosed the cor- respondence to involve the minister in the crime. Stavreff has not been executed ; the Prime Minister, Mr Karachoff, still per- mits Ludskanoff to remain in the cabi- net ; the government ignores the situa- tion, and the friends of the minister claim that the general amnesty granted political exiles after Stambuloff’s assas- sination was a full pardon for any crime in which he might have been involved before that date. THe Nationa, GrocrapHic MAGAZINE Stambuloff lacked polish and educa- tion; he was arbitrary and despotic, but his entire career is an example of unsel- fish integrity and patriotism. He lived and died for the independence of Bul- garia, and had the full confidence of Prince Alexander. Had thosetwo men been permitted to carry out their plans, the country would have had peace, prog- ress, and prosperity; but conspiracy tri- umphed, patriotism was repressed, and but for the strong hand of Russia its condition might have been worse than it is. ‘The treasury is empty, the national credit is exhausted, and the hysterical emotions of sympathy that are stirred by the sufferings of their kinsmen across the border keep the people in continu- ous turmoil. MACEDONIA The Bulgarian atrocities have been repeated in Macedonia for over twenty- five years, and have grown worse and worse, until the country has been almost depopulated. - Human life and property are held as worthless by the Turkish off- cials. No woman has been safe from their lust; no man has been allowed to save money or produce more than enough to supply his own wants. The Christian population have no standing in the courts, no remedy for injustice and extortion, and the world would be shocked if the truth were known; yet year after year the jealousy of the pow- ers of Europe permit these conditions to continue. An occasional insurrection or lawless incident in which a foreigner has been the victim, like the kidnapping of Miss Stone, has attracted public attention, and remonstrances are frequently filed at the Sublime Porte by the European ambassadors, in which the Sultan is warned that anarchy and barbarity will not be tolerated longer and admonished to repent and reform. It must amuse His Majesty to read the signature of the German ambassador at the bottom of these notes, and we can imagine his Tue Great Turk ann His Lost Provinces large, sad eyes grow merry at the farces so frequently enacted at the Vildiz Kiosk when the representatives of the powers appear in their radiant uniforms to remonstrate against his inhumanity to his Christian subjects. He realizes and he knows that they realize that the slightest interference by force on the 57 ble than any other nation, because its government sustains and protects the Sultan in his atrocious barbarisms not only in Macedonia but in all parts of the near East. Von Moltke prophesied that a univer- sal war would be fought under the walls of Constantinople, and the Bulgarians House of the Sobranye (Bulgarian National Assembly), Sofia part of any of their sovereigns will pro- voke an even more emphatic remon- strance elsewhere for fear some commer- cial or political advantage may be gained; and when his situation becomes serious he grants another profitable con- cession to some German syndicate as an additional policy of insurance against intervention. Germany is more culpa- are trying to provoke it. What is known as the Macedonian Committee is an organization to which every Bulga- rian belongs. Its headquarters are in one of the most conspicuous buildings upon one of the most prominent streets of Sofia. Its meetings are public. It issues a weekly newspaper in which its purposes are announced and its plans Prince Ferdinand of Bulgaria discussed. It is sustained and encour- aged by the Bulgarian government and assisted by liberal contributions from Russia. The plot to kidnap Miss Stone was hatched in the Macedonian Com- mittee, and her ransom, paid by the American people, was undoubtedly ex- pended for arms and ammunition. ‘The object was, first, to punish the Ameri- can missionaries who had refused to contribute to the Macedonian cause ; second, to attract the attention of the Christian world to the anarchy and bar- barism that exist in Macedonia ; and, third, to involve the United States gov- ernment in hostilities with Turkey. How long the powers of Europe will permit the Sultan to defy them is a question often asked, both in private and public, and never answered. It is probable that trouble will ultimately Tue Nationa, GrocraPHic MAGAZINE arise through collision between the Bul- garian patriots and the Turkish troops in Macedonia. ‘They occur frequently. Searcely a month passes without a battle on the border. If Bulgaria makes a complaint, Turkey replies that the goy- ernment is trying to suppress brigand- age. Some time, however, the Bulga- rian people will not be satisfied with that answer. They will insist that their government demand reparation of Turkey and make a hostile demonstra- tion that will attract the attention of Europe. This would have occurred long ago but for the inability of Bulga- ria to raise funds to equip and pay an army, the indifference of Prince Ferdi- nand, and the lack of leadership. In the meantime the Sultan is buying guus in anticipation of trouble. We often hear that the Sultan is insane, that he is suffering from a neurotic dis- ease caused by insomnia, anxiety, and fear; yet no diplomatist of ancient or modern times has been more skillful or successful in playing upon the rivalries of his enemies. SERVIA The small but restless State of Servia obtained its independence from Turkey early in the nineteenth century, under the leadership of a nameless peasant. Because of his swarthy complexion and raven hair they called him Kara George, which means ‘‘ Black George,’’ and Karageorgeovitch is the name of his descendants. Milosh, a companion of Kara George in the fight for liberty, was a farm servant of a widow named Obren, whose name he adopted when he needed one, and Obrenovitch is the family name of the present king. The feud between the two families began in 1817, when a Turkish pasha hired Milosh to assassinate his friend as he slept, and the history of Servia has since been a continuous duel between their descendants, encouraged by Tur- key and Russia, which have been con- THe Great Turk anp His Lost PRoviINcEs tending for the control of the Balkan Peninsula. 4 The present king, a repulsive degen- erate, and his queen, Draga, are boy- cotted by all the courts of Europe because of their immorality. The Ka- rageorgeovitch family are in exile, Peter, the head of the house, being engaged in scientific pursuits in Switzerland. King Alexander looks as if he had es- caped from an asylum for the depraved, but has a vigorous constitution, and on occasions has shown great nerve and King Alexander of Servia power of command. Unfortunately he has inherited all the vices of his father, the late King Milan, who was the worst tuler Europe has seen for a generation. While getting his education in Paris he acquired habits which unfitted him for the responsibility of governing a primitive and restless people like the Servians. He squandered the public money and lost his private fortune at ecards, and his wife, Natalie Keskho, daughter of a colonel in the Russian 59 army, was compelled to leave him and finally obtained a divorce. She now resides at Biarritz, very much respected and beloved, although she made herself unhappy and excited the hostility of the Servian politicians by her uncon- cealed Russian sympathies. ‘The scan- dals of the Servian court furnished gossip for all Europe, until finally, en- ervated by dissipation and despised by all his subjects, Milan abdicated in favor of his young son, Alexander, and went to Vienna to die. Alexander was a precocious prince, and when only fifteen years old fell under the fascination of Madam Draga Maschin, who had been a lady in wait- ing to his mother and is about ten years older than he. She is an ambitious, brilliant woman, gifted with consider- able beauty and a charming manner. Madam Draga had more influence with the King than his parents, the ministry, and the court, and when he was seven- teen persuaded him to marry her and as- sume the reins of government. From that time until now the Servian court has been the scene of a series of sensa- tions which are likely to continue in- definitely. The palace, in the center of the city, is a pretentious structure, which rises next to the public street without grounds, and was built by Milan, the gambler king, with an eye to entertain- ment and display. Within isa series of magnificent apartments equal to those in the palaces at Berlin and Vienna, de- signed by a French architect, and fur- nished with an extravagance that threw the country almost into bankruptcy. The great drawing-room, in which the king received the officials, the diplo- matic corps, and the public every Sun- day morning, is one of the finest in the world. You reach Servia by railroad through Hungary across a country that looks very much like Kansas and Nebraska. Servia is called a poor man’s paradise, 60 because the soil, climate, and other con- ditions are favorable to people of small means. Highty-seven per cent of the 2,400,000 inhabitants are engaged in farming, and there is no country in which the land is so equally distributed, for there is one farm to every eight in- habitants. Fruit culture is the largest source of profit. The prunes of Servia are the most popular and bring the high- est price in foreign markets. All other kinds of fruit are grown and preserved, and grains, vegetables, and dairy prod- ucts are shipped in every direction. Flocks and herds are large and multiply rapidly, and the people are always pros- perous except when a war or a revolu- tion is on. Belgrade, the capital, lies upon a promontory where the river Save joins the Danube. ‘The modern part of the town is quite attractive; the ancient part, built centuries ago, during the Turkish dominition, is picturesque. The modern streets are wide and lined with fine buildings after the Austrian style of architecture. Some of the school buildings are excellent samples of modern constructien and show an educational enterprise that is creditable to the country. There is a compulsory education law, free schools, and free books; a number of academies, schools of commerce, agriculture and fruit cul- ture, and a university with four hun- dred students. The government sup- ports a museum, an art gallery, and a theater for the encouragement of native dramatists and opera writers. At the extreme point of the promontory, rising abruptly from the river to a height of 400 feet, is a citadel erected by the Ro- mans before the time of Christ. ‘The castle is in an excellent state of preser- vation, is used for a prison, a barracks, and a military school, and is the head- quarters of the army. There are no pau- pers in Servia, and therefore no alms- houses, but there is a free hospital for both military and civilian patients, THe NartionaL GeocraPpHic MaGAZzine which is well kept up. The Bourse is a fine building, also erected by a French -architect, and reminds you of the mod- ern structures of Marseilles and Havre. The fever of speculation is as great in Servia as anywhere, and exciting scenes are happening frequently on the Bourse, particularly when political disturbances occur. The ancient part of the city has re- mained unchanged for centuries. The walls of the citadel were built by the Romans, and stand as they left them, after having sustained the attacks of hundreds of armies and some of the most famous sieges in history. The political crisis in Servia just now is caused by the lack of a baby. In the absence of a natural heir the constitu- tion of the country requires the King to designate his successor, and the neigh- boring powers are endeavoring to assist. in the selection. The daughter of the Servian cattle dealer reached the throne by a series of sacrifices and intrigues. more sensational than often occur out- side of fiction; yet she is not happy, and never will be until she is socially recognized by the other royal houses of Europe, to whom this clever adven- turess is offering the throne of Servia as the price of such recognition. Ne- gotiations have been going on fora year or more with Russia. Queen Draga. promises that the King will proclaim Prince Mirko, of Montenegro, heir ap- parent, provided she and her husband are invited to spend a few days in Rus- sia as the guests of the Czar; but the Czarina, who is a pure woman, has ab- solutely refused to receive her. Prince Mirko is a brother-in-law of the King of Italy, and two of his sisters have married Russian archdukes. He was educated at St Petersburg, is a great favorite of the imperial family, and Queen Draga could not have se- lected a candidate more agreeable to: them or satisfactory to the other powers. Furthermore, another of his sisters mar-- Work or THE U. S. HyprocrapPHic OFFICE tied Prince Peter, the present head of the Karageorgeovitch family, which ap- proves of his selection; and thus, if he were to reach the Servian throne, the feud that has wrecked that country might be permanently healed. The suc- cess of this arrangement, involving the peace of Servia, the supremacy of Rus- sia in its government, and perhaps the 61 political control of the Balkan Penin- sula, is checked by the refusal of a good woman to receive a bad woman as her guest. Count Lamsdorff, the Russian Minister of Foreign Affairs, has recently visited Sofia and Belgrade, and the newspaper dispatches from those coun- tries predict events of importance ta occur soon. iat WORK OF VHE U.S. HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE* By ComMANDER Wi H. H. SouruHertanp, U. S. N., HyDROGRAPHER APPEAR before you this evening to describe the work of the U. S. Hydrographic Office, and in so doing I shall make an earnest effort to give you as definite an idea as possible of the character, mode of operation, and the valuable practical results of this the most unique and at the same time the least known of all the technical offices supported by our government— unique in that it is the only office on this continent which publishes charts, sailing directions, and other necessary aids to navigation relating to foreign countries, and little known in that its work is principally for a particular class—the seafaring class. ORGANIZATION AND HISTORY OF THE OFFICE Before proceeding with this descrip- tion, a short résumé of the phases through which the office has passed from its inception to the present time may prove of interest. Prior to 1830, whenever a naval ves- sel was in need of charts or nautical in- struments it was the custom for the commanding officer to forward to the Board of Navy Commissioners a requisi- tion for such of these articles as he deemed necessary. This requisition, when approved by the board, was sent to the navy agent at the port where the vessel was fitting out, who filled it as far as possible by purchase from foreign governments or from the few private dealersinthis country. ‘These purchases were afterwards supplemented during the vessel’s cruise by such additions as were from time to time deemed advisa- ble by the commanding officer; and at the end of the cruise, when the vessel was put out of commission, her charts and instruments were turned in at a navy yard, where they were stowed away and no further attention was paid to them until they might be needed again. The result, of course, was that very. often needed charts could not be pur- chased and delivered before the date of sailing, or instruments were placed on board without being adjusted or stand- ardized, and it was very seldom that charts so purchased had been corrected up to date. In fact, no official means then existed by which mariners could * An address before the National Geographic Society, January 16, 1903. 62 be informed of necessary corrections to their outfits of charts. To obviate as far as possible the dan- gers to navigation resulting from such a lack of system and care, the Secretary of the Navy in 1830, upon a recommen- dation from the Board of Navy Com- missioners, directed the establishment of a depot of charts and instruments, under the charge of the late Commodore Goldsborough, then a lieutenant. This was the inception of the Hydrographic Office, the province of which for the first five years of its existence was sim- ply to purchase, correct, and keep on hand charts and instruments for our naval vessels only. It was not until 1835 that any effort was made to construct our own charts. In that year a lithographic press was purchased, and in the following year the first charts actually executed by the depot appeared for issue to the service and merchant marine. In 1842, the bureau system of the Navy Department was established by act of Congress, the depot of charts and instruments being attached to the Bu- reau of Ordnance and Hydrography, to constitute the hydrographic branch of that bureau. Lieutenant Maury had in the mean- time been detailed to duty in this depot of charts and instruments, and in 1844, upon the completion of the Naval Observatory building (which was afterward frequently officially desig- nated as the Naval Observatory and Hydrographic Office), the depot of ‘charts and instruments was moved into that building, Lieutenant Maury be- ‘coming the Superintendent of the Naval Observatory and Hydrographic Office. Lieutenant Maury devoted the greater part of his energies to hydrographic subjects, and for the seventeen years during which he had charge of this office did more in the interest of the merchant marine than was accomplished by similar branches of all foreign gov- Tue NationaL GroGRaPHic MAGAZINE ernmentscombined. He began the col- lection of information from the logs of men-of-war and merchant vessels for the purpose of constructing nautical charts to show the prevailing winds and currents, their limits and characteris- tics, and, in general, the physical fea- tures of the ocean, and all facts of in- terest or value to the maritime commu- nity. This was continued during the seventeen years he remained in charge, and resulted in the issue of wind and current charts, track charts, trade-wind charts, whale feeding ground charts, thermal charts, storm and rain charts, and eight large volumes of sailing di- rections, all of which were concerned with the safe navigation of the known waters of the globe. In addition, there were issued nearly fifty charts of dif- ferent sections of the world, which were printed from engraved copper plates. On the breaking out of the civil war Maury cast his fortunes with the South, and his practical labors for the Navy and merchant marine ceased. He was succeeded by one of the most accom- plished officers in the service, the then Commander Gillis, and the Hydro- graphic Office during the four years of the civil war gained an excellent repu- tation in and out of the service through its ability to keep our war vessels sup- plied with the latest charts, nautical publications, and other necessary aids to safe navigation. The work of the office was so strictly navigational in character that shortly after the civil war began it was trans- ferred to the Bureau of Navigation, under which bureau it remained until 1898, when it was transferred to the Bureau of Equipment, under the direc- tion of which it now remains. In 1866, the year after the ending of the civil war, the connection between the Naval Observatory and the depot of charts and instruments was severed by law. An act of Congress passed in that year established ‘‘A Hydrographic Of- Work of THE U. S. HyprocrapHic OFFICE fice for the improvement of the means for navigating safely the vessels of the Navy and mercantile marine, by pro- viding, under authority of the Secretary of the Navy, accurate and cheap nauti- cal charts, sailing directions, navigators, and manuals of instructions for the use of all vessels of the United States, and for the benefit and use of navigators generally.’’ The act further provided that the Secretary of the Navy be au- thorized ‘‘to cause to be prepared,’’ in the Hydrographic Office thus created, such ‘‘maps, charts, and sailing direc- tions, and nautical books relating to and required in navigation, and to publish and furnish them to navigators at the cost of printing and paper, and to pur- chase the plates and copyrights of such existing charts, maps, sailing directions, etc., as he may consider necessary.’ The spirit and intent of this act of Congress have been carried out from that time to this with unceasing energy and with a degree of zeal, ability, and intelligence which would reflect credit upon any branch of our government, and this has been done at the minimum of cost and under difficulties which at times seemed almost insurmountable. From the small depot of 1830, with a working force of two officers and one nautical expert, it has expanded to an establishment with a working force of nearly ninety technical and skilled em- ployees, supplemented by sixteen fully equipped branch offices at the most im- portant points on our Atlantic, Pacific, and Gulf seaboards and on the shores of our Great Lakes. SURVEYS BY OUR MEN-OF-WAR No vessel starting on a voyage is properly equipped unless her naviga- tional outfit includes accurate charts, sailing directions, light lists, and other necessary aids to navigation for all places to be visited. The Hydrographic Office is charged with producing this naviga- tional outfit of necessary charts, sailing 63 directions, etc., for all parts of the world not under the jurisdiction of the United States, and in performing this duty there is no quarter of the habitable globe the waters of some portion of which have not been surveyed by vessels of our own Navy. In general, the charts referred to are constructed from surveys made by the officers and crews of men-of-war. As there can be no question as to the ne- cessity for an accurate knowledge of the waters of the globe, our naval vessels are supplied with an outfit for hydro- graphic surveying. With their large crews, numerous boats, and with officers trained to the actual requirements of all practical navigational aids, it is clear that this service is one for which the Navy is particularly well adapted in times of peace—a service which, in general, can be performed without in- terfering with other naval requirements, and with results which inure to the benefit of all mankind. And it is a pleasure to state that the service is one which is not considered distasteful in the Navy. Frequently, due to the exigencies of diplomatic relations and for other reasons, our vessels are stationed in foreign waters for long intervals of time, during which the officers and crews generally welcome surveying work as a decided break in the monotony of their confinement to the limits of the ship. During the last fiscal year not less than 24 naval vessels engaged in practical surveying operations in many parts of the world, the results of which will be of incalculable benefit to our maritime and commercial interests. At the present time a number of our men- of-war are similarly engaged in very important localities. In addition to the resulting benefit to our maritime interests, the naval sery- ice is also materially benefited. The work tends to bring out the officer’s powers of observation of things nautical and to give him a familiarity with coast 64 work which becomes invaluable in time of war. This was well exemplified during our civil war, when the most successful blockade-runners were commanded by men, generally ex-naval officers, who had been engaged in the Coast Survey in the vicinity of their blockading op- erations. If this was then true of our own coast, how much more so will it be of foreign coasts in the event of any future war! This fact was also evi- denced during the late Spanish-Ameri- canwar. Nearly all of the many officers who distinguished themselves during that period, particularly those who oc- cupied ranking positions, had seen good surveying service either in the Navy or in the Coast Survey. This I “have taken the liberty of demonstrating by the exhibition of a few charts—one the result of the work of Admiral Dewey, one that of Admiral Charles E. Clark, and one that of the late Admiral John W. Philip. Lack of space only prevents exhib- iting equally good work by many other of our prominent officers, but I cannot properly let the opportunity pass without calling attention to some of our many naval officers whose work in hydrographic surveying will never be forgotten: Commodore Wilkes on the Grand Banks and in the Pacific and Antarctic, Commodore Perry in the waters of Japan, Commodore Rodgers and Commanders Berry and Stockton in the North Pacific and in Bering Sea, Lieutenant Lynch in the Dead Sea, Admirals Belknap, Erben, Barker, and Tanner in the Pacific and elsewhere, and Brooke and S. P. Lee in the Atlan- tic. Captain Mahan, our most noted authority on naval subjects, was also an expert hydrographic surveyor. Ad- miral Porter and many of our most dis- tinguished naval officers of the civil war had performed good work in the Coast Survey, and Pillsbury’s work in the Gulf Stream is well known. Tae Nationa, GrocrapHic MAGAZINE CHART CONSTRUCTION _I shall now briefly sketch the course of chart construction. In general, a preliminary sheet of the work done, prepared with accuracy and with a suf- ficient degree of delicate draftmanship to clearly demonstrate any inaccuracies as the work progresses, together with the records of astronomical observations, triangulation, topography, tides, cur- rents, etc., is forwarded from the sur- veying vessel to the Hydrographic Office, where, in the Division of Chart Con- struction, now presided over by one of the most thoroughly equipped hydro- graphic engineers in this or any country, the work is carefully revised in every detail and a smooth sheet prepared, from which comes the working chart, either from an engraved copper plate or by a lithographic process. As soon as the finished chart is printed, all vessels of the Navy serving in the locality which it indicates are supplied therewith. The merchant vessels of all nations can ob- tain it by purchase from the Hydro- graphic Office or from any of its numer- ous agents. As soon as received in the Hydro- graphic Office, the work is made a mat- ter of record and the history of the chart commences, not to end until the chart becomes obsolete or is canceled by an- other. Every correction, alteration, or addition, with the names of all con- nected therewith, becomes a matter of record which is carefully guarded. While sometimes, for good and sufh- cient reasons, the legend on the chart does not show the authority, that infor- mation is contained in its record. GENERAL CHARTS, COAST CHARTS, AND HARBOR CHARTS And now let us see what these charts. are, what they show, and of what use they are to the mariner. Generally speaking, navigational charts are of three classes—general charts, coast charts, and harbor charts—the coast Work or THE U. S. HyprocrapHic OFFIcE charts occasionally being divided into special and general. General charts, as the name implies, cover a large territory, and are princi- pally for the use of navigators in the open sea, as in making long voyages. This class of chart is necessarily upon a small scale, and represents not only the character of the ocean bed as thus far delineated by deep-sea soundings obtained by vessels of the principal maritime nations, but also the shore lines with the most prominent topo- graphical features, the principal sea- ports, the lighthouses which are of use in off-shore navigation, all dangers in the nature of shoals, reefs, and rocks, and the lines of equal magnetic declina- tion or variation; compass stars, show- ing both true and magnetic directions in degrees and quarter points, are placed where it is thought they will be of the greatest use. On this chart the navi- gator plots his geographical positions as often as they are determined, and thus is able to keep as nearly as possible a direct course to his port of destination. This chart is kept in use until the vessel gets within the limits of the coast chart, when it is put away and replaced by the latter. Coast charts, both general and special, delineate the coasts of all countries, and for each coast are consecutive and take in such sections of the coast as will per- mit of the use of a comparatively large scale. The coast line is accurately de- lineated, as are also the principal topo- graphical features which can be used in navigation; all the lighthouses, with their peculiar characteristics; the life- saving stations, Weather Bureau sta- tions, and all the features which in any way can enable an observer by bearings, or otherwise, to determine his position. The soundings are frequent and, in gen- eral, are run out to the 1oo-fathom curve. With the aid of this coast chart, the navigator pilots his ship along shore until within the limits of the chart of 65 the harbor to which he is bound, when that replaces it. The harbor chart is on a larger scale than the others and in greater detail. Every object on shore that can be used in piloting the ship in or out of the har- bor is delineated in its correct position. Where possible, ranges to guide vessels in and out are determined and plotted upon the chart; lighthouses, range lights, buoys, beacons, and all day- marks are plotted; the positions of land- ing places, custom-houses, and public buildings of which the navigator may have occasion to know are plotted, where possible; curves of certain equal depths of water, quarantine stations and quarantine grounds, men-of-war and merchant ships’ anchorages are also clearly indicated; the magnetic declina- tion or variation is noted on one or more compass roses, and in addition the chart contains all necessary data as to the date of publication, the date of the latest cor- rection, the character of the soundings, heights, signs, and abbreviations, and all necessary tidal information. On these charts, as on coast charts, the shore lines are made especially conspicu- ous, and the topographical features rep- resented are such as will be of actual value as aids to navigation. USE OF SURVEYS BY OTHER NATIONS I have only referred to original sur- veys by our own vessels; but it must not be understood that the chart con- struction work of the Hydrographic Office ends with these. We all realize that in time of war it would be a diffi- cult matter (perhaps an impossible one) to get correct navigational charts of foreign places against which our Navy might have to operate, and during peace periods it takes time to obtain the latest editions of foreign charts. All the great maritime nations recognize the fact that it is a matter of national moment for them to be possessed of all available charts of every part of the world, and 66 for this reason they make it a practice to use the published surveys of other Powers as data for the construction of charts of their own. Weare compelled to do likewise, and little by little are utilizing the surveys of those foreign nations, the work of which is known to be reliable. This is a matter of dis- crimination, but experience has shown the necessity for discrimination. Many charts of the Philippines, of Cuba, and of islands of the West Indies have been found to be inaccurate. This use of foreign work is not only in the direction of a proper preparation for possible times of national peril, but in the end is a matter of economy. Were this practice not carried on, it would be necessary to purchase our charts from foreign nations—a source of supply which would be closed to us in time of war—and, when purchased, the corrections made necessary by newly discovered dangers and by changes in buoyage, ranges, lighthouses, etc., would have to be plotted by hand, which is more expensive than making the nec- essary changes on the plate from which the chart is produced. AREA COVERED BY OUR CHARTS At the present time the Hydrographic Office has in its possession nearly 1,200 engraved chart plates and about 50 photographic chart plates. These 1,250 plates have all been constructed from the results of original naval surveys; from geographical and cartographical data reported by the commanding officers of vessels in the naval service ; from information collected by the branch hydrographic offices from incoming mariners of all nationalities, and also from the geographical information that comes into the custody of the Navy Department through the prosecution of surveys by foreign governments. These charts represent about one- third of what are actually necessary for a complete set of navigational charts of Tue Nationa, GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE the world for the use of the naval and shipping interests of the United States. Besides the projecting, drawing, en- graving, photographing, electrotyping, and printing, which constitute the cen- tral work of chart construction and chart correction, the functions of the Hydro- graphic Office embrace all that is kin- dred and contributory to the construc- tion of charts, and hence include the mathematical computations for the pro- jection, the adjustment of triangula- tions, the investigations of the tides, the discussion of observations of the mag- netic elements of the earth in their bear- ing upon charts and navigation, the com- putation of navigational tables, and the — designing of instruments and machines for securing maximum of economy. Of the 1,250 or more charts that are now available for permanent issue, over 300 have been derived from original sur- veys by the U.S. Navy. These, added to the 450 or more charts that have been constructed from surveys by the Coast and Geodetic Survey, make a grand total of 750 or more navigational charts constructed from original United States surveys, a result which places our people ahead of most of the older countries and in the front rank of the most active na- tions in marine hydrographic work. It must not be understood, however, that if we were to become possessed of engraved plates representing the charts now issued by all other nations we would be able to produce navigational charts covering the world’s entire water area. Very much remains to be done before the hydrographic features of the world can be so charted as to warrant the statement that dangers to navigation due to lack of knowledge of geographic positions and correct soundings have been reduced to a minimum. There are numerous places in the West Indies which we know to be inaccu- rately charted, and this same statement applies to locations in nearly all parts of the world. In the North Pacific Ocean Work oF THE U. S. HyprocGrapPHic OFFICE alone there are thousands of reported dangers. Many of these are probably either inaccurately located or do not exist, but all the same they are a hin- drance to navigation through the anx- iety and loss of time which the fear of their possible existence causes to ship- masters. Fortunately, little by little the national vessels of the Great Powers are either accurately locating or disproving the existence of many of these. I am glad to say that our own naval vessels have done their share in this good work. DEEP-SEA SOUNDINGS Our knowledge of the depths of the sea is gradually increasing through the operations of deep-sea sounding expedi- tions undertaken by many nations. In this field of operations we hold a com- manding position. From a scientific point of view, a knowledge of the phys- ical characteristics of the ocean bed is most desirable, and no less so froma practical standpoint. No telegraph company would think of laying a sub- marine cable today without first select- ing a desirable route as determined by deep-sea soundings. The soundings of the U. S. S. Vero in the Pacific two years ago determined the route since selected for the transpacific cable. Deep-sea soundings are also of espe- cial value to the mariner, inasmuch as from their results the existence of sub- marine dangers is frequently indicated. In the Atlantic the greatest accurately known depth in the fifties was obtained by the then Lieut. S. P. Lee, in the U.S. brig Dolphin, 3,825 fathoms (4% miles). Only a year ago the now great- est known depth in the Atlantic, 4,662 fathoms (5% miles), was found by the present U.S. S. Dolphin, the first ves- sel of the new Navy. The greatest known depth in the world is in the Pacific, and is 5,269 fathoms (31,614 feet), 66 feet short of 6 statute miles. This depth was obtained by the U.S. S. Vero in 1900, and is greater than any 67 elevation on our continent, or, as far as we know, in the world. SAILING DIRECTIONS The Sailing Directions, to which I have previously referred, can properly be designated as nautical guide books— in other words, nautical Baedeckers. The coasts of the world are divided up into numerous sections, for each one of which a book of sailing directions is prepared. ‘Thus we have Sailing Di- rections of the East Coast of South America, etc. These seamen’s guide books, when complete and used in con- nection with the corresponding naviga- tional charts, are supposed to give the mariner all the information that he may require for safely navigating the part of the world considered, and for entering and leaving each harbor or anchorage therein. When corrected to date, they give him in as much detail as possible, a knowledge of the prevailing winds and weather for each season; of the tides, currents, buoys, lights, and other day and night marks, and of proper anchor- ages. In addition, where possible,ranges to be used in entering and leaving port, both by day and night, are described ; prominent landmarks and other topo- graphical features are noted in detail, and everything in the way of an aid to navigation is entered therein. They even go so far as to give him infor- mation in regard to port dues, local regulations of foreign governments, diplomatic customs of the local and state authorities, the facilities for ob- taining provisions, water, and other sup- plies, and also as to obtaining necessary repairs. There is no guide book known which contains so much of practical impor- tance. Inall nations these books arewrit- ten by naval officers or by others who have followed the sea for a profession— men who have had sufficiently matured practical experience to enable them to exercise proper judgment in weighing 68 | the many varied sources of information, to reconcile conflicting statements, to set forth only the facts upon which the mar- iner can rely with confidence, and to exercise a care in their preparation com- mensurate with the interests of life and property at stake. AIDS TO NAVIGATION The aids to navigation required by mariners are numerous, but I shall only speak of those which are prepared and issued by the Hydrographic Office. With due regard to sequence, the No- tices to Mariners issued weekly by the Hydrographic Office, which particularly affect the charts and sailing directions, should be considered first. ‘These no- tices consist of a collection of statements pertaining to safe navigation, made up in pamphlet form, which are issued weekly by the Hydrographic Office. The statements are notices themselves pertaining to every matter which is of importance to the seaman and navi- gator. When a new rock, shoal, or other danger is discovered and reported to the Hydrographic Office, the infor- mation is immediately published, the source and its nature being clearly set forth. The same is true of the instal- lation of new lights, changes in lights, alterations or changes in buoyage and other day marks in any part of the world, wrecks, and all subjects a knowl- edge of which would tend to lessen the dangers of navigation. These notices are issued in a convenient form for cut- ting out. ‘They are distributed from the Hydrographic Office and from its numerous branch offices to all vessels of the Navy and to not less than 3,000 merchant vessels, officers of which at the present time are collecting informa- tion for the Hydrographic Office. When received, the immediate duty of the navigator or master is to enter the cor- rections by hand on the charts affected (these charts being designated in the notices), and, in addition, to cut out Tue Nationa, GrocGRAPHIC MaGaZINne each notice and place it in its proper place in the Sailing Directions. You will be surprised to learn that notices affecting navigation issued by the Hy- drographic Office now amount to about fifty a week, or over 2,500a year. This does not seem so strange, however, when we take into consideration the amount of cooperation which the Hydrographic Office receives in this most important aid to mariners. Cordial cooperation is afforded by the United States Engi- neers, the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, the U. S. Lighthouse Service, the U. S. Weather Bureau, the U.S. Life-saving Service, Fish Commission, United States Consuls, hydrographic offices of foreign governments, foreign astronomical and meteorological observ- atories, our own naval vessels, and something like 3,000 ships of various nations, in which are included men-of- war of some of those nations as well. Reports to this office come in as many as fourteen different languages. In this day of high speed on the ocean you can readily understand the anxiety which the great shipping firms have in regard to the safety of their vessels, a feeling which actuates them as well as their governments to hesitate at no ex- pense to obtain such information as is contained in these notices. It is not uncommon for the Hydrographic Office to get cablegrams from abroad giving information of serious dangers to navi- gation. A glance through one of these pam- phlets would give an inkling of the dangers to which those who go to sea are subject. A fair part of these notices come through the branch hydrographic offices, which are located in sixteen of our principal ports. BRANCH HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICES These branch offices, which are in charge of naval officers, with nautical experts as assistants, are veritable bu- reaus of nautical information. They Work orf THE U. S. HyprocraPHic OFFICE receive and distribute information, vis- iting all incoming vessels for this pur- pose, and hold themselves ready to ex- amine charts from any vessel, verifying the same or pointing out necessary cor- rections, examining and correcting in- struments, explaining nautical subjects, and in any way possible giving aid to mariners. In many cases they have even adjusted compasses. At the pres- ent time the officers at three of them are giving night lectures on navigation to shipmasters. Many of these have been called as witnesses in admiralty cases, and in general their influence in im- proving the means of safe navigation has been most marked. A time-ball ‘service is carried on at twelve of these offices, which is taken advantage of by the masters of vessels possessing chro- nometers, thus enabling them upon go- ing to sea to feel sure of the error and rate of this most important navigational instrument. These offices place within almost im- mediate reach of ship captains all the information contained in the main office and enable the main office to obtain, with accuracy and quickness, all im- portant information brought by incom- ing vessels. They have been of great benefit to shipping firms, marine in- surance companies, admiralty lawyers, and practically to all interests connected with maritime affairs. In 1880 a commander in the British Navy examined the chart outfit of three steamers and found as follows : On the first, 73 charts out of 93 needed renewal. On the second, 39 charts out of 49 needed renewal. On the third, 95 charts out of 104 needed renewal. At the present time no vessel need leave a port in which there is a United States branch hydrographic office with incorrect charts unless the captain wishes to do so. Other essential aids to navigation are 69 published by the Hydrographic Office, but space will not permit of a detailed description. Amongst the most im- portant can be mentioned the American Practical Navigator, a book on naviga- tion which no navigator should be with- out. This is revised frequently and the callforitiscontinuous. Frequent issues of the Lists of Lights of the World are necessary, the changes in lights all over the world being frequent and often very radical. Azimuth tables for the use of the navigator in determining his com- pass error have been issued by this office for the last twenty-odd years. ‘The In- ternational Code of Signals, which by law all mariners are compelled to have, is an issue of this office. Publications on great-circle sailing ; means of search- ing for isolated submarine peaks; on the variation of the compass ; sunrise and sunset tables; illustrated cloud forms; matters pertaining to marine meteorologyand to terrestrial magnetism are amongst the practically useful issues of this office, and all are prepared by its attachés. I can safely state that the great majority of deep-sea vessels now afloat possess some practical aid to navi- gation published by the U. S. Hydro- graphic Office. PILOT CHARTS The Pilot. Charts of the North At- lantic and North Pacific, the permanent issue of which was inaugurated by the Hydrographic Office in 1883, are not navigational charts, strictly speaking, but are simply graphic illustrations of the conditions of winds,currents, wrecks, derelicts, icebergs, fogs, ete., which may reasonably be expected during the month for which the chart is issued. The primary credit for this practical aid to navigation is due to Lieutenant Maury. When, in the early forties, he started his system of collecting infor- mation in regard to winds, currents, and other matters pertaining to the ocean, it was with a view of eventually being 7O able to predict to the mariner, with a reasonable degree of probability, all necessary meteorological data for any period of the year. For convenience, we will only con- sider the Pilot Chart of the North At- lantic, the principal references to which will also apply to the chart for the North Pacific. A short résumé of the manner in which information is collected for this chart, followed by a general description of the subject-matter, will give the best idea of its use and value. ‘The data col- lected by Maury from 1844 to 1861 were, generally speaking, taken from the log books of vessels for individual 5° squares on the world’s water surface, and in the majority of cases gave intormation for each hour of the day in whatever part of the world any observing vessel hap- pened to be. About twenty years ago it was deemed advisable to alter this system of collecting information, and the ob- servers of the office were furnished with a blank observation book, in which the data required were to be taken by all observers only once a day and at the same instant of time—Greenwich mean noon. ‘The observations thus recorded give the direction and force of the winds the reading of the barometer and ther- mometers, the temperature of the water, the character and percentage of cloud, visible, and the character of the sea. Immediately upon the arrival in port of a vessel taking such observations, these weather reports are sent either by mail or through the United States consul to the Hydrographic Office, where the in- formation mentioned above is plotted on a synoptic chart. This chart is di- vided into squares of 5 degrees of lati- tude and 5 degrees of longitude, and each element of information previously mentioned, except clouds and the state of the sea, is indicated in its respective square by a particular symbol. Through inability to get the information quickly Tue NartrionaL -GrocraPpHic MaGAZINE (as very frequently the record of a sail- ing vessel does not get to the Hydro- graphic Office until a long time after the observations were taken), it requires many months before all the records for any one year for each individual square can be collected and plotted. Dixon Entran® Popped in the Office of the US. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Treasury Departirrent Map Showing Different Alaskan Boundary Lines Claimed by United States and Canada MOUNTAINS ON UNIMAK ISLAND, ALASKA* By FERDINAND WEsTDAHL ASSISTANT, U. S. Coast AND GEODETIC SURVEY HISHALDIN volcano is the high- est mountain on the island,} and it vies with Mt St Helens, in Wash- ington, in being in outline the most regular cone I know of on the Pacific coast of the United States. It is an active volcano, and the discharges from its crater come in puffs like steam at first and rising probably 100 feet or more above its summit, then turn darker in color and stream off horizontally with the direction of the wind. In calm weather the continuous discharges are seen to rise in a column more than 1,000 feet above it and gradually spread out hard over the summit the smoke is beaten down and follows the slope on the lee side of the peak. The snowy mantle of the mountain becomes dark after several days of calm weather, then clouds envelop it, snow falls and the mountain again emerges, clad in pure white. { The snow line reached on September 21, 1901, down to an esti- mated height of 2,800 feet above the sea. At about 3,000 feet below the sum- mit the regular cone begins to spread out, and at4,000 feet there is a projecting spur to the westward. Glacier-carved canyons begin at about 4,000 feet or inadark cloud. Whenthe wind blows more below the summit, and from them * This article consists of extracts from a report made in February, 1902, by Assistant Westdahl, commanding the Coast Survey Steamer McArthur, while engaged in a survey of that region. The extracts refer to certain interesting geographical features of Unimak Island, Alaska, and are published here, together with the accompanying photographs, by permission of the Superin- tendent of the Coast Survey. Unimak is one of the Aleutian Islands, about which very little is known, and therefore the description of the mountains as seen by the writer and recorded by the camera is especially interesting. Excerpts are also given from Mr Westdahl’s description of the south shore of the island. { ‘‘ The island is uninhabited, and has beenin that condition for the greater part of the present century, though it is richer than many other islands of the Aleutian chain in natural means of sustaining life. ““Foxes are quite plentiful here and sea otters frequent the reefs and points, but ever since— nearly 100 years ago—almost all the inhabitants of four or five populous villages were massacred by the Russian promyshleneks, a superstitious dread seems to prevent the Aleutian from making a permanent home at Oonimak (Unimak).’’ Ivan Petroff, p.77, in ‘‘Narratives of Military Ex- plorations in Alaska,’’ compiled under the direction of ‘‘ The Committee on Military Affairs ’’ of the Senate. Government Printing Office, Washington, 1goo. { Miners bound for Cape Nome and whalers or sealers on their way to Bering Sea as they sail through Unimak Pass can see Shishaldin in the distance. When the air is clear the moun- tain presents a majestic spectacle, which is described by John Burroughs in the following words : “* Before nightfall we passed two more notable volcanic peaks, Isanotski and Shishaldin, both of which penetrate the clouds at an altitude of nearly 9,000 feet. These are on Unimak Island at the end of the peninsula. Our first glimpse was of a black cone ending in a point far above a heavy mass of cloud. It seemed buoyed up there by the clouds. There was nothing visible beneath it to indicate the presenceof amountain. Then the clouds blotted it out ; but presently the veil was brushed aside again, and before long we saw both mountains from base to summit and noted the vast concave lines of Shishaldin that swept down to the sea, and that mark the typical volcanic form. “The long, graceful curves, so attractive to the eye, repeat on this far-off island the profile of Fuji-Yama, the sacred peak of Japan. Those of our party who had seen Shishaldin in previous years described it as snow white from base to summit. But when we saw it the upper part, for several thousand feet, was dark—doubtless the result of heat, for itis smoking this year ’’ (1899). From ‘‘Alaska,’’ vol. 1, p. 90. ‘‘Alaska,’’ the report of the Harriman Alaska Expedition. Edited by Dr C. Hart Merriam. New York: Doubleday, Page & Co., Igor. 165" 164° 30’ THe NatrionaL GEoGRAPHIC MAGAZINE 2 = 163°30 T OtterPt 5027 Ramil 7 PROMONTORY, 3 f HILGSISQ Oo Outline Map issue at a much lower level streams which spread out into broad and shallow water-courses (apparently dry at this season of the year) over the very gentle slopes to the sea. These lower slopes seem to be covered with ashes and scorize, and when the wind blows clouds of dust are driven along withthem. The ridge connecting Shishaldin with its neighbor to the eastward is probably not more than 2,000 feet above the sea. ISANOTSKI PEAKS Eight and a half nautical miles east- northeast from the summit of Shishal- 163°30 163° of Unimak Island din are the double peaks of Isanotski Mountain. When these peaks are closely studied in their varying aspects, from broad to slender, from Ikatan Bayand around to the westward of” them in Unimak Bay, they are seen to be the remains of the rim of a crater disposed something like this. The points determined in the triangu- lation are the very highest pinnacles on the two remnants of the rim. If this theory is right, the mountain may at some time have rivaled Shishaldin in 3 Mountains on Unimak Istanp, ALASKA Beginning of Pinnacles Ridge Shishaldin from Anchorage Just West of Pinnacles THe NationaL GEeocRAPHIc MaGaZzINE OF tysyouvsyT jo syead 9Tqnop ot} Ayqounstp AOA SMOYS danjord at ‘Aep Iv9]9 B UO aas 9q SOUT}OUIOS UL UOVIISHIII oY} UI UMOYS UIPTeYSTYS wory ayxous Jo siomealys Buoy 3 Ic ot T I q ! ! Ws Sa Ww 1S UIPTEYSIYS uy Sit J SMI V joyued Iwan Wo1y Mor 9AOD TOYSUY JS2M\ JO JUTOg 4SAA\ \/ poorg sJULOg Joqieyy v10Og pues] para yoreze’y aded doy, punoy Pysjoursy VI 130 UIpyeYysiysS IUMLOIB0g Mountains oN Unimak Istanp, ALASKA height. Its sides are extremely rugged and apparently somewhat concave near the summit, as if the mountain had been hollow and the accumulation of ice and snow about it had crushed its sides in- ward. In broaching this theory to Mr Applegate, he informed me that an old native, recently dead, claimed to have seen this mountain crumble. I can scarcely believe that such a catastrophe, if it has taken place at all, happened at so recent a date without attracting the attention of some of the Russian traders living among the natives. ‘The fact that the mountain is still so rugged, that the chasms created by the supposed caving in are not yet filled by the annual ac- cumulations of snow, as on both of its neighbors, would seem to favor a com- paratively recent date.* Five miles northeastward from Iso- notski is probably also an extinct vol- cano. It isapparently the highest of a group of peaks on the northeast end of Unimak Island, and has a rounded broad summit of snow and ice, through which only here and there is seen a projecting dark mass of rock even in midsummer. POGROMNI VOLCANO Pogromni volcano is the highest peak in the mass of mountains forming the western end of Unimak Island. It does not seem to rise from the main ridge, however, but from the eastern slope of it. A short distance to the eastward of it is seen a much lower peak, almost its * Less than 200 miles from Shishaldin are two volcanoes, known as Old and New Bogoslof. The first was born a little more than a century ago, rising from the depths of the ocean ; the second rose from the deep probably not more than 30 yearsago. Old Bogoslof was reported in 1832 to have had a height of 1,500 feet, but is now only half that height. Both volcanoes are constantly disintegrating and wearing away. For the remarkable history of the two Bogoslofs, see the article on ‘‘ Bogoslof, Our Newest Volcano,’’ by Dr C. Hart Merriam in ““Alaska,’’ the report of the Harriman Alaska Expedition, vol. 11, pp. 291-336 ; New York, Doubleday, Page & Co., 1gor. 95 exact counterpart in appearance, but much smaller in dimensions. Pogromni is a regular cone in outline, but its sides seem more angular and rugged than Shishaldin and its rocky ribs and pro- jections more numerous and bare. We saw no smoke issuing from it at any time this season, but we have not seen much of the mountain, except while making this reconnaissance. I have a faint recollection of having seen smoke issuing from it in August, 1866. Faris * and Westdahl* are two snow- covered peaks, apparently rising from the main ridge of this part of the island to the southward of Pogromni. THE SOUTH SHORE OF UNIMAK The region to the northward of Cape Lazaref consists of isolated mountainous elevations, knit together by low level land, composed largely of sand. The northern slopes, however, were not seen from the ship. That this low land ex- tends back of the mountains forming Cape Lazaref is inferred from what was seen by the officer who occupied sev- eral triangulation stations on the coast. These low lands, like those of the Ika- tan Peninsula, are probably covered with lakes, as many small streams issue through their sandy margins into the sea. Cape Lazaref, or the rocky mass so named on the chart, consists of three high points, which, for convenience, might be designated as east, middle, and west Cape Lazaref. The east cape is highest and broadest toward the sea, the middle next in height, but not pro- jecting so prominently, and the west cape the lowest and sharpest. The east cape has a few rocks close under its extreme point, one of which is about 30 feet high and shows prominently from the anchorage in Otter Cove. There * Named by the Superintendent of the Coast and Geodetic Survey, Mr O. H. Tittmann, after the officers who first determined their geo- graphical position. 96 are also some scattered low rocks close under the cape all along its seaward face. The middle cape is clear of rocks, ex- cept a high pinnacle, so close under its southeast face as to seem a part of the rocky cliff, except from certain direc- tions. The west cape, or Lazaref proper, has a reef projecting one and one-tenth miles southeastward from its extreme point, consisting of two high rocks, one about 150 feet above the sea and one about 70 feet midway between them, all showing as pinnacles from the southeastward, but broad from all other directions, and a multitude of low rocks quite close together. This reef forms a fairly good protection in westerly winds for an anchorage to the eastward be- tween the outer high rock and a small bunch of rocks lying one and three- tenths miles from the eastern face of the cape. The sandy shore is continued to the westward of Cape Lazaref, with some- what higher dunes upon it immediately back from the beach. Six-tenths of a mile from this beach and 1% miles west- ward from the cape lies a small rocky island about 130 feet above the sea and having a smooth, grassy top. At 3% miles westward from Cape Lazaref the low shore, forming the sea frontage of the broad valley or flat back of the rocky masses which constitute the cape, ceases, and a high spur from Isanotski Mountain reaches almost to the sea, there being but a narrow fringe of sand beach in front of this 214-miles-wide sea face of the mountainous projection. This sand beach is of comparatively re- cent formation. ‘The cliffs of the face of this spur show evidences of wave action, and are in shape and color sim1- lar to the cliffs of Cape Lazaref. From aloft on the ship it could be seen that this is true also for many miles of the east side of this spur bordering on the low land. At a point eight miles westward from Cape Lazaref the sandy beach is broken Tue NarronaL GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE by the toe of a lava flow, probably from Shishaldin volcano, about one mile wide on its sea face, about 20 to 30 feet in height, and consisting of black, very jagged, and forbidding-looking rocks. Immediately back from the sea face the lava is covered with sand and thin veg- etation. The sand beach is again broken through at 634 miles from this lava flow by a low ridge, about 2% miles long and in a southwest and north- east direction, and rising into three con- ical hills, of which the northeasternmost is the highest, the middle the lowest, and the southwesternmost the only one whose base is washed by the sea and formed into several columnar rocks, of which only the outermost is entirely surrounded by water at low tide. RUKAVITSIE CAPE From Rukavitsie Cape there is an unbroken sweep of low sand beach, backed by low sandy bluffs and dunes for 13 miles, first southwestward, then curving gradually until its final direc- tion, for two miles before it ends, is south. This forms the northwestern shore of Unimak Bay. Back from this beach from 1% to 3 miles, in the most receding part of this bight, are hills ris- ing from several hundred to 1,400 feet, and farther back seemingly still higher ones, all comparatively solitary, from a plain 100 to 200 feet above the sea and sloping gradually upward to the ridge projecting westward from Shishaldin Mountain. To the westward of these hills, between them and the mountain mass forming the southwestern end of Unimak Island, is a broad valley, drained by a river which empties into Unimak Bay at a point of the sand beach distant 14 miles from its south- western end. Looking into this valley, at an estimated distance of three or four miles from the beach is seen a lava flow, apparently from the southwest toward the northeast, reaching more than half od Mountains oF Unimak IsLtanp, ALASKA Shishaldin Isanotski Round Top View from West Side of Otter Cove Tue NationaL GEocRAPHic MaGAZzINE 98 Ssvq YVUINY Wo1y syvag [YepisoM pur ‘stiey ‘tamo01s0g JO MTA Aeod [Wepyse SIIB tm0180g Mountains oF UnimMak JsLanp, ALASKA way across the valley, with the water making a great bend around the foot of it. Examined through a telescope, it seems to consist of a jungle of sharp- cornered rocks, like gigantic pieces of broken glass, of a dull gray color, slop- ing very gradually toward the north- east. The sand beach ends against the table- land about 350 feet high, projecting in an east-southwest direction from the mountain mass behind it, and forming at its extremity a small semicircular cove not quite half a mile across and open toward the north. We noticed two small houses in the cove, apparently close under the bluff, and also a small sloop, hauled out of the water beyond the reach of the surf, near them. ‘There 9 are some rocks close under the extremity of the point. Applegate has anchorages marked on either side of this point, I believe, and I have been informed that vessels have anchored in both places. The cove to the northward of the point is much more protected, and I have learned from a shipmaster well known to me that he has anchored there and had protection from southerly winds, but not from the swell which rolls around the point. The bottom is sandy and shoaling toward the beach very grad- ually. At the southern end of the broader bight, to the southward of the point, there is a high table-land, 540 feet above the sea, and with an ocean face of one mile in length in an approximate northwest and southeast direction. OLEAN UNG OM Gai ACASKAN LERRITORY- By Harrincron EMERSON HE West, the old West of bound- less natural resources and path- less solitude, to yield homes for millions yet unborn, is not exhausted. Governments and peoples do not realize it, but it lies there to reward the pioneer with greater and quicker returns than have been given by any part of western Europe or of temperate North America. The new and unsubdued West today is Alaska, almost to a mile one-half larger than the thirteen original American col- onies, very nearly twice the size of Cali- fornia, Oregon,and Washington, as large as Great Britain, Denmark, Sweden, Norway, and the German Empire, and with a better climate and greater natural resources than an equal area of northern Europe supporting 10,000,000 inhab- itants. The Yukon, the fourth largest river in the world, navigable for more than 2,000 miles above its mouth and run- ning in a great semicircle from south- eastern to northwestern Alaska, forms anatural highway. Allthis was known long ago, but it was not known that the interior contained thousands of square miles of farming lands and almost limit- less areas of the richest mineral lands in the world. Itisin this unsubdued coun- try that thousands of miles of railroad must be built, that great areas will open for settlement, absorbing and keeping busy 2,000,000 workers as fast as they choose to go. Had it not been for the natural sum- mer highway of the Yukon, there never could have been such a camp as Dawson. The head passes of the Yukon and the river itself were at that time the only possible direct road to the Klondike. * This article was published in The Engineering Magazine for February, 1903, and is re- printed here in somewhat curtailed form by courtesy of the editors of that magazine. 100 Tue Narronat GeocraPpHic MAGAZINE Courtesy of The Engineering Magazine Winter Freighting Overland, Dawson, Yukon Territory Courtesy of The Engineering Magazine Landing Through the Surf at Nome OPENING OF THE ALASKAN ‘TERRITORY Under such conditions the pack horse adds little to the solution of the problem. He cannot both work and forage. Men ““packers’’ were at one time paid as high as 60 cents a pound for packing over the Chilcoot Pass, but the rate had been 10 cents. Over the White Pass, where horses could be used, the rates were never lower than 10 cents, and often 20 cents. Horse trains were main- tained only by a constant fresh supply of horses from the south, few animals surviving more than two or three trips. Of 3,800 horses taken north in 1897, all but 30 died on the trail. To cheapen transportation a wagon road was hastily built in 1898 and a toll levied of 2 cents a pound. In 1899 this was succeeded by a railroad, and freight rates have fallen from the original maximum of 60 cents a pound for 40 miles, from water to water, to $3.75 to $5.50 per hundred pounds for the 2,500 miles from San Francisco or Puget Sound to Dawson. It is 112 miles by rail from tide water over the 2,800-foot pass to White Horse, below the dangerous.rapids of the upper river, and to Dawson by the river it is 451 miles further. The fare from Skag- way is $70, and the fastest time made, 32 hours. In the year 1901 the White Pass Rail- road carried 33,471 tons of freight and 16,472 passengers, receiving from pas- senger traffic $252,932.71, and from freight, express, mail, and telegrams, $1,505,132.64, an average for freight of $43 a ton for 112 miles. Operating ex- penses, naturally heavy, were 42.42 per cent of the receipts. The first cost of this road, including many expensive franchises and the buying up of possible rivals, was $4,250,000, and in the first season its gross receipts were officially reported to exceed $4,000,000, with operating expenses of about $1,000,000. The actual facts as to this highway into Alaska and the Yukon Valley are given to show the great difficulties and ex- pense of transportation in opening up a LOl new country, where in spite of a rapid fall in rates after the first season, a successful transportation enterprise will usually pay for itself with one year’s earnings. It causes regret to Americans that this brilliant undertaking, conceived and executed by American engineers, could find no American backers—that Lon- don, unhampered by the timidity which afflicts New York in presence of a new region, boldly and promptly investi- gated, financed, and carried it through. The headquarters of the road have been moved from the United States to Van- couver, and the great bulk of the freight is no longer from the United States, but almost wholly from Canada. Besides having enjoyed thus far the monopoly of the shortest entrance to the Yukon Valley, the White Pass will re- main the only approach to the rich Atlin country, a lake region just beyond the coast range, whichis slowly but surely developing, producing this last season nearly $1,000,000 in gold. Atlin and the Upper Yukon country will always be exclusively tributary to this road. As there is no other pass through which aroad can be built, for an indefinite period the revenues of the White Pass route may be counted on to increase, but of the rich Klondike region with Daw- son as its center it is likely very soon to be dispossessed. From the Stewart River 72 miles above Dawson to Nulato below the Koyukuk River, a distance of just a thousand miles, there are nearer and better seaports thanSkagway. The best of these is the bay of Valdes, ro miles long and 3 wide, as protected and beautiful as a Swiss lake, and nearest of all salt-water harbors to Dawson. In 1900 and r901 Major Abercrombie built a government trans-Alaskan mili- tary trail from Valdes into the Copper River Vailey. Last winter over this road the freight rate to Copper Center, 103 miles, was 48 cents by dog team ; dur- ing the summer by pack horse it rose to 102 $1.50 per pound, as mud is much more difficult traveling than snow and ice. In October, rgoo, the mail schedule from Valdes to the American Yukon was re- duced totwenty days,and in April, 1gor, the trip was made by the mail carriers in thirteen days. Beginning the first of January, 1903, the mail contractors put on a weekly stage, four trips each way monthly between Valdes and Dawson. This winter, for the first time, it will be possible for American mails and Ameri- Tue NarionaL GrocrAaPHic MAGAZINE start bonanza wheat farms, but because the proximity of the great mining camps will give them a very high return for all they can raise. Fresh milk and butter, eggs, and poultry, fresh beef and mutton, hay and oats for animals, fresh vegetables for men, command fancy prices. John F. Rice, quarter- master’s clerk, in his official report to Major Abercrombie, states that the city of Eagle is second only to Dawson in importance ; that the route from Eagle can passengers to go to the American Yukon as quickly and as cheaply as over the Canadian route. Five large ocean steamers, besides many sailing vessels, run each month between Puget Sound and Valdes, which is also connected by telegraph line with Eagle, Dawson, and the out- side world. The increase of travel by this route is due to the discovery that the Copper River valley promises to be a great agricultural region, capable of affording homes to thousands of settlers, who will go there not because they can Courtesy of The Engineering Magazine Hauling the United States Mail with Reindeer, Nome, Alaska to Valdes presents no such obstacles as routes through the Rocky Mountains or Cascades; that there isan abundance of grass from May until October; that the natural food resources of central Alaska are caribou, moose, brown and black bear, mountain goat, geese, duck, grouse, salmon, pickerel, perch, bass, whitefish, trout, pike, and grayling. It is, however, not the agricultural resources that will immediately attract the largest influx of population and capital. About 140 miles from Valdes, in the Chitina Valley, are very great OPENING Copyrighf, 1898, E. A. Hegg OF THE ALASKAN TERRITORY 103 Courtesy of The Engineering Magazine Winter Freighting on the Ice, Lake Linderman copper deposits, which during the last season have been visited by many ex- perts. Some of the ores run 85 per cent copper, and there are many thou- sand tons in sight assaying 16 per cent. A great mountain slide has occurred in this region, revealing, it is claimed, as much as 40,000,000 tons of high-grade copper ores. Valdes Bay and the lower pass north of it are the American gate- ways to the Yukon Valley, and already a railroad has been surveyed and par- tially graded to the interior, for the copper, which, though it can be quarried like the iron ores of Lake Superior, without a railroad will remain worth- less. The railroad itself is assured an unlimited tonnage. It is the short- est line to Dawson and the Yukon Valley, and, what is of more importance, it can carry supplies delivered at Valdes from sailing vessels or deep-draft ocean steamers in all the months of the year, with only one break of bulk at Valdes, and also reach the deep navigable Yukon and the Koyukuk a month earlier than by the Yukon mouth, which is closed by Bering Sea ice until July1. Asshown in the history of the White Pass Rail- road, the ingoing traffic would be in itself sufficient to warrant a railroad, but from Dawson the only export is gold, about 70 tons a year, while this road will not only carry all the United States Government troops and supplies, for which many hundred thousand dollars are spent, but it will have the unlimited outbound tonnage of high-grade copper ores, which, with a freight rate of $2 a ton from Valdes to the smelters of Puget Sound, will scarcely be treated in the interior. It is not too much to expect that im- provement in transportation facilities alone will convert central Alaska into as densely a populated and prosperous a région as Colorado, as the Black Hills of South Dakota, as the rich mining region of British Columbia. There is another part of Alaska wait- ing for transportation facilities. It is not so dazzling as the Klondike nor as Nationa, GrocrAaPHic MAGAZINE Courtesy of The Engineering Magazine Freight Boat on the Niukluk River—Carries 7 Tons The horse tows it upstream, riding down in the boat vast as central Alaska, but it is perhaps richer than either of them. Far to the northwest lies the Seward Peninsula, suggesting on the map an animal’s head snarling across Bering Strait at the nearby Siberia. By rivers and sea itis almost wholly separated from the mainland, and though compris- ing but 3 per cent of the area of Alaska, or 20,000 square miles in 600,000, it has yielded for the last three years nearly 75 per cent of the gold output, in spite of the increasing yield of the great quartz mines of the southeast, near Juneau. Although the most distant region of North America, 2,700 statute miles from Puget Sound, it owes the rapid explora- tion and development of its coast to the fact that an all-water route was open to its shores, and that freight still costirfg a minimum of $70 a ton into Dawson is being landed on the Nome beach for $10 aton. Passenger rates, higher in the first rush, have fallen to $40 and $50 first class and $20 or $25 steerage. Owing to the freedom from hardships, as well as the low coast and shortness of time required, impelled by stories that were indeed true of rich golden beaches, about 25,000 people and their chattels landed on the low sandy spit at Nome and were left to the mercy of surf and storm. The Eskimo, very numerous along this coast, who have none of the aloofness of the Indian, came in their umiaks, big skin boats that can carry fifty people and all their belongings, and made camp with the whites; but the Eskimo, needing no barometer, intui- tively flee several days before a storm. Not so the whites, who every year have been caught. InSeptember, 1900, when there were more than 12,000 campers along the beach, the surf rolled in, wrecked much of the shipping in the offing,'and destroyed about $1,500,000 of miscellaneous property on the beach, and every year since, similar if not so severe disasters have occurred. Drift- wood, piled high landwards from Nome, OPENING OF THE ALASKAN TERRITORY shows that on occasion the sea sweeps the whole site of the present city. This is not the only danger. An- other is fire. The streets are narrow, and the houses—flimsy wooden struct- ures—stand in serried rows. Because of the cold, there are hot fires. every- where. There are few brick chimneys, and in winter there is no water supply. If a serious fire should occur in mid- winter, destroying shelter, food, and fuel, no relief could reach the stricken people. The nearest open port on the Pacific is 500 miles tothe southeast. It is 1,711 miles from Dawson, with no roads to either place. Bering Sea is in the same latitude as the Baltic, and, like the Baltic, is shallow and brackish, owing to the many rivers which empty fresh water and silt into it. In winter surface ice readily forms, extending 300 to 400 miles south of Nome, effect- ually isolating the city from November I until June 1. Thisis unendurable, and three projects are under consideration to effect com- munication throughout the whole year. The simplest is to maintain in Bering Sea an ice-breaker of the Admiral Ermak type, an easy task, as the ice is not as thick and solid in Bering Sea as in the northern Russian ports. ‘The second project is to build a railroad from Cook Inlet or Prince William Sound on open Pacific waters to Nome by way of St Michael. ‘The third plan is to connect Nome by railroad with the lower Yukon River, and ultimately effect a junction with the railroad from Valdes to Eagle. To complete this project would require about goo miles of track. The gold yield of the Nome region has hitherto come from the sea beaches and from gulches and beaches at most to miles from water transportation. Even 10 miles has proved almost pro- hibitive. In winter the placers are not worked and the camps are closed. No advantage can therefore be taken of the smooth snow and ice roads. Insummer 105 the tundra is two or three feet of mud, with a bottom of frozen ground. ‘The services of teams are worth from $20 to $40 a day, and it takes a whole day to haul 1,500 pounds 1o miles. ‘The lowest rate is three times as much as the minimum from Puget Sound to Nome, 2,700 miles, and twice as much as the rate from San Francisco or Puget Sound to Dawson. So prohibitive were the natural conditions that Mr Chas D. Lane, of the Wild Goose Company, considered it wise economy to devote go per cent of the output of certain placer claims to a transportation sys- tem, thus reducing cost of exploitation for all future output to 10 per cent, rather than indefinitely to spend 90 per cent of the yield for transportation alone. The Wild Goose Railroad, 7 miles long from Nome to Anvil Creek, earned its total first cost within thirty days of its opening and shows increasing earn- ingseach year. From Council City, on the Niukluk River about 90 miles from Nome, Mr Lane has built a second road, also 7 miles long, connecting Council with Ophir Creek, and this road has also paid for itself in one season. Council is 55 miles from the nearest seaport, up a shallow, winding river. That part of the Seward Peninsula on which Nome is located, a part about 5,000 miles in area, was, geologically speaking, very recently an island. A deep indentation of the ocean runs 50 miles inland from Port Clarence, north- west of Nome, and Golofnin Bay, about 70 miles east of Nome, also extends many. miles inland. These two bays are joined by a deep valley, so that 60 miles north and inland from Nome it is possible with one short portage to go from sea to sea. Council City lies in this depression, Ophir Creek and in- numerable other rich creeks emptying into it from both sides. Gold has been found in paying quantities on nearly all of them, but it is impossible yet to de- 106 velop them, owing solely to the cost of transportation. Owing to the absence of transportation facilities, nothing is being done further inland, but a railroad from the nearest port to the interior, a narrow-gauge railroad, should pay for its cost each season for many years to come. ‘There are no heavy grades, no mountain work, and for many miles it runs through a heavily timbered country, but west of Council there is no timber, and both lumber and fuel are exceedingly high in price. There is not only gold here, but also what gives promise of being one of the richest lead and silver dis- tricts in the world. Seventy miles in- land from the ocean, up the Fish River and its tributary, Omilak Creek, less than 50 miles by railroad survey, silver and lead ore has for 18 years past been quarried out, the ore running from 70 per cent to 80 per cent lead and about 120 ounces of silver to the ton. Much ore lies sacked on the dump, but in small quantities of several hundred tons it costs more to move it than it is worth, although its smelting value exceeds $100 aton. From Golofnin Bay there is a freight rate of $3 a ton to the Tacoma smelter, but the wagon haul to the river and the transportation down the river is as yet prohibitive. This one quarry, if properly equipped and opened, should yield a minimum of 10,000 tons a year. Tue NatTionaL GrocGRAaPHIc MAGAZINE For Pacific Coast maritime evolution Alaska has been of inestimable advan- tage. The Dawson rush of 1897 and 1898 impressed every available boat, and when it was over left well established lines with almost daily service. ‘The Nome rush of 1900 again caused a de- mand for all available craft, and in summer the regular service keeps a fleet of more than a dozen ocean steamers busy. The Valdes developments even now justify weekly sailings. All the worn-out dilapidated craft of American register drift into these runs, and as the Alaskan coast is for the most part uncharted, unbuoyed, and unlighted, many of them find their graves in north- ern waters. The export trade from Alaska for four months ending October 31, 1902, ex- ceeded $20,000,000, and was equal to that from Hawaii (for ten months end- ing the same date), was three times that of the Philippines, and more than double that of Porto Rico. The island dependencies of the United States are densely populated, small in area, and fairly well developed. They are in the tropics, and unfit for white men and their families. Alaska needs 10,000 miles of railroad, 20,000 miles of wagon roads and telephone lines, and can, as fast as transportation is available, give homes and employment to a population of 10,000,000. Wiss, WORMS Ole CAIN AIDA outside the Dominion. Hence the statements contained in a recent re- port from U.S. Consul HenryS. Culver, at London,* Ontario, about the Cana- HE immense forest resources of Canadaare not generally realized *“Advance Sheets of Consular Reports,”’ January 31, 1903 (No. 1559). dian forests are specially striking. The following is abstracted from the report : There are three great timber belts in the Dominion : The northern or spruce belt, the southern or commercial belt— both east of the Rocky Mountains—and the British Columbia belt, west of the Rocky Mountains. These belts do not Tue Forests oF CANADA include, however, the forests of the maritime provinces, which are exten- sive and valuable, covering about one- tenth of the area of Ontario and Quebec, or the forests of New Brunswick and Nova Scotia, which may be compared in a general way to those of Maine. FORESTS OF BRITISH COLUMBIA The western or British Columbia belt is far superior to either of the eastern areas, for the reason that the climate, tempered as it is by the warm waters of the Pacific Ocean, promotes a more perfect growth and development of the different species. Here is found not only the valuable red fir or Oregon pine, generally distributed through- out the entire province along the coast and on the mountains, but also the red cedar, the western spruce, the yellow cedar, the hemlock, the bal- sam fir, the western white pine, the western yellow pine, the maple, and the western oak in such quantities as to make this the most valuable timber belt on the North American continent. This belt extends from the forty-ninth par- allel north to the sixtieth parallel, a distance of some 770 miles, and is from 200 to 300 miles wide. The best tim- ber does not extend to the extreme north. That portion is covered with black and white spruce, and constitutes a very extensive pulp-wood range. But this region, because of its great distance from the markets in the East and the lack of cheap transportation, will remain comparatively in its prime- val state until the eastern forests are nearly exhausted or until better trans- port facilities are afforded. THE NORTHERN FORESTS The northern belt is perhaps greater in extent than all the other timber belts and reserves of Canadacombined. Ac- cording to the best authority, it extends from the eastern coast of Labrador north 107 of the fiftieth parallel in a northwest- erly direction to Alaska, a distance of some 3,000 miles, with an average width of perhaps 500 miles. This vast strip of timber land, if placed upon the terri- tory of the United States, would extend from Maine to California and from the southern shore of Lake Erie to the northern boundary line of Georgia. It is known as the spruce forest of the Dominion, the great bulk of the timber being of that species, black and white, the other important trees being larch and poplar. Although this belt has been but par- tially explored, it is claimed that many of the trees in the southern portion are of a lumber-producing size, but the greater portion is fit only for pulp. When it is considered that spruce is distributed in vast quantities through all the forests of Canada, and that an almost incalculable amount will be pro- duced in this great northern belt, it is hardly exaggeration to say that the Do- minion possesses an inexhaustible sup- ply of pulp wood. Dr Robert Bell, Director of the Geo- logical Survey of Canada, says of the area of the forests : “The area of our northern forests may be reckoned as forty-four times as great as that of England. Any one of these forty-four parts will produce wood enough to supply the ordinary demands of the present population of Canada— that is, 5,000,000 people could get what is required for mining, fuel, etc., by taking the timber from a space the size of England—and would be able to al- low the other forty-three equal parts to be in reserve or used for export.”’ The railway being built from Sault Ste. Marie to Hudson Bay will make available the timber growing around the bay and along the line of the road, and may possibly provide a more accessible field of pulp wood than can be obtained in any other way for the rapidly grow- ing industries of the Soo. 108 THE SOUTHERN BELT The southern or commercial timber belt spreads over a very wide territory. It comprises that portion of Ontario and Quebee lying between the forty-fifth and fiftieth parallels of latitude and bounded on the east by the St Lawrence River and on the west by the Great Lakes and Manitoba. Great interest centers in this great timber region by reason Of its proximity to the manu- facturing centers of the United States and because it contains the most valu- able timber for lumber east of the Rocky Mountains. It is not, however, a compact and un- broken belt of first-class timber. Cli- matic conditions seriously interfere with the development and growth of some of the best species of timber that inhabit this region, for none of the best ones extend farther north than the water- shed between Hudson Bay and the Great Lakes, approximately the fiftieth paral- lel of latitude, and many of them find their northern limit far south of this parallel. The composition and extent of this timber belt can be better under- stood by taking a map of the Dominion and tracing its boundaries and noting the northern limit of the most valuable species. [The forty-fifth parallel cuts out entirely one very valuable species— the black walnut—whose northern limit of growth is the latitude of the city of Toronto, while a few miles north of this parallel is the northern limit of red cedar and white oak. A line drawn from the city of Quebec to Sault Ste. Marie will designate the northern limit of beech, while a line drawn from the northern part of New Brunswick to the north shore of Lake Superior will mark the northern boundary of sugar hard maple. ‘Two other species which have their northern limit within this belt are elm and birch. Tue NationaL GeocraeHic MAGAZINE The king of the northern forests is white pine, which has its northren limit, as have also white cedar and red pine, at this fiftieth parallel of latitude. This region is now virtually its only home in the Dominion of Canada. It was at one time supposed that it had a very exten- sive northern range, but Dr Bell states that its distribution is comparatively southern, very little being found north of the fiftieth parallel. This belt would furnish an enormous supply of excellent timber but for the destruction wrought by forest fires. Dr Bell calculates that about one- third of this territory may be considered as under a second growth up to about IO years of age, one-third as interme- diate, and one-third including trees of I0O years or more, and this applies doubtless to all the forest areas of Can- ada ; to this particular belt, which les at the very doors of the great manufact- uring establishments of the United States, and is the one foreign timber region upon which we rely, the avail- able supply of first-quality timber is alarmingly limited. ‘The Canadian forests have never been called upon to pay the enormous tribute to multiplying industries that our for- ests have ; but they have been decimated by the speculative lumberman and the improvident settler, and ravaged by fire until those which are most accessible bear little resemblance to their primeval state. But it is not too late for the Canadian people to preserve what is left of their great timber reserves, and by a vigorous and judicious system of reforestation, they may be able to meet every demand for their best timber for a long time to come. They are awake to the respon- sibility, and are taking measures to pre- serve what is left and to reforest the waste places. WiOKIKG UN “iH Ey EARS SOU rH HERE are four expeditions at | present exploring the far south whose unknown area is greater than twice Europe. The outline map shows the base of operations of three of the parties—the English, the German, and the Scottish; the fourth party, the Swedish, have their base near the Falk- land Islands. Nothing has now been heard from the German expedition for more than a year. They are amply equipped and provisioned and did not expect to send word of their doings before June, 1904. An auxiliary vessel, the Morning, re- cently entered the Antarctic regions, carrying additional equipment for the British expedition, which is exploring south of New Zealand. The Scottish expedition, under the command of W. S. Bruce and on board the Scotia, sailed from the Falkland Islands for the far south in January, 1903. ‘The other three expeditions have had a year’s start of the Scottish expe- dition, but the latter has an able leader and staff, and will doubtless do equally important work. Scottish ©) Station Wedde aN Feb ra REDITION PROPOSED ROU SCOTTISH Courtesy of The Geographical Journal THEORIES OF VOLCANIC ACTION N anaddress recently before the Swiss Society of Natural Sciences, M. A. Rossel presented certain considerations regarding volcanic action based on ex- periments with the electric furnace. The Literary Digest gives the following summary of the address: “A quartz crystal heated in the elec- tric furnace at the relatively low tem- perature produced by 70 volts and 400 to 500 ampéres is completely volatil- ized ; it is even easy to vaporize lime, magnesia, and in general all compounds containing oxygen, such as silicates, carbonates, etc. ““ Nevertheless, these may undergo a process of reduction ; when we heat in the electric furnace silica with alumina, carbon, iron, etc., new refractory sub- stances are formed, which remain in the furnace while the oxygen is disengaged in the gaseousstate. These stable com- pounds are carbids, silicids, phosphids, etc., which resist high temperature, but are all decomposable by water. “Tf we apply this reaction to the formation of the earth by cooling, we must admit that the first minerals pro- duced were compoundsofelements . . . free from oxygen. ‘These minerals re- mained in this condition, forming the first terrestrial stratum, until circum- stances permitted the formation of water or water vapor ; as soon as they came in contact with this, a very active re- action must have taken place, whose result was the formation of oxids— lime, alumina, magnesia, etc., together with inflammable gases, whose com- bustion then gave rise to other re- actions. ... “There were thus formed, on the one hand, earthy metallic oxids, and, on the other, the oxids that form the acids of the important earths—silicic and carbonic acids. The explanation of the formation of the silicates and carbonates is hence not far to seek. ‘“ Now we may apply what precedes to the explanation of certain volcanic henomena. ‘“The earth cools progressively. This cooling gives rise to folds in the terres- trial crust, and fissures may result. Through these fissures water is intro- duced and minerals containing water of hydration may penetrate to a great depth. Then very energetic chemical reactions take place, producing gases that will burn in air, and also metallic oxids. These reactions may cause earth- quakes and volcanic eruptions. ‘“Tn any case, M. Rossel regards it as certain that if the earth has reached its present state by progressive cooling, and if the interior of the globe is now at a sufficiently high temperature to volatilize oxygenated bodies, oxygen should be entirely wanting at these depths. The oxygen will all be found at the surface of the globe, in the at- mosphere and in combination in water and oxygenated minerals, which are all decomposed volcanic ashes. It would then seem inexact to say that the globe is composed of about four-fifths oxygen and one-fifth other elements. Besides, this hypothesis is not in harmony with what is known of the earth’s specific gravity.” STANISLAS MEUNIER con- e tributesan interesting and sug- gestive paper on the theory of volcanic outbursts to the Revue Scientifique of Au- gust 2, of which this abstract is pub- lished in Zhe Geographical Journal for December, 1902, Heassumes that from the surface down to a certain limited depth, determined by the temperature, all rocks are saturated with water, while beyond that depth the heat is too great for water to penetrate. A fracture of the nature of a reversed fault, caused by thrusting, would place a hot, dry layer below the critical level in contact VOLCANIC with a moist layer above it, with the result that the rocks along a part of the line of contact would have their melting point lowered, and would take up water in combination, tending to increase in bulk, and forming a mass having many of the properties of ordinary lavas. ‘The swelling of the mass at a line of weak- ness would tend to fracture the super- incumbent rocks. ‘The relief of press- ure so obtained would set free. large quantities of the occluded gases and vapors, and these would bring with them rock materials in a solid and molten state. A close analogy occurs in the case of a bottle of soda water when the cork is taken out, the sudden liberation of the gas in solution driving part of the water out of the bottle. Thus volcanic lava, so far from being a material distributed as a continuous layer in all parts of the earth, is a spe- cial product of regions which have just undergone profound geological changes, and the significance of this in relation ERUPTIONS IL! to the geographical distribution of act- ive volcanoes is very great. Again, it becomes evident that the depths at which centers of activity—7. e., ‘‘ pock- ets’’ of swelling or expanding mate- rial—are developed may vary consider- ably, and we are able to account for the fact that volcanoes near one another may be quite independent, while others, more distant, may act sympathetically. Finally, lavas may originate in rocks of widely different constitution—from crys- talline rocks to the carboniferous clays which produce anorthite lavas. The indispensable factor, the tendency to increase in volume, may of course be supplied by other substances than water, as, for example, by chlorides, like masses of rock-salt, which would ex- plain the emanations from exceptional volcanoes, like those of Hawaii, where the place of water vapor is taken by hydrochloric acid or by sulphates or combustible carbon compounds. GEOGRAPHIC NOTES THE FOUNDER OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION ORD has been received that James Smithson, the founder of the Smithsonian Institution, must be turned out of his grave in Genoa, Italy, tomake room for a quarry. Smithson died at Genoa in 1829, and was buried in a small and isolated British cemetery on the heights of San Benigno. The cemetery is under the care of the British consul at Genoa, but the land belongs to the Italian Government. Near by is a quarry, from which the city gets the stone for its works. Much more stone is now needed for the exten- sive harbor improvements which have been begun, and hence all the graves in the cemetery must be removed. Smithson left his entire estate of over half a million dollars to ‘‘the United States of America to found at Washing- ton, under the name of the Smithsonian Institution, an establishment for the in- crease and diffusion of knowledge among men.”’ The princely legacy came asa surprise to the United States. He had never vis- ited this country, nor had he any Amer- ican friends or, as far as we know, any correspondents across the ocean. His plan was unique and has given the United States a scientific institution such as no other nation in the world pos- sesses. Today the institution which bears Smithson’s name, in addition to the income of the Smithsonian fund proper, which amounts to about $30,000 I12 yearly, has charge of the expenditure each year of $450,000. Exploration and all branches of geographical science have been generously encouraged and assisted by the institution during the half cen- tury of its existence. The nation to whom he was so gener- ous ought to insist in honoring the mem- ory of their great benefactor by bringing him to this country and giving him a permanent resting place in the grounds of the institution which he founded. It would be base ingratitude on our part to bury him again in Genoa, in another cemetery, where, as time goes on and the city grows, he will be again disturbed. We should place him where he may rest in peace, not for another seventy-five or one hundred years, but for as long time as the great nation lives in which he showed such complete confidence and respect. GAZETTEER OF THE PHILIPPINES “PRONOUNCING Gazetteer and Geographical Dictionary of the Philippine Islands’’ has been prepared by the Bureau of Insular Affairs of the War Department, and issued as Senate Document No. 280, Fifty-seventh Con- gress, first session. The gazetteer proper contains 264 pages, including the index, while the geographical dictionary occupies 668 pages, exclusive of the maps, charts, and illustrations. The work contains the most recent and authoritative information, from official and other sources, concerning the islands, relative to their geography, physical features, areas, communica- tions, population, towns, resources, wealth, products, industries, commerce, finance, social economy, natural history, military occupation, and civil govern- ment, followed by an alphabetically ar- ranged descriptive list of the islands, provinces, districts, pueblos, cities, towns, mountains, volcanoes, rivers, THe NationaL GEoGRAPHIC MAGAZINE seas, straits, gulfs, bays, lakes, capes, light-houses, and other mapped objects and places to the number of 10,300. The work is so extremely valuable that it is unfortunate the edition is so limited that only a few copies can be obtained by the public.. Persons who are unable to obtain a copy from a Senator or Representative may purchase one from the Superintendent of Public Documents, Washington, D. C., for $1.75. THE DEVELOPMENT OF CUBA N a previous number of this Maga- zine mention has been made of the very complete telegraph system con- structed in Cuba by the U. S. Signal Corps since the Spanish-American war.** ‘he system was turned over to the Cuban government when the United States withdrew from the island. Another important work was com- pleted recently when the railroad was opened that binds together the ends of the island. An English-American syn- dicate built the line. H. I. Davies, writing in The Scientific American,} has this to say of its value : The railroad is of standard gage, and its bridges are of steel and masonry ; its equipment will be similar to that of the best American railways, and it is intended to run through sleeping cars between Havana and Santiago de Cuba, a distance of nearly goo miles. Along the main line are to be found great areas of land of the richest de- scription, well watered and in most cases well wooded, suitable for sugar cane, tobacco, Indian corn, cotton, cof- fee, cacao, and all of the fruits of the tropical and sub-tropical regions. Other districts are peculiarly adapted to cattle; *See NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE, p- 407, December, 1902; also report of the Chief Signal Officer, Gen. A. W. Greely, for 1902, pp. II-17. ft January 24, 1903. | y B-R.3 EXISTING BEFORE JHE WAR. R. Bs COMPLETED SINCE THE WAR. PROPOSED EXTENSIONS. OL, GeocraPHic Nores Ihr OY Ca a 4EY GANA OL 4 % 113 LS TE le CNM SG OC le 7 iil Zi YGUAMTANAMO )) Courtesy of The Scientific American Diagram Showing the Railways of Cuba cattle do well everywhere, for the grasses are luxuriant and highly nutri- tious, and there is usually an abun- dance of water. Around the coast are to be found many excellent harbors, and it is reported and believed that the unexplored part of the island contains much hidden mineral wealth. The interior, which is sparsely popu- lated, is comparatively level, and largely covered with hardwood timber, and while the soil of the different districts is generally of extraordinary fertility, some places are more desirable than others, both in this respect and in re- gard to healthfulness. For the tropics, the climate is a tolerable one, and the island will soon be rendered. more healthy by foreign irrigation, drainage, and an improved system of sanitation. The northern employes of the Cuba company have as a rule been free from illness of any kind, notwithstanding their employment on railway construc- tion under conditions not always favor- able to health. Unlike many of the West India islands, Cuba is entirely free from poisonous reptiles, and has fewer mosquito and similar pests than any other southern regions. There are no obtainable government lands in Cuba ; practically all of the lands are held by individuals, and in the eastern half of the island they are usually held in large areas. No system- atic land survey has yet been made, and the large tracts are mostly in irregu- lar forms and their boundaries are diffi- cult to define and trace; land titles in the unoccupied and in the newly settled parts of Cuba are in many cases de- fective and need investigation, though the government has recently taken steps toward the perfection of titles. Tt tA. TIMBERLINE N the last number of the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE* the dis- tinguished geologist and physiographer, Prof. I. C. Russell, discusses the sub- ject of timberline, and suggests the use of the term in at least three different senses. It is seldom that I find myself called upon to differ from this eminent * Nat. Geog. Mag., vol. xiv, no. 2, pp. 80-81, February, 1903. THe Nationa, GrocraPHic MAGAZINE authority, but in the present instance I feel it my duty to file a protest. The term ‘‘ ¢imberline’’ has come to have a perfectly definite and well-under- stood meaning, accepted by naturalists the world over. /¢ is the upper or boreal limit of tree growth as determined by tem- perature. ‘Tousetheterm in other senses, as for upper limits of tree growth of dependent on temperature, for lower or austral limits of tree growth on moun- tains or other slopes, for the line where EOEEEREEEFEEEEEREEERELEEETELEEELELEEEL| | ze | alt <== a Lt Il I SLI Chart Showing Annual Precipitation at Salt Lake City and Water Level of Great Salt Lake EXPLANATORY NOTES. The upper line indicates the precipitation and the lower one the lake level. Broken lines indicate periods of no authentic observations, or that the data have been approximated. This chart was prepared by Mr L. H. Murdoch to illustrate his article on “‘ Why Salt Lake has Fallen,’’ in the last number of this Magazine. GeocraPHic Nores certain trees stop because of excess of water in the soil, and so on, is depriv- ing the term of its fixed and definite value. While on the subject of Professor Russell’s note, I may be permitted to suggest further that the lower limit of tree growth in many parts of the West is determined by temperature rather than aridity, though insome cases aridity is the controlling factor. To avoid mis- interpretation, it may be well to call attention to the self-evident fact that the temperature along the lower limit of timber on our western mountains is not, of course, too high for all tree growth, but too high for the particular kind or kinds of trees which flourish in that particular region. Thus the lower limits of the yellow pine and of the sev- eral species of juniper and nut pine are determined by definite temperatures. Other kinds of trees flourish at higher temperatures, but these trees have not access to the region. ~ C. HART MERRIAM. BUREAU OF FORESTRY HE work begun in 1902 by the Bureau of Forestry to check the advance of the sand dunes along the southeastern coast of the United States and in other sections of the country is being continued this year. In southern Virginia and northern North Carolina a chain of immense sand dunes stretches north and south along the coast. These dunes are moving slowly landward, and within the last few years have become dangerous to the United States life-saving stations and to private property of large value. Some time ago, at the request of a number of private owners, the Bureau made an examination of a district in Currituck County, N. C., and began work at one point to fix the drifting sand sufficiently to permit forest plant- ing. In cooperation with the owners of 1 the land, board fences and other struc- tures were erected to alter the course of the most threatening dunes. The work was so successful that last spring the ground was in condition for the planting of beach grass, which is being used temporarily as a cover. Witha fair growth of grass this season, forest planting on from 30 to 50 acres may be begun this year. The forest, besides protecting the buildings, will yield a much-needed supply of fuel. At other points in the same district, which ex- tends 30 miles along the coast, the Bureau is now giving similar aid.* An investigation is also being made of the dunes formed by the drift sand along the Columbia River in Washing- ton and Oregon. The dunes are destroy- ing valuable orchards and rich agri- cultural lands. They form serious hindrances to transportation along the lines of the Northern Pacific Railway and the Oregon Railroad and Naviga- tion Company. After a careful exami- nation the Bureau will attempt to de- vise methods for controlling the move- ment of thesand. The Oregon Railroad and Navigation Company is assisting in the investigation. ARGENTINA-CHILE BOUNDARY AWARD HE decision rendered in the Ar- gentina-Chile boundary dispute by King Edward VII is in the nature of a compromise. Argentina receives about 15,600 square miles of the dis- puted territory and Chile about 21,000. The area acquired by Argentina is the more fertile and valuable agriculturally and includes the upper valleys of several rivers flowing into the Pacific. Chile gains a large area of forest country and many square miles of upland, where large flocks of sheep can roam. ‘The results of this dispute have been the * See ‘‘ Report of the Forester for 1902,’’ by Gifford Pinchot. Pp. 135. 116 careful exploration and mapping of the boundary for nearly 1,000 miles. ‘The decision of Edward VII is printed in full in the ‘‘ Bulletin of the Bureau of the American Republics’’ for January, 1903. Hon. John W. Foster, at the request of President Roosevelt and Secretary of State Hay, has taken charge of the presentation of the United States case in the Alaskan boundary dispute. Mr Foster will be assisted in the work by Mr Robert Lansing, who was one of the junior counsel in the Bering Sea Arbitration at Paris in 1893 and asso- ciate counsel of the United States in the Bering Sea Claims Commission of 1896. Secretary of War Root, Senator Lodge, and Senator Turner, of Washington, will represent the United States on the Commission. “Wind Velocity and Fluctuations of Water Level on Lake Erie” is the sub- ject of a bulletin by Prof. A. J. Henry issued by the U. S. Weather Bureau. The heavy westerly winds that sweep across Lake Erie from end to end pile the water high up in the harbor of Buf- falo and leave low water in the channel ‘at the mouth of the Detroit River at the otherend of the lake. Shipping is much inconvenienced by such changes in level. Professor Henry, asa result of hisstudy of the variations in the water level, be- lieves that it is possible to predict ex- treme high water at Buffalo, so that in case of a severe seiche property-owners along the wharves could be warned in sufficient time to remove their goods. A series of diagrams show the wind velocity and water level hourly fluctua- tions on the lake from December 1, 1899, to November 30, 1900. The Pittsburg Coal District.—The first of the series of new maps which are being prepared by the Geological Survey in cooperation with the State of Pennsyl- vania, has recently appeared as the Tue NartrionaL GeocrarpHic MaGaZzINne Masontown-Uniontown Geologic Folio, No. 82. The area covered by this folio, which is named from two of the lead- ing towns in the district, includes 458 square miles and lies mainly in Fayette County, although also including por- tions of Greene and Washington coun- ties. ‘The folio includes 8 maps, show- ing the hills, streams, roads, houses, mines, coals, geologic formations, and the details of geologic structure. In addition to the maps, there are 21 large- size pages of description written by Mr Marius R. Campbell, in which the geol- ogy of the region is described in detail. Many sections showing thicknesses and the character of the coals are given. Thomas Willing Balch, of the Phila- delphia bar, will shortly have ready a monograph entitled, 7he Alaska Fron- tier. He will give in it reproductions of 28 maps, discuss the international law bearing on the boundary question, ‘and bring out much new evidence. Mr Balch has collected his facts in Alaska, Saint Petersburg, Berlin, Paris, London, Edinburgh, and many other places. In the London Times for December 16 and December 27, 1902, are pub- lished two long letters from Edward Whymper, the well-known mountaineer, describing some explorations he made among the Canadian Rockies in got and 1902. The Division of Hydrology, a new di- vision, has recently been organized in the hydrographic branch of the United States Geological Survey. The work of this division will include the gathering and filing of well records of all kinds, the study of artesian and other problems. relating to underground waters, and the investigation of the stratigraphy of the water-bearing and associated rocks. In addition to the gathering of statistics relating to the flow, cost, etc., of the wells, it is hoped in the future to give especial attention to the geologic feat- GerocraPHic Nores ures which govern or which are related in any way to the supply of water. The division will be subdivided into two sections, the eastern and the west- ern, the first embracing the Gulf and Mississippi River States and the States to the east, and the second embracing the remaining ‘‘reclamation’’ States and Territories, or those having public lands. The charge of each section has been assigned to a geologist, the western section to Mr N. H. Darton, and the eastern to Mr M. L. Fuller. The office details are in charge of Mr Fuller. Dr Hugh M. Smith is the author of an illustrated report on the ‘‘ Herring Fish- eries of England, Scotland, and Hol- land,’’ recently issued by the U. S. Fish Commission. The report is based on the observations made by Dr Smith during a visit in 1900 to the principal herring-fishing centers of the countries named. ‘The herring is today a leading fish in the United States, Canada, New- foundland, England, Scotland, Ireland, Holland, France, Norway, Sweden, and Russia. A species very similar to that of the Atlantic Ocean is found in the North Pacific Ocean, and is caught in large quantities in Japan and Alaska. In point of number of individual fish taken for market, no species exceeds the herring. The annual value of the herring fisheries is $25,250,000, repre- senting 1,500,000,000 pounds of fish. The Naval Hydrographic Office has is- sued a fourth edition of ‘‘ The Naviga- tion of the Gulf of Mexico and Carib- bean Sea’’ (volume 2), embracing the coast of the mainland from Key West, Florida, to the Orinoco River, Vene- zuela, with the adjacent islands, cays, and banks. One phase of the English interpreta- tion of the Alaskan boundary is seen by following their proposed line in the map on page go. Promontories belonging to the United States would be cut off from the mainland like islands, and have 117 no communication with each other ex- cept through foreign land or by water. In other words, the English contention would establish a series of artificial islands along the Alaskan coast. ‘The English interpretation contradicts the intent of all boundary lines, which are designed to follow a natural and con- venient dividing line. Dr J. L. M. Curry, a member of the National Geographic Society for many years, and distinguished as a statesman, educator, and author, died in Asheville, N. C., February 12. Dr Curry was born in Georgia 78 years ago. During the years 1857 to 1861 he was a member of Congress, and from 1861 to 1865 a member of the Confederate Congress and a lieutenant colonel in the C. S. A. From 1865 to 1881 he held chairs in Howard College and Richmond College. In 1885 President Cleveland appointed him Minister to Spain, where he repre- sented the United States for four years. Of late years Dr Curry has been the general agent of the Peabody and Slater educational funds. He has always been closely identified with all educational movements for and in the Southern States. He was the author of several books and many articles dealing with problems of the South. The proceedings of the Section of Geol- ogy and Geography of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, for the Washington meeting, December 26—-January 3, are published in Science for February 6, 1903, pp. 217-229. The article by Hon. O. P. Austin on ‘“Problems of the Pacific—the Com- merce of the Great Ocean,’’ published in the August, 1902, number of this Magazine, has aroused much interest in the Far Hast. It has been trans- lated into Japanese and published in Tokyo, and into Russian and published at Vladivostok. It is at present being rendered in Chinese, and will soon be 118 read in Chinese characters by the enter- prising merchants of China. Map Sheets of New York State. Among the latest which have come from the press of the Geological Survey are those of the Clayton and Grindstone quadrangles, which embrace portions of the State along the St Lawrence River in the vicinity of Clayton and the Thousand Islands, and those of the Ti- conderoga and Mettawee quadrangles which cover sections of northeastern New York along the Vermont boundary. The Ticonderoga sheet shows the his- toric region at the northern end of Lake George and the southern end of Lake Champlain and includes the eastern foothills of the Adirondack Mountains and a portion of Addison County, Vt. The Mettawee sheet covers a part of Washington County, N. Y., and the rugged region in western Bennington and Rutland counties, Vt. A Map of the Philippines is now on the press and will be issued during March by the Military Information Division of the War Department. The map in- cludes the results of practically all ex- plorations and surveys to the close of 1902. Itis in four sheets, each sheet being 30 x 46 inches, and on the scale of 1:800,000. ‘The size of the entire map is thus 5 x7 feet 8 inches. The American Museum of Natural His- tory has sent Dr E. O. Hovey to the Lesser Antilles to continue his studies of the volcanic disturbances on Marti- nique and St Vincent. Dr Hovey plans to spend at least two months on the islands. After an examination of the present condition of La Souffriére and Mont Pelée, he will visit in turn each volcanic island in the group, taking photographs of their craters and sol- fataras, and making collections for the Museum. The family of S. A. Andrée, the Arctic aeronaut, have finally admitted that their last hope of his being still alive is Tue Nationa, GeocraPpHic MaGaZzINE gone. Andrée’s brother, Capt. Ernst Wilhelm Andrée, of the Swedish army, has applied to the courts to declare him dead, in order that he may obtain the small property willed him by the lost explorer. Mr E. J. Moura, Secretary of the Geo- graphical Society of the Pacific, an- nounces that as the Merchants’ Ex- change Building will soon be torn down to give space for another structure, the Council of the Society decided to re- move the library and office of the So- ciety to other quarters. The new loca- tion is 419 California street, corner of Leidesdorff street. This is the center of the city’s banking and insurance business, and convenient of access to the members, as well as to newspaper men who wish to consult charts of the U.S. Coast Survey, or desire informa- tion upon rivers, harbors, and moun- tain ranges. ‘The latest maps of Alaska and the Philippines will be open to in- spection. Letters and packages for the Society should be addressed to 419 Cali- fornia street, San Francisco, Cal. Commander J. F. Moser, U. S. N., is the author of a report on ‘‘ The Salmon and Salmon Fisheries of Alaska,’’ the result of exhaustive investigations by the Fish Commission in 1900 and r1gor. Many illustrations and maps of streams and bays accompany the text, making an exceedingly handsome and useful publication. A. B. Alexander is the author of an illustrated bulletin issued by the U. S. Fish Commission describing the boats and fishing methods of the natives of the South Sea Islands. The bulletin con- tains much that is interesting about the inhabitants of these South Pacific islands. Commander Robert E. Peary has been elected President of the American Geo- graphical Society of New York, suc- ceeding the Hon. Seth Low who re- signed several months ago. GEOGRAPHIC Handbook of Birds of the United States. By Florence Mer- tiam Bailey. With 33 full-page plates by Louis Agassiz Fuertes, and Western over 600 illustrations. Pp. xc +512. 8x 5% inches. Boston: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. 1902. $3.50 met. Only minute study and infinite pa- tience, added to a personal acquaintance with nature and with practically every bird described, big or little, could make this book possible. The volume can- not be too strongly commended. ‘The person who knows nothing about birds is fascinated by the simple living de- scriptions, while the specialist gains a fund of information from the careful and systematic classification. The introduction of over 90 pages in- cludes articles on ‘‘ Collecting and Pre- paring Birds’ Nests and Eggs,’ by Vernon Bailey; ‘‘ Bird Protection,’’ by T. S. Palmer, local lists of birds found in different sections of the West, and a handily arranged bibliography, followed by a’key to families of water birds. The biography of each bird opens with a brief description of the principal characteristics of the bird, its plumage, size, distribution, where it builds its nest, and the color of its eggs. This is followed in every case by an account of the bird’s habits and life. Mrs Vernon Bailey has a delightful style and gives a personal interest to the subjects. The following random selec- tion is cited as an example : “Tn the stillness of the high moun- tain forests your ear sometimes catches the thin, finely drawn pipe of the brown creeper, and if you watch patiently on the dark-shaded boles of the lofty trees you may discover the little dark-colored creature—seeming small and weak in the great solemn fir forest—creeping up the trunks, examining the cracks with microscopic care as he goes. If he feels that his work has not been done LITERATURE thoroughly enough he drops back and does it over again ; and when one tree has been gone over to his satisfaction, he often flies obliquely down to the bot- tom of another trunk and creeps pa- tiently up that. On Mount Shasta, where the firs are decorated with yellow moss, the Sierra creeper goes around its pads when he comes to them, but works carefully over the dark lichen- covered branches. Sometimes he lights upside down on the under side of a branch, and clings like a fly, but with the aid of his pointed tail well pressed against the bark.’’ Mr Vernon Bailey is the author of a number of the biographies, and others who helped Mrs Bailey to make the book a success are Dr C. Hart Merriam, Mr R. Ridgway, Dr A. K. Fisher, Mr E. W. Nelson, and Dr T. S. Palmer. The Tragedy of Pelée. By George Ken- nan. Illustrated. Pp.257. 5%x8 inches. New York. ‘The Outlook Co. 1902 $1.50 net. Mr Kennan went to Martinique on the Dixie as the special representative of The Outlook. 'This volume includes his letters to that journal revised and much enlarged. For vivid description some of the chapters in the volume are surpassed by few things in literature. In chap- ter IV, ‘‘In the Track of the Volcanic Hurricane,’’ an account is given of a long interview with Ciparis, the negro criminal who imprisoned in an under- ground dungeon escaped the deadly blast of May 8, and whom Mr Kennan had the enterprise to hunt up and per- sonally interview. The testimony of this man is of great importance in ex- plaining the causes of death on May 8. Ciparis was waiting for his breakfast, when suddenly it grew very dark, and also immediately after hot air mixed with fine ashes came in through the grating I20 and burned him. He heard no noise, saw no fire, smelled nothing ‘‘ except what he thought was his own body burning.’’ ‘There was no smoke, and the hot air came in through the grating without any appreciable rush or blast. His clothing did not take fire, and yet his back was very severely burned under his shirt. An interesting phenomenon noted by Mr Kennan was the stellar lightning which characterized the night eruptions. Several illustrations of this are given. The chapter on ‘‘ Causes of the Ca- tastrophe’’ is worthy of a professional geologist, something that Mr Kennan does not profess to be. His belief is ‘that the volcanic discharge which de- stroyed St Pierre came from a lateral fissure near the summit of the moun- tain; that it did not contain any con- siderable amount of gas; that it did not burst.into flame, and that it did not cause death by asphyxiation.’’ The death-dealing blast, according to Mr Kennan, was composed of superheated steam charged with fine dust. The weight of the dust carried by the steam depressed the blast so that it followed the slope of the mountain. The dust was hot enough to set fire to inflam- mable objects inside the houses, which did not catch fire from the outside, but from the inside. The volume is graphically illustrated from drawings by George Varian and from photographs by the author. The American Cotton Industry. T. M. Young. Pp. 146. 5x7% inches. London: Methuen & Co. New York: Imported by Charles Seribner’s Sons. 1902. 75c. 77. The author in the spring and early summer of 1902 visited the cotton-man- ufacturing districts in New England and in the Southern States. He had been sent from England by the cotton manufacturers of Manchester, who de- sired a careful investigation and com- parison of the cotton spinning and weav- Tue Nationa, GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE ing industry in England and the United States. It has been generally known for some years that the American cot- ton factories were outstripping those in England. Mr Young, as a result of his study, does not think the American weaver is more intelligent or better paid than the British weaver, but that our advantage is (1) because American man- agement is more economical of labor— that is, wedo not divert a skilled man’s attention and time to the small things which an unskilled man can do just as well, and (2) because the American manager is alert for the newest inven- tion, and adopts even inventions made in England before the English manager considers them. Year-book of the Department of Agri- culture, 1901, Edited by Geo. Wm. Hill. With plates and maps. Pp. 846, 6% xg% inches. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1902. The Year-book for 1901 teems with important geographic material. The report of the Secretary takes 115 pages, and is followed by 33 articles on special topics, of which the following may be mentioned : ““The Purpose of a Soil Survey.” Milton Whitney. ‘“Tnsects as Carriers and Spreaders of Disease.’’ L. O. Howard. “The Future Demand for American Cotton.’ J. L. Watkins. ‘“The Timber Resources of Alaska.’’ Wm. L. Hall. “Progress in Plant and Animal Breed- ing.’’ Willet M. Hayes. ‘“A gricultural Seeds—Where Grown, How Handled.’’ A. J. Pieters. ‘““The Prairie Dog of the Great Plains.’’ C. Hart Merriam. ‘“Grazing in the Forest Reserves.’’ Filibert Roth. ‘Agriculture in the Tropical Islands of the United States.’’ O. F. Cook. “ Little-Known Fruit Varieties Con- sidered Worthy of Wider Dissemina- tion.’? Wm. A. Taylor. GEOGRAPHIC “Two Vanishing Game Birds—The Woodcock and the Wood Duck.”” A. kK. Fisher. ‘“Experimental Work with Fungous Diseases of Grasshoppers.”’ L. O. Howard. “The Hemp Industry in the United States.’’ Lyster H. Dewey. ‘“ Wheat Ports of the Pacific Coast.’’ Edwin S. Holmes, Jr. Many handsome full-page plates and maps illustrate the text. BOOKS RECEIVED HE following new books have been received and will be reviewed in due course : ‘“Mont Pelée and the Tragedy of Martinique.’’ By Angelo Heilprin. With many illustrations. Pp. x11I+ 337, 6% by 9% inches. Philadelphia : J.B. Lippincott Co. 1903. $3.50 net. ‘* Birds of the Rockies.’’ By Leander S. Keyser. With illustrations by Louis Agassiz Fuertes and Bruce Horsfall. Pp. 355, 6% by 9 inches. Chicago: McClurg & Co. 1902. $3.00 net. ‘“The Conquest.’’ ‘The true story of Lewis and Clarke. By Eva E. Dye. Pp. 443, 5% by 8 inches. Chicago: McClurg & Co. 1902. $1.50. “United States Magnetic Declination Tables and Isogonic Charts for 1902, and Principal Facts Relating to Earth’s Magnetism.’’ By L. A. Bauer. With maps and illustrations. Pp. 405, 8 by I1¥%inches. Washington: U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. 1902. ““Mountaineering in the Sierra Ne- vada.’’ By Clarence King. Pp. 378, 5% by 734 inches. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. 1902. $1.50. New edition. “Japanese Girls and Women.’’ By Alice Mabel Bacon. Pp. 337, 5% by 8% inches. Withillustrations. Boston: Houghton, Miflin & Co. 1902. Re- vised and enlarged edition. “The Question of the Pacific.’’ ‘Translated and enlarged from Dr Vic- LITERATURE 121 tor M. Maurtua, by F. A. Pezet, Sec- retary to the Legation of Peru at Wash- ington. With map. Pp. 312, 6% by ¥% inches. Philadelphia: George F. Lasher. 1901. ‘* Some By- Ways of California.’’ By Charles F. Carter. Pp. 189, 5% by ¥% inches. New York: The Grafton Press. 1902. “Complete Geography.’’ ByRalphs. Tarr and Frank M. McMurry. With many maps and illustrations. Pp. xI+ 478+X, 6% by 8% inches. New York: The Macmillan Co. 1902. ‘The Physical Geography of New York State.’ By Ralph S. Tarr. With many maps and diagrams. Pp. 397, 6% byginches. New York: The Macmillan Co. 1902. $3.50 net. “Asiatic Russia.’’ By George Fred- erick Wright. With many maps and illustrations. 2 vols: XIII+290, XII+ 291-637. New York: McClure, Phil- lips & Co. 1902. $7.50. ‘““The Travels of Pedro Teixeira, with his ‘Kings of Harmuz’ and ex- tracts from his ‘Kings of Persia.’ ’’ Translated and annotated by William F. Sinclair, with further notes and an in- troduction by Donald Ferguson. Pp. C+2y92, 6 by ginches. London: Printed for the Hakluyt Society (series 11, vol. O)). - UGE2, “Report of Alfred C. Lane, State Geologist of Michigan, for 1gor.’’ With many maps. Pp. 304, 6 by 9g inches. Published by the State. Lansing, 1902. “Antarctica.’’ By Edwin Swift Balch. With maps. Pp. 230, 7 by Io inches. Philadelphia: Allen, Lane & Scott. 1902. ‘“American Diplomacy in the Orient.’’ By John W. Foster. Pp. x1v+498, 6 by g inches. Boston: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. 1903. $3.00 net. ‘Unknown Mexico.”’ By Carl Lum- holtz.. 2 vols. Pp.1,600. With over 530 illustrations and maps, 6% by 9% inches. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. 1902. $12.00 net. “The Great Mountains and Forests 22 of South America.”’ With illustrations. inches. New York: Longmans, Green & Co. 1902. $3.00. ‘“FHconomics of Forestry.’’ By Bern- hard E. Fernow. Pp. 520, 5% by 8 inches. New York: Thomas Y. Cro- well & Co. 1902. $1.50 net. ‘“‘A Tourin Mexico.’’ By Mrs James Edwin Morris. Withillustrations. Pp. 322, 5% by 8 inches. New York, Lon- don, Montreal: The Abbey Press. 1902. “The Elements of General Method.’’ By Paul Fountain. Pp. 306, 6 by 9 5) By Charles A. McMurry, Ph. D. Pp. © 331, 5 by 7% inches. New York: The Macmillan Co. $0.90. “Lakes of Southeastern Wisconsin.”’ From Wisconsin Geological and Natural History Survey. By N. M. Fenneman, Ph. D. With illustrations. Pp. 178, 6 by 9 inches. Published by the State. Madison, 1902. ““Red-men’s Roads.’’ By Archer Butler Hulbert. With illustrations. Pp. 37, 6 by ginches. Columbus, Ohio: Fred J. Heer & Co. Igoo. “Commercial Geography.’’ By Wal- ter H. Olin, Superintendent City Schools of Ottawa, Kansas. With many illus- trations. Pp. 260, 8 by toinches. ‘To- peka: Crane & Co. 1902. ‘* Highways and Byways in London.’’ By Mrs EK. T. Cook. With illustrations by Hugh Thomson and F. L. Griggs. Pp. 472, 514 by 8 inches. New York: The Macmillan Co. 1902. ‘The Egregious English.’”’ By An- gus McNeill. Pp. 210, 5% by 8 inches. New York: G. P. Putnam’sSons. 1903. ‘“’The Discoveries of the Norsemen in America, with Special Relation to Their Early Cartographical Representation.”’ By Joseph Fischer, S. J. Translated from the German by Basil H. Soulsby, B. A. With illustrations. Pp. 140, 7 by to inches. St Louis, Mo.: B. Her- der. 10903. Japanese Oyster Culture, by Bashford Dean, Assistant professor in Zoology in Columbia University, and published by Tue Nationa, GeocRAPHic MaGaZzineE the Fish Commission, contains the re- sults of a study of the Japanese oyster by the author in 1900-1901. In artifi- cial oyster culture Professor Dean con- cludes the Japanese are considerably ahead of the United States, but behind France and Holland. Whether the Japanese oyster can be cultivated suc- cessfully along our Pacific coast may only be answered by experiment. RECENT PUBLICATIONS BY THE U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. GAZETTEER of “‘Texas.’’ Henry Gannett. Pp. 164. With colored charts showing mean an- nual temperature, wooded areas, density of population, etc., and a large map of the state, prepared under the direction of Robert T. Hill. ‘“ A Gazetteer of Cuba.’’ Henry Gan- nett. Pp. 112. With colored charts and a map. “Fossil Flora of the John Day Basin.”’ Frank Hall Knowlton. Pp 154. With many illustrations. ‘““The Berea Grit Oil Sand in the Cadiz Quadrangle, Ohio.’’ W. T. Gris- wold. Pp. 42. With illustrations. ‘Tests for Gold and Silver in Shales from Western Kansas.’’ Waldemar Lindgren. Pp. Ig. “Results of Primary Triangulation and Primary Traverse, fiscal year 190I— o2.’’ H. M. Wilson, J. H. Renshavwe, E. M. Douglas and R. U. Goode. Pp. 164. With illustrations. ‘* Reconnaissance of the Borax De- posits of Death Valley and Mohave Desert.’’ Marius R. Campbell. Pp. 22. With illustration. ““Geology and Water Resources of the Snake River Plains of Idaho.’’ Israel C. Russell. Pp. 192. With many illus- trations. ‘‘ Bibliography and Index of North American Geology, Paleontology, Pe- trology and Mineralogy, for the year tgo1.’’ Fred Boughton Weeks. Pp. 144. ‘“Structural Details of the Green CC NaTIonaL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Mountain Region, and in Eastern New York.” T. Nelson Dale. Pp. 22. With illustrations. ‘“North American Geologic Forma- tion Names, Bibliography, Synonymy, and Distribution.’’ Fred Boughton Weeks. Pp. 448. Appalachian Forest Reserve. One of the most handsome of recent govern- ment publications is the large quarto 123 volume containing the ‘‘ Message from the President of the United States trans- mitting a Report of the Secretary of Ag- riculture in Relation to the Forests, Rivers, and Mountains of the Southern Appalachian Region,’’ issued by the Government Printing Office (1902). The report isan overwhelming array of facts showing the imperative necessity of making a great forest reservation of the Southern Appalachian region. NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Lack of space makes it necessary to post- pone publication of the proceedings of the So- ciety until next month. REGULAR MEETINGS. March 13.—‘‘The Work of the Geological Survey.’ Hon, Charles D. Walcott. Cosmos Club, 8 p. m. March 27.—“ The Work of the Library of Congress.’”’ Hon. Herbert Putnam. Cosmos CJub, 8 p. m. This is the last meeting of the season. POPULAR LECTURES. March 4.—‘‘ The United States—Mines and Mining.’’? Mr Charles Kirchoff, editor of Zhe fron Age. Wlustrated. Columbia Theater, 4.20 p.m. March 6,—‘‘ The Geographic Distribution of Insanity in the United States.’ Dr W. A. White, Director of the Binghamton State Hospital, New York, National Rifles’ Ar- mory, 8 p. m. March 11,—‘‘The United States—The Men who Make the Nation.’’ Vice-President W J McGee, LL. D. Columbia Theater, 4.20 p.m. March 20.—(The last lecture of the season. ) “*Captain John Smith and Old Virginia.’? Mr W. W. Ellsworth, of the Century Company. Illustrated. National Rifles’ Armory, 8 p.m. BY-LAWS OF THE NATIONAL GEO- GRAPHIC SOCIETY. ; ADOPTED May 16, 1902. ARTICLE I.—/Vame. The name of this Society is Zhe (National Geographic Society. ARTICLE II.—Obdject. The object of the Society is the increase and diffusion of geographic knowledge. ARTICLE III.—Membership. SECTION 1. The Society shall consist of mem- bers, honorary members, fellows, and patrons. Src. 2. Members shall be persons interested in geographic science. SEC. 3. Honorary members shall be persons who have attained eminence by the promotion of geographic science. They shall not be mem- bers of the corporation, nor shall they vote or hold office. SEC. 4. Fellows shall be persons engaged in scientific work pertaining to geography. They shall be members of the corporation. SEC. 5. Patrons shall be persons interested in geography who have contributed one thou- sand dollars or more to the objects of the So- ciety; they shall be entitled to all the privi- leges of membership for life. SEc. 6. The election of members, honorary members, fellows, and patrons shall be en- trusted to the Board of Managers. ARTICLE 1V.— Officers. SECTION I. The administration of the Soci- ety shall be entrusted to a Board of Managers composed of twenty-four members or fellows. eight of whom shall be elected by the Society at each annual meeting, to serve for three years, or until their successorsareelected. Of the eight members or fellows elected at each annual meeting, not less than four nor more than six shall be residents of the District of Columbia, A majority of the votes cast shall be necessary for election. SEC. 2. The Board of Managers shall elect 124 annually from their own number a President and a Vice-President, and shall elect annually a Treasurer and a Secretary. SEC. 3. The President shall preside at the meetings of the Society and of the Board of Managers, or may delegate this duty. The President and the Secretary shall sign all written contracts and obligations of the Society. SkEc. 4. In the absence of the President his duties shall devolve on the Vice-President. SEc. 5 The Treasurer shall have charge of the funds of the Society, under the direction of the Board of Managers, and shall make col- lections and disbursements and render an an- nual report, and his accounts shal] be audited by a committee of the Society, not members . of the Board, annually and at such other times as the Board may direct. SEc. 6. The Secretary shall record the pro- ceedings of the Society and of the Board of Managers, conduct correspondence, and make an annual report. Src. 7. The Board of Managers shall fill vacancies arising in the Board. SEc. 8. All officers shall serve until their successors are chosen. ARTICLE V.—Commiittees. SECTION I. The Board of Managers shall select annually from its own number an Ex- ecutive Committee. SEC. 2. There shall be standing committees on Publications, Communications, Admissions, Research, and Finance, whose chairmen shall be members of the Board of Managers. These committees shall be appointed immediately after the annual election of the President, to serve until their successors are designated. SEc. 3. The committees of the Society and of the Board of Managers shall be appointed by the President except when otherwise provided. The President shall be a member ex officio of every committee. ARTICLE VI.—/inanees. SECTION I. The fiscal year of the Society shall begin on the first day of January. SEc. 2. The annual dues of members shall be two dollars, payable in January. SEc. 3. Fellows shall pay an initiation fee of ten dollars on notice of election. SEc. 4. Members or fellows may commute annual dues and acquire life membership by the payment at one time of fifty dollars. Src. 5. Members or fellows whose dues re- main unpaid on March I shall be notified by the Treasurer that unless the dues are paid within one month they will be in arrears and not entitled to vote at the annual meeting, to receive the publications of the Society, or to Tue Nationa GrocrAPHic MaGAZINE purchase lecture tickets on members’ terms. Members or fellows one year in arrears shall, after formal notification, be regarded as hay- ing withdrawn from the Society. SEC. 6. The funds of the Society may be in- vested and loans may be negotiated in the inter- ests of the Society, and any other financial business germane to the purposes of the So- ciety may be transacted, by the Board of Man- agers. ARTICLE VII.—WMWVeetings. SECTION I. Regular meetings of the So- ciety shall be held on alternate Fridays from November until May. Src. 2. Special meetings may be ordered by the Board of Managers or called by the Presi- dent. Sec. 3. The annual meeting shall be held in the District of Columbia on the second Friday in January. Src. 4. Twenty members or fellows shall constitute a quorum. Src. 5 Regular meetings of the Board of Managers shall be held on the same days as the regular meetings of the Society; special meet- ings may be held at the call of the President or on notice signed by five members of the Board: Provided, That for any of its own meet- ings the Board may substitute meetings of the Executive Committee. Sec. 6. Lectures and lecture courses may be provided by the Foard of Managers. Free ad- mission to such lectures shall not be a preroga- tive of membership, but tickets shall be sold to members and fellows on more favorable terms than to non-members: Provided, That each life member who acquired life membership prior to the year rgor shall be entitled to two admissions to each lecture and course. ARTICLE VIII.—/Publications. The Society shall publish a journal or peri- odical under the title, Zhe National Geo- graphic Magazine, which shall be sent to all members and fellows of the Society not in ar- rears, and may be placed on sale. ARTICLE IX.—Amendments. These By-Laws may be amended by a two- thirds vote of the members present at any regular meeting, provided the proposed amend- ments are reported by the Board of Managers, and provided that notice thereof has been sent to all members of the Society not less than ten nor more than sixty days before the meeting. The publication of proposed amendments in The National Geographic Magazine shall be deemed a notice within the meaning of this article. Office Hours: 8.30 A. M. to 5 P. M. Telephone, Main 471 NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY OFFICES Rooms 107, 108 Corcoran Building Fifteenth and F Sts. N. W., Washington, D. C. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL A President W J McGEE 6 6 Vice-President JOHN JOY EDSON c ° . : Treasurer Ar ENR es ote - Secretary ELIZA R, SCIDMORE . - Foreign Secretary BOARD OF MANAGERS 1904-1903 1902-1904 1903-1905 CHARLES J. BELL GEORGE DAVIDSON WM. M. DAVIS JOHN JOY EDSON MARCUS BAKER A. GRAHAM BELL HENRY F. BLOUNT DAVID T. DAY F. V. COVILLE A. W. GREELY D. C. GILMAN ANGELO HEILPRIN S. H. KAUFFMANN RUSSELL HINMAN G. K, GILBERT WILLIS L. MOORE W J McGEE A. J. HENRY ISRAEL C. RUSSELL GIFFORD PINCHOT O. P, AUSTIN R. D. SALISBURY ~ O. H. TITTMANN C. HART MERRIAM The National Geographic Magazine is sent free of charge to all members of the National Geographic Society Recommendation for Membership in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY The following form is enclosed for use in the nomination of persons for membership Please detach and fill in blanks and send to the Secretary Dues: Annual membership, $2; Life membership, $50. If check be enclosed, please make it payable to order of the National Geographic Society, and, if at a distance from Washington, remit by New York draft or post-office money-order. for membership in the Society. ““With its head in the clouds.” “Better than going abroad, and the best preparation for a trip PIKES REAK,; abroad.’ PORTLAND SUMMER SCHOOL One of the most famous mountains Sen in America, stands about midway Po rtlan d between Denver and Pueblo. Forty years ago, it took as many days to Ss ummer School reach it as it now takes hours, so improved are the transportation fa- JULY 13 TO AUGUST 21 cilities. The 2 NEW YORK CENTRAL LINES Successor to the famous Sauveur i Summer School, founded in 1875 at and their connections offer fast and Amherst College. luxurious trains, with only one change between New York or Boston and important points in Colorado. Courses in modern and ancient lan- guages, culture of the speaking voice, instrumental and vocal music. : , A copy of ‘‘America’s Winter Resorts” For illustrated circular address : will be sent free, on receipt of a two-cent stamp, by George H. Daniels, General Passenger Agent, New York Central & ARNOLD WERNER-SPANHOOFD Hudson River Railroad, Grand Central A ‘ ion, New York. Central High School, - Washington, D.C. Station New sven. 7 WE make a Specialty of HIGH GRADE WORK pr Scientiric IENTIFIC ao TECHNICAL. NICAL PUBLICATIONS SEN n*) ENGRAVERS “Grn fr PHicADeE LPHIA PLATES To PRINT UN ONE_OR more CoLons 0s Gate anni ust PENo The Manhattan Press-Glipping Bureau ARTHUR CASSOT, FProprietor NEW YORK (Knickerbocker Building) LONDON COR. FIFTH AVENUE AND 14TH STREET, NEW YORK Will supply you with all personal reference and clippings on any subject from all the papers and periodicals published here and abroad. Our large staff of readers can gather for you more valuable material on any current subject than you can get in a lifetime. TERMS: 100 clippings . . $ 5.00 250 clippings . . . $ 12.00 500 clippings . . . $22.00 1,000 clippings . . . $35.00 COMPLETE UNPREJUDICED ACCURATE NEW AND ENLARGED EDITION The Great Boer War BWV Ne (COIN AIN 1D)@Yoe)s A Book by the Accepted Historian of the War in South Africa, which no student of history or con- temporary events can afford to be without. HIS is the first really accurate and complete history of the Boer War. Without doubt it will be recognized for many years to come as the leading authority on the subject. The present edition contains a large amount of new material and new maps; in fact, the additions com- prise all data which recent investigations have proved to be reliable and of importance. Price, $2.50 net; postpaid, $2.72 New York McCcur_e, Poitiers & Co., HENRY ROMEIKE'S BUREAU OF PRESS CUTTINGS iro Fifth Avenue, New York Reads every paper of importance published in the United States, and through its European agencies in London, Paris, Berlin and Vienna every paper of importance published in Europe and the British Colonies. One subscription on any given subject will bring notices from the United States, and if desired also from the European papers. WRITE FOR TERMS The Popular Science Monthly EDITED BY PROFESSOR J. MCKEEN CATTELL Columbia University With the Codperation of the Leading American Men of Science For more than thirty years THE POPULAR SCIENCE Monty has been the standard scientific magazine of the world. It should be found : r. In every library, where in fact it will nearly always be found. The recently published lists of magazines in the Chicago and Washington libraries show that the Monty 7s subscribed for by more libraries than any other magazine. The New York Public Library takes 35 copies. The publishers would be pleased to learn the names of any libraries in which the MONTHLY cannot be found. 2. In the hands of scientific men, who wish to follow the general forward movement of science. He who only knows his own science does not know that. Men of science must keep in touch with the general public, and can do so by reading a magazine that represents the best that the public can read and understand. They should not merely read the MONTHLY 772 @ library ; they should own it, keep ut, and bind 2t. 3. In the offices of physicians and other professional men. It is for the advantage of both the physician and his patients that they should be permitted to see and read a magazine representing the best ideals of science rather than the fiction and superficial science found in most magazines. A hundred thousand American physicians would find a subscription to the MONTHLY a desirable investment. 4g. Inevery home of intelligent and cultivated people. ven when the head of the Samily has but little time for reading, there are older children whose taste must be formed, who should learn to discriminate the true from the false, who should become acquainted with science, the most important factor in modern civilization. The publishers of THE POPULAR SCIENCE MONTHLY might be expected to over- estimate the tmportance of a journal in which they are interested. Instead of praising it they preter to show its character by quoting the titles of some of the articles that have appeared in recent volumes. They believe that those familiar with science will recognize these articles to be timely and interesting, and will know that the authors write with authority, being among the leading American and foreign men of science. Indeed, the publishers do not need to insist on the merits of the journal, for these are acknowledged by all who are competent to judge, and are adequately expressed by the authoritative opinions quoted below. TREE Si@ PENG iakwessts Publishers Sub-Station 84, New York City ‘Annual Subscription, $3.00 Single Numbers, 30 cents The Popular Science Monthly Entered in the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa’, as second-class matter ~ Contents of January. Number The Missouri Botanical Garden, Professor Wie tam TRELEASE, The Saying of Vanishing Data. Avrren C. Hap- ~ DON: America’s Distrust of the Immigrant, A. J, Mo- Lavex.in, Variation in Man and Woman, Hayrxroce Exxis, The Engineering Mind. J. C.Survertanp. : Dy oA, Ly Postgraduate Degrees in Absentia. Benenicr. Mental ‘and Moral Heredity in Royalty,’ Dr; & Faepgricn’ Apams Woons. Mendel’s‘Law, W. J. Sprzuman, The Progress of Science; The Convocation of Scientific Societies; The Carnégie Institution; The British Education Bill; Ogden N. Rood; The Proposed Enlarge- ment of the Naples Station; The New York Aquarium; Are Solutions Mechanical Mixtures or New Substances; Scientific Items, Contents of February Number Dr. Carroll D.- Wright: The Science: of Natronomy. Eat, The Evolution of ‘Sex in Plants. Brapiey M. Davis. The Heonomte Importance of Forestry. Overton W. Price, Mental and Moral Heredity in Royalty. Dr, Faeper1ox Abas Woops, The Smithsonian Institution, Recent Jewish Immigration tothe United States. Rooer Mitcrert, The Behavior of Blind Animals, Professor Wre- LEY “Mitts, : Preyentive Medicine, General Gronon M, Srzrn- BERG, A Statistical Study of Eininent Men, Professor J, MeKewn Carvent, Professor Asaru Professor Scientific Literature: Biographies of Eminent Chemists, The Progress of Science: The American Association for the Advance- ment of Science; The Recognition of the Im- perience of Preventive Medicine; A Newly écognized Factor in American Anemias; “The Germ of Laziness”’; Carnegie Institution of Washington; Scfentific Items. WarThe MONTHLY will be sent to new subscribers for six months for One Dollar SUBSCRIPTION ORDER To THE SCIENCE PRESS, Publishers of THE POPULAR SCIENCE MONTHLY, Sub-Station 84, New York City: : ; Please find enclosed check or money order for three dollars, subscription to THH POPULAR SCIENCE MONTHLY Hee one Year, Cesinning, a3 L908. Please find éenciosed from a new subscriber one dollar (sent at your risk); subscription for six months to THE POPULAR SCT- ENCE MONTHLY, beginning SINGLE NUMBERS, 30 CENTS VEAARLY SUBSCRIPTION, $3,00 Soe SCIENCE PRESS _ GARRISON-ON- HUDSON, N. Y. 41 North Queen St., LANCASTER, PA. SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK SPECIAL MAPS PUBLISHED BY THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Map of the Philippines (5 et 2 inches x 3 feet). Prepared under the direction of the War Department. Map of South Africa (46 x33 inches). see Prepared under the direction of the War Departutent: SP ei et ia Map of Northeastern China (36x28 inches), ‘ Prepared under the direction of the War Department. Map of the Chinese. Empire, Japan, ae the Russian- Manchutian Rail way ({1x7% inches). fae Map of Alaska (28x 24 inches). aie cea a Prepared under the direction of ‘the vu. Si Bonet ‘ein or ; A Series of Twelve Maps on the Alaskan Boundary ue. ee Prepared under the direction of Hon. John W. Foster, ex-Secretary of ‘State. Chart of the World on Mercator’s Projection (48x 27 inches): Pee Bee ee Prepared under the direction of ae Hip eerapnic ie i gies e Map of Cuba (18x72 inches). ene - Prepared under the direction of Robert r, Hill. ROSH A Series of Twenty-five Full-page Charts, showing storm tracks end methods of weather forecasting. Prepared under the direction of Dr, Willis 1. Moore; Chief v.S. Weather Bureas, By Mail for Twenty-five. Cents Each. — NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC society CORCORAN imlaragist hea WASHINGTON, D. = ; Office Furniture | § Our Depatinienit of Office Furniture is with ev. ing: requisite to the ft ae of a m pen Ofstes Bank a Committee” Combinati 2 filing Devices; Office See tees ee ys holies eeaiise, ae. AAA A MH eke Sectional 1 Book Case. Is the case for the home or office. » Every one has 6 some books which he sashes ss RE ner When there are not enough to fll an ordinary book « case, One or two sections may be had fy at a very small expense, and as the nuinber of volumes increases additional sections can. b be added—and the book case grows as book space is needed. Whether you have one ® section-or more, you have a complete book case, We carry the ‘¢ Gunn,’ the “‘Casler,”* ® and the“ Danner Bae has its special Regier oe the most popular eee eee “WOODWARD. ‘AN-D» LOTHROP New York , - Washington . Paris 1% S $1.15 per Section . -. Up Without Glass, in Solid Oak . * A special finish to suit the woodwork of : ) any particular room made to order with-. ® out additional cost. We shall’be pleased @ to have you call and examine then. ot ® THIRD FLOOR s, seeeeceeeceagcees ceceeeeesecedecceesaceececececeste ececeecet PRESS OF JUDD & SRT WEILER WAGHINGRON! Hit; ADE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC Vol. X1V APRIL, 1903 CONTENTS REINDEER IN ALASKA. BY GILBERT H. GROSVENOR, ILLUSTRATED : . ‘ : : ; > ; : j w RALEIGH ROCK. PEELE TE? ee Consct YUCATAN FIBER. BY E. H. THOMPSON, U. S. CONSUL AT. PROGRESO, ee /TLLUSTRATED THE ERUPTION OF THE SOUFRIERE OF ST VINCENT, 1812 EXPLORATIONS AMONG THE” WRANGELL sia a ALASKA . , SCOTTISH ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION ‘THE SURVEY OF THE GRAND cANYON ‘GEOGRAPHY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO “THE ASCENT OF MOUNT EVEREST ee IRRIGATION PLANS IN FIVE STATES “GEOGRAPHIC NOTES - Published for the National doses Society By McClure, Phillips & Co., of New York “$2.50 a Year 25 Cehts a Number Entered at the Post-office in Washington, D. C,, as Second-class Mall Matter, Zs Nationa Coe Society, of | ton D. ©. by McCrure, Pam gh All communications should be add essed a Coma aes Washington, D. oe Busi. mess communications may also be addressed t McClure, co ~ o ati ig East iy ee aoe pie = oS ae 35 ‘CENTS: 4 (NUMBER $2 GILBERT 8 a os : “Baltor: 8. _ @ROSVENOR ; aa w JMcGHE fe ee , Ethnologist in Gue. crea oe _ American Bitnolegy re ‘e. HART MERRIAM Chief of the Biolo sal sernek U. Ney “Department of-Agriculture : f ‘BLIZA RUHAMAH SCIDMORE | “Author: of, Ses the Garden nof the East,’ MARCUS BAKER ees oe arnegie. Institution. ‘WILLIS L. MOORE - Chief of the Weather Bureaus U, Ss. See ciesiak of Ticidaeven at a " Principal of Phelps School, Wash ington, BITIIS UL IOATY & SUISSOID ToIpUloy Jo plop “SDM fivads *M 'H Jseursua soryd Aq ydersojoyd v mony Vor SVs Nic. 4 @ WASHINGTON THEI | | NATIONAL GEOGRAPIBIC MAGA ZINIE APRIL, 1903 REINDEER IN ALASKA By Grrspertr H. Grosvenor WELVE years ago Dr Sheldon Jackson brought his first herd of 16 reindeer across Bering Strait from Siberia and started his rein- deer colony at Unalaska, off the bleak coast of Alaska. Many then smiled at the experiment and declared his plan for stocking the great barrens of northwest- ern Alaska with thousands of the ani- mals which for centuries had been indis- pensable to the natives of Lapland and Siberia was impracticable and wasteful of time and good money. But the ex- periment prospered from the very first. Other reindeer, numbering nearly 1,000 in all, during the succeeding years were brought over from Siberia. Today there are nearly 6,000 head in the various herds distributed along the Alaskan coast from Point Barrow to Bethel. The existence of the 20,000 natives of north- western Alaska, as well as the success of the miners who are beginning to throng into the interior of the territory in the far north, are dependent upon these domestic reindeer; their clothing, their food, their transportation, their utensils, and their shelter are all furnished them by the reindeer. The reindeer enterprise is no longer an experiment although still in its in- fancy. ‘There are 400,000 square miles of barren tundra in Alaska where no horse, cow, sheep, or goat can find pas- ture; but everywhere on this vast ex- panse of frozen land the reindeer can find the long, fibrous, white moss which is hisfood. ‘There is plenty of room for 10,000,000 of these hardy animals. The time is coming when Alaska will have great reindeer ranches like the great cattle ranches of the southwest, and they will be no less profitable. ‘The story of the inception and growth of the reindeer enterprise in Alaska is very interesting and is not generally known. During an extended trip of in- spection of the missionary stations and government schools in Alaska in the summer of 1890*, Dr Sheldon Jackson was impressed with the fact that the natives in arctic and subarctic Alaska were rapidly losing the sources of their food supply. Each year the whales were going farther and farther north, beyond the reach of the natives who had * Dr Sheldon Jackson first visited Alaska in 1877, in the interest of schools and missions. He made a second trip in 1879. Other visits followed, and since his appointment as Gen- eral Agent of Education in Alaska in 1885 he has made annual visits to the territory. 128 sta NaTionaL GsocrapHic MAGAZINE From a photograph by R. N. Hawley, M. D. Reindeer on the Siberian Beach, Hobbled, waiting to be Loaded on the Bear for ‘Transportation to Alaska For 20 years the revenue cutter Gear has been engaged in Arctic work. It has saved the lives of hundreds of wrecked whalers, and contributed more to the comfort and safety of the settlements along the Alaskan coast than any vessel in the service. no steamships in which to pursue them; the walrus, which formerly had been seen in herds of thousands, were disap- pearing; the seals were becoming exter- minated, and in winter the Eskimo had to tramp 15 to 20 miles out on the ice before he could catch one. ‘The modern hunter, with his steam launches and rapid-fire guns, had found the whales, walrus, and seals such easy prey that he was ruthlessly destroying them. Also the wild caribou, that the native had easily captured before, had been fright- ened away and was rarely seen. Not only was the Eskimo losing his food, but what in an arctic climate is no less important, his clothing as well. The whalebone, the ivory tusks of the wal- rus, the seal skin, and the oil had given him means of barter with the Siberian traders across the Strait, from whom he obtained reindeer skins to keep him warm in winter. Dr Jackson saw that unless something was done at once the United States would have to choose between feeding the 20,000 and more natives or letting them starvetodeath. The latter course was impossible; the former rather ex- pensive, as supplies would have to be carried some 3,000 miles from Seattle. The more enterprising Siberian, living on the opposite side of the Strait under practically the same conditions of arctic cold, got along very nicely, as he had great herds of domestic reindeer to fall back upon when game was scarce. ‘The same moss which covered so many thou- sands of miles of the plains of arctic Siberia was seen everywhere in Alaska. The tame reindeer of Siberia was prac- tically the same animal as the wild caribou of Alaska, changed by being domesticated for centuries. Could not the Eskimo be made self-supporting by giving him reindeer herds of his own ? 129 REINDEER IN ALASKA Reindeer Herd, Siberia U.S, Revenue Cutter Lear in the offing From a photograph by A. Weeks, M. D. Tue Narionan GrocrapHic MaGaZzIne iL 3S ‘SO cw “veds "a ‘Hy Aq ydeasojoyd v wo, vysvpy ‘puvs] somoIMe’y 49 ‘I9puley Surpropwy «ce tN TENN NE REINDEER IN ALASKA Outline Map Showing Government Reindeer Stations in Alaska On his return to the United States, during the winter of 1891, Dr Sheldon Jackson, in his annual report to Con- gress, asked for an appropriation to provide the money for importing a few deer. Congress was not convinced of the wisdom of such action, but several private persons were so interested that they placed $2,000 at Dr Jackson’s dis- posal to begin the experiment; the first deer were brought over that year. It was not long, however, before the gov- ernment realized the importance of the * Congressional appropriations for the intro- duction into Alaska of domestic reindeer from Siberia are as follows: 1894. $6,000 UC|XO)si couod $25,000 i3'0 fy eG 7,500 UCM guac0d 25,000 BOGOR elle: 7,500 UO Wononooe 25,000 LOO Fioverse ries U2,OOOM NE LOOZ eee 25,000 EEG Serato iio) 12,500 —- RS GO yeas =:-1- 12,500 Total.. $158,000 Congress entrusts the general charge of the work to the Bureau of Education, of which Dr William T. Harris is the distinguished movement, and in 1894 appropriated the sum of $6,000 to continue the work. Later the appropriation was increased, and during the last several years has amounted to $25,000 annually. * The Siberians were at first unwilling to part with any of their reindeer. They were superstitious and above all afraid of competition and loss of trade across the strait. Capt. M. A. Healy, who was commissioned to purchase the deer in 1891, was obliged to sail from village to village for 1,500 miles along the Si- head ; the formulation of plans and their exe- cution is entrusted to Dr Sheldon Jackson, general agent of education in Alaska. Dr Harris, in his annual reports to Congress, has vigorously urged the importance of the work, and to him credit is due for a large share of its success. Capt. M. A. Healy and the many officers of the revenue cutter service, whose vessels have year after year carried the agents of the bureau back and forth and brought the reindeer from Siberia without charge, have also contributed to the success of the reindeer enterprise. Tur NarionaL GrocraPHic MaGAZzIne 132 TOe}G Ioopul9yY I9][T, Opry ysis Aymeyz v uo suniwyg strsig “T VL TIN Jpruryosurapy Aq ydessojoyd ve wow VAG - \ REINDEER IN ALASKA berian coast before he found an owner willing to barter his reindeer for Amer- ican goods. None would sell the deer forcash. Of recent years the Siberians have been but little less reluctant to part with their deer though they could easily spare many thousands from their vast herds without knowing it. The first deer brought over were from the Chukches herds—a tough and hardy breed. Two years ago Lieuten- 133 Part Clarence. His experiences during his remarkable journey were most inter- esting, and are admirably described in his report to Dr Sheldon Jackson, pub- lished in 1902. THE ESKIMO AS HERDERS With careful training the Eskimo make excellent herders. They are by nature good imitators, though not in- ventive, and readily learn how to take Krom a photograph by EH. P. Bertholf Traveling With Reindeer in Summer ant Bertholf was commissioned to go to Siberia and try to purchase some of the Tunguse stock, which are larger, stronger and sturdier. Starting from St Petersburg, after a long journey across Siberia, much of it by sled, he succeeded in purchasing several hun- dred Tunguse near Ola, hired a steamer, embarked the reindeer at Ola with 2,500 bags of reindeer moss, and finally landed 200 of the animals in good condition at care of the reindeer, to throw the lasso, to harness and drive the deer, and to watch the fawns. Siberian herders were at first imported to teach them, and later the more intelligent and efficient Lap- landers, who have learned by centuries *** Report on the Introduction of Domestic Reindeer into Alaska.’? By Sheldon Jackson, LL. D., 1901. Appendix, Expedition to Sibe- ria, report of Lieutenant EK. P. Bertholf, pp. 130-168. 134 of experience to give to the breeding of reindeer the care that we give to the breeding of cattle. In the winter of 1898 sixty-three Laplanders and their families volunteered to go to Alaska, the U. S. Government paying the ex- penses of their long journey of 10,c00 miles. When their term of enlistment expired some reénlisted, some of them went home again, but the majority turned miners. Every one will be glad to know that at least two-thirds of the Froni a photograph by E. P. Bertholt Breaking a Path Through Deep Snow whole number made large fortunes in the Cape Nome gold fields. ‘The reindeer herders have to bewatch- ful. Now and then reckless miners try to plunder the herds, or by their care- lessness set fire to the moss. A fire will sweep over the moss barrens, lick- ing up every fiber of the moss, as it sweeps over our western prairies. A moss fire is even more destructive, for Tue Nationa, GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE many years pass before the moss will grow again. At the end of a year’s service the government makes a gift to deserving herders of two or more reindeer. REINDEER RAISING AS AN INDUSTRY When one considers that raising rein- deer in Alaska is simple and the profits. enormous, one is surprised that as yet no one has really gone into the reindeer business, especially at Dawson, where a . rich market awaits the rein- deer farmer. A fawn during the first four years costs the owner less than $1 a year. At the end of the four years it will bring at the mines from $50. to $100 for its meat, or if trained to the sled or for the pack, is easily worth $100 to $150. The fawns are very healthy and but few die; the does are prolific, and after they are two years of age add a fawn to the herd each year for ten years. Last year, out of 50: does two years and more of agein one herd, 48 had fawns, -and of these only five died, three of which were lost through accidents or by the carelessness of the herder. The reindeer are so gre- garious and timid that one herder can easily guard 1,000. head. The herder knows that if a few stray off he need not look for them as they will soon become frightened and rejoin the main herd. : The does make almost as good sle deer as the bulls and geldings. They are slightly smaller and less enduring. The Chukches deer cost in Siberia about $4.00 a head for a full-grown doe or bull. The fawns born in Alaska are larger and heavier than the parent stock. b 35 REINDEER IN ALASKA Milking Reindeer ) Teller Reindeer Station From a photograph by Tappan Adney Tue Nationa, GrocrapHic MaGazine Freighting with Reindeer—Cape Prince of Wales REINDEER IN ALASKA From a photograph by E. P. Bertholft Traveling Deerback Through Deep Snow The Tunguse deer cost nearly $7.50 apiece. By theaddition of the Tunguse breed it is hoped that the Alaska stock will be improved and toughened. The reindeer cow gives about one teacupful of very rich milk, nearly as thick as the best cream, and making delicious cheese. Mixed with a little water, the milk formsa refreshing drink. The Siberians and Laplanders save the blood of slaughtered deer and serve it in powdered form. From the sinews tough thread is obtained. REINDEER EXPRESS The Alaskan reindeer can hardly equal the speed of the Lapland deer, which Paul du Chaillu* describes as making from 150 to 200 miles a day, and sometimes 20 to 25 miles down hill *“The Land of the Long Night,” Paul du Chaillu. Chas. Scribner’s Sons. inasingle hour. A pair of them can pull a load of 500 to 700 pounds at the rate of 35 miles a day and keep it up weeks at a time. W. A. Kjellmann drove his reindeer express one winter 95 miles in a single day. Reindeer teams during the past win- ter carried the United States mail from Nome to Candle City, on the Arctic Ocean, a distance of 260 miles. ‘The teams had heavy loads of passengers and freight and made the distance in eight days. Dog teams would have re- quired fifteen to twenty days for the trip. The reindeer can travel at night as wellas in the daylight, and thus during the long Arctic night when dogs are inefhcient transportation is always pos- sible with a reindeer team. The reindeer make good packers in summer. One hundred and fifty pounds is a fair load. ‘They also can be ridden 138 in the saddle, but not with much com- fort until the rider learns how to adjust himself. In the Tunguse country the natives use their deer in summer as we would a mule or horse. It is no un- common sight to see a Tunguse trotting along the shore deerback. Lieutenant Bertholf describes the cara- vans of reindeer sleds in northeastern From a photograph by E. P. Bertholf Riding in Summer Alaska. Over 1,ooosleds leave Ola (see map) during the winter in caravans of about tooeach. A caravan of 100 sleds ismanaged by 1omen. Some years ago the Russian Government used horses on the caravan route from Ola to the Kolima River, but recently substituted reindeer, and now saves $60,000 yearly by the change. Tue Nationa, GrocrarpHic MAGAZINE The illustration * on page 134 shows the leaders of Lieutenant Bertholf’s party breaking a path through snow that reached to the belly of the deer. A strong wiry deer, unmounted, was driven first. In the deep snow he could advance only by jumps, but his leaps broke the way somewhat for the next few deer, who were also unmounted. After a dozen or more un- mounted deer had passed by, deer ridden by a boy and girl broke the path still further until deer with heavy loads could pass. Lieutenant Berth- olf in this way broke his path for 160 miles through the deep snow. When the caravan halts the deer are turned out to pasture untethered and allowed to wander as they will. The driver uses a switch to touch up the slothful, but ‘‘some of the old deer do not seem to minda switch any more than does anarmy mule.’’ The illustration on page 142 shows a number of reindeer digging up the snow with their powerful hoofs to get at the moss beneath the snow. As soon as spring comes the deer abandons his diet of moss, which seems to be most nutritive in winter, for willow sprouts, green grass, and mushrooms. The hoof of the reindeer is as wide as that of a good-sized steer and prevents him from settling down into damp snow or miry soil. *For the exceedingly interesting series of illustrations that accompany this article, the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE is in- debted to Dr Sheldon Jackson and Dr William Hamilton. Les) REINDEER IN ALASKA Tethered During a Halt 140 Tue NarionaL GeocrapHic Macazine From a photograph by A. Weeks, M. D. A Siberian Woman and Daughter REINDEER REINDEER LOANED BY THE GOVERN- MENT The U. S. Government loans a cer- tain number of the reindeer to the mission stations, or to individuals who have shown their ability, reserving the right, after three or five years, of call- ing upon the mission station or the indi- vidual for the same number of deer as composed the original herd loaned. In 1894 the Congregational mis- sion at Cape Prince of Wales was granted the loan of 100 deer. ‘The mission has since paid back the loan, and now possesses in its own right one thousand head. A few of the herds, notably that at Cape Prince of Wales, have grown so large that the owners are able to kill off some of the extra males for food for the families of the herders, and to sell others to the butchers in the neighboring mining camps. Last year deer for slaughter brought from $60 to $100 each, while for male deer train- ed to harness miners gave as much as $150 apiece. The herders at this same station earned last winter $600 in gold for freight- ing with their reindeer to the mining camps. The deer were worked in dou- ble trace harness like horses, and hauled on sleds 790 pounds each. Of the 60 individual owners of do- mestic reindeer in Alaska today, 44 are Eskimo. Most of them have served a five-year apprenticeship, and having earned their deer are competent to care for them. IN ALASKA I41 Each owner has his own individual mark, which is branded on the left or right ear of each of his deer. IMPORTANCE OF REINDEER TO MISSION STATIONS The Bureau of Education hopes that in time each mission station will possess a herd of atleast 5,000 head. A rein- Lieutenant Bertholf Mounted on Reindeer, Showing the Ability of the Reindeer to Carry 210 Pounds deer herd at a mission station in arctic or subarctic Alaska means, says Dr Jackson : First. The permanence of the mis- sion. Without it the natives are away from home a larger fortion of the year in search of food, and, since the advent of the miners, are inclined to leave their ny in ay bases a es Copyright, 1899 Charles Scribner’s Sons Reindeer Digging Up the Snow to Get the Moss Beneath Republished from ‘‘Land of the Long Night,’’ by Paul du Chaillu, by courtesy of the publishers homes and congregate in the American villages at the mines, where they live by begging and immorality and soon disappear from the face of the earth. Second. It affords the missionary the opportunity of rewarding and en- couraging those families that give evi- dence of being teachable by establish- ing them in the reindeer industry, and thus greatly promoting their material interests. Third. With the increase of the herd it becomes a source of revenue through the sale of the surplus males at remu- nerative prices tothe miners and butch- ers. Ina few years this revenue should be sufficient to entirely support the mis- sion and thereby relieve the treasury of the central Missionary Society. Fourth. The possession of a herd in- sures to the mission family a continuous supply of fresh meat. Thisto a family which is compelled to live largely upon salted and canned meats and canned vegetables is of no small benefit, pro- moting their comfort, health, and use- fulness. Fifth. Reindeertrained to harness and sleds greatly increase the efficiency and the comfort of the missionary in minis- tering to outlying native settlements. REINDEER FROM LAPLAND The vast majority of the American people have an idea that the reindeer experiment in Alaska proved a failure long ago, simply because of the widely advertised unsuccessful attempt in 1898 REINDEER IN ALASKA 143 From a photograph by A. Weeks, M. D. A Siberian, the Owner of 10,000 Head of Reindeer, and a Cossack Official Tue Nationa, GeocraPHic MaGAZINE , 144 Ipjvudtog Aq dv. ZOOL 1SO}OYd BULONT ( So[v M jo 9 oll i Iq odv 2) jooyss orqug jo sidng REINDEER of bringing deer from Lapland. Only once have reindeer been brought from Europe for Alaska, and that attempt was unsuccessful, not because the rein- deer could not live in their new home, but because of the wretched transpor- tation given them from Seattle to their Alaskan destination. In December, 1897, rumors were started that American miners in the Yukon Valley were in danger of starva- tion. Congress appropriated a large sum for their relief, and commissioned Dr Sheldon Jackson to go to Norway and Sweden to purchase 500 reindeer broken to the harness, with sleds, har- ness and drivers, for hauling supplies from the head of Lynn Canal to the destitute miners, 1,000 miles away. Dr Jackson reached Europe in Janu- ary, purchased 526 trained deer, gath- ered 68 Lapp drivers with their families, embarked them all on one ship, and sailed for New York from Trondhjem, February 4. Only one deer died on the voyage of 24 days, though the trip was a most tempestuous one and the deer in pens on the deck were drenched day and night by the seas that broke over them. At New York special trains met the expedition and carried them across the continent to Seattle without the loss of asingle deer. Then the troubles began. The supply of moss brought from Norway became exhausted, and the deer did not like the grass of Seattle. There was delay in securing a vessel to transport the expedition to the head of Lynn Canal, and further delays at Lynn Canal and no moss to be found there. Nearly 300 of the reindeer died of starvation before the moss fields at the head of the Chilkat River, about 50 miles from Lynn Canal, were reached. The remaining 200 were too weakened to endure the long journey to the Yukon Valley, and the relief expedition had to be abandoned, but fortunately not be- fore the country had learned that the miners in the Yukon had abundant sup- IN ALASKA 145 plies, and that the relief expedition had been unnecessary. The Laplanders who had been brought over were distributed among the rein- deer stations and employed to teach the natives. RELIEF OF WHALERS AT POINT BARROW The first forcible realization of the wisdom of the government in stationing reindeer herds in Alaska came to the American people in the winter of 1897- "98. In the fall of 1897 word was re- ceived that eight whaling ships had been imprisoned in the ice near Point Bar- row, and that the 400 American seamen aboard were stranded without food for the long winter till the ice should open in July. No vessel of relief could get within 2,000 miles of the party, or nearer than Denver isto Boston. There was no known method by which pro- visions could be dragged overland. If the government had not five years be- fore commenced the introduction of the reindeer, most of these 4oo men would have starved to death before help reached them. Fortunately there were large herds of reindeer at Cape Nome and at Cape Rodney, over one thousand miles by land from Point Barrow, or farther than Chicago is from New York. The government hurried the revenue cutter Geary north from Seattle, carrying three brave volunteers—Lieut. David H. Jarvis, Lieut. Ellsworth P. Bertholf, and Dr Samuel J. Call. The three men were landed December 16, 1897, at Cape Vancouver, obtained some dog teams from the natives, and commenced their dreary journey of 2,000 miles through the Arctic night to Point Barrow. They collected about 450 reindeer from the herds at Rodney and Nome, and then, with reindeer instead of dog sleds and with Mr W. T. Lopp, agent of the American Missionary Society at Cape Prince of Wales, and Charley Arisar- took, a native, and several herders, they 146 pushed on through the storms and bitter cold of an Arctic winter, driving the deer before them. After a journey of three months and twelve days, on March 29, 1898, they reached the destitute whalers, just in time to save them from great suffering and death. In heroism, pluck, and endurance the journey of these men has rarely been equaled. Congress voted its thanks to the gallant rescuers and awarded them special medals of honor, but in the ex- citement aroused throughout the coun- try by the rapid succession of events of the Spanish-American war their work was almost unnoticed. Since that time a reindeer herd has been kept at Point Barrow so there is no longer danger of ice-imprisoned whalers perishing from starvation. The experience also showed the faithfulness of the Eskimo. Mr Lopp had left his wife at his station, the only white per- son among 400 natives, but during his absence of nearly five months she re- ceived nothing but constant courtesy and kindness from them. DEVELOPMENT OF ARCTIC AND SUB- ARCTIC ALASKA DEPENDENT ON THE REINDEER The original motive in bringing the reindeer to Alaska was purely philan- thropic—to give the native a permanent food supply. Since then the discovery of large and valuable gold deposits upon the streams of arctic and subarctic Alaska has made the reindeer a necessity for the white man as well as for the Eskimo. Pre- vious to the discovery of gold there was nothing to attract the white settler to that desolate region, but with the knowl- edge of valuable gold deposits thousands will there make their homes, and towns and villages are already springing into existence. But that vast region, with its perpet- ual frozen subsoil, is without agricult- ural resources. Groceries, breadstufts, THe NationaL GeoGrarHic MAGAZINE etc., must be procured from the outside. Steamers upon the Yukon can bring food to the mouths of the gold-bearing streams, but the mines are often many miles up these unnavigable streams. Already great difficulty is experienced in securing sufficient food by dog-train transportation and the packing of the natives. The miners need reindeer transportation. Again, the development of the mines and the growth of settlements upon streams hundreds of miles apart neces- sitate some method of speedy travel. A dog team on a long journey will make on an average from 15 to 20 miles a day, and in some sections cannot make the trip at all, because they cannot carry with them a sufficient supply of food for the dogs, and can procure none in the country through which they travel. To facilitate and render possible fre- quent and speedy communication be- tween these isolated settlements and growing centers of American civiliza- tion, where the ordinary roads of the states have no existence and cannot be maintained except at an enormous ex- pense, reindeer teams that require no beaten roads, and that at the close of a day’s work can be turned loose to for- age for themselves, are essential. The introduction of reindeer into Alaska makes possible the development of the mines and the support of a million miners. The reindeer is to the far north what the camel is to desert regions, the ani- mal which God has provided and adapted for the peculiar, special conditions which exist. The greater the degree of cold, the better the reindeer thrives. Last winter a party with a reindeer team made a day’s journey with the temper- ature at 73 degrees below zero. On a long journey through an uninhabited country a dog team cannot haul suffi- cient provisions to feed themselves. A deer with 200 pounds on the sled can travel up and down the mountains and REINDEER over the plains without a road or trail from one end of Alaska to the other, living on the moss found in the country where he travels. In the four months’ travel of 2,000 miles, from Port Clar- ence to the Kuskokwim Valley and back, by Mr W. A. Kjellmann and two Lapps, with nine sleds, 1896—’ 97, the deer were turned out at night to find their Own provisions, except upon a stretch of the Yukon Valley below Anvik, a distance of 40 miles. The great mining interests of central Alaska cannot realize their fullest de- velopment until the domestic reindeer are introduced in sufficient numbers to do the work of supplying the miners with provisions and freight and giving the miner speedy communication with the outside world. The reindeer is equally important to the prospector. Prospecting at a dis- tance from the base of supplies is now impossible. The prospector can go only as far as the roo pounds of provisions, IN ALASKA 147 blankets, and tools will last, and then he must return. With ten head of rein- deer, packing 100 pounds each, making half a ton of supplies, he can go for months, penetrating regions hundreds of miles distant. FUTURE OF REINDEER INDUSTRY Even if no more reindeer are imported from Siberia, if the present rate of in- crease continues, doubling every three years—and there is no reason why it should not—within less than twenty-five years there will be at least 1,000,000 domestic reindeer in Alaska. This is a conservative estimate and allows for the deer that die from natural causes and for the many that will be slaughtered for food. In thirty-five years the number may reach nearly 10,000,000 head and Alaska will be shipping each year to the United States anywhere from 500,000 to 1,000,000 reindeer carcasses and thou- sands of tons of delicious hams and tongues. At no distant day, it may be From a photograph by R. N. Hawley, M. D. Formerly the residence of Rev. W. T. Lopp, Congregational Missionary, Cape Prince of Wales, Alaska, who for ten years labored at this settlement. Now the residence of Hugh T. Lee, who in 1895 accompanied Peary on his second advance across the Greenland ice cap to Independence Bay. 148 safely predicted, long reindeer trains from arctic and subarctic Alaska will roll into Seattle and our most western cities like the great cattle trains that now every hour thunder into the yards of Chicago. Before the end of the present century Alaska will be helping to feed the 200,000,000 men and women who will then be living within the present borders of the United States. * REFERENCES: For further information on the introduction of domestic reindeer into Alaska, consult the annual reports of Sheldon Jackson, LL. D., General Agent of Education in Alaska, for 1891-1902. The reports contain much interesting matter about Alaska as well. They may be obtained from the Superintend- ent of Public Documents, Washington, D. C., for a small sum. Special mention may be made of the follow- ing articles included in the reports : “Domesticated Reindeer, with Notes on the Habits and Customs of the Eskimo and Life Raleigh Rock—N. E., 3 miles. Latitude, 25° 57’ 40’/’ N. Longitude, 124° 43’ E. Tue Nationa, GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE in Arctic Alaska,’’ including many quaint na- tive drawings, by Miner W. Bruce, pp. 25-117, 1893. “The Itinerary of 1895’ (describes a tour of inspection), by Dr William Hamilton, As- sistant General Agent of Education in Alaska, pp- 21-41, 1895. “Report of Wm. A. Kjellmann Describing a Trial Trip of 2,000 Miles with Nine Reindeer Sleds,” pp. 41-71, 1897. “The Lapland Reindeer Expedition of 1898,’” Ppp. 32-46, 1898. ““Expedition to Siberia,’ by Lieut. E. P- Bertholf, describing the purchase of Tunguse reindeer in Siberia, pp. 130-168, igor. ‘Reindeer in Siberia,’ pp. 168-175, Igor. Mention should also be made of : “The Cruise of the U. S. Revenue Cutter Bear and the Overland Expedition for the Re- lief of the Whalers in the Arctic Ocean, No- vember 27, 1897, to September 13, 1898,”’ in- cluding reports of Lieut. D. H. Jarvis, Lieut. E.-P. Bertholf, and Surgeon S. J. Call. Goy- ernment Printing Office, 1899. ““Commercial Alaska in 1gor,’’ by O. P. Austin, Bureau of Statistics, Treasury Depart- ment, pp. 3985-3989. RALEIGH ROCK HE accompanying photograph of Raleigh Rock was taken by Capt. J. J. Gilbert, commanding the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey steamer Pathfinder, while on a voyage from Japan to Manila. Raleigh Rock is in latitude 25° 57’ 40” N. and longitude 124° 43’ E. These rocks have been long known, but different names have been assigned to them under slightly different geograph- ical positions. If the convenient camera had been in use in early days as it is now, the identity of the rocks would easily have been established by ship- masters. So far as known, this is the first photograph of Raleigh Rock that has ever been published. Sheldon Jackson, LL D. General Agent of Education in Alaska Since 1885 FUN OUI ; >The Evolution of es in Plants, _ Professor -Brapiey M, Dayn ; The piste id Tesporiange of Forestry. OvERTON bs Mental and Moral Heredity in Royalty, Dr, FRevzRick ADAMS Woops, c » The Smithsonian Institution. “Recent Jewish Immigration to the United States. ‘ i Sih Roozx Mrrcneny. | The Behayior of Blind Animals. Professor ‘Wre- eesti - Tey Mirus, in Royalty. © Dr. }’ ‘Preventive Medicine, “General Groncr M. shay: SERRE EE on oe BERG. ; A Statistic! Study of Eminent ear Professor '. McKgrm Carrenr, ‘ < af Scientific Literature: Biographies of Eminent Chemiate, cien ifie Bécicties 5 Th , “The Progress of Science: eyepire ; “The British Education “The. American Association for the Adyance- Ny Rood; The Proposed _Enlarge- | Ment of Science; The Recognition of the Im- tation; The New Yor (> portance ‘of Preventive Medicine; A Newly i , ; ecognized Factor in ‘American Anemias; ions Mechanical Mixtures |) Mune gern of Laniness” ; Carnegie Institution a Bbetane e8, Scientific eee. Seren nick ot ace Scientific tems, Y will be sent to new scribes for tx months 68 Obe Dollar’ pose ieee ORDER ; ma Oba shook or ploned order for ieee Gags saedptiin to. THE. OPULAR SCIENCE eT ey. ae one begi : enel sed from a. new eubjokibor - one Golian ¢ uk sae for six mrontha to THE POPULAR ‘SCI- SPECIAL. MAPS. PUBLISHED BY THE NATIONAL ; _ GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY — Map ‘of the Philippines 6 fork 2 inches x 3 fei. : ee Prepared under the direction of the War D: Map of South Africa (46 x33 inches). = Prepared under the.direction of the W Depa ime é Map of Northeastern China (36x28 inches) oe) ~~ Prepared under the direction“of the é Map of the Chinese Empire, Jee, way (4$x7% inches). Map of Alaska (28x 24 jachies).: ieanaine ; Prepared under the direction” of th U, C A Seties of Twelve Maps on the Alaskan Bo: » Prepared. under the direction of Ho Es Chart of the World on Mercator’s Projec Prepared under the direction of, eS 5 Map of Cuba (18x7%4 inches). Prepared under ‘the direction of Robert be igde 5 CUS ath gehen A Series of Twenty-five Full-page Charts, showi e storm 1 _ methods of weather forecasting. — Prepared cop the ditcotion of De Offi ie Cee the furn Farniare When there are not Se to fill an ordine at a very Small éxpense, and as the numb be added—and the book case grows as section or more, you have a complete and the ** mennet each has its ce ‘SL. 15 per Section. we . Up | any particular room made to order with. out additional cost, We shall be pleased ~ to Bie you call aud examine them. eat Without Glass, in Solid Ok “A special Balan to Sinehe Sauer Of ee ie H IRD F L o OR. THE NATIONAL GRAPHIC \MAGAZIN Vol, X1V MAY, 1903 No. 5 CONTENTS PAGE “THE UNITED STATES—LAND AND WATERS. BY CYRUS e: ADAMS.’ ILLUSTRATED * . ° 169 THE CONQUEST OF BUBONIC PLAGUE IN THE PHILIPPINES. ILLUSTRATED. . : > _ IMPROVEMENTS IN THE CITY OF MANILA. ILLUSTRATED - AMERICAN nj elk Mecrip aaa OF "THE PHILIPPINES. ILLUSTRATED . : . BENGUET — THE Capua OF tne ee ILLUSTRATED |. . “ THE BRITISH SOUTH POLAR EXPEDITION ‘THE WORK OF THE BUREAU OF : FORESTRY ) THE TRANS-CANADA RAILWAY GEOGRAPHIC NOTES GEOGRAPHIC LITERATURE a : a Published by the National Geographic Society, Corcoran Building, Washington, D. C. _ $2.50 a Year 25 Cents a Number Entered at the Post-effice in Washington, D. C., as Second-class Mail Matter. ee ge cakes A NUM BEE: pase A YEAR” a ae es Halter: GILBERT ies os tS . @BNBRAL A. wr. GREELY eas Chief Signal Che: e Se a ae Wed McGHE Ethnolopist in “Charge, Bureau of American Ethnology Ss oe G. HART MERRIAM - Chief of the Pare a DS ee Department we al begiec ee ELIZA RUHAMAH SCIDMORE | Author of “Java, the Garden ite - as ~ Bast,” ete. MARCUS BAKER dew 7 Carnegie Zustitution.— =its WILLIS Ls. MOORS - Chief of the Weather Bureau, U. Ss esa rite of Agriculture S N ILLUSTRATED MONTHLY, . published by ‘the: a A Nationa, Grocrapuic Society, at Washing- ton, D. C. All editorial communications — should be addressed to the Editor of the Nationar Grocrapuic Magazine, Corcoran Building, Wash- ington, D. C. “Business communications should be addressed to the National ecgrape eee Corcoran Banding, ve ‘D. os "Associate Editors °. 'p. AUSTIN ee ae M. PARBELL — LOUISE GARRISON -O; H. TITTMANN gee ‘ p Superipieaiirad 6 of the a Ss fe gate gape — se ee Barnoy ° Serie: ae Ss AVEGSUTY faeces DAVID 7. ‘DAY ce : - Chief of -the Division of Mineral. eeewes U.S. Geale aes Sas A : of “Life Nepoteon “Lif yt Mi - a Principal o, = Be Pg Shook, % Wash Ang. ap jyoett From a photograph taken by Mr Bailey Willis Wapitus Lake and Dutch Miller Pass, Washington ‘‘Our scenery from the White Mountains to the Pacific Coast Ranges may be included among our resources, as substantial a source of gain, as the Alps of Switzerland, which bring into that country millions of dollars every year.’’ Voi. XIV, No. 5 WASHINGTON May, 1903 GEOGIRAIPIGUIC MAGA ZIUNIE, EU N EDS AME SS CAND: AND WATCIBIRUIS) By Cyrus ©. ApAms, AUTHOR OF ANY foreigners who cross our M country are impressed by two facts: its vast extent and its very apparent sparsity of population away from a few great centers. We are among the most populous nations in the world but our domain south of Canada is so great that with all our 77,000,000 people we have an average density of population of only about twenty-eight to the square mile, in which respect we are comparable with Norway, one of the most thinly peopled countries of Europe. That part of Great Britain occupied by England is one of the most densely peopled regions in the world; but if England had only our density of population its inhabit- ants would number less than one-fourth the number in Greater London. GREAT DENSITY OF POPULATION We have really no conception derived from our experience at home of what * An address before the National Geographic Society, February 10, 1903. *“ COMMERCIAL GEOGRAPHY,’’ ETC., ETC. great density of population means. Per- haps the following facts may give a vivid idea of it. If we were to crowd our 77,000,000 people into Texas and add to them 40,000,000 more we should have a density of population in that state comparable with that of the lower Yangtse valley and the great eastern plain of China between the Yangtse and the Hoang rivers. But human ex- perience has recently recorded a still greater density of population than this, and the following is deduced from the census taken last year by the Chinese government and already accepted by statisticians as a fair approximation of the number of persons in China. If we were to place in Texas double the population of the United States, or, say, 150,000,000 persons, we should have in that state approximately the density of population that is to be found in the Shantung province. Our nation may never be called upon to confront This is the first of a series of articles on the United States which are to be published in the succeeding numbers of this Magazine. 72 the problems growing out of such a prodigious congestion of humanity as this; and these illustrations of great density of population are given here only to show one aspect of our enor- mous territory. China is not half so large as our country and its natural re- sources, area for area, are no greater than our own ; so the 408,000,000 souls in China proper at least give emphasis to the thought that we have as yet scarcely began to scratch the surface of the capacity of this country to support many times its present number of in- habitants. OUR DIVERSITY OF CLIMATE AND PRODUCTS Another influence of our vast area is permanent, far-reaching and most sig- nificant. The United States extending from ocean to ocean reaching far into the north and far into the south, with vast areas only 1,000 feet or less above the sea and others of high altitude, has great variety of climatic conditions and therefore great diversity of products ; so that we grow nearly all the commodi- ties of the temperate and subtropical zones, and not a few products of the tropical zone. We raise the citrus fruits of the Mediterranean, the figs of Smyrna and the dates of the Persian Gulf. We find that we can grow the famous Su- matra tobacco which we still import to the amount of millions of dollars every year; that we can produce Egyptian cotton, and Egypt does not raise all that the world would like to consume of that unique and superior fiber. This di- versity of products and our large mineral resources make the country practically self-sufficient. No nation can become self-sufficient unless it reaches across a continent and embraces a wide latitude like the Russian Empire, Australia and the United States. We really need to import very little except certain raw materials from the tropics which our own colonial possessions may some day supply. Tue NarionaL GroGRAPHiIc MaGaZINE SOME ADVANTAGES OF OUR GEO- GRAPHIC POSITION We may properly treat not only the vast extent of our country, but also its situation with respect to other nations as among the geographic elements that have helped our material development, which is the topic assigned tome. It is to our advantage that we are on the same side of the tropics with the nations that are the greatest buyers of the bread and meat stuffs and other commodities we have to sell. It is a great disad- vantage to be compelled to carry perish- able commodities across the tropics. India raises large quantities of wheat and Europe would have been glad, many years ago, to buy Indian wheat; but before the Suez Canal was built India could not export this breadstuff to Europe. Steamers could not carry the wheat because, to double the south end of Africa, they had to recoal at St. Helena or Cape Town and coal was very dear for it was brought from Europe 5,000 or 6,000 miles away; the cost of the trip was very high and wheat being a cheap and heavy commodity can never be transported far at high freight rates. Wheat often sells for sixty cents a bushel in Chicago, and unless rates are cheap it cannot bemoved. Neither could sail- ing vessels carry the Indian crop because they moved slowly through the hot lati- tudes both of the Indian and Atlantic Oceans and by the time the long journey was over the deterioration of the grain rendered it almost unsuitable for flour. But when the Suez Canal was opened India could send her wheat to Europe by steam and the problem was solved. Before the days of refrigeration meat could not be sent to markets across the tropics ; but even with refrigeration it is a great disadvantage to be compelled to freeze meats solidly in order to insure their good condition upon reaching the consumer. There is much prejudice against frozen meats in some parts of Europe, particularly in Germany, but consumers there are willing to buy enor- Tue Unitrep Stares—LANnp AND WarTeErRs mous quantities of our chilled meats, which, they assert, are superior in qual- ity to the frozen article. We are not compelled to freeze our meats to send them to Europe but the consignments are placed on steamships in chilled rooms whose low but not freezing temperature keeps them in good condition. When we remember that our foreign meat trade isa very important element in our com- merce we can realize the inestimable ad- vantage of not being compelled to carry this commodity across the tropics. The United States, as well as all the other greatest commercial nations, fronts on the Atlantic making that ocean the preeminent highway ofseatrade. A few years ago, a patient and laborious Ger- man set himself the task of ascertaining approximately the amount of business activity on the Atlantic. After collect- ing many facts he reached the conclu- sion that there are always afloat on that ocean about 50,000 vessels of one sort or another and that its floating popula- tion is constantly about 300,000 human beings. The value of the Atlantic for sea trade is increased by the fact that most of the great navigable rivers be- long to the Atlantic drainage basin. All the great rivers of Europe, except the Volga, of Africa, except the Zambesi, and of America south of Alaska are trib- utary to the Atlantic. The Yangtse of China is the only river of the first class and of great commercial importance that is tributary to the Pacific. The Indian Ocean finds feeders for its trade in the Menam, the Irawadi, the Ganges and the Indus; but the great rivers of north- ern Asia are frozen two-thirds of the year and empty into seas that are likely to be ice-choked at all seasons. We shall see a little later how wonderfully helpful are our rivers in contributing to our large share in the sea trade of the Atlantic. HARBORS OF THE UNITED STATES We are blessed with an abundance of good natural harbors to serve our com- LOS merce on this highway. Most of the largest and best of them are exactly where they may best serve our trade—on our northeast coast fronting the great- est commercial nations of Europe, with whom we have the largest dealings. On the whole, our harbors are naturally better than those of Europe; the result is that though nearly all harbors require large expenditure to fit them for ship- ping and to make good the deteriora- tion that is constantly in progress, our disbursements for these purposes are not nearly so great as they are in Eu- rope. Since the Coast and Geodetic Survey was organized New York Bay has been resurveyed five times to indi- cate the positions of needed improve- ments. The work of deepening and extending the channels of New York Harbor in progress for several years past may cost from $7,000,000 to $8,000,000 before it is completed ; but Liverpool Harbor has cost, from first to last, over $200,000,000, more than half of which has been expended in the last forty-five years. The great distinction between our leading seaports and those of Europe is that we have only to improve our natu- ral harbors while the nations over the sea must make their great ports. Hu- rope can show no ports like those of Puget Sound and San Francisco which will admit the largest vessels without deepening the channel; and our other largest ports may attain the same degree of efficiency at a total cost that seems small in comparison with the vast sums spent at Liverpoolalone. London, New- castle and Cardiff, as seaports, are largely artificial creations, the result of im- provements made at enormous cost. The port of London extends from Lon- don Bridge to the mouth of the Thames but no vessel drawing more than 26 feet can ascend to London except at high tide; at other times large ships must stop at Tilbury Docks, 35 miles downtheriver. Glasgow deepened and widened the little ditch of the Clyde till From Gilbert and Brigham’s ‘Introduction to Physical Geography,’’ D. Appleton & Co. Among the Palmettos of Florida The great diversity of our climate is well illustrated by the contrast of this and the succeeding picture Census Office >: From U. ichigan rests of M ine Fo In the White P 176 it was transformed into a ship-floating river. All the Baltic ports of Germany are more or less obstructed by ice in winter, nor do her great North Sea ports always escape this inconvenience ; for this reason Hamburg and Bremen require outports and Bremen must have an outport all the time because the larger vessels cannot ascend to the city. We have no port like that of Valpa- raiso, Chile—a splendid harbor save for the vital defect that the entrance from the sea isso wide that storms invade it and endanger shipping. We have no need for such a splendid example of engineering art as the great breakwater at Cherbourg which without this protec- tion would be a dangerous roadstead. The North American seaboard shows no conspicuous example of the artificial harbor so common in other countries except at Vera Cruz which has just been turned by the labor of years into a good and commodious port. TYPES OF HARBORS Most of our Atlantic coast is low and presents all the prominent types of nat- uralharbors. Weknow that large areas of the earth’s surface are very slowly subjected to vertical movements, being uplifted above their former level or de- pressed beneath it; and that these move- ments are best observed along the mar- ginsofthesea. Wespeak, forexample, of the uplifting of a part of the coast of Scandinavia, and of the sinking of the coast of New Jersey. In the course of the depression of the coast line the sea invades the valleys, widening and deep- ening them, and turning some of them into deep water harbors which are called Drowned Valley Harbors. When the sea burst over the barrier at the Golden Gate it turned the valley on which San Francisco stands into one of the finest drowned valley harbors in the world. New York is another example of a drowned valley harbor, which, wher- ever found, are among the best natural Tue NationaL GrocraPHic MAGAZINE harbors. We see another form of the drowned valley harbor in the fiords of the Maine coast, long, narrow and deep, with this disadvantage that, when their entrances are funnel-shaped, the incom- ing tide rises very rapidly and high so that the difference between mean high and low tide in some of our Maine ports is as much as 20 feet which is an incon- venience to shipping. The difference between mean high and low tide at New York is only a little ever 4 feet. The barrier harbor is also well repre- sented on our eastern seaboard; thus we may speak of Boston harbor as be- ing protected from sea storms by the cluster of islands at its mouth; and of the numerous smaller ports of the south Atlantic coast as sheltered from the ocean by the sand reefs that extend brokenly along the front of our coast from Long Island to Florida. River ports such as Philadelphia and New Orleans and ports at the head of deep embayments, as Baltimore, permit ocean vessels to penetrate a considerable distance into the land which is an advan- tage because ocean freights are cheaper than those of the land routes. Balti- more, 140 miles from the sea, is nearer to the Mississippi valley than is New York. Our Pacific coast, unlike our eastern seaboard, is high and rocky and has only four fine harbor centers but they are so distributed as toserve adequately all the purposes of our Pacific trade. Puget Sound, one of the most useful of inlets, has scores of miles of shoreline along which the water is so deep that docks might be built anywhere for the largest vessels. The fine river port of Portland supplements the Puget Sound ports in the northern trade, San Fran- cisco is the great central gateway of the Pacific commerce and San Diego, at the extreme southwestern corner of the country, with a landlocked harbor in which the government has been mak- ing great improvements, is nearest to Tue Unirep Strares—LAND AND WATERS the cotton-fields and is becoming impor- tant in the shipment of raw cotton and cotton fabrics for the Oriental market. When a steamship leaves Seattle in summer the crowded decks and docks resemble the busy and inspiring scene upon the departure of an Atlantic liner at New York. The fact that most of Lay now building hotels, making roads, cut- ting paths and procuring guides, so that scenery may be enjoyed to the best ad- vantage and under comfortable circum- stances. Our scenery, from the White Mountains to the Pacific coast ranges, may be included among our resources, as substantial a source of gain as the From Geo. M. Weister Portland, Oregon, Mt Hood in the Distance “ Our Pacific coast, unlike our eastern seaboard, is high and rocky” those passengers are not going to seek gold should convince us that it is time to count scenery among the important assets of the country. Every year in- creasing crowds are drawn to Alaska by the mighty glaciers, the rugged fiords, the snow mountains and the splendid, hracing air in that part of our domain. Among our western mountains men are Alps of Switzerland which bring into that country millions of dollars every year. OUR COASTAL PLAINS The United States, in the main, is a great central plain bordered on the east by mountains of no great elevation, and on the west by plateaus and mountains 178 of high elevation ; with narrow eastern and broad southern coastal plains; with most of the rivers that are important in an economic sense confined to the east- ern half of the country ; and with in- land seas providing the cheapest trans- portation known excepting on the oceans. All these topographic features have had a profound influence in dis- tributing our industries and shaping our development. THe NarionaL GrocraPHic MAGAZINE large quantities of lumber and naval stores; and on the sea edge are the swamps which, when reclaimed, are ex- tremely fertile. Where the softer plain joins the harder rocks of the Appa- lachian belt the rivers crossing from the harder to the more yielding rocks have made a line of waterfalls beside which many thriving towns and cities have been reared to use this power in manu- facturing ; and along these narrow belts From Willard D. Johnson, U. S. Geological Survey On the High Plains, Western Kansas Large areas of our high plains are being reclaimed by artesian wells, which enable ranchmen to establish stock-watering points at comparatively close intervals Probably no other coastal plain has soadvantageous a position and so many elements that conduce to prosperity as the plain along our Atlantic seaboard. The waste brought down from the mountains on the west has contributed to its fertility and made it a meridional zone of fruits and vegetables, cereals and hay. At its western edge are the clays used in the development of the largest pottery industries of the coun- try. Nearer the sea is the long sandy zone which, south of Virginia, supplies of manifold resources and industries extend railroads easily built because they met few natural obstructions and leading straight to the great cities of the north that are the preeminent markets. for most of these commodities. THE GREAT VALLEY, PLAINS, AND PLATEAUS The broader southern plain along the Gulf is a great region of the lumber in- dustry with a product of nearly $2,000, 000 a year, of agriculture and chiefly of Tue Unitrep Strates—LaANnpD aNnp WarTERS cotton-raising for this is a part of the great cotton belt. The plain merges with the Mississippi Valley which from our northern border to the Gulf is the preeminent agricultural zone of the country, the northern part of it, man- tled with the fertile rock’ mixtures of the glacial drift, the richest area of wheat and maize in the world; the southern part, included in the cotton belt, which supplies nearly three-fourths of the world’s cotton; and in the bor- der lands between them a zone of to- bacco cultivation, our largest area de- voted to this crop. Te have been much impaired by overgraz- ing and must be nursed back to their former productivity. Just as the nib- bling sheep have destroyed all verdure on the mountains of Greece so they have been very effective in killing out much of the nutritious bunch and other grasses on the plains and among the mountain pastures farther west. The plains gradually rise till they merge with the Great Plateaus which embrace about a third of the country and with their surmounting mountains extend nearly to the Pacific. They are the largest sources of our precious metals. From Willard D, Johnson, U. S. Geological Survey A Field of Watermelons, Western Kansas West of the Great Valley the plains begin to rise midway between the two oceans. It is to be observed that the main axes of all our predominant topo- graphic features extend north and south excepting the Great Lakes whose main axis is east and west. The plains ex- tending from Canada to Mexico and gradually rising to the western plateaus are the largest field of the grazing in- dustry which has long supplied most of our export beef though not our export cattle, the greater number of which are fattened in the corn belt. ‘The plains in whose production we have for many years usually surpassed other nations. UTILITY OF OUR MOUNTAINS We must count mountains as among our greatest blessings. While our val- leys and plains are the sources of most of the food for man and beast it is from the mountains that we derive a very large part of our metals and other min- erals. If we hada great mountain wall stretching from east to west we might be shielded from the Arctic blasts that sweep down from the plains of Canada 180 THe NarionaL GrocRAPHic MAGAZINE From F. H. Newell, U. S. Geological Survey A Band of About 2,000 Sheep Grazing on the Mountain Slopes of Oregon, About 6,000 Feet Above Sea-level ““Our mountains, though of little use for agriculture, provide a large amount of fine grazing land.” in winter and chill us to the bone. We know that northern India is thus pro- tected by the Himalayas and northern Italy by the Alps so that the average winter temperature on the French and Italian Riviera is warmer than at Rome. It is questionable however whether such a climatic barrier would be of any ad- vantage to us as a people for our diver- sity of climate tends to intensify stamina and energy. Our mountains are the largest sources of water power which is more valuable than ever now that electricity is used for the transmission of power. ‘They add largely to our timber resources and though of little use for agriculture they provide a large amount of fine grazing land. ‘Their rock waste is spread over the surround- ing plains to their enrichment and they husband our water resources where they are most needed. It isamong the moun- tains that reservoirs are to be built to conserve water from the melting snows and glaciers and advantageously dis- tribute it over the regions to be irrigated which, it is estimated, may reclaim 50,000,000 acres to fertility. : Our mountains are partly responsible for the prevailing aridity of the plateau region for though the Pacific coast from Puget Sound to a little south of San Francisco has abundant precipitation the rain clouds are wrung nearly dry among the mountains so that there is little moisture left to distribute over the plains east of them; but nearly half of our Pacific coast to the south of San Francisco is in the zone of the northeast trade winds which girdle the world in the Northern Hemisphere, blowing most of the time as dry winds off the land in- stead of coming to the land as moist winds from the sea; so that even if there were no high mountains in the southern part of California the adjacent country Tue Unirep Strares—Lanp AND WarTeErRs 181 From M. A. Carleton, U. S. Department of Agriculture Combined Harvester-Thresher on One of the Vast Wheat Fields of the West would derive little rain from the Pacific. We are indebted to these southwestern Cordilleras for the fact that the rainfall they conserve may be led down to the California valleys turning them into areas of wonderful fertility, the great centers of our home production of semi- tropical and some other fruits. We re- member the time when the ‘‘ Great American Desert ’’ was spread over most of the western part of ourmaps. It has now shrunk to very small proportions indeed ; and the drier regions of the country will some day be eliminated as far as water can be obtained for their reclamation. DISTRIBUTION OF RAINFALL At least 20 inches of rainfall a year are required to make farming fairly profitable and this is a scanty supply. Nearly double that quantity falls in the half of the country lying east of the 1ooth meridian and along the northern three-fifths of the Pacific coast, and to these regions is confined nearly our en- tire development of agriculture except- ing where stock is fed on the plains or crops are irrigated. The profound in- fluence which this unequal distribution of rainfall has had upon our lordship over the domain committed to us is shown on many maps. A map showing our density of population usually leaves white most of the vast region west of the rooth parallel ; a map showing the distribution of our swine industry shows its western frontier in central Nebraska, Kansas and Texas because we fatten hogs on maize which requires abundant moisture ; a map illustrating cattle in- dustries shows, the limit far to the west of the region of swine for cattle can thrive on grasses of the plains though we drive many of them into the corn belt to fatten. A map showing the 182 larger phases of our manufacturing de- velopment practically coincides with those colors on a density-of-population map showing forty or more inhabitants to a square mile. Naturally we have not developed large manufacturing in areas that average a fewer number of persons. If we look at a map of our irrigation centers we may see today a large number of them scattered over the plateau region. But those dots repre- sent only small areas of irrigated land. Perhaps we shall never see the irriga- tion centers largelyincreased in number but many of the dots on the present maps will spread out into broad or long patches of color representing very im- portant areas of reclaimed lands. RIVER VALLEYS AS LINES OF DEVELOPMENT River valleys have always facilitated the advance of man into the interior of the continents and for this reason the Nile, the Euphrates, the Ganges and other great rivers are spoken of as the creatorsof history. Exploration is usu- ally retarded wherever physical obstacles make it very difficult to ascend the rivers, such as the rapids of the Mekong and the Congo; the latter river was known less than 200 miles from its mouth until Stanley launched his boats on the upper river and floated down the stream. Our rivers also have been the creators of his- tory. Justasthe Jesuit Fathers paddled their canoes up the St. Lawrence and the Ottawa, carried them across portages to rivers leading to the Great Lakes, followed up the western tributaries of Lake Michigan and finally pushed their little craft into the current of the Mis- sissippi, so our forefathers used the rivers and lakes to push their hamlets and their farm lands inland ; and reach- ing out on both sides of the waterways they found new opportunities for settle- ment and enterprise. ‘The old Dutch burghers lined the Hudson with their farms and villages. In the course of Tue Nariona, GeocraepHic MacaZzIne time the settlements spread farther and farther from the river edge. The pio- neers, for example, pushed up on the great limestone plateau of the Catskills to see what they might find. They dis- covered fine forests of hemlock and the day came when immigrants from Con- necticut and other regions went to the Catskills for the primary purpose of using hemlock bark to turn into leather the hides produced by farmers. As the population of the valley steadily in- creased it was certain that a town would rise at the head of navigation on the Hudson; for wherever an important amount of transshipment of freight be- tween land and water is made there must be freight handlers, blacksmith shops, living accommodations, and fod- der and shelter for animals ; a town is sure to rise at such a place and thus Albany and Troy were founded at the head of navigation. The valley of the Mohawk was discovered opening an easy route of penetration to the west. The gradually growing stream of immigrants pushed westward clearing farms and founding settlements along the Mo- hawk ; following up a little tributary of the river some of them made their way into the forests of Fulton county where, finding plenty of deer, they began to dress buckskin and make gloves for which they found a ready market. The farmers’ wives and daughters took up the industry in increasing numbers and finally skilled labor from Europe came over and taught better methods of glove- making; so the industry grew until today we have Gloversville and the towns around it, the greatest centers of glove-making in the country. Entering the Onondaga valley from the Mohawk the pioneers found the salt springs of Syracuse, long the largest source of salt in the country ; Oswego on lake Ontario is one of the oldest set- tlements in New York because the early farmers found along the Oswego river a natural route of penetration from Syra- Tue Unitrep STaTEs—LAND anp WATERS 183 UNITED STATES Wichitag ‘ort Wor! baila, Ko Austi Cute Mon: A Straw, San AeA Z “a\inge Fy Beatss DES) Gree® gursetde no \ > Bore Forsythe ° ‘ -| {Oral Houston” Interior Navigation SCALE 1: 33,000,000 3 San Antonio On * Galveston 500 | —=x <—= 110 From ‘‘Commercial Geography,” by Cyrus C. Adams. On the basis of three feet as the minimum depth of navigability, the rivers of the United States afford over 14,000 miles of navigation, measured in straight lines, and much more following the sinuosities of the streams. cuse to the lake. Farther west they came to the Genesee river which they followed scores of miles to the south making its valley, for many years, the largest region of wheat in the country ; so they pushed steadily westward open- ing farms and planting towns along the lakes and the rivers flowing into them. The facts of nature pointed unmis- takably to the appropriate sites for towns. As the pioneers floated down the Ohio they came to the great bend of the river where it changes its course from northwest to southwest. When settlement spread away from the river not all the freight floated down the stream was destined for places farther southwest. There were towns to the northwest to be supplied and transship- ment of freight to land routes was neces- sary ; at this place of transshipment the city of Cincinnati arose. Still farther down the Ohio the river was impeded by rapids making another transshipment of freight necessary and this fact re- sulted in the city of Louisville. If we were to trace the history of our entire material progress we should find that the waterwavs of the eastern half of the country have been the main factors in determining the lines of development. Those persons who were able to inter- pret the meaning of the natural facts presented for their study have reaped large rewards. A young farmer started from St. Paul one day on a little steamer that was to be pushed as far up the Minnesota River as possible. He was D. Appleton & Co. 184 looking for some very desirable pre- émption claim on which to begin farm- ing. When the steamer finally stuck in the mud he said to himself: ‘‘It is right here that I want my 160 acres.’ He filed his claim and farmed the land till he sold it about ten years later for $25,000 to be divided into lots for the town of St. Peter which was rising at the head of navigation. No great country, however extensive its railroad facilities may be, can afford to neglect its water highways. Not- withstanding our river and harbor bills and our Mississippi Commission we know little as yet of the scientific de- velopment of waterways for commercial purposes as it is understood in all the countries of northwestern and north- central Europe where boats freighted on the Vistula in Russia may reach, through rivers and canals, all the lead- ing ports of the Baltic and North Seas. Increasing density of population and towns and cities more thickly scattered over our domain will impress us, as Europe has been impressed, with the absolute necessity of supplementing our railroads with the fullest possible de- velopment of our water routes. In the past few years we have seen the Missis- sippi transforming New Orleans into one of the great wheat ports as well as the greatest cotton port of the world. We see the Ohio and the Mississippi carrying coal, iron and lumber 2,000 miles at a cost very little in excess of ocean freights; and though the Erie Canal, which provides the port of New York with a continuous waterway to Duluth is antiquated and inadequate, it has made the Hudson River, with its 18,000,000 tons of freight a year, the largest commerce carrier among the rivers of America; it was the leading factor in giving to New York a com- mercial movement nearly equal to that of London. We have witnessed the development of our marine on the Great Lakes where marvelously cheap freights THe Nationa, GeocraPHic MAGAZINE have helped us to compete with the world in iron and steel goods though we carry most of our iron ore nearly 1,000 miles to the coke and limestone required to smelt it. OUR TOPOGRAPHY FACILITATED RAIL- ROAD DEVELOPMENT A country as vast as ours and with as small a density of population could not so early have attained its present devel- opment if our enormous system of com- munications had not afforded the lowest land freight routes in the world. A good topographic map shows us that the topography of the country was very favorable for the building of the vast systems of railroads whose mileage, ex- tending to the neighborhood of most of our farms, would stretch nearly from the earth tothe moon. There are gateways through our mountain ranges so that none of them is a barrier to commerce. We have no obstacle like the Pyrenees which so completely walls France from Spain that the land trafic between them must be deflected from straight lines to circumvent the extreme ends of the mountains at the edge of the seas. The comparatively level surface of our plains and plateaus, the predominating easy gradients and the mountain passes have helped to cheapen railroad construction and transportation so that commodities may be cheaply moved. Argentina raises its export wheat within fifty miles of tidewater. Wesend our export wheat 1,000 miles to tidewater but the price of freight has been so cheap that we are able to compete with any nation in the world in exporting this commodity. What a reservoir for future harvests of breadstuffs is our hard wheat region of Minnesota and the Dakotas, a part of the central plain of North America that is twice as large as Great Britain and Ireland or as New York and New England together, and larger than the German Empire. These three states are producing much more than one-half Conquest oF Busonic PLacug of the spring wheat of the country and we know that their capacity for pro- duction may be more than doubled. The Canadian northwest is boasting that its younger wheat fields are yield- ing twice as much grain to the acre as out lands; England with less favorable conditions for wheat culture than we enjoy raises more than double the quan- tity of grain to the acre than we pro- duce. We may say of our entire agri- cultural interest that we shall double our production when we improve our methods. We cannot measure yet the potential benefits which our Agricult- ural Department and the agricultural schools will confer upon the nation by their persistent teaching of scientific methods of tillage. A man near the east end of Long Island is demonstrat- ing every year that the highest grade of farming gives the best profits. He spends money without stint for fertil- 185 izers; all his operations are kept to the highest point of efficiency and he is selling his crop of vegetables, the pro- duct of 80 acres, at an average figure of $20,000 a year. He is making as much money from the soil as he could from any other business with the same amount of capital. The mistake is sometimes made of attributing to one factor more than its due share in bringing about the ad- vanced stage of development we have reached. ‘The attention of no American audience, however, needs to be called to the fact that in this nation of highly intelligent laborers, of inventive genius and of boundless energy and ambition, the geographic conditions that have so wonderfully helped us and some of which have been the topic of this brief discourse are only one of the all-potent influences which have advanced us to the rank we occupy among the great nations. iar CONOUES! OF /BUBONIG PEAGUE IN WBNS I SVOU Ne IN IES) HE United States has driven the bubonic plague out of the Phil- ippines as completely as it has swept yellow fever out of Cuba. The ravages of Asiatic cholera, which have claimed 100,000 victims in the islands, have diverted public attention from a fight against the bubonic plague waged by the health officers of Manila. This remarkable fight has no precedent in the history of the plague. If it had not been for the tireless vigilance and ceaseless war on rats and filth by Dr Meacham and his subordinates a wave of the plague would have swept over Manila and the islands as destructive of life as the cholera itself. The plague is always present at Hong- kong. ‘There is not a day in the year when some plague-stricken wretch is not trying to hidein the densely packed quarters of that city. Manila, 600 miles across the sea, must therefore be constantly on her guard lest the plague slip in on one of the many vessels ply- ing between the two ports. The day after Christmas, 1899, a man was found in the streets of Manila dead from bubonic plague. ‘The dis- ease had invaded the city and began to spread. How the plague was fought and beaten is told by Hon. Dean C. Worces- ter, Secretary of the Interior of the in- sular government, in his report to the Philippine Commission for 1902. Bubonic plague was discovered at Manila December 26, 1899, and slowly 186 but steadily increased up to December, Igor.* The deaths in 1900 numbered 199, and in rgo1 reached a total of 432. The disease was at its worst each year dur- ing the hot, dry months of March, April, and May, nearly or quite disappearing during September, October, November, and December. It will be noted that the number of cases in I90r exceeded that in 1900 by 200, while the number of deaths was about two and a half times as great, and the percentage of mortality among persons attacked increased from 73-4 in 1900 to 91.7 in Igor. This heavy increase in plague for the year 1901 justified the apprehension that a severe epidemic would occur in 1902. Strenuous efforts were made to improve the general sanitary condition of the city, but the habits of the Chinese resi- dents and the lower class of Filipinos were such as to render the enforcement of proper sanitary regulations well-nigh impossible. On account of the important part which house rats are known to play in the distribution of bubonic plague, a systematic campaign was inaugurated against these rodentsin Manila. Police- men, sanitary inspectors, and specially appointed rat-catchers were furnished with traps and poison, and both traps and poison were distributed to private * The deaths by months were : Cases. Months. - | Igor. | 1902, January. August... Septem) October.. November.. December THe Nationa GeocraPHic MaGaZziIne individuals under proper restrictions. A bounty was paid for all rats turned over to the health authorities, and sta- tions were established at convenient points throughout the city where they could be received. Lach rat was tagged with the street and number of the building or lot from which it came, was dropped into a strong antiseptic solution, and eventually sent to the Biological Labo- ratory, where it was subjected to a bac- teriological examination for plague. During the first two weeks 1.8 per cent of the rats examined were found to be infected. ‘This proportion steadily in- creased, reaching the alarming maxi- mum of 2.3 per cent in October. At this time numerous rats were found dead of plague in the infected districts, and, in view of the fact that epidemics of plague among the rats of a city in the past have been uniformly followed by epidemics among human beings, the gravest apprehension was felt, the rapid spread of the disease among the rats after the weather had become compara- tively dry being a particularly unfavor- able symptom. It was deemed necessary to prepare to- deal with a severe epidemic, and a per- manent detention camp, capable of ac- commodating 1,500 persons, was.accord- ingly established on the grounds of the San Lazaro Hospital. Hoping against hope, the board of health redoubled its efforts to combat the disease. The force of sanitary inspectors was greatly in- creased, and under the able supervision of Dr Meacham their work was brought toa high degreeof efficiency. Frequent house-to-house inspections were made in all parts of the city where the disease was known to exist. The sick were removed to the hospital if practicable; otherwise they were cared for where found and the spread of infection guarded against. Plague houses were thoroughly disin- fected, and their owners were compelled, under the direction of the assistant sani-— Conquest oF Busonic PLAGUE tary engineer, to make necessary altera- tions. Cement ground floors were laid, double walls and double ceilings, af- fording a refugefor rats, were removed, defects in plumbing were remedied, whitewash was liberally used, and, in general, nothing was left undone that could render buildings where plague had occurred safe for human occupancy. Buildings incapable of thorough disin- fection and renovation were destroyed. Buildings in which plague rats were taken were treated exactly as were those where the disease attacked the human occupants. The bacteriological examination of rats enabled the board of health to follow the pest into its most secret haunts and fight it there, and was the most important fac- tor in the winning of the great success which was ultimately achieved. With very few exceptions, there was no recurrence of plague in buildings which had been disinfected and reno- vated. As center after center of infec- tion was found and destroyed the per- centage of diseased rats began to de- crease, and in January, 1902, when, judging from the history of previous years, plague should have again begun to spread among human beings, there was notasinglecase. In February one case occurred. In March there were two cases, as against 63 in March of the pre- ceding year, and before April the disease had completely disappeared. This result, brought about at a time when the epidemic would, if unchecked, have reached its height for the year, marked the end of a fight begun by the board of health on the day of its organi- zation and prosecuted unremittingly under adverse conditions for seven months with a degree of success which has not been equaled under similar con- ditions in the history of bubonic plague. Especial credit is due to Chief Health Inspector Meacham for the ingenuity which he displayed in devising means for the destruction of rats and for the tireless energy with which he devoted 187 himself to securing their adoption, and to increasing the efficiency of his force of inspectors, as well as to Drs. J. W. Jobling and Edward A. Southall and their assistants, who worked unremit- tingly at the uncongenial and dangerous task of making a bacteriological exam- ination of rats, a large proportion of which were putrid, while not a few of them were infected with one of the most fatal of diseases. ‘This work was of necessity conducted in the inadequate building in which it has been necessary temporarily to house the bureau of gov- ernment laboratories, in close proximity to the civil hospital. The fact that not a single case of infection occurred among the laboratory force or the in- mates of the hospital is sufficient com- mentary upon the care with which it was performed. During rgo1 plague appeared at sev- eral points in the provinces near Manila. Agents of the board of health were promptly dispatched to the infected mu- nicipalities and radical remedial meas- ures were adopted, including in several instances the burning of infected build- ings, the result being the complete disap- pearance of plague in the provinces as well as in Manitla.* A few figures will still further im- press the American with the magnitude of this fight by his representatives in the Philippines. Of the 60,000 rats caught, tagged, and sent to the labora- tory, 40,666 were examined microscop- ically for bacilli, and of these 242 were found infested with plague. During one month 65,379 traps were set and 403,789 plates of rat bane placed by the rat-catching squads, who had a special uniform and cap. The kind of poison had to be frequently changed, as the rats were very wary and suspicious. It is estimated that several hundred thou- sand rats were killed by the poison; *Report of the Philippine Commission for 1902, vol. I, pp. 263-265. Government Print- ing Office, 1903. ; ‘syoeys se passvjo Li1‘z1 pue ‘Jems 2lp1 ‘peq S¢1‘I ‘poosd ase 6EL'C YIM jo ‘Az10 ay} UI sSurpying Lop‘gr o1v ory, ‘e[IURY, JO SuOTyeyqeYy oY} Jo worj10doad aSze] B YONS MAIO; YOIYM—vsI[OYO OeISV pue onsvid ormoqnq oj sasnoy-joy—syAovYs s[qvurmoqe oY} MOYS SUOT}VI}SHI[I Surpasoons [es19Aes oy} pue sinjord siq,—'l ‘ON "NIVYG N3dO AHLT1W4d YSAO ‘ASNOH VYSIOHO TVOIdAL ‘aseastp jo soovid Surpaerq ore pue ‘o10ys oy} Suoye syeArszUT JuoNnbary ye INDIO 319 UMOYS ov YOIYAM dSOY} IAI] SJWoMesuLIIY “IOAO poI9AOD Uddq dOUIS 9ABY S}INpuOd asa] Jo Aue ‘s}impuoo uado Aq sear aseureip [je OT{UO0N PoUINsse SUBITIOMY 94} UIT MM ooo‘oSz jo uorjetndod v sey pt YSnoy} ‘mi9}shs aseMas OU Se] e[IMe]—"c ‘ON "SLESONO-YSLYM SAILYN WVOIdAL ‘SSOJ ALO} IOJ pasinqtttos aseo A19A9 UT SUTEq SI9UMO 9y} ‘patting a19A\ saToyysed asoyy AIO oy} pepPAUT vAgToYO ay} Udy A\—'E ‘ON "Y3LN39 VYSTIOHO IWVWOldAL V *SYOVYS poyo}oIM Aoy} Ul pp ATrous0F7 AdyVj 7eY} Jer sures ayy Aed ajdoad ayy, ‘svaie petind ssey} JO stltos UO SesHoY-}sttiaus} [IPO SuIpying jo Juotmtedxe 9y} Suryeut ose soytoyne jedwormnm oyp~—h ‘oN “SONIGTING GSLO3INI JO ONINYNE YALSV LOIYLSIO VIOuVS ‘Woy }{iNqor 10 pofapoulot puev pouopueqe oq 0} Woy} pdsnvo solj0yyne syJ, ‘ssvastp oy} peosds 07 padjay Apyomb SI} SAT] Soovsd yoxIVPY “VULYD wiory poysodunt sopqvjesaa outos UT BPIULPAL OFT psonposPU sv vIBTOYO WY} peddzfaq st i]—'S ‘on "NIVYG N3dO AHL14 LSNIVOV dN ONINOVE «SHOVHS,, ONIMOHS ‘LASMYVW SAILVN ‘WOTONA}sMOO I19q} UO yUads AatMOUT aq} UO YsarozUT Led 07 aTqeyyord ATQUaTOUgNS ore Jnq ‘ArepLUeS ATUO jot S1v SJOYARU OY, “4S9HAL] OY} SI VIZOSTATC] OY} YOIYM Jo ‘V[IUL] UI SJoYIVUT MoU MOjJ q[INq aAvY Sat}oyINe [edrorunw oy.—"9 “ON “OS 69F'GCT$ SOD =“ TOGT ‘TT IaquraAON pajetdurop “LSYYVW VIYXOSIAIG ‘LON “HLIVSH 30 SGYVOE TIVIONIAOUd JO SLNAGISSYd GNV SGNV1SI ANIddITIHd SHL YOS HLIVSH 4O GYvOg IMPROVEMENTS IN THE City oF MANILA 600 houses were remodeled, cleaned, and made habitable, and hundreds of shacks burned «to the ground.-~ In ad- dition to all this,’a systematic effort was made to immunize the susceptibles of Manila against bubonic plague’by means of the Shiga: antipestic vaccine. ‘The work was begun on the 15thof January, 1902. From that date until the 1r5thof March over 25,000 persons were inocu- lated. ‘The lower classes, including the Chinese, cocheros, laborers, servants, peddlers, etc., with their wives and chil- ‘dren, who are the occupants of the lower . floors and nipa houses, were especially selected for immunization. The goy- ernment laboratory furnished from two to three hundred doses of the antipestic vaccine daily, but on account of the large number requiring immunization, it was necessary to cable Professor Ki- tasato, of Tokyo, for additional vaccine, and 50,000 doses were received from that source. The work was performed by native physicians, under the direc- tion of Dr J. V. Tormey, medical in- spector. This long fight without rest day or night had told on Dr Meacham. When nO)S) the battle was over and the plague had been driven from its last haunt, he col- lapsed. His strength was exhausted, he was unable to fight for himself, and died on April 14, 1902. It is unfortu- nate for the United States that the man who freed the Philippines of bubonic plague, Dr Franklin R. Meacham, and the man who freed Cuba of yellow fever, Dr Walter Reed, should both pass away the very moment their great work had been accomplished. The plague had barely been defeated when Asiatic cholera attacked the city. Strict quarantine of infected districts and the burning of them when the dis- ease became too violent, the closing of wells, a careful inspection of all vege- tables, and a continuation of the cleans- ing of the city habitations checked the ravages of the disease, but could not prevent its spread. The water supply was kept from contamination by the rigid patrol of the United States Army, or conditions would have been many times worse. Several thousands died in Manila and about 100,000 in the provinces where the disease could not be controlled. IMPROVEMENTS IN THE CITY OF MANILA O city was ever more in need of | \ playgrounds or recreation fields. The natives of the islands take readily to games, and with little encour- agement would become keen rivals in many of the sports at the present time confined to the American and foreign population. Owing to the lack of ordi- nary healthful exercises and diversion, the great army of clerks and officials and the rapidly increasing American and foreign population find but little to do after office hours beyond going to clubs or driving, and both are expensive amusements. The board of public works is pre- paring plans for converting the large field in front of the Luneta, known as Camp Wallace, into a recreation ground open to everyone, where such sports as baseball, football, cricket, polo, and lawn tennis may be enjoyed. A part of the field will be devoted to a chil- dren’s playground, modeled as nearly as possible after similar places in the United States. There is in preparation a plan for a city park, laid out with broad drives and walks, and also an aviary and zoological reserve, and all other elements of a modern park. With ; ; : *SO}EIS poptt oy} UL staysds og WII ATqvroavy aivdur0d 00s ‘paaoadtar juswazedap OC, OF ST YAOM OP], “BIPWV]AT TOF OOTATOS SUIVTLSI] puv Avo OFAZDa]o Ue UT ynd 0} oJeoTpUAS UBOTIOUTY UP payuPAS o1oM sostyouvsy A[UOIOY XB} PUL] PPSI[S v Aq pasvaroul ATqvepIsuoo Udsq SY] YIM ‘ONM@AT IV[NSUL aq} Woy aMIOd s}UOMIAAOCIdtMT osaqy 10} spuny 91} ITV “payonazsuoo suroq surddiys 07 spavnsoyes 1ay}O pue sisyeMyzve1q pur ‘paspoap Suyeq ore sioqieyY ‘ayqvoyovad zadsAdIayM YIMq SULod av Sosplq MoU PUL Speol MON ‘VOTPISIMbov Uv attly VOUS po}ONASUOeET oosq OAT] VILUBIAL UT S}oo0Iq8 OT} [TV—'g ‘ON “GNNOYS MOT AHL SAOS8V LASYLS SH1L ONISIVY NI GASN SANOLS AAVAH ONIMOHS ‘SYHOLOAdSNI NVOINSWV YSQGNN SONIdIMN4d A@ NO GaIYYVO ‘WHOM L3aYLS AMERICAN DEVELOPMENT OF THE PHILIPPINES the building of the electric railroad such places will be accessible to every-one. The botanical gardens on the Paseo de Bagumbayan have been improved and extended until they approach their former state under Spanish manage- ment. Originally this park had many beautiful trees and plants and a splen- did collection of orchids, but nearly all of these, with the exception of the larger trees, were destroyed during the siege of the city and the insurrection. During the last few months the deer park has been completed, neatly fenced . with wire, and stocked with a number of deer of different kinds from the various islands of the archipelago. There is also a monkey cage, and from time to time the animals and buildings are being added to. This is a very Oy popular resort with all classes, espe- cially the Filipinos. The department of public works in Manila employs about 1,714 officers, mechanics, and laborers. Laborers are paid $1, 80 cents, and 60 cents per day, while a few subordinate assistants re- ceive 50 cents and 4o cents a day. Wages are paid monthly. Ordinary labor is plentiful, while skilled labor is scarce. On the whole, Filipino labor has been very successful, but its value has been considerably hampered by the numerous fiestas and the after effects, such as laziness and extended absences. No Chinese are employed. ‘The day consists of eight hours’ work. ‘The labor costs about 25 per cent more than it does in the United States, and is of an inferior quality. AMERICAN DEVELOPMENT OF THE PHILIPPINES OVERNOR TAFT, in his last G annual report, states that ‘‘the wealth of these islands must always be their agricultural products.”’ Formerly the Filipinos produced enough from their fields and forests to be self- supporting ; but asaresult of long years of internal disturbances, the loss of go per cent of the carabaos from the rind- erpest, and the recent devastation by cholera, most of the rice fields and farms have become overgrown with rank vege- tation, and lately there has been wide- spread famine. Congress at its last ses- sion appropriated $3,000,000 to relieve the distress intheislands. Half of this sum will be used immediately to import thousands of carabaos from Ceylon and India to be sold to the people at cost price. Meanwhile experts of the insular gov- ernment have been devising means to helpthe farmers. A serum has recently been discovered which will protect the carabao inoculated with it from the rind- erpest, so that carabaos may now be safely imported. ‘Tubes of locust fun- gus, obtained from Dr L. O. Howard, of Washington, have been distributed and have checked the plagues of locusts. In one instance 64 bushels of dead lo- custs were found in the vicinity of a place where eight or ten locusts, in- fected with the fungus, had been re- leased, and the remainder of the swarm had disappeared. A soil survey has been organized and has begun to examine the land in different sections of the islands to see whether new varieties of plants may not be introduced. Other experts have been trying to improve the native varieties by careful selection. Already the government has received applica- tions asking for information from more than one thousand persons, mainly Fili- pinos, distributed throughout the archi- Se os dee a ‘pouroaysa AT YSty Jou st YySop suf} ynq ‘Ft wos poxedord sp toy Wwe] d[Qenyea vB puvy Sno} ATSurpovoxo St aptly SIL “vos uiodo JO SalI OL SSO.19 0} aJLTISOY JOU S9OpP PUY ‘AOIUIUTMS [NJ19puoM v SL ayT “Avp at} JO Woy oy} SuTAMp stnory jo atdnoo &B ULI]} OL TOY FL JMOYIIA Y1OM TOpyas [ITM pw ‘“YWeq put ATLep str WO juapuadap A194 st oH va 3 a 3s A Ts . . . . = ve vIpPUT Woy ATVULSLIO poytodurr ATquqord sem oFY ‘sourddypryp, oy Jo peurruv PSV oY} SI O[eYN 19}wVM 10 ORGvvS oIPT,—"6 ‘ON §MMbP ,, POT[Bo OAV PUB OUT) JO OPBUE OLN JAWS OY WO SJoysvq OL "NWWLUVO YO « OHSNOLSYYVO,, SAILVN V Ad NAAIYG «OVavVevo,, V Ad NMVYG LYVO LHOIAYS Y¥O NOLAYYVO ‘yeay] OY] JO otp pue asdey[oo 0} ydv st ay ‘prey 00} paysnd jy “y[nq asny Yons jo [vuttue ue woz yoodxo p[NOM ouO doUvINpUDS pue Y}Suerjs oy} ‘aAoMOY ‘jou sey ORqeieo sy, ‘saurddryiyg ay} ur ssodimd SI} 1Oj a[qu[IeAv [eurtue ATWO ayy St ORqvavO ayy Os ‘Auod ourdyLy [pets ay} 10y YIOM KAvay 00} SI SP9Y 91 9Y} SuLMO,q— ‘oI ‘ON “S01Y YOS G13l4a V ONIMOYYVH ‘Joorj]s UreU s}r Suoye Suryyem <[duris Aq sovld v ur soojeyng ay} Fey papeduiejs sammrjzotos sey ay ASE]IIA oATFEU JOPNPOIS B UL JVY} PUL “UBUT 9JIM ¥ JO [JOU aT} JsUTeSe oorpnleid zeais v sey ORGeALO JI[}.3eY} SAa}e}S Ia}s9010 \\ ‘> UBAgI— ‘Il “ON Pepuy eA |p FETT JOT 1 r Hp TOE CI Dye M ‘DS I N "S0IY ONIMOVLS FP AN “: AMERICAN DEVELOPMENT OF THE PHILIPPINES pelago. Eighteen thousand two hun- dred and fifty packages of field and garden seeds, including 134 varieties, have been distributed to them. It has been proved that fairly good Irish pota- toes and peas will grow in the lowlands near Manila. Beets also do well in the same locality, and radishes are ready for the table in three to four weeks after planting. Improved varieties of oranges and lemons brought from California are flourishing. A new species of wild grape has been discovered in the island of Negros. An effort is being made to improve it sufficiently for cultivation, as lo grapes to speak of have hereto- fore been grown on theislands. Fifty- two fiber-producing plants are known to exist in the Philippines, but only two of these have been of commercial value. Experts are experimenting to see whether some of the other fifty va- rieties may not also be profitable. ‘These are only some of the practical devices of the government to better con- ditions. ‘The wasteful methods of the different industries—such as the gutta- percha, the tobacco, the sugar cane, and the hemp—at present causing a loss of fully 50 per cent in the product, are being corrected by educating the Fili- pino to a more economical and hence more profitable system. An experiment station for the grow- ing of rice on a large scale is being es- tablished. The present Filipino method of rice growing seems ridiculously anti- quated. Every blade of the millions of stalks on a large rice plantation is now planted by hand. The labor is most exhausting, since it must be done in stooping posture, either under the burn- ing sun reflected from the muddy water or under a mighty downpour of rain. Looking over the paddy fields in the month of October, it seems incredible that every blade was planted by hand. An effort is to be made to introduce the American drill for planting. Modern farming implements are being intro- 201 duced and their use taught the natives. An extensive stock farm for the breed- ing of draft and dairy animals is also being established. ‘The funds for these experiment stations are advanced by the government, but the stations are intended to be and will doubtless soon become self-supporting. Professor Worcester believes that the agricultural opportunities in the Philip- pines for young Americans are consid- erable. Only a small part of the soil capable of producing sugar, hemp, and tobacco is under cultivation. Large areas of government lands are admira- bly adapted to the cultivation of cocoa- nuts, for which there is a large and profitable demand. The trees can be grown readily and with comparatively little danger of loss. Under existing conditions, the minimum annual profit from a fairly good bearing tree is $1 Mexican, and frequently two or three times this amount is realized. Other crops, such as Indian corn and alfalfa, can be grown between the rows of co- coanut trees while the latter are matur- ing, and used to fatten hogs, which always bring a good price in the Phil- ippine market. The demand for copra in these islands is greatly in excess of the supply and is steadily increasing, while cocoanut oil now sells readily in Manila at $1.25 Mexican per gallon. The lands along the coast of Min- danao and Paragua are particularly favorable to cocoanut growing, and in the latter island trees are said to come to bearing in four years. No other country hasclimate and soil so favorable to cacao growing as Mindanao. The cacao now produced in that island is of superior quality and is nearly all bought up for shipment to Spain, where it brings an especially high price. ‘There are numerous other regions in the isl- ands where cacao can be raised to great advantage, but there is not today a cacao plantation in the archipelago, the Filipinos having almost invariably con- ; ‘O[IJAoy AIOA SI SPURIST IPT} JO [IOs 917} ySnoy} ‘premyorq ApSurposoxo ov spoyjour [emnqMose mot, “spessaa Surssed 04 qjes Soyy yor ‘spived May v pur ‘sypeys ‘sayqanz ‘STaquInond vas ‘S]soul Spl o[qrpe Suroyyes ur omy oy} Jo ysour puads, dnors souvurmepey sy} Jo syuvpqeyur oyy—'cl ‘ON “SGNV1SI SANVNINV1VO ‘S01HY ONILSAAYVH NAWOM VANVdOVL “AYNLINOINSY SAILIWIYd Bencuret— THE GARDEN OF THE PHILIPPINES tented themselves with planting a few scattering bushes, which are left prac- tically without care, to be swamped by brush and preyed upon by insects. Proper harvesting and curing methods are not employed. ‘The fruits are torn from the bushes, injuring the bark and leaving the way open for the attacks of injurious insect pests. An especially fine coffee is grown in the mountain regions of Benguet and Bontoce and in the province of Lepanto. The bushes yield heavy crops and the unhulled coffee at present sells readily in Manila at $35 Mexican per cavan, for consumption in these islands or for shipment to Spain. Coffee bushes come to bearing in Benguet in three years. There is no region in the United States which has a more healthful or delight- ful climate than is afforded by the Ben- guet highlands, where a white man can perform heavy field labor without ex- cessive fatigue or injury to his health. It is almost impossible to secure in Manila the milk needed by the sick. Fresh milk sells for 75 cents Mexican per wine quart. A dairy on the out- skirts of the city, with 95 animals, in- cluding several bulls, was netting $5,000 Mexican per month when the animals were attacked by rinderpest. Fresh meats to the value of $609,664 203 per annum, exclusive of that used by the Army and Navy, are being imported each year into Manila. ‘There is no rea- son why in time the islands should not supply this meat. The pastures of Ben- guet, Lepanto, and Bontoc afford one vast well-watered cattle range, where improved breeds of horned cattle could be successfully introduced, while in the lowlands there are vast stretches of grazing lands suitable for raising cattle and carabaos. ‘The latter are at present worth $150 to $300 Mexican per head in the Manila market. Properly con- ducted cattle ranches willcertainly yield very handsome returns. Excellent native oranges are produced in the province of Batangas, in the Cala- mianes Islands, and elsewhere. ‘The trees, which are often large and vigor- ous, seldom receive any care, nor has any systematic effort been made to im- prove the quality of the fruit, which sells readily at a good price. ‘There is every reason to believe that improved citrus fruits can be successfully intro- duced. Numerous new industries, such as raising of vanilla in the lowlands and the cultivation of fruits and vegetables peculiar to the temperate zone in Ben- guet, ought, if properly conducted, to result profitably. BENGUET_THE GARDEN OF THE PHILIPPINES War dated April 15, Governor Taft announced his arrival at Benguet, which he described as follows : ““Great province. ‘This is only 150 miles from Manila, with air as bracing as Adirondacks or Murray Bay. Only pines and grass lands. ‘Temperature this hottest month in the Philippines, in my cottage porch at 3 in the after- if a cablegram to the Secretary of noon, 68° F. Fires are necessary night and morning.”’ Benguet is a little province about the size of Rhode Island. It consists almost entirely of high mountains, some of them reaching to 7,000 feet, and resembles an American park in the variety and beauty of its scenery. ‘he elevated tablelands of the province Governor Taft plans to make a health IGORROTE CLIMBING A TREE FERN, BENGUET. No. 13.—In Benguet Province, Luzon, gigantic tree ferns and the northern pine are seen growing side by side. It isa wonderful region, where tropical, subtropical, and temperate zone plants thrive equally well. OE: Oi Mf f Oe Raz eo teen te rer IN THE PINES, BENGUET. ‘Sa}O1TOST OY} Aq SAOTTVA OS9Y} UE WMOAT st [tom oy] UT oayoo ysauy at] Jo au0S—'S1 ‘oN ‘sUYSUq vogoo Aq popuUUnOLIUS SosLO FT NOZN1 ‘LANONSE ‘NVAVEVO JO NMOL JLONYOD! SHL “AUTIGE [BOLMBYOIUL 9]qeASpIsuoOD aARY pu ‘uozi/] JO JJBY UreyzI0U ay} 19A0 pvords ‘sov1 ouy v aie Koy, ‘soutddiyiyq ay} Jo siepuvyysiy 9y} a1v sojor0Sy sy T—'91 ON "NOZN1 “LANONAG ‘NVAVEVO ‘S3O0VYNSaL 30IY SLOYYODI 4 CHIEF OF THE GADDANES, ISABELA, LUZON. No. 17-—One of the most important branches of the insular government is the Bureau of Non-Christian Tribes, whose duty it is to find out the actual conditions of the various non-Christian tribes in the archipelago. These tribes comprise about 2,000,000 people. At present no accurate information is to be had about them. They cover Northern Luzon, Mindoro, Palawan, and the great island of Mindanao. Some of them, like the Negritos, are comparatively harmless, while others, like the Gad- danes, are fierce and hard to control. It is said that head hunting is still practiced by the Gaddanes, and that a young man of this tribe cannot find a bride until he has at least one head to his credit. ADULT NEGRITO WOMAN, SHOWING RELATIVE SIZE. No. 18.—The Negritos are physical and mental weaklings, and are rapidly disap- pearing. They are found in the interior of all the larger islands, and are generally supposed to have been the first inhabitants of the islands, having come from New Guinea. They hide in the mountain forests, where they were driven by later in- vaders. There are about 30,000 of them left. They live on the fruits and tubers which they find in the forest, and like the pigmies of Africa kill their game with poisoned arrows. 210 resort for the Americans in the islands. At present it is reached only by horse trail, but a wagon road is being built by the insular government and a rail- way has been surveyed and will be constructed before many years. Forests of pine and cedar cover the higher slopes of the mountains, while lower down in the valleys gigantic ferns are seen. It may well be doubted if any region in the world offers such unexcelled ad- vantages for experimental work with plants as are presented by the climate and soil of Benguet. The climate ad- mits of the growing of a great variety of tropical, subtropical, and temperate zone plants. Inthe gardens of the gov- ernor one may see coffee bushes bearing heavily, fine tea plants, hot-house gar- denias, caladiums, draczenas, frangi- pani, and mango trees, all characteristic of the tropics; alsophila tree ferns, scarlet hibiscus, passion fruit, begonias, hydrangeas, and many other plants of the subtropical regions, and side by side with these potatoes, tomatoes, peas, beans, celery, and other garden vege- tables and monthly roses, all strictly temperate zone products, while the neighboring hillsides are covered with pine trees and produce raspberries and huckleberries in considerable abun- dance. A red volcanic soil covers large areas in the province. This soil seems ex- traordinarily fertile. At the beginning of the rainy season last year, the most Wells, WkRIIwiSisl SQW Lal HE Antarctic expedition sent out by the Royal Geographi- cal Society and Royal Society of England in rgor has done very good work during its first year in the far south. Captain Scott, the leader, with a sledging party, succeeded in getting Tue Nationa, GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE unfavorable time, cabbage, tomatoes, onions, leeks, carrots, turnips, pars- nips, beans, peas, cucumbers, marrow, squashes, pumpkins, salsify, Irish pota- toes, white oats, wheat, millet, and alfalfa were sown, and the results would have done justice to California. On the elevated plateau are vast stretches of well-watered grazing land, where thousands of horned cattle can find rich pasturage. About 15,000 people live in Benguet, nearly all of whom are Igorrotes. The Igorrotes of this province are intelligent, and pronounced vastly superior to the average Filipino. They are willing workers, cheerful, trustworthy, and skillfullaborers. The illustrations Nos. 15 and 16 show that they possess con- siderable natural talent in construction. They are non-Christianized, having always resisted the attempts of the Spanish to convert them.* * REFERENCES.—The following list of offi- cial works relating to the Philippines, published by the government, may be of service. The re- ports may be purchased from the Superintend- ent of Public Documents, Washington, D. C.: Report of the Shurman Commission, 4 vols., $2.35. First Report of the Taft Commission, No- vember 30, 1900, I vol., $0.50. Second Report of the Taft Commission, June 30, Igo, 2 vols., $0.95. Third Report of the Taft Commission, No- vember I, 1902, 2 vols., $1.65. Atlas of the Philippines, $3.15. Pronouncing Gazetteer and Geographical Dictionary of the Philippines, $2.10. The Coal Measures of the Philippines, $0.40. The People of the Philippines, $0.05. ROWARS EEE DITO 100 miles nearer the South Pole than any predecessor, reaching 80° 17’; the expedition wintered 4oo miles further south than any other expedition had ever done before, which makes their meteorological and other scientific ob= servations specially valuable; in their Tue British SourH PoLtar ExPEpDITION vessel the Discovery they coasted along the ice-barrier one hundred and _ fifty miles beyond the point where James Clarke Ross stopped 60 yearsago. This ice-barrier extends from the land out upon the water. From its front, which Captain Scott believes floats on the water, the great southern icebergs break, towering sometimes to nearly 1,000 feet, and compared to which the icebergs of the North Atlantic are but pigmies. After coasting for many days along the ice-front to longitude 152° 30’, latitude 76°, they returned and put in ata safe harbor—MacMurdo Bay. ‘This they made their base of action. Here they passed the winter in sight of Erebus, the volcano which Ross had seen belch- ing forth fire and smoke in 1841. It is quiet now. A sledging party ascended a glacier to the height of 9,000 feet, and found a level plain stretching to the west as far as the eye could reach. In latitude 82° they discovered an extensive mountainous region, hitherto absolutely unknown, extending to 83° 20’ nearly due south. This discovery seems to indicate that land stretches to the Pole in a series of lofty mountains, and is an important geographical result. CAPTAIN SCOTT'S REPORT The J/orning, the auxiliary wooden ship that left New Zealand December 6, 1902, to carry supplies to Captain Scott, found the expedition at their winter base on Victoria Land, left the provisions, and then returned to New Zealand. The following is Captain Scott's report of his work until the ar- tival of the Worning : The Discovery entered the ice-pack ‘on December 23, 1901, in latitude 67° south. Cape Adare was reached on Jan- uary 9, but from there a heavy gale and ice delayed the expedition, which did not reach Wood Bay till January 18. A landing was effected on the 20th in an excellent harbor, situated in latitude 76° 30’ south. A record of the voyage was deposited at Cape Crozier on the 211 22d. The Discovery then proceeded along the barrier within a few cables’ length, examining the edge and making repeated soundings. In longitude 165° the barrier altered its character and trended northwards. Sounding here showed that the Discovery was in shal- low water. From the edge of the bar- rier high snow slopes rose to an exten- sive, heavily glaciated land, with occa- sionally bare precipitous peaks. The expedition followed the coast line as far as latitude 76°, longitude 152° 30’. The heavy pack formation of the young ice caused the expedition to seek winter quarters in Victoria Land. On Feb- ruary 3 the iscovery entered an inlet in the barrier in longitude 174°. A bal- loon was sent up and a sledge party ex- amined the land as far as latitude 78° 50’, near Mount Erebus and Terror. At the southern extremity of an island excellent winter quarters were found. The expedition next observed the coast of Victoria Land, extending as far as a conspicuous cape, in latitude 78° 50’. It was found that mountains do not ex- ist here, and the statement that they were to be found is clearly a matter for explanation. Huts for living and for making magnetic observations were erected, and the expedition prepared for wintering. The weather was bois- terous, but a reconnaissance of sledge parties was sent out, during which the seaman Vince lost his life, the remainder of the party narrowly escaping a similar fate. The ship was frozen in March 24. The expedition passed a comfortable winter in well-sheltered quarters. The lowest recorded temperature was 62° below zero. ‘The sledging commenced with the coming of spring, on Septem- ber 2, parties being sent out in all di- rections. Lieutenant Royds, Mr Skel- ton, and party successfully established a record in an expedition to Mount Terror, traveling over the barrier under severe sledging conditions, with a tem- perature of 58° below zero. Com- mander Scott, Dr Wilson, assistant sur- 22, geon, and Lieutenant Shackleton trav- eled ninety-four miles to the south, reaching land in latitude 80° 18’ south, longitude 163° west, and establishing a world’s record for the farthest point south. ‘The journey was accomplished in most trying conditions. ‘The dogs all died, and the three men had to drag the sledges back to the ship. Ljieuten- ant Shackleton almost died from ex- posure, but is now quite recovered. The party found that ranges of high mountains continued through Victoria Land. At the meridian of 160° foot- hills much resembling the Admiralty Range were discovered. The ice barrier is presumably afloat. It continues horizontal and is slowly fed from the land ice. Mountains, ten or twelve thousand feet high, were seen in latitude 82° south, the coast line con- tinuing at least as far as 83° 20’ nearly duesouth. A party ascending a glacier on the mainland found a new range of mountains. At a height of 9,000 feet a level plain was reached, unbroken to the west as far as the horizon. The scientific work of the expedition includes a rich collection of marine fauna, of which a large proportion are new species. Sea and magnetic obser- vations were taken, as well as seismo- graphic records and pendulum observa- tions.* A large collection of skins and skeletons of southern seals and sea birds has been made. A number of excel- lent photographs have been taken and careful meteorological observations were secured. Hxtensive quartz and grit ac- cumulations were found horizontally bedded in volcanic rocks. Lava flows were found in the frequently recurring plutonic rock which forms the basement of the mountains. *Tt will be interesting to note whether the disturbances of Mont Pelée and La Souffriére, and in Guatemala and Mexico during the past twelve months have been recorded by Captain Scott’s instruments or by any of the South Polar expeditions. THe NatrionaL GrocraPHic MaGaAZzine Before the arrival of the Worning the Discovery bad experienced some priva- tion, owing to part of the supplies hav- ing gone bad. ‘This accounted for the death of aJl the dogs. She has, how- ever, revictualled from the J/orning.,. and the explorers are now in a position. to spend a comfortable winter. RECORDS OF FARTHEST SOUTH The following table, compiled by Mr Cyrus C. Adams, gives the records of the most important Antarctic explorers. arranged in the order of the most south- erly points attained ; it gives the names. of the explorers, the year in which they reached their most southerly latitude, the latitude and longitude they attained, the method of reaching it, whether by sledge or ship, and the name of the ves- sel or vessels in their expeditions : Long. S. lat. | from Gr. 80° 17/| 163° oo’ W. | Captain Scott, 1902, sledge, steam— er Discovery. 165 oo W. | Borchgrev ink, fgoo, sledge,steam- | er Southern Gross. | Captain James Ross, 1842, ship,. sailing vessels Erebus and Ter— vor. Captain Weddell, 1823, ship, sail— ing vessels Jane and Beaufoy. Lieutenant De Gerlache, 1899, ship, steamer Belgica. - Captain James Ross, 1843, ship, sailing vessels Erebus and Ter- 70V. Captain Cook, 1774, ship, sailing | vessels Resolution and Adven- ture. 78 10 | 161 27 W. 71 Io | 106 54 W. 69 53| 92 19 W.| Captain .Bellingshausen, 1821, | | ship, sailing vessels I "ostok and | | Mirny. | Captain Biscoe, 1831, ship, sailing | vessels Zula and Lzveley. 69 21| 2 15 W.|Captain Bellingshausen,. 1820, | ship, sailing vessels I ostok and Mivny. Captain Evensen, 1894, ship, sail- ing vessel Hertha. Captain Balleny, 1839, ship, sail- | ing vessels Eliza Scott and Sa- | brina. | Captain Larsen, 1893 | ing vessel /ason. | 147 30 E.| Lieutenant Wilkes, 1840, | | sailing vessel Vincennes. 67 51 | 39 40 W. | Captain Moore, 1845, ship, sailing | | vessel Pagoda. | Captain Cook, 1773, ship, sailing | vessels Resolution and Adven- ture. 69 10 69 00 | 172 Ir EB. 68 10 | 60 oo W. ship, sail- ship, 67 31 | 142 54 Ww. GEOGRAPHIC NOTES BUREAU OF FORESTRY HE plan which Maryland adopted some time ago of getting the cooperation of the Bureau of Forestry in niaking a detailed study of her forests is a most excellent one, and is equally available to all the states and about equally advantageous to them. With the help of the trained foresters of the Bureau of Forestry the Maryland Geo- logical Survey was able to make an inventory of the forest wealth of the state, finding out how much there is of it, the condition it is in, what benefit it is to the state, including its effects on stream flow and on agriculture; how much damage it has suffered, and how such damage may be lessened. The forests of Allegany, Cecil, Garrett, Cal- vert, and Harford counties have already been thoroughly studied by experts of the Bureau of Forestry, and reports for the first three have been published by the state. The work suggests the very great advantages of a similar cooperation be- tween other states and the Bureau of Forestry, although the examinations need not always be as detailed asin the case of Maryland. ‘The matter is ex- tremely simple and may be easily ar- ranged, and the results are valuable out of all proportion to the cost of such work to the states. The Bureau fur- nishes and pays the salaries of the ex- perts who make the examination, when the state has guaranteed their field ex- penses. The reports of the Bureau’s experts become the property of the state, provided they are credited, when published, to the Bureau. For a long time the Bureau of For- estry has been urging state investiga- tions of forest lands, because the results of such investigations are as valuable to the Bureau as to the states them- selves. Inquiries are constantly re- ceived from lumbermen and others regarding the forest resources of differ- ent states which the Bureau is unable to answer fully, because often no accu- rate studies of the regions have been made. Every bit of reliable informa- tion concerning the forests of the dif- ferent states and territories is welcomed by the Bureau as contributing to the sum of knowledge of the forest resources of the whole country on which the Bu- reatt must base its general forest policy. States like New York, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Connecticut, Penn- sylvania, Minnesota, Michigan, and Wisconsin, which are working out for themselves some sort of forest policy, find it absolutely essential to take stock of their timber lands. Michigan has begun such an examination, through cooperation between the state forest commission, the university authorities, and the Bureau of Forestry. A study already made of 60,000 acres of forest preserve lands in northern Michigan by T. H. Sherrard, of the Bureau of Forestry, resulted in recommendations for fire-protection experiments and for tree planting, which have been submit- ted to the state legislature. California has appropriated $15,000 for an exami- nation of the forests of the state. A report on the forests of Texas has been prepared under direction of the Bureau of Forestry, and will probably form when published the basis for forest leg- islation in the state. Several years ago the forests of the northern part of Wis- consin were examined by Filibert Roth, of the Bureau, and his report was pub- lished by the Bureau and by the state. Prof. J. G. Jack, of the Bureau, two years ago made an examination of the forests of Vermont, and the work was continued more recently by C. D. Howe. Recommendations for forest preserves before being acted upon by the legisla- ture must be supported by reliable 214 studies of the forest growth on the areas which it is proposed shall be reserved. New Hampshire, alarmed by the heavy cutting in the White Mountains, has appropriated $5,000 for an examination of that region by the Bureau of For- estry, and an examination of the forest lands on Long Island may form a part of the summer’s work of the Bureau. THE NEW TRANS-CANADA RAILWAY HE projected new trans-continen- tal railway, for which the Do- minion Government recently granted a charter to the Trans-Canada Railway Company, is described by Mr E. T. D. Chambers in the Review of Reviews for April. Of the commercial importance of the new road Mr Chambers writes as follows : ‘““The proposed line of the Trans- Canada Railway is one of the most direct which can span the continent. Starting from deep-water termini at Chicoutimi—the head of navigation on the Saguenay River—at Quebec, and at Montreal, it is destined to traverse and develop the best part of the newly discovered wheat and timber lands of northern Quebec in the James Bay dis- trict, to tap the whole of the James Bay and Hudson Bay trade, to open up the DAKOTA SCALE OF MILES oO 100200 800400 5001065 Tue Nationa, GeocraPHic MAGAZINE valuable mineral country of northern Ontario, to cross the center of the rich wheat lands of the Peace River valley, and, finally, to reach one of the finest ports on the Pacific coast by a pass in the mountains only 2,000 feet high, as compared with 4,425 at Crow’s Nest, and with 5,400 at Kicking Horse. ‘“The most cursory glance at the line laid down on the map for the new road reveals the directness of the route and and its far-northern location. ‘“From Quebec to Port Simpson wa the T'rans-Canada Railway will be only 2,830 miles, all of the route south of the northern limit of wheat, while the distance between the same points va the Grand Trunk Railway will be about 3,400 miles, and that from Quebec to Vancouver by the Canadian Pacific Railway is 3,078 miles. The expected saving in both distance and gradients by the proposed road over existing routes from Manitoba to the Canadian seaports on the St Lawrence is so great that the promoters have already under- taken to carry wheat from all points on its line in the Province of Manitoba to the ocean steamer at Chicoutimi, Mon- treal, or Quebec at rates which will save the farmers of Manitoba and the Northwest about seven cents per bushel on present cost of transportation to the Courtesy of Review of Reviews Map showing Route of new Trans-Canadian Railway GeocraPHic Nores seaboard. It isclaimed that this saving alone will much more than pay the total interest upon the cost of the road’s construction. ““Tt is admitted on every hand that the terminal seaports of the Trans- Canada leave nothing to be desired. The harbor of Port Simpson is said to be the finest on the Pacific coast north of San Francisco. It has the alditional advantage of being much nearer to Yokohama than either Vancouver or San Francisco. Nottaway, on James Bay, which is to be reached by a branch of the main line, is the only deep-water harbor on the bay, and with some dredging might be used by vessels drawing thirty feet of water. The coast line of James and Hudson Bays, tributary to this railway, will be about four thousand miles. Chicoutimi, on the Saguenay, can be reached by vessels of any draught, and Quebec has mag- nificent docks, which have cost the government millions of dollars, with deep-water berth and elevator facilities for steamers of any draught. The new bridge now building over the St Law- rence, at Quebec, will enable the Trans- Canada road to make use of St John and Halifax for winter ports if ever those of Quebec and Chicoutimi should be blocked by ice.”’ EXPEDITION TO TURKESTAN R RAPHAEL PUMPELLY is on his way to Turkestan on a most important scientific mission. His jour- ney is for the purpose of looking over the ground in Turkestan with reference toa combined physico-geographical and archzeological exploration, if such fur- ther work should be found to be prom- ising as to results and practicable as regards execution. It has been his wish to see this done for forty years, and the results obtained by Russian surveys in recent years in connection with some parts of the prob- AS lem have strengthened his belief that the region offers a field of the greatest interest in connection with the relation between the growth and changes—so- cial, economic, and ethnological—of nations and measurable changes in their environment. The journey is made under the aus- pices of the Carnegie Institution. Prof. W. M. Davis, of Harvard, will have charge of the physical geographical part of the problem and will meet him on the Caspian early in May. Inthe meantime Dr Pumpelly has gone to St Petersburg to obtain the permission of the Russian Government, on whose willingness and sympathy all depends. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY HE Survey has begun an experi- ment which will doubtless prove of great practical service to the mining interests of the country. Heretofore the explorations of the geologists of the Sur- vey have not been available until one to two years after the explorations were made. ‘To prepare and to publish the complete report of a season’s work takes considerabletime. By the new arrange- ment such results of the season’s work as have direct economic importance are to be published at once in advance of the purely scientific investigations. This plan has been begun by the publication of a bulletin (No. 213) which summa- rizes the work of economic character done in 1902. ‘The bulletin, says Dr C. Willard Hayes in the preface, ‘‘is designed to meet the wants of the busy man, and is so condensed that he will be able to obtain results and reach con- clusions with a minimum expenditure of time and energy. It also affords a better idea of the work which the Sur- vey as an organization is carrying on for the direct advancement of mining interests throughout the country than can readily be obtained from the more voluminous reports.’’ 216 The bulletin contains 60 brief papers, of which the following may be men- tioned: ‘‘Investigation of Metalliferous Ores,’ byS. F. Emmons ; *‘ Placer Gold Mining in Alaska in 1902,’’ by Alfred H. Brooks ; ‘‘ Gold and Pyrite Deposits in the Dahlonega District, Georgia,’’ by E. C. Eckel ; ‘‘ Mineral Deposits of the Bitterroot Range and the Clearwater Mountains, Montana,’’ by W. Lind- gren ; ‘‘ Gold Mining in Central Wash- ington,’’ by George Otis Smith; ‘‘ Ore Deposits of Tonopah and Neighboring Districts, Nevada,’’ by J. E. Spurr; ‘‘Ore Deposits of Butte, Montana,’’ by W. 4H. Weed; ‘‘ Lead, Zinc, and Fluor- spar Deposits of Western Kentucky,”’ by EK. O. Ulrich and W. S. T. Smith ; ““Coal Fields of the United States,’’ by C. Willard Hayes. GEOLOGICAL HISTORY OF NEW YORK CITY HE geological history of New York and its vicinity is discussed at great length, illustrated by numerous maps and pictures, in New York City Geologic Folio, No. 83, recently issued by the Geological Survey. Tens of thousands of years ago the greater part of the State of New York was covered by an immense glacier, similar in character to those now found in Switzerland and Alaska, but im- mensely greater in area and thickness. This ice sheet had gathered up in its course large quantities of sand, gravel, and mud. Part of this burden was pushed before the ice mass, and as the front of the glacier came to rest in the latitude of the city, the material pushed ahead of it was deposited there. When the glacier disappeared, owing to the coming on of a warmer climate, the mass of material deposited along its front became the familiar rounded hills of Long Island—the so called backbone of the island. After the disappearance of the ice THe NationaL GrocRaPpHic MAGAZINE sheet, the land in the vicinity of the city sank, so that the sea covered points now 100 feet above tide level. During this period of submergence, the great brick-clay beds along the Hudson River were deposited. The traveler on the Central or the West Shore road can now see these beds—near Croton Land- ing or Haverstraw, for example—far above the railroad tracks, but they were all formed under water. The next event in the history was, on the contrary, a gradual rising of the land until it stood considerably higher than at present. This was followed by a sinking just as gradual, which is still in progress: Along the coast of Long Island and New Jersey tree stumps may be seen under water. It is known that these have been covered by the sea within very recent times, and that the encroachment of the sea on the land is still going on. Many other subjects of interest are dis- cussed in this folio, which is the most in- teresting contribution to New York local geology ever published. It may be pur- chased from the U.S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C., for 50 cents. The apparatus or box for developing photographic films without the aid of the dark-room, referred toin this Magazine in May, 1902, will prove of great service to explorers and travelers. The present season is the first opportunity that men in the field will have of using the ma- chine, asit was placed on the market too late last year. With the little box, which is no larger and not so heavy as a camera, one will be able to develop one’s films in the evening beside the camp fire, orif a specially fine landscape is seen which the traveler wishes to se- cure beyond all doubt, he may develop his snap-shot 1n broad daylight before moving on, provided water is at hand. The box, invented by Mr A. W. Mc- Curdy, is known asthe Kodak Develop- ing Machine. GEOGRAPHIC NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY N May 20 the National Geographic Society moves into its new home, the Hubbard Memorial Building, which has been erected as a memorial to Hon. Gardiner Greene Hubbard, the first president of the Society, by Mrs Hub- bard and her children and grandchil- dren. The Society has now a member- ship of 2,600 in the United States. Every state and territory is represented onthe membership roll. After May 20 the address of the Society will be Hub- bard Memorial Building, Sixteenth and M streets, Washington, D. C. The Annual Excurston of the National Geographic Society will be on Saturday, May 9, to Annapolis, Maryland. Mem- bers and their friends will leave Wash- ington on a special train at 9 a. m., reaching Annapolis at about 10.15. The morning will be spent in witness- ing the naval drills and in inspecting the grounds. The Superintendent of the Naval Academy has very kindly detailed some members of the naval force to guide the party. Immediately after luncheon, which will be served in Carvel Hall at 12.30 p. m., Elihu F. Reiley, Esq., of Annapolis, will address the Society. He will review some of the more noted points of interest in the history of the famous old town. ‘Three of the four signers, from Maryland, of the Declaration of Independence were GEOGRAPHIC Antarctica. By Edwin Swift Balch, author of ‘‘ Mountain Exploration,’’ ‘*Glaciéres or Freezing Caverns,’’etc. With three large maps. Pp. 230, 7 x11inches. Philadelphia: Allen, Lane & Scott. 1902. The present volume presents a suc- cinct history of south polar exploration. It is written in most entertaining style, giving a graphic account of the battles LITERATURE AiG residents of Annapolis. After the address the party will visit the historic scenes in the town and return to Wash- ington late in the afternoon. The excursion committee of the Society con- sists of Colonel Henry F. Blount, Dr F. V. Coville, and Mr Otto J. J. Luebkert. Dr Jean Charcot is building an ice-re- sisting ship at Saint Malo, France. She is to carry 17 men and to have stowage- room for two years’ provisions. Dr Charcot plans to sail the middle of May for the island of Jan Mayen, and then to explore the region around Nova Zembla and Franz Josef Land. Itisa summer trip only, as he hopes to be back by the first of October of this year. Capt. de Gerlache, who commanded the Belgica South Polar Expedition of 1897- ‘98, goes with him as the oceanogra- pher of the party. Mr Ellsworth Huntington, A. B., Be- loit, 1897, has lately been awarded the Gill memorial by the Royal Geograph- ical Society of London for his explo- rations of the Euphrates River while science teacher in Euphrates College, Harput, Turkey, 1897-1901. Since rg01, Mr Huntington has been a stu- dent in the Graduate School of Harvard University. He has just been appointed Research Assistant by the Carnegie In- stitution, and now goes with Professor Davis to join Professor Pumpelly for a summer of exploration in Turkestan. LITERATURE of the explorers of sixty years ago in their small sailing vessels. A volume that would unravel the tangled and im- perfect records of south polar explora- tion has long been needed. Mr Balch’s book is especially welcome because of the present interest in the far south, where four ably led and ably equipped expeditions are at work. The author aims to particularly em- € 218 phasize the work done by American sailors in the Antarctics. Itis not gen- erally remembered that it was an Ameri- can, Lieut. Charles Wilkes, of the U.S. Navy, who first discovered the Antarc- tic continent, whose area is twice that of Europe. Lieutenant Wilkes, com- manding the ‘‘ United States Exploring Expedition’’ on a voyage around the world, under orders from the Secretary of the Navy, Hon. J. K. Paulding, “‘to penetrate within the Antarctic region,’’ sailed from Sydney, Australia, December 26, 1839. His squadron consisted of four small sailing vessels ; the sloop of war Vincennes, 780 tons, under his own command ; the sloop of war Peacock, 650 tons; the gun brig Porpoise, 230 tons, and the pilot boat Flying Fish, 96 tons. None of these ships were suitable for ice work, for not one of the vessels had planking, extra fastening, or other preparations for these icy regions. The pilot boat put back soon after starting, and several weeks later the Peacock also was forced to return when it was found that ‘‘ the ice had chafed the stem to within one inch and a half of the wood-ends of the planking.’’ The other two vessels kept on and sailed along the Antarctic coast for some 1,500 miles, when they returned toSydney. Lieutenant Wilkes reported to the Secretary of the Navy by letter on March 11: ‘‘It affords me much gratification to report that we have discovered a large body of land within the Antarctic Circle, which I have named the Antarctic Conti- nent, and refer you to the report of our cruise and accompanying charts, inclosed herewith, for full information relative thereto.”’ As Mr. Balch well says: “The cruise of Wilkes will remain among the remarkable voyages of all time. No finer achievement has been accomplished in the annals of the Arctic or of the Antarctic. With unsuitable, improperly equipped ships, amid ice- Tue NatrionaL GeocrRaPHic MAGAZINE bergs, gales, snow-storms, and fogs, Wilkes followed an unknown coast line for over fifteen hundred miles, a distance exceeding in length the Ural Mountain range. It is the long distance which Wilkes traversed which makes the re- sults of his cruise so important, for he did not merely sight the coast in one or two places, but he hugged it for sucha distance as to make sure that the land was continental in dimensions. The expedition noticed appearances of land on January 13; it sighted land almost surely on January 16, from 157° 46’ east longitude, and again more positively on January 19, from 154° 30’ east longi- tude, 66° 20’ south latitude. On Jan- uary 30 the size of the land was suffi- ciently ascertained to receive the name “Antarctic Continent,’ and this discov- ery of Wilkes is the most important dis- covery yet made in the Antarctic.’’ Impartial geographers in due time recognized the importance of Wilkes’ discovery, and in recognition of his work affixed the name of Wilkes Land to the portion of the Antartic Continent along which he coasted. In view of the great achievements of Lieutenant Wilkes, Mr Balch justly argues against the appropriateness of the suggestion of Sir Clements R. Mark- ham, President of the Royal Geograph- ical Society, that the Antarctic regions be divided into four quadrants, each covering ninety degrees of longitude and each named after an Englishman. The New York State Museum has pub- lished a geologic map of New York State exhibiting the structure of the state so far as known. ‘The map has been pre- pared under the direction of Frederick J. H. Merrill, State Geologist; the geo- graphic compilation is by C. C. Ver- meule, and the geologic drafting by A. M. Evans. The map may be pur- chased from the State Museum at Al- bany for $5, mounted on rollers, or for $3 in atlas form. Office Hours: 8.30 A. M. to 5 P. M. Telephone, Main 471 NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY -OFFICES Rooms 107, 108 Corcoran Building Fifteenth and F Sts. N. W., Washington, D. C. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL u President W J McGEE 6 5 6 0 Vice-President JOHN JOY EDSON ° C . ° Treasurer Io Yo lZI AND? 9G . 5 0 . - Secretary ELIZA R. SCIDMORE 5 - Foreign Secretary BOARD OF MANAGERS 4904-1903 43902-1904 1903-1905 MARCUS BAKER A. GRAHAM BELL CHARLES J. BELL HENRY F. BLOUNT DAVID T. DAY GEORGE DAVIDSON F. V. COVILLE A. W. GREELY WM. M. DAVIS D. C. GILMAN ANGELO HEILPRIN JOHN JOY EDSON S. H. KAUFFMANN RUSSELL HINMAN G. K. GILBERT WILLIS L. MOORE W J McGEE A. J. HENRY ISRAEL C. RUSSELL GIFFORD PINCHOT O. P. AUSTIN R. D. SALISBURY O. H. TITTMANN C. HART MERRIAM The National Geographic Magazine is sent free of charge to all members of the National Geographic Society Recommendation for Membership in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY The following form is enclosed for use in the nomination of persons for membership Please detach and fill in blanks and send to the Secretary Dues: Annual membership, $2; Life membership, $50. If check be enclosed, please make it payable to order of the National Geographic Society, and, if at a distance from Washington, remit by New York draft or post-office money-order. To the Secretary, National Geographic Society, Washington, D. C.: RIENGE MW DROPOSC lene a nee am aoe eae een nan be a be es eee es (TOUTES § wpmsmrea lca secs ee SE eR i i Se eae ee Pop aN, a Se Deen for membership in the Society. “Of all inventions, the alphabet and printing press alone ‘excepted, those in- ventions which abridge distance have done most. for civilization.” —Macaulay. “Better than going abroad, and the best preparation for a trip abroad.’ MAP OF THE NEW YORK CENTRAL LINES. PORTLAND SUMMER SCHOOL PORTLAND, MAINE. Portland Summer School JULY 13 TO AUGUST 21 4 Successor to the famous Sauveur Summer School, founded in 1875 at Amherst College. Courses in modern and ancient lan- guages, culture of the speaking voice, instrumental and vocal music. A system of 11,126 miles of railway in the populous territory east of Chicago, St. Louis, and Cincinnati, furnishing luxurious and rapid transportation facilities for more than one-half of the entire popula- tion of the United States. Details of rates and trains given by any New York Central ticket agent. A copy aeumerien S Summer Resorts” will be sent free on receipt of a two-cent stamp, by George H Daniels, General Passenger Agent, New York Central & Hudson River Railroad, Grand Central Station, New York. For illustrated circular address : ARNOLD WERNER-SPANHOOFD Central High School, - Washington, D, C. Z WE make a specialty of HIGH GRADE WORK Jer Scienti >CIENTIFIC: avo TECHNICAL ICAL PUBLICATIONS nT UNNING NING md A ENGRAVERS PHILADELPHIA PLATES TO PRINT UN ONE OR moRE CoLors The (Manhattan Press-Clipping Bureau ARTHUR CASSOT, Proprietor NEW YORK (Knickerbocker Building) LONDON COR. FIFTH AVENUE AND 14TH STREET, NEW YORK Will supply you with all personal reference and clippings on any subject from all the papers and periodicals published here and abroad. Our large staff of readers can gather for you miore | valuable material on any current subject than you can get in a lifetime. TERMS: 100 clippings . . $ 5.00 250 clippings . . . $ 12.00 500 clippings . . . $22.00 1,000 clippings . . . $35.00 ton CE | Alaskan Boundary By Hon. JOHN W. FOSTER Ex-Secretary of State, of the Joint High Commission, and Counsel of the United States in the Present Alaskan Boundary Commission With Twelve Maps The most authoritative presentation of the Alaskan boundary dispute that has ever been issued. Published in the National Geographic Magazine, November, 1899. es SNe Oe SAE See ie FM ok ee a Pa eee eh ee ye is Sosy Eat go ea I SS a : t Pad whe ? . ’ NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC Vol. XIV JUNE, 1903 CONTENTS THE TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KITE STRUCTURE. BY ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL. ILLUSTRATED w APPENDIX OF SEVENTY ILLUSTRATIONS OF KITES AND STRUCTURES USED BY ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL w NOTES ON THE PRECEDING ILLUSTRATIONS, BY ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL w MR. ZIEGLER AND THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY v EXPLORATIONS IN ALASKA, 1903 w GOLD DISCOVERIES IN ALASKA. -ILLUSTRATED w DECISIONS OF BOARD ON GEOGRAPHIC NAMES w MR. FOSTER’S “AMERICAN DIPLOMACY IN THE ORIENT?”’ Published by the National Geographic Society, Corcoran Building, Washington, D. C. $2.50 a Year 25 Cents a Number Entered at the Post-office in Washington, D. C,, as Second-class Mail Matter. ae NATIONAL - GEOGRAPHIC _MAGAZINE _ N ILLUSTRATED MONTHLY, published i the A? Nationa Grocrariic Sociery, at Washing- _ ton, D. C. All editorial communications — should be addressed to. the Editor of the NationaL — Grocrapnic Magazine, Corcoran Building, Wash- — ington, D. C. Business | communications should be addressed to the National Geographic Sox Corcoran aul aae Vehneon D. Kee oe 95 CENTS a cade S250 A YEAR Editor: : GILBERT GRosyENOR fe i ne “Associate Editors: ; o#8 qirrmann s Superiesedal ) hae oe eta ares ca GENERAL A. W. GREELY Dees hey. Signal hee U. 5. es j he UL s Coast w Ps ‘McGER- Ethnologist ie Chase Bureau of American ediagal say (©. HART MBRRIAM == 5 ; Chaes of the Biological Bie: U, set Sh hac of deg ed: me “BLIZA RUHAMAH SCIDMORE | Author of haee the Garden of ie Bast, bs eh CORON : : IDA Mu | TARBELL Author Of ee e) N Us BAKER o, ‘MARC aye ees aetna el Carnegie Institution, oy WILLIS Li MOORE. 2 52 ARLE LOUISE GARRISON | Chief of the Weather Bureau, Di Se ey ee Med of Phelps: School oF Pears Oe cee APs i Rte DC. ic. ~ _ WASHINGTON, D. Cc. Wor. x<1Vic No. 6 a tHE LEPRAHEDRAL WASHINGTON JuNE, 1903 GEOGRAPIEIIC MAGA ZIUNIE, JP ROUN GOP ILS IN| IES, SRV TURES, By ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL PRESIDENT OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Copyright, 1903, a communication to the Academy upon the subject of ‘‘ Kites with Radial Wings ;’’ and some of the illus- trations shown to the Academy at that time were afterwards published in the Monthly Weather Review. Since then I have been continuously at work upon experiments relating to kites. Why, I do not know, excepting perhaps because of the intimate connec- tion of the subject with the flying-ma- chine problem. We are all of us interested in aerial locomotion ; and I am sure that no one who has observed with attention the flight of birds can doubt for one mo- ment the possibility of aerial flight by bodies specifically heavier than the air. In the words of an old writer, ‘‘ We cannot consider as impossible that which has already been accomplished.’’ I have had the feeling that a properly IE N 1899, at the April meeting, I made *A communication made to the National Academy of Sciences in Washington, by the National Geographic Magazine constructed flying-machine should be capable of being flown as a kite; and, conversely, that a properly constructed kite should be capable of use as a fly- ing-machine when driven by its own propellers. JI am not so sure, however, of the truth of the former proposition as I am of the latter. Given a kite, so shaped as to be suit- able for the body of a flying-machine, and so efficient that it will fly well in a good breeze (say 20 miles an hour) when loaded with a weight equivalent to that of aman and engine; then it seems to me that this same kite, provided with an actual engine and man in place of the load, and driven by its own pro- pellers at the rate of 20 miles an hour, should be sustained in calm air as a fly- ing-machine. So far as the pressure of the air is concerned, it is surely imma- terial whether the air moves against the kite, or the kite against the air. 1D), € April 23, 1903, revised for publication in the NATIONAL, GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE. +See Monthly Weather Review, April, 1899, vol. xxvii, pp. 154-155, and plate xi 4 AO) Of course in other respects the two cases are not identical. A kite sustained by a 20-mile breeze possesses no mo- mentum, or rather its momentum is equal to zero, because it is stationary in the air and has no motion proper of its own; but the momentum of a heavy body propelled at 20 miles an hour through still air is very considerable. Momentum certainly aids flight, and it may even be a source of support against gravity quite independently of the press- ure of the air. It is perfectly possible, therefore, that an apparatus may prove to be efficient as a flying-machine which cannot be flown as a kite on account of the absence of wis viva. However this may be, the applicabil- ity of kite experiments to the flying- machine problem has fora long time past been the guiding thought in my researches. I have not cared to ascertain how high a kite may be flown or to make one fly at any very great altitude. The point I have had specially in mind is this: That the equilibrium of the structure in the air should be perfect; that the kite should fly steadily, and not move about from side to side or dive suddenly when struck by a squall, and that when re- leased it should drop slowly and gently to the ground without material oscilla- tion. I have also considered it impor- tant that the framework should possess great strength with little weight. I believe that in the form of structure now attained the properties of strength, lightness, and steady flight have been united in a remarkable degree. In my younger days the word ‘‘kite”’ suggested a structure of wood in the form of a cross covered with paper form- ing a diamond-shaped surface longer one way than the other, and provided with a long tail composed of a string with numerous pieces of paper tied at intervals uponit. Sucha kite is simply atoy. In Europe and America, where kites of this type prevailed, kite-flying was pursued only as an amusement for Tue NarionaL GerocrarpHic MAGAZINE children, and the improvement of the form of structure was hardly considered a suitable subject of thought for a scien- tific man. In Asia kite-flying has been for cen- turies the amusement of adults, and the Chinese, Japanese, and Malays have developed tailless kites very much supe- rior to any form of kite known to us until quite recently. It is only within the last few years that improvements in kite structure have been seriously considered, and the recent developments in the art have been largely due to the efforts of one man— Mr Laurence Hargrave, of Australia. Hargrave realized that the structure best adapted for what is called a ‘‘ good kite’’ would also be suitable as the basis for the structure of a flying-machine. His researches, published by the Royal Society of New South Wales, have at- tracted the attention of the world, and form the starting point for modern re- searches upon the subject in Europe and America. Anything relating to aerial locomotion has an interest to very many minds, and scientific kite-flying has everywhere been stimulated by Hargrave’s experi- ments. In America, however, the chief stim- ulus to scientific kite-flying has been the fact developed by the United States Weather Bureau, that important infor- mation could be obtained concerning weather conditionsif kites could be con- structed capable of lifting meteorological instruments to a great elevation in the free air. Mr Eddy and others in Amer- ica have taken the Malay tailless kite as a basis for their experiments, but Professor Marvin, of the United States Weather Bureau; Mr Rotch, of the Blue Hill Observatory, and many others have adapted Hargrave’s box kite for the purpose. Congress has made appropriations to the Weather Bureau in aid of its kite experiments, and a number of meteoro- logical stations throughout the United TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KITE STRUCTURE States were established a few years ago equipped with the Marvin kite. Continuous meteorological observa- tions at a great elevation have been made at the Blue Hill Observatory in Massa- chusetts, and Mr Rotch has demon- strated the possibility of towing kites at sea by means of steam vessels so as to secure a continuous line of observations all the way across the Atlantic. HARGRAVE’S BOX KITE Hargrave introduced what is known as the ‘‘cellular construction of kites.’’ He constructed kites composed of many cells, but found no substantial improve- mentin many cells over two alone ; and a kite composed of two rectangular cells ( FIG. I—HARGRAVE BOX KITE separated by a considerable space is now universally known as ‘‘the Hargave box kite.’’ This represents, in my opinion, the high-water mark of progress in the nineteenth century ; and this form of kite forms the starting point for my own researches (Fig. 1). The front and rear cells are connected together by a framework, so that a con- siderable space is left between them. This space is an essential feature of the kite: upon it depends the fore and aft stability of the kite. The greater the space, the more stable is the equilibrium of the kite in a fore and aft direction, the more it tends to assume a horizontal position in the air, and the less it tends to dive or pitch like a vessel in a rough sea. Pitching motions or oscillations are almost entirely suppressed when the space between the cells is large. 22 Each cell is provided with vertical sides ; and these again seem to be essen- tial elements of the kite contributing to lateral stability. The greater the ex- tent of the vertical sides, the greater is the stability in the lateral direction, and the less tendency has the kite to roll, or move from side to side, or turn over in the air. In the foregoing drawing Ihave shown only necessary details of construction, with just sufficient framework to hold the cells together. It is obvious that a kite constructed as shown in Fig. 1 isa very flimsy affair. It requires additions to the framework of various sorts to give it sufficient strength to hold the aeroplane surfaces in their proper relative positions and prevent dis- tortion, or bending or twisting of the kite frame under the action of the wind. Unfortunately the additions required to give rigidity to the framework all detract from the efficiency of the kite: First, by rendering the kite heavier, so that the ratio of weight to surface is in- creased ; and, secondly, by increasing the head resistance of the kite. The interior bracing advisable in order to preserve the cells from distortion comes in the way of the wind, thus adding to the drift of the kite without contrib- uting to the //Z. A Bb c A rectangular cell lke 4 (Fig. 2) is structurally. weak, as can readily be demonstrated by the little force required to distort it into the form shown at 2. In order to remedy this weakness, inter- nal bracing is advisable of the character shown at C. This internal bracing, even if made of the finest wire, so as to be insignificant in weight, all comes in the way of the 22V2, wind, increasing the head resistance without counterbalancing advantages. TRIANGULAR CELLS IN KITE CON- STRUCTION In looking back over the line «f ex- periments in my own laboratory, I recognize that the adoption of a trian- gular cell was a step in advance, con- stituting indeed one of the milestones of progress, one of the points that stand out clearly against the hazy background of multitudinous details. The following (Fig 3) is a drawing of a typical triangular-celled kite made upon the same general model as the Hargrave box kite shown in Fig. 1. A triangle is by its very structure perfectly braced in its own plane, and in a triangular-celled kite like that shown in Fig. 3, internal bracing of any FIG. 3 character is unnecessary to prevent dis- tortion of a kind analogous to that referred to above in the case of the Hargrave rectangular cell (Fig. 2). The lifting power of such a triangular cell is probably less than that of a rect- angular cell, but the enormous gain in structural strength, together with the reduction of head resistance and weight due to the omission of internal bracing, counterbalances any possible deficiency in this respect. The horizontal surfaces of a kite are those that resist descent under the influ- ence of gravity, and the vertical surfaces prevent it from turning over in the air. Oblique aeroplanes may therefore con- veniently be resolved into horizontal and vertical equivalents, that is, into supporting surfaces and steadying sur- faces. Tue NarionaL GErocRAPHIC MAGAZINE The oblique aeroplane 4, for exam- ple (Fig. 4), may be considered as equivalent in function to the two aero- planes Gand C. The material compos- ing the aeroplane 4, however, weighs less than the material required to form the two aeroplanes 4 and C, and the frame- work required to support the aeroplane A weighs less than the two frameworks required to support & and C. In the triangular cell shown in Fig. 5, the oblique surfaces ad, dc, are equiv- alent in function to the three surfaces ad, de, ec, but weigh less. The oblique surfaces are therefore advantageous. The only disadvantage in the whole arrangement is that the air has not as free access to the upper aeroplane ac, in the triangular form of cell as in the quadrangular form, so that the aeroplane a ec FIG. 5 ac is not as efficient in the former con- struction as in the latter. While theoretically the triangular cell is inferior in lifting power to Hargrave’s four-sided rectangular cell, practically there is no substantial difference. So far as I can judge from observation in the field, kites constructed on the same TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN Kite STRUCTURE general model as the Hargrave Box Kite, but with triangular cells instead of quadrangular, seem to fly as well as the ordinary Hargrave form, and at as high an angle. Such kites are therefore superior, for they fly substantially as well, while at the same time they are stronger in con- struction, lighter in weight, and offer less head resistance to the wind. PERSPECTIVE VIEW DP ® and & (Fig. 7) may be constructed, as shown at C and J, with advantage, for the weight of the compound kite is thus reduced without loss of structural strength. In this case the weight of the compound kite is /ess than the sum of the weights of the component kites, END VIEW FIG. 6—COMPOUND TRIANGULAR KITE Triangular cells also are admirably adapted for combination into a com- pound structure, in which the aeroplane surfaces do not interfere with one another. For example, three triangular- celled kites, tied together at the corners, form a compound cellular kite (Fig. 6) which flies perfectly well. The weight of the compound kite is the sum of the weights of the three kites of which it is composed, and the total aeroplane surface is the sum of the surfaces of the three kites. The ratio of weight to surface therefore is the same in the larger compound kite as in the smaller constituent kites, considered individually. It is obvious that in compound kites of this character the doubling of the longitudinal sticks where the corners of adjoining kites come together is an un- necessary feature of the combination, for it 1s easy to construct the compound kite so that one longitudinal stick shall be substituted for the duplicated sticks. For example: The compound kites 4 while the surface remains the same. If kites could only be successfully compounded in this way indefinitely A 9 longitudinal sticks 30 longitudinal sticks VX / \ Cc 6 longitudinal sticks 1) IS longitudinal sticks FIG. 7 we would have the curious result that the ratio of weight to surface would 224 diminish with each increase in the size of the compound kite. Unfortunately, however, the conditions of stable flight demand a considerable space between the front and rear sets of cells (see Fig. 6); and if we increase the diameter Tue Nationa, GrocrapHic MaGAZzINE the character shown at B to prevent distortion under the action of the wind. The necessary bracing, however, not being in the way of the wind, does not materially affect the head resistance of the kite, and is only disadvantageous by adding dead load, thus increasing the ratio of weight to surface. THE TETRAHEDRAL CONSTRUCTION OF KITES Passing over in silence multitudinous experiments in kite construction carried onin my Nova Scotia laboratory, I come of our compound structure without in- creasing the length of this space we in- jure the flying qualities of our kite. But every increase of this space in the fore and aft direction involves ‘a cor- responding increase in the length of the empty framework required to span it, thus adding dead load to the kite and increasing the ratio of weight tosurface. Acute-angledtetrahedron Regular tetrahedron Right-angled tetrahedron FIG. 9—A. A TRIANGULAR CELL B. A WINGED TETRAHEDRAL CELL to another conspicuous point of ad- vance—another milestone of progress— the adoption of the triangular construc- tion 77 every direction (longitudinally as well as transversely) ; and the clear realization of the fundamental impor- tance of the skeleton of a tetrahedron, especially the regular tetrahedron, as — —— — a Obtuse-angied tetrahedron FIG, IO—WINGED TETRAHEDRAL CELLS While kites with triangular cells are strong in a transverse direction (from side to side), they are structurally weak in the longitudinal direction (fore and aft), for in this direction the kite frames are rectangular. Each side of the kite 4, for example (Fig. 8), requires diagonal bracing of an element of the structure or frame- work of a kite or flying-machine. Consider the case of an ordinary trian- gular cell 4 (Fig. 9) whose cross-section is triangular laterally, but quadrangular longitudinally. ; If now we make the longitudinal as well as transverse cross-sections trian- TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KITE STRUCTURE gular, we arrive at the form of cell shown at 4, in which the framework forms the outline of a tetrahedron. In this case the aeroplanes are triangular, and the whole arrangement is strongly suggestive of a pair of birds’ wings FIG. II—ONE-CELLED TETRAHEDRAL FRAME raised at an angle and connected to- gether tip to tip by a cross-bar (see B, Fig. 9; also drawings of winged tetra- hedral cells in Fig. 10). A tetrahedron is a form of solid bounded by four triangular surfaces. In the regular tetrahedron the bound- aries consist of four equilateral triangles and six equal edges. In the skeleton form the edges alone are represented, and theskeleton of a regular tetrahedron is produced by joining together six equal FIG. 12—FOUR-CELLED TETRAHEDRAL FRAME rods end to end so as to form four equi- lateral triangles. Most of us no doubt are familiar with the common puzzle—how to make four triangles with six matches. Give six matches to a friend and ask him to ar- range them so as to form four complete equilateral triangles. The difficulty lies in the unconcious assumption of the experimenter that the four triangles should all be in the same plane. The moment he realizes that they need not be in the same plane the solution of the problem becomes easy. Place three matches on the table so as to forma triangle, and stand the other three up 22s over this like the three legs of a tripod stand. The matches then form the skeleton of a regular tetrahedron. (See figure 11.) A framework formed upon this model of six equal rods fastened together at the ends constitutes a tetrahedral cell possessing the qualities of strength and lightness in an extraordinary degree. It is not simply braced in two direc- tions in space like a triangle, but in three directions like a solid. If I may coin a word, it possesses ‘‘ three-dimen- stonal’’ strength; not ‘‘ two-dimen- sional’’ strength like a triangle, or ‘‘one-dimensional’’ strength like a rod. It is the skeleton of a solid, not of a surface or a line. FIG. 13—SIXTEEN-CELLED TETRAHEDRAL FRAME It is astonishing how solid such*a framework appears even when composed of very light and fragile material ; and compound structures formed by fasten- ing these tetrahedral frames together at the corners so as to form the skeleton of a regular tetrahedron on a larger scale possess equal solidity. Figure 12 shows a structure composed of four frames like figure 11, and figure 13 a structure of four frames like figure 12: When a tetrahedral frame is provided with aero-surfaces of silk or other mate- rial suitably arranged, it becomes a tetra- 226 hedral kite, or kite having the form of a tetrahedron. The kite shown in figure 14 is com- posed of four winged cells of the regular tetrahedron variety (see Fig. 10), con- nected together at the corners. Four kites like figure 14 are combined in fig- ure 15, and four kites like figure 15 in figure 16 (at D). Upon this mode of construction an empty space of octahedral form is left in the middle of the kite, which seems to have the same function as the space between the two cells of the Hargrave box kite. The tetrahedral kites that have the largest central spaces preserve their equilibrium best in the air. FIG. 14—FOUR-CELLED TETRAHEDRAL KITE The most convenient place for the attachment of the flying cord is the ex- treme point of the bow. If the cord is attached to points successively further back on the keel, the flying cord makes a greater and greater angle with the horizon, and the kite flies more nearly overhead; but it is not advisable to carry the point of attachment as far back as the middle of the keel. A good place for high flights is a point half-way be- tween the bow,and the middle of the keel. In the tetrahedral kites shown in the plate (Fig. 16) the compound structure has itself in each case the form of the regular tetrahedron, and there is no Tue NarionaL GrocraPHic MaGAZINnE reason why this principle of combination should not be applied indefinitely so as to form still greater combinations. The weight relatively to the wing- surface remains the same, however large the compound kite may be. The four-celled kite 2, for example, weighs four times as much as one cell and has four times as much wing-sur- face, the 16-celled kite C has sixteen times as much weight and sixteen times as much-wing surface, and the 64-celled kite D has sixty-four times as much weight and sixty-four times as much wing-surface. The ratio of weight to FIG. I5—SIXTEEN-CELLED TETRAHEDRAL KITE surface, therefore, is the same for the larger kites as for the smaller. This, at first sight, appears to be some- what inconsistent with certain mathe- matical conclusions announced by Prof. Simon Newcomb in an article entitled “Ts the Air-ship Coming,’’ published in MWcClure’s Magazine for September, 1901—conclusions which led him to be- lieve that “‘ the construction of an aerial vehicle which could carry even a single man from place to place at pleasure re- quires the discovery of some new metal or some new force.’’ The process of reasoning by which Professor Newcomb arrived at this re- 22g, TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KiTE STRUCTURE SLIM IVACHHVULAL GHTISD-YNOA-ALXIS V ‘Cd ALIN IVUGHHVULAL GH TIHO-NHHLXIS V HLIM IVYCHHVULAL GHTINO-MN0A V ‘'G ‘TINO IVYCHHVALH. GHONIM V SHLIM IVACHHVULAL—9JI “DI 2 V 228 markable result is undoubtedly correct. His conclusion, however, is open to question, because he has drawn a gen- eral conclusion from restricted premises. He says: “Let us make two flying-machines exactly alike, only make one on double the scale of the other in all its dimensions. We all know that the volume, and therefore the weight, of two similar bodies are proportional to the cubes of their dimensions. The cube of two is eight : hence the large machine will have eight times the weight of the other. But surfaces are as the squares of the dimensions. The square of two is four. The heavier machine will therefore expose only four times the wing surface to the air, and so will havea distinct disadvantage in the ratio of efficiency to weight.’ , Tue NarionaL GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE a giant kite that should lift a man— upon the model of the Hargrave box kite. When the kite was constructed with two cells, each about the size of a small room, it was found that it would take a hurricane to raise it into the air. The kite proved to be not only incom- petent to carry a load equivalent to the weight of a man, but it could not even raise 7¢se//in an ordinary breeze in which smaller kites upon the same model flew perfectly well. I have no doubt that other investigators also have fallen into the error of supposing that large struct- ures would “necessarily be capable of flight, because exact models of them, FIG. I7—THE AERODROME KITE Professor Newcomb shows that where two flying-machines—or kites, for that matter—are exactly alike, only differing in the scale of their dimensions, the ratio of weight to supporting surface is greater in the larger than the smaller, increasing with each increase of dimen- sions. From which he concludes that if we make our structure large enough it will be too heavy to fly. This is certainly true, so far as it goes, and it accounts for my failure to make made upon asmaller scale, have demon- strated their ability to sustain them- selves in the air. Professor Newcomb has certainly conferred a benefit upon investigators by so clearly pointing out the fallacious nature of this assumption. But Professor Newcomb’s results are probably only true when restricted to his premises. For models exactly alike, only differing in the scale of their dimen- sions, his conclusions are undoubtedly sound ; but where large kites are formed TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KITE STRUCTURE by the multiplication of smaller kites into a cellular structure the results are very different. My own experiments with compound kites composed of trian- gular cells connected corner to corner have amply demonstrated the fact that the dimensions of such a kite may be increased to a very considerable extent without materially increasing the ratio of weight to supporting surface; and upon the tetrahedral plan (Fig. 16) the weight relatively to the wing-surface remains the same however large the compound kite may be. The indefinite expan- sion of the triangular con- struction is limited by the fact that dead weight in the form of empty frame- work is necessary in the central space between the sets of cells (see Fig. 6), so that the necessary in- crease of this space when the dimensions of the com- pound kite are materially increased—in order to pre- serve the stability of the kite in the air—adds still more dead weight to the larger structures. Upon the tetrahedral plan illus- trated in Figs. 14, 15, 16, no necessity exists for empty frameworks in the central spaces, for the mode of construction gives solidity without it. Tetrahedral kites combine ina marked degree the qualities of strength, light- ness, and steady flight ; but further ex- periments are required before deciding that this form is the best for a kite, or that winged cells without horizontal aeroplanes constitute the best arrange- ment of aero-surfaces. The tetrahedral principle enables us to construct out of light materials solid frameworks of almost any desired form, and the resulting structures are admi- 229 rably adapted for the support of aero- surfaces of any desired kind, size, or shape (aeroplanes or aerocurves, etc., large or small). In further illustration of the tetra- hedral principle as applied to kite con- struction, I show in figure 17 a photo- graph of a kite which is not itself tetra- hedral in form, but the framework of which is built up of tetrahedral cells. This kite, although very different in construction and appearance from the Aerodrome of Professor Langley, which FIG. IS—THE AERODROME KITE JUST RISING INTO THE AIR WHEN PULLED By A HORSE I saw in successful flight over the Poto- mac a few years ago, has yet a suggest- iveness of the Aerodrome about it, and it was indeed Professor Langley’s appa- ratus that led me to the conception of this form. The wing surfaces consist of hori- zontal aeroplanes, with oblique steady- ing surfaces at the extremities. The body of the machine has the form of a boat, and the superstructure forming the support for the aeroplanes extends across the boat on either side at two points near the bow and stern. ‘The 230 aeroplane surfaces form substantially two pairs of wings, arranged dragon-fly fashion. FIG. If7—AERODROME KITE IN THE AIR The whole framework for the boat and wings is formed of tetrahedral cells THe Nationa GrocraPHic MaGAZINne having the form of the regular tetra- hedron, with the exception of the diag- onal bracing at the bottom of the super- structure; and the kite turns out to be strong, light, and a steady flyer. I have flown this kite in a calm by attaching the cord—in this case a Ma- nila rope—to a galloping horse. Fig- ure 18 shows a photograph of the kite just rising into the air, with the horse in the foreground, but the connecting rope does not show. Figure Ig is a photograph of the kite at its point of greatest elevation, but the horse does not appear inthe picture. Upon releasing the rope the kite descended so gently that no damage was done to the appa- ratus by contact with the ground. Figure 20 shows a modified form of the same kite, in which, in addition to the central boat, there were two side floats, thus adapting the whole structure to float upon water without upsetting. An attempt which almost ended dis- astrously, was made to fly this kite ina good sailing breeze, but a squall struck it before it was let go. The kite went up, lifting the two men who held it off their feet. Of course they let go in- stantly, and the kite rose steadily in the air until the flying cord (a Manila rope FIG 20—FLOATING KITE TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KITE STRUCTURE 38 inch diameter) made an angle with the horizon of about 45° when the rope snapped under the strain. Tremendous oscillations of a pitching character ensued; but the kite was at such an elevation when the accident happened, that the oscillations had time to die down before the kite reached the ground, when it landed safely upon even keel in an adjoining field and was found to be quite uninjured by its rough experience. Kites of this type have a much greater lifting power than one would at first sight suppose. The natural as- sumption is that the winged superstruc- ture alone supports the kite in the air, and that the boat body and floats repre- sent mere dead-load and head resistance. But thisis far from being the case. Boat- shaped bodies having a V-shaped cross- section are themselves capable of flight and expose considerable surface to the wind. I have successfully flown a boat of this kind asa kite without any super- structure whatever, and although it did not fly well, it certainly supported itself 231 in the air, thus demonstrating the fact that the boat surface is an element of support in compound structures like those shown in figures 17 and 20. Of course the use of a tetrahedral cell is not limited to the construction of a framework for kites and flying-ma- © chines. It is applicable to any kind of structure whatever in which it is de- sirable to combine the qualities of strength and lightness. Just as we can build houses of all kinds out of bricks, so we can build structures of all sorts out of tetrahedral frames, and the struct- ures can be so formed as to possess the same qualities of strength and lightness which are characteristic of the individ- ual cells. J have already built a house, a framework for a giant wind-break, three or four boats, as well as several forms of kites, out of these elements. It is not my object in this communi- cation to describe the experiments that have been made in my Nova Scotia lab- oratory, but simply to bring to your at- tention the importance of the tetrahedral principle in kite construction. PRIN DIX Copyright, 1903, by the National Geographic Magazine Through the courtesy of Dr Bell the Nationa, GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE is able to present as an appendix to this article a series of some seventy illustra- tions of experimental forms of kites and structures used by Dr Bell. The illustrations were selected by the editor from several hundred pictures in Dr Bell’s notebooks. The pictures were taken and developed by Mr David George McCurdy, the photographer of his laboratory, with the exception of Plate III, which was taken by Mr F. Tracy Hubbard. tions were written by Dr Bell by request. The notes explaining the illustra- Tue Nationa GEocrapHic MAGAZINE QRD I ALVIg 3 4 2 TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN Kite STRUCTURE II ALvIg THe Nationa GeocraPpHic MAGAZINE 234 III 1uv1d 235 TRTRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KrTE STRUCTURE AY Siwid Tur Nationa, GrocraepHic MAGAZINE r 2RG 235 TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KiTE STRUCTURE IA SLVIg Tue Nationa, GrocrapHic MAGAZINE 238 TIA tauv1d 439 ‘TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KITE STRUCTURE TILA SIV 1d 240 Tue Nationa, GrocrapHic MacGaZzINeE PLATE IX TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KITE STRUCTURE 241 242 Tue Nationa, GrocrapHic Macazine PLATE XI TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN KiTE STRUCTURE 243 PLATE XII 244 THe Nationa GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE PLATE XIII TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN Kire STRUCTURE 245 PLATE XIV 246 PLATH XV TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN Kire STRUCTURE 247 PLATE XVI 248 Tue Natrona, GeocrapHic MaGAZzINe NOES TON DEE PRECEDING ME Wisi AselO@INs By ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL Copyright, 1903, by the National Geographic Magazine Plate 7.—1. Cellular framework for body of Multicellular Giant Kite. Al- though not built up of separate individ- ual cells, the frame is composed essentially of nine tetrahedral cells connected to- gether, corner to corner, at the tops, and held in position below by means of two parallel sledge runners braced diag- onally with wire. Total length, nine meters (29% feet). "The diagonal wires do not show in the picture, and it may be. possible that the photograph was taken before the rectangular part of the struct- ure was braced. 2. Cellular framework shown in No. 1 provided with two covered cells to con- vert it from mere dead weight to be carried by the superstructure into a real flying structure by itself. 3. Cellular framework shown in No. 2 supported in the air as a kite without any superstructure whatever. It is fly- ing by a rope attached to the front cell and has also a stern line to facilitate landing. 4. One of the individual kites form- ing the cellular unit or element of the su- perstructure of the Multicellular Giant Kite (formed of two triangular kites one inside the other). The superstruct- ure was composed of seventy of the kites shown in No. 4 tied together at the corners, arranged in two sets of thirty- five kiteseach. "Theseventy kites were tested individually before being com- bined, and each was found to fly well by itself. Plate /7,—Different views of a Multi- cellular Giant Kite. The framework of the body is of stout material composed partly of tetrahedral cells, but the sledge runners at the bottom, being parallel, require diagonal bracing. This same body is shown in Nos. 1, 2, 3, Plate I. The superstructure is of light material and is composed of 70 triangular kites (like that shown in No. 4, Plate I) tied together at the corners and arranged in two sets—one at the bow, the other at the stern. Plate [1/.—The Multicellular Giant Kite rising into the air. The body broke as the kite went up, so that no photograph of the kite could be taken at a higher elevation.. The light super- structure seems to have escaped injury in the air, but a few of the constituent kites were broken by contact with the ground and the broken framework of the body: It is somewhat remarkable that the stout body sticks should have given way rather than the fragile sticks of the superstructure. Flate /V.—Giant kites, too large to pass through the double doors of the storage building, had to be put together in the open field. This proving to be impracticable without some sort of shelter from the wind, a wind-break became a necessity, and I determined to build one out of tetrahedral cells. After the necessary number of tetrahedral cells had been prepared they were put together in a single day, the ridge-pole being added subsequently. When the kite-flying experiments ceased for the season the framework was taken to pieces and the tetrahedral cells em- ployed in the construction of tetrahedral houses—covered with tent-cloth—for the shelter of sheep. The materials can be reassembled at any time desired, and the wind-break rebuilt in a few hours. ‘The photographs illustrate dif- TETRAHEDRAL PRINCIPLE IN Kire STRUCTURE ferent stages in the process of construc- tion : ® rt. Tetrahedral cell employed in mak- ing the framework of the wind-break. 2, 3, and 4. The wind-break in pro- cess of construction. Plate |.—1. Wind-break completed, showing canvas rolled down. 2. Wand-break showing canvas raised. 3. End view of wind-break. 4. Model of the framework for a tet- rahedral house. 5. Tetrahedral nuts for fastening tet- rahedral frames together. Plate V7.—1. ‘The observation-house where the kite experiments are observed and noted. ‘The house itself is of the tetrahedral form. 2. Front view of winged boat, the framework of which is constructed of tetrahedral cells. 3. Another view of the winged boat. 4. The winged boat in the air... Plate V7/,—1, A tetrahedral frame of tetrahedral cells, winged on the outside, with an internal aeroplane. 2. A kite formed of two tetrahedral structures like that in No. 1 connected together by a framework composed of tetrahedral cells. 3. The kite of No. 2 fitted with com- pound tetrahedral frames at either end converting the framework into the form of a boat. This same kite with the framework covered constitutes the winged boat shown in Nos. 2, 3, and 4, Plate VI. 4. The kite of No. 2 in the air. Plate \VI/I.—3. Non-capsizable kite. When from any cause the kite tips to one side the lifting power increases on the depressed side and diminishes on the ele- vated side, thus tending to right the kite. 1. Non-capsizable kite flying from flag-pole. 2. ‘Tetrahedral frame used in the con- struction of the winged boat shown in Plate VI; also used in the structures shown in Plate VII. 4. Portions of the kiteshown in Plate 249 Wil, INO. B; together. Plate /X.—Photographs illustrating mode of studying the behavior of bodies in the air, whether these bodies are capa- able of supporting themselves in the air or not. ‘They are attached to the end of a bamboo pole by a cord sufficiently short to prevent them from dashing themselves to pieces upon the ground. A flag-pole is used for large kites, but a bamboo fishing rod is more convenient for testing the flying qualities of the smaller structures. Inthe cases shown in the plate, the cord is a manila rope, about 4% inch indiameter. Such a rope is too heavy for light kites, but smaller cords make so little impression on the photographic film that it is often diff- cult when such cords are used to un- derstand the conditions of an experi- ment from a photograph. 1. Asingle set of triangular cells con- stituting a hexagonal figure with six interior radial wings. 2. Asingle set of triangular cells con- stituting the figure of a triangle within a triangle. 3. A kite with three sets of triangular cells. 4. Kite shown in No. 3 flying from a bamboo pole. 5. Two-celled triangular kite with rope attached to rear edge of front cell. 6. Same kite shown in No. 5 flown by the bow. Plate X.—These photographs illus- trate experiments with kites formed partly of open tetrahedral cells, with the spaces between the cells covered. 1. Kite with two pentahedral cells close together, each cell having three of its five faces covered. The rectan- gular part of the kite is braced diag- onally by means of tightly stretched wires. 2. Same kite shown in No. 1 at a con- siderable elevation in the air. 3. Similar kite with four pentahedral cells close together, each cell having in sections ready to be tied 250 three of its five faces covered. ‘The open spaces between the cells are tetra- hedral in form. 4. Kite shown in No. 3 flying with its rectangular side up. 5. Kite shown in No. 3 flying with its rectangular side down. 6. Kite shown in No. 3 with the covering removed from the two mid- dle pentahedral cells—rectangular side down. 7. Same kite shown in No. 6 flying with the rectangular side up. In this picture the short white line in the margin of the photograph indicates the direction of the flying cord. Plate X/,—Experiments to determine the relation of center of gravity to cen- ter of surface in a flying structure by shifting the cellular superstructure to different parts of the body frame. 1. Superstructure over first body cell ; center of gravity too far back. 2. Superstructure over second body cell. 3. Superstructure over third body cell. 4. Superstructure over fourth body cell ; center of gravity too far forward ; kite dived, superstructure smashed. Plate X//,—Experiments with kites having two sets of cells in the super- structure : I. Superstructure over second and fourth body cells. 2. Just rising in the air. 3. Flying by cord attached to front of first body cell. 4. Bringing the kite down while anchored by. a bow-line. 5. Superstructure over first and fifth body cells. Flying line attached to front of first body cell. ‘The apparent smallness of the kite shows that it is at a considerable elevation in the air. 6. Kite being landed from a distance. Allowed to fall on a slack line, but checked momentarily as it nears the ground to reduce the rate of fall. Again allowed to fall and the cord Tue Narionat GerocrapHic Macazine reeled in so as to givethe kite headway at the moment of contact with the ground, thus causing the stern to strike only a glancing blow. A bow: line, how- ever, isa great safeguard against injury. Plate XT/1,—The photographs illus- trate the nature of experiments made to test the effect of varying the number and position of sets of triangular cells upon a body framework : t. Two sets of cells near bow, and one stern set as a tail. 2. Kite shown in No.1 at a great elevation in the air. 3. Same kite shown in No. 1 with the stern set of cells removed. The photo- graph shows very clearly the bow-line used to facilitate the handling of kites. in the air. Flying by the bow-line re- duces enormously the strain upon the structure when the kite first begins to: rise in the air. This strain gradually eases off as the kite rises, and when it is at a considerable elevation the bow- line is made slack while the kite is held by the other, or ‘‘ flying-cord,’’ which in this case is attached to the rear edge of the first set of cells, when the kite rises still higher. The bow-line is again used in bringing the kite down, for the body then becomes practically horizontal as it nears the ground. This is advantageous, for it reduces the risk of injury to the kite upon landing. In good flying kites anchored by the bow the bow-line can be overrun by the hand, or by a grooved roller, until the kite is reached and grasped by the hand without allowing the kite to touch the ground at all. 5. Same kite shown in No. 3, but the sets of cells separated as far as possible upon the body. 6. Kite shown in No. 5 nearing the ground after an experiment. It is flying by the bow-line, and the photo- graph shows the other line blown back by the wind, or perhaps held in the hands of an assistant. 4. A kite with eight sets of cells. THe ZIEGLER Potar ExPEDITION ‘The spaces between the sets are not suf- ficient to constjtute the kite a good flyer. The sets of cells interfere with one another. Plate X/V'.—1. Multicellular kite hav- ing 6 sets of cells in the superstructure. 3.. Multicellular kite in the air. 2. Giant kite having three 12-sided cells, each with 6 radial wings. 4. Giant kite flying from pole. Plate X\.—1. Hexagonal kite with six radial wings, loaded in the middle with an adjustable weight. ; 3. Hexagonal kite flying from a flag- staff. ; 2. Twelve-sided kite with six radial wings, of giant construction. 251 4. Twelve-sided kite flying from a flagstaff. Plate XV'7.—Paddle- Wheel Kite. 1. Paddle-wheel kite on the ground. 2. Side view of same kite in the air. « 3. Another photograph of paddle- wheel kite in the air. 4. End view of paddle-wheel kite. In most of the photographs the flying- line is invisible, but in above photo- graphs and others the visibility has been improved by tying pieces of colored cloth at intervals upon it, as in the tail of am old-fashioned kite, thus enabling the direction of the cord for a short distance from the kite to be visible as a dotted line upon the photograph. MR ZIEGLER) AND THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY | T the invitation of Mr William A Ziegler, the National Geo- graphic Society is to direct the scientific work of the north polar expe- dition which Mr Ziegler has equipped and which is known as the Ziegler Polar Expedition. The National Geographic Society has chosen as its official representative on the expedition Mr William J. Peters of the U. S. Geological Survey. Mr Pe- ters will be second in command, and will have entire charge of all the scien- tific observations and determinations of the party. Mr Peters is one of the splendid corps of explorers of the U.S. Geological Survey. He has made sev- eral notable journeys in Alaska, the most remarkable of which was in 1go1, when, as leader of a Survey party, he made a sledge journey with dogs of 1,600 miles.* The expedition sails from Trondhjem, *See NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE, vol. 12, 1901, p. 399. Norway, about June 20, on the steam yacht America, which has been thor- oughly overhauled and strengthened during the past year. They will ad- vance as far north as the ship can take them, and will then land on Franz Josef Land, where the winter will be passed. As soon as light returns in 1904 the march for the Pole will begin. The America stays with the party. In June, 1904, an auxiliary vessel, under com- mand of Wm. S. Champ, will go north to carry additional supplies and to escort the expedition home. The commander of the expedition is Mr Anthony Fiala, of Brooklyn, N. Y- Mr Fiala was second in command of the first Ziegler expedition. He is about 33 years of age, strong and vigorous, aud would seem to have all the require- ments for a successful leader of an arctic expedition. Mr Ziegler has shown himself an enthusiastic and generous supporter of arctic exploration. When his first DID expedition returned unsuccessful in reaching the North Pole, though it had cost him several hundred thousand dol- lars, he at once announced that he would send out a second expedition. Everything that experience or thought could suggest has been provided. ‘The party will take 30 Siberian ponies with them. ‘The last expedition had a num- ber of these ponies and found them much superior to dogs. They are both stronger and more enduring than dogs, and while they eat more they can carry more in proportion. The ponies can go anywhere that a dog can go and are more reliable, for when they come to a hummock they do not dart in different directions and upset the sledges. Hay to feed the ponies is being carried in solidly compressed bales. Besides the ponies, 200 dogs are also taken. On the first Ziegler expedition eight nationalities were represented, and great confusion resulted because of the varie- ties of language. Every member of the present expedition is an American by birth or naturalization; most of the men have had experience in arctic work before, either in Alaska, Hudson Bay, or on whaling vessels. The sailing master, Captain Coffin, as captain of a whaler has for 25 years battled with the arctic ice. Mr Russell W. Porter, of the scientific staff, has had service in Greenland with Peary and also accom- panied the first Ziegler expedition. Mr Francis Long was a member of the Greely expedition of 1881—'84. Mr Ziegler’s ambition to plant the American flag at the North Pole is patriotic and laudable. The National Geographic Society is glad to indorse his worthy object and to wish him and his gallant men success. The instructions of the National Geo- graphic Society to Mr Peters regarding the scientific work to be done are sum- marized in the following report to Pres- ident Graham Bell by MrG. K. Gilbert, Chairman of the Research Committee : THe NartionaL GeocraPpHic MAGAZINE MAY 19, 1903. Dr ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL, President National Geographic Society. DEAR Sir: The Committee on Re- search was instructed by the Executive Committee of the Society to consider the possibilities of scientific work by and under the direction of Mr Peters during the Ziegler Arctic Expedition, and to recommend the lines of investi- gation to be followed. I regret to say that the committee has not been able to hold a meeting, on acccunt of the engagements of its members, and espe- cially the absence of several members from the city. J have, however, con- ferred personally with Dr Merriam, General Greely, and Admiral Melville, of my colleagues on the committee, and also with Professor Moore, Chief of the Weather Bureau; with Mr Tittmann, Superintendent of the Coast Survey, and with other officers of the Coast ' Survey, and as a result of these confer- ences I feel warranted in making cer- tain recommendations concerning the lines of research which may best be undertaken by Mr Peters. The considerations influencing the se- lection of these lines are (1) that Mr Peters will have very little skilled assist- ance; (2) that during the long night to be spent in camp on Franz Josef Land there will be abundant time at his disposal, including his own and that of various assistants, and (3) that in the journey northward his attention will be quite fully occupied in the work of determining the route and position of the party, and with such executive work as may fall to his share. I think it well, therefore, that he limit his plan for research chiefly to such lines as can be best followed on the land, and that he restrict his attention in the main to such studies as his education and previous training best qualify him to conduct. Gravity.—It is recommended that a determination of gravity be made by pendulum observations at the winter THe ZIEGLER Potar ExPEDITION camp. With thesassistance of Mr Hay- ford and other officers of the Coast Sur- vey, Mr Peters is now making: prepara- tion for that work. Tides.—It is recommended that sys- tematic tidal observations be made at the base camp, a continuous record being maintained through a complete lunation and so much longer as may be necessary to eliminate any irregularities occasioned by storms. For this work Mr Peters is receiving instructions from Dr Harris, of the U. S. Coast Survey. Magnetism.—It is recommended that systematic observations of the usual magnetic elements be made at the base camp. Itis important that the declina- tion be observed, if possible, at some point where a previous record has been made, and also that the magnetic station of the present expedition be definitely marked and recorded, so that at any future time it may be possible to reoc- cupy the station. The determination of declination will have immediate 1m- portance in connection with the main purpose of the expedition, because if the Pole is approached the compass will afford the most trustworty means for orientation and for the determination of the proper route to be followed in re- turning. Conversely, the traverse of the journey on the ice, taken in con- nection with astronomical observations, will throw light on the position and cur- vature of the magnetic meridians in the polar region—a field of inquiry which has heretofore been occupied only in a theoretic way. Aurora.—t\n connection with system- atic magnetic work, it is desirable to make systematic observation of auroras, recording phenomena with some ful- ness. The question whether the au- rora is ever accompanied by sound is one to which attention may well be given. Meteorology.—It is the opinion of Pro- fessor Moore tHat in the present state of meteorologic investigation the regu- Ab) 8) lar observation at Franz Josef Land of pressure, temperature, and surface wind, while desirable, is less important than the determination of the height, drift, and velocity of clouds. Professor Moore has undertaken to prepare instructions for such a determination, ‘Sea-Depth.—In the judgment of Ad- miral Melville, it is very desirable that soundings be made during the north- ward journey, especially as the results of such soundings on the outward jour- ney may aid in the determination of position during the return journey. They will, of course, make contribution to the general body of geographic in- formation, and supplement the impor- tant determinations made by Nansen. Whether it will be practicable to carry on the sledges any apparatus adequate to reach considerable depth is a ques- tion which may advantageously be con- sidered on shipboard. Other Observations. —It is not recom- mended that any special preparation be made for observations in geology, zool- ogy, or botany, although the geologist will welcome samples of prevailing rocks, and especially any fossils which may be found, and the zoologist will be giad to have record of birds and mam- mals seen, so far as the members of the party may be able to identify them. Yours very truly, G. K. GILBERT, Chairman Research Committee. The names of the members of the ex- pedition and their duties follow : Commanding officer, Anthony Fiala, Brooklyn, N. Y. Field Department Chief of scientific staff and second in command, William J. Peters, Washing- fone Dyes First assistant scientific staff, Russell W. Porter, Springfield, Mass. Meteorologist, Francis Long, Brook- lyn, N. Y. 254 Surgeon, Dr George Shorkley, Cam- den, Me. Assistant surgeon, Chas. L. Seitz, Evansville, Ind.; assistant surgeon, J. Colin Vaughn, Forest Hill, N. J. Veterinarian, H. H. Newcomb, Mil- ford, Mass. Quartermasters in charge of sledge equipment, Charles E. Rilliet, St. Louis, Mo.; Jefferson F. Moulton, Second Cay- alry, U. S. Army. Third assistant quartermaster, R. R. Tafal, Philadelphia, Pa. Fourth assistant quartermaster, John W. Truden, N. Y. city, N. Y. Assistants in quartermaster’s depart- ment, John Vedow, Mass.; Pierre Le Royer. Deck Department Captain, Edward Coffin, Edgartown, Mass. First officer, Edward Haven, Lynn, Mass. Second officer, James W. Nichols. First quartermaster, Allen W. Mont- rose, Lowell, Mass. Second quartermaster, William R. Meyers, Boston, Mass. Tue Nationa, GEoGraPeHic MAGAZINE Third quartermaster, Franklin Cow- ing, New Bedford, Mass. Fourth quartermaster, Chas. Kunold, New York. Seamen, Harry Burns, Dunkirk, N. Y.; D. S. Mackiernan, Dorchester, Mass. ; Alfred Beddow, London, Eng. ; Clarence W. Thwing, Boston, Mass. ; Elijah L. Perry, New Bedford, Mass. ; Emil Meyer, New York; John Duffy, Waltham, Mass. ; William Ross, New York. Assistant steward, Spencer W. Stew- art, Brooklyn, N- Y. Cook, George H. Smith, Somerville, Mass. Boy, James Dean, New Bedford, Mass. : Engineer's Department. Chief engineer, H. P. Hartt, Ports- mouth, Va. First assistant engineer, EK. L. Varney, Camden, Maine. Second assistant engineer, Vedow, Boston, Mass. Firemen, George D. Butland, Brook- lyn, N. Y.; Charles E. Hudgins, Norfolk, Va. Anton GEOGRAPHIC NOTES NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY T a meeting of the Board of Man- agers of the National Geographic Society on May 15, Dr Alexander Gra- ham Bell tendered his resignation as President of the Society. Dr Bell stated that owing to the pressure of work he found it impossible to give to the Society the thought that the position of Presi- dent demanded. The resignation of President Bell was accepted by the Board with profound regret, to take effect on the election of his successor. Dr Bell was appointed chairman of a committee of three to consider and nom- inate asuccessor. The other two mem- bers of the committee, appointed by the President, are Dr Willis L. Moore, Chief U. S. Weather Bureau, and Mr G. K. Gilbert, U. S. Geological Survey. As no election will be made until the fall, Dr Bell will continue as President of the Society for some months. At the same meeting of the Board, Vice-President W J McGee was ap- pointed chairman of the Committee on the International Geographical Con- gress which is to meet in America in 1904 under the auspices of the National Geographic Society. General Greely, the original chairman of this committee, GerocraPHic Nores was compelled t8 resign the chairman- ship because of ill health and the pres- sure of official duties. At an adjourned meeting of the Board held May 18 resolutions were unani- mously passed indorsing the movement to bring the remains of James Smithson, the founder of the Smithsonian Institu- tion, to America, and inter them in the grounds of the Institution. The Geographical Society of the Pa- cific has taken similar action. ALASKAN SURVEYS, 1903 HE operations of the United States Geological Survey in Alaska dur- ing the coming field season will be along the same general lines that have been followed during the last few years, ex- cept that the work contemplated in- volves rather more detailed mapping and investigation. ‘The general policy of devoting special attention to regions of greatest activity in mining affairs will be continued. It is planned to complete the surveys of the Seward Peninsula, which has been under investigation for several years. ‘This peninsula embraces what are up to the present time the most im- portant gold placers of the entire terri- tory. Mr Arthur J. Collier, with an assistant, will make a special study of the geology and mineral resources of the southern and northwestern part of the peninsula. It is intended that his work should supplement that of previous years, and that he should pay special attention to the developments that have been made during the last season. It is hoped that by this means further light will be thrown on the occurrence of placer gold in the various forms of deposits in which it is found. To Mr D. C. Witherspoon will be entrusted the topographic survey of the north- eastern part of the peninsula, including the gold fields adjacent to Deering. ‘The geologic work of this area will be duly arranged for. 255) Two parties will be organized for surveys in the Yukon gold district. One party, led by Mr T. G. Gerdine, * will make a topographic survey extend- ing from the Fortymile region westward to the Tanana River and embracing as wide a belt as length of season and cli- matic conditions will permit, a special effort being made to reach and map the lower Tanana gold fields. "The second party will be in immediate charge of Mr L. M. Prindle, and will have for its field of operations the Fortymile and Birch Creek regions and the newly dis- covered gold fields near the lower Ta- nana. ‘This party will make a geolog- ical investigation and an examination of the mineral resources of the region. These two parties, it is expected, will obtain much information in regard to the new gold fields on the Tanana, which are reported to be very rich. The investigation of the stratigraphy of the Yukon, begun by Mr Collier dur- ing the last season, will be continued by Dr Arthur Hollick. Dr Hollick will visit a number of points on the Upper and Lower Yukon with a view to de- termining the stratigraphic position of the coal-bearing horizons by _ special studies of local areas and extensive col- lections of fossils. The Kayak Island and Controller Bay petroleum and coal fields. will be the subject of a preliminary examination by .Mr Frank C. Schrader. It is planned that Mr Schrader shall spend about two months in this region, with a view to ascertaining the extent of these im- portant deposits and their probable economic value. Late in the season Mr. Schrader will make a more hasty examination of some of the petroleum and coal localities on Cook Inlet. The investigations in southeastern Alaska will be made by Dr Arthur C. Spencer, who, with an assistant, will make a special study of the Juneau mining district and map the geology of the adjacent region. For this purpose a detailed topographic map was made 256 THe NatrionaL GroGRAPHIC MAGAZINE Alaska in for Gold rospecting 2 GerocraPHic Nores . during the last'season. DrSpencer will also make preliminary examinations of some of the other important mining dis- tricts of southeastern Alaska. Mr Alfred H. Brooks, who has charge of the geologic work in Alaska, will go to Juneau in the early part of the season, and later will join Dr Hollick’s party on the Upper Yukon for some strati- graphic studies. Later still, in com- pany with Mr Prindle, he will visit the Tanana gold district. The month of September will be spent by him in the Nome and adjacent gold fields of the Seward Peninsula. GOLD DISCOVERIES IN ALASKA STRIKE of rich placer diggings has been made in Alaska, in the Circle City mining division, on the tributaries of the Tanana River, a district in which for several years past American miners have made a thor- ough search for good placer-mining deposits without success. . The present strike seems to be one of more than ordinary importance, and has caused a stampede of miners from Dawson City and other districts to the new fields. It is unsafe to predict too much, but the general opinion seems to be that a large and productive placer field in American territory has at last been struck. Circle City is practically deserted as a result of the rush. The Eagle-Circle route is reported to be the best means of reach- ing the Tanana from Dawson, as the trails by Fortymile and Goodpasture are unbroken, and no supplies are avail- able. From Forty mile to the new dig- gings the distance is 160 miles. The region of the recent discovery is not yet surveyed, though the United States Geological Survey has made several explorations in the vicinity. These explorations are a part of a general system of preliminary surveys which the Geological Survey has been carrying onin Alaska as rapidly as pos- 45 7] sible during the last five years. A re- .port entitled ‘‘A Reconnaissance in the White and Tanana River Basin,’’ by Alfred H. Brooks, contains the results of a reconnaissance made in 1898. It describes briefly the geography, geol- ogy, climate, and timber of the region, and, so far as the character of the in- vestigation would permit, deals with the mineral resources. The party left the coast at Skagway in March, 1898, and made its way inland for about 100 miles with sleds; then, after waiting until the ice on the river broke up, it continued down the Lewes and Yukon rivers in canoes to the mouth of White River. That river had never before been as- cended in boats because of its mad, rushing current. After six weeks of hard labor the party succeeded in drag- ging canoes and supplies up White River 150 miles, where a portage was found to Tanana waters. The down- stream trip to the mouth of the Tanana, a journey of about 600 miles, occupied amonth. The party finally reached the Yukon after a canoe journey of 1,600 miles. A second report by Mr Brooks deals with the Upper Tanana Basin and is entitled ‘‘A Reconnaissance from Pyra- mid Harbor to Eagle City, Alaska.”’ This also treats of the geography, geol- ogy, and mineral resources of the region traversed by the party. It is based on a journey made with pack horses from the coast at Pyramid Harbor, south- eastern Alaska, to the Yukon, near the international boundary. ‘The trip, which occupied about three months and was made on foot, aggregated about 600 miles. So arduous was the journey that only five of the fifteen horses that started with the party survived the trip. The chief difficulty with which the party had to contend was the many turbulent rivers that had to be crossed. Three boats were built by the party during the course of the summer. A third journey was made by Mr 258 Brooks through the Tanana Basin dur- ing thesummerof 1902. Thisextended through tothe Yukon from Cook Inlet, by the Lower Tanana Valley. The re- port on this expedition is now in prep- aration. DECISIONS OF THE U. S. BOARD ON GEOGRAPHIC NAMES From January to May, Both Inclusive, 1903 Agamok ; lake, Lake County, Minnesota (not Agamiak). Alvada ; post-office and railroad station, Seneca County, Ohio (not Alveda). Balsam; mountain in the Catskills, Green County, New York (not Sheril nor Sherill). Bantam; river, tributary to Shepaug River from the northeast, Litchfield County, Connect- icut (not Shepaug nor East Brauch She- paug). Barrack; mountain in Canaan, Litchfield County, Connecticut (not Garruck). Basswood ; lake, partly in Lake County, Min- nesota, lying across the international boundary line (not Bassimenau, Bois, Blane, nor Whitewood). Beeslick ; brook and pond in Salisbury, Litch- field County, Connecticut (not Beaslick, l’eeslake, Bees Lick, Beestick, Beezelake, nor Nancook ) Belle Ayr; mountain and post-office, Ulster County, New York (not Belle Air, Belle Ayre, nor Belleayre). Berne ; post-office, town, and village, Albany County, New York (not Bern). Caroga ; creek, Fulton and Montgomery Coun- ties; lake and town, Fulton County, New York (not Garoga). Cary; lake in Whitney Preserve, Hamilton County, New York (not Carey nor Carry). Castac ; creek, railroad station, and valley, Los Angeles County, California (not Cas- taic nor Castiac). Cheshnina; river, tributary to Copper River from the east, Alaska (not Cheshni). Chumstick ; creek, Chelan County, Washing- ton (not Chumpstick). Cypress ; lake, partly in Lake County, Minne- sota, lying across the international bound- ary line (not Otter Track). Deceiper ; creek, Clark County, Arkansas (not Decepier, Deceyper, nor Deciper). Elliott ; creek, tributary to the Kotsina from the east, Alaska (not Elliot). Gabimichigami ; lake, Lake County, Minne- sota (not Gobbemichigamine, Gobbemichi- gomog, Michigammie, etc ). Gakona ; river, tributary to Copper River from the west, Alasi.a (not Gako). Tue Nationa GeocraPpHic MAGAZzinE Germano, post-office and village, German Township, Harrison County, Ohio (not German, Jefferson, nor New Jefferson). Grays ; island in marsh near Elliott, Dorches- ter County, Maryland (not Blackwalnut). Jackson ; hole, post-office, and valley, Uinta County, Wyoming (not Teton). Sonamed, in 1828, by Captain Sublette, after his part- ner, David E. Jackson, of St Louis, Mo. In recent years erroneously alleged to have been named after a notorious convict and outlaw, ‘‘ Teton Jackson.”’ Jellison ; cape, Penobscot Bay, Waldo County, Maine (not Gellison). Kawishiwi; river, Lake County, Minnesota (not Cashaway nor Kashaway). Kekekabic ; lake, Lake County, Minnesota (not Cacaquabic, Hawk, nor Sparrow Hawk). Las Choyas; valley near San Diego, San Diego County, California (not Chollas, La Challa, nor Las Chollas). Levisa; river, the west fork of Big Sandy River. Kentucky and Virginia (not Lavisa nor Louisa). Los Penasquitos ; canyon and land grant, San Diego County, California (not Las Penas- quitas, Paguay, Penasquitos, nor Pinas- quitos). Marshepaug; river, tributary to Shepaug River, draining from Tyler Pond, Litch- field County, Connecticut (not East Branch Shepaug, Marshapogge, nor Mashepaug). McAdoo ; creek, Posey County, Indiana (uot Macadoo.. Mule ; mountains, southeastern Arizona (nat Mule Pass). New Riegel ; post-office and railroad station, Seneca County, Ohio (not New Reigel, New Riegle, etc.). Ogishkemuncie; lake, Lake County, Minnesota (not Kingfisher, Ogishki Muncie, etc. ). Peking; city, capital of China (not Pekin). This is a reversal of the decision Pekin, rendered February 2, 1897. Pinyon ; flat, Riverside County, ‘not Pinon nor Pifion). Pipe ; creek, Erie County, Ohio (not Oganse, Ogontz, nor Pike). Pleito ; creek, Kern County, California (not Plata, Plato, nor Pieto). ° Put-in ; bay in South Bass Island, Lake Erie, Ottawa County, Ohio (not Put in nor Putin ). Put-in-Bay ; post-office, township, and village, Ottawa County, Ohio (not Put in Bay nor Put-in Bay). Ribeyre; island in Wabash River, County, Indiana (not Cut-off). San Clemente; cauyon, near La Jolla, San Diego County, California (not Clemente nor San Clemento). California Posey GEOGRAPHIC ® San Dieguito; land grant and valley, San Diego County, California (not San Diegito nor San Digitas). San Emigdio; creek, land grant, and moun- tain, Kern County, California (not San Emedio, ‘San Emidio, nor San Emidion). Shawangunk ; mountains, Ulster County, New York (not Millbrook). ; St Peters ; creek and district, Somerset County, Maryland (not St Peter nor St Peter’s). Tia Juana; post-office and river, San Diego County, California (not Tijuana). Tyler; pond int Goshen, Litchfield County, Connecticut (not Marshapauge, Tyler’s, nor West Side). Wachocastinook ; brook, or creek in Salisbury, Litchfield County, Connecticut (not Mount Riga nor Washinee). Wangum ; lake in Canaan, Litchfield County, Connecticut (not Waugum, Wangem, nor Wungum). GEOGRAPHIC American Diplomacy in the Orient. By John W. Foster, author of a Cen- tury of American Diplomacy. Pp. 498. gx6inches. Boston and New York: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. 1903. This book covers a field which no other volume had even attempted to more thantouch. ‘There existed a mass of literature upon the subject, but it was utterly disconnected and the investigator was forced to seek for it laboriously at many different sources. To understand any one phase of American diplomatic achievement in the East required difh- cult and perplexing research. Inconse- quence few Americans have attempted to grasp more than its mere outline. ‘The reading public is now put in posses- sion of an authoritative and comprehen- sive work—a work, too, which presents every advantage of a compendium, but a compendium enlarged and enriched by a chaste literary style. We have here an eucyclopeedic treatise wherein each part is conjoined with every other part, and wherein the whole composes a his- tory majestic by the grandeur and world- wide influence of the deeds it recounts. LITERATURE 459) Wells ; island in St Lawrence River, Jefferson ¢ County, New York (not Wellesley). Wenatchee ; lake, post-office, precinct, rail- road station, river, and town, Chelan County, Washington (not Wenache nor Wenatche). This is a reversal of the decision Wenache, rendered in 1892. Weoka ; creek, post-office, and precinct, El- more County, Alabama (not Wewoka, Wewokee, Wiwoka, etc. ). Wolf; creek, Sandusky and Seneca Counties, Ohio (not Raccoon nor West Branch Wolf). Wononpakook ; pond in Salisbury, Litchfield County, Connecticut (not Long, Wanom- pakook, Wonon Pakok, nor Wononpo- kok). Wononskopomuc ; lake in Salisbury, Litch- field County, Connecticut (not Furnace, Wononscopomoc, Wononskopomus, etc ). (gh Ey ReAMIE URGE The opening chapter is preliminary, describing early European relations with the Far East. It emphasizes a fact, com- monly unknown or forgotten, that Asi- atic prohibition of foreign intercourse dates from hardly earlier than the begin- ning of the seventeenth century and was mainly due to ‘‘ the violent and aggress- ive conduct ’’ of the European discover- ers and adventurers who visited those countries in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries. ‘The chapter concludes with the failure of the British expedition under Lord Aimherst,then governor gen- eral of India, to establish diplomatic rela- tions with China. ‘That was in 1815. The following twelve chapters, be- ginning with ‘‘America’s First Inter- course ’’ and ending with ‘‘ The Spanish War: Its Results,’’ summarize the first treaties with China and set forth the stages in that empire’s increasing de- crepitude, describe the opening, the transformation, and the enfranchise- ment of Japan, trace the development of the Hawaiian Islands and their an- nexation to the United States, picture the emergence of the anomalous kingdom 260 Tue NatTionaL GrocrapHic MAGAZINE Hon. John W. Foster of Korea, explain the imbroglio over the Samoan Islands, and touch upon the Spanish War only so far as it thrusts upon us a territorial and political herit- age beyond the Pacific. The book con- cludes with a graphic presentation of the national factors now involved in the solution of the far eastern problem and with the expression of a confident as- surance that the Union, which has met so well the emergencies of the past, will meet equally well the emergencies of the future. In the compressed limits of 438 pages, to exhaust each specific topic discussed was an impossible task and such as no writer would attempt. The author says in his preface: ‘‘ The treatment in a single volume of a subject embracing several countries and covering more than a century has required brevity of statement and the omission of many interesting facts.’’ But amaster’s hand is shown in seizing upon and presenting essential facts and in throwing into dis- tinctness not only those main facts but the minor facts therewith intimately connected. Hence there are left upon the reader’s mind impressions photo- graphic in their accuracy and clearness. Furthermore, the numerous footnotes are carefully chosen and of value to ad- ditional investigation. ‘There is not one that is superfluous, not one that does not cast added light upon the text. An appendix of 36 pages contains the Protocol of September 7, 1901, be- tween China and the Treaty Powers, the Emigration Treaty of 1894 between China and the United States, the Treaty of 1894 between the United States and Japan, the Joint Resolution for annex- ing the Hawaiian Islands to the United States, the Samoan Treaty of 1899 be- tween the United States, Germany, and Great Britain, the Protocol of August 12, 1898, and the Treaty of 1898 be- tween the United States and Spain. To the joy of the student’s heart, there is an admirable index of 22 pages. Certain personal characteristics of the GEOGRAPHIC LITERATURE 261 author invest his book with a peculiar charm. By international consent he is to be ranked among the ablest and most successful diplomats America has pro- duced. In the special field of diplo- macy concerning which he writes he has borne a distinguished and a prominent part. Yet in this volume he makes no reference to himself. It is doubtful if the pronoun I can be found from begin- ning toend. His name is sought in the index in vain. When forced by the exigencies of his narrative to refer to anything he has himself done he hides his personality under the indefinite designation of ‘‘a citizen of the United States.’’ Such: reticence concerning one’s own exploits is rare among the men who have represented the United States inthe East. But Getieral Foster is as unassuming as he is great. Another personal characteristic is re- vealed in his fairness and simplicity of statement. ‘The spirit of apology or advocacy or partizanship is silent here. Calmly, dispassionately the facts are marshalled and the story told. A strik- ing example among many which might be cited is afforded in Chapter VIII, upon ‘‘Chinese Immigration and Ex- clusion.’’ This chapter deals with a burning question, over which Chinese immigrant and American laborer have been wrought to frenzy. On no politi- cal subject has there been more intem- perance of feeling and expression. Yet all that could be said on either side is here put so comprehensively, so com- pactly, so forcibly, that either party might be content with this exposition of itscase. Such capability of intimate appreciation and balanced statement is not wholly the result of wide experience and profound acquaintance with the motives which move men. It is a con- sequence far more of personal tempera- ment and habit of mind. When American enterprise first knocked at the doors of China, Japan, and Korea, those countries—with the exception of a few trading ports, difh- 262 cuit of access and hemmed in by almost prohibitive restrictions—were locked in seemingly impenetrable seclusion. This book is the tale of how American diplo- macy, more than that of any other peo- ple, more perhaps than that of all other peoples, broke through the obstacles and brought those oriental States into international relations. Blunders were more than once committed. More than one American consul or envoy was in- capable or unfortunate. But the great majority of our representatives per- formed their parts well. They brought to their posts the diplomacy of practical men, diplomaed in the school of experi- ence and sure to win over the obstructive astuteness of the East. But it should always be remembered that along the path to final results the sailor, the merchant, the missionary, led the way. Moreover, from their ranks were recruited many who afterward in official station merited distinction. Such men were Major Shaw, Edmund Roberts, Townsend Harris, Peter Par- ker, H. N. Allen, S. Wells Williams, and others deserving mention. Major Shaw was supercargo on 7he Empress of China, the first vessel to bear the starry flag across the Pacific. He be- came our first consul at Canton, ‘‘a man worthy the honor.’’ Edmund Roberts, of New Hampshire, was a large ship-owner and merchant. Later accredited envoy to Siam, Muscat, and Annam, he became ‘‘the pioneer in the oriental diplomacy of the United States.’ ‘Townsend Harris, a super- cargo and merchant from New York, was the first consul general in Japan, ‘‘negotiator of the first commercial treaty with Japan,’’ no less a bene- factor of that Empire than had been Commodore Perry. ‘The medical mis- sionary, Peter Parker, was twice chargé d'affaires, then commissioner, then effi- cient minister to China. The medical missionary, H. N. Allen, has more than justified his appointment under two Presidents as minister to Korea. ‘The THe NationaL GrocraPHic MAGAZINE name of S. Wells Williams, missionary of the American Board, author of ‘‘ The Middle Kingdom,’’ for twenty years secretary of legation and often chargé d’affaires at Pekin, is almost a house- hold word. It would be a congenial task to linger in the further discussion of ‘‘American Diplomacy in the Orient,’’ even as it is delightful to linger over its perusal. However lengthy the review, much will be left unsaid. The tale this book tells is weighty, yet, made up of peril, tact, persistence, daring, it has the fascination of ro- mance. Itis the record of a diplomacy wherein honest dealing, truth, and self- respect were dominant factors. It is the record of a diplomacy which the diplomacy of any other country may be in vain challenged to surpass in ability, in influence, and in success. The un- varnished recital of its deeds casts honor upon the American name and inspires in the American reader a sentiment of gratitude and pride. Epwin A. GROSVENOR, Amherst College, Massachusetts. The Braziltan Government has provided for the mapping of its territory on a sci- entific basis. Last year the Congress ap- propriated the necessary funds forcomn- mencing the work, and a commission, of which Colonel Francisco de Abreu Lima is president, was to leave Rio early in May for the State of Rio Grande do Sul to make a reconnaissance of the first zone to be triangulated. The scheme, as far as at present outlined, includes the measurement of basis at Porto Alegre and Uruguayana, and the connection of these two cities by trian- gulation. This will give anarc of about six and one-quarter degrees of longitude in about latitude thirty degrees south. The Superintendent of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey has been requested by the commission to supervise the prep- aration of the necessary tapes and ac- cessories for the measurement of bases. lage ALASKA FRONTIER | By THOMAS WILLING BALCH, A.B. (Harvard) Member of the Philadelphia Bar ES BOOK, gives a complete account up to 1903 of all the facts relating to the Alaska boundary question, in- cluding the negotiations preceding the Anglo-Russian Treaty of 1825, the subsequent official acts of the various interested governments, the purchase of Alaska by the United States, the International Law governing the case, and reproductions of twenty-eight maps, some of them very rare. To collect the material upon which this book is based the author traveled as far as Alaska and St. Petersburg. “In Mr. Balch’s book the main threads of evidence are woven into a conclusive whole, which should be in the hands of all interested, and the publication of which is of general importance at the present time.’’— 7he New York Evening Post, April 15, 1903. “This book . . . constitutes, all things considered, the most effective, ac- cumulative, and crushing blow thus far dealt the Canadian claim.’’—/%1/ladelphia Press, February 22, 1903. ‘“The work of Mr. Balch . . . is by far the fullest and best presentation of the American case which has ever been made, and will be ot great value to the counsel who will appear for the United States before the Boundary Commission.’’— Seattle Post- Intelligencer, April 2, 1903. “If there is any one who has any doubt as to the validity of the American claim to all the sinuosities of the coast north of 54-40, it is safe to say that the doubt could never survive a careful reading of ‘The Alaska Frontier.’ ’’— Daily Alaskan, Skagway, April 16, 1903. 212 pages, large Svo. Bound in cloth, price $2.00 net eae ANE Geo SCO IT 1211-1213 CLOVER ST. PHILADELPHIA, PA. “Better than going abroad, and the best preparation for a trip abroad.”’ AN GIES are required just to describe a lot of interesting booklets of travel, any one of which can be obtained by sending a few cents in stamps. These forty-eight pages make the PORTLAND SUMMER SCHOOL PORTLAND, MAINE. Portland Summer School JULY 13 TO AUGUST 21 2 Successor to the famous Sauveur Summer School, founded in 1875 at Amherst College. ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE NEW VORK CE NIGRIAIES 6 INOWIR- WIRING: SURES Courses in modern and ancient lan- Embracing 37 Books of Travel. guages, culture of the speaking voice, instrumental and vocal music. A copy of this catalogue will be sent free, postpaid to any address, For illustrated circular address : OH ASSP! Ol B iwO-Cenl SHER, [By - ARNOLD WERNER-SPANHOOFD Central High School, - Washington, D. C. GEORGE H. DANIELS, Gen’l Passenger Agent, Graud Central Station, New York. OVP WSJ Gist WE make a specialty of HIGH GRADE WORK SCIENTIFIC «© TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS ea CA ANNING Saas te) ENGRAVERS 6 f PHILADELPHIA PLATES TO PRINT IN ONE OR moRE CoLors A The flanhattan Press-Glipping Bureau ARTHUR CASSOT, Proprietor NEW YORK (Knickerbocker Building) LONDON COR. FIFTH AVENUE AND 14TH STREET, NEW YORK Will supply you with all personal reference and clippings on any subject from all the papers and periodicals published here and abroad. Our large staff of readers can gather for you more valuable material on any current subject than you can get in a lifetime. TERMS: 100 clippings . . $ 5.00 250 clippings . . . $ 12.00 500 clippings . . . $22.00 1,000 clippings . . . $35.00 HENRY ROMEIKE’S BUREAU OF PRESS CUTTINGS t1o Fifth Avenue, New York Reads every paper of importance published in the United States, and through its European agencies in London, Paris, Berlin and Vienna every paper of importance -published in Europe and the British Colonies. One subscription on any given subject will bring notices from the United States, and if desired also from the European papers. WRITE FOR TERMS BAe VOLUMES National Geographic Magazine The NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE has on hand a few copies of complete back volumes which may be obtained at the following prices: Vol. 3, 1891 é j iseon@ | Wolk Gy 1eeis : $2.75 le Sy UOgB : ee Vol: lg WGOO : ¢ | 2o5O Vol. 6, 1894-5. ; 4.20 Vol. 7, 1896. : 5 Rae Vol. 12, 1901 : é 2.50 Vol. 8, 1897 : : HAVO |. WOlly 1H, WOO2. < : » Do&O The NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE will pay the following prices for copies of certain back numbers : Vole roson NOs Ie Sicoo- Nos 25 $00 Vol. 2, 1890, No. 2, $1.00 VO PPAnGg2= NO sin sO.50. NO. 2551-50: NOs 3; $0.50; No. 4, $0.50; No. 5, $1.00; No. 6, $1.00 Vol. 10, 1899, No. 6, $0.50; Index, $0.52 Voleeies aigo2, No. 1, $0.30 CORCORAN BUILDING, WASHINGTON, D. C. Office Hours: 8.30 A. M. to 5 P. M. Telephone, Main 471 NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY OFFICES Rooms 107, 108 Corcoran Building Fifteenth and F Sts. N. W., Washington, D. C. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL A President W J McGEE 6 + Vice-President JOHN JOY EDSON e S 6 ° Treasurer A HENRY 5 - Secretary ELIZA R. SCIDMORE 5 - Foreign Secretary BOARD OF MANAGERS 1901-1903 3902-1904 1903-1905 MARCUS BAKER A. GRAHAM BELL CHARLES J. BELL HENRY F. BLOUNT. DAVID T. DAY GEORGE DAVIDSON F. V. COVILLE A. W. GREELY WM. M. DAVIS D. C. GILMAN ANGELO HEILPRIN JOHN JOY EDSON S. H. KAUFFMANN RUSSELL HINMAN G. K. GILBERT WILLIS L. MOORE W J McGEE A. J. HENRY ISRAEL C. RUSSELL GIFFORD PINCHOT O. P. AUSTIN Cc R. D. SALISBURY O. H. TITTMANN « HART MERRIAM The National Geographic Magazine is sent free of charge to all members of the National Geographic Society Recommendation for Membership in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY The following form is enclosed for use in the nomination of persons for membership Please detach and fill in blanks and send to the Secretary Dcrs: Annual membership, $2; Life membership, $50. If check be enclosed, please make it payable to order of the National Geographic Society, and, if at a distance from Washington, remit by New York draft or post-office money-order. To the Secretary, National Geographic Society, Washington, D. C.: Please propose LES Sy 5 es Eee de Oe for membership in the Society. yer Mean Alaskan Boundary By Hon. JOHN W. FOSTER Ex-Seécretary of State, of the Joint High Commission, and Counsel of the United States in the Present Alaskan Boundary Commission With Twelve Maps The most authoritative presentation of the Alaskan boundary dispute that has ever been issued. Published in the National Geographic Magazine, November, 1899. By mai for. Twenty-five cents NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE | Corcoran Building ' . Washington,D.C. SPECIAL [IAPS PUBLISHED BY THE. ee GEOGRAPHIC eer Map o of the pie (5 feet 2 inches x 3 ae Prepared under the direction of the War Deperaiegt Map of South Africa (46x33 inches). Prepared under the direction of the War Department Map of Northeastern China (36 x 28 inches). 2 Prepared under the direction of the War Deparsaent oe Map of the Chinese Empite, dees and the Resian-Manchusian Rail- way ({§£x7% inches). i ies Map of Alaska (28 x 24 inches). - Prepared under the direction of- the U.S. Geological ‘arwey A Series of Twelve Maps on the Alaskan Boundary Dispute. © Prepared under the direction of Hon, John W. Foster, im aie: : Chart of the World on Metcator’s Projection (48x27 inches). : Prepared under the direction of the: HIE AR BE, areas BY ay ag OE Map of Cuba (18x74 mches). Prepared under the direction of: Robert 2 wee SE Ub a A Seties of Twenty-five Full-page Charts, showiue storm 1 tracks methods of weather forecasting. - Prepared under the direction of Dr. Willis is Moore, Chief U.S. Weather Bureau. Be Mail for Biuniarrae le St sas Each. eS KODAKS, AND PHOTOGRAPHIC SUPPLIES GRAPHIC SUPPLIES, and arranged a.dark room ‘here. amateurs. may ae their pictures in the approved manner and i in all the fashionable CONES = 58% Complete lines of Century, “Poco, Premo, and Cycle Plate Cameras ; Brownie, Flexo, Bull’s- -eye, Bullet, Stereo, Panorama, and Folding Pocket- film Kodaks; Developing Machines ; Papers, Trays, Printing — Frames, Rollers, Mates Films, Mounts, Solutions, Hypo, Leen ee ee, and Powders, Paste, Graduates, ‘Tripods, ete. at Brownie Kodaks, No.1. >. = $ 1.00. SPoeen. Cameras, 4x5 As ee Flexo Kodaks, No.2. . +. §.00 ]§} Pony Premo-B Cameras, a5 Bull’s-eye Kodaks; No.2... . ~ 8.00 Folding Pocket Kodaks.. . . 6,00 J? Plate Racks », Century Petite Cameras’ //6 2 41.25 JS) Printing Heap 1 Century Cameras, model 20; 4x5 11,25 ]¢| Brownie Printing Outfits ee Century Cameras, model 20; 4x5. 14,40. Hypo, pkge. : EN oh WOODWARD & LoTH [RO SP NEW YORK WASHINGTON pr es ‘PARIS nine PRESS OF JUDD & DETWEILER, WASHINGTON, D. C. -— THE _NATIONA GEO GRAPHIC JULY, 1903 No. 7 CONTENTS THE UNITED STATES; ITS SOILS AND THEIR PRODUCTS. BY H. W. WILEY, Ph, D., LL.D, CHIEF CHEMIST, U. S, DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE. ILLUSTRATED we BIG THINGS OF THE WEST. BY CHARLES F. HOLDER. ILLUSTRATED .. : : : , * ’ : : : : ’ w PAUL DU CHAILLU, WITH PORTRAIT ° : v )°THE WEATHER BUREAU. AND THE RECENT FLOODS. BY HH. C. FRANKENFIELD, FORECAST OFFICIAL, WEATHER BUREAU ; : ‘ 5 : ; : : : ; : . ; x | A SUGGESTED FIELD FOR Pe LORe TON Ree INTERNATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC ‘CONGRESS GEOGRAPHIC NOTES .. : : F eeneh 4 . GEOGRAPHIC LITERATURE Published by’the National Geographic Society, ‘Corcoran Building, Washington, D. C. a $2.50 a Year ee 25 Cents a Number . Entered at the Post-office in Washington, D. C., as Second-class Mall Matter, N ILLUSTRATED “MONTHLY, _ Nationa GrocRaPHIc Socmrty, at Washing- ton, D. C. All editorial communications — should be addressed to the Editor of the Nationat © - GroGraPHic Magazine, ‘Corcoran: Building “Wash- — ington, D. C. - Business ‘communications should — “be addressed ie the National Geographic Society, Corcoran: Building, ‘Washington, De | pooled: © hee a wd McGEE Ree ” Bthnologisl i in Chae, 2 Bureau : American ear s : * ¢ HART MERRIAM Chief of the Biological eat U. Bae Np geatteacid ey Sit bated adda ELIZA RUHAMAH SCIDMORE ie “Java, the Garden n of East, te eee fe 4 MARCUS BAKER é Carnegie Tnstilution. < WILLIS t MOORE acon Este Chief of the Weather ital U.S. > Deparment of akin hes Wor xvi No.) 7 L EE UNE Disa A DES; WASHINGTON GEOGRAPIENC MAGA ZIUNIE, JuLy, 1903 oe ITS SOILS AND IDIBUGIUR IPIROIDIG ns By H. W. Wi ey, CHIEF CHEMIST, U. S. R DAY, in saying that I had D come to take the place of the Secretary of Agriculture, re- minds me of the remark of Oliver Wen- dell Holmes, on an occasion when by reason of the illness of Emerson he was sent to one of the lyceums to fill Emer- son’s appointment. The president of the lyceum stated that they had ex- pected to listen to Mr Emerson, but by reason of illness they would not have that pleasure. However, Mr Holmes had kindly consented to fill his place. Whereupon Mr Holmes on rising re- marked that he hardly hoped to fill the place of Mr Emerson, but would at- tempt to rattle around in it a little; so to-day I cannot hope to fill the place of the Secretary of Agriculture, but will make as much noise in the large space unoccupied as possible. ORIGIN OF THE SOIL One of the oft-repeated theories con- cerning the origin of our earth is that at a remote period all the matter of which isis 1D)a5 J egg NOM DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE the earth consists at present was a part of the incandescent gas which filled the space now assigned to our solar system. As the cooling of this mass of gas pro- gressed vortex rings were formed of gaseous matter. ‘These on further cool- ing broke and rolled together, forming the sun, the planets, and the satellites of our present system. ‘The next con- dition of the incandescent gas was in- candescent liquid, which came in due season as the time rolled by. Finally, by the further process of cooling, a crust was formed upon the surface of these liquids which was the beginning of the solid surface of the earth. This crust would naturally be of the same composition as the liquid matter from which it was formed—practically ho- mogeneous in character and consisting of the mineral matters which could only exist at that temperature. In speaking of the soils of the United States, I would like to trace briefly their evolution from this primeval crust, which was the first ice formed on this *Address before the National Geographic Society, February 18, 1903 264 globe. What have been some of the more active forces which have broken up this congealed mineral matter and brought it into the present condition in which we see the surface of our globe? First of all I will speak of the action of water, which is and has been one of the chief disintegrating agents acting upon the earth’s surface. At the time the first crust was formed over the surface of the earth all the water which now exists must evidently have been above the earth’s surface in the form of steam. As the cooling progressed this steam tended to condense in the form of clouds and finally water. Thus the original rain falling upon the hot surface of the earth was at once converted again into steam, but not until it had started a cer- tain solvent action. Water has been termed the universal solvent, and it is not difficult to see how active it must have been at the time of which I speak. The sudden cooling of the surface at the spot where a drop of water struck would tend to crack it, the hot water would dissolve quickly any of the substances soluble therein, and this continual bom- bardment of boiling water must have had a tremendous effect in disintegrating the original crust formed over the earth’s surface. As the earth continued to cool and diminish in size, the original surface wrinkled and formed hills and valleys. The continual descent of water would finally permit some of it to remain in the liquid state upon the earth’s surface, and this coursing down the valleys con- tinued the disintegration, both by solu- tion and attrition. The original mineral matters were thus brought into a form of solution or suspension, and, seeking their natural chemical affinities, began to form from the first igneous rocks the first sedimentary rocks. ‘These are the rocks which we now see in strata, cover- ing the greater part of the earth’s sur- face. All these stratified rocks must have been laid down under the water, and thus weare convinced that the sur- Tue Narronat GrocRAPHic MAGAZINE face of the earth during the long period of the formation of the soil must have been alternately above and below the surface of the water collected upon the globe. INFLUENCE OF ORGANIC LIFE When organic life came upon the earth’s surface a new disintegrating force was introduced. Organic life, even in its smallest forms, such as bacteria, acts with vigor in decomposing rocks. The larger forms, which produce root- lets, help this disintegrating process along. ‘These roots find their way into crevices of the rocks, and tend to split them open and to admit water below their surface. Certain bacteria also tend to oxidize the nitrogen of the air and form nitric acid, known under the common name of agua fortis, which has a vigorous solvent action on many kinds of rock. DIFFERENT KINDS OF SOIL In the process of further cooling, ice was formed, and this also tended to have a disintegrating influence. Water in passing into ice increases in volume, and this tends.to break and disintegrate many bodies. Rock saturated with water thus tends to break up when the water becomes ice. During the periol of the ice age when large glaciers moved over the earth’s surface, the crushing and grinding effects of the ice had much to do with disintegrating the rock. The vast areas of glacial drift which form the soil of many of our Western States are evidences of the gigantic scale on which these ice mills of the gods slowly ground the stones of the earth into soil. When the soil is formed by the decay of rocks without the transporting action of water or ice being active, the soils are said to be formed zz szfz. When the products of soil disintegration are carried by water and deposited along the banks of the streams or at their mouths, the soil is called alluvial. When ANC ‘Irs Solts, Wes (UND SAIS BIULOJT[eD Jo Aa[eA Wwe dy} UL MOTG wWeaS VW ainj[NoMsy jo jmemjzivdsed “Ss Q ‘sawjoH “S UIMpHy wo1y AL GEocraPHic MAGAZINE N Tue Natio 266 ‘adi ATYSno10 7} sv [Jom sv ‘Arp ApooJ10d uress v uo Tuo AT[NJssaoons pasn aq ues 7 “4 a}erado 07 uM yYSt0 KTuO saambas puv ‘kvp v sarow Sz1 0} 0g Wor 4soAIvY, Uv dUTTORI AY, “[]IU 10 ‘peorprex ‘Osnoyasvar ot} 0} paThey oq 0} Apyar ‘uless poyovs Jo [lea Buoy vB purysq Surava] puv ‘Surysvsyy ‘suruvsjo ‘Suysaarey ‘yp ut yaoj ch 0} 91 Wory sT}VMS SurzNo ‘ure1s poured jo saprm uodn saya YSno1gy daams ornqord siy} ur UMOYS UO aq] AAI saurgormM snorspuog Jsvo) oYlOv_ ay} UO pas(] ToYser]-ToysoAIVPY weayS ev Jo MoI yuo Asy jo Juowpledod °S Q ‘sewjoH 'S ulm pit WoT SOOUBAPR OUITOVUL 9} SB PUTYEq Fa] UleIs pajsoAley Jo sseq oy} SulMoYsS I™~ a AOYSPIYT,-TojsoAIe FY Wiv9S Jo MolA vO dainjNosy jo Juawjzedaq °S “Q ‘samjoH ‘S UIMpy wo1yg a ESS e O ‘= ea) “ wn =| e) WN 7) ‘= —= na isa] Tue UNITED Stat 268 products of rock disintegration are car- ried by moving ice and deposited there- from,they are called glacial drift. When they are carried by wind, as is often the case, they are called zolian soils. The above are some of the varieties of soils as determined by their method of for- mation. Soils are also classified in re- gard to their chemical characters ; as, for instance, when formed from the decay of carbonate of lime, they are called limestone soils. When arising from the disintegration of granite, they are called granitic soils. When formed chiefly from particles of silex, they are called sandy soils. When consisting mostly of silicate of alumina, they are called clay soils, and so on. But for agricultural purposes the soil consists of more than decayed mineral matter. By the decay of organic mat- ter there is introduced into the soil the element, humus, which is one of its principal characteristics from an agri- cultural point of view. ‘The soil is filled with millions of organisms of a lower form, without whose activity the growing of crops would be impossible. The soil, therefore, not only contains the mineral matters which are neces- sary to sustain the life of plants, but also those organic elements without which these mineral matters would not be available for plant growth. The three principal mineral foods of plants are potash, phosphoric acid, and nitro- gen. Lime, magnesia, iron, and many other mineral substances are also found in plants, but these are not absolutely essential to plant growth. If, however, either nitrogen, potash, or phosphoric acid be entirely removed from the en- vironment, it is impossible to produce a matured plant. The great bulk of the material of which plants are composed is not drawn, however, from the soil, but is taken from the air and water. Great as have been the chemical achieve- ments of man, nochemist has yet arisen whose skill can be compared to that of Tue Nationa, GrocrapHic MaGaAZINE the plant itself. Any chemist who to-day, with all the appliances which science has placed at his disposal, could make by synthesis the various organic compounds of which plants are princi- pally composed would rival the fame of Berzelius, Liebig, Hoffman, Berthelot, Gibbs, or Remsen. ‘Thus the soil must be regarded as that part of plant life which furnishes the chemical support for the growing plant, supplies it with the mineral foods essential to its growth and maturity, and favors best those conditions which enable the plant cell to elaborate the organic matters of which the matured plant is chiefly composed. THE UNITED STATES AN AGRICUL- TURAL COMMUNITY Having thus briefly described how the soil originated, we pass to the considera- tion of the second part of the subject, namely, the crops which grow therein. The United States is essentially an agricultural community. The basis of its wealth lies not so much in the pro- ducts of its mines and manufactures as it does in those of its fields, gardens, orchards, and forests. ‘The territory of the United States, including its new pos- sessions, represents every variety of soil and every character of climate. It has agricultural lands in the tropics, in the subtropics, in the temperate zone, and in the sub-boreal regions of Alaska. In latitude its agricultural lands extend half way around the world. Agricult- ural crops are grown inthe United States subject to all the vicissitudes of climate, to excessive rainfalls, to prolonged drouth, to intense heat, and to alternat- ing frosts and sunshine. Within the borders of the United States are grown every agricultural crop known to the world. It produces im- mense quantities of the cereals; of fiber plants, including especially cotton and flax; of sugar-producing plants, includ- ing sugar cane, sugar beets, sorghum, ® Tue Unitep States: Its Soits, ETc. 269 From Edwin S. Holmes, U. S. Department of Agriculture Between the Walls of 100,000 Sacks of Wheat at Mission, Oregon The warehouse is 56 feet wide and 310 feet long. There are 250,000 bushels of wheat in the sacks Tue Nationa, GrEocRAPHIC MAGAZINE 270 -yuoudiyS Sunway yeoyA\ payors ANNUITY JO JUoUTZVdaCT *G "A ‘SOOT! “GS UIA pep WOAYT Due UnNiteD STATEs: ) Ins SOULS, wAeS A Portion of the Grain Fleet in Portland Harbor, Oregon and maple trees; all kinds of vegetables and fruits; medicinal plants of every variety; forest products of all kinds; spices and condiments of every descrip- tion. MAGNITUDE OF THE CEREAL CROPS OF THE UNITED STATES As an introduction to the discussion of the subject embraced in this paper, a brief statement of the magnitude of some of the agricultural crops of the United States and the area under cultivation will be useful. In the year 1902 the following statistics show the area under cultivation, the yield per acre, the total production and the price per unit, and im toto the magnitude of our standard agricultural crops: The crop which is universal in the United States is maize or Indian corn. There is only one state in the Union in which a considerable area of Indian corn is not grown, viz., the State of Nevada, and it, as is well known, is a barren desert, except where irrigation can be practiced. ‘The total area under cultivation in the United States in maize in 1902 was 94,043,613 acres. The total production was 2,523,- 648,312 bushels. The price per bushel was 40.3 cents. The total value of the crop was $1,017,017,349. The largest acreage devoted to maize in any one state was in Illinois, viz., 9,623,680 acres, yielding 372,436,416 bushels. The smallest reported area in any one state, with the exception of Nevada, as above mentioned, was 2,384 acres in Wyoming. After maize the most important cereal BED crop inthe United States is wheat. The area in 1902 was 28,581,426 acres in winter wheat, and 17,620,998 acres in spring wheat, a total of 46,202,424 acres. The average yield per acre of winter wheat was 14.4 bushels. The total quantity of winter wheat produced was 411,788,666 bushels, and the aver- age price was 64.8 cents per bushel. The total value of the winter wheat was $266,727,475. The average yield of spring wheat per acre was 14.7 bushels. The total production was 258,274,342 bushels. The average price per bushel was 60.2 cents. The total value of the spring wheat was $155,496,642. Placing the two sets of data together, we find the total yield was 670,063,008 bushels and the total value was $422,224,117. The area sown to oats in the United Statesin 1902 was 28,653,144 acres. The average yield per acre was 34.5 bushels. The total yield was 987,842,712 bushels. The average price per bushel was 30.7 cents. ‘The total value of the crop was $303,584,852. ‘The area sown to barley in the United States in 1902 was 4,661,063 acres. The total yield was 134,954,023 bushels and the total value was $61,898,634. The total area sown to rye in the United States in 1902 was 1,978,548 acres. The yield was 33,630,592 bushels and the total value of the crop was $17,- 080,793. The total area sown to buckwheat in the United States in 1902 was 804,889 acres. The total production was 14,- 529,770 bushels and the total value of the crop was $8,654,704. The above comprise the principal cereal crops of the United States. They do not include, however, consid- erable areas sown to millet, sorghum, Egyptian corn, rice, and other cereals. Summarizing the above principal crops, we find the total area under cultiva- tion was 176,343,681 acres; total pro- duction, 4,364,668,417 bushels; total value, $1,830,460,449. THe NarronaL GeocraPHic MaGaZINE COTTON CROP VALUED AT NEARLY FIVE HUNDRED MILLION DOLLARS The area of cotton harvested in the United States in 1902 was 27,114,103 acres. In addition to this, 764,227 acres were planted to cotton, which were not harvested. The total pro- duction of cotton lint was 5,111,870,028 pounds. The price per pound for cotton at Gal- veston February 6, 1903, was 9 cents, making the total value of the crop $460,068, 303. The area devoted to hay-making 1n the United States in 1902 was 39,825,227 acres and the yield 59,857,576 tons of 2,000 pounds each. ‘The price per ton was $9.06. The total value of the crop was $542,360, 364. The total area planted to potatoes in the United States in 1902 was 2,965,587 acres. The yield was 284,632,687 bushels. The average price per bushel was 47.1 cents. The total value of the crop was $134,111,436. The total area planted to tobacco in the United States in 1902, excluding Porto Rico and the Hawaiian Islands, was 1,300,734 acres. The total yield was 821,823,963 pounds. The total value was $80,472,506. The total number of tons of sugar beets harvested in the United States in 1902 was 1,777,639 tons of 2,240 pounds. The total number of tons of sugar pro- duced was 195,800 of 2,240 pounds. The acreage in beets is difficult to de- termine, but it may be assumed that the average crop was about eight tons per acre, which would make the total acreage 24,475 acres. ‘he average price of the sugar was about four cents per pound, making the total value of the crop $17,543,680. The total quantity of cane sugar made in the United States in 1902 was 767,000 tons of 2,240 pounds each. Of this amount Louisiana furnished 250,000 tons, Porto Rico 100,000 tons, the Ha- waiian Islands 315,000 tons, and the 273 Ins Sorms) Ene. Tue Unitep States BUBISINO’T U1d}S9MYINOG UI IdySvIy, weayg v ainqyNosy jo juemjiedeq *s ‘gq ‘ddeuy “y's wo WIM. Sry Suryselyy, THe Nationa GrocraPHic MaGaZINEe SUINSUOS dA\ FVT[M JO J[VY-ouO OF syUNOUTe MOU YoryM ‘dors [eNUU 94} BuIsvotoUuT ‘IOADMOY ‘are ddII JO SurjsoAivy pue uolyearnyno OU} UL S}UOTMOAOAd UIT JUOOY ainjzpMoLidy JO JuauzsLdoqd ‘WoT}dmMNsuUoOD UMO s}I IO} YSnous vonpord jou saop soyv}G poy ey} YyoryM jo dorzo | BVULISINO’T UId}SOMYINOG UL oY Suysoarwe_y Qo ‘ddvuy *y °S wor vaie9 A[UO a} SE VOI Tue Unitep States: Its Soits, ETc. Philippine Islands (exports) 102,000 tons. Most of the cane sugar was raw, and did not bring so high a price as beet sugar, which was mostly refined. The average price of the cane sugar may be taken at three cents per pound. The total value of the crop was therefore $51,542,400. The area planted to flax for the pro- duction of flaxseed in 1902 in the United States was 3,739,700 acres. The quan- tity of seed produced was 29,284,880 bushels, and the value of the crop was $30,814,661. In this valuation no ac- count is made of the value of the flax fibers. The area in hemp in the census year was reported as 16,042 acres, yielding 11,750,630 pounds of fiber valued at $546, 338. The area in vegetables, excluding po- tatoes, in the census year was 2,814,139 acres, producing a crop valued at $143,- 782,534- The total area devoted to the produc- tion of peas in the census year was 968,371 acres, yielding 9,440,269 bush- els valued at $7,909,074. The total area devoted to the culti- vation of peanuts was 516,658 acres, producing 11,964,959 bushels valued at $7,271,230. The area devoted to the cultivation of castor beans was 25,738 acres, pro- ducing 143,388 bushels valued at $134,- 084. The total area planted to hops in the census year was 55,613 acres, producing 49,209,704 pounds valued at $4,084,929. The area devoted to the cultivation of broom corn inthe census year was 178,584 acres, producing 90,947,370 pounds and valued at $3,588,414. THE FRUIT CROPS The total value of the fruit crops of all kinds in the United States in the census year was $131,423,517. Of this amount $83,751,840 was the value of s 27 5 the orchard fruit; $25,030,877 the value of the small fruits; $14,090,937 the value of the grapes, and $8,549,863 the value of the citrus and subtropical fruits. The number of orchard trees of the different kinds in the United States in the census year was as follows: EMD DIS WEEE coooebocacsue0-cc0c 201,794,764 Peach and nectarine trees........ 99,919,428 RearitreesSaaeeer 17,716,184 Pitimvandyprunetreesw meee (Cimerday WEES 6 bcc G95 Gudccdanese Apricot trees 30,780,892 11,943,287 5,010,139 The total area’in fruit trees in the United States is 6,230,745 acres. ‘The total area in small fruits is 304,029 acres, and the total value of the small fruits produced $25,030,877. The number of olive trees in the United States in the census year was 1,540,155, and the number of pounds produced was 5,053,637. The number of nut trees in the United States in the census year cultivated on farms was 1,649,072. THE NUMBER OF FARMS The total area under irrigation in the census year in the United States was 7,263,273 acres, and the value of the irrigated crops was $84,433,438. The total area of the United States, including Alaska, Porto Rico, and the Hawaiian Islands, is 3,613,217 square miles, equivalent to 19,768,604,880 acres. The number of farms in the United States in the census year was 5,739,657. The average number of acres in each farm was 146.6. ‘The total acreage of the farms in the United States was 841,201,546. The value of the farm property in the United States in the census year was $20,514,001,838. ‘The value of the farming implements and ma- chinery was $761,261,550. ‘The value of the live stock on the farms was $3,078,050,041. The total value of the farms of the United States in the census year was AGT) Tue Nationa, GeocraeHic MaGAZINE A Field of Pumpkins Grown for Seed $16,674,690,247, of which the land, with improvements except buildings, was $13,114,492,056 and the farm buildings $3,560,198,191. Of the 5,739,657 farms in the United States 2,024,964 were operated by renters, and 3,714,693 were operated by their owners. NUMBER AND VALUE OF FARM ANIMALS The number and value of farm ani- mals in the United States on January 1, 1903, as estimated by the Statistician of the Department of Agriculture, were as follows Animals. | Number. | Valued at— TORE c0co0000 | 16,557,373 | $1,030,705,959 IWOBIIES so bcccuece | 2,728,088 197,753>327 Milch cows...... 17,105,227 516,711,914 Other cattle... | 44,659,206 | 824,054,902 SIT Dsc00- 0000 63,964,876 168,315,750 Syiphisc00n saccd | 46,922.624 | 364,973,688 ‘The total number of farm animals was 191,937,394, and the total value of the farm animals was $3,102,515,540. The total value of the agricultural and horticultural crops of the United States for 1902, as estimated by the Stat- istician of the Department of Agricult- ure, 1S $3,500,000,000, not including live stock, the annual value of which is estimated at $1,000,000,000, making the total value of the agricultural pro- ducts of the United States for 1902 $4,500,000, 000. The total value of the agricultural exports of the United States for the year ending June 30, 1901, was $943,811,020, amounting to 64.62 per cent of the total exports of all kinds from this country. Some of the principal items included in the above are as follows : Value of cattle exported. ....... $37,566,980 Siesheepresxxported sameness I,933,000 GS GS nore] SxGOMIGCL oo os- 235,465 «“ « bacon and hams exported 60,341,804 aE ONiMEDowATES:\ laps Sells, RTC: Value of pork exported......... '. $13,059,551 aateeemlardeexsportedun 1) -. 46,560,148 ““ —“* Deef products exported.. 44,225,319 “all other meat products exported. : 23,369,0 3 «< _“" dairy productsexported. 9,403,722 De COLLOM Era wanna 313,673,443 “« “"“‘breadstuffs 275,594,618 LO UACCOS unmanufact- ured, exported........ 27,656,475 WILL OUR FOOD SUPPLY KEEP PACE WITH OUR ENORMOUSLY INCREAS- ING POPULATION? The foregoing data will show, in a general way, the vast agricultural re- sources of the United States. It is seen that we are not only able to feed our own people, but millions of people in other countries. There is one question which con- stantly presents itself to the mind of the political economist, namely, Is the rate of increase in population to be dimin- ished, or, if continued, will the food supply be exhausted in the near or re- mote future? In looking for answers AY J) to these questions, political economists must consult scientific agriculture. In the application of the principles of agri- culture to science is found the only safe response. It is certain that under the fostering care of this country and with wise and well-directed engineering, many millions of acres of rich land can be procured for agricultural purposes through irrigation. Science teaches us in many other ways the methods of making the farm, to a certain extent, independent of* the variations in rain- fall. The true principles of conserving moisture for the purpose of crop pro- duction, and of utilizing to the best advantage the excess of precipitation, are now well known and are daily taught to our people. Scientific forestry is in- creasing the number of trees and bring- ing large areas into tree culture which before were only featureless plains. What the effect of tree planting will be upon the climate is not known with cer- tainty, but the general impression is that A Field of Silverskin Onions on Bloomsdale Farm, Philadelphia Tue NarionaL GeocraPHic MAGAZINE DUS 1ayU aWOH aly, Jo Asazrnoy jlodxiy 1OF pousz}eyy Sutoq apW7VO Bic THINGS OF THE West the more abundant the growth of trees, the more readily is moisture preserved for agricultural purposes while the intensity and extent of floods is dimin- ished. The true principles of fertilization are annually increasing the average product of the older farm lands of the community. The principles of cattle feeding are introducing important econ- omies into the utilization of farm prod- ucts. We have no reason to think that the average wheat crop, for in- stance, in the United States would not increase in the amount grown per acre An increase of a single bushel per acre _will give, in round numbers, an increase of sixty million bushels to the crop. The scientific farmer can readily double and treble his crop, and so, without increasing the acreage, supply double or treble the amount of wheat. The same principle is true of other crops. The future soil fertility will increase, not diminish. The average output of each acre will grow. While the capac- ity of the mouth to consume remains constant through all centuries, the ca- 279 pacity bf the hands to furnish food is— constantly increasing. We need not fear, therefore, a period of world star- vation due to the exhaustion of the food-producing capacity of the soil. If universal hunger does come, it will not be from this cause. It may be—I would not deny it—that the final fate of man on earth is starvation or freez- ing, but the remote future at which such calamities can occur makes their event for practical purposes infinitely removed. We are now feeding, within the boundaries of the United States, eighty million people. When in a hun- dred years from now we are feeding two hundred million people, the quantity of food per head will be no less abundant than at present. In those days now so near at hand agriculture will be more a science and more an art. The fields will all be gardens, and the forests sources of income without destruction. The life of man will be full of amenities which are now denied the tiller of the soil, and the true aristocracy of the earth will be composed of those in direct touch with earth herself. BIG THINGS OF THE WEST * By Cuartes F. Hoitper HETHER rightly or not, the - West has earned a reputation for big things—hig fishes, big fruit, big trees; and so many really big things come from this section of the country that possibly some of the in- habitants fall naturally into the habit of telling big stories and painting as they rise. There are, however, certain peculiar conditions that hold on the Pacific slope that justify the story-teller. The West has the largest trees in the great Sequoias which rear their lofty heads two or three hundred feet in air. It possesses the giant redwoods, which possibly rank next in size and useful- ness, great forests extending all along the fog-laden country of northern Cali- fornia. In Alaska we find the highest mountains in America, and the largest and most numerous glaciers, beginning with Muir and Malaspina, the latter the most remarkable glacier in the world. The stroller through the markets of San Francisco will find the western repre- sentative of the New York weak-fish—a huge creature ranging from eighty to one hundred pounds—and will be told * Reprinted from the Scientific American Supplement by courtesy of Munn & Co. 280 Courtesy of the Scientific American Supplement A Colossal Californian Pumpkin that a similar fish is caught in the Gulf of California weighing two hundred pounds. In the Italian quarter of this city will be seen the octopus, or devil- fish, hung up for sale, a terrible array of arms or tentacles; not the little crea- ture a foot or two across common in the East, but a veritable monster with a radial spread of perhaps twelve or four- teen feet. Along the upper coast these animals have been found with a radial spread of twenty-five feet—well named the spider of the sea. Along the coast will be seen a bass which often tips the scales at five hundred pounds; and at Monterey has been taken a mackerel weighing nine hundred pounds—sug- gestive that even fishes grow large in Tue Nationa, GrocrapHic MAGAZINE western waters. In Alaskan waters is found a monster clam, the ‘‘ geoduck,’’ one of which would afford a meal for several persons; not so large however as the great tridacna and its species, which weighs, with its two valves, five hundred pounds, the animal alone weighing thirty. This shell, though common in California, is from the equatorial regions of the Pacific, where, buried in the soft rock, its viselike jaws partly open, it is a menace to the natives who wade along the reefs searching for shells. In southern California the vegetation is often remarkable for itssize. At Santa Barbara is a grapevine which covers several hundred square feet, the vine itself resembling a tree, said to be the largest vine in the world, though this is open to doubt, for some of the old vines of Spain are of enormous size. Whether it is due to the newness of the soil and the fact that it is not yet exhausted by successive farm- ing is not known, but nearly everything here grows very large and rapidly. The tree known as the Aus- tralian black wattle will attain a height of fifty or more feet in five years, palms the same height in less than twenty years, and eucalyptus one hundred feet in less time; so that it is a common saying in southern California that bar- ren ground can be taken and made to look like a place fifty years old in five years. The extraordinary growth of flowering plants and shrubs in south- ern California is noticed. The eastern heliotrope grows in the form of a vine reaching twenty feet upward, cover- ing the fronts of houses, in some way resisting the frost if at all protected by overhanging roof. In the city of Bic Tunes oF THE WEsT 281 Courtesy of the Scientific American Supplement A Giant Californian Potato Vine Pasadena many remarkable examples of large growth are seen, one being a po- tato, which was trained to grow upon a trellis and assumed the form of a lusty vine over twelve feet high, producing an extraordinary number of potatoes. Some of the photographs of fields of pumpkins taken in the fall in Southern California might well be considered open to suspicion, so enormous are the productions. One pumpkin exhibited by James F. Stewart & Co. in I,os Angeles was so huge that a calf was held in the interior while a photog- 282 rapher took its picture. Doubtless the California rancher who raised this giant would tell the Eastern farmer that it was ‘‘not a good year for pumpkins, either.’’ Another colossal pumpkin raised by J. J. Teague in 1901 weighed 230 pounds, and when dug out after the jack o’ lantern fashion afforded a playhouse for the rancher’s little daughter, if we may judge by the pic- ture. In the old days California pears were famous all over the civilized world for their size, but today this reputation applies to all fruits. Strawberries grown here are sometimes so large that three or four would fill a plate. Sweet potatoes are often mammoth—four feet in length—while the oranges, the im- IPAWUIL, IDV! who died at St Petersburg April 30, was born in New Orleans July 31, 1835. His birthplace was thus the same city to which Stanley nearly twenty years later drifted as a cabinboy, to be befriended and adopted by the merchant Stanley. Little is known of Du Chaillu’s ancestors, except that they were of one of the old French Huguenot families that had settled in Louisiana. His father, a man of considerable means, was engaged in the West African trade and owned a ‘‘ factory’’ or trading depot on the Gaboon coast, a few miles north of the Equator. Paul as a boy accom- panied his father to Africa and lived for three or four years on the coast. He was a bright, enterprising youngster, who spent most of his time talking with the natives, hearing their stories and learning their dialects and ways of thinking and living. He liked better to listen to the stories of the native traders than to learn the business of his father. It was this personal knowledge of the native which enabled him after- P= BELLONI DU CHAILLU, Tue Nationa, GreocRAPHic MaGaZINnE mense navels which sometimes hang upon the trees for a year, probably excel in size any similar fruit anywhere. In a Pasadena garden in the summer of 1902 could be seen string beans with pods three feet in length, presenting an extraordinary spectacle, and as though the vine was hung with green snakes. But this extraordinary growth cannot be attributed to the soil of Southern California, as the seeds are said by Mr Charles Richardson to have come origi- nally from China, the growth not being abnormal, though doubtless when the wonderful plants are distributed over the state some patriotic Californian will claim that the bean is due to the remark- able soil and climate of California.” Cie LAIULIL ward to travel for thousands of miles in the interior without being obliged to killa single native. About 1853 his father took him back to the United States, but the wild tales the boy had heard had fascinated him and excited him to find out how much was true of what the seacoast natives said of the cannibals, pygmies, wildmen or gorillas, and other marvels of the Great Forest. No white man had pre- viously penetrated more than a few miles into the interior along this part of the coast. Inthe fall of 1856 he sailed from New York in a three-masted schooner and was landed at Gaboon in December. The following three and one-half years he passed exploring a section of Africa stretching from Gaboon 320 miles in- land and 250 miles north and south. On his return to New York in 1859 he wrote the story of his discoveries, which was published by Harper & Brothers in 1861 under the title of ‘‘ Explorations and Adventures in Equatorial Africa ; with Accounts of the Manners and Cus- toms ofthe People, and of the Chase of the Gorilla, Croc- odile, Leopard, Elephant, Hippopotamus, and other Animals. By Paul B. Du Chaillu, with Map and Illus- trations. Harper & Bros., 186r.’’ In his preface he states : “I traveled—always on foot, and unaccompanied by other white men—about 8,o00 miles. I shot, stuffed, and brought home over 2,000 birds, of which more than 60 are new species, and I killed upwards of 1,000 quadru- peds, of which 200 were stuffed and brought home, with ‘more than 80 hitherto unknown toscience. I suf- ered fifty attacks of the African fever, taking, to cure myself, more than four- teen ounces of quinine. Of famine, long-continued ex- posures to the heavy tropical rains, and attacks of fero- cious ants and venomous flies, it is not worth while to speak. ““My two most severe and trying tasks were the trans- portation of my numerous specimens to the seashore and the keeping of a daily journal, both of which involved more painful care than I like even to think Olen In the book he told of gorilla, of which he had brought back the first specimens and which he had been the first white man to see and hunt; of the fierce cannibal tribes, the Fans, who filed their teeth to keep them sharp; of the ravages of the Baskouay ants, which marched in dense columns miles in length, and who were marshalled by officers and generals; of hunting ele- phants with pitfalls; of a new variety Courtesy of Charles Scribner's Sons Paul Du Chaillu Born July 31, 1835; Died April 30, 1903 of snake, less than four feet long and six and eight inches thick, which lies in the open places in the woods and whose bite is instantaneous death, and of many other equally wonderful sights. The book was greeted with shouts of laughter and derision from one end of the American continent to the other. Mr and Mrs and Miss Gorilla was the commion jest, and the name Du Chaillu became a byword for a fanciful story- teller. Du Chaillu was only 26 when his first book was published. He was unable to answer satisfactorily the storm 284 of questions hurled at him; consequently nobody believed him, except Harper and Brothers in the United States and the Royal Geographical Society in England, both of whom valiantly and vigorously defended his truthfulness. In 1863-65 Du Chaillu made a second journey of exploration to Africa, the narrative of which appeared in 1867 as ‘A Journey through Ashango Land.’’ This time he discovered the pygmies of the Dark Forest, but his descriptions of the little people were likewise received with incredulity. With this journey his explorations in Africa ended. Gradually each of Du Chaillu’s dis- coveries was confirmed by later ex- plorers—by Schweinfurth, Stanley, Sir Harry Johnston, and others. Many years ago they were all verified; but the name Du Chaillu none the less still remains to most Americans that of a ro- mance. Inacertain sense Du Chaillu is himself responsible for this feeling, for all his descriptions are so vivid and are so thrillingly told that the reader feels he is reading a work of pure inven- tion, rather than a narrative of actual experience. His famous description of the first gorilla shot by a white man is worth quoting : ““Suddenly, as we were yet creeping along, in a silence which made a heavy breath seem loud and distinct, the woods were at once filled with the tremendous barking 1oar of the gorilla. ‘“Then the underbrush swayed rapidly just ahead, and presently before us stood an immense male gorilla. He had gone through the jungle on his all-fours ; but when he saw our party he erected him- self and looked us boldly in the face. He stood about a dozen yards from us, and was a sight I thirk I shall never forget. Nearly six feet high (he proved fourinches shorter), with immense body, huge chest, and great muscular arms, with fiercely-glaring, large, deep gray eyes, and a hellish expression of face, Tue NarionaL GeocraPHic MAGAZINE which seemed to me like some night- mare vision: thus stood before us this king of the African forest. ‘‘ He was not afraid of us. He stood there, and beat his breast with his huge fists till it resounded like an immense bass-drum, which is their mode of offer- ing defiance; meantime giving vent to roar after roar. ‘“The roar of the gorilla is the most singular and awful noise heard in these African woods. It begins with a sharp bark, like an angry dog; then glides into a deep bass roll, which literally and closely resembles the roll of distant thunder along the sky, for which I have sometimes been tempted to take it where I did not see the animal. So deep is it that it seems to proceed less from the mouth and throat than from the deep chest and vast paunch. “His eyes began to flash fiercer fire as we stood motionless on the defensive, and the crest of short hair which stands on his forehead began to twitch rapidly up and down, while his powerful fangs were shown as he again sent forth a thunderous roar. And now truly he reminded me of nothing but some hell- ish dream creature—a being of that hideous order, half-man, half beast— which we find pictured by old artists in some representations of the infernal re- gions. He advanced a few steps, then stopped to utter that hideous roar again; advanced again, and finally stopped when at a distance of about six yards from us. And here, just as he began another of his roars, beating his breast in rage, we fired and killed him.’’ In later years Du Chaillu traveled ex- tensively in Sweden, Norway, Lapland, Finland, and other countries. He was the originator of the phrases ‘‘ Land of the Midnight Sun’’ and ‘‘ Land of the Long Night.’’ In 1889 he published ‘The Viking Age,’’ his most ambitious work, the result of many years of spe- cial research. He published his first book for young people in 1868, called Tue ReEcENT FLoops “Stories of the Gorilla Country.’’ This was followed by many other similar books. Mr Du Chaillu had many friends among the members of the National Geographic Society. His last public address in the United States was before 285 the National Geographic Society, April 12, Igol, on the occasion of a farewell reception tendered him by the Society on the eve of his departure for Russia. His first lecture on his return was to have been before the National Geo- graphic Society. THE WEATHER BUREAU AND THE RECENT FLOODS By H. C. FRANKENFIELD, FORECAST OFFICIAL, WEATHER BUREAU and lower Missouri Rivers dur- ing March, April, and June of the cur- rent year have served to bring into considerable prominence a feature of the Weather Bureau work not at all familiar to the general public, with the exception of those who dwell within the districts directly affected. Refer- ence is had to the River and Flood Service which, by the uniform accuracy and general high character of its work during the recent floods, has afforded a striking realization of the true function of the Weather Bureau, namely, that of providing as effectively as possible by means of its warnings for the personal safety as well as the material comfort and welfare of the people in times of impending disaster by wind and water. Ordinarily the work of the River and Flood Serviceis limited to the forecasting day by day of the coming stagesof water in the navigable rivers of the country for the benefit of the commerce thereon, with an occasional local warning of an approaching flood due to excessive pre- cipitation over a more or less circum- scribed area. These forecasts and warn- ings are expected by the commercial and agricultural interests of the com- HE unprecedented floods that have occurred in the Mississippi munities affected, and are accepted by each individual asa portion of the legit- imate assets of hiscalling. The country at large is very slightly and indirectly affected by the work, and as a natural consequence hears but little of it. It is only when the rains become general and frequent and excessive over the great watersheds, and when the rapidly swelling tides in the rivers give notice of the coming ruin and disaster that the interest of the whole country is awak- ened. About two-fifths of our entire population dwell within the watersheds of the three great interior rivers, and a much larger proportion of its great pro- ducing area is comprised within their limits. The interests of all are centered in these districts, and upon their weifare depends that of all. It is at these times that the River and Flood Service of the Weather Bureau stands forth in its true light, and by the timeliness and accu- racy of its warnings affords ample op- portunity for the protection of human life and such property as can be saved. The flood of March and April, 1903, in the lower Mississippi River was the greatest in its history, the stages of water alone considered, although its actual volume was very probably less than in 1897, the increased heights hav- Tue Nationa, GroGRAPHIc MaGAZINE 286 Cobr ‘yore “YLy ‘uoeyy ‘aua0G poopy Tue Recent Frioops ing been due to the extension and in- creased dimensions of the levee system. The confinement of the waters within a narrow channel, of course, operates to elevate the flood plane, with the natural result that a given stage of water would be recorded with a much less volume than was formerly necessary to produce the same result. An inspection of the figures immediately following will con- firm this statement, Cairo being used as a reference point for the reason that all lower river forecasts are predicated upon the Cairo stages : ; | Eeess. |or defi- 1897. | 1903. | ciency. 1903. | Feet.| Feet.| Feet. CHMD.oavossedesousboe | 516] 50.6] —1.0 Wiemphiss sere | eee 37.1 | 40.1 | +-3.0 New Orleans .. +0.9 19.5 | 20.4 | The difference was most marked at Memphis, owing to the completion of the St Francis levee, in Arkansas, since 1897, and had not this levee broken in several places the excess would have been still greater. The Ohio and lower Mississippi Rivers, owing to a number of heavy and general rains that are the invaria- ble accompaniments of storms of the Southwestern type, had been rising steadily during February, but not to such an extent as to warrant flood warn- ings until the last two days of the month, when another storm of the same type moved northeastward through the Ohio Valley. It was not necessary to wait longer. Another general rain was certain to cause overflows of the already bank-full rivers, and warnings of dan- ger were at once telegraphed from the river centers to all points between Pitts- burg and Cincinnati, the character of the advices varying with the locality. For instance, at Pittsburg, where the fast-flowing mountain tributaries make 2137 every moment valuable, warnings were given to take all necessary precautions at once, the usual time for a flood to run out being but 18 hours, while at Cin- cinnati several days were allowed. On the same date a general warning was issued from Memphis that owing to the recent heavy and general rains the floods would continue for two weeks longer, with stages one or two feet higher. On March 1 the people of the New Orleans district were notified to make prepara- tions for high waters. ‘These warnings were repeated from day to day, grad- ually becoming more specific as the great volumes of the tributary waters came into the main stream. ‘There were more heavy rains on the 7th and 8th, and on March g warnings were issued for stages below Cairo higher than were ever before recorded, should the levees remain intact. It was also stated that the rise would continue for ten days longer at Memphis and for four week at New Orleans, when a crest stage of 21 feet was expected at the latter place, 1.5 feet higher than in 1897. At the same time a stage of 50 feet was forecasted for Cairo. ‘These warnings were repeated daily with such slight variations as were indicated. With the experiences of 1897 so fresh within the recollection of all, there was no occasion to impress upon them the necessity of immediate action. ‘Thousands of men were put to work at once strengthening the levees and removing portable stock to places of safety. Armed forces pa- trolled the levees to guard them against breaking or cutting, and every possible precaution that experience, foresight, or prudence could dictate was taken. The warnings of the 12th raised the limits still higher except at New Or- leans, 50.5 feet being forecasted for Cairo and 39 feet for Memphis, the lat- ter to occur in seven days. About March 15 there was a sudden rise at Memphis due to recently constructed levees and railroad embankments, anda 288 Tue Natrona, GrocRaPHic MAGAZINE Camps of Negro Refugees, Flood of March, 1903 Tue Recent Froops forecast was therefore made for a 4o- foot stage within afew days. The crest stage of 40.1 feet was reached on the morning of March 20, 7.1 feet above the danger line and three feet above the high-water mark of 1897. At New Or- leans the rise continued for nearly three weeks longer, and the crest stage of 20 4 feet was reached on April 6, 1.5 feet above the high-water mark of 1897. There were occasional surgings of the water to 20.7 feet, and had not the levees broken in the St Francis system and later at Hymelia, La., the forecast of a 21-foot stage made over four weeks before would have been fully verified. As it was, the error was on the right side, it being an important axiom of river forecasting to always slightly over- estimate, if possible, the probable height of a flood crest. The stages forecasted and those act- ually reached from Cairo to New Or- leans were as follows. The forecast at Cairo was made four days in advance, and that at New Orleans 28 days in ad- vance of the crest : Sinner. Forecast Actual stage. | stage. Feet. | Feet (CENTRO 6 Hose a eo eee 50.5 to 51 50.6 Wemphisseere sees 40 0 40.1 IIIS. So ceuesboode 51.0 51.0 Arkansas City....... 53.0 | 53.0 Greenillea ener 49.0 | 49.1 Wicksburciane ben. -| 520 51.8 New Orleans........ 21.0 20.4 to 20.7 On the Ouachita River, 37 and 45 feet were forecasted and 36.2 and 44.5 feet reached at Alexandria and Monroe, La., respectively. The floods of the last few days of May and the early days of June in the lower Missouri and the upper Missis- sippi were the greatest of any of which we have authentic record, except that of 1844. The stories of the ruin and desolation in the valley of the Kaw and at Kansas City are familiartoall. Dur- 289 ing the latter half of May persistent low barometric pressure over the eastern slope of the Rocky Mountains caused daily rainfalls of almost torrential char- acter over Kansas, the excess above the normal amount for the season averag- ing about seven inches. The same con- ditions prevailed to a lesser extent to the eastward into northwestern Mis- souri and Iowa, and all streams soon became raging torrents. At Kansas City the maximum stage was 35 feet, 2 feet below the high-water mark of 1844. The records for points within the State of Kansas have not yet been verified, but there are sufficient data at hand to warrant the statement that they were higher than ever before recorded. The first warnings of this flood were issued at Kansas City on May 26, and thereafter daily until the waters sub- sided. It was in connection with this flood that there occurred the single un- fortunate feature of the flood work of the year. Owing to the want of sufh- cient funds for the purpose, no flood service has been maintained on the Kansas River, although the Missouri River is well supplied. For this reason it was not possible to forecast exact stages after May 29. On May 30 tele- graph and telephone service were very uncertain, and on the 31st Kansas City was completely cut off from the west. On June 1 came the flood crest of 35 feet. The forecasts were from the ne- cessities of the case very general in character, and stated only that a ‘‘ seri- ous flood’’ was imminent, and would continue as long as the rains were fall- ing. East of Kansas City conditions were more favorable, and the forecasts were well verified, both as to time and stage. Warnings were first issued at Des Moines on the 25th of May, at Keokuk on the 28th, and at St Louis on the 30th. At this latter place warnings were issued on June 5 to prepare for a stage of 38 feet in about fourdays. On the fifth day that stage was exactly 290 reached, and the waters began to slowly recede. ‘This stage of 38 feet was 8 feet above the danger line, and within 2.6 feet of the great high-water mark of June 27, 1844. This flood, while, of course, much more destructive than that of 1844, did not by any means equal it in volume. In 1844 the lowlands were not occupied, there were no busy centers of industry at Armourdale, Argentine, and East St Louis, and consequently the damage done was relatively slight. The rain- fall in 1844, however, was decidedly greater than in May, 1903, and there were no levees along the river to hold the waters. Yet with all bottom lands overflowed, a stage of 37 feet was reached at Kansas City on June 20 and of 41.4 feet at St Louis on June 27. At the same time the Illinois River was from 10 to 15 miles wide from La Salle to its mouth, and from Hardin down united with the Mississippi to form one continuous river. The consequence of an equal amount of rain during the present year and equally well distributed cannot be estimated with any degree of exactness. Nevertheless it is reason- ably certain that several feet would have been added to the stage at St Louis, and that the entire city of East St Louis would have been totally sub- A SUGGESTED FIELD HE cabled reports tell of the continued activity of Mont Pelée in Martinique, of Colima in Mexico, and of Santa Maria in Gua- temala. For a period now of eighteen months there have been unceasing vol- canic disturbances in a belt extending east and west, from the west coast of Mexico to Martinique, and north and south, from central Mexico to Vene- zuela. Since January 1, 1902, this belt at some point or other along its length Tue Narionat GeocraPHic MaGaZzIne merged to a depth of at least 8 or 10 feet. The annual rise of the Columbia River is always a subject of interest to the people of the north Pacific coast. This rise depends almost entirely upon the melting of the winter snows in the mountains, and there are at times wide divergences of opinion as to the prob- able extent of the rise and its effects upon the Willamette River at Portland, Oregon. In March of the present year the official in charge of the Weather Bureau office at Portland issued a bul- letin on the subject, in which he stated that from the amount of snow then in the mountains a stage of 24 feet, or 9 feet above the danger line, would be reached at Portland about the middle of June. On June 13 the stage was 22.8 feet, with the Columbia still rising slowly. Against such cataclysms as those at Pacolet and Heppner, flood warnings cannot avail. They are caused by tor- rential downpours upon extremely pre- cipitous watersheds. Millions of tons of water are suddenly poured into a deep reservoir with but a single narrow avenue of escape. The results are then apparent, but they are beyond the proy- ince of human wisdom either to foresee or prevent. FOR EXPLORATION has been constantly in a state of violent disturbance. The first disturbance oc- curred in January, 1902, when an earth- quake destroyed Chilpancingo in Mex- ico, and caused the loss of thousands of lives. On April 18 Quesaltenango and other towns in Guatemala were likewise ruined and fearful destruction of life resulted. On May 8 occurred the erup- tions of Mont Pelée and La Souffriére, numbering 35,000 victims. In Novem- ber the Santa Maria volcano in Guate- A SuGGeEsTeD FIigLp For EXPLORATION mala erupted, and thousands of lives were destroyed. Early in 1903 Colima in Mexico erupted, and many more lives were lost. Since the eruption of Mont Pelée, on May 8, blasts even more ter- rific than the first fatal one have burst repeatedly from its mouth.* We know that all these phenomena are related to each other ina general way, but what that relation is we are unable to explain. The Royal Society of England in 1902 sent two geologists to Martinique and St Vincent to study conditions there; the French Academy of Sciences did likewise ; the National Geographic Society sent two eminent American geologists, Prof. I. C. Russell, head of the department of geology, Uni- versity of Michigan, and Robert T. Hill, of the U.S. Geological Survey, and one foreign-born geographer, C. E. Borch- grevink ; Harvard University and the National Geographic Society jointly sent Dr T. A. Jaggar, of the Depart- ment of Geology of Harvard Univer- sity ; the American Museum of Natural History sent one geologist, Dr EK. O. Hovey, who is still in the field, and Prof. Angelo Heilprin, of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, has made three separate trips to the same region. But each of these expeditions has observed and studied only one point in the region of volcanic disturbance, and that point on the extreme eastern end of the belt. Noone has gone to Colima or Santa Maria, on the western end, the ashes from whose craters are different from the ashes from Mont Pelée and Souffriére. The conclusions of all these expeditions deal with one locality, with one point of weakness only. What is needed is a careful examination of all the principal points of disturbance on * Consult ‘‘Mont Pelée and the Tragedy of Martinique,’’ by Angelo Heilprin, pages 257- 270. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott & Co. 1903. 291 the belt, Santa Maria in Guatemala, Colima in Mexico, etc., so that the phenomena at the various points on the belt may be carefully compared. The trouble with all past investiga- tions of volcanoes has been that the study has not been sufficiently complete and general. Krakatoa, Vesuvius, and Mauna Loa have each been examined and carefully watched by expert geolo- gists and special commissions, but these investigations have been handicapped by being limited to a small area of ac- tivity. An opportunity like the present for studying active volcanic conditions, not at one point only, but at several connecting points extending over a wide region, has never before been presented. A more comprehensive study of vol- canic action will throw light on the forces writhing beneath the earth’s crust. What is beneath the upper strata we do not know. By a system- atic study of such a region as the vol- canic belt of Central America great and invaluable information may be gained as to the origin and history of the earth. But a far greater discovery may result from such investigation ; it may be pos- sible to foretell when volcanic disturb- ances are to occur, and thus to prevent such a series of catastrophes as have horrified mankind during the last eigh- teen months. To carry out a careful and thorough study of this long volcanic belt would require probably less than $5,000, a mere trifle compared to the vast sums at present being expended to further exploration in the north and south polar regions. A wiser expenditure for scien- tific exploration could not be made, in view of our absolute ignorance today of the causes of volcanic action and the tremendous revelations that are possible from a comprehensive study of the extended region of present volcanic activity. INTERNATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC CONGRESS cieties in the United States, held Saturday, June 20, 1903, in the Ameri- can Geographical Society Building, 15 West Highty-first street, New York city, to arrange for the meeting of the Eighth International Geographic Con- gress, to be held in this country in 1y04, the organization of the Committee of Arrangements was perfected by the election of Prof. W J McGee, of the National Geographic Society, Wash- ington, D. C., chairman, and Dr J. H. McCormick, secretary. It was formally voted to hold the Congress in Wash- ington in September, 1904, adjourn- ing to St Louis, Missouri, to meet in connection with the International Congress of Arts and Science. In addition to the formal sessions of the Congress in Washington, it is planned T aconference of representatives i from the several Geographic So- to hold informal sessions or social meet- ings in other cities. After the final session in St Louis, a trip is planned to the City of Mexico, the Grand Canyon, Yosemite Valley, Yellowstone Park, and other points of interest to the mem- bers of the Congress. The following subcommittees were appointed: Pro- gram, MrC. C. Adams, of the American Geographical Society ; Exhibits, Mr Henry G. Bryant, of the Geographical Society of Philadelphia; Invitations, Prof. A. L. Rotch, of the Appalachian Mountain Club ; Transportation, Dr G. B. Shattuck, of the Geographic Society of Baltimore ; Finance, Messrs C. J. Bell, David T. Day, and Jno. Joy Edson. The appointment of other com- mittees was deferred till the next meet- ing of the Committee of Arrangements. A formal prospectus will be issued in a few days. GEOGRAPHIC NOTES GEOLOGICAL EXPLORATION IN EASTERN ASIA HINA, the land which so deeply interests us politically and com- mercially, has also its scientific interest. Geographically it is a region of great diversity of aspects—along the Hoang- ho and Yangtze having great flood plains, more extensive than those of the Mississippi ; along portions of its coast presenting bold promontories like the coast of the Pacific ; throughout the cen- tral region exhibiting mountain ranges which the rivers traverse in deep can- yons, and in its northwestern portion consisting of extensive plateaus and deserts, which extend to the heights of the Tibetan ranges. Geologically the rocks of China comprise representatives of every known geological period, and the record of the earth’s history appears to be as full and as interestingly ex- hibited in the Middle Kingdom as inthe United States. It is natural that geog- raphers and geologists should take a lively interest in exploration of any un- known country, but with reference to China their appetite has been whetted by the suggestions of explorers who have had opportunity to travel hastily, but rarely have been able to do more than glance at the problems which pre- sented themselves. The Carnegie Institution of Wash- ington, recognizing that China is a rich field of investigation, has made a grant for exploration in eastern Asia, and plans have been developed, based upon the results of extensive researches car- GeocraPHic Nores ried out by Baron von Richthofen thirty yearsago. ‘The plans are comprehensive in purpose, including the study of the successions of rocks—that is, stratig- raphy, the problems of structure in- volved in the mountains, and the history of mountain growth as expressed in the existing valleys and heights, and the paleontology of the various strata which may be encountered. The party will consist of Mr Bailey Willis, geologist in charge, and Mr Eliot Blackwelder, paleontologist. Mr Willis isa member of the National Geographic Society, and has been ac- credited its representative in China, with authority to make investigations on its behalf should opportunity occur. These gentlemen will leave this coun- try in July, and, proceeding by way of Europe, will confer with Baron Von Richthofen and other eminent European scientists. During the early part of Sep- tember they will travel from St Peters- burg to Peking by the Siberian Railway, and as soon as possible after their arrival in Peking will enter upon geological field work. The detail of operations during their sojourn in China depends upon conditions which can not now be exactly foreseen. It is expected that they will return to the United States in the summer of 1904. THE NORWEGIAN EXPEDITION TO THE MAGNETIC NORTH POLE BY ROALD AMUNDSEN HE following information regard- ing this interesting and impor- tant expedition is derived from Mr Amundsen’s article in the March issue of Terrestrial Magnetism : The leader, Amundsen, has taken part in the magnetic observations of the Gelgica South Polar Expedition, and so has already had some experience in magnetic work in polar regions. His ship, the G7oa, which has been especially built for Arctic exploration, is 70 feet AG) long, 20 feet broad, and has a tonnage of about 48. She is provided with a small petroleum motor, and makes about four knots an hour. She will carry 30,000 liters of petroleum stored in iron vessels to serve for heating, cooking, and to furnish the motive power. ‘The vessel will be provisioned for four or six years and carry a crew, with officers, of 8 men. Mr Amundsen’s instruments, which will serve for making both absolute and relative magnetic observations, were constructed and tested under the direc- tion of Professor Neumayer while di- rector of the ‘‘ Deutsche Seewarte.’’ His outfit also includes two sets of self- registering instruments. He proposes to start north during the early summer of this year, stopping at Godhavn, Greenland, for dogs. His first base station will probably be in the vicinity of North Somerset, in Leopold Harbor, from which he hopes to send news of his work in rg0q4 by means of whale hunters. There he pro- poses to make absolute magnetic obser- vations, and also operate his self-regis- tering instruments for a time. From this base station he likewise proposes to make sledge trips, on which magnetic observations will be made. In the sum- mer of 1905 he may locate his base sta- tion on King William Island, and again set up his self-registering instruments. The following summer (1906) he will attempt to locate his base station at Herschel Island, and open communica- tions with Fort McPherson, of the Hud- son Bay Company. His return trip will be made by way of Bering Strait, and he proposes to stop at Sitka and make his final observations there at the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey magnetic observatory for the determination of in- strumental constants. Mr Amundsen thus contemplates making a complete and systematic mag- netic survey of the region about the 294 Tue Nationa, GrocraPpHic MaGaZINE ] THE TETRAHEDRAL KITE HE accompanying illus- tration shows one of Dr Alexander Graham Bell’s tetrahedral kites in the air. It was received after the June number of the Nationa GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE went to press. The kite is the sixty-four-celled tetrahe- dral kite shown as D in figure 16, page 227 of the June number. The illustration shows the kite flying at the proper angle. The photo- graph was taken at Colonial Beach, Virginia, May 26, 1903, by Mr A. W. McCurdy. PORTO RICO AND THE UNITED STATES ORTO RICO is now fur- nishing a market of a million dollars a month to the producers and merchants of the United States, and sup- plying nearly a million dol- Copyright, 1903. by A. W. McCurdy Tetrahedral Kite in the Air magnetic pole, from which not only an accurate location of the magnetic pole may result, but other most important results will follow. The determination of thenorth magnetic pole by CaptainJames Clark Ross, in June, 1831, rested on a single determination. Owing to local disturbances, which may be expected in that region, there is no telling how close his determination was to the actual mag- netic pole. His position was on Boothia Felix, in north latitude 70° 05’ 17” and west longitude 96° 45’ 48”. It is generally believed that the mag- netic pole is subject to a fluctuation in its position, and it is hoped that Amund- sen’s work will throw some light upon the rate and direction of motion. lars’ worth each month of tropical products required by the United States. These figures of commerce between Porto Ricoand the United States are in marked contrast with those of earlier years. In the fiscal year 1808, whichimmediately preceded the transfer of Porto Rico to the United States, the exports from the United States to that island were $1,505,946. In the next year they were $2,685,848; in Ig00, $4,640,449; in 1901, $6,965,408; in 1902, $10,882,653, and in the year 1903 will be about $12,000,000. Thus the total shipments from the United States to Porto Rico for 1903 will be eight times as great as those of 1898, and six times as great as those of 1897. On the other hand, shipments from Porto Rico to the United States have grown from $2,414, 356, in 1898, to $8,378,766, in 1902, and GerocrRAPHIC Nores probably nearly or quite $12,000,000 in 1903, or about five times as much in 1903 as in 1898. The United States is sending to the island cotton fabrics, iron and steel wares, and great quantities of rice, pro- visions, and breadstuffs; Porto Rico ships in return sugar, tobacco, coffee, and fruits. The increased value during the last five years of Porto Rico from a commer- cial point of view is admirably shown by a statement recently issued by the Bureau of the Department of Commerce and Labor. SUMMER SCHOOL OF GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY AT CORNELL UNIVERSIT Y HE summer school which is to be conducted by Cornell University July 6 to August 15, 1903, for students of geology and geography offers an at- tractive and exceedingly varied series of courses. The location of the school is itself a lesson in all that is beautiful and instructive. The campus of Cornell University is situated on a hillside, over- looking a large lake in one direction, and broad, beautifully sloping valleys in the other, and bounded by narrow gorges with many falls, cascades, and rapids. The campus is the center of a great va- riety of beautiful, interesting, and in- structive geographicfeatures. The ex- cursions of most of the field courses are for the study of these features By these excursions the student is taught method and fact upon a broad range of geologic and physiographic phe- nomena. The university library is fully sup- plied with books and magazines on geo- logic and geographic subjects, and these are accessible to the students in the school. ‘The laboratories are equipped with many models, maps, photographs, and specimens illustrating phases of ge- ology, physiography, and geography. There is, furthermore, a collection of 295 fully 5,000 lantern slides for use in the lecture courses. The lecture courses have been planned with great care and men selected to give them who are recognized authorities in the subjects which they are to teach. The courses and lecturers are as follows: Physical Geography of the Lands; Prof. R. S. Tarr (Professor of Dynamic Geology and Physical Geography, Cor- nell University). Laboratory Course in Physical Geog- raphy; Assistant Principal Carney (As- sistant Principal, Ithaca High School) and Mr Mills (Assistant in Physical Geography, Cornell University). Field Course in Physical Geography; Professor Tarr, Mr Whitbeck, and Mr Mills. Dynamical Geology; Prof. A. P. Brigham (Professor of Geology and Natural History, Colgate University, Hamilton, N. Y.). Laboratory Course in Geology; Mr Matson (Assistant in Geology, Cornell University). Field Course in Geology; Professor Brigham, Assistant Principal Carney, Mr Matson, and Mr Mills. Geography of the United States; Pro- fessor Brigham. Geography of Europe; Professor Tarr. Home Geography; Prof. C. A. Mc- Murry (Director of Practice Depart- ment, Northern Illinois Normal School, DeKalb, I1l.). Type Studies in Geography for Gram- mar Grades; Professor McMurry. Commercial Geography; Principal Emerson (Principal Cobbet School, Lynn, Mass. ). Laboratory and Field Work in Com- mercial Geography; Principal Emerson. Class-room Problems in Geography; MrR. H. Whitbeck (Supervisor in New Jersey State Normal School, Trenton, INS Jado Physical Geography for Grades; Mr Whitbeck. Round-table Conference, for consid- 296 eration of topics of geographic interest; all the teachers and such students as desire to attend. Advanced Field and Laboratory Course in Dynamic Geology and Phys- ical Geography ; Professors Tarr and Brigham, with assistants. The regular summer session also in- cludes courses in Education, History, Economics, Botany, Zoology, and other subjects which have a bearing on geo- graphic work. The Summer School has also planned a series of entertaining and instructive excursions in the vicinity of Ithaca; among them excursions to Lake Onta- rio, to Niagara Falls, Wilkes Barre and Hazleton, and Watkins Glen. THE SWEDISH SOUTH POLAR EXPEDITION ON. AUGUSTUS E. INGRAM, Deputy Consul General of the United States at Paris, under date of May 29, sends to the National GrEOo- GRAPHIC MAGAZINE the following note of an expedition to be sent out by France in July to rescue the Swedish South Polar Expedition : When Dr Otto Nordenskjold set out from Sweden, over a year ago, witha party of thirty-six persons on an expe- dition for the South Pole, his last words were: ‘‘If you are without news of me by April 30, 1903, come to my rescue, for we shall all be in great danger.”’ That time has come, and no news has been received of Dr Nordenskjold. In Sweden a telief expedition is being or- ganized, but it cannot start until the end of August. Since this may be too late, and as it is thought that Dr Nor- denskjold’s expedition is now in the vicinity of Cape Seymour, which is French soil, the national pride of France has been stirred to be the first to rescue these brave but unfortunate men. A vessel has already been constructed in France on the lines of the immortal Tue Nationa, GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE Fram and has been named Le Francais. Dr Jean Charcot,* well known in French scientific circles, is to command the ex- pedition, and he will be accompanied by other scientists and experienced naval officials. The sum of 150,000 francs is, however, necessary to complete the equipment, and a leading Parisian jour- nal, Le Matin, has opened its columns for a subscription list. All classes of people are responding liberally, and it is probable that the French Govern- ment, in addition to aid extended by its naval and scientific officials, will also make a contribution of money. The expedition is expected to leave Havre on the 15th of July, and will without loss of time attempt the work of rescue. When this has been accom- plished, Ze Fvangais will, like the fram, proceed south until it is inclosed in the moving field of ice. At the op- portune time a dash across the ice for the South Pole will be made. This expedition is of especial interest, as it is now nearly three-quarters of a century since France sent an expedition to the South Pole, at which time Dumont d’ Urville made considerable discoveries. Since the expected visit to Lisbon of His Majesty Don Alfonso XIII, King of Spain, will not take place next month, the exposition of Portuguese cartog- raphy, organized by the Geographical Society of Lisbon, under the high pro- tection of His Majesty King Don Carlos I, which was to coincide with that visit, has been postponed until next autumn. German South Polar Expedition.—The Gauss, the steamer of the German South Polar Expedition, has been reported off the east coast of South Africa. Few details of the work of the party have as *Dr Charcot had originally intended (as stated in this Magazine on page 217, May, 1903) to use his vessel for Arctic rather than South Polar exploration. GerocraPHic Nores yet been received, but it would appear that, owing to the ice, they failed to get farther south than 66° 2’, and that the expedition was thus practically a failure. No expense had been spared to make the expedition a success. (It cost $400,000.) The plans had been formed after years of deliberation with the most competent men in Europe. The leader, Captain Drygalski, had proven his ability by previous work in Greenland. Bad luck alone can ex- plain the failure of the expedition and the bitter disappointment of the Ger- man nation. Mr W. J. Peters, the representative of the National Geographic Society on the Ziegler North Polar Expedition, was presented on his departure with the Society's flag. The flag of the National Geographic Society is of three colors— blue, brown, and green—representing respectively the air, the land, and the water. The Swedish Government has made a grant of $20,000 to Dr Sven Hedin to enable him to publish the results of his recent explorations in Central Asia. The work will consist of a series of vol- umes to be completed within three years. There will be an English edition. Prof. William H. Brewer, of Yale Uni- versity, has resigned the presidency of the Arctic Club. He has been presi- dent of the Arctic Club since it was founded, eight years ago, and to his leadership is due much of the success of the organization. Mr Robert T. Hill, of the U. S. Geologi- cal Survey, who visited Martinique as one of the representatives of the Na- tional Geographic Society, and whose preliminary reports upon the St Pierre disaster have been published in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE, the Century, and Collier's Weekly, is engaged upon a careful study of the a9) 7) scientific aspects of the eruptions, which will be presented in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE during 1903. He is also completing a monograph on the Windward islands for Prof. Alexan- der Agassiz, to be published by the Museum of Comparative Zoology of Harvard University. This work will be the result of several years of careful study of the islands and will thoroughly discuss the details of their geological structure and their bearing upon the alleged Windward bridge and the myths of Atlantis. Mr Hill is also engaged on a comprehensive geographical work upon the Republic of Mexico. From this country, where he has been gather- ing notes for the past fifteen years, he has just returned, after a most interest- ing mule-back trip across the southern end of the Sierra Madre between Mexico City and Acapulco. Francis H. Herrick is the author of a recent report issued by the U. S. Fish Commission entitled ‘‘The Reproduc- tive Period in the Lobster.’’ Dr Herrick concludes from his experiments that the spawning periods of the female are two years apart. The Royal Geographical Society is planning to send south the coming fall an auxiliary vessel to bring back the British South Polar Expedition. Ac- cording to report, the Discovery has been frozen in, and is separated from open water by six miles of ice, which is too great a distance to open with a channel. The British members of the Alaskan Boundary Commission are Lord Alver- stone, Chief Justice of England; Sir Louis Jette, Lieutenant Governor of Quebec, and Justice Armour, of the Supreme Court of Canada. An attempt to ascend Mount McKinley is being made this summer by Dr Fred- erick A. Cook and Mr Robert Dunn. GEOGRAPHIC A Teacher’s Manual of Geography. By Charles McMurry, Ph. D.; pp. 108. New York: The Macmillan Co. 1902. $0.40 This book is designed to accompany Tarr and McMurry’s admirable series of geographies. To the teacher of geog- raphy this little volume will be of much practical and suggestive assistance. The Alaska Frontier. By Thomas Wil- ling Balch. With28maps. Pp. 198, 7x 11inches. Philadelphia: Allen, Lane & Scott. 1903. $2.00. Mr Balch presents in this volume the results of studies he has been making for several years on the subject of the Alaska Canadian boundary. He has not only consulted the maps of the State Department, but also made a special in- vestigation in the archives at St Peters- burg, Berlin, Paris, London, Edinburgh, and other cities. His researches have enabled him to publish a notable work, containing new facts of considerable im- portance. The basis of Mr Balch’s argument is a series of 28 maps, the earliest being Vancouver’s chart of 1799. These maps are copies of maps published by the Russian, English, and Canadian govern- ments. ‘They all show the boundary ex- actly as claimed by the United States and agreed to by Great Britain and Canada alike for three-fourths of a century. One of the most notable of these is British Admiralty Chart No. 787, which was first issued in 1877. Eighteen re- vised editions of this chart have since been issued, the latest being in r1gor, three years after the Canadian claim was put forward; but each edition shows the boundary exactly as given in the United States maps. Mr. Balch is always careful to give references to authorities referred to, a fact that is specially desirable in works LITERATURE of this nature. The volume is dedi- cated ‘‘to the memory of William H. Seward and Charles Sumner, to whom the United States owes Alaska.’ Unknown Mexico, By Carl Lumholtz, M. A. Two volumes, 8vo, pp. i-XXXVi, I-530, i-xvi, 1-496, with 15 colored plates, two large maps, and many other illustrations. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. 1902. As indicated by a full sub-title, this is a record of five years’ exploration among the tribes of the western Sierra Madre; in the Tierra Caliente of Tepic and Jalisco, and among the Tarascos of Michoacan. It supplements a num- ber of more technical publications, in- cluding Dr Lumholtz’s splendid memoir “Symbolism of the Huichol Indians,’’ issued by the American Museum of Natural History in t900. The expedi- tions were conducted and the results prepared for publication under the au- spices of various institutions and indi- viduals, among whom the author espe- cially credits the American Geographical Society, the American Museum of Nat- ural History, Mr and Mrs Morris K. Jesup, Mr Andrew Carnegie, and Mrs Elizabeth Hobson. Starting with a large train in southern Arizona, Dr Lumholtz entered Sonora, and then crossed the Sierra Madre into Chihua- hua; gradually the party was divided and disbanded as he worked southward along the eastern slopes of the Sierra until he was practically alone in the Tarahumare, Tubari, and Tepehuane countries, and quite without Caucasian companions inthe Huichol, Cora, Tipe- cano, and ‘Tarasco districts. Travel- ing usually by easy stages and mak- ing long stays in many of the native settlements, he enjoyed excellent oppor- tunities for study of the habits and custems of surviving tribes, as well as GEOGRAPHIC for archeologic research. Considerable collections were made of both prehistoric and modern material; most of these were sent to the American Museum of Natural History. In the northern sierra numerous habitations, both ancient and modern, were found in natural or slightly. worked niches in the stupendous cliffs and barrancas; these are described as cave-dwellings, an unfortunate desig- nation (since it tends to perpetuate the groundless notion that primordial human homes were in caves) growing out of the fact that our ordinary speech does not distinguish subterranean caverns from the open clefts or niches sometimes called rock-houses—a term too awkward for common use. In the Tarasco coun- try imposing yacatas, or structures of stone or earth sometimes containing or- nate sculptures or fictile ware, were dis- covered and some of them were ex- plored, these ruins forming a connecting link between the simpler antiquities of southwestern United States and the elab- orate monuments of southern Mexico, Yucatan, and Peru. Still more produc- tive were the researches in the interme- diate region, since here certain of the tribesmen were found to retain in excep- tional degree their aboriginal arts and industries, their native speech, their primitive faiths, and many of the social regulations of their ancestors; and Dr Lumholtz succeeded in gaining the con- fidence of the Tarahumare, Tepehuan, and Huichol tribesmen so completely as to permit him to record their primitive characteristics with unexampled full- ness. ‘The ceremonial use of tobacco; the symbolism of the primitive music and dance and.of the attendant costumes; the esoteric purpose of feasting; the devotional use of intoxicants; primitive marital regulations and mortuary ob- servances; the emblematic decoration of fabrics and wares—these are but exam- ples of the subjects apparently kept in the mind of the author throughout, and certainly elucidated with remarkable . LITERATURE AQ’ clearness in his chapters. And, so far as practicable, the points are illustrated and the observations established by pho- tographs made on the ground or by ob- jects collected and preserved in a great museum. Ina word, the two volumes form a storehouse of facts invaluable to the working anthropologist. Through- out the record breathes a sympathy with primitive men and a depth of apprecia- tion of their sentiments and ideas seldom seen in scientific treatises, so that it pre- sents one of the clearest pictures of prim- itive life thus far drawn. ‘The work is abundantly illustrated, largely by photo- mechanical reproductions, partly by engravings and lithographs bearing inherent evidence of fidelity; and the beauty of the book-making is no less striking than the excellence of the con- tents. W J M. By Ralph S. With Pp. Complete Geography. Tarr and Frank M. McMurry. many maps and illustrations. X1+478+X, 6%x8¥% inches. New York. ‘The Macmillan Co. 1902. The plan of this text book is excellent and has been admirably carried out. Only three chapters precede the inten- sive treatment of the United States. The first is a physiographic history of the continent, showing how its principal mountain ranges and valleys came into existence; how its coal beds were formed ; what were the effects of the great ice age ; and what have been the more recent changes in the coast line, with their results. The second chapter describes the plants, animals and peoples of North America, and the third ex- plains latitude and longitude. ‘Then follow seven chapters on the United States, each dealing with one group of states. The rest of North America is then described. By this arrangement the more difficult subjects of General Geography, seasons, winds and rain, ocean movements and distribution of 300 temperature, forming Part II of the volume, are deferred until the pupil is better prepared to understand them. Part III deals with South America, Part IV with Europe, and Part V with Asia, Africa, Australia, and Island Groups. ‘The maps and illustrations, of which there are 500, are well chosen and are very clearly and beautifully reproduced. Through the Heart of Patagonia. By H. Hesketh Prichard, F. R. G.S., F. Z. S., ete. Large 8vo, pp. i-xvi, 1-346, with 4o plates and 3 maps. New York: D. Appleton & Co. 1902. In 1897 Dr F. P. Moreno stumbled on a piece of skin containing bony tuber- cles, which had been found with human remains ina Patagonian cave; the char- acter of the integument and the associa- tions suggested that it was from a My- lodon (or Giant Ground Sloth) of Ter- tiary facies perhaps still surviving, and Dr F. Ameghino used it as the type of a new genus and species, MVeomylodon fistai. A portion of the skin was taken by Dr Otto Nordenskjold; another piece passed into the hands of Prof. E. Ray Lancaster, Director of the British Mu- seum of Natural History, and Dr A. Smith Woodward, who made a critical study, asdid also Dr S. Roth, who identi- fied it with a Pampean genus related to Mylodon and renamed it Gryfotherium fistai. The find, in associations indi- cating that the animal was stabled in the cave and fed by early man, together with attendant rumors that it had been seen alive, naturally attracted much at- tention. Among those interested was Mr C. Arthur Pearson, of London, who financed an expedition in charge of Mr Prichard to search for further traces of the animal. This expedition failed of its primary purpose, since neither re- mains nor living specimens of Grypothe- rium were found ; yet it was successful in practically demonstrating that the Tue NatrionaL GrocrapHic MAGAZINE creature no longer lives in its former range, and also in extending explora- tion of the southern Andean region. Among the results of permanent value may be noted surveys about the eastern portion of Lake Buenos Aires; explora- tions and surveys about Lake Argen- tino, including the discovery of Lake Pearson ; the finding of a new puma. (felis concolor pearson); various notes. on the habitat and habits of Patagonian animals; a study of ‘‘ The first attitude: of wild animals toward man;’’ and use- ful ethnologic observations, chiefly on the Tehuelche tribe. The sumptuous. report details these results, and also: forms an interesting record of travel and adventure, satisfactorily illustrated by reproductions of the author’s photo- graphs, as well as by more fanciful sketches in color and tint; while a full Appendix contains reprints of the prin— cipal papers on Grypotherium, together with a note by the author on the native legends, a description of the new puma by Oldfield Thomas, and a list of plants,,. with their localities. A suggestive chapter on the future of Patagonia. touches on the resources of this portion of the great country, Argentina, some- times of late fitly styled the United States of South America. The book is. handsome, despite the somewhat infe- rior typography and labowred orthogra- phy of the English press. W J M. Three Notable Works on Alaska, the results of extended explorations in the territory in 1901, have been published by the Survey: ‘‘ Preliminary Report on the Ketchikan Mining District,’’ by Alfred H. Brooks, Ketchikan; ‘‘ Recon- naissance from Fort Hamlin to Kotze- bue Sound,”’ by way of Dall, Kanuti, Allen, and Kowak rivers, by Walter C. Mendenhall; ‘‘Reconnaissance of North- western Portion of Seward Peninsula,’” by Arthur J. Collier. Office Hours: 8.30 A. M. to 5 P. M. Telephone, Main 471 NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY OFFICES Rooms 107, 108 Corcoran Building Fifteenth and F Sts. N. W., Washington, D. C. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL President W J McGEE ° ° Vice-President JOHN JOY EDSON nnn omemlireasuter PXe JolBINIDe 6 c - Secretary ELIZA R. SCIDMORE ° - Foreign Secretary BOARD OF MANAGERS 3904-1903 1902-1904 1903-1905 MARCUS BAKER A. GRAHAM BELL CHARLES J. BELL HENRY F. BLOUNT. DAVID T. DAY GEORGE DAVIDSON F. V. COVILLE A. W. GREELY WM. M. DAVIS D. C. GILMAN ANGELO HEILPRIN JOHN JOY EDSON S. H. KAUFFMANN RUSSELL HINMAN G. K. GILBERT WILLIS L. MOORE W J McGEE A. J. HENRY ISRAEL C. RUSSELL GIFFORD PINCHOT O. P. AUSTIN R. D. SALISBURY O. H. TITTMANN C. HART MERRIAM The National Geographic Magazine is sent free of charge to all members of the National Geographic Society Recommendation for Membership in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY The following form is enclosed for use in the nomination of persons for membership Please detach and fill in blanks and send to the Secretary Dvurs: Annual membership, $2; Life membership, $50. If check be enclosed, please make it payable to order of the National Geographic Society, and, if at a distance from’ Washington, remit by New York draft or post-office money-order. To the Secretary, National Geographic Society, Washington, D. C.: Please propose TOUTES parecer bape ne aS IR ee a aeRO CR Oe ED ORES for membership in the Society. THE BO Wigs Ae ee NEWS An Illustrated Magazine of Travel and Education MORE THAN 100 PAGES MONTHLY Its scope and character are indicated by the following titles of articles that have appeared in recent issues: Picturesque Venezuela—Illus. . . Frederick A. Ober Haunts of Eben Holden—Illus. . . Del B. Salmon A Journey Among the Stars—lIllus. Frank W. Mack In the Great North Woods—Poem . Eben E. Rexford Beautiful Porto Rico—Illus. . Hezekiah Butterworth In Rip Van Winkle’s Land—Poem . Minna Irving Nature’s Chronometer—Illus. . . H. M. Albaugh Van Arsdale, The Platitudinarian—Ill. Charles B. Loomis The Three Oregons—Illus. = Alfred Holman Ancient Prophecies Fulfilled—Illus. George H. Daniels The Stories the Totems Tell—Illus. Luther L. Holden A Little Country Cousin—Illus. . . Kathleen L. Greig The Mazamas—Illus. . . . Will G. Steel When Mother Goes Aw: ay—Poem - Joe Cone A Little Bit of Holland—Illus. . . Charles B. Wells The Romance of Reality—Illus. .°. Jane W. Guthrie Samoa and Tutuila—I!Ius. . . . . Michael White Under Mexican Skies—Illus. . . . Marin B. Fenwick Niagara in Winter—Illus. . . . . Orrin E. Dunlap Little Histories—Illus. Old Fort Putnam . . . Wm. J. Lampton The Confederate White House Herbert Brooks The Alamo. . . . . . John K. LeBaron SINGLE COPIES 5 CENTS, or 50 CENTS A YEAR Can be had of newsdealers, or by addressing GEORGE H. DANIELS, Publisher Room No. 133, 7 East 42d St., New York “Better than going abroad, and the best preparation for a trip abroad.” PORTLAND SUMMER SCHOOL PORTLAND, MAINE. Portland Summer School JULY 13 TO AUGUST 21 2 Successor to the famous Sauveur Summer School, founded in 1875 at Amherst College. Courses in modern and ancient lan- guages, culture of the speaking voice, instrumental and vocal music. For illustrated circular address : ARNOLD WERNER-SPANHOOFD Central High School, - Washington, D.C. WE make a Specialty of HIGH GRADE WORK Jer ScrenTiFic ~2 TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS ss GRAVES PHILADELPHIA PLATES TO PRINT UN ONE OR MORE CoLors The fllanhattan Press-Clipping Bureau ARTHUR CASSOT, FProprietor NEW YORK (Knickerbocker Building) LONDON COR. FIFTH AVENUE AND 14TH STREET, NEW YORK Will supply you with all personal reference and clippings on any subject from all the papers - and periodicals published here and abroad. Our large staff of readers can gather for you more valuable material on any current subject than you can get in a lifetime. TERMS: 100 clippings .. $ 5.00 250 clippings . . . $ 12.00 500 clippings . . . $22.00 1,000 clippings . . . $35.00 HENRY ROMEIKE’S BUREAU OF PRESS CUTTINGS 33 Union Square, New York Reads every paper of importance published in the United States, and through its European agencies in London, Paris, Berlin and Vienna every paper of importance published in Europe and the British ~ Colonies. One subscription on any given subject will bring notices from the United States, and if desired also from the European papers, WRITE FOR TERMS BACK VOLUMES OF THE National Geographic Magazine The NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE has on hand: a few copies of complete back volumes which may be obtained at the following prices: ; Vol. 3, 1891 ; : $5.10 | Vol... 9, 1898. ; $2.75 Mon eSs 1988 458 Vol, WL TOO eee 5 BGO Vol. 6, 1894-5. = 4.20. Vol. 7, 1806. . ae Voli noon a. - 2.50 Vol. 8, 1897 eee eZ. 00Ul VOlonI 3,” 1002 Fp nce ek 2p The NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE will pay the following pfices for copies of certain back numbers : Vol. 1, 1889, No. 1, $1.00; No, 2, $1.00 Vol. 2, 1890, No. 2, $1.00 Vol. 4, 1892, No. 1, $0.50; No. 2, $1.50; No. 3, _- 0.50; No. 4, $0.50; No. 5, $1.00; No. 6, $1.00 Vol: 10, 1899, No. 6, $0.50; Index, $o.59 Vol. 13, 1902, No. 1, $0.30 "CORCORAN BUILDING, WASHINGTON, D.C. SPECIAL MAPS. PUBLISHED BY THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY _ ee Map of the Philippines 6 tet 2 inches x 3 feet). Prepared under the direction of the War fie ecg - Map of South Africa (46x33 inches). ,. Prepared under the direction of the War Deparshent.. Map of Northeastern China (36x 28 inches). aria aihe Prepared “under the direction of the War Department, — i Map of the Chinese Empire, Janets: and the Rssan-Manchutian Rail. way. ({1x7% inches). Map of Alaska’ (28 x 24 inches). Prepared under the direction = the U, Ss. Geologieal Rite “A Series of Twelve Maps on the Alaskan Boundary Ris eg ie Prepared under the direction of Hon, John W. Foster, pepe. f State. Chart, of the World on Mercator’s. Projection. (48x 27 aise Prepared under the direction of the Eee Caer - 3: Map of Cuba (18x7%¢ inches). ae Prepared under: the direction ie Robert ae ‘Hill RS ba 2 A Series of Twenty-five Full-page Charts, showing storm ‘tra ’ methods of weather forecasting. Prepared under the direction of Dr. Willis i Moore, Chief Uv. s Weather Bureau. By Mail for sen tive erate Each. Brownie, Hees. “Bull’s s-eye, “Bullet, Sieree ‘Panorabia: sat eae Pocke! film Kodaks ; obs Machines ; = Waeee ae enn Frame Brownie Kodaks, No, 1 Flexo Kodaks,.No. 2 « aaiaes Bull's-eye Kodaks, No. 2; <> Folding Pocket Kodaks Century Petite Cameras : 12 : Century Cameras, model 20; 4x5 11.25 | 0} Brownie ie Printing: Outs i : Century Cameras, model 20; 4x5 14.40. _ Hypo, ras ey aac NEW YORK = WASHINGTON oe “NATIONAD GEOGRAPHIC AUGUST, 1903 CONTENTS THE UNITED STATES: HER INDUSTRIES. BY O. P. AUSTIN, CHIEF OF THE BUREAU OF STATISTICS. ILLUSTRATED , ww ‘THE INTRODUCTION OF THE MANGO. ILLUSTRATED ww BO RAINFALL AND THE LEVEL OF LAKE ERIE. BY E, L. TE EE CSET TS ee Og ao © © THE RAILROADS AND FORESTRY 3 wr - THE PEARY ARCTIC CLUB MAP Published by the National Geographic Society, Corcoran Building, Washington, D. C. ~ $2.50 a Year a5 Cents a Number Entered at the Post-office in Washington, D. C,,; as Second-class Mail Matter. « “HART ‘MERRIAM Chief of the Biological Survey, oe _ Department of Aprivulitre BLIZA RUHAMAH SCIDMORE - Author of Jana, the Garden ; i eae! ” et tc. | MARCUS BAKER i | Carnegie fence WILLIS L. MOORE ~ Chief of the: Weather Bureau, Ui; Teach oe Agriculture Wor. XIV, No, 8 WASHINGTON AUGUST, 1903 THE UNITED STATES: HER INDUSTRIES* By O. P. Austin, CHIEF OF BUREAU OF STATISTICS, DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE AND LABOR HE progress of the United States i in its material industries has been the surprise of the whole world, the pride of her affectionate citi- zens. From a handful of five million people at the beginning of the last cen- tury she has grown to eighty millions, and from the smallest of beginnings she has reached the head of the list in agri- culture, in mining, in manufacturing, in currency, and in wealth. ‘The purpose of this series of lectures is to present to you a picture of the growth of our common country, a pict- ure of acentury of unparalleled develop- ment—a development before which the world stands in amazement. No such record is known to history; no such de- velopment has occurred within so short a period; no such height has been at- tained in invention, in science, and in their application to the affairs of daily life, the life of the masses. While all nations have shared, in a greater or less degree, in the progress and prosperity of the century, the United States has enjoyed an especially large share of both, and made a record of which her citizens may well be preud. To the first lecture of this series was assigned the story of the great natural resources and advantages of the coun- try, and to the second the history of the development of our great agricultural resources. Both of these have been presented. } To me has been assigned the subject of the industrial wealth of the nation, the development of the conditions which have made this the greatest manufact- uring as well as the greatest producing nation. And no subject could be more wel- come, more inspiring to the student of the development of our country and its material resources. To trace the growth of our manufacturing interests from a total of 200 million dollars in 1810 to 13,000 millions in 1900, and the advance of the United States from the bottom of *An address before the National Geographic Society, February 25, 1903. + ‘‘The United States—Lands and Waters,’’ ““The United States—The Soil and Its Products,’’ Na‘rronal, GEO- MAGAZINE, May, 1903; GRAPHIC MAGAZINE, July, 1903. Cyrus C. Adams, NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC 302 the list of great manufacturing nations to the very head of that list, is a task which fully compensates the student, in a renewed admiration for the history of our people and a renewed faith in their future. The first attempt at a census of manu- factures in the United States was in 1810, when the total value was found to be, in round terms, $200,000,000. The census figures of manufactures in 1820 and 1830 were incomplete, but those of 1840 were about a half billion dollars ; those of 1850, about one bil- lion ; 1860, nearly two billions; 1870, over four billions ; 1880, about 5% bil- lions; 1890, more than g billions, and 1900, 13 billions. The actual increase from decade to decade, still speaking in round terms, was: from 1850 to 1860, nearly one billion dollars; 1860 to 1870, over two billions ; 1870 to 1880, one bil- lion; 1880 to 1890, four billions, and 1890 to 1900, 3% billions. In round terms, it may be said that the growth in the first half of the century was one billion, and in the second half 12 bil- lions of dollars. The slow growth in the first half of the century is due in part to the fact that a large share of the manufacturing was still performed in the household. While the factory system of manufact- ure began to take the place of that of the household in England in the closing years of the 18th century, especially as related to textiles, it did not obtain a foothold in the United States until dur- ing the period of the embargo and the War of 1812, and it was not until about 1840 that it became general ; and as late as the middle of the century a consid- erable share of the manufacturing was still carried on in the family or in the small shop by the aid of the family and apprentices, as distinguished from the factory with paid employés and the application of power. Hence it is not surprising that the census of 1850 showed manufactures amounting to but THe Nationa, GeocraepHic MAGAZINE one billion dollars’ value, while the chief cause for astonishment is the won- derful growth which has occurred since that time—a growth from one billion dollarsin 1850 to 13 billions in rgoo. I shall therefore confine my analysis of the growth of manufactures and its causes chiefly to the last half of the century, and in this I rely largely upon some charts and diagrams, by the use of which the eye may aid the mind in readily comparing the relative figures which mark the stages of growth. Necessarily the figures of manufactures as a whole can only be stated at decen- nial periods, for it is only by the na- tional census that this great task of measuring the operations of the national workshop is undertaken, and I am proud to say that the United States takes this measurement much more effectively and more in detail than any other nation of the world. Before beginning this analysis, I will say in general terms that the census figures show that the number of manu- facturing establishments has grown from 123,025 in 1850 to 512,339, or four times as many in 1900; the sums paid insalaries and wages, from $236,755,464 to $2,732,821,528, or 12 times as much as in 1850, and the value of the manu- factures from $1,019,106,616 to $13,- 039,279,566, or 13 times as much as in 1850. It is proper to add that the figures of the total value of manufactures are merely an aggregation of the values re- ported by all manufacturers, and as the products reported by one manufacturer often become the materials for use by others, the figures of the grand total are " to that extent duplications. For ex- ample, the leather reported as a manu- facture by the tanner becomes the ma- terial used by the manufacturer of boots and shoes, and is asecond time reported by him in stating the value of the manu- factures turned out. The yarn pro- duced by one manufacturer becomes Tue UNITED STATEs: the manufacturing material for the maker of cloth, and the cloth becomes the material used by the manufacturer of clothing, the value of the yarn be- ing thus reported three times, and that of the cloth twice, in the final statement of the grand total of manufactures pro- duced. But as this custom has been followed in each census it does not ma- terially affect the value of the figures for comparative purposes in showing the growth of the manufacturing indus- try. On the other hand, the fact that valuesof manufactures VALUE have greatly fallen since the earlier dates considered indi- cates that the actual increase in quantity produced is even greater than that indicated by the figures, which necessarily deal with values only. : With this basis of necessary statistical data I shall try to present the remaining facts and analyses in a manner in which the growth may be measured with the eye as well as the ear, and conclusions thus more readily reached as to the growth and cause of this growth, in which we all feel such a just pride. No. 1.—VALUE OF MANUFAC- TURES OF THE UNITED STATES, 1810 TO tg00 198 The length of the lines here ® presented indicates the relative iD value of the manufactures of the United States in 1810 and in each census year, beginning with 1840. It will be observed that the first great increase was in the decade 1860-1870; the second, from 1880 to 1890. It is well known that the civil war conditions, the exceptional home de- mand, and the difficulties of importation greatly stimulated manufacturing dur- ing the period 1860-1870, and the fact that the production of 1870 was stated Her INnpDustTRIES HO9 in an inflated currency also probably ac- counts in some degree for the high figure of that year, and also for the fact that the apparent increase in the next decade was small. ‘The second great increase, from 1880 to 1890, was due to the open- ing of the interior by railways, by which the natural products were easily assembled for manufacture, the great reduction in cost of transportation, the enormous investments of capital in man- ufacturing, and the application of labor- OF MANUFACTURES IN U.S. 1810%1900 IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS 13014 9372 5369 4232 : 1885 1019 | 483 | 140 ‘50 ‘60 ‘70 ‘80 ‘90 1900 INCREASE 1850-1900 II76 / INCREASE IN POPULATION 2307, DIAGRAM NO. I saving machinery to much which was formerly performed by hand. In the decade from 1890 to 1900 came the enor- mous expansion in our exports of man- ufactures, from 151 millions in 1890 to 433 millions in 1900, and the organiza- tion of great industrial combinations by which cost of manufacturing and 304 INCREASE IN VALUE OF MANUFACTURES 1810 te B40 %4 IN EACH DECADE FROM I8'+0=°1300 IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS 3641 24-37 104-7 866 254 ae | 1850 1860 1670 1860 1890 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1500 DIAGRAM NO. 2 VALUE OF MANUFACTURES PER CAPITA \8I0- 1900 IN DOLLARS (+9.66 109-78 107.59 59.97 43.94 é : 3l 27.43 | | 1810 1840 ’50 60 ‘10 80 =6’90 INCREASE 185071900 2837, DIAGRAM NO. 3 1900 Tue Natrona, GrocraPpHic MaGaAZzINE handling was further reduced and pro- uction greatly stimulated. No 2.—INCREASE IN VALUE OF MANU- FACTURES, 1810 TO 1840, AND IN EACH DECADE FROM 1840 TO 1900 This shows the actual increase in the value of manufactures reported in each census year, as compared with its pre- decessor, and confirms what has just been said relative to the growth in the decades 1860-1870 and 1880-1890 and 1890-1900. No. 3.—VALUE OF MANUFACTURES PER CAPITA, 1810 TO 1900 The very great increase in popula- tion suggests, of itself, a great increase in manufacturing, and it is therefore proper to show the value per capita of the manufactures of the United States in each census year. It will be seen that the value of manufactures reported in 1810 and 1840 averaged about $28 per capita, and are now about $170 per capita, or three times as much for each individual at present as in 1860, four times as much as in 1850, and six times as much as in 1840. This indicates that the per capita value of manufact- ures consumed by the masses has in- creased at about this rate, as 97 per cent of the manufactures are consumed at home, while the fact that prices have greatly fallen meanwhile indicates that the quantity consumed is probably five times as much per capita as in 1860 and ten times as much as in 1840. No. 4.—NUMBER OF PERSONS IN EACH 1,000 ENGAGED IN MANUFACTURING AND AGRICULTURE, 1870 TO 1900 This shows the number of persons in each 1,000 engaged in manufacturing and agriculture, respectively. It will be seen that the number engaged in manufacturing has increased from 53 per thousand to 74 per thousand, an in- crease of 40 per cent since 1870, while Tue Unirep Stares: Her InpustrRigs BOs the number engaged in agriculture has NUMBER OF PERSONS IN EACH 1000 ENGAGED decreased from 152 to 135 per thousand, iy WaniiFACTURING AND AGRICULTURE a decrease of 12% per cent, in the same time, showing the trend of labor from 1870 71900 agriculture to manufacturing. IN AGRICULTURE No. 5.—TOTAL NUMBER OF PERSONS ENGAGED IN MANUFACTURES AND es 154 AGRICULTURE, RESPECTIVELY, 1870 — IN MANUFACTURING TO 1900 isms While there is no desire to measure the growth of manufacturing by that of any other industry or make invidious comparisons, it seems not improper to call attention to the relative growth of the manufacturing industry as compared sate with agriculture, which was formerly considered the chief occupation of the Bo ey people of the United States, and which still furnishes two-thirds of our enor- mous exportations. This diagram shows the actual increase and percent- age of increase in the total number of persons engaged in manufactures and me Go Sy EN agriculture respectively, and their rela- 1870 80 “30. 1300 : ee INCREASE 1870%1900 407, | DECREASE 18701900 ee 7 tive growth in the past 30 years. It will be seen that those engaged in man- ufacture have increased from 2 millions DIAGRAM NO. 4 to over 5% millions, and those in agri- culture from about 6 millions to 10% TOTAL NUMBER OF PERSONS ENGAGED IN MANU- millions, and that while twice as many FACTURES AND AGRICULTURE RESPECTIVELY persons are still engaged in agriculture as in manufacture, the relative growth 187 Ore 190 0 has been much more rapid in the man- ufacturing industry. The number en- gaged in manufactures have nearly trebled, while the number engaged in PERSONS ENGAGED IN PERSONS ENGAGED IN agriculture has not quite doubled. MANUFACTURE. AGRICULTURE No. 6.—VALUE OF PRODUCTS OF MAN- UFACTURING AND AGRICULTURE, RESPECTIVELY, 1870 TO 1900 10.4 The relative growth on the part of AG manufactures has also been more rapid 77 than that of agriculture, since manu- factures occupy a comparatively new 5.7 5.9 field, while agriculture had pretty well 4.7 | | prior to 1880, since which the manu- 27 factures have made their greatest gains. | | developed the most productive sections | | 1870 '80 ’90 1900 ACTUAL INCREASE 3,665, 141, GAIN 1787, 1870 ‘80 ‘90 1900 ACTUAL INCREASE 4 515,848, GAIN 75 7 DIAGRAM NO, 5 306 VALUE OF PRODUCTS OF MANUFACTURE ‘AGRICULTURE RESPECTIVELY 18707 1900 'N MILLIONS OF DOLLARS MANUFACTURE "| AGRICULTURE 9372 5369 | 3764 2460 / 2212 | | | '80 +90 1900 | | ‘90 1900 INCREASE $8,806,954, 124. INCREASE $ 1,806, |+6, 779. GAIN 208 7% GAIN 927 ; DIAGRAM NO. 6 VALUE OF MANUFACTURES EXPORTED 1800 ro 1902. “ete IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS 228.5 hed Bi 102.8 68.2 wae | thet 3.8 [. 2. 5 2 | ‘60 ‘70 ‘80 DIAGRAM NO. 7 ‘20 ‘40 ‘96 1902 Tue Natrona GrocraPHic MAGAZINE The increase in the value of manu- factured products from 1870 to 1900 was 208 per cent, while that of agri- cultural products was 92 per cent. I present these figures of total values of manufactures and agricultural products respectively merely for the purpose of showing the relative growth rather than relative value of product. A mere com- parison of the aggregate value of man- ufactures with aggregate value of agri- cultural products would manifestly do injustice to agriculture, since, as al- ready explained, the statement of the gross value of manufactures contains many duplications, while there are but few duplications in the statement of total products of agriculture. But a com- parison to show the relative growth of the two industries, or the percentage of growth in each, seems not improper, since the duplications of value in the statement of total manufactures have existed in all census reports, and 4 fairly accurate estimate of the percentage of growth may therefore be had for use in comparing with the percentage of growth in agricultural products. One especially interesting fact which the recent census developed is that our manufacturing industry draws 80 per cent of its raw material from farms of the country and actually utilizes one- half of the agricultural products of the country. The great cotton and woolen manufacturing industries obtain their raw material from the agriculturist, the material used by the manufacturer of leather originates on the farm or ranch, as do also those used in the manufacture of wines and liquors, the tobacco man- ufacturing industry, the milling and canning industries, and various other lines of manufacture. The census esti- mates that 80 per cent of the raw material used in manufacturing isthe product of agriculture, and that 51 per cent of the value of the products of agriculture was purchased and used by the manufact- urers of the country as raw material in Tue UNITED STATES: their manufacturing. This suggests the importance of the manufacturing industry to,the farmer, to say nothing of the market furnished him by nearly 6 million people finding employment in the factories and workshops of the country. No. 7.—VALUE OF MANUFACTURES EXPORTED, 1800 TO 1902 I want now to speak briefly of the effect of this increase in manufactures upon our foreign trade. Much has been said in recent years about the in- crease of our exports of manufactures, and quite justly, for the growth, es- pecially in the past decade, has been very great. The growth of the entire century, taken asa whole, has been re- markable, but especially so in the past decade, as will be seen from this dia- gram, which shows that the exportation of manufactures in 1800 was about two and one-half million dollars; in 1840, II millions ; in 1860, 40 millions; in 1880, 102 millions, and in 1890, 151 millions, but that in the short period from 1890 to 1902, only 12 years, the increase was nearly double that of the go years from 1800 to 1890, making the total exports of manufactures in 1902 403 million dollars. No. 8 —PER CENT WHICH MANUFACT- URES FORMED OF IMPORTS AND EX- PORTS, 1820 TO 1902 It is not so much, however, in the power to supply foreign markets in which our manufacturers have made their great record as in their complete control of the home market among 80 million prosperous people. ‘They have so fully supplied that market that they have steadily reduced the share which manufactures form of the im- ports, while they were also increasing the share which manufactures formed of the exports. This diagram shows the percentage which manufactures have formed of the imports and ex- Her Inpusrrik&s 2105 ports since 1820. "The share which they formed of the imports has steadily decreased, from 44.9 per cent in 1820 to 16.6 per cent in 1902, and the share which they form of the exports has steadily increased from 7% per cent in 1820 to 30.8 per cent in 1902. No. 9.—DISTRIBUTION. OF MANUFACT- URES EXPORTED Before leaving this subject, you will perhaps be interested to know whati be- comes of the manufactures which are PER CENT WHICH MANUFACTURES FORMED IMPORTS **aEXPORTS. [820% 1902. 44.9 IMPORTS. EXPORTS. 37.9 27.9 17.8 20.0 1S.0 16.6 13.0 | | | 820 ‘50 ‘70 ‘90-1902 1820 '50 ‘70 ‘90 DIAGRAM NO. 8 exported from the United States. ‘T‘his diagram shows the distribution of man- ufactures by grand divisions. You will see that fully one-half of the manu- factures exported goes to Europe, the greatest manufacturing center of the world. Of the 410 million dollars’ worth of manufactures exported in Ig01, 215 millions value went to Eu- rope, 96 millions to North America other than the United States, 33 mil- OF "95 1902 308 lions to Asia, 29 millions to Oceania, 27 millions to South America, and 10 millions to Africa. No. to.—VALUE OF MANUFACTURERS’ RAW MATERIAL IMPORTED AND PER { CENT WHICH IT FORMED OF TOTAL + IMPORTS, 1820 TO 1902 Still another effect of this growth of our manufactures has been an increasing demand for the class of manufacturing Tue Natrona, GrocrarpHic MAGAZINE the most remarkable growth has been in the years since 1890, the total having increased from 178 millions in 1890 to 327 millions in 1902, the gain in the 12 years since 1890 being nearly equal to that of the 70 years from 1820 to 18go0. From the second group of lines it will be seen that manufacturers’ raw mate- rials, which formed lessthan 6 per cent of the imports in-1820, now form 36 per cent of the greatly increased total. DISTRIBUTION OF EXPORTS OF MANUFACTURES IN CENT. EUROPE...... 1901. N.AMERICA....| 49 SiianaESER aR Specs $ 96,066,893. 66 EE $ 33,781,503. OCEANIA...| 80 cm F, 29,006,780. S.AMERICA 60 Mmmm $ 27,170,642. AFRICA.....| 40 Sm $10,576,888. DIAGRAM NO. 9 material which we do not produce at home, such as fibers, rubber, silk, tin, chemicals and many other articles. This diagram shows the increase of manu- facturers’ raw materials imported since 1820. It will be seen that their total importation grew from 3 million dollars in 1820 to 61 millions in 1860, then suddenly increased to 160 millions in 1880 and 178 millions in 1890 ; but that No. 11.—RELATIVE VALUE OF MANU- FACTURERS’ MATERIAL AND ALL OTHER IMPORTATIONS, 1890 TO 1902 This shows the value of manufactur- ers’ material imported in 1890, Ig00, and 1902, and compares its value with that of all other imports. It will be seen that while manufacturers’ material in- creased, the other imports decreased. Manufacturers’ material increased from Tue Unirep Srarss: VALUE OF MANUFACTURERS RAW MATERIAL IMPORTED “saPER CENT WHICH IT FORMED OF TOTAL IMPORTS, 18207 1902. 327.6 VALUE OF RAW MATERIAL IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS Baa PER CENT OF TOTAL IMPORTS 36.2 31.8 25.5 178.4 160.0 alle V7 3 1820 ro 60 ‘80 90 1900 1902 | ‘40 ‘60 80 ‘39 1902 DIAGRAM NO. Io 265 millions to 420 millions, while the other importations decreased from 524 millions to 480 millions. No. 12.—GROWTH OF DOMESTIC EX- PORTS, AND SHARE WHICH MANU- FACTURES FORMED OF THE SAME, 1870-1901 In this illustration the broken por- tion of the lines indicates the share which manufatures formed of the grand total. The diagram covers only the period from 1870 to 1901. A more extended statement, however, would showthat ex- ports of domestic manufactures formed in 1800 but 7.8 per cent of the total ex- ports, and amounted to but 2% million dollars, and that the growth in the first half of the century was extremely slow, having reached only 17% millions in 1850 and forming but 13 per cent of the total exports. In 1875 the exports of ‘manufactures amounted to 92% million dollars and formed 16.5 per cent of the Her INpustTRIES SOY) total exports, and in 1900 were 433 mil- lions and formed 31.6 per cent of the total exports. In 1902 they were 403 millions in value and formed 29.7 per cent of the total, the reduction in 1902 as compared with 1900 being chiefly due to the excessive home demand for certain lines of manufacture, notably iron and steel. No. 13-—GROWTH OF EXPORTS OF MANUFACTURES, AND SHARE WHICH IRON AND STEEL FORMED OF THE SAME, 1870-1901 In this illustration the broken lines show the share which iron and steel IMPORTS OF ALL OTHER, MANUFACTURERS IMPORTS MATERIAL 1890 + 1902., 1890, 1900+ 1902, S24 4B0 4290 390 | 4 19990. 1900 1902, 1990. 1902. DIAGRAM NO. II 310 formed of the total manufactures ex- ported in each year from 1870 to Igo1. The growth in the exportation of iron and steel manufactures has been phe- nomeually rapid, tke total value of iron and steel exported being less than two million dollars in 1850, 9 millions in 1875, and 122 millionsin 1900. For the fiscal year 1902 the total was 98% mil- lions, the reduction compared with 1900 being due, as already indicated, to the unusual home demand for iron and steel GROWTH OF EXPORTS OF DOMESTIC PRODUCTS AND SHARE WHICH MANUFACTURES FORMED OF THAT TOTAL, 1870 T0 190). (IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS? 1460 | 70 | ‘| a (4 210 1203 g a G@ g 8 1032 oo a a g 8 4@ aoe 2 aus acs «OB a B24 BH >, 9 OO ows g 8 g@ oo © 8 g a B a ) a a 499 a 376 «of a | 1870 75 ‘80 ’85 ‘90 ‘95 ‘96 ‘97 ‘98 ‘99 1900 1901 PERCENTAGE WHICH MANUFAC TURES FORMED 715 166 125 20.2 179 23.) 265 26% 240 282 316 282 OF TOTAL EXPORTS DIAGRAM NO. 12 manufactures for use in domestic indus- tries, this demand being so great that the importations of iron and steel in 1903 exceed by far those of any year in the last decade. No. 14.—EXPORTS OF MANUFACTURES OF IRON AND STEEL FROM 1870 TO IgO1 This illustration shows the growth in exports of iron and steel manufactures THe Narionat GgocrRaAPHic MAGAZINE during the period from 1870 to 1got, and illustrates the statements already made regarding the very rapid growth in this class of our manufactures. ‘The United States has in recent years be- come the world’s largest producer of iron ore and pig iron, her total produc- tion of pig iron in 1902 exceeding that of the United Kingdom, Germany, and Belgium. No. 15.—PROGRESS IN THE PRINCIPAL MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES FROM 1870 TO Igor This diagram is intended to illustrate the growth in the production of the great articles which enter into manu- factures, such as pig iron, cotton, and coal. The growth of coal production was from 32 million tons in 1870 to 261 millions in 1901; of pig iron, from 1,665,000 tons in 1870 to 15,879,000 tons in Igor, and over 18 millions in 1902. ‘The growthof cotton manufact- ured at home was from 857,000 bales to 3,547,000 bales. The importation of the principal raw materials for use in manu- facturing increased from 20 million dol- lars in 1870 to 176 millions in 1g01— all illustrating the rapid growth in the manufacturing industries of the United States. The capital employed in manu- facturing is shown by the census of 1870 at 2,118 million dollars, and that of 1900 at 9,874 millions, and the value of manu- factures turned out in 1870, 4,232 mil- lions, and in 1900, 13,040 millions. Having now shown the growth in manufactures compared with conditions in our own country at the beginning of the centnry, I want to say a few words about the growth of manufactures in the United States compared with the growth in other countries, especially those great manufacturing countries of Europe— France, Germany, and the United King- dom. ‘These three countries produce practically two-thirds of the manufact- ures of all Europe, and therefore it seems unnecessary to take into consider- ation in this study the other and smaller TOTAL VALUE OF MANUFACTURES EXPORTED, 1870 10 190), AND THE SHARE WHICH IRON AND STEEL FORMED OF THAT TOTAL 412 Zz S Py 29 | | i | ig3 | | ° ‘ 1870 1880 1885 oO | { PERCENT WHICH ire] 85 1890 1895 1898 1901 «IRONS STEEL FORM- ED OF TOTAL MAN- 016.2 14.7 IS 172 «I74 tht 28 _ UFACTURE S EXPORTED. DIAGRAM NO. 13 countries. Curiously, even these old and well developed countries do not take as complete a census of manufactures as does the United States, and a compari- son of growth year by year or even decade by decade is difficult. That dis- tinguished statistician, the late Mr Mul- hall, however, made shortly before his death some careful calculations on the value of the manufactures of the prin- cipal countries of the world, especially those of Europe, at various dates, and these are generally accepted as the best available information on this subject. I shall now show you by the same pro- cess which I have applied in the study of our own figures his statement of the value of manufactures in France, Ger- Tue Unitrep Srarss: Her INpusTRIEs ZIFF many, and the United Kingdom from 1840 to the close of the century, com- paring their growth with that of the United States. No. 16.—VALUE OF MANUFACTURES IN FRANCE, GERMANY, THE UNITED KINGDOM, AND THE UNITED STATES, 1840, 1860, 1888, AND 1894 In the four groups of lines shown you in this diagram is presented Mr Mul- hall’s statement of the relative value of manufactures produced in the four EXPORTS OF MANUFACTURES OF IRON AND STEEL 1870 TO 190) (IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS) 7 7o 32 26 1870 «1880 671885 1890 1895 1898 (90h DIAGRAM NO. I4 a7 312 countries, France, Germany, the United Kingdom, and the United States, at the four dates which I have named, 1840, 1860, 1888, and 1894, the term ‘‘ Ger- many ’’ applying in the earlier periods to those States now included in the Ger- man Empire. ‘The first group of lines indicates the value of the manufactures of each of the four countries in 1840 as shown by Mr Mulhall’s figures, ar- Tur Nationa, GrocraPHic MAGAZINE of lines I have retained the same scale of measurement per million used in the first group, and the same relative posi- tion for each of the countries. In 1860 you will note that the United States had almost overtaken Germany and France, and that its manufactures were about two-thirds in value those of the United Kingdom. In 1888 the United States had outstripped all of her com- PROGRESS IN THE PRINCIPAL MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES 1870 ~ 1901. 7 13040 158749 SIs 261 3547 17o M7 4232 857 2il BS 18 32 lebs 20 ff ° te 5 ie ° ° fe] i=) ° eS i dk dk dk dk dk dh dk 4k coaL PIG [RON COTTON PRINCIPAL CAPITAL VALUE OF IMPORTS | EXPORTS (million (thousand MANUFACT- MFG.MA- EMPLOYED MANUFACT- OF IRON& OFIRON & tons) tons) URED TERIALS (in mil- URES (in STEEL STEEL (thousand Imp. (values lionsofdol- millions of MFRS. (in MERS. (in bales) in millions lars) dollars) niillions millions of dollars) ofdollars) of dollars) DIAGRAM NO. I5 ranged in the order of magnitude, the United States the smallest, 467 million dollars, the European countries follow- ing in the order, Germany, France, United Kingdom. It will be seen that in 1840 the value of manufactures in the United States was less than one- third of those of Germany or France, and less than one-fourth of those of the United Kingdom. In the other groups petitors in the race, the value of her manufactures, as will be readily seen, being more than those of France and Germany combined and nearly twice as great as those of the United Kingdom. In 1894, as will be seen by a glance at the final group of lines, the United States made still greater gains over her competitors, the value of her manu- factures in that year being nearly as Tue UNITED STATEs: great as those of France, Germany, and the United Kingdom combined. No. 17.—GROWTH OF MANUFACTURES IN FRANCE, GERMANY, THE UNITED KINGDOM, AND THE UNITED STATES, 1840 to 1894 Before leaving this subject it may be interesting to note the actual rate of Her INpDusTRIES ous but not rapid, the increase being from $1, 606,000,000 in 1840 to $2,900,000, 000 in 1894, an increase of-80 per cent. In the case of Germany the growth was more rapid—from $1,484,000,000 to $3,359,000,000, an increase of 126 per cent. In the United Kingdom the growth was at about the same rate as that of Germany—from $1,883,000,000 VALUE OF MANUFACTURES IN FRANCE, GERMANY, UNITED KINGDOM AND UNITED STATES. 1840, 1860, 1888, 894. uS.9498 IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS U.S. 7.022 U.K.4,263 U.K.3,990 GERMANY GERMANY 3.357 om ae 2.837 BRACE Ca F eee re : GERMANY 606 a3 Us.1907 » U-S. i | : | 1Ia@4oO 1860 1Ie@gu DIAGRAM NO. 16 growth in manufactures in each of the four countries which have just been discussed, and I present in this diagram lines and figures which will show to the eye the actual growth in each country at the dates already named. ‘The first group of lines relates to France, the second to Germany, the third to the United Kingdom, and the fourth tothe United States. In France it will be seen that the growth has been steady, i8ese 3,000,000, also a gain of 126 per cent. In the United States the growth, it will be seen, was far more rapid than that of other countries— from $467,000,000 in 1840 to $9,498,- 000,000 in 1894, a growth of nearly 2,000 per cent. In other words, the manufactures of France in 1894 were scarcely double those of 1840; those of Germany, nearly two and a half times as great asin 1840; those of the United to $4,2 314 Kingdom, nearly two and a half times as great as in 1840, and those of the United States practically twenty times as great as in 1840. The causes of our rapid growth in manufactures, as compared with these European countries, are not difficult to find. The 5 great articles which enter most largely into the manufacturing GROWTH OF MANUFACTURES IN FRANCE. GERMANY. Tue NarionaL GrocrapHic MAGAZINE the United Kingdom was the largest producer of pig iron; today we have not only far surpassed that country in the production of iron, but in 1902 our production of pig iron actually exceeded the combined production of the three greatest pig-iron-producing countries of Europe—the United Kingdom, Ger- many, and Belgium—and our produc- 9.498 UNITED KINGDOM * UNITED STATES. 1840 1894 IN MILLIONS QF DOLLARS 3357 2,300 2. 092") 2837 1995 1606 | ayn : 840 ‘60 88 “94 ee e in Ou FRANCE. MANY. PER CENT OF INCREASE 1840-94; 81 PER GE ul INCREASE ; 7,022 4%263 3.990 2,808 18835 1,907 4 7 1840 "60 80 ‘94 i ‘eo 80 ‘94 UNITED KINGDOM. —_- UNITED STATES. PERCENT OF INCREASE, 179. PER CENT OF INCREASE; 1932. DIAGRAM NO. I7 industries today are iron, wood, copper, cotton, and coal, the latter being the important and necessary factor in trans- forming the others into manufactures. In each of these great requirements of manufacturing the United States has larger known ‘supplies than any other country of the world, and better trans- portation facilities for assembling them for manufacturing. A few years ago tion of steel exceeds that of other coun- triesin a like proportion. Our production of pig iron has grown from less than one million tons in 1865 to over 17 millions in 1902, and of steel from 20 thousand tons in 1867 to over 13 million tons in 1901. Of copper the United States now produces one-half that of the entire world, our production of copper having grown from less than 1,000 tons in Tue Unrrep Srarss: 1850 to 270 thousand tons in 1900. Of cotton, another important factor in manufacturing, our production has grown from three million bales in 1870 to an average of more than ten million bales per annum during the last five years, and the United States now pro- duces three-fourths of the cotton of the world and turns one-third of that pro- duct into manufactures. Of timber the United States is the world’s largest pro- ducer. Of coal, for use in assembling and transforming these articles into manufactures, the United States now produces more than any other country, her production having grown from 32 million long tons in 1870 to 261 millions in1go1. In transportation facilities, by which these products are assembled for manufacturing, railways have grown from 20,000 miles in 1856 to 200,000 miles in 1902, and are now two-fifths those of the entire world. Vessels pass- ing through the Sault Ste. Marie canal have increased from 106 thousand tons register in 1855 to 25 million tons reg- ister in 1902, or nearly 20 times that passing through the Suez canal; and freight rates have fallen to about one- fifth those of 1860 and less than half those of 1880. These comparisons of the growth in the production of the great staples re- quired for manufacturing may be more readily and interestingly presented by some simple diagrams showing the rela- tive growth in production in the United States and those countries which may be considered in any degree our com- petitors. No. 18.—GROWTH OF COAL PRODUC- TION IN THE UNITED STATES, UNITED KINGDOM, AND GERMANY, 1875 TO igor One of the important causes of the growth of our manufacturing is our plentiful coal supply and the ease with whichitis produced. The United States now actually produces one-third of the Her InNpustTRIEs 345 entire coal supply of the world. The United States, the United Kingdom, and Germany produce three-fourths of the coal of the world, and I show in this diagram the growth of coal production in each of these three coun- tries from 1875 to1gor. It will be seen that the United States and Germany started abreast in 1875, with a produc- tion of about 50 million tons each, but far below the United Kingdom, which COAL PRODUCTION OF GERMANY, UNITED KINCDOM*aUNITED OTATES 1875 T° 1901. 1875 TONS (35,000,000 49,000.000 | is 1901 DIAGRAM NO. 18 produced about 135 million tons. The United States advanced much more rap- idly than Germany, and in 1898 passed the United Kingdom, and is now suffi- ciently in the lead to assure that she will continue the greatest coal-produc- ing country of the world. This asser- tion is fully justified by the fact that the area of our coal fields. is 10 times as great as those of all Hurope, and they . RUG are only equaled in area by those of China, which must remain undeveloped until transportation facilities make their supplies available. No. 19.—COAL PRODUCTION OF THE WORLD, 1870-1901 This diagram shows the growth in coal production of the world from 1870 to 1901. ‘The first pair of lines shows the production of Germany in 1870 and Ig01 respectively, the second pair the THe NarionaL GreocraPHic MAGAZINE No. 20.—PIG-IRON PRODUCTION OF THE UNITED STATES COMPARED WITH THAT OF THE UNITED KINGDOM AND GERMANY An equally important factor in manu- facturing is the supply of iron and steel. I have already told you that the United States produces one-third of the coal of the world, and I may now add that she produces 30 per cent, or nearly one- third, of the iron ore of the world. Of iron and steel, as of coal, the three great producing nations of the world are the RELATIVE GROWTH IN COAL PRODUCTION IN GERMANY, THE UNITED KINGDOM, THE UNITED STATES AND ALL OTHER COUNTRIES. 1870 — 190). PRODUCTION IN [870 % 1901. (IN MILLIONS OF TONS) 290 ibs 56 tau 37 UNITED ALL STATES OTHER COUNTRIES UNITED KINGDOM INCREASE FROM 1870 TO !90). (iN MILLIONS OF 10NS) gs 7 UNITED ALL STATES OTHER COUNTRIES UNITED KINGDOM GERMANY DIAGRAM NO. I9 United Kingdom, the third pair the United States, and the fourth pair the remainder of the world. In the second group of lines is shown the increase in production from 1870 to 1901 in Ger- many, the United Kingdom, the United States, and the remainder of the world. It will be seen that the gain of the United States in that time was equal to that of Germany and the United King- dom combined. United States, the United Kingdom, and Germany. ‘This diagram shows the growth of pig-iron production in the United States, United Kingdom, and Germany since 1877. It will be seen that the United States and Ger- many started abreast in 1877, far below the United Kingdom, and that in 1901 the United Kingdom and Germany were about equal, but with the United States so far above them that her output was Tue UNITED STaATEs: actually equal to the combined produc- tion of the United Kingdom and Ger- many, and in 1902 was equal to both those countries, with Belgium thrown in for good measure. No. 21.—STEEL PRODUCTION OF THE UNITED STATES, UNITED KINGDOM, AND GERMANY, 1877 TO igor In steel production the progress of the United States has been even more striking, compared with that of her chief competitors, than in iron or coal. ‘The United States, United Kingdom, and Germany, it will be seen from this dia- gram, started nearly abreast in 1877, but the United States so far surpassed them that her production of steel is now not only greater than that of both com- bined, but is actually 44 per cent of that of the entire world. No. 22.—COPPER PRODUCTION OF THE UNITED STATES COMPARED WITH THAT OF OTHER COUNTRIES Copper, which was always an im- portant metal, has become especially so in the recent years in which the use of electricity has so marvelously increased ; and, as the demand for copper increased, the supply of the United States has so increased that she has not only out- stripped all her rivals, but now produces one-half the copper of the world. The four principal copper-producing coun- tries are: United States, Spain, Chile, and Japan. It will be seen from this diagram that while all these countries were nearly abreast in production in 1883, at the beginning of the world’s great demand for copper, the United States immediately began her upward movement in production, while the other countries have made little change in their output. Asa result we now pro- duce as much copper as all the other countries of the world combined. No. 23.—COTTON PRODUCTION OF THE WORLD, AND SHARE OF THE UNITED STATES IN THAT PRODUCTION Another extremely important factor in manufacturingis cotton. Of this the Her INpustTrRikEs Su 7 PIG IRON PRODUCTION OF GERMANY, UNITED KINGDOM* UNITED STATES 1877+ 1901. 1877 1901 TONS 16,132,408 7,886,000 TONS 7,835,000 6,714, SIO 2,099,500 1.932.700 NO. 20 DIAGRAM OTEEL PRODUCTION OF GERMANY, UNITED KINGDOM AND THE UNITED STATES 1877721901. 1877 1901 TONS 13,689,173 6,394,222 @@ 8 5,080,000 DIAGRAM NO, 21 318 COPPER PRODUCTION OF GERMANY, SPAIN, JAPAN AND THE UNITED STATES 188370 190). 1883 1901 TONS 270,998 TONS 900000000000000000 090°) S4482 52,399 4353 pe 9892 8neaag 7916 16,461 ee 22,069 772\ TOs) DIAGRAM NO. 22 COTTON PRODUCTION OF THE WORLD 1302 (IN BALES OF 500 POUNDS) U.S (0,700,000 10,700,000 WORLD 1902 U.S. 1870-1902 7,311,000 761,000 ASIA 3,500,000 3,114,000 AFRICA ,070 000 AMERICA SOUTH OF U.S. 250.000 | (870 ‘80 90 1902 DIAGRAM NO. 23 Tue Nationa GrocrarHic MAGAZINE United States produces practically three- fourths of the world’s entire supply, and has doubled her production since 1880, and shown an ability to double the pres- ent product if the world demands it. This diagram shows the world’s pro- duction of cottonin 1902. ‘The first line is for all of America south of the United States ; the second, Africa; the third, Asia; and the fourth, the United States. The second group of lines shows the production of the United States in 1870, 1880, 1890, and 1902, indicating the growth of production in response to the world’s demands. No. 24.—RAILWAYS OF THE UNITED STATES AND EUROPE, 1850-1902 While the production of raw materials isan important factor in manufacturing, the power of quickly and cheaply as- sembling those materials for actual man- ufacturing and of distributing them after manufacture is another important factor, and in this the United States surpasses all other nations. In this diagram compare the railways of the United States not merely with those of a single country, but with those of all Europe. In 1850 our railways were two-thirds as great in length as those of Europe ; in 1870, five-sixths as great ; in 1880, nine- tenths, and in 1902 they actually ex- ceeded those of all Europe by 12 per cent. The second group of lines shows the relative railway mileage of the United States in 1850, 1870, 1880, and 1902, and indicates the rapidity of growth. I have now shown you, first, the in- crease in production of manufactures ; second, the increase in production of raw material, and, third, the increase of transportation facilities. These three facts suggest that probably the manu- facturing industries have extended far into the interior of the country, and especially to those sections where the raw material or the coal is produced, and an examination of the records of Tue UNITED STATEs: the census shows that this is true. We are accustomed to think of the New England and Middle States as the chief seat of the manufacturing industries, and it is rather surprising to know that the center of the manufacturing indus- tries has steadily moved westward until it is now located in the State of Ohio. It is equally surprising to know that Ohio ranks first of all the States of the Union in the manufacture of carriages and wagons and of clay products, and second in agricultural implements and in iron and steel manufactures. Illinois holds first rank in the manufacture of agricultural implements, cars, bicycles, and distilled liquors,and second in men’s clothing, furniture, musical instruments, soap, and candles. Wisconsin ranks first in lumber and timber production, Minnesota first in flour manufacturing, Missouri first in the manufacture of tobacco, Texas first in the manufacture of cotton-seed oil cake, Colorado first in lead, and California first in explo- ‘sives, wines, and preserved fruits. The various manufacturing interests have extended far into the interior of the country, and in some cases across the entire continent. While the plentiful supply of raw materials and unexcelled facilities for assembling them are perhaps the most striking among the causes of our manu- facturing success, we must add another factor, thestrenuousness of labor. ‘This is one which we, as Americans, scarcely appreciate, because it is a condition to which we have always been accustomed; but that it has been an important factor in our success over other nations is evi- denced by the attention which it receives from representative men of other coun- tries who have studied our success and sought to learn its causes. Mr J. S. Jeans, secretary of the British Iron Trade Association, who recently accom- panied a commission of iron and steel manufacturers sent to the United States to study conditions here, in his report Her INpDusTRIES SUG) says: ‘“‘One of the notable character- istics of the principal cities and indus- trial centers of the United States is the comparative absence of a leisured class. The typical American appears to live only to work, and to work at something that will be a life-long career of useful- ness to himself and the community. Every man, however rich, must have a calling in the United States.’’ Mr Lud- MILES OF RAILWAY IN THE U.S.%4 EUROPE 1850, 1870, 1880, 1902. (in THOUSANDS OF MILES) GROWTH 200 UNITED STATES U.S. 200 EUROPE 79 EUROPE 23 EUROPE 63 53 eRe oPE Ups 9 1870 1880 1902 1850 DIAGRAM NO. 24 wig Max Goldberger, of Berlin, Royal Privy Councillor of Commerce and mem- ber of the Imperial German Consultative Board for Commercial Measures, who visited the United States in 1902, spend- ing some eight months studying our commercial conditions, says: ‘‘A sort of fanaticism for work seems to have taken hold of men in the United States. Labor is so intense in the centers of industry 1850 re 1902 ‘70 ‘80 1902 320 that, barring sleep, it scarcely permits of any other recreation, and for that reason places of pleasure, if we except large towns, are veryrare. The fanati- cal desire for work, of which I have just spoken, begins in early youth, and almost as young as the industries of the country are the leaders of large enter- prises, many of them mere boys. Onthe other hand, there are few men who stop work and retire to live on their incomes, even when they have earned millions.’’ One other cause of our growth in production—and it is the last one which I shall suggest—is the greatness, the physical greatness, of our country. We do not realize, I think, how big we have grown. We proudly compare the growth of our manufacturing or exports with that of the United Kingdom, for example; but we do not, apparently, stop to consider that the area of Eng- land is less than that of the State of Kansas, and that of the entire United Kingdom less than that of Kansas and Nebraska combined. When we com- pare our own conditions with those of France, we forget that its area is less than that of our two Territories of Ari- zona and New Mexico combined. We Tue National, GrocraPHic MaGaZINE look with complacency upon the figures which compare our growth in manu- factures, commerce, and population with that of Germany, but overlook the fact that all of the German Empire is smaller than our single State of Texas. The area of the Thirteen Colonies, as defined by the Peace Treaty of 1783, was equal to that of the present United Kingdom, France, Germany, Norway, and Sweden, whose combined popula- tion today is 143 millions. The area added by the Louisiana Purchase is greater than the present area of Spain, Portugal, Italy, Austria, Hungary, and all of the Balkan States, with a com- bined population of 145 millions. The area added by the Florida Purchase -is more than that of the present Denmark, Netherlands, Belgium, and Switzer- land, whose population today is 18 mil- lions. The combined area of the Texan, Mexican, Oregon, and Alaskan addi- tions is nearly equal to that of all Euro- pean Russia, whose present population is 106 millions. Thus, our present area, including Alaska, may be said to prac- tically equal that of all Kurope, whose population is in round terms 4oo mil- lions of people. THE INTRODUCTION OF THE MANGO HE great popularity of the mango among the natives of the ‘Tropics, who in most places pre- fer the fruit to the orange or banana, recently led the U. S. Department of Agriculture to study the mango witha view of ascertaining whether it might not be made as popular among the peo- ple of the United States as the orange and banana. Great quantities of man- goes are grown in Porto Rico, and it occurred to the Department that if the fruit was such as would find favor among the American people, a profit- able industry might be started on the island in exporting mangoes to the United States. Mr G. N. Collins, a specialist of the Department, was dis- patched to Porto Rico to investigate the question. He found the mango one of the most common fruits in the island, and during the season when it is ripe, May to August, eaten in larger quantities than any others, with the possible exception of the banana, which is used more as a vegetable and cooked in one form or other. Unfortunately, most of the mangoes at present grown in Porto Rico are, however, too fibrous and coarse to ever become popular in From G. N. Collins, U. S, Department of Agriculture Grove of Mango Trees, between Cabo Rojo and Joyua, P. R. BP? the United States. The best varieties, which are rich and delicate, are scarce at present; but Mr Collins believes that in a very short time, with more care in the cultivation of the tree and with the introduction of new varieties of mango, great quantities of the finest fruit can be grown and shipped to this country. He believes that the fruit would soon become immensely popular and equal, if not surpass in popularity, both the orange and banana. Mr Collins’ report to the Department of Agriculture* has recently been pub- lished, and from it the following notes are taken: Though European residents in the Tropics almost universally acquire a fondness for the mango, and in England the demand for it is steadily increasing, it having been found possible to make importations from India, notwithstand- ing the great distance, the mango is as yet little known in the United States, having been represented in our markets only by fruit of inferior varieties. These give no suggestion of the qualities of the better sorts, and tend rather to dis- courage than to increase the demand. If an effort similar to that which brought the banana into favor in the United States} could place an adequate sup- ply of good mangoes before the public, there is no apparent reason why this new tropical fruit should not repeat the history of its now popular predecessor. A taste for mangoes hasin most peo- ple to be cultivated; but once acquired, it is like a taste for olives, and becomes almost a craving. The milder flavored *“ The Mango in Porto Rico.”’ Collins, Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Plant Industry, Bulletin No. 28. + The banana was first introduced on a large scale into the United States by a steamship line which brought great quantities of bananas from the West Indies. It was not confidence in the latent popularity of the fruit that in- duced the steamship line to bring the bananas over, but a last effort to get freight for its vessels. By G. N. Tue NatrionaL GeocraPHic MAGAZINE varieties, in which no taste of turpentine is to be detected, are usually enjoyed even by the novice, but after one be- comes familiar with the fruit a slight taste of turpentine ceases to be disagree- able. ‘The fiber, however, that exists in the poorer varieties is an unmitigated evil, and renders the eating of a mango a serious operation. Persons forming their opinion of the fruit from these poor varieties usually indorse the proverbial statement that the mangois ‘‘a mass of tow saturated with turpentine;’’ but those acquainted with the fruit at its best are almost unanimously enthusi- astic in their praise. Elphinstone, the historian of India, says: ‘The mango is the best fruit of India, at once rich and delicate, and all other fruits are comparatively insipid beside its intensity of taste. There is some- thing in it that is nothing less than vo- luptuous.”’ Good mangoes are produced in Amer- ica, but as yet in such small quantity that few persons have had an opportu- nity to taste any but inferior fruit. Sample lots of the more common and poorer varieties are frequently shipped to northern markets, and have doubtless. done much to hinder the growth of the trade. A first impression is very lasting, and first impressions of the mango based on such fruit are likely to be anything but favorable. Asan example, mangoes. are frequently to be found in the Wash- ington market, but we have never seen one that could be called good, even in comparison with the Porto Rican fruit. This impression will doubtless be dif- ficult to dispel; but if really good man- goes could be placed in the markets their increase in popular favor would be certain and the growing of mangoes might become a profitable pursuit. In spite of the fact that in all mango- producing countries the natives consider the fruit wholesome and perfectly safe, prejudice against it exists among some military officials and others, who con- vu =I s = =| as cal 30 < & ° 2 a uv I | s b ise] [= vu fa) >) oD Ss se 9 (s) A ie) zl 3 - 18) Branch of Mango Tree with Fruit, Tapachula, Mexico 324 From G. N. Collins, U. S. Department of Agriculture Mango Fruit, showing Method of Packing demn the fruit as positively dangerous. During the Spanish war this prejudice * was so strong that the soldiers in Porto Rico were prohibited from eating the mango, and many beautiful trees were cut down. This prejudice probably arose from eating the fruit when unripe, in which state, like most other fruits, it is unwholesome. In some parts of India the natives at one season of the year live almost exclu- Tue Nationa GrocraPHic MAGAZINE sively on mangoes, apparently without harm. An extract from the Pharmacographia Indica, in Watt’s Dictionary, describes the fruit as ‘‘ invig- orating and refreshing, fat- tening, and slightly laxative and diuretic.”’ The mango tree (Wangifera indica) varies in height, ac- cording to the variety, from little more than a bush to a tree 50 to 70 feet high, with a trunk 6 to ro feet high and 2 feet or more in diameter. The leaves are lanceolate, about 1 foot in length, taper- ing gradually to a narrow point, with a smooth, shining surface. ‘The young leaves are first pink, then red before turning green. The top is rounded and very dense. The bark is gray andsmooth. The flowers are small, reddish- white, or yellowish, borne in large upright racemes. The fruit varies greatly, accord- ing to the variety. In some kinds it is not more than 2 or 3 inches 1n greatest diameter, while others are three or four times that size, some weigh- ing as much as 4 pounds. In form they vary from nearly spherical to long and narrow like a cucumber, straight or crooked. The most common varieties are usually from 2 to 4 inches in length, more or less kidney-shaped, with the ‘‘nak’’ or stigmatic point more or less produced. In color they may be green, yellow, or red. In composition the difference is no less pronounced. In some the seed is large and the thin flesh be- “tween it and the skin consists almost entirely of fiber attached to the seed, while in others the seed is small, and in some so nearly aborted that it is Tue INTRODUCTION oF THE Manco easily cut with a knife. In the best varieties the fiber is almost entirely wanting and the entire fruit consists of a mass of .juicy, usually orange-colored pulp. The Anacardiacez, to which the mango belongs, include also the tur- pentine tree (Pistacia terebinthus), the original source of turpentine, and it seems not at all unlikely that the char- acteristic odor of the mango is in real- ity due to the presence of turpentine or some closely allied substance. Ex- udations of a transparent resinous sub- stance similar to that of the turpentine tree are frequently to be noticed in the mango. The mango ((Zangifera indica) is said by De Candolle to be native in South Asia or the Malay Archipelago, and re- cent authors report it as wild in the forests of Ceylon and the regions at the base of the Himalayas, especially to- ward the east, at an altitude of from 1,000 to 2,000 feet. Its culture is very ancient, as shown by references in San- skrit mythology and ancient Hindu folk- lore. For so old and so useful a plant, its distribution was comparatively limited until historic times. To the west it had not passed the Red Sea, being unknown in Egypt, while to the east it had ap- parently not reached the islands of the Pacific. ‘Thespecies is not well adapted for distribution by natural agencies, and man has probably been chiefly responsi- ble for its dissemination. In the New World it seems to have been first introduced into Brazil, al- though it is not known at what date. The mango is now a common fruit throughout the Tropics of the world. It has been developed to the highest state of perfection in its home in India, where the number of well-marked va- rieties is enormous. Mr Maries, of Durbhungah, has collected over 500 varieties, 100 of which he characterizes as good. ‘Thirty-four of these varieties $25 he describes in Watt’s Dictionary of Economic Products of India. Ceylon is also famous for its mangoes. Both the east and the west coasts of Africa have several good varieties. In Aus- tralia the culture is fast increasing, and it bids fair to become one of the most popular fruits. One very fine variety is said to exist in the island of St Helena. The mango is the most highly prized fruit of Guam, where there is a fine seedling variety. Its cultivation in that island is, however, not a success, owing probably to the thin soil, which affords such a shallow footing that the hurri- canes uproot the trees in all exposed localities. In the Hawaiian Islands Mr William C. Stubbs* reports: ‘‘’The mango is receiving perhaps more atten- tion just now than any other fruit. As many as twelve or fifteen varieties have already been introduced. It is a de- licious fruit, and decidedly ornamental in any ground.’’ In the New World, Trinidad and Jamaica have the largest collections, although the drier regions of Central America and Mexico may be found to offer better seedling varieties. In spite of the many discouraging frosts that have visited Florida, planters of that state are actively engaged in propagating good varieties by budding, grafting, and inarching, and, if visited with no further misfortune, will in a few years produce considerable quan- tities of high-grade fruit. The mango will grow in a variety of conditions, and it seems to have little preference as to soil, the most important requirement being a deep soil that is welldrained. Astoclimate, it is much more exacting, and the fact that the tree may thrive well in a given locality and yet fail to produce fruit should be kept always in mind. The mango will be prolific only in regions subjected to a * Bull No. 95, Office of Experiment Stations, U. S. Department of Agriculture, Report on the Agricultural Resources and Capabilities of Hawaii, p. 40. Fron G. N. Collins Mango Fork (full size) From G. N. Collins, U. S. Department of Agriculture Mango Fruit, showing Method of Peeling (natural size) considerable dry season. On the moist north side of Porto Rico the trees grow luxuriantly, but they are not nearly so prolific, nor is the fruit of such good quality, as on the dry south side, and in the very dry region about Yauco and at Cabo Rojo the fruit seemed at its best, while its abundance was attested by the fact that fine fruit was selling as lowas 12 foracent. In Guatemala and Mexico the mango was found at its best only in regions where severe dry seasons prevailed. Under favorable conditions the mango is very prolific. The tree of which a branch is shown on page 323 was estimated to have in the neighborhood of 5,000 fruits at the time the photograph was taken, and trees quite as prolific were seen near Cabo Rojo, Porto Rico ; while trees in southern Florida before the freeze of 1886 were esti- mated to bear as high as 10,000 mangoes. From this it will be seen that with 25 to 100 trees per acre enormous quantities of mangoes can be produced on very small tracts of land, provided the right climatic conditions exist. The method of peeling a stringy mango is shown on this page. A cut is made around either end of the fruit and these are then connected along one side, the central strip being peeled off in one piece. The skin remaining on the ends of the fruit affords a means of holding it with- out the fingers coming in contact with the juicy flesh. If in addition a sharp-pointed fork is at hand, this can be firmly RAINFALL AND THE LEVEL oF Lake Eris fixed in the seed and the skin at the ends removed, thus saving the sweetest part of the fruit. ‘he illustration on page 326 shows a special mango fork secured in’ Mexico by Dr J. N. Rose. The long slender tine in the center easily penetrates the seed, and the shorter outer tines need only to touch the seed to prevent it from turning. The best varieties of mango have hardly any fiber and the pulp is sliced with a knife, or sometimes is so soft that it is eaten with a spoon. Porto Rico seems very well adapted to the production of mangoes and, as the plant is strictly tropical and very sus- ceptible to cold, would seem to have a decided advantage over Florida, where good varieties are already successfully 327 grown, but where, except in the extreme southern part, the danger of injury from cold is very great. A really high-grade mango is unknown in Porto Rico, and the first steps toward making their ex- portation profitable is the introduction from the other islands, or from Florida, Mexico, or the East Indies, of grafted stock of the best varieties. The season of ripe mangoes in Porto Rico is from May to August. By se- lecting proper varieties this might be prolonged, since in some parts of India it extends over a period of six months. This would be a great advantage in ship- ping the fruit to temperate regions, as at present the season coincides with the season of temperate fruits, which places the mango at a decided disadvantage. -RAINFALL AND THE LEVEL OF LAKE ERIE ANY people think that the M rainfall, although differently distributed through the year, averages about the same one year as another, or if there is a deficiency one year, it will be made upthe next. With this erroneous notion in mind, those concerned with navigation on the Great Lakes have naturally looked for some other explanation of changing water levels, for from 1888-1901 they witnessed a period of low water so long it seemed unreasonable to expect it ever to attain its former level. However, a compari- son of the level of Lake Erie, as shown by the gage at Cleveland, with the rec- ord of rainfall along the Great Lakes shows a complete correspondence. The high water in Lake Erie in 1902 and the heavy rainfall of that year are fresh in the minds of those who live near it. The Weather Bureau established a number of stations on the Great Lakes in 1870. The first marked deviation from normal level in Lake Erie after this was in 1872, when the water was lower than for many years before or after. The rainfall that year was below the normal at every station on the Great Lakes. (I have taken no account of stations on Lake Ontario.) In 1876 the water was higher than for many years before and higher than any year since. The rainfall was above normal at all stations except Marquette, where it was nearly an inch below. At Mil- waukee the excess was 18.28 inches; at Grand Haven, 11.52; at Detroit, 8.07. In 1878 the lake was considerably higher than the preceding or following year. ‘The rainfall was a little below normal at Duluth and Grand Haven, but above at all other stations, being 60.24 inches at Buffalo, where the nor- mal is only 38.04, and 53.51 at Cleve- land, where the normal is 36.29. In 1882 the lake was higher on an average than in any other year since 1876. The rainfall was below normal at Buffalo, Detroit, and Milwaukee, but 328 above normal at the ten other stations, the excess at most of them being greater than the deficiency at any of these three. In 1890 the water was higher than in the years immediately preceding or fol- lowing. ‘The rainfall was not far from normal on the upper lakes, but above normal at all Lake Erie stations. In 1895 the water was the lowest for half a century, and the rainfall on the Great Lakes probably the least, cer- tainly the least recorded at the Weather Bureau stations since their establish- ment. These include all the years that differ in any marked degree from those that precede and follow. If we consider parts of years we find also a close agreement between rainfall and lake level. Examination of the monthly record of lake level at Cleve- land led me to think the rainfall at the different stations must have been below normal for the first half of 1888 and the last three months of 1887. On consult- ing the record I founditso. To exactly account for the stage of the water dur- ing brief periods, of course several things must be considered—surplus or deficiency in the different lakes at the beginning of the period, time required for water to flow from the upper lakes, evaporation, melting of snow on the watershed, whether ground is frozen, whether rain falls gradually or so fast that a larger portion passes quickly into the streams. Most of the time since 1887 Lake Erie has been lower than for many years before. ‘The rainfall has also been less, Tue Nationa, GrocrapHic MAGAZINE as the table shows. If any one could tell us when this dry cycle will give place to a wet one, the information would be highly appreciated. Perhaps the wet one has already begun. Atany rate, those concerned need not fear any appreciable lowering of Lake Erie be- low its level in the past decade from any other cause than drouth. I believe that people now at Cleveland, Toledo, Detroit, Milwaukee, and Chicago will live to see the water higher than their fathers ever saw it. ‘The same cannot be said of places on Lake Huron or the northern part of Lakes Superior and Michigan, for the slow tilting of the earth’s crust is such as gradually to lower the water in those regions. : MEAN ANNUAL RAINFALL ON THE GREAT LAKES Meanin Year | inches | Mean eee Station. estab- | to De- | since 5 lished.| cember | 1887. sen 31,1887 Ye Dulutheeeseee 1870 32.8 27.0 5.8 Marquette....| 1871 32.3 32.4 | —Oo.1 Chicago...... 1870 | 36.7 30.5 6.2 Milwaukee....| 1870 33.2 28.5 4.7 Grand Haven.) 1871 38.9 30.4 8.5 Alpena....... 1872 37-9 29.7 8.2 Port Huron...| 1874 33.5 29.3 4.2 Detroitsee eee: 1870 | 33.6 30.7 2.9 Toledo........| 1870] 32.7 28.0 4.7 Sandusky.... 1877 37.5 31.5 6.0 Cleveland.....| 1870] 374 33.1 4.3 Sasso ccc0000s 1873 43-2 35.2 8.0 Buffalo.. .... 1870 38.1 36.8 Te) EK. L. MosELeby. GEOGRAPHIC NOTES THE RAILROADS AND FORESTRY HE Bureau of Forestry has con- tinued this year ona far larger scale the experiments in timber season- ing and preservation for the railroads which it began last year under Dr Her- mann von Schrenk. ‘This work will be done for the New York Central, the Erie, the Baltimore and Ohio, and the Pennsylvania railroads in the East, and for the Illinois Central, the Santa Fé, the GeocraPHic Nores St Louis and San Francisco, the Mis- souri, Kansas and Texas, the Northern Pacific, and the Burlington in the South and West. - The scarcity of valuable timbers is felt by no class of consumers more keenly than by the railroads, which use every year 110,000,000 ties merely to renew those worn out and decayed. The price of timbers has risen in some instances to a figure which makes their use prohibitive ; in other cases the sup- ply is so nearly exhausted that the roads have been compelled to look about for new timbers. The Bureau of Forestry has been called on to assist in solving the diffi- culty, and has come forward with the very practical and simple suggestion that the railroads, instead of continuing to use expensive, high-grade timbers for such a low-grade purpose as that of railroad ties, shall use the cheaper woods. For example, to the complaint of the New York Central that it finds it more and more difficult to secure longleaf pine ties from Georgia at the price it can afford to pay, the Bureau suggests that the road use the beech, maple, and birch of the Adirondacks. The complaint that the timbers rot very quickly when laid in the ground is an- swered by the suggestion that they should be seasoned and preserved, just as beech is seasoned and preserved in France. The Great Eastern Railroad of France has succeeded in making beech ties last 35 years by impregnating them with tar oils. ‘The unseasoned longleaf pine ties used by the New York Central last only five years; and the beech, if laid green, without seasoning or preserving, would in many cases last no more than three years. The substance of the proposal which the Bureau has made to the railroads, and which the railroads have thought so well of as to adopt, is that experiments be made to determine whether cheaper timbers may be treated with preserva- 329 tives at a cost so low and be made to last such a long time that it will pay to substitute them for the more expen- sive timbers now employed. The railroads have thought so well of these ideas that they will not only carry on under the Bureau’s direction thé nec- essary experiments in seasoning and pre- serving, but have engaged the Bureau’s help in learning where cheap timbers for ties may be obtained. In other words, the railroads have decided that if they can be convinced that it will pay to sea- son and preserve cheap timbers for ties, they will acquire large areas of timber lands on which they will grow their own trees, cut their own ties, and thus be assured of a steady supply. This means that some of the great railroads of the country are in a fair way to practice for- estry on a very large scale, and to em- ploy a great many foresters. Work of a similar nature to the rail- road experiments is being carried on for the American Telephone and Telegraph Company, which used last year 150,000 telephone poles and 3,000,000 feet of tim- ber in cross-arms. Seasoning experi- ments are being conducted on chestnut telephone poles near Harrisburg, Pa., and on cedar poles near Wilmington, N.C. Important and valuable as this work is to the railroad and telegraph compa- nies, it is of far greater importance and value to the country at large. The use of cheaper timbers for railroad ties is in several ways an economic saving; it re- lieves the high-grade timbers of a part of the heavy demand that is being made upon them, opens a market for timbers for which there is now little sale, and affords splendid opportunities for con- servative management of timber lands. The work is being prosecuted accord- ing to the regular cooperative system of the Bureau, by which the field and trav- eling expenses of the Bureau’s agents are paid by those for whom the work is done. BRO Tue Nationa, Grocrapuic MacaZzine NewYork, October (7, 1902. Conmanser Robert &. Peary, WON. Washing tow, D.C., Dear Six:- The Peary Arctic Chub acknowledges your preliminary report of the ITE aft. and Cotter of the 46 int, and extends to you its cordial welcome Upow Your rererw fo country and Rome. St Konors you for patience, cour~ age and fortitude, undaunted by formidable obstacles; thanks you for the wise and effective use of the means- faced at your dioposal, and congratulates you upon your achievements memorable in the annals of science and discovery. Aloouring You of our appreciation and regard, we Aubseribe ouroelves ~ e iy Y ") > Un. HW ah a Office Hours: 8.30 A. M. to 5 P. M. Telephone, Main 471 NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY OFFICES Rooms 107, 108 Corcoran Building Fifteenth and F Sts. N. W., Washington, D. C. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL President W J McGEE . . Vice-President JOHN JOY EDSON cane wes uliteasurer AS HENRY 9 ye): - Secretary ELIZA R. SCIDMORE 5 - Foreign Secretary BOARD OF MANAGERS 3901-1903 1902-1904 4903-1905 MARCUS BAKER A. GRAHAM BELL CHARLES J. BELL HENRY F. BLOUNT DAVID T. DAY GEORGE DAVIDSON F. V. COVILLE A. W. GREELY WM. M. DAVIS D. C. GILMAN ANGELO HEILPRIN JOHN JOY EDSON S. H. KAUFFMANN RUSSELL HINMAN G. K. GILBERT WILLIS L. MOORE W J McGEE A. J. HENRY ISRAEL C. RUSSELL GIFFORD PINCHOT O. P. AUSTIN R. D. SALISBURY O. H. TITTMANN C. HART MERRIAM The National Geographic Magazine is sent free of charge to all members of the National Geographic Society Recommendation for Membership in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY The following form is enclosed for use in the nomination of persons for membership Please detach and fill in blanks and send to the Secretary Dues: Annual membership, $2; Life membership, $50. If check be enclosed, please make it payable to order of the National Geographic Society, and, if at a distance from Washington, remit by New York draft or post-office money-order. for membership in the Society. “Better than going 5) abroad, and the best preparation for a trip abroad.” PORTLAND SUMMER SCHOOL PORTLAND, MAINE. Portland Summer School JULY 13 TO AUGUST 21 ae Successor to the famous Sauveur Summer School, founded in 1875 at Amherst College. Courses in modern and ancient lan- guages, culture of the speaking voice, instrumental and vocal music. For illustrated circular address : ARNOLD WERNER-SPANHOOFD Central High School, - Washington, D.C. ‘Free from the care which weariesand annoys, Where every hour brings its several joys.” “AMERICA’S SUMMER RESORTS” This is one of the most complete publications of its kind, and will assist those who are wondering where they will go to spend their vacation this summer. It contains a valuable map, in addi- - tion to much interesting information regarding resorts on or reached by the NEW YORK CENTRAL LINES A copy will be sent free, postpaid, to any address on receipt of a two-cent stamp, by George H. Daniels, General Passenger Agent, New York Central and Hudson River Rail- road, Grand Central Station, New York. WE make a specialty of HIGH GRADE WORK pr Scientiric “2 TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS ave MGT! ING ar MA a RSS. fie =") ENGRAVERS PHILADE LPHIA PLATES TO PRINT IN ONE OR moRE Cotoas The filanhattan Press-Clipping Bureau ARTHUR CASSOT, FPropricector NEW YORK (Knickerbocker Building) LONDON COR. FIFTH AVENUE AND 14TH STREET, NEW YORK Will supply you with all personal reference and clippings on any subject from all the papers and periodicals published here and abroad. Our large staff of readers can gather for you more valuable material on any current subject than you can get in a lifetime. TERMS: 100 clippings . . $ 5.00 250 clippings . . . $ 12.00 500 clippings . . . $22.00 1,000 clippings . . . $35.00 2 HENRY ROMEIKE'’S | BUREAU OF PRESS CUTTINGS 4 ~ 883 Union Square, New York Si Reads every paper of importance published in the United States, ~ and through its European agencies in London, Paris, Berlin and Vienna every paper of importance published in Europe and the British Colonies. One subscription on any given subject will bring notices » from the United States, and if desired also from the European papers. ‘be on WRITE FOR TERMS BACK VOLUMES ~ National Geographic Magazine ~The. NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE has on hand a few copies of complete back volumes which may be’ obtained .at the following prices: Vol. 3, 1891 : ; $5.10; Vol. 9, 1898. : $2.75 bee VOh) 61893 , ASO GE ia agar ee f. Vol. 6, 1894-5. . ; 4.20 O Volk. 7; 1806. pl ae VOLE BEN FOOT 535 F 2.50 Vol. 8, 1897 1g Oe ROO VOLOTR hOOR eae syn ee /2sc0 ; _. The NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE will pay the ~ following prices for copies of certain back numbers : Vol. 1, 1889, No. 1, $1.00; No. 2, $1.00 Vol..2, 1890, No. 2, $1.00. Vol.’ 4, 1892; No.1, $0.50; No. 2, $1.50; No. 3, $0.50; No. 4, $0.50; No. 5, $1.00; No. 6, $1.00 ~ Vol. 10, 1899, No. 6, $0.50; Index, $0.59 Vol. 13,1902, No. 1, $0.30 . 4 is Pek ie ‘CORCORAN BUILDING, WASHINGTON, D. C. is SPECIAL MAPS PUBLISHED BY THE NATIONAL - GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY gh 5" Map of the Philippines (5 feet 2 inches x 3 te Rivne Prepared under the direction of the War Department . Map of South Africa (46 x 33 inches). é Prepared under the direction-of the War Depactsient : Map of Northeastern China (36 x 28 inches). Prepared under the direction“of the War Department, _ ‘Map of the Chinese Enmipite, Japeny and fas Renan Mahar ‘Rail- way. (1}x7%% inches). Map of Alaska (28x 24inches). ~ aerate Prepared under the direction of the U. Ss. “Geolnneal Pees: Peta, A Series of Twelve Maps on the Alaskan Boundary . Toe Prepared under the direction: of Hon, John W. Foster, ex-Secretary of ‘State. Chart of the World on Mercator’s Projection (48 x 27 eevee ‘Prepared under the’ direction of the TAYE RIG EG oe Map of Cuba (18x73 inches). S Prepared under the direction of ‘Robert 2 ers = oa b eater A Series of Twenty-five Full-page. Charts, ee storm eae “ai methods of weather forecasting. Prepated tnder the direction of Dr. Willis vs Moore, Chief U. Ss. Weather Bureau » By Mail for Twenty-fiye Cents Each. 2 a ae NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIET s RORGORAN. BUILDING, WASHINGTON, BCS Séaconabic Goods for Personal. Comfort household © uses. Poeeaiy dedienet sen ‘rend the present season comfortable and ‘enjoyable. A ful line of necessary articles for personal comfort ‘and use : and a complete assortment ‘Of outing and ‘sporting. goods for indoor and outdoor pleasure. Woodward Q ae : New York. a Washington PRESS OF JUDD & DETWHILER, WASHINGTON, D.C. THE ¥ NATIONAL ‘GEOGRAPHIC Vol. XIV SEPTEMBER, 1903 CONTENTS a THE UNITED STATES: HER MINERAL RESOURCES. BY C. KIRCHHOFF, EDITOR THE IRON AGE ~. . : . ; ° pe ; EXPEDITION INTO TEXAS OF FERNANDO DEL BOSQUE. TRANSLATED FROM AN OLD UNPUBLISHED SPANISH MANUSCRIPT BY BETTY B. BREWSTER... ; : ~ THE HARDY CATALPA, ILLUSTRATED a. » EXPLORATIONS IN TIBET w GARDENING IN NORTHERN ALASKA. BY MIDDLETON SMITH EXCAVATIONS AT ABYDOS FOREIGN COMMERCE OF THE UNITED STATES IN. 1903 w WHITE POPULATION OF THE CHIEF BRITISH COLONIES Published by the National Geographic Society, Hubbard Memorial Building, is Washington, D. C. $2504 Year - 25 Cents a Number Entered at the Post-office in Washington, D. C., as Second-class. Mail Matter. Wins NATIONAL |_ 1 | GEOGRAPHIC, ] MAGAZINE {|_| 3 ILLUSTRATED” "MONTHLY, published by. the Ak Nationa, Grocrarnic Society, at Washing- : ton, D. C. — All editorial ‘communications © should be addressed to the Editor of the Nationat GEoGRAPHIC Macazinz, Hubbard Memorial Bales be ing, Washington, D. C. Business. communica- tions should be addressed to the National Geo- graphic Society, Hubbard | Memorial a ek BF ee ee 25 | CENTS A NUMBER; 825 50 A YEAR| \ Editor: | Ansacines Editors. O. m ‘TITTMANN SENERAL A.W. GREELY Chief Signal Officer, u. Ss meus a Wed McGEE American i MibceG as Cc. HART MERRIAM — ‘Chief of the Biological. Survey, U.S. . Ae Gael ove of Agriculture “LIZA RUHAMAH SCIDMORE > Author of ‘Java, the Garden of I cee aoe is : ; IDA M. TARBELL sesiend 3) ele. MARCUS BAKER Camnente Institution. WILLIS L. MOORE. Chief of the Weather Baveda, U. s : Department of Agriculture WASHINGTON, D. | c. ‘GILBERT ‘H, GROSVENOR sg Be Ethnologist hn nance Burcan of ee 2 °. Pp. AUSTIN oo f Labor. a ‘DAVID 7 DAY: y CARL LOUISE GARRISON aa _ Superintendent. of the U S Coast oe and wii uepet mors Chief of the pees a of Statistics Department v rei bete ‘and \ Chiefiof the isdisoae) 5 Mineral : Meee eS Diinbien ts 65: SWathar or Shape Sap Nat ae : tea armiettty ae po Nae | Principal of ae isee Wash ae ieee n, D.C, Vor. XIV, No. 9 a WASHINGTON GEOGRAIPIEOIC MAGAZINIE, SEPTEMBER, 1903 ia mae UNITED STATES-HER MINERAL RESOURCES * By C. KircunHorr, Epiror THe [Ron AGE HEN I wasa boy I was taught that in this great country, as in fact in any land, an assured future lay with him who identified him- self as closely as possible with the de- velopment of its natural resources; that the producer of the primary articles of necessity, the tiller of the soil, and the miner must under all circumstances find an outlet for their energies and a re- ward for their special skill and knowl- edge. To one born in the sight of the Golden Gate, soon after the wonder- ful gold discoveries in California, the future held out vast possibilities to every searcher for treasure; yet the wildest dreams of the gold-seekers of that day have been outdone by the subsequent discoveries of our mineral wealth, al- though now the yellow metal is occupy- ing a minor place when compared with the useful minerals. It may be stated as a general propo- sition that to a civilized community the possession of mineral wealth is impor- tant almost in the inverse order of the unit value of the individual mineral. Cheapest and yet most important of all is coal and fuel, next iron, the baser metals, the precious metals, and finally the precious stones. Without the first named no great industrial expansion is possible, while the last named, however welcome, do not through their absence hamper growth. It is not possible to speak with pre- cision as to the extent of the mineral resources of any country, because new discoveries are made from time to time even in Hurope, where exploration has extended over many centuries. It iscer- tainly not possible in our own land, where much territory is still covered with dense forests and swamps and whole mountain ranges have been untrod. Under the circumstances, comparisons are unsafe, but with such qualifications it is stating a fact that the United States has been blessed with almost unrivaled resources. The geographical distribution of our mineral resources could be fairly well shown in maps and charts, so far as exploration and development have re- vealed them. We might in that way show our assets, territorially distrib- uted, but we would create a very erro- *An address before the National Geographic Society, March 4, 1903. 3/32 neous opinion of their real value. With the most important minerals the eco- nomic value of a deposit is dependent upon many other considerations besides those of mere size and extent. Con- spicuous among these are accessibility to markets, the means of transportation, natural or artificial, the existence of a supply of labor and the character of that labor, climate, the character of the com- munity, its laws, etc. "These in their shifting influence find expression in the actual product, and that is a better meas- ure of relative importance than mere location and extent. The latter, designated on maps by coloring, is a poor guide, since rela- tively unimportant deposits may cover a very extended territory. Coal measures may underlie many thousands of square miles, yet the seams which they enclose may not be numerous nor thick nor pos- sess a coal of satisfactory quality. A field smallin area, at some distant place, may be thescene of enormous operations, while the greater basin may hardly be able to supply local requirements. The anthracite coal regions, as to area, con- stitute only an exceedingly small portion of the known coal fields of the United States, yet their importance overshadows any other industrial district. Useful minerals are found in deposits which may in general be classified, for the purpose of estimating them as assets, into two groups. First are those which are beds constituting one of a series of strata. "They are usually per- sistent and fairly regular over large areas like the coal seams, and therefore permit of some estimate of their con- tents. Second are those whose origin is due to local circumstances, and these include the fissure veins. They are usually irregular, and it is in most cases entirely impossible to arrive at any con- clusion of their extent and value with- out most elaborate underground ex- ploration or actual mining operations. It is therefore quite impossible to sub- Tue Natrona, GrocraPHic MAGAZINE mit more than very vague data relative to the magnitude of the mineral wealth of any country. Ina very rough way we may do so, of course, so far as coal is concerned. How rough that is will be readily understood when the state- ment is made that out of an estimated coal area of about 4,650,000 square miles in the world, China is credited With 4,000,000 square miles. Our own country is put down at about 280,000 square miles, and this compares with 11,900 square miles for Great Britain, 1,770 square miles for Germany, 2,086 square miles for France, and 510 square miles for Belgium. Considering the enormous tonnage which the European countries named are furnishing from their relative restricted territory, OUT possible reserves look huge. Of course areas are not a true measure of value or importance. Thus our Pennsylvania anthracite fields embrace a territory of only 468 square miles, and yet outdo in value probably any coal area of like extent anywhere in the world. We must therefore leave to the imagi- nation the pleasure of dealing with the magnitude of our mineral wealth. All we do know is that it is very great, not alone in its magnitude but also in its variety. There is hardly a state or territory in the Union which does not possess and is not utilizing mineral property, particu- larly when we include clays and stone and mineral springs. Maine has her granite and stone; Vermont her mar- bles, granite, and copper ; Connecticut her iron ore ; Massachusetts her granite, pyrites, and iron ore; New York, salt, stone, petroleum, natural gas, clays, cement, gypsum, graphite, and iron ore ; New Jersey, clays, marls, zinc, and iron ore; Pennsylvania, petroleum, coal, iron ore, natural gas, cement, rock, and clays; Maryland, ironore; Virginia, coal, iron ore, zinc ore, pyrites, and copper ore ; North Carolina, gold, stone, corundum, mica, copper, and iron ; South Carolina Tue Unitrep Strares: Her Minerat Resources and Florida, their phosphates ; Tennes- see, coal, copper, iron ore, and phosphate rock; Alabama, coal andiron ore; Louis- jana, sulphur and salt; Kentucky has coal, iron, zinc, and lead; West Virginia, petroleum, natural gas, coal, and salt ; Texas, petroleum, coal, iron ore, quick- silver, and silver; Arkansas, zinc, man- ganese, bauxite, whetstone, and coal; Missouri, lead, zinc, iron ore, and clays ; Ohio has coal, petroleum, natural gas, clays, grindstones, salt, and iron ore; Michigan, copper, iron ore, coal, cement, grindstones, clay, limestone, and salt; Illinois, coal ; Indiana, natural gas, coal, petroleum, whetstones, and clays ; Wis- consin, iron ore, lead, and zinc; Iowa, claysand lead; Kansas, lead, zinc, coal, natural gas, salt, and gypsum ; Indian Territcry, coal; South Dakota, gold, copper, and leadi; Wyoming, petroleum, coal, copper, salt, and iron ore; Colo- rado, gold, silver, lead, copper, petro- leum, coal, andiron ; Utah, gold, silver, lead, coal, iron, and sulphur ; Montana, copper, silver, gold, and sapphires; Idaho, lead, gold, and silver ; Oregon, gold, copper, and silver; Washington, coal, iron ore, lead, and silver ; Arizona is famous for copper, silver, and gold; New Mexico for coal, iron ore, copper, and silver; Nevada for silver, gold, and copper, and California for gold, copper, quicksilver, petroleum, borax, asphaltum, magnesite, and stone. As the pioneers penetrated into our country they caught some glimpses of these treasures. The Jesuit fathers, in the reports of their journeys in 1659 and 1660, mention the copper of Lake Su- perior, and Le Sueur, in his explora- tions of the Mississippi at the commence- ment of the eighteenth century, noticed the lead deposits of that region. Cop- per was mined in Connecticut and in New Jersey, and iron manufacture be- gan in New England and in Virginia at about that time, but it was not until the end of the eighteenth century that iron, lead, and copper mining were carried S13)3 on on a fairly comprehensive scale. Coal was mined in the vicinity of Rich- mond from 1770 to 1780. In 1820 the first cargo of anthracite reached Phila- delphia, while in 1833 and 1834 Vir- ginia, North Carolina, South Carolina, and Georgia were in the zenith of a gold- mining boom which resulted in an an- nual product of about $600,000. The year 1844 saw the opening of the Lake Superior copper region, and then in 1848 came the famous California gold excitement, followed by gold mining in Oregon in 1852, in Arizona in 1858, in Colorado in 1859, in Idaho and Montana in 1860. Iron mining on Lake Superior began in 1856. In 1859 came the dis- covery of the Comstock lode, which created an enormous activity in silver mining and led to the opening of the Unionville, Kelso Run, Belmont, White Pine, Eureka, Esmeralda, and Pioche districts in Nevada, the Owyhee in Idaho, the Cottonwood and Bingham in Utah, and the silver districts of Col- orado. ‘The year 1860 brought the dis- covery of petroleum in Pennsylvania, to be followed many years later by the utilization of natural gas. The development of the copper mines of Arizona began seriously in 1880 and 1881 with the opening of the Bisbee, Globe, and Clifton districts, to which later on the United Verde was added. Butte rushed into prominence at about the same time. Later in the seventies Leadville began to pour forth its mass of argentiferous lead. It may be stated in a general way that enterprise did not seriously turn to the mining industry in this country until the second half of the last century, and that its greatest achievement has been crowded into the last 30 years. I donot propose to weary you with an endless array of figures. Suffice it to say that the value of the mineral product of the United States had risen to about $370,000,000 in 1880, reached $620,- 000,000 in 1890, and, according to the 3 Sa statistics collected by Dr David T. Day, of the United States Geological Survey, exceeded $1,000,000,0o00 in 1g01. ‘This includes $350,000,000 for coal, $242,- 000,000 for pig iron, $87,000,000 for copper, $78,000,000 for gold, $66,000, - ooo for petroleum, $55,000,000 for stone, $33,000,000, commercial value, for silver, $27,000,000 for natural gas, and $23,000,000 for lead. We stand first as producers of coal, our output in r901 having been 263,- 000,000 long tons, Great Britain follow- ing with 220,000,000 tons,and Germany with 153,000,000 tons, our percentage of the world’s total being about 31 per cent. In petroleum we have been racing with Russia, occasionally first and some- times second. In 1901 we furnished a little over 69,000,000 barrels to the world’s total of 165,000,000 barrels, our percentage being 41.9 per cent as com- pared with Russia’s 41.5 per cent. In the manufacture of pig iron we have now reached the point that our production is greater than that of our largest rivals, Great Britain and Ger- many, put together, with Belgium thrown in. We manufactured in 1902 fully 4o per cent of the world’s total. The gold production of the world was about $265,000,000 in 1901, to which we contributed $80,000,000 and Australasia $77,000,000. Of course, when the Rand resumes its full production and again starts on its natural increase, we shall probably have to yield first place to it. The world’s production of silver has a commercial value of about $103,- 000,000. Here again we occupy the first rank, with Mexico as a close sec- ond. The supremacy in the copper mining industry is undoubtedly ours for many years to come. In 1901 we produced over 52 per cent of the total of the world’s yield of 512,000 tons. In that year, with a product of 269,000 tons, we came close to the entire world’s out- put in 1890, when it was 273,000 tons. Tue Nationa, GrocrRAPHic MaGAZINE We stand second in zinc, following Germany. Our output of that metal in I9OI Was 125,000 tons out of a total of the world of 501,000 tons, or over 25 per cent. These figures, enormous as they are, do not really reflect adequately the great importance of our mining, since it lies at the foundation of the manufacturing industries of this country and is the basis of its industrial greatness, backed as it is with an equally lavish supply of raw materials from the forest and the farm. Mining and rail transportation have reciprocally aided one another, and in turn have contributed powerfully to the wellbeing of the farmer and the lumberman. : As in other realms of material prog- ress, the United States has outstripped all other civilized countries in the de- velopment of its mining and metallur- gical industries. Brief though the period be during which we have been actively mining, we have witnessed the exhaustion of famous great deposits and the decline of entire camps and districts. This is apt to occur most rapidly in the case of placers, conspicuous among which are the auriferous sands and gravels in which the precious metal has been con- centrated by the washing action of streams. California’s enormous gold production of the early days fell off rapidly after the first decade of work- ing. The exhaustion of the silver-gold bonanzas of the Comstock lode, the rapid collapse of the mining of silver- lead ores of the Eureka district in Nevada, the practical cessation of work- - ing of once exceedingly productive quicksilver mines of California, are a few instances which could be multiplied. Yet thus far we have again and again witnessed the rapid rush into promi- nence of new districts. Thus Cripple Creek in Colorado recorded its first shipment of gold in 1891, the amount being estimated at $2,000. Two years Tue Unirep Srares: Her MInerRAL Resources 335 later it was $2,000,000, in 1897 it had crossed the $10,000,000 mark, and in 1900 had risen to $18,000,000. Butte, in Montana, was a silver camp of some importance 20 years ago, when copper was discovered and the district sud- denly loomed up with exports by the ship cargo of 30 per cent ores to the astounded smelters of Swansea, Wales. When Leadville’s great reserves of oxidized silver-lead ores began to show signs of exhaustion, the Coeur d’ Alene County, in Idaho, rose to more than fill the gap. Again and again we have faced the possibility that our petroleum supply would ultimately fail us; yet as the derricks fell into ruins in one field they rose like magic in others, the most startling recent instance being the opening of the California and Texas fields. Some uneasiness has been felt as to the future of the Lake iron ore supply. The Marquette district was in full de- velopment when the Menominee was opened out. Then came in rapid suc- cession the Gogebic and the Vermilion ranges, and finally, as the climax of all, the Mesaba range. Again and again the prediction was made that the old Marquette range would show evidences of exhaustion, and yet year after year new mines have taken the place of old ones. New reserves are being opened up in all the districts until this genera- tion may well dismiss any fears of future supplies, even taking into consideration that the demands are rapidly increasing year after year. As for our resources of coal, the most important of our minerals, we are not likely to have a Coal Exhaustion Com- mission, like that of our British friends, for centuries to come. Our record of feverish activity is one of which we have every reason to be proud, but it must be acknowledged that it has been accompanied by serious abuses. In the rush to get rich we have delib- erately followed the principle that it pays to waste. Within certain limits that may be economically justifiable. In a new country, without adequate transportation facilities, high labor, and difficult surroundings, it is possible only to select the best and the richest, but unfortunately in mining that process of selection in most cases practically ren- ders unavailable for the future that which has been rejected. Much of it is forever lost to the world, and what can be saved at a later date can be re- covered only at a greatly increased cost. In the early days of our mining we have been unskillful, and even today we are robbing nature’s storehouses of treasure, often destroying more than we utilize. At one time, not so many years since, barely one-third of the an- thracite coal in our beds finally reached the consumer. The other two-thirds were lost in mining and in preparation for market. It is characteristic of a great many of the mineral deposits that the mass of the ore, particularly with growing depth, is low in grade, the useful mineral be- ing disseminated in relatively large quantities of barren rock. Very often the rich ore occurs only in streaks and pockets, which constitute a minor per- centage in the total amount of valuable material. In hunting for them the poorer material is rejected, although it may be close to the border line of profitable extraction. With improved economic conditions there is greater opportunity, and with greater skill and a broader comprehension there is a grow- ing tendency among managers to rely more and more upon a moderate return on the large bodies of poor ore, accept- ing the occasional bonanza as a welcome addition torevenue. ‘The reckless hunt for rich streaks is giving way to sys- tematic utilization of a maximum of the deposits. It may not be as merry and exciting a life, but it 1s certainly a longer one and happier one. ‘There has 330 been a great improvement in this direc- tionin this country. It should bestated, however, that we can never hope to utilize the entire contents of a deposit. Still, there can be no doubt that we have paid dearly in wasted resources for the achievements of opening them up so rapidly. We have no particular grounds for mere pride of possession in our mag- nificent resources. Our glory, from a national point of view, should be com- pleteness of utilization, and that has at times suggested the nationalization of our mineral industry with the object of checking the abuses referred to. It may be doubted whether our practical good sense will ever allow that question to come to the front. ‘The nation as such has only control now of those mineral resources which lie dormant in the national domain. In order to en- courage their development, ownership is surrendered under easy conditions to the discoverer. That policy has un- questionably fostered enterprise in the past, but it is an open question whether the time is not approaching when the nation at large must assume the attitude of some state governments and of all private owners of mineral lands. These demand a royalty which may become an important source of revenue, and they generally provide, what is more im- portant to the nation, that the mine shall be operated in a workmanlike manner. ‘The present generation has responsibilities to future generations. In their behalf it has the right and the duty to demand that the nation’s gifts be not wantonly destroyed ; that every means which engineering skill suggests be exhausted; that every reasonable precaution be taken to preserve from destruction useful mineral which, while not profitably available now, may be- come highly precious to future genera- tions. Nor should title to mineral property on the public domain be given without Tue Nationa, GeocraepHic MaGaZINE some provision for its surrender as the penalty for long continued idleness. It should revert to the nation when after reasonable opportunity the discoverer is either unable or unwilling to utilize nature’s bounty. The United States has been exceed- ingly generous in throwing open its mineral resources. It has been a wise policy which the results on the whole have thoroughly justified. But condi- tions have changed greatly. The open- ing up of our mineral resources has ceased to be the hazardous undertaking it once was. Their utilization has be- come an undertaking in which engi- neering skill can more readily guarantee results. The splendid work of our U. S. Geological Survey has brushed away many uncertainties. The devel- opment of our great railway systems has lessened costs, and cheaper and more confident capital has become a willing handmaiden to enterprise. The time is therefore approaching, if it is not now at hand, when the nation is justified in imposing conditions not hitherto war- ranted. Conspicuous among _ these should be a rigid enforcement of the obligation to put a stop to wanton waste. In the last few years a good deal of alarm has been felt that very dangerous monopolies may be created through the control of our mineral resources by powerful consolidations of capital. At the first blush, in studying the magni- tude of those resources, we may feel in- clined to dismiss the danger as remote. It assumes a somewhat different aspect, however, when we begin to differentiate. The conditions affecting the industrial utilization of mineral property vary greatly, and a closer study reveals the fact that a relatively small number of the deposits, through favoring circum- stances, give their possessors special advantages. The deposits may be ex- ceptionally rich or extensive, particu- larly pure, or may be so located with Tue Unirep States: Her Mrnerat Resources 337 reference to the markets that they are capable of yielding an adequate supply at a cost far below others. ‘These ad- vantages may represent enormous sums, and can therefore be capitalized corre- spondingly. Unless those who control them extort undue returns, measured by earning capacity, the owners of the other less favorably located deposits cannot compete and live. Of course, the risk is always run by those who secure con- trol of the best of the mines that new deposits as valuable may be discovered elsewhere, just as those who utilize monopolies based upon patents take the chance that inventive genius, stimulated by opportunity, made exceptionally arti- ficial, find means to dispute exclusive possession. ‘There may be iron ore de- posits as rich and as great as any on the Lake Superior ranges in the Rocky Mountain region, yet for a generation to come they might as well be non-existent, so far as the controlling position of the United States Steel Corporation is con- eerned. An enormous power for good or for evil may be wielded by groups of capitalists who control the commercially available mineral resources, though they constitute only a small fraction of the total assets of mineral wealth of the country. ‘The fact that in most cases the earning capacity of these consolida- tions has been rated exceedingly high furnishes a premium on the develop- ment of hitherto neglected deposits, and thus constitutes the greatest source of danger to the stability of many of these giant undertakings. What. is perhaps to be most deplored is that these organi- zations, on their present basis, impose upon the industries dependent upon them a burden of fixed charges which must handicap this country in its strug- gle for an increasing share in the world’s markets. While the record of the achievements in mining, gwantitively, has been extra- ordinary in this country during the past fifty years, we may look back with even greater satisfaction upon what has been accomplished gwalitively, if we may so term it. Itcannot be stated in an array of figures, but constitutes even a greater glory to the captains of industry and the engineers and inventors who deserve the credit for it. It isexpressed in the more complete utilization of the natural resources, as in the increase in the total extraction of the contents of a coal bed. It is in evidence in the capacity to util- ize bodies of ores lower and lower in grade. It is proven by ability to pro- duce from rebellious or impure ores metals nearly chemically pure and com- mercially available for a wider and wider range of consumption. It is measured by an expansion of markets which may be due to the fact that technical prog- ress has proceeded more rapidly in our country than in others. While it is true that in these early days our miners and smelters rose to the occasion when they were called upon to meet special conditions, the general fact is apparent from a study of our development that generally we first copied and then adapted the methods approved by experience in Europe. There were some very notable excep- tions. We were forced to and did cre- ate hydraulic mining to collect the gold from alluvial deposits. We developed the preparation of anthracite for the market. We had nothing to guide us in the handling of the native copper rock of Lake Superior. The Washoe process was worked out to treat the silver ores of the Comstock lode. ‘There were no precedents for methods in the petroleum industries, and we had to learn by ourselves how to collect, dis- tribute, and utilize natural gas. We taught the world how to use the steam shovel in mining. We have pushed the development of the rock drill in mining and quarrying, and in more re- cent years have been in advance of all countries in the employment of modern coal-cutting machinery. Still it is a 338 fact that Cornish, Welsh, and English miners long controlled the working out of our mining methods, and that Ger- man and English metallurgists guided our first steps in utilizing our more complex silver, lead, and copper ores. One of the most brilliant reports on the state of the art ever written, that of the late Abram S. Hewitt on the Paris Exposition of 1867, is a confession of superiority of European methods in iron manufacture, which is almost staggering to one who reads it in the light of the present day. I cannot help feeling that the recognition of our indebtedness to European practice in the earlier days should be insisted upon, since it is be- coming altogether too common to assume that we are the chosen people so far as the mechanic arts are concerned. ‘That feeling is so often encountered that the fear of the danger of overconfidence is naturally aroused. A striking fact is the growing interde- pendence of the various branches of the mechanic arts as contrasted with the conditions prevailing 25 yearsago. The one relies upon the other, not alone for its products, but is aided, too, by sug- gestions and support. ‘The metallur- gist’s progress is accelerated by the mechanical engineer, and the latter looks to the former for increasingly strong and reliable materials. ‘The elec- trician has greatly widened the capacity for improving methods on the part of the copper producer, and in turn is under a debt to the copper miner, and the achievements of the rail-maker are re- turned in kind by the railroad builder, who has taught both much of value in transporting materials. ‘Thus all are shoulder to shoulder in the march of progress, mutually helpful and united— all powerful. To a constantly increasing degree pure science, primarily in search of the truth for its own sake, sheds its search- light along the path, and has become a closer and more valued ally year by Tue Nationa, GrocraPHic MaGaZINneE year. The majority of active workers looked askance at this meddler, pre- ferring to allow their own fancy full sway whenever they stopped to seek for causes or explanations. Practical men may sometimes become impatient when the laborious and apparently hypercrit- ical methods of the scientist do not more promptly clear an obscure point or fur- nish him with a suggestion for success- ful new lines of work, but the day has long passed when research was treated with grudging respect, if not with open hostility. No one is now readier to acknowledge his indebtedness to the chemist or the physicist than the man- ager or the practicing engineer. The fear is disappearing of impracticable science on the one hand and of unscien- tific practice on the other. The mining industry has suffered and, unfortunately, will suffer, particularly in its relation to labor, from one appar- ently trifling circumstance, and that is the impression which a visit to under- ground operations makes upon the aver- age layman. To be dropped suddenly into the dark depths with only a flick- ering candle to guide the uncertain steps, appalled by the dead silence or alarmed by strange noises, the rumble of the distant car, the reverberation of a shot far away, the rushing of unseen streams of water—the visitor is im- pressed with a sense of insecurity and danger. ‘The bright sunlight has never seemed sweeter to him than upon his return to the surface, and if he happens to have access to the columns of the press he describes in lurid language the awful experience which incidentally convinces him that he is braver than he gave himself credit for in his innermost heart. Miningin the popular mind be- comes one of the most hazardous of call- ings when, as a matter of fact, there are many others above ground which in- volve greater risks. With some excep- tions, of course, the conditions which surround the work of the miner are ExpepITion Inro Texas, 1675 rather favorable. He is not exposed to the rigors of the elements, and partic- ularly during the last few decades the hygienic conditions have been brought to a high standard. It is a fact that progress during the last 50 years has been pushed along lines even more important in their way than the increase in tonnage, the cheapening of product, or the raising of the stand- ard of quality. The captains of in- dustry in mining have, like others, displayed increasing care of their armies of men. It has become an axiom with every enlightened manager that every means which shall render more satisfactory the surroundings of the worker is bound to tell upon the results of their labor. A comparison of our modern mines and plants with those of former decades, of which some even now survive, proves what attention is paid to making the conditions under which manual labor is performed as tolerable as the circum- stances will permit. There has been a tremendous improvement in this direc- tion, and it does not lessen the achieve- ment when we frankly acknowledge that it is largely due to the recognition S39 of the fact that progress in this direc- tion pays handsomely. Let me go a step further, and that is to make the claim that the crowning glory of the efforts to improve our min- ing and metallurgical industries has been that they have contributed their full share to the development of this materialistic age. They have helped to bring within the reach of an ever-grow- ing circle of people not alone the neces- sities, but also many of the comforts and some of the luxuries of life. Let me confess that it seems to me the greatest and most commendable of achievements to raise ever so little the mass of hu- manity in civilization, and that is what progress in the mechanic arts during the past century has accomplished in a strik- ing manner. Start the masses on a higher plane-—level them up. The great genius may not tower so far above them as once he did; but that is again in har- mony with our democratic institutions. Let there be an increasing equality of opportunity, even though it makes the struggle fiercer and fiercer, if only pub- lic conscience will demand with sterner emphasis that the methods for achieve- ment be lawful and fair. EXPEDITION INTO TEXAS OF FERNANDO DEL BOSQUE STANDARD-BEARER OF THE Kina, Don Car tos II In THE YEAR 1675 TRANSLATED FROM AN OLD UNPUBLISHED SPANISH MANUSCRIPT By Brrry B. BREWSTER Rivadaneira Sotomayor, al- calde maior of the town of Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe de la Nueva Es- tremadura (now Monclova), having de- N the roth day of November, 1674, Don Antonio Balcarcel cided that the good of his majesty’s service required a military organization to show the force and arms his majesty could bring to resist the Indians, who might not wish to live peaceably under the royal protection and who by their 340 example would seduce into rebellion barbarous tribes from whom injury to the royal service might be apprehended, resolved, under the authority of his royal commission and in the name of the king, to have the royal standard raised. After assisting at the holy sacrifice of the mass he gave the order and said : I consign this royal standard to the keeping of Fernando del Bosque, a Spaniard of the greatest experience and trustworthiness ; in whom are united all the qualifications and parts required, and in the manner that I should and ought and find occasion to as conquis- tador of the new conquest and settle- ment; and in the name of the king I elect him to be such royal standard- bearer for this new conquest and settle- ment, and in it shall be accorded to him all the preéminences and privileges al- lowed other royal standard-bearers of like new conquests, having and holding him for stich royal standard-bearer. And he shall use and exercise such office as he can and ought in-all things and causes connected therewith. To this the said nominee assented and received said royal standard and offered to serve his majesty voluntarily and of his own will, without regard to any sal- ary or pay therefor, and he made oath in the following form: I swear and make homage according to law, one, two, three times; because, being out of Spain I ought to do it the more: to hold and to guard this royal standard in peace and in war; working solely in the service of the king until the time shall come when I must die upon it, and when in obedience to the royal command whoever may be present shall carry it to the one that shall next be charged with its keeping. And I will fulfill all that a faithful vassal and loyal hidalgo should. _ Father Juan Larios had been lately appointed by the Franciscan order comisario misionero for the region be- yond the Rio del Norte, and had been Tue Nationa, GrocrAPHic MAGAZINE directed to carry his work of evangeliza- tion to the savage tribes inhabiting it. He and that other intrepid priest, Father Manuel de la Cruz, had already entered Texas severaltimes. Father Freyes, the ‘historian, savs that Father Manuel dela Cruz penetrated into the country as far asthe Medina River. He had remained over the Rio del Norte with a tribe called the Boboles, but being informed that the Yrbipias had planned to capture him by command of a god that they had, this god being a man who had ordered them to bring the daring mis- sionary before him to answer for his temerity in coming into the country, the Boboles defended the priest, by command of Don Estaban, chief of the Gueiquesales. This chief with six In- dians of his tribe came to see General Balcarcel, and, being asked his purpose in coming, said that he and his tribe desired to become Christians and to re- ceive religious instruction, and he had come in the name of the following tribes, all of whom were his friends and allies : the Gueiquesales, Manos Prietas, Bocores, Siaexer, Pinnancas, Escabaca- Cascastes, Cocobiptas, Cocomaque, Oodame, Contotores, Colorados, Babi- amares, ‘[aimamares. These tribes had received religious instruction from the missionaries, and on one occasion they had protected them from the Yrbipias, who wished to capture Father Manuel de la Cruz when he was on the other-side of the Rio del Norte. On the 13th of January, 1675, another Indian, who was a Christian and called Francisco, belonging to the tribe called Bagnanames, accompanied by the chief of his tribe, who.was called in the idiom of his people Yosame Carboan, and eighteen warriors and three women, came to see General Balcarcel. All of them were brought by the Christian Indian, Francisco, from the mountains called Dacate in the Indian language, and which are about thirty leagues on the other side of the Rio del Norte. ExpepiTion Into Texas, 1675 They said that they were tired of wan- dering through the mountains and dying like animals. On the 26th of January, 1675, there came to General Balcarcel Pablo, an Indian chief of the nation called Manos Prietas, and with him eight Indians of the Gueiquesales, the Bapacorapimancos, and Espopolames. These, being examined, said that they were Christians and had been baptized by Father Juan Larios, and they had come to make their submission to the king. On the 29th of April, 1675, this same Indian Pablo came and brought with him 232 persons, great and small, as follows: 120 warriors, 65 women, and 47 boys and girls. They had come to ask to be placed in settlements, and said that they had left a large number of their people congregated together toward the Rio del Norte; that they were very numerous; they could not tell how many. These were followed by other chiefs living beyond the Rio del Norte, all of whom asked to be placed in settlements and to have mis- sionaries sent to them. General Balcarcel, having established his settlement of Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe de Estremadura, in Decem- ber, 1674, commenced building achurch, which was soon completed. Royal or- ders had been issued to push the con- quests as far as possible, and to gather the Indians together into settlements, where they might receive religious in- struction, cultivate the soil, and live peaceably under the royal protection. General Balcarcel, in compliance with this order, determined to send an expe- dition, under military command, along with Father Juan Larios, who had been appointed and directed to proceed at once to the conversion of the barbarous Indians living beyond the Rio del Norte. The military commander of this expe- dition was Fernando del Bosque, the royal standard-bearer, and Father Juan Larios, accompanied by Father Dioni- sio San Buenaventura, both of the 341 Franciscan order, was to have charge of all matters pertaining to the mis- sionary purposeoftheexpedition. With these there were ten other Spaniards— an interpreter of the Spanish and In- dian languages, Don Lazaro Augustin, himself an Indian, and Juan de la Cruz, of the Boboles, his ensign, and 20 others of his tribe who were most faithful to the Spaniards, and roo warriors of the Gueiquesale tribe accompanied the ex- pedition. They were ordered by General Bal- carcel to proceed to the Nadadores, and beyond as far as the Sierra Dacate, and to instruct the Indians to plough their lands and to cultivate them, and live in- dustriously, and they should go to such places as the good service of their majes- ties required, and they should instruct the Indians in the Holy Catholic re- ligion, and should take royal possession of all parts of the country visited, and take note of the longitude of the rivers, and of the trees, forests, and mountains, and should count the people, great and small—men, women, and children. JOURNAL OF FERNANDO DEL, BOSQUE, .. ROVAL STANDARD-BEARER, IN COM- MAND OF THE EXPEDITION April 30, 1675.—Left the town of Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe of this province in obedience to the order of the alealde maior, Don Antonio Balcarcel Riva de Neira Sotomayor; traveled along the river below the town toward the north, and having reached a place called Pajarito, on the river, about six leagues from the town, we found it un- possessed and without any signs of hav- ing been recently inhabited. We took possession of it in the name of the king our master, Don Carlos II, whom God defend, and in sign of possession we erected a high wooden cross, and at this place we saw many fish in the river and caught some. We gave it the name of San Felipe de Jesus. May 2, 7675.—On the first of May 342 left the place called San Felipe de Jesus, always traveling toward the north, along the same river for about four leagues, where it joined another stream, which we traveled along, still toward the north, leaving on our right hand in the direc- tion of the sunrise a range of high hills with sharp peaks, and passing beyond them we reached the ford of a river called the Nadadores, which place we found unpossessed and uninhabited. We took royal possession of it in the name of the king. Today religious in- struction was given to the Indians, who were fishing in the stream, which was full andswift. There were poplars and forests of mesquite along its banks. This place is about ten leagues from Sau Felipe. We erected a high wooden cross on the bank of this river and named the place San Francisco del Paso. We saw taken from this stream turtles and many large fish. May 4, 1675.—Having left the place called San Francisco del Paso on the Nadadores, and having crossed the river and traveled toward the north, having all the time a high and long sierra on our left (this long chain ran from south to north), after traveling about four leagues we came toa creek at a long ridge; there was running water in it, and our Indians called it in their lan- guage Toporica. We took royal pos- session of it in the name of the king, and in sign thereof erected a high wooden cross. We gave this place the name of Santa Cruz. On the same day, month, and year, having left the place called Santa Cruz and having traveled about four leagues toward the north, still having the said chain of mountains on the same side of us, we reached a creek below a ridge and in frontof a peak. ‘There was run- ning water in it and a growth of tule. We took possession of this place in the name of the king and gave it the name of Santa Catalina Martyr. We erected a high wooden cross and performed the Tue Nationa, GeocraPHic MAGAZINE other acts necessary to the assertion of our rights of possession. Religious in- struction was given to the Indians. May 5, 1675.—\,eft said place called Santa Catalina Martyr and traveled about six leagues toward the north, hav- ing the sierra already mentioned always in the same position. We reached a broad river with groves of very large poplars, cedars, and mesquite, with ex- tensive and beautiful plains of green grass; adelightiul place. The Indians said it was called the River Savinas, or, in their language, Muero. We gave it the name of San Antonio. It was un- inhabited. We took possession of it in the name of the king, our master, and in sign thereof erected a high wooden cross. ‘There were fish of all kinds in this river and in abundance. Religious instruction was given to the Indians by the missionary fathers. May 7, 7675.—We left the Rio San Antonio and traveled toward the north. About 12 leagues from said Rio San Antonio de Savinas we came to a water- ing place, to which we gave the name of San Ilefonso. We found it unin- habited, with only the ruins of two grass huts. We took possession of it in the name of the king, our master, and in sign thereof erected a high wooden cross. We gave this place the name of San Juan Evangelista. The missionary fathers gave religious instruction to the Indians. May 9, 7675.—Having left the place called San Juan Evangelista and tray- eled toward the north about 6 leagues, across a plain with clumps of mesquite trees, we came to another watering place, in which there wastule growing. Itwas between high ridges, with groves of oak trees. We found it uninhabited and took royal possession of it in the name of his majesty and for said conquest, and we gave it the name of San Ray- mundo de Pena Fuerte, and in sign of possession erected a high wooden cross. Religious instruction was given to the ExpEDITION InNTo Texas, 1675 Indians by Father Dionisio San Buena- ventura. May ro, 1675.—Having left the place called San Raymundo and traveled to- ward the north about 3 leagues, we reached a river that ran from west to east, which our Indians said was called Agua Azul (Blue Water). There were a great many fish in this river of all kinds, and it was a very beautiful place, with many poplars, willow, mesquite, and guisache trees and plains of green grass. It was uninhabited and we took possession of it in the name of the king, our master, and in sign thereof erected a high wooden cross. We called this river Rio de San Josefa. The mission- ary fathers gave religious instruction to the Indians. May rr, 1675.—Having left the place called Rio de San Josefa and traveled about 3 leagues toward the north, through a very grassy plain, with many mesquite trees, we reached avery broad, full, and swift river, its width being about 4oovaras. ‘This our Indians said was called the Rio del Norte. We found it uninhabited and deserted but for a few ranches of those Indians who construct their huts of grass; as we had traveled above the ford, our Indians determined to cross where the river was divided into three streams. It was necessary to construct rafts of wood to cross over the middle one. In crossing the first the water reached above our stirrups and almost to the covers of our saddle trees. It was 200 varas wide and a vara and a half in depth all the way through, and there were willow trees on its banks and on an island in the middle. It was very pleasing, and there were many large fish and turtles caught, to which we bear witness, hav- ing held them in our hands. We took possession in the name of the king, of said river and territory. This stream appeared to run from west toeast. We gave it the name of San Buenaventura, and in sign of possession erected a high S14 wooden cross. Father Dionisio San Buenaventura gave religious instruction to the Indians. May 13, 1675.—Having left the place called Rio San Buenaventura del Norte and traveled toward the north about 4 leagues, we reached a creek between some ranges of hills, where we found 54 Indian watriors of the Yoricas and Jeapes tribes, with loads of buffalo meat. We examined them through Don Au- gustin, the interpreter, in their language and the Spanish. Having asked them many questions, they said they had come to kill buffalo to get meat for the sustenance of their familiesand ranches, and having no food in their country, necessity had compelled them to come so far in search of it; that there was a great number of them, they could not say exactly how many; that they de- sired to become Christians and to be placed in settlements and receive re- ligious instruction from the missionaries; that the fear they had of other tribes, who were their enemies, had prevented their going to seek them ; that two of their number had been killed, those who had done this being the Ocames, Pata- quakes, and Yrbipimas; and that in proof of their submission to the king, our lord, they would go with us as far as the Indian tribes of the Sierra Dacate and Yacasole, and they would send to their ranches for their people to come out to wherever our chaplain could give them religious instruction. Wenamed this place San Gregorio Nasianseno. May 14, 1675.—We started, having with us the Indians of the Yoricas and Jeapes, already mentioned, and traveled from the place called San Gregorio Nasianseno for about three leagues to- ward the north. We reached a water- ing place in a plain without other trees than mesquite. We found it uninhab- ited and unpossessed. We took posses- sion of it in the name of the king, and in sign of possession thereof erected a high wooden cross and named the place 344 San Bisente Ferrer. "The missionary fathers gave religious instruction to the Indians. On the same day and in said province and place called San Bisente Ferrer, the Indians and Spaniards killed two buffalo for our people to eat ; the form of these animals is very ugly; they resemble bulls and cows ; the skin is covered with wool; their shoulders are high, which makes them look humpbacked ; they have a short neck and their heads are covered with long woolly hair, which hangs over their eyes and interferes with their seeing well. Their horns are short and thick, but like those of a bull; their rump and buttocks are shaped like those of a hog ; their fore- feet and knees, and from there up until the junction with the shoulders, are covered with long woolly hair, like the beard of a goat. Their tail is naked to near the end, where it has a heavy tuft of hair. The females had four teats. They were about the size of neat cattle ; they looked at people in a sidelong way like wild boars. In this same place, San Bisente Ferrer, on this same day and month and year, before me, Fernando del Bosque, lieu- tenant of the alcalde maior, appeared an Indian chief of the Bibit nation, who said he was a Christian and had been baptized in Saltillo, and another Indian, who said he was chief of the Jume nation. They were examined through the interpreter, Don Lazaro Augustin, in their language and the Spanish language. Being asked several ques- tions, they said they had desired for along time to become Christians, and some of their people had gone to the town of Saltillo and succeeded, but the greater number of them were unable to vo, for it was far and they could not bring their people, for which reason many of them had died from smallpox without receiving the waters of bap- tism, and they wished and asked to be gathered together in a settlement and Tue Narionat GeocraPHic MAGAZINE to receive instruction in the Christian doctrine. This they had not been able to do themselves ; nor had they been able to join the remainder of the tribe for fear of the barbarous Indians, who would kill them and the people they had with them, being one hundred and five persons, great and small—fifty-five warriors and the remainder women and children. In said place, San Bisente Ferrer, on said day, month, and year, before me, said lieutenant, appeared six Indian warriors who said they belonged to the Pinanacas, Xaeser, Teneinamar, who are of the party of Don Estaban, Gueiquesale. They were examined by Don Lazaro Augustin, interpreter, in their idiom and the Spanish language. Being asked why they had come to see me, they replied that they had come in the name of their chiefs and to make homage to his majesty the king, and that they wished to live under the Christian doctrine and to remain in a settlement. May 15, 1675.—Having left the place called San Bisente Ferrer with our com- pany, the missionary fathers, Spaniards and Indians, we traveled toward the north, and reached a river about four leagues from the place called San Bisente Ferrer, which our Indians said was called in their language Ona, which means salty. We took possession of it in the name of the king, and in token thereof erected a high wooden cross. Wenamed this place San Isidro Labrador. We found many live oak and mesquite trees and herds of buffalo, fine pasturage, and many fish in the river. It was unin- habited. In said place and said province, said day and year, in said place called San Isidro Labrador, before me, said lieu- tenant, appeared the chiefs, Noman, Tereodan, Teaname, Ttumamar, with their people, whom we examined through sworn interpreters acquainted with the Mexican and Castilian lan- ExrepDITION Into Texas, 1675 guages, these being Don Lazaro Au- gustin, governor of the pueblo of San Miguel de Luna, of the town of Guada- lupe, of this province, and Pascual, an Indian. These chiefs were each asked questions apart from each other to see if what they said agreed, and they all said that they were heathen, without knowledge of the true God or what He was ; nor did they know anything of the true way of salvation and were without light in regard to it ; that they wished to become Christians and to be baptized with their children and their wives and to live as such in the settlement or settle- ments in which they might be placed, and though they were too old to enjoy it themselves, their children could, and they would raise them as Christians and they would continue in the same way, and from this time they gave their alle- giance to the king, our master, Don Carlos II, and they would be friends to theSpaniards. At this they all shouted, “Viva, Viva, Viva, the King, our master!’’ and from what I observed, with much sincerity and zeal. In the name of the king I received them under the royal protection, and assured them on the part of the king that all would be accomplished, and I demanded that on their part they should live quietly and peaceably and assemble for cate- chism at the place most convenient to them. Because of the distance from their habitations and of the dissensions that existed between the barbarous tribes in the territory, the one against the other, and which lead to their kill- ing each other, and not having the means of feeding so many people my- self, I told them to remain for the pres- ent in the most convenient place. They said through the interpreter that they would do so. Their people came up and went and kissed the sleeves of the habits of the missionaries, Fathers Juan Larios and Dionisio de San Buena- ventura, and asked permission to give them an offering of what they had, in S4r5 thanksgiving to God for having opened to them the way of truth. They then placed on the ground, some a piece of lard, some a piece of tallow, and others the skins of animals, such as they use for clothing, beds, and covering. In said place and river of San Isidro, in said province, on the 16th day of May, 1675, we erected a portable altar with fittings for the purpose of cele- brating mass, and at the sound of a little bell all the people came to be present at it and to hear mass chanted by Father Juan Larios. All the people attended, and when it was over they begged Father Larios to baptize them. He made them understand by the inter- preter that he could not do this until they had learned the prayers, and he consoled them by baptizing fifty-five children at the breast, the Spaniards being sponsors for them. Religious instruction was given them, and acount, was made of those with the four chiefs and they numbered four hundred and twenty-five warriors and seven hundred and forty-seven women and children of all ages, making a total of one thousand one hundred and seventy-two. At said place of San Isidro, on said day, month, and year, I, the lieutenant of the alcalde maior, installed in pos- session of his ministry, as comiserio misionero, Father Juan Jarios, in ac- cordance with the royal provision. On said day, month, and year, and at said place, before me, said lieutenant of the alcalde maior, appeared an Indian of the Guiequesale nation, and brought into my presence a Spanish boy, who appeared to be about twelve years old. He had a line on his face, marking him from his forehead to his nose, and two lines on his cheeks, one on each, and rows of them on his left arm and one on the right. Having examined said Indian through the interpreter, D. La- zaro Augustin, and the Indian, Pascual, also an interpreter, he said, being asked where he had gotten the Spanish boy, 346 that his, the said Indian’s, mother had raised the boy; that many years before the Cabesas had brought him with others from Yndee, near Parral, and had given him to his mother, and that he loved him as his own brother, and he had brought him to the Spaniards as a proof of friendship and in order that he might be sent to his own parents. The boy was not examined at this time as to how many more Spaniards the In- dians had because he could not speak the Spanish language. Only said In- dian was asked if there were more Span- ish children among the Indians. He said that said Cabesas Indians, when they had brought this one, had another boy and a girl, and they killed the boy with their arrows, having placed said boy standing up, and he saw that he clasped a cross in his hands, and that he recited prayers and was praying until he died; and that the Spanish girl they kept with them to serve them, and that in a raid the said Cabesas made to rob and kill, one of their own number was killed, and they took the girl and shot her with arrows until she was dead, and they left her lying in that place, and that two years afterward he passed that place and found her just as she had been left; her body had not become corrupted nor had the animals eaten it; and, seeing that, he had taken her up and carried her to a cave, where she now was, and that she had very long hair, and he knew no more than this, which was the truth. May 18, 7675.—I\n said province I, said alcalde maior, having left said place called San Isidro and traveled about 8 leagues, more or less, toward the north, and having reached a place and a small stream which was said to be called Da- cate, found it abandoned and uninhab- ited. We took possession of it in the name of the king, and we gave it the name of San Bernardino, and in sign thereof we erected a high wooden cross ; and this day came before me the chief Tue Nationat GrocraPHic MAGAZINE of the Geniocane tribe of Indians, who said that he was awaiting the mission- aries, with his people in another place further on, so that they might receive religious instruction, and the reason they had not come was because of the number of their enemies, who would not allow them to pass and seek succor, and, above all, they killed one another ; and upon this the missionaries determined to grant their petition and give them religious instruction and spiritual assist- ance. May 20, 7675.—Having left the place called San Bernardino in company of said fathers, comisario misionero and capellan gobernador, and Indians, and having traveled about 8 leagues toward the north and in said district, said In- dians that had come out to receive us reached their village or assistencia. It was on a stream, between two ridges, where there were many arbors of grapes. growing like wild grapes, and the green grapes were very large, like those of Castile, and there were a great many of them, like a vineyard. We took posses- sion of it in the name of the king, and in sign thereof erected a high wooden cross. Religious instruction was given to the Indians by Father Dionisio San Buenaventura. May 21, 1675.—In said province and said place, already mentioned, which we gave the name of San Jorje, I, said lieutenant of the alcalde maior, bear witness that said fathers comisioneros ordered an altar to be erected, and onit the father Dionisio deSan Buenaventura. offered the holy sacrifice of the mass, and said Geniocanes Indians assisted at it, with those of the other tribes, and after mass they received religious in- struction from Father Juan Larios ; and having counted them there were sixty- five warriors and one hundred and thir- teen women and children, making a. total of one hundred and seventy--eight persons of said Geniocane tribe, all of whom desired to become Christians, ExpEDITION Into Texas, 1675 and asked the father Comisionero to let them become Christians,and he consoled them by telling them when they had learned how to pray he would baptize them. On this day the said comisario misionero took possession of the exer- cise of his office. May 23, 1675.—In said place of San Jorje, I, said lieutenant of the alcalde maior, having recognized how great was the number of Indians desiring to become Christians and to be placed under religious instruction, and in vil- lages and settlements, as each day there came to me chiefs from the various tribes, and as they are all far from the town of Guadalupe and enemies to each other, yet all wish to be instructed in the Christian doctrine at the same time,, and as they gather together according to their barbarous feuds, and fight and kall each other. (The country is ap- parently divided into three parts or tracts. The country which reaches from Guadalupe to the north, on the left hand, is under the control of Don Estaban, chief of the Guiequesale, and that in the center is peopled by the fol- lowers of Juan de la Cruz, captain of the Bobole nation, and that on the right hand, occupied by the Catujanos, Tili- jees, Apes, Pachaques, with their fol- lowers among the Indians) and all wish to receive religious instruction from the missionaries and Spaniards, and they are in the midst of enemies, and we were unable to carry out their wishes, I determined to return to the town of Guadalupe and make a report to the alcalde maior. May 25, 1675.—In said province I, the lieutenant of the alcalde maior, having left the place called San Jorge in said company of the comisario mis- ionero and the chaplain and traveled about 14 leagues toward the north, reached a small creek with many groves of trees. We found it deserted and un- inhabited. It was between high-peaked ridges. We took possession of it in Se] the name of the king and erected a high wooden cross in sign of possession. We gave it the name of San Pablo Er- mitano. Religiousinstruction was given to the Indians by Father Dionisio San Buenaventura, and he asked the Indians of the four chiefs, already mentioned in the report, at San Isidro and followers of Don Estaban if they would remain quiet in their territory and not fight and kill each other, and would congregate them- selves together under their principal chief, and these chiefs said that they would remain quiet, waiting until a missionary should be sent to them to instruct them, and in the meantime they would assemble in pueblos. May 29, 1675.—In said province I, said lieutenant of the alcalde maior, having left the place called San Pablo Ermitano on our return to the town of Guadalupe in company of said mission- ary fathers, the Spaniards and Indians reached another point of the Rio San Buenaventura del Norte, where we found a part of the Indians of the Bo- boles tribe with their women and chil- dren, who were there killing buffalo for their subsistence. It was some time since they had left their pueblo. They were asked if they would join with their chief and others of their tribe and re- ceive religious instruction from the mis- sionaries, and they agreed to this. June I, 1675.—In said province I, said lieutenant of said alcalde maior, having left said Rio de San Buenaven- tura and traveled about 20 leagues to- ward the west, reached a river which was said to be called the Nueces, where we found the chiefs of the Bocora and Pinanaca at some springs of water with many walnuts and groves of different kinds of trees. We took possession of it in the name of the king, and in sign thereof erected a high wooden cross. Religious instruction was given to the Indians by Father Juan Larios, and an altar was erected under a cover of branches and Father Dionisio San Bue- 348 naventura said mass, and at the sound of a bell the people congregated to re- cite the prayers. A count was made of the followers of the Bocora chief there, and they numbered 150 persons—62 warriors and 88 women and children— and in this place I gave him * possession in all that related to his ecclesiastical administration. June ro, 1675.—In said province I, the lieutenant of the alcalde maior, having left the river and place of Senor San Diego, in said company of the comisario misionero and the chaplain, Spaniards aud Indians, and traveled about twenty-two leagues, through the valley of the Rio San Antonio de Sabinas, we entered through an opening of one of the large sierras, called Obayas, and reached a creek, which we found deserted, uncultivated, and uninhabited. We took possession of it in the name of the king, for this conquest, and gave it the name of San Anbrosio, and in sign of possession we erected a high wooden cross, where the comisario misionero said mass, at which the Contore chief, Don Bernabe, with his people was present, and after mass religious instruction was given to the In- dians by the comisario misionero. We counted this nation and they numbered 78 warriors and 130 Indian women and children. June 12, 1675.—In said province I, the said lieutenant of the alealde maior, * The comisario misionero. passing ' THe Nationa, GreocrRAPHic MaGAZINE having left the place called San An- brosio, and traveled about 14 leagues as it appeared, and toward the city of Guadalupe, and opposite it, at the foot of a high sierra, and toward the west of it, in company of said missionary fathers and Spaniards, we reached a water hole, deserted and uninhabited. We took possession of it in the name of the king, and in sign of possession erected a high wooden cross and named the place San Bartolemé. At this place came into my presence Don Salbador, chief of the Bobosarigami, with some of his people, who said he had sent for the remainder of his people, who had scattered for want of food. They were given religious instruction by the comisario misionero, Father Juan Larios, and afterward they were counted, and they numbered 44 warriors and 75 women and children with the Tetecores; and they were di- rected to unite with the others, under Don Bernabe and Don Estaban. To all of which we bear faith and sign with said fathers and our assisting witnesses, who were Anbrosio de Berlanga and Diego Luis Sanchez, Fernando del Bosque, Fr. Juan Larios, Fr. Dionisio de San Buenaventura, Diego Luis San- chez, Anbrosio Berlanga. On June 12 the expedition returned to the town of Nuestra Senora de Guada- lupe, and the royal standard-bearer, Fer- nando del Bosque, reported to the alcalde maior and conquistador, Don Antonio Balcarcel Rivadaneira Sotomayor. ANSE, JeVAR IDSC (Gua DAIL eves NE of the most important and interesting efforts of the Bureau of Forestry is to encourage land- owners to start plantations of commer- cially valuabletrees. A large plantation of useful trees, such as the Hardy Ca- talpa, a few years after planting, will yield each year in posts and stakes about as large and regular a return on the original investment as an orange or fruit plantation. There are a number of Hardy Catalpa plantations in Kansas, Iowa, and Nebraska which for several years have been paying their owners very good profits. The tree grows rap- idly, and is exceedingly durable. The THe Harpy CaraLpPa 349 From Wm. I,. Hall, U.S. Department of Agriculture Posts from the Planting of 1890, Yaggy Plantation Bureau of Forestry has made a special study of the Hardy Catalpa, and re- cently published an interesting little book describing the tree, by Mr Wil- liam L. Hall. The following para- graphs are an abstract of the report : * Forest planting on the prairies west of the Mississippi River began with the earliest settlers. To plant trees for pro- tection from sun and wind seemed one of the first and most important things to be done, and with the building of a house and the breaking up of a garden patch it formed a part of the settler’s first summer’s work. Each year there- after, as time and means permitted, the plantation was increased. Scarcely a decade passed before extensive groves for the general purposes of shelter and ornament appeared on almost every farm. ‘The success of these proved that *The Hardy Catalpa By William L. Hall, Superintendent of Tree Planting. With 30 full-page plates. Bureau of Forestry, U. S. Department of Agriculture, Bulletin No. 37. the want of the natural forest could in part be supplied by planted timber. The growing of forest trees for other farm needs, such as fuel, posts, and poles, was also practiced by many set- tlers, for the prices of these materials were extremely high in the districts far from the natural forest. The idea of growing posts and poles to sell, how- | ever, did not meet with approval for a number of years. It was too long an investment to be attractive in a country just settled. About twenty-five years ago a few men, impressed with the pre- vailing high prices of such materials and believing it possible to produce them in plantations within fifteen or twenty years, began to plant timber as an in- vestment. Their example encouraged others to plant for the same purpose, and as a result of the work there are now in the Middle West quite a large number of commercial plantations, in some of which the marketing of products. has already begun. Oo Tue Natrona, GeocraPpHic MAGAZINE 35 From Wm. Ll. Hall, U. S. Department of Agriculture Trees which were not Cut Back when Young. Planting of 1891 Many side branches and crooked form the result Tue Harpy Carrara Of the trees used for commercial planting none have been planted more extensively in the region of southern Iowa and Nebraska and eastern Kansas than the Hardy Catalpa. In its native habitat along the lower Wabash and Ohio Rivers this tree nearly a century ago gained a reputation for rapid growth oo and durability. A few years’ trial on the plains sufficed to prove its good qualities for that region. It was easily propagated, grew rapidly on prairie soil, had good form, was drought resistant, had few insect or fungous enemies, and above all was a lasting timber, adapted to many uses. Such good qualities soon From Wim. L. Hall, U. S. Department of Agriculture Wood of the Hardy Catalpa After Lying Ninety Years in Water Block from a tree which grew near New Madrid, Mo., and was felled by the earthquake of 1812. It was taken out of the water a short time ago and worked into fence posts Tue NarionaL GeocraPHic MAGAZINE 354 M2 eet A ehionastee— Stes es griculture From Wm. L,. Hall, U.S. Department of A Southern Iowa ) ation of Hardy Catalpa Year-Old Plant 20- A EXPLORATIONS IN [TIBET brought it into general recognition. In the regions named it took the lead as a commercial tree, especially for such pur- poses as fence posts, telegraph and tele- phone poles, and railroad ties. Its value for most of these purposes has been quite fully demonstrated. As a post timber it has given excellent sat- isfaction. It ranks with Black Locust and Osage Orange in durability, while it surpasses them in rate of growth, form, penetrability, and freedom from checking. Altogether, as a post timber suitable for growing ina large section of the Middle West it has no equal. For telegraph and telephone poles its: only deficiency seems to be a tendency toward crookedness, but possibly this can be overcome by special treatment. So) As a railroad-tie timber the Hardy Catalpa has not had sufficient trial to demonstrate what its rank should be. Experiments have left no doubt as to its resistance to decay. The only ques- tion lies in its resistanee to wear. So far as tried, it does not stand the wear and tear of a railroad track so well as White Oak, especially under heavy traffic. In the Middle West, however, the traffic on many railroads is comparatively light, while the decay of timber is particularly rapid. Under these peculiar conditions Catalpa will probably outlast Oak as a tie timber. ‘The main commercial plan- tations of Catalpa are in lowa, Kansas, and Nebraska. Kansas especially has a number of large and highly successful plantations. pyr ORA TIONS IN IBED N interesting account is given in A a late number of the V. Y. Tribune of some recent explo- rations in the heart of Tibet by a Rus- sian subject, G. Z. Zoubikov, who suc- ceeded in residing quietly at Lhassa for some months. Zoubikov’s success de- serves especial credit in view of the recent unsuccessful attempts to enter Lhassa by Sven Hedin and Colonel Kozloff. M. Zoubikoy is a Bouriat and a gradu- ate of the Oriental Faculty of the Uni- versity of St Petersburg. As a born Buddhist and familiar from childhood with Tibetan, he found no difficulty in passing fora llama. He brought back a great number of photographs and other illustrations of the life of the country, and his book, which will soon be published, will contain much infor- mation hitherto unobtainable. M. Zoubikov made an extended re- port of his journey at a meeting of the Geographical Society a few days ago. He was immediately awarded the Przhevalsky prize, which is conferred in honor of the first Russian Tibet ex- plorer. The frontiers of Tibet, which were closed to European travelers after the French explorers Huc and Gabet were expelled from Lhassa, in 1846, have not been absolutely shut against a certain portion of Russian subjects, namely, the Buddhistic Bouriats of the Baikal region. The Bouriats are talented people, and the same value attaches to M. Zoubikov’s observations as would be the case were he a European. His stay lasted over a year. In the summer of 1900 M. Zoubikov entered Tibet from the north as a mem- ber of a caravan of seventy pilgrims, in- cluding many llamas. He approached central Tibet by the Boumza Mountain, where Przhevalsky was turned back in 1870. ‘The road led through a treeless country with snow-topped mountains extending east and west in parallel chains. The people in this region were few and nomadic. An agricultural 354° community was found within only sixty or seventy miles of Lhassa. CLIMATE AND POPULATION The climate was found to be harsh and dry. Snow falls occasionally from De- cember to March; rain from May to August. April, September, October, and November are dry. The medium annual temperature was found to be 42, 67, and 50 degrees Fahrenheit for morn- ing, noon, and night respectively. The data for December was 17, 34, and 27 degrees, and for July 60, 77, and 65 degrees. The population, which has at times been estimated at 33,000,000, is proba- bly about one-tenth of this number. It is decreasing through disease, particu- larly smallpox, and on account of the large number of celibate priests. The sons of Chinese soldiers and mer- chants temporarily resident in Tibet are counted Chinese, the daughters Tibet- ans. Other foreign residents are Indians from Cashmere and Mongolians and Tibetans from Nepul, the latter being skilled artisans, architects, sculptors, and jewelers. The Cashmere Mahom- etans are traders. ‘They usually convert their Tibetan wives. Almost all the land in central Tibet belongs to the Dalai Llama. Only high officials in Lhassa have hereditary homes. The Tibetan houses are of brick and stone, and have chimneys only in the kitchen. The other rooms have holes to let the smoke escape, and are cheerlessly cold. Dried dung is the principal fuel. The common folks wear white, the wealthy red,officials yellow, and soldiers blue clothing of homespun. Jewels are worn in great abundance by the women. Barley meal, soup, the raw flesh of the yak and of sheep, butter, sour milk, and vegetables are main items of the diet. Wheat spirits sell for a cent a bottle. Men smoke tobacco and the priests take snuff. Tue NationaL GrocRAPHic MaGAZINE PEOPLE RELIGIOUS AND IMMORAL The people of central Tibet are pas- sionately attached to their religious ob- servances, which are purely formal. Prayers are regarded as of magic po- tency and figure in all ordinary and extraordinary affairs of life. Medicine is in small popular favor. Morals are primitive, and marriage ties are loose. Both polygamy and polyandry are com- mon. Agriculture and cattle-raising are the principalemployments. Wheat, barley, peas and beans, cattle, sheep, yaks, horses, asses, and mules are the main products. Yaks and asses are used as pack animals. Labor is cheap, men being paid two or three cents a day, while women usually serve for their food and clothing. Even a llama re- ceives only ten cents for a whole day’s prayers. Sheepskins, cattle, yak tails, statues, books, and yellow llama caps are exported. The yak tails serve as horse tails in the outfit of Turkish pachas. English and Indian cottons and woolens and copper and enamel utensils are introduced from India and tea, silks, cottons, horses, and asses from China. EXHAUSTING METHOD OF WORSHIP Lhassa was built in the seventh cen- tury. It has a picturesque location on the southern slope of a mountain, with luxurious gardens on the west and south. The Uitchu River passes to the south of the city. Dikes and canals have been constructed as protections against overflows. - A fine, broad street around the city serves for religious processions and penitential exercises. Penitents go the length of this street, falling to the ground every five or six feet, so that in a day they prostrate themselves about 3,000 times. The city is small, having at most only 10,000 regular inhabitants. It is, however, an important trade center. ‘The native traders are all women. GARDENING IN NorruHeRN ALASKA The Temple of Buddha, in the center of the city, is about 140 feet square. It is three stories high and has three gilded Chinese roofs. It shelters a gigantic bronze statue of Buddha, which has a hammered gold and jeweled headdress. A sacrificial fire, fed with melted butter, burns before the statue. Other statues and relics are kept in other chambers of the same temple, among which is the statue of the Goddess of Women, to which are offered spirits and wheat. The wheat is at once eaten by mice. In the same temple are also rooms for the Dalai Llama and his council. The residence of the Dalai Llama is ; about a mile away from Lhassa, on Mt Bodala. It was built in the seventh century. Near by is the old castle Hodson-Bodala, which is 1,400 feet long and nine stories high. Here are the treasury, the mint, the schools of theol- ogy and medicine, quarters for 1,200 officials and 500 monks, and a prison. As many as 1,000 priests take part in religious processions to this mountain. M. Zoubikoy also minutely describes various monasteries and temples, in- cluding three near Lhassa, where 15,000 monks are mainly engaged in learned pursuits. At one of these—Brabun— nearly 6,000 boys, young men, and even gray-bearded patriarchs are studying theology, the total number of resident monks being 8,000. SELECTION OF THE LLAMA Tibetan Buddhism, brought from In- dia in the seventh century, struggled against the native Shamanism until the ninth century, when a compromise was 355 agreed upon. According to the current teaching, there are many spirits which are continually reincarnated in men. The Dalai Llama is the living Buddha. Another defender of the faith is the spirit Choidshen, whose power is mani- fested through pious ascetics who spend their lives in contemplation. Since the fifteenth century all power, civil and spiritual, has been nominally in the hands of the Dalai Llama, but China maintains a Manchu resident and anarmy. In order to avoid strife in selecting a Dalai Llama, the electoral council places three strips of paper with the names of three boys in an urn, and the Manchu resident removes one with a small staff. The new Dalai Llama’s education is intrusted to a college of learned men. Until his twenty-second year the government is in the hands of a regent appointed by the Emperor of China. The present Dalai Llama is twenty-seven yearsold. Heis the fifth since 1806, one of the regents having continued in authority for an unusually long time, owing to three children se- lected to be Llamas having died before attaining majority. The Dalai Llamas’ Council, in whose hands is the actual power, embraces four so-called ‘‘ Galons,’’ appointed by the Emperor of China. ‘The administra- tion is in the hands of a closed aristoc- racy, and bribery and corruption are nearly universal. Among the common penalties are drowning, torture, flog- ging, banishment, and fines. The Tib- etan army of four thousand men is poorly disciplined, and is armed with bows and old fashioned guns. Robbery flourishes. GARDENING IN NORTHERN ALASKA By MiIppLeTon SMITH gardening in Alaska, north of Pree: the first experimental the Arctic circle, was done by the International Polar Expedition to Point Barrow, Alaska, 1881-1883, which was organized for the purpose of coop- 356 erating in the work of circumpolar ob- servation proposed by the International Polar Conference. The main object of the expedition was the prosecution of observations in terrestrial magnetism and meteorology. Experimental gar- dening was an elective investigation. The arctic night at Point Barrow, which is of 70 days’ duration, ends at noon on January-23, when the upper edge of the sun’s disk appears above the southern horizon. ‘The next day the entire disk is visible. Each suc- ceeding day the sunrises a little earlier and a little more to the east of south, and sets a little later and a little more to the west of south, and finally, when the day and night are of equal length, it rises directly in the east and sets in the west. The day continues still to lengthen and the night to shorten until the middle of May, when the midnight sun appears above the northern horizon and the long arctic day begins; the sun then remains above the horizon both day and night for 70 days, or until July 24, when it dips its lower disk at midnight below the northern horizon, and night and day again begin. But at no time are the sun’s rays at Point Barrow vertical. The maximum alti- tude is 42° 3’, which occurs at noon on June 22. The snow does not begin to melt until after the sun remains continuously above the horizon, and does not disappear ’ before July, but the landcloseto the coast is practically free from snow by the fifth of June. The snowfall is very light, the depth on the land along the coast at no time exceeding 15 or 18inches. The total annual precipitation—rainfall or melted snow—is only eight inches. A. level treeless area (tundra) occu- pies the entire Point Barrow region. The subsoil, principally sand and gravel, perpetually frozen, is covered on the tundra generally by a light, clayey soil, and at spots near the coast by a dark, loam-like soil, which thaws to a depth Tue Nationa GeocraPpHic MAGAZINE of from 3 to 9 inches. Upon the latter soil, within 200 yards of the ocean water line, the gardening described in this article was done. The soil has been enriched somewhat by refuse from Eskimo iglus, or permanent dwellings, which many years previous existed there. The garden was dug to the depth of about 4 inches and raked. No other preparation of the soil was made, and no further attention was given to the garden from the time of seeding to harvest day. On June 13 theseed of lettuce, radish, and mustard were sown. By this date caterpillars, worms, flies, and beetles appeared ; ranunculus flowers were in bloom. June 21, one day before. the sun reached its highest altitude and eight days after the date of seeding, the lettuce and radish germinated, but the mustard failed of germination. By this date additional species of flowers, in- cluding the daisy and the willow, were in bloom, and the pools of fresh water, which had formed on the tundra from rain and melted snow, were fairly alive with insect life, upon which the red phalarope was feasting. The following table shows the tem- perature, precipitation, and weather from date of seeding to germination : al ture. ete Month ive ee | peseipe State of Max.) Min.) Mean.| YAS | WSRUESE. OFM, |) CI, |) Se, | Inches. June 13 | 36.1 | 31-8] 34.25 | 0.00 | Foggy. 14 | 37-0] 32.0] 34.52 |. 0.21 | Cloudy. 15 | 35-0 | 31-9] 33.75 | 0-12 | Foggy. 16 | 35-2] 29.1] 32.41 | 0.00 | Foggy. 17 | 36.9 | 29.0| 34.20] 0.00 | Foggy. 18 | 45.2 | 30-9] 38.55 | 0.00 | Clear. 19 | 41.5 | 35-1 | 38.94) 0.01 | Cloudy. 20 | 38.9 | 33.0| 35.57) 0.05 | Cloudy. 21 | 35.3 | 31-0] 33:52} 0.02 | Cloudy. The minimum temperature was be- low freezing seven days out of the nine required for germination. The maxi- mum was above 40° on only two days. GARDENING IN NorTHERN ALASKA ‘The mean daily temperature, from hourly readings, ranged from 32°.41 to 38°.94, the general average mean for the entire time being 35°.08. The total precipitation was 0.41 inches. The state of the weather was cloudy or foggy, excepting one day, when it was clear. Flurries of snow were not in- frequent. On July 10, twenty-seven days after seeding and nineteen days after germi- nation, harvesting began. ‘The lettuce leaves were from 1 to 2 inches in width and from 3 to 4inches in length. The radishes, spherical in form, were from: ¥% tor inch in diameter. The condi- tion of these vegetables at the time of harvest was perfect. The quality could not be excelled by any grown anywhere in lower latitudes, Antarctica, by infer- ence, excepted. Table Showing Temperature, Precipitation, and Weather from Date of Germination to Flarvest. Temperature. ..| State Month. | Be of FE Max.| Min. |Mean| “*''°- |weather. | oF, | oF, | oF, Inches. June 22} 34.3 | 26.8 | 30.92| 0.01 | Cloudy 23} || BA2 || BO | Buss lloooeooac Fair. PY Boe |) GXohaw | Bites oe caeuo Clear. 25| 53-5 | 34.0 | 43.00| 0.00 | Fair. Ad)|| BS || BO || ECP |locssccde Cloudy 27| 33-7 | 29.6 |32.27| 0.03 | Cloudy AS) || ZViLG) || POLS || B27) \l5 su oc00s Cloudy. 29) 37:5 | 29.8 | 34.20] 0.00 | Cloudy. 30| 40.6 | 32.0 |3514| 0.00 | Foggy. July 1] 43.4 | 32.2 | 39.10] 0.02 | Cloudy. 2| 48.7 | 34.0] 42.18] 0.00 | Fair. 3| 39:8 | 31 6 | 35.37] 0.03 | Cloudy. 4| 41.2 | 32.2 | 37.72| 0.00 | Cloudy. 5| 474] 33.2] 41.50| 0.00 | Fair. 6} 46.7 | 39.8 | 43.97| 0.00 | Fair. 7) 60.6 | 42.2 | 53.35] 0.00 | Clear. 8| 490] 36.2 | 44.28] 0.00 | Clear. 9| 43-4 | 29-8 | 35.98] 0.04 | Foggy. 10} 55-2} 37-3 | 4651 | 9.00 Clear. During the nineteen days required for the crops to mature the minimum tem- 35.7 perature was 32° or below for nine days. The maximum temperature was 50° or above for three days only. ‘The mean daily temperature, from hourly observa- tions, ranged from 32°.92 to 53°.35, the general average mean for the entire time being 38°.16. ‘The total precipitation - was 0.13 inches. ‘here were 4 clear, 5 fair, and 10 cloudy or foggy days. A study of the conditions under which the plants germinated and matured is not only curiously interesting, but sug- gests that there was some stimulating force—perhaps the large amount of at- mospherical electricity—which caused them to arrive at maturity in a much shorter period than those grown in tem- perate zones. Whatever the agency, inasmuch as the summer season is so very brief, it is absolutely necessary that plant life in the north should arrive at maturity very quickly in order to per- petuate the species. The vast tundras of northern Alaska are nature’s gardens—the most exten- sive, the least cultivated, the most pro- ductive of any on the American conti- nent. Every summer continuous beds of flowers on these level treeless areas extend north from the Arctic Circle to the shores of the ocean. ‘True, the flowering plants are lowly in stature, but they are not pitiful or frost pinched as might besupposed. True, they keep close to the frozen ground, as if in love with mother earth, but they display masses of color—yellow, purple, and blue—so bright as to make them visible at great distances ; and in the fall of the year their ripe foliage and the golden sunshine cause the tundras to fairly glow in rich colors—red, purple, and yellow— still further intensified by the varied colors of the ripening berries growing almost everywhere, all blending har- moniously with the neutral tints of the ground lichens and mosses, on which they seem to be painted. EXCAVATIONS At ABYDOS HE following letter from Prof. Flinders Petrie to the London | Times outlines his work at Abydos during the present year : To the Editor of the Zimes - Sir: The continuation of the work of the Egypt Exploration Fund at Abydos this year has given a wider view of the early civilization, of which the general lines had been fixed by the previous work on the Royal Tombsand the town. The clearance of the old temple site over several acres has brought to light, ina depth of about 20 feet, no less than ten successive temples ranging in age from about 5,000 to500 B. C. For the first time we can see on one spot the changes from age to age through the whole of Egyptian history. To separate these buildings was an affair of anatomy rather than spade work; the walls of mud brick were so commingled with the soil that incessant section-cutting with a sharp knife was the only way to discriminate the brickwork. Often only a single course of bricks or a thin bed of foundation sand was all that told of the great buildings which had existed here for centuries. Over 5,000 meas- urements were taken for the plans and levels. The main result as regards the religion is that Osiris was not the original god of Abydos ; the jackal god, Upuaut, and then the god of the West, Khenta- menti, were honored here down to the XIIth dynasty. The most striking change is seen about the IVth dynasty, when the temple was abolished, and only a great hearth of burnt offering is found, full of votive clay substitutes for sacrifices. This exactly agrees with the account of Herodotus that Cheops had closed the temples and forbidden sacrifices. ‘This materializing of history is made the more real by finding an ivory statuette of Cheops of the finest work, which shows for the first time the face and character of the great builder and organizer who made Egyp- tian government and civilization what it was for thousands of years after. This carving is now in the Cairo Museum. The discoveries of the civilization of the Ist dynasty, the beginning of the kingdom, expand what we already had from my work inthe Royal’Tombs. Of Menes, the founder, we have part of a large globular vase of green glaze with his name inlaid in purple; thus poly- chrome glazing is taken back thousands of years before it was previously known to exist. The free use of great tiles of glaze for wall coverings shows how usual the art wasthen. In the highest art of delicate ivory carving there are several pieces of this age; especially the figure of an aged king, for its subtlety and character, stands in the first rank of such work, comparable to the finest carvings of Greece or Italy. We must now reckon the earliest monarchy as the equal of any later age in such technical and fine art. Pottery of forms and material quite« unknown in Egypt also belongs to this remote age ; and it proves to be identi- cal with that in Crete of the late neo- lithicage. This fresh connection illus- trates the trade and the chronology of that period. A head of a camel mod- eled in pottery takes back its relation to Egypt some 4,000 years; hitherto no trace of it had appeared before Greek times. An ivory carving of a bear ex- tends also the fauna of early Egypt. The great fort long known as the Shunet ez Zebib is now connected with the remains of another fort, which was discovered between that and the Coptic Deir, which is in a third fort. These buildings prove, now to have been the fortified residences of the kings of the IId dynasty, whose sealings we have found in the dwelling-rooms. Of a later age may be noted some GeocraPHic Norss large decrees of the Vth and VIth dynasties, the oldest example of iron yet known, which is of the VIth dy- nasty, and in the XVIIIth dynasty a great memorial tablet of the grand- mother of that line, and the remains of a cliff temple of the type of Deir el Bahri. ‘These are but the salient points of a winter’s work of much historical interest. The collection will be ex- hibited as usual at University College, Gower street, from July 1 to 25. Unhappily, the growing lawlessness of Egypt, which Lord Cromer noticed in each of his recent reports, has affected our work, and ‘‘a large number of of- fenses, not very serious in themselves, but which cumulatively become serious, have been committed, and but too often have been committed with impunity ”’ (Report, 1902, p. 40). A statue was stolen from my house, and though the footprint of the thief exactly agreed with the very peculiar foot of one of the men who were notoriously accused in the village, and all the links were named by witnesses, yet no conviction could be obtained; £35 are said to have changed hands as bribes over this. Next, my workmen from Quft were subject to a general conspired assault in the market and each robbed of his money at once; but no redress whatever could be obtained. The police officer added to the injury by taking away one man who had been beaten to see the doctor, who did nothing but detain him $59) till he paid ros. bribe to be let go. Last year the relations of a man who died of fever were mulcted of 46 by another doctor, and on my complaining the off- cial inquiry resulted in giving an ac- count which was absurdly false, to my personal knowledge. It is impossible that the present ma- chinery can work to elicit the truth. Witnesses are examined by petty off- cers, who dictate the final statement of evidence at their own will, and the wit- nesses are summoned through their sheikh, who is the first man to be ““squared’’ by the offenders, and “who, they think, will assuredly, sooner or later, endeavor to wreak his vengeance on them’’ (Report, p. 36). Such a system—dating long before the British occupation—is the most perfect for facilitating bribery and the suppres- sion of truth. This is not the place to discuss the remedies. Happily, Lord Cromer considers that ‘‘the points which most require attention are the police, the department of justice, and sanita- tion.’’ I do not. touch on more per- sonal threats to our party and being fired at, as I only wish here to refer to the failure of justice. But matters have gone so far that we must look for safety to our own resources rather than to the law, which has in each case proved to us useless. I remain your obedient servant, W. M. FLINDERS PETRIE. University College, June 22, 1903. GEOGRAPHIC NOTES FOREIGN COMMERCE OF THE UNITED STATES IN 1903 HE foreign commerce of the United States in the fiscal year just ended is larger than in any preceding year in its history. ‘The total of imports and exports, as shown by the Department of Commerce and Labor through its Bureau of Statistics, is, for the year 1903, $2,445,610,417, against $2,310,- 937,156 in the year 1900, which was considered the banner year prior to 1903. Imports are larger than in any preceding year and exportsare larger than in any preceding year save in the exceptional year 1901. The imports for the first time erossed the billion-dollar line, the total 360 being $1,025,619,127, and the exports for the second time crossed the 1,400 million line, being $1,419,991,290, or practically 1,420 millions. ‘The single year in which the value of exports ex- ceeded those of 1903 is the fiscal year 1901, when the total was $1,487,764,991. The imports exceeded those of 1893 by about 159 million dollars and the ex- ports exceeded those of 1903 by about 572 million dollars. The imports, there- fore, have increased 18.4 per cent during the decade and exports have increased 67.5 per cent during the same period. The growth in importation, which is the most striking characteristic of the year’s commerce, is very largely in ma- terials for use in manufacturing. Only eleven months’ figures are yet available in such detailed form as to show the in- crease by great groups, but the figures of the eleven months ending with May show that articles in a crude condition for use in manufacturing increased 62 million dollars, or about 20 per cent, as compared with the corresponding months of last year; articles partially manufactured for use in manufacturing increased 4 million dollars, or about 5 per cent; articles manufactured and ready for consumption increased 18 mil- lion dollars, or about 13 per cent, and articles of voluntary use, luxuries, &c., increased 14 million dollars, or about 12 per cent, while articles of food and live animals increased 15 million dollars, or about 8 per cent. WHITE POPULATION OF THE CHIEF BRITISH COLONIES R W. P. REEVES, in a recent issue of the London 7zmes, gives a careful estimate of the population of the principal British colonies, which is just now a matter of special interest. The figures given with regard to it by writers and speakers differ widely. This is not surprising, as most of the statements are based upon official re- THe NatrionaL GrocraPpHic MaGAZzINE turns published from two to twelve years ago. In thecase of Africa south of Zambesi, it is impossible to hope for exactness, and Mr Reeves has therefore given a figure slightly below what seems to him probably correct. The total— 1I,075,000—will doubtless appear low to many British colonists, but not only aborigines, but Asiatics resident in the colonies, have been deducted. White Population in July, 1903 Gana aie:s ajc oe bron pecertoregertele error 5,525,000 PAUStralia) sNcisererelersiesvere spe tmetnlsievees 3,860,000 SOUEHBAIH Case Ee ere renee erre 875,000 New Zealand......... Sno OOOO 815,000 otal). syste Micon T1,075,000 For some little time past the average increase of whites in the British colonies has been at the rate of about 20,000 per month. The Building of Dalny.—Russia, in the name of the Chinese Eastern Railway Company, is making tremendous prog- ress in building the great commercial city of Dalny, which has superseded Port Arthur. The Russian engineers, with 20,000 Chinese laborers to carry out their plans, have already made 50 miles of streets, of which 12 miles are macad- amized; one good-sized dry dock has been built and another dry dock large enough for the largest steamers is nearly completed. Repair shops and foundries, tramways and electric power plants have been constructed. An enormous pier is nearly finished, which is to be 1,925 feet long and 350 feet wide, and has a depth of water of from 18 to 28 feet and which will contain seven railway tracks and nine large warehouses. The present population of the city is over 42,000. The Bureau of Statistics of the Depart- ment of Commerce and Labor has pub- lished a comprehensive report on ‘‘ The Building of Dalny,’’ by the U. S. com- mercial agent at Dalny, M. M. Lang- horne (Advance Sheets of Consular Re- ports, July 28, 1903, No. 1708). Office Hours: 8.30 A. M. to 5 P. M. NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY OFFICES Rooms 107, 108 Corcoran Building Fifteenth and F Sts. N. W., Washington, D. C. Telephone, Main 471 ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL s President W J McGEE c Oo 3 0 Vice-President JOHN JOY EDSON c O 5 6 Treasurer A. J. HENRY . 6 5 O ° - Secretary ELIZA R. SCIDMORE ° - Foreign Secretary BOARD OF MANAGERS 1901-1903 1902-1904 1903-1905 MARCUS BAKER A. GRAHAM BELL CHARLES J. BELL HENRY F. BLOUNT. DAVID T. DAY GEORGE DAVIDSON F. V. COVILLE A. W. GREELY WM. M. DAVIS D. C. GILMAN ANGELO HEILPRIN JOHN JOY EDSON S. H. KAUFFMANN RUSSELL HINMAN G. K. GILBERT WILLIS L. MOORE W J McGEE A. J. HENRY ISRAEL C. RUSSELL - GIFFORD PINCHOT O. P. AUSTIN R. D. SALISBURY O. H. TITTMANN C. HART MERRIAM The National Geographic Magazine is sent free of charge to all members of the National Geographic Society Recommendation for Membership in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY The following form is enclosed for use in the nomination of persons for membership Please detach and fill in blanks and send to the Secretary DUES: Annual membership, $2; Life membership, $50. If check be enclosed, please make it payable to order of the National Geographic Society, and, if at a distance from Washington, remit by New York draft or post-office money-order. To the Secretary, National Geographic Society, Washington, D. C.: Please propose GG ORE Fae eet re eee ete See ee he eee ee Sra a a a ONG EO IE, eel eg Ee ee for membership in the Society. “Better than going abroad, and the best preparation for a trip abroad.” ° PORTLAND SUMMER SCHOOL PORTLAND, MAINE. Portland Summer School JULY 13 TO AUGUST 21 2 Successor to the famous Sauyveur Summer School, founded in 1875 at Amherst College. Courses in modern and ancient lan- guages, culture of the speaking voice, instrumental and yocal music. For illustrated circular address : “A Sublime Spectacle’? NIAGARA FALLS One of the natural wonders of the world. A charming place at any sea- son of the year, reached from every direction by the NEW YORK CENTRAL LINES A visit to the Falls is an object lesson in geography ; an exhibition of landscapes that no painter can equal, and a glimpse of the latest develop- ments of the industrial world. A copy of “America’s Summer Resorts” will be sent free, postpaid, on receipt of a postage stamp by George H. Daniels, General Passenger Agent, New York Central and Hud- son River Railroad, Grand Central Station, New York. ARNOLD WERNER-SPANHOOFD Central High School, - Washington, D. C. 7 WE make a specialty of HIGH GRADE WQRK per SclENTIFIC »° TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS ees ENGRAVERS PHILADELPHIA PLATES TO PRINT IN ONE OR MORE CoLons The filanhattan Press-Clipping Bureau ARTHUR CASSOT, Proprietor NEW YORK (Knickerbocker Building) LONDON COR. FIFTH AVENUE AND 14TH STREET, NEW YORK Will supply you with all personal reference and clippings on any subject from all the papers and periodicals published here and abroad. Our large staff of readers can gather for you more valuable material on any current subject than you can get in a lifetime. TERMS: 100 clippings .. $ 5.00 250 clippings . . . $ 12.00 500 clippings . . . $22.00 1,000 clippings . . . $35.00 a i. HENRY ROMEIKE’S ae BUREAU OF PRESS CUTTINGS | oem 33 Union Square, New York \ " - Reads every paper of importance published in the United States, ” ‘and through its European agencies in London, Paris, Berlin and Vienna | every paper of importance published in Europe and the British ~ Golonies.. One subscription on any given subject will bring notices . from the United States, and if desired also from the European papers, WRITE FOR TERMS BACK VOLUMES OF THE - National Geographic Magazine Be The NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE has on hand a few copies of complete back volumes which may be obtained at the following prices: Vol. 3, 1891 By Lk eo RON N OR POQO «chic Coe a 2,776 ‘Seana Vol 5;.1893 5 enaSO TAGN 1a: FQOO 2 gO: 8 Vol. 6, 1894-5. . : 4.20 ree oVOI..97,° 1806. . eee ie Ls ' Vol. 8, 1897 Seka LOOSE VOL GTA TOMB ay 3-0 F VOGr oe SOUR ser 2.50 The NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE will pay the _ following prices for copies of certain back numbers : Vol: 1, 1889, No. 2, $1.00; No. 4, ‘$1.00 * Vol. 2, 1890, No. 2, $1.00 “Vol. 4; 1892; No. 1, $0.50; No. 2, $1.50; No. 3, ~ + f 0.50; No. 4, $0.50; No. 5, $1.00; No. 6, $1.00 ~, Vol. 10, 1899, No. 6; $0.50; Index, $0.59 ~ Nol, 13, 1902, No. 1, $0.30 a ubbard. Memorial Building, Washington, DC. SPECIAL MAPS PUBLISHED BY THE NATIONAL SP GEOGRAPHIC pe ples Map of the Philippines G feet 2 inches x 3 feet). Prepared under the direction of the War Departament. Map of South Africa (46x33 inches). : a3 : » Prepared under the direction of the War Department, ie Map of Northeastern China (36x28 inches), Prepared under the direction of the War. Department, : Map of the Chinese Empite, letads and the Russian-Manchetian Rail way (3 x7%% inches). Sea: - Map of Alaska (28x 24 inches). is : Prepared under the direction of. the U-S. Coieaen Survey A Series of Twelve “Maps on the Alaskan Boundary Dispute. t - < Prepared under the direction of Hon. John W. Foster, eenetierr. of | Chart of the World on Mercator’s Projection (48x27 inches). as _. Prepared under the direction of the Hydrographie Belen Map of Cuba (18x7%4 inches)< — Prepared under the direction of. Robert T.. Hill. ee s A Series of Twenty-five Full-page — showing storm tracks an methods of weather sctieprei at Lae New York PRESS OF JUDD & DETWEILER, WASHINGTON, D.C. THE NATIONAL GRAPHIC MAGAZINE i) Vol. XIV OCTOBER, 1903 No. x0 i CONTENTS NTHE GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF INSANITY IN THE UNITED STATES. BY DR WILLIAM A, WHITE, SUPERIN- TENDENT GOVERNMENT HOSPITAL FOR THE INSANE, | WASHINGTON, D.c.. rg 361 a PEARY AND THE NORTH POLE” Pe ene en Gk aan wip 1) THE INFLUENCE OF FORESTRY UPON THE LUMBER INDUS- © TRY OF THE UNITED STATES. BY OVERTON W. PRICE, ASSISTANT FORESTER, BUREAU OF FORESTRY . 2 3B im | GUILLEMOT Eccs bt 2 CRE OP RS aA rte Gate a4 |) sxuLy OF THE IMPERIAL MAMMOTH Ree hee tania: 388 DO EIGHTH ANNUAL GEOGRAPHIC “CONGRESS anaes ree 388 MMMILIPPINE CENSUS . 2... pO ie. dod “CORRECTION \ ie gate ete onmaan EAN Serica a0 cca oon tata nit aac eee Te ) DIRECTORY OF OFFICERS AND COUNCILLORS OF GEO- » GRAPHIC SOCIETIES OF THE UNITED STATES . . » 392 Published by the National Geographic Society, Hubbard Memorial Building, P Washington, D. C. ‘$2.50 a Year 25 Cents a Number niered at the Post-office in Washington, D. C., as Second-class Mail Matter, PAGE GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE _ ILLUSTRATED MONTHLY, published. by. the: AS Nationa: Grocraruic Society, at Washing- — . ton, D. C. All editorial communications ~ should be addressed to the Editor of the NationaL GEOGRAPHIC Macazine, Hubbard Memorial Bald ing, Washington, D. C. Business communica. _ tions should be addressed to the National ‘Geo- — graphic Society, Hubbard Memorial Sa ae ee D. — 2 “o = cENTS * NUMBER; $2.50 A YEAR - Editor; GILBERT a. GROSVENOR Associate Editors Siok » GHNERAL A. OW. GREELY =~ SR ee O. H. TITTMANN S Chief Signal eae US. Army eer aes - Superintendent of the U oe Coast ‘ = and G5eodetic eked Pes roe ie i Ww 7 cane oe poe ie Lene ee 3 Ethnologist in Caste Bureau of 0. P. AUSTIN” & Eee aS mashes dara Ethnology B ee: Chief of Sia oe of. Stalled. a paid epee ‘ eparimen ¢. HART MERRIAM Speen Se eyes A ommerce and Chief of the iolavical Siarey: U. AS ; ; Se eae bead pried of Agriculture. ped DAVID Tr. DAY v7 $e + ; : Chief. of the Division of ‘Mischat at BLIZA RUHAMAH SCIDMORE ewes yecunate, x Spigelges ILLUSTRATED. . 408 a THE ZIEGLER POLAR EXPEDITION. ILLUSTRATED . . 414 4 THE WORK OF THE MINING BUREAU OF THE PHILIPPINE p ISLANDS. BY CHARLES H. BURRITT e o } THE NEW CONE OF MONT icaghen ILLUSTRATED RICHARD URQUHART GOODE, WITH PORTRAIT es wv “GEOGRAPHIC LITERATURE : i ; : : ay bee : ' “PROGRAM OF MEETINGS on THE NATIONAL Siamon aabteseaty > SOCIETY, 1903-1904. E 3 : Published by the National asec eas Hubbard Memorial Hall, oa Washington, D. C. $2.50 a Year 25 Cents a Number : Entered at the Pest-office in Washington, D. C., as Second-class Mall Matter, ee hee be addressed 1 ‘© ) the _ GEOGRAPHIC. Magazine, Hal ‘Washington, D ‘should be addressed t oe Seg oe Me = oo ie : w v McGEE # Chief, ‘Des optional of Anthropol and Ethn nology, Louisiana Pur: ime cae , cS. HART MBRRIAM gee Chief of the. Biological. Se) es oy ee iy ‘MARCUS BAKER a oe ig ld institution “WILLIS 1 ‘MOORE ~~ Chief of the Weather Para U. S. sintee st of cine de Voi. XIV, No. 11 WASHINGTON NovEMBER, 1903 THE WRANGELL MOUNTAINS, ALASKA* Watrer C. MENDENHALL OF THE UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OUNT WRANGELL, the act- M ive volcano in the valley of the Copper River, was named in honor of Baron Von Wrangell, gov- ernor of the Russian colonies in Alaska from 1831 to 1836. The peak was no doubt first seen by white men during some of the various official attempts by the Russians in the early part of the century to explore Copper River, al- though they seem to have known of it, under the name Chechitno Volcano, in the eighteenth century, probably from native accounts. The last, the most promising, and the most tragic of the Russian exploring expeditions was that led by the creole Serebrenikoff in 1848. He, with two white companions, was sent by Tebenkof, at that time chief director of the Russian colonies in America, to examine the Copper to its source, then to visit the distant Kwik- pak, as the Russians called the Yukon. The work was carried through the Chugatch Mountains which border the coast to some point beyond the mouth of the Copper’s western tributary, the Tazlina, where Serebrenikoff and his companions were murdered by natives, whom their behavior had goaded to desperation. Afterward the natives re- turned the records of the explorers to the Russian authorities. Probably Russian traders visited the Copper Valley and the Wrangell Moun- tain region between 1848 and 1867, the date of the transfer of the territory to the United States, for they knew of the easy route from Cook Inlet, where they had strong colonies, by way of the Matanuska Valley to Lake Plevezenie ; but there seems to have been no further official attempt to explore in this direc- tion. After the purchase, our first clear ac- count of the mountain is from the diary of a prospector, John Bremner, who in 1884 ascended the Copper with the in- terior natives who were returning from the coast to their winter homes. Brem- ner was in search of the great blocks of native copper which were currently re- ported to exist in the region. His trip must have seemed hazardous, for he was without white companions, and the © Copper River Indians had sustained a * Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. 396 bad reputation since the days of the Russian occupation. Bremner expected to winter at Taral, just below the junc- tion of the Copper and its great eastern tributary, the Chittyna, and he carried out his intention in spite of the diffi- culties which the undertaking involved. The Indians stole his flour, so he snared and aterabbits. They tested his powers as ashaman by calling him in in cases of sickness. He prescribed thorough baths and applied mustard plasters, curing his patients and making illness a thing to be dreaded at Taral. All of this and more is recorded in a diary whose English and spelling are as origi- nal as the tale they tell. Bremner describes the phenomena which he witnessed of Mount Wrangell in eruption, and gives a brief ‘account of his attempt during the winter to climb the volcano. He estimated it to be 25 or 30 miles from Taral ; its actual distance is 40 miles. ‘The natives, al- ways superstitious concerning the moun- tain, declined to go with him, so he started out alone. He failed of course in midwinter to reach a summit 14,000 feet above the sea, and had his ears and toes badly frozen as a result of the attempt. In the early spring of 1885, under orders from the War Department, Lieut. Henry T. Allen, U. S. Army, the present efficient head of the native con- stabulary in the Philippine Islands, undertook an exploration of the Copper and of the T'ananaand Koyukuk Rivers. Because of the resolution displayed, the difficulties overcome, and the results achieved, Lieutenant Allen’s work stands asa model tothis day.. At Taral he found Bremner and added him to the party which already contained, in ad- dition to Sergeant Robertson and Private Fisher, Bremner’s partner, Peder John- son. Allen reached Taral over the ice from Alaganik on April 10, and a few days later began a difficult journey up the Chittyna, the great eastern fork of Tue NatrionaL GeocrapHic MaGaZzInE the Copper, and explored it nearly to its source. Later the ascent of the Copper was resumed, and the portage was made from the Indian village of Batzulnetas on the upper Copper to the Tanana Valley by way of Suslota Pass. While within the Copper Valley, Lieu- tenant Allen went almost around the group of mountains of which Mount Wrangell is the center. He made con- stant observations on the individual peaks of the group, and later published, in an account of his work, the first map upon which the companion peaks of Wrangell appear. These he named Blackburn, in honor of Senator Black- burn ; Sanford, after an ancestor of the explorer ; Drum, forthe Adjutant Gen- eral of the Army, and Tillman, in honor of Professor Tillman of the U. S. Mili- tary Academy. Mount Wrangell had already been named by the Russians, so that upon Lieutenant Allen’s map five great peaks are shown where one had been known before. ‘The actively vol- canic character of Mount Wrangell, which had been referred to in Bremner’s diary, is repeatedly confirmed by Allen, to whom the smoke column was fre- quently visible. After Allen’s explorations, the next geographically important work in the area was done by Dr C. Willard Hayes, who in 1891, in company with Fred- erick Schwatka and Mark Russell, made the long journey on foot from Fort Sel- kirk on the Yukon tothe Copper Valley. Discovering and crossing Scolai Pass, unknown before this time, the hardy explorers built a boat on the upper Nizina from the canvas in which their blankets had been wrapped, and in this frail craft floated down the Nizina and the Chittyna to the Copper. Scolai Pass, which with its approaches was mapped by Doctor Hayes, is properly to be regarded as the eastern limit of the group whose dominant summits had been indicated by Allen. In 1898, during the first year of the 9) 7/ WranceLt Mountains, ALASKA Photo by W. C. Mendenhall Mount Wrangell View taken from the government trail aboye Tonsina bridge, 45 miles from the summit of the mountain 398 rush to Alaska, some additional map- ping in the Copper Valley was done by army officers and by prospectors, and especially by Schrader and Mahlo, at- tached to Military Expedition No. 1. This work was confined, however, to the district south and west of the moun- tain group and added little to our knowl- edge of their geography. In 1899 a journey was made, which in its daring and success equals those of Allen, Hayes, and Schwatka as a geographic feat. The distance covered was not nearly so great, but the time consumed was also much less. Oscar Rohn, topog- rapher and geologist tothe military ex- pedition under command of Captain Abercrombie, with a small pack train, penetrated for the first time with ani- mals the rough country lying between the Chittyna River and the south slope of the Wrangell Alps. Reaching the Nizina or north fork of the Chittyna in September, and seeing, as he thought, the possibility of crossing the range to the north of him by way of one of the glaciers tributary to this stream, Mr Rohn sent the pack train back to Valdez and with one companion, Mr McNeer, started acrossthe mountains. The pass at the head of the glacier proved to be 8,000 feet above sea-level, and the distance from the beginning of the journey over the ice on the Nizina side to its end at the source of the Chisana (Tanana) was nearly 50 miles. The route, the character of the ice to be traversed, the distance, and the point to be reached on the other side were unknown. After 15 dayson the glacier and many delays from the storms which prevail at this season of the year in these latitudes, the two explorers found themselves at the source of the Chisana, the eastern fork of the Tanana, nearly out of supplies and with a difficult and little-known region separating them from the Copper Valley. On foot, and carrying their light outfit, they crossed Cooper Pass to what they hoped would Tue Nationat GrocrapHic MaGaZINE be the Copper, only to find that it was the Nabesna, the great western fork of the Tanana, and that the Copper was still to the west of them. Ice was form- ing in all the streams and snow lay thick in the passes, but with the aid of natives they reached the Copper in early October, Copper Center a week later, and crossed Lowe River divide to Valdez through 3 feet of new snow on the 25th. This work, although a recon- naissance, added valuable details to our knowledge of the northern and southern flanks of the Wrangell Mountains. All of the work which has been out- lined, up to the close of the season 1899, was general inits character. Allen had indicated the presence of five great peaks in the Wrangell group where four ex- isted, and his longitude was in error by 30 minutes. Mahlo, in 1898, corrected much of this error in longitude, but since he descended the Klutena to Cop- per Center, and then went down the Cooper, he could add little to the geog- rapky of the mountain group proper, which lay well to the northeast of his route. Rohn, in his work along the southern flank of the range, sketched details previously unknown there, and in his trip from the Nizina to the Tanana studied a high area which is not likely to be investigated soon again. Peters and Brooks, during the same year, con- tributed to our knowledge of the Chisana and the Nabesna and outlined the north- ern edge of the range. In 1900, however, Messrs Gerdine and Witherspoon, of the U. S. Geological Survey, as members of a party in charge of Mr F. C. Schrader, carried a stadia line into the interior from a Coast Sur- vey base on Prince William Sound. From locations given by this line a tri- angulation network was expanded and extended eastward over practically the entire valley of the Chittyna and its trib- utaries. For the first time Mount Black- burn was measured accurately, and the topographic features of all this southern WranceLL Mountains, ALASKA side of the range were delineated in de- tail and with fidelity. In 1902 the same workers continued their surveys, Mr Gerdine along the western flanks of the mountains and Mr Witherspoon along the northern, so that we at last have topographic data of a definite nature for nearly all of the group. The area which is not as yet accurately mapped extends east from the head of Nabesna glacier to the head of White River, and includes the glacial drainage of the upper Chisana. Over the remaining portion of the group we have topographic sheets on the scale of 4 miles to the inch, drawn with a con- tour interval of 200 feet. These give sufficiently complete data for an accurate definition of the geographic relations of the mountain mass. In carrying on this work the survey- ors travel from place to place by pack train, occupying, successively, high points, which are located by intersection on other previously determined posi- tions. From these points—‘‘stations,’”’ as they are called—the positions of all prominent features in sight—peaks, streams, lakes, and glaciers—are fixed by horizontal angles, and elevations are determined by vertical: angles. With these locations and elevations as a foun- dation, the streams are drawn and the outlines and slopes of the mountains shown by contours, each feature being sketched while the map-maker is look- ingat it. The work is precisely similar to that carried on in the rougher parts of the United States, except that the scale is smaller, the spacing of stations is not so carefully done, and less detail is preserved. CHARACTER OF THE MOUNTAINS The Wrangell group occupies a rudely elliptical area, with the extensive low- lands of the Copper and the Chittyna valleys on the south and west, but con- nected toward the east with the some- what greater heights of the St Elias 399 Alps. A well-marked depression on the north, which extends from the upper Copper across the Nabesna and the Chisana to the White, separates them from the neighboring Nutzotin and Mentasta ranges. Measured along the greater diameter of the ellipse from Scolai Pass northwestward to the outer base of Mount Drum, the extent of the group is about too miles, while the other diameter at right angles to this is approximately 70 miles in length. Within this area of 5,500 square miles are at least ten snow-clad peaks 12,000 feet or morein height. Several of these are unnamed, and two of them, Mounts Sanford and Blackburn, are higher than Mont Blanc or any of the peaks within the borders of the United States. A partial list of the principal peaks and their elevations has appeared in an earlier issue of this Magazine, but a fuller list is appended here : Mount Sanford................ Se 16, 200 IM(OBIAEIIES KOEN 556600 ane noonscos 16,140 MOTE WEIR, oo ooce4. 050 ooaoda 14,000 WIGTaNAE INGE Goocuasss0un0e0ensooons 13,400 MMT: ZZAKNEAUO, 6 S5cc09 pondoodcnoneac 12,980 Mio Kae VEINS cosocsucooccb0s000 anode 12,300 Mountie) riminnerer re ice ere inet 12,c0o Capitale Mo mntanniyeesiee een eee eae 9,697 Wigavmne Coco, osacoccacssnccadcc6 9, 100 SnidernmPeadks mune er rey aerate 8,345 In addition to these summits, to which names have been applied, there are two or three unnamed points on the ridge bet ween Wrangell and Blackburn which are 10,000 feet or more in height, while between Blackburn and Regal one peak is 13,400, another 12,925, and a third 12,185 feet high. These latter are merely the culminat- ing points of a lofty ridge, and lack the dignity and impressiveness of the iso- lated summits, Sanford, Blackburn, Wrangell, and Drum, which are by far the most conspicuous mountains in the group. The fact that great height is not essential to grandeur is well illus- trated by Mount Drum, which is sur- 400 passed by none in beauty and impressive- ness, although but 12,000 feet high. Its effectiveness is due to its situation well out in the Copper River plain and to its isolation. The Wrangell Mountains lie between the meridians of 142° and 145° west longitude and the parallels of 61° 20’ and 62° 30’ north latitude. The 144th meridian and the 62d parallel intersect just east of the crater of the central peak—Mount Wrangell. The group is as distinct in form from the neighboring ranges north and south of it as it is in origin. The Chugatch Mountains, which lie between the Wran- gell Mountains and the coast, represent an uplifted and eroded plain, and this origin is now recorded in the level sky- line presented by the tops of the indi- vidual peaks and ridges which make up the range as a whole. The Alaskan Mountains to the north- west owe their relief to profound frac- turing of the earth’s crust, the rocks to the north of the break being lifted high above those to the south. Ero- sion, acting on this broken edge, has carved the serrate crest as we now see it, leaving the areas of harder rock in high relief. The Wrangell Mountains, on the other hand, are for the most part masses of lava and volcanic mud, which have been piled up on an earlier surface, of considerable diversity, burying the old land forms and substituting for fhem the present splendid group. The heights rise from the valley of the Copper River, which along the west base of the mountains stands at from 500 to 1,500 feet above sea-level. This valley is a gently sloping, moss-covered, lake-dotted plain, in somber green, ac- centuating by its level character and its dull coloring the great heights and the dazzling white of the adjacent summits. Indian travelers say that Mount Ev- erest is dwarfed by the elevation of the land mass from which it rises and by Tue NarionaL GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE the surrounding close-set peaks, which are but little lower than Everest itself. At Yakutat, one is in doubt at first as to which of the great summits in sight is St Elias. Logan’s superior height was recognized only after the angles to its top were solved. McKinley alone stands out in solitary grandeur. But each of the four striking peaks of the Wrangell group has its own individ- uality and seems to accentuate, not to dwarf, its neighbors. Each, as it were, serves as a scale which helps the eye to comprehend the magnitude of all. The shapes of the peaks are the com- bined products of vulcanism and erosion. Either predominating gives a‘ distinct type. Intermediate forms are due to the partial ascendency of one or the other force. Mount Wrangell owes its outlines almost wholly to voleanic ac- tion. Erosion has modified this original form but little. Mount Drum’s con- tour, on the contrary, is that due en- tirely to denuding agencies. The orig- inal built-up formis gone. Mount San- ford is a volcanic dome, one-half of which has been mined away by a sap- ping glacier. Mount Blackburn has been etched on all sides until only its summit has the gentle original slope ; all below this is the precipitous wall due to undercutting ice. Wrangell is a great flat cone nearly three miles high and eight times as broad. Its gently arched surface is a glistening snow-field, broken here and there by a smoking rock or touched at the summit by a smudge of ash from the crater which sends up intermit- tently rolling columns of smoke and vapor. From its eastern slope flows Nabesna glacier, a frozen river fifty miles in length. On its western face, in a shallow valley, a dozen jets of steam may be seen on a still morning issuing from as many vents, and the glaciers from this basin are black with the breath of the mountain. It is not recorded that the summit 401 WranGELL Mountains, ALASKA Mount Drum 402 has ever been reached. John Bremner, who was a prospector and a man of im- agination, reports that he got to within a mile of the top. It is probably well that he did not attempt the last mile. A report is current in the Copper Valley that some years ago two miners at- tempted to reach the crest on snow- shoes, but, after traveling the greater part of the day and finding the summit still distant, wisely decided to return. If you interview the Copper River native about Mount Wrangell you will find him reticent ; but if you finally win his confidence and gratitude by a square meal and a pipeful of tobacco without demanding some service in return, he may reward you by telling you in com- pact but fragmental English the native legend of the tragedy of the mountain. ‘“Long time ago two Siwash go look see; mountain him smoke. One Si- wash come back. Hiyu (much) smoke. No good.’’ As he tells you he squats on his haunches in the door of your tent, fingers all of your personal be- longings, and reeks with the accumu- lated odors of generations of unwashed fish-eating ancestors. You are tempted to wish that more Siwashes had gone to the ‘‘ Mountain that Smokes.’’ Itisan unworthy wish. The native is but a brown child of the wilderness, curious, uncontrolled, timid, uncomprehending. ‘The white invader is feared for his numbers, his energy, and his ability, but he is past under- standing. His restless, all-sacrificing search for gold or copper or other use- less stuff, his abundance of all the greatly desired things—clothing, food, guns, tobacco—which come off the great water in unlimited quantities, but are dispensed to the needy Siwash most grudgingly ; his curious doctrines about right and wrong, and property and work, doctrines which he seems to ex- pect the native to observe, but which he himself so often ignores—altogether the white man is quite beyond native comprehension. Tue Natrona, GrocraPHic MAGAZINE FEASIBLE ROUTES FOR THE ASCENT OF MT WRANGELL AND THE HIGHER PEAKS But, in spite of the native’s fear of it, the ‘‘ Mountain that Smokes’’ should be climbed, and climbed soon. It will not bea difficult feat, and the reward will be unique. It is not likely that the summit of Mount McKinley will be reached at an early date, and so Mount Wrangell should be the first of the great interior peaks of Alaska to be scaled. The attempt is earnestly rec- ommended to any one of the numerous active mountaineering clubs of the United States. The line of perpetual snow is at about 6,500 feet, and the summit rises 7,500 feet above this. At this summit is a crater which sends out columns of smoke 3 miles high. The relation of the crater to the ice cap will be most interesting, and the mere feat of first reaching the summit of the only known active volcano in the interior of the continent north of the Mexican line may well appeal to any man. There are at least four feasible routes of approach. One is from a plateau at the head of Dadina River, between Mount Drum and Mount Wrangell, and the way leads southeastward past the base of Mount Zanetti, the spur to the summit. A temporary camp can be placed on the mesa at the edge of the ice cap from the valley of the Dadina or the Sanford. It may be possible to take horses up on this mesa from the Dadina Valley, but the matter has not been put to a practical test. From such a camp the march to the summit would be long, to or 11 miles, but would lead past the foot of Mount Zanetti over a snowfield which is very smooth. Two routes, either of which is prob- ably feasible, lead from the head of the valley of the Chetaslina River. The middle fork of this stream rises from a double glacier, which owes its compound character to a nunatak about 3 miles long, rising above the ice level at about an equal distance back from the foot of WrancELL Mountains, ALASKA the glacier. The lobe of the’ glacier, which lies to the west of this nunatak, is smooth and easily crossed. Pack animals could be taken over it nearly, if not quite, to the nunatak. Froma camp near the upper end of the nunatak, to which fuel would have to be taken, the ice cap is easily accessible at an ele- vation of about 6,500 feet and only 6 miles, air-line distance, from the sum- mit. This route, however, lies across the crevassed basin forming the western face of the peak, and although most in- teresting, since it passes the ‘‘ Field of the Jets,’’ a region of steaming rock points, is likely to offer some difficulties and dangers. The other suggested route from the head of the Chetaslina follows the east- ern edge of the glacier and by a steep rock climb gains the ice, at 7,000 feet or over, not more than 5 miles in an air line fromthe summit. By traveling almost due east over the ice for about 4 miles, this route would avoid the Field of the Jets and would converge with that next to be described, near a long, low ridge of steaming rocks which lies a couple of miles south of the summit at an elevation of 11,000 feet. What appeared after an inspection of the peak from all sides in 1902 to be the surest and safest route, although not the shortest, is from the northern end of the broad mesa which separates the Cheshnina from the Chetaslina drainage. Pack horses can be taken up on this mesa from the east fork of the Chetaslina and a base camp pitched at about 6,000 feet. From the edge of the ice cap, a mile above this camp, to the summit, is 7 miles, and the route lies over the long, low, smooth spur of which the mesa is the continuation. The intervening snow-field appears to be perfectly smooth and safe and the approach by it is the one recommended. Last summer (1yo2) members of the Survey party climbed this thin spur through rain and fog to between 7,500 and 8,000 feet and experienced no diffi- 403 culty except that caused by the soft snow. In the course of geologic work the ice cap was reached and traversed for perhaps a mile from the nunatak at the head of the Chetaslina also, so that the lower portions of both these lines of advance have been tested. In an attempt of any of the high peaks of interior Alaska, it is essential to be on the ground ready to make the climb early in the season. After July 1 the weather becomes warm and the snow-clad higher summits become storm centers, which condense the vapor from the heated lowlands, and as a conse- quence are hidden for much the greater part of the time in clouds. It is need- less to say that one cannot climb un- known peaks successfully through a fog which conceals all their features. In an average season, a perfectly clear day after July t cannot be reckoned upon until late in the fall, when the nights have lengthened and the summits are covered with new snow. ‘The proper time to climbis about June 20. In ad- dition to the good weather, which is much more probable then than later, the days are the longest of the year, and although the sun is below the horizon for two or more hours, there is no real darkness. With clear weather the air chills quickly at the greater altitudes as the sun sinks, and a crust forms over the snow, so that rapid progress can be made. ‘This is particularly important in climbing Wrangell, because the slopes of the peak areso gentle that just above the line of melting there is a wide zone of snow, which is soft and greatly im- pedes climbing unless a crust is formed over it. Ordinary precautions will have to be taken, of course, in crossing these un- explored snow-fields, even where no crevasses are visible. During 1902 two employés of the Survey were crossing a glacier on the north flank of Mount Wrangell to reach a high point which it was intended to occupy for topo- graphic work. ‘The snow seemed per- 4.04 Tue NarionaL GEOGRAPHIC MaGAZINE Photo by W. C. Mendenhall Snider's Peak, as Seen from the West WranGELL Mountains, ALASKA fectly safe, and the rope which was al- Ways carried on such trips was not in use. Suddenly the crust gave way be- neath the feet of the man in advance and he sank, but throwing out his arms was sustained by them until dragged out of danger by his companion. For- tunately for him, the concealed crevasse was narrow at the top. The rope was used for the rest of that day. After Mount Wrangell, the peak which will no doubt prove most inter- esting from the point of view of the mountain climber is Mount Sanford, the highest one in the group, 16,200 feet above sea-level. This magnificent summit, when viewed from the south between Mounts Drum and Wrangell, presents an outline so totally different from that exhibited by its northern slopes that Allen in 1885, from the mouth of the Chetaslina, named it Mount Tillman, and then from the upper Copper, failing to recognize it, rechristened it Mount Sanford. His supposition that there were five peaks where there are in reality but four, together with the changing aspect of the mountains as one encircles them in following Copper River, led to further confusion. Therefore, in his sketch from 6 miles above the mouth of the Gakona, Mount Drum is called Mount Tillman and Mount Sanford is called Mount Drum. ‘The fact that Allen’s Mount Tillman is a myth has been a matter of common knowledge for some years. Mahlo’smapof 18y8 shows three peaks where Allen had four, and Mr R. 5. Dunn, who is now en route to Mount McKinley, has called attention to the error in a recent magazine article. The southern face of Mount Sanford is a 12,000 foot slope of 60 or 70 degrees—practically a cliff, too steep even for much glacial ice to accumulate. This precipice faces the southwest, and in early summer must be scored by splendid and constantly recurring ava- lanches. ‘The ice accumulations at the foot of the declivity form Sanford 4.05 glacier, the source of Sanford river. In remarkable contrast to this precip- itous southwest slope, the cirque of Sanford glacier, is the northern face of the mountain.” Viewed from any point on the upper Copper River or the foot- hills beyond it, Mount Sanford appears a smooth, rounded dome of snow, so even, except as glacial erosion has eaten into it around the base, that it appears to be possible to travel over it in almost any direction. Really, however, there are probably few feasible approaches, because the smooth upper reaches of the mountain break off just above the base into cliffs. A glacier, which is one of the sources of Boulder Creek, appears from below to form an easy way through these en- circling cliffs to the even snow-fields above. When these are gained, reach- ing the summit will depend upon weather and preparedness. It is not possible to make the climb from below snowline in one day, and a well organ- ized party, equipped to stay on the mountain a week with an upper camp at 10,000 feet, will stand the best chance of success. The writer has not been nearer to Mount Blackburn than the head of Kot- sini River, a dozen miles from the peak, and he has not seen it except from the west. Viewed from this direction, its aspect is most forbidding. Near the top the slopes are gentle enough, but up to 12,000 or 13,000 feet its western face is a series of crags and cliffs, scarred by ice falls or covered by steep, deeply crevassed glaciers. Its southern side is reported but little better, so that the most hopeful direction from which to approach it seems to be the north or northeast, from one of the tributaries of the Kennicott or of the Nabesna glacier. Both of these are long glaciers which have not been traversed, or at least we have no record of their exploration, so that in addition to the possibility of find- ing the mountain inaccessible after reaching its northern or eastern base, 406 there is the further possibility of diffi- culty in getting to this position. Mount Drum is lower than either Mount Sanford or Mount Blackburn by more than 4,000 feet. Its base is more accessible than that of any of the other peaks, as it stands out in the Copper River Valley well to the west of its com- panions. The air-line distance from Copper Center tothe summit is less than 25 miles, and the lowest point in the divide connecting it with the Mount Sanford-Wrangell pile is about 5,000 feet; hence one may travel entirely around the mountain by way of the Dadina and Sanford River valleys with- out having to make any difficult climbs. But this little 12,000-foot peak ap- pears to be one of the hardest of the group to scale. It is really but the skeleton of a mountain, having been so eaten away by the Nadina drainage that its summit is only a sharp crescent- shaped ridge, surrounding the amphi- theater in which Nadina glacier heads. The prospectors of the region speak of it appropriately as the ‘‘shell.’’ Other drainage than that of the Nadina has been active, so that all of its faces are steep, and the ice masses which hang on them are greatly crevassed. It is these which present the difficulties. If Drum were free from glaciers it would be merely interesting as a rock climb. As it is, the only route to thesummit which appears to be at all practicable is that by the ridge between the Nadina and Klawasina glaciers. Pack animals may be taken 5 or 6 miles above the foot of Nadina glacier, and camp established on a little flat just west of the glacier, within an air-line distance of less than 5 miles from the summit. By climb- ing westward, up the valley of a little brook, the ridge in question may be reached at between 6,000 and 7,000 feet, and, so far as may be judged from below, its ascent will not prove difficult up to 10,000 feet. Beyond that it is very narrow, the ice overhangs, is cre- vassed, and probably unsafe, but care- Tue Nationat GrocrapHic MaGAZzInE ful mountaineers may be able to make their way over it to the summit. Snider’s Peak—Little Drum, it is sometimes called—lies just south of the main peak. It is 8,300 feet high, and although sheathed in ice on its north slope, is free from it on the south and very precipitous. IMPORTANT GLACIERS OF THE GROUP Several of the important glaciers of the mountain group have already been mentioned incidentally. The whole central mountain mass above 7,000 feet is a nevé field above which project oc- casional points, too sharp to permit the accumulation of snow. From this cen- tral snow-field Alpine glaciers drain in all directions down canyon-like valleys which the glaciers themselves have moulded. As the divide between the northward and the southward flowing streams lies nearer the southern line of the group, and so near the southern line of the high area in which snow accumu- lates, it follows that the greatest glaciers flow to the north. The largest of these are the Nabesna and Chisana, ice streams 45 and 30 miles long respectively and the sources of the two great branches of the Tanana River. Kennicott glacier on the south side of the range, draining the slopes of Mounts Blackburn and Regal, is prob- ably the third of the ice streams in magnitude. Then follow a host of smaller glaciers—Nizina, Kuskulana, Copper, Nadina, Jacksina—all sources of streams of the same name and none of them less than 10 miles in length. The glaciers of the Alps are few in number and insignificant in size, by comparison. From each of these glaciers flows a turbulent river. Usually, as it issues from beneath the ice foot, the stream spreads out over a wide flood plain, built up of coarse material, upon which it constantly shifts its numerous chan- nels. After a course which varies from a few to many miles over such a flood WrancGELL Mountains, ALASKA plain, the channels unite and enter a canyon cut in the flood plain material or in the rock beneath it, and in this canyon the tributary continues to or nearly to its junction with the master stream. Sometimes just above this junc- tion a second flood plain is developed. These rivers, like all others with glacial sources, are at their highest stages during midsummer, when melt- ing of the snow and ice is at the maxi- mum, and are lowest in the late winter, when thisisat a minimum. Inthe sum- mer they are muddy, overloaded with ground-up rock fragments; in the win- ter they are clear, and the trout, driven from them in summer, return to them. The greater part of the drainage of the Wrangell Mountains is gathered into the Copper River, whose basin of nearly 25,000 square miles includes a large proportion of mountainous terri- tory, in which glaciation is at present active. Amongthe largestreams of the continent, it is perhaps the most nearly purely glacial in its sources of supply, and a comparison of its grade, which is dependent, in part at least, upon this fact, with those of other streams be- comes interesting. The total fall of Copper River, from its sources in Copper Glacier to the sea, a distance of about 300 miles, is 3,600 feet—an average of 12 feet per mile. The lower half of the river, from Copper Center to the mouth, has an average fall of nearly 7 feet per mile, while the upper half, between Copper Glacier and Copper Center, falls about 17 feet in each mile. Compare with this the fall of the Yukon, which between White Horse and the sea is approximately 1.2 feet per mile, and below Fort Yukon about .5 feet per mile, or that of the Ohio, which between Pittsburg and Cairo is .435 feet per mile. The relatively tor- rential character of the Copper as a type of glacier-fed stream thus becomes strikingly evident. Copper River drains the southern, the 407 western, and a part of the northern slope of the mountains. The central part of the northern face drains into the Tanana by its two great tributaries, the Nabesna and the Chisana, while some of the glacial drainage from the extreme northeastern limit of the mountains passes down the valley of the White to the Yukon. The district embraced by the group offers many attractive problems to those interested in physical geography or geology and the allied sciences. The problems of land forms as determined by vulcanism and as modified by glacial erosion, questions of ice accumulation and shrinkage, of glacial deposition, of the aggradation of glacier-fed streams, unique problems of vulcanism and gla- ciation, such as subglacial lava streams, and modifications of glaciers by the heat attending volcanic activity are a few of the questions which immediately occur for investigation here. ‘The opening of the military trail from the port of Valdez, on Prince William Sound, and the establishment, by pros- pectors and others, of various secondary trails to points within the foothills of the Wrangell Mountains have made the whole region comparatively accessi- ble. It is quite probable that the next few years will see a railroad built to the copper properties in the Chittina Valley, which will remove the present necessity of making a trip of 150 miles by pack train and will place the traveler in the interior valley of the Copper at any season of the year. When that time comes, the Wrangell Mountains should prove an attractive field for students and for those tourists who desire to get a little beyond the usual summer fron- tier. The maps which are now drawn and will soon be publicly available will serve as guides until the time shall come when larger-scale work is required, and the preliminary geographic studies which have been carried out will serve to indicate the tenor of the closer studies of the future. artment of Agriculture , Dep kK From O. F. Coo Trees Rubber a Ul can be tapped when they are ei 1 after that every few months ion of Cast antat . 1.—A Pl Picture No The trees are about 14 ght years They , and years old. old RUBBER PLANTATIONS IN MEXICO AND CENTRAL AMERICA EXT to coffee and sugar, crude rubber is the largest of the tropical imports of the United States. It is the only one of these three for which we are entirely dependent on foreign countries. The value of the crude rubber that we import every year, 55,000,000 pounds, reaches about $30,000,000, but none of it comes from Porto Rico or the Philippines. Over one-half of the total is imported direct from Brazil, while considerable quanti- ties come from the United Kingdom, presumably the products of her colonies, and from Belgium, chiefly the product of the Congo Free State. It occurred to the Department of Agri- culture, while pondering what new in- dustries might be found for Porto Rico and the Philippines to improve condi- tions on the islands, that rubber trees might be grown profitably on them. An agent of the Department, Mr O. F. Cook, was therefore sent to Central America and Mexico, where millions of dollars are invested in rubber planta- tions, to study rubber culture and to report on the advisability of starting similar plantations in our new island possessions. Mr Cook spent several months at the different rubber planta- tions, and his preliminary report has been published by the Department. It is yet too soon to state definitely whether rubber trees can be successfully grown in Porto Rico, but the prospects seem favorable for growing the Castilla rubber tree, as the southwestern part of the island is dry and hot. It should be noted that crude rubber may come from three different kinds of rubber trees, each requiring different climate and soil. ‘There is the Para rubber tree ( Hevea), which thrives in the wet valley of the Amazon, but which will not grow in a dry climate; the Assam rubber (Ficus elastica) of Java, also needing a humid atmosphere ; and the Castilla rubber tree of Central America and Mexico, which prospers best where it is dry and hot and will not grow in swamps or wet soil. Mr Cook recommends that experiments be begun by planting a number of Castilla rubber trees in Porto Rico and the Philippines, but he warns the American public against investing large sums in starting rubber planta- tious until it has been proved that the rubber tree will grow successfully on these islands. The accompanying illustrations, for the use of which the NarronaL Gxo- GRAPHIC MAGAZINE is indebted to Mr Cook, give interesting information about the rubber tree and the native Mexican method of tapping it for its milk.* It would seem to be a very simple matter to improve on the rude gashes made by the machete of the rubber gatherer, but this has not proved to be easy. The rubber milk is not the sap of the tree and can not be drawn out by boring holes in the trunk, as is done with the sugar maple. The milk is not in the tissues of the tree, but is con- tained in delicate tubes running length- wise in the inner layers of the bark, and to secure milk in any quantity it is nec- essary to open many of these tubes by wounding the bark. ‘The rubber is formed in floating globules inside the tubes and can not pass through their walls, so that even a suction apparatus would not bring it out unless the tubes were cut. The method by which the natives of Soconusco, Mexico, have been accus- tomed to extract the milk is shown in * Consult ‘‘ The Culture of the Central Amer- ican Rubber Tree.”” By O. F. Cook. U. S. Department of Agriculture: Bureau of Plant Industry—Bulletin 49. From O. F, Cook, Department of Agriculture Picture No. 2.—A Native Tapping a Castilla Rubber Tree At Zacualpa, Chiapas, Mexico. ‘The tree shown in this picture is a small one. Many of them exceed five feet in diameter, with trunks going straight up for 30 feet Fig. 4 From O, F. Cook, Department of Agriculture Picture No. 3.—Native Method of Coagulating the Latex or Milk of the Rubber Tree Fig. 1.—Spreading latex on Calathzea leaf ; a leaf already coated shown at the right, lying in the sun to coagulate the rubber. Fig. 2.—Pressing the two coated leaves together to unite the two sheets of rubber. Fig. 3.—Pulling the leaf away from the rubber. Fig. 4.—The finished sample of rubber, marked by the veins of the leaf. From 0. F. Cook, Department of Agriculture Picture No. 4.—Clusters of Ripe Fruit of the Castilla Rubber Tree Natural size. The fruit is fleshy and of a reddish orange color Russer PLANTATIONS IN Mexico picture No. 2. The ulero makes with his machete diagonal lines of gashes, extending nearly around the tree, like the letter V, the point being downward. The milk flows down these channels to one side of the tree, whence it is led down to a cavity hollowed in the ground and lined with large, tough leaves. These are dexterously lifted up, and the milk is poured out into a calabash or other vessel and carried away to be coagulated. The diagonal channels are from two to three feet apart, and those of each successive tapping are inserted ‘between the older scars. The milk will all run out of the tree in about an hour. A Castilla tree 5 feet in diameter will yield when first cut about 20 gallons of milk, making 50 pounds of rubber. The tree may be cut again after the lapse of a few months. That the trees at La Zacualpa shown in picture No. 1 have been able to survive so much of this barbarous treatment and are still vigor- ous and heavily laden with fruit seems to indicate great tenacity of life, and yet even this rough handling represents an improvement upon the former custom of cutting the trees down entirely or hewing steps in them for the ulero to climb up. Instead of the forked stick used as a ladder at La Zacualpa, the large forest trees are ascended for 30 feet or more by means of ropes, vines, climbing irons, and steps cut in the trunk. The studies which the Department of Agriculture is making in regard to start- ing rubber plantations on American soil are specially important in view of the disappearance at no distant day of the rubber forests of Brazil and Africa, whence nearly nine-tenths of the sup- ply of rubber now comes. ‘The world is almost entirely dependent on savages, or on natives too barbarous to be called “civilized, to get the rubber out of the forests. They, tempted by the high price which rubber brings, swarm into the rubber forests and chop the trees down to save time in collecting the milk. 413 Mr K. K. Kennedy, U. S. consul at Para, Brazil, has recently sent to the Bureau of Statistics of the Department of Commerce and Labor the startling reports of two expeditions which have been examining conditions in the rubber country.* Captain Gerdeau, after ex- ploring, investigating, and canvassing the territory of the upper Amazon and its tributaries in the richest rubber belt in South America for more than a year, advises him that the rubber gatherers are cutting down the forests with amaz- ing rapidity and improvidence, far be- yond what his previous information had led him to expect. He expresses grave doubts if the supply can be kept up un- less stringent measures to protect the rubber forests be immediately taken. Robert Blair Ewart was a member of an American exploring expedition which started inland from Lima, Peru, crossed the Andes, and then descended the tribu- taries of the Amazon and the great river to Para. Mr Ewart described to Consul Kennedy the rubber-hunting in eastern Peru, along the Ucayali River, a tribu- tary of the Amazon: ‘The Ucayali isa magnificent stream, as large asthe Mississippi, and traverses one of the finest rubber districts in South America. In all this great territory there is but one man who is producing fine rubber. All the rest are caucho hunters. These latter are the bane of the country, and have done incalculable damage in the past few years. They do not bleed the trees in the regular way, but cut them down and extract the gum by the wholesale. Thus every year enormous forests are destroyed, and each year the supply grows less and less and the rubber gatherers are com- pelled to go farther back from the rivers. This makes the production of rubber more difficult, dangerous, and expensive each year, and it is only a- question of time when this immense and most important rubber-producing terri- * Daily Consular Reports, October 21, 1903 (No. 1780). 404 tory wil be entirely stripped of its rubber forests. I found that caucho is selling on these far upper rivers for 20 to 22 soles ($10 to $11) per arroba of 32 pounds.’’ Recently the French government started an industrial school in the Sudan Tue NarionaL GeocraPpHic MAGAZINE to teach the natives the best methods for rubber gathering. The school has proved a success, as the natives soon realized that the practical suggestions they obtained at the school meant a better quality of rubber and hence greater profit to them. Wish, Aik Giijake IPO. Ie IDI OI HE latest news of the Ziegler Polar Expedition is contained in a letter to Mr Ziegler, written by Commander Fiala ten days after leaving Vardo, Norway, and re- ceived by Mr Ziegler in New York the later part of September. As far south as 75° north latitude the ex- pedition came upon a compact barrier Edward Haven, First Officer W. J. Peters, Captain Coffin of ice, which they followed to within sight of Nova Zembla without finding ~ an open lead. At the time of writ- ing they were returning toward the west, intending to try and force a way northward through the ice barrier be- tween the 46th and 47th parallels of east longitude. ‘The ice conditions were thus exceedingly unfavorable at the rr xe Z Z\ S xz = == Photo by W. S. Champ Commander Anthony Fiala Representative of the National Geographic Society, Chief Scientific Staffand Second in Command H. P. Hartt, Chief Engineer ZIEGLER PoLar EXPEDITION A415 Photo by W S. Champ Some of the Dogs of the Ziegler Polar Expedition Photo by W. S. Champ A Deck Scene on the Amerika THE 416 NaTIonaL GeocrapHic MAGAZINE Photo by W. S. Champ S. 5. dmertka of the Ziegler Polar Expedition start, but probably after forcing their way through the barrierthey found cpen water beyond. Mr Fiala’s letter is as follows : BARENTS SEA, /uly 20, 7903. DEAR MR ZIEGLER: We are rapidly nearing a sail, and in hopes of this reaching you I write hastily. We left Archangel on the 4th of July, but as Mr Champ has probably told you, we were delayed by a storm in the White Sea, reaching Vardo, Norway, July 9. At Vardo we took on coal and water, leaving there the evening of the roth. Since then we have been skirt- ing the edge of the ice pack, vainly look- ingforalead. Wemadea direct course from Vardo, striking the ice at 38° 30’ FE. long., 75 N. lat., and then went into the ice to the 75° 38’; but it was so solid that we returned and went eastward and southward along the edge of the pack, looking for a lead, until we were near the shores (in plain sight) of Nova Zembla last night in latitude 72° 45’. Not finding a lead of any character worth going into the north ice, we are re- turning northward and westward, where we intend to push into the ice between the 46th and 47th parallels of E. long., as Captain Coffin thinks it will be the best place to try to force our way. Instead of being a particularly good year as to ice conditions the indications thus far seem to prove otherwise, and the strange silence, from the lack of life, that broods over this waste of ice is peculiar. Dr Shorkley said to me that it seemed to him like a graveyard of ice. We have indeed struck a peculiar sea- son ; numbers of dead birds strewn on the cakes of ice and not one polar bear has been sighted, and only a stray seal once ina great while. It either indi- ZAEGLER PontaR EXPEDITION Photo by W. S. Champ Embarking the Siberian Ponies at Solombala, Siberia cates immense fields of ice north or lots of open water. Let us hope for the latter. Everything aboard has been pleasant aud harmonious. Men are in splendid condition and happy, though impatient to getnorth. The horses and dogs are in particularly good form and we are par- 417 ticularly thankful for the coal we took on at Vardo, for we feel we shall need every ounce of it, as we look at the long unbroken mass of ice. Yours sincerely, ANTHONY FIALA. The Amerika has been entirely refit- ted the past year—new decks, new rig- ging, new boilers, new engines. She makes 8 knots ai hour without any help from the wind and rides very easily in spite of her tremendous cargo. The dogs and ponies were taken aboard at Solombala, near Archangel, and seemed in splendid condition. The expedition left Vardo in excel- lent spirits and excellent condition. Most important of all, the men and crew had had a chance of working together for several months before the actual start, and it was the unanimous opinion of all that harmony and good-will would continue. : The Amerika left Trondhjem Jun 23, Tromso June 27, Archangel July 4, and Vardo July ro. At every port and wherever the ex- pedition or any members of the party went they were received with great courtesy and everything was done by the officials and people to help the work of the expedition. ‘This courteous treat- ment was much appreciated by all, and acknowledgment of this kindness to them is gratefully made by Mr Ziegler. Special thanks are due to Professor H. Geelmuyden, the distinguished observa- torist at the University of Christiania, for loaning the expedition a 20-cen. alt. azimuth circle by Repsold. THE MINING BUREAU OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS By CuHartes H. Burritt, CHIEF OF THE MINING BUREAU lished on March 10, 1900, by order of Major-General Otis, U. S. Military Governor of the Philippines, and was made successor of the ‘* In- speccién General de Minas’”’ of the Spanish Philippine Government and with the same duties. These duties were divided into three divisions, viz: (a.) Supervision and administration of titles and grants. (6.) Supervision and direction over mines, including inspection, sanitation, and pulice. (c.) Geological and mineralogical sur- veys and scientific studies. These duties have nevern bee changed by the American Government, either civil or military, with the exception of subdivision (a) above quoted. By the act of Congress of July 1, 1902, the supervision and administration of titles, so far as issuance thereof is concerned, upon all claims for mineral lands insti- tuted after August 14, 1903, was vested in the Insular Bureau of Public Lands. The Spanish titles and grants remain in the Mining Bureau. A thorough ex- amination of these titles and grants has been made, the validity and regu- larity of each has been determined, and a bulletin has been issued by this Bureau with a classification of all such titles and grants, whether valid or invalid, and with full information as to their incep- tion, location, survey, and other steps of procedure. This is our Bulletin No. 2. Owing to the insurrection and dis- turbed conditions, but little could be done under subdivision (6). Many mining claims have been instituted and a vast amount of prospecting has been HE Mining Bureau of the Phil- ippine Islands was _ reéstab- done since the American occupation, and in several provinces a considerable amount of development work has been done. On the Island of Batan the Spanish corporation, *‘ Minas de Carbon de Batan,’’ with a capital of $1,000,000, is now developing the Spanish coal mining grants of Gill Brothers and are proceeding rapidly with a corps of em- ployés, consisting of Spanish and Jap- anese miners, and with a large force of native employés and laborers. The Villanueva and Mufoz Spanish coal grants on the west of the same Island of Batan have recently been acquired by the United States Government, and by order of the Secretary of War these mines are now being opened up and de- veloped. The work is under the super- vision of Lieut. H. L. Wigmore, Corps of Engineers, U.S. A., and I have no doubt of the success of this enterprise. Its importance from an economical and commercial standpoint is not less than its importance as an international factor. The investigation of the coal measures of the Philippines was the first subject taken up by this Bureau after its rees- tablishment, with a view of securing for the United States within its own terri- torial boundaries in the Orient a supply of steam coal that could be made avail- able in case of an emergency for all governmental purposes and especially for supplying coal to the Philippine and Asiatic Squadrons of the U. S. Navy. Many hundreds of documents were care- fully read and studied, and the result presented in the report on ‘‘ The Coal Measuresof the Philippines,’’ by Charles H. Burritt, 1st Lieutenant, tith U. S. Vol. Cavalry, officer in charge of the Mining Bureau, and published at Wash- Mininc Bureau oF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS ington in 1901. ‘This report was sup- plemented by a visit of inspection to the principal known coal deposits by Lieut. Edward M. Markham, Corps of Engi- neers, U. S. A., under directions of the Secretary of War. As the result of these investigations and reports, the western portion of the Island of Batan was recommended and selected for gov- ernmental experiments, and this work is now in progress with every prospect of success. In 1902 a field party was organized and sent out from this Bureau to make a reconnoissanice of the well-known iron region of Angat, Bulacan, and to sub- mit a report thereon as a basis upon which to institute and build up a sys- tematic geological and mineralogical survey of the archipelago and to dis- seminate such information as to the mineral resources and other conditions as to enable capital to be intelligently directed in the mining industry. Mr Hiram D. McCaskey, B. S., and the mining engineer of this Bureau, a grad- uate of the Lehigh School of Mines, was placed at the head of this expedi- tion, and his report on ‘‘A Geological Reconnoissance of the Iron Region of Angat, Bulacan,’’ a work of 62 pages, with 14 maps, sketches, and tables and 41 half-tone illustrations, has just been issued as ‘‘ Bulletin No. 3’’ of this Bu- reau and from the Bureau of Public Printing of the Government of the Phil- ippines. This work covers a brief de- scription of the class and character of the field work, with subdivision, phys- ical and geographical, geological, litho- logical, and mineralogical ; with a well illustrated description of the iron-mining industry as carried on by the natives and which is one of the oldest mining industries of this archipelago. The Zuniga theory of the Taal volcano is discussed at length, and the authorities upon that subject are carefully com- pared. In addition to the iron deposits, the author has also treated of the gold, graphite, and lignite deposits of that 419 region, and has also added a chapter on lime-burning. The tables of analyses of ores are very complete, and the prac- tical questions of labor and transporta- tion are fully presented. The famous mineral springs of Bulacan are also de- scribed. The Bureau has also issued a bulletin (No. 1) on ‘‘ Platinum and the Associ- ated Rare Metals in Placer Formations ”’ for the use of miners and prospectors. This completes the publications of the Bureau, but it represents only a small portien of the work that has been done by the Bureau. Questions of titles have constantly arisen, and the manuscript reports on this line make several large volumes. The mining engineer has made a careful study of both the geo- logical and economic conditions so far as the same could be learned from the voluminous records and archives, as well as from prospectors and miners, and scientific expeditions have been made to Culion and Paragua, with pre- liminary reports thereon. ‘These expe- ditions, which were only cursory, to- gether with the field work in Bulacan and the study of the archives and rec- ords, have enabled this Bureau to frame and recommend to the U. S. Philippine Commission a proposition for the reor- ganization of this Bureau, transferring all titles to the Bureau of Public Lands, in order that titles on mineral lands may be more economically administered, and placing this Bureau in a condition to take up the work of (a) geological and mineralogical surveys and studies and (4) the promotion and encourage- ment of the mining industries, the work in the future to follow along the lines of state geological bureaus or state bu- reaus Of mines in the United States. That there is an urgent demand for this reorganization, and that under it the mining industry will be promoted and in a reasonable time become an impor- tant factor in these islands, the writer has no doubt, while the field of geolog- ical research is one of untold wealth. RECORD ASCENTS IN THE HIMALAYAS R WILLIAM HUNTER WORKMAN and Mis Fanny Bullock Workman, members of the National Geographic Society and authors of ‘‘In the Ice World of Hima- laya,’’ have completed their second con- secutive season of high climbing and exploration in the northwest Himalayas, in the region lying between 74° 55/ to 75° 40’ east longitude and 35° 45’ to 36° north latitude. As _ previously stated,* their attention last year was given to the first exploration of the long Chogo Loongma glacier and its large terminal tributary glaciers, and to ascents of various peaks and passes on these glaciers. The party consisted this season of Doctor and Mrs Workman, J. Petigax, C. Savoie, and I. Petigax, guides of Courmayeur, and B. Hewett, of London, surveyor. ‘he Hoh Lumba and Sosbon glaciers, running northwest from the Bralches Valley, were first visited. Neither of thes: had been previously explored, and they were found to be of quite different topography from that in- dicated on Indian Survey Map, 27a N. E. Im fact, the Sosbon is sketched on said map only asa small branch of the Hoh Lumba. From the village of Hoh, altitude 9,400 feet, the Hoh Val- ley was ascended for about 8 miles to Nanghmah Tapsa, a grazing ground at 11,800 feet. From here the ascent was continued over a large old moraine, covered with great blocks and well wooded. ‘This old moraine is followed by one of much newer appearance, covered with smaller rocks and scanty vegetation, and there are evident signs of a rapid retreat of this glacier of late years. Above all this was a large moraine ridge rising to 50 feet above the glacier level. Crossing this the real glacier was attacked at 13,000 feet. Beyond here, it being early summer, the glacier, lateral moraines, and lower mountain spurs were all heavily coated * Nat. GEoG. MaG., Vol. XIII, pp. 405-406. with winter snow aud snow camps wele every where necessary. One night was passed at 14,400 feet and two at 15,600 feet, at the base of the only depression in the chain of mighty rock needles which encircle the upper end of the Hoh Lumba. ‘This depression, instead of being a long, easy snow pass crossing to a glacier connect- ing with the Hispar glacier, as marked on the survey map, is an immense over- hanging snow cornice surmounting a high, difficult sérac fall. It was as- cended in six hours by Dr and Mrs Workman and guides from the highest camp. The height, calculated by hyp- someter, later compared with lower- station mercurial barometer readings taken at the same hours, was 18,600 feet. From the great cornice overlook- ing an abyss of 7,000 feet a medium- sized glacier was observed running in a westerly direction, probably to the His- par glacier. The length of the Hoh Lumba from its snout to the base of the great col is about nine miles. On the west side of the southern end three small glaciers debouch into the main stream, and on the east a larger feeder enters near the south end. Above this on the east, four miles from the snout of the Hoh glacier, a large glacier of similar importance with the Hoh Lumba cones in, called the Sosbon. Its course is approximately parallel with the Hoh Lumba, and its length from its junction with this is five miles to the col at its source. Camps were established on this gla- cier, which was ascended and surveyed, and measurements and angles were taken to determine the rate of movement, and angles also taken to ascertain the heights of various peaks on this and on the Hoh Lumba. The middle of July the party returned to the chief camp of last year at 14,000 feet on the Chogo Loongma glacier. Here they were imprisoned nearly the whole of the last two weeks of the month Recorp AScENTS IN THE HIMALAYAS by severe snowstorms. During a short break in the prolonged storms the only upper branch left unexplored last season was ascended. As the glacier enters the Chogo Loongma at over 16,000 feet and ends at its source, between 18,000 and 19,000 feet, the ascent over new surface snow to the depth of more than 2 feet was most laborious. At a gla- cier camp at 17,000 feet, one of the highest sun temperatures of the season was taken by a solar radiating ther- mometer—sun temperature at noon 204° Fahr., shade 56° Fahr. In August the weather conditions im- proved and on the oth, taking advan- tage of clear, settled weather, Doctor and Mrs Workman and guides, with only high climbing tents and eighteen coolies, left the main camp and ascend- ing Basin glacier, an upper branch of the Chogo Loongma, camped at the base of a high snow peak in the range sepa- rating this glacier from the Chogo Loongma. ‘The next day the ascent of its snow slopes was begun and camp brought to 18,400 feet on a small pla- teau. The third day, in spite of much opposition from coolies, a last camp was pushed to another snow slope at base of the final high cone at 19,355 feet. More than half the coolies were here pros- trated by mountain sickness. Late in the afternoon steps were cut by the guides for upward of a thousand feet on the ice slopes, and on the fourth day, leaving camp at 3 a. m. by moonlight, the ascent was begun. “The whole of this part of the climb was made in zig- zags over slants rising at angles of be- tween 60 and 70 degrees, measured by clinometer, and the summit, 21,770 feet, was reached at 7 a. m. A narrow ridge connects this peak a few hundred feet below its summit to the north with an elevated snow plateau, from which rise two higher peaks. The party crossed the ridge and as- cended the second peak, the summit of, which was reached in three hours. The weather was cloudless and the view of 421 the northwest Himalayas unsurpassed. There being little wind, it was possible to take careful boiling point readings which, compared since with a mercurial standard at the lower station of Skardn, fixes the height of this mountain at 22,568 feet. Mrs Workman has thus broken her former world record for women on Koser Gunge, 21,000 feet, twice on the same day, by 770 and 1,568 feet re- spectively. While she and one of the guides remained on this summit, Dr Workman and the two others crossed the pleateau and ascended to 23,394 feet on fixed peak 24,486 feet, which gives him the world record for men, the greatest height hitherto attained being the suinmit of Aconcagua, 22,860 feet, the highest of the Andes. ‘The high catp was again reached at 7 p. m., after an absence of over fifteen hours. After the r6th of August the whole camp was carried up the Balucho gla- cier, running east from the Chogo Loongma, where, after two high camps, a new and difficult snow pass of 17,200 feet was ascended by the entire caravan. The difficult descent over a 1,000-foot snow wall was also accomplished after much argument with the coolies, and the expedition found itself on the third day at the junction of a side glacier with the Kero Loongma. ‘This is the first time that a passage over the range sepa- rating the Kero and Chogo Loongmas has been effected. The party next marched to the en- trance of the Hucho Alchori glacier, where they were joined by the surveyor. This glacier was explored for the first time, and a snow col 18,200 feet at its source ascended by Mrs Workman and guides. This seasonof climbing on new ground adds much valuable material to last year’s work. ‘The combined work of the two seasons makes the Workman expedition one of the most important exploring and high-climbing expeditions yet carried out in the northwest Himalayas. THE NEW CONE HE accompanying photographs by Dr E. O. Hovey show the ¥ remarkable tooth or spine of solid rock that has pushed up the throat of Mont Pelée since the eruption of May, 1902. The peculiar formation has been previously noted in this Magazine (p. 167, April,1903). The photographs were taken by Dr Hovey on his recent trip to OF MONT PELEE Martinique and the West Indies in be- half of the American Museum of Nat- ural History. Dr Hovey’s report has recently been published in the American Journal of Science. The lofty tooth is rifted and fissured in every direction, and great fragments of it are constantly breaking off. The tooth rests on or is connected with fluid The New Spine of Mont Pelée from the Basin of the Lac des Palmistes Looking about S. 60° W. in front. The apex is about 358 meters (1,174 feet) above the rim directly The remains of Morne Lacroix are visible at the right on edge of the crater. Photo- graphed March 25, 1903, for the American Museum of Natural History by Dr E. O. Hovey. Tue New Cone or Mont PELEE lava beneath. At night the lower portions of it glow with light. Dr Hovey says that in the light of the rising sun the spine looks like an enormous white monument rising above the mountain. Its true color is more a reddish brown with a whitish incrustation over it. No one can say exactly what the na- ture of the spine is, but the proba- bilities are that it is largely pumi- ceous in texture. The masses con- stantly falling from the sides of the spine, which grows as rapidly as it wears away, will probably in time completely bury the old crater. The new cone of Mont Pelée, with its great protruding tooth, is not central within the old crater. It has been built up northwest of the center of the old crater. There is no central opening or pit-like depression in the top of the new cone corresponding to the general idea of acrater. Steam issues from all parts of the cone, especially from the top, but none from the tooth. Dr Hoyey’s subsequent studies of the Grande Soufriére of Guade- loupe and the peak of Saba on the sane expedition lead him to the conclusion that they have passed through the phases through which Mont Pelée is now passing, and that they all substanti- atethe cumulo-volcanotheory. ‘‘ Thisis especially clear in the case of the Grande Alaskan Boundary Decision. — The award of the Boundary Commission has defined the boundary according to the American.claim in practically every re- spect. This line is shown in a map published in the Natronan GEo- GRAPHIC MAGAZINE on page 90, March, 1903. The award makes one change in this map, in Portland Canal. Port- land Canal has two parallel channels, with four islands between them. Canada claimed that the northern channel and Looking about N. 30° W. March 26, 1903, for the American Museum of Na- tural History by Dr E. O. Hovey. The Top of the New Spine of Mont Pelée from the Crater Rim Photograph taken Soufriére, the cone of which rises above an old crater rim which it has buried in the same way that Mont Pelée is now striving to bury its surrounding crater- walls.’’ * * American Journal of Science, vol. xvi, October, 1903. the United States that the southern channel was Portland Canal and the boundary. By the decision Portland Canal—7. e., the boundary—passes north of Pearse and Wales Islands (which are the innermost islands of the four) and enters the ocean through Tongass Pas- sage, between Wales and Sitklan Islands. Canada thus acquires Pearse and Wales Islands, and the United States Sitklan and Kautgunut Islands, the two outer- most of the four islands. RIGEUAKD WOU EU SK G © ODE R RICHARD URQUHART GOODE, Geographer of the U. S. Geological Survey and one of the most interested members of the National Geographic Society since the organization of the Society in 1888, died from pneumonia at Rockville, Md., June 9, 1903. His death was entirely unexpected and came asa great shock after an illness of only three days. Mr Goode was born at Bedford, Vir- ginia, in 1858. After a course at the University of Virginia, he joined the Engineer Corps of the Army in 1878. In 1879 he became a topographer of the U.S. Geological Survey, and from 1882 to 1884 was attached to the Northern Transcontinental Survey as engineer and topographer. In 1889 he was appointed to the rank of geographer in the Geo- logical Survey, and has had special charge of the surveys in the Pacific Coast States—California, Oregon, and Washington. Richard Urquhart Goode GEOGRAPHIC He was a member of the Washington Academy of Sciences and the author of several bulletins published by the Geo- logical Survey. During #g01-1903 Mr Goode was the chairman of the Committee on Technical Meetings of the National Geographic Society. He has been an occasional con- NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY ROFESSOR A. J. HENRY, Secre- tary of the National Geographic Society since November, 1899, because of the pressure of responsible official duties and ill-health, was obliged to re- sign from the secretaryship October 2, 1903. The prosperity and continued activity of the National Geographic Society during the last four years have been largely due to the personal atten- tion and zeal which Professor Henry has freely and constantly given to the Society. His resignation has been ac- cepted by the Board of Managers with exceeding regret. The new Secretary of the Society is Hon. O. P. Austin, who was unani- mously elected by the Board of Man- agers. Mr Austin is Chief of the Bu- reau of Statistics of the Department of Commerce and Labor, and has been a member of the Board of Managers of the Society since January, 1903. By GEOGRAPHIC Elements of Geology. By Joseph Le Conte. Revised and partly rewritten by Herman Le Roy Fairchild. Fifth edition. With over 1,000 figures in ne: iWesxtt, Io, xo ae GG. Os ©) inches. New York: D. Appleton & Co. 1903. $4.00. This fifth edition of a work which for 25 years has been the standard text- book of geology is most welcome. Prof. H. L. Fairchild, who has edited this latest edition and partly rewritten the LITERATURE 4.25 tributor to the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MaGaAziIne, his last article being pub- lished in January, 1900, ‘‘ The Idaho- Montana Boundary Line.”’ Mr Goode was a man of exceedingly attractive personality, whose sudden death in the prime of life is mourned by a large circle of warm friends. means of the original monthly mono- graphs and other contributions of the Bureau of Statistics, as well as by his personal publications, he may be said to have originated a new school of com- mercial geography in the United States. The expedition of Dr Frederick Cook for the ascent of Mount McKinley, and also the expedition of Miss Annie S. Peck for the ascent of Mount Sorata, were unsuccessful in gaining the sum- mits of these lofty mountains. A new division has been established in the U.S. Geological Survey, entitled the ‘‘ Division of Alaskan Mineral Re- sources,’’ which will embrace all of the investigations and surveys being carried on in Alaska. ‘This division is codrdi- nate with the others of the geologic branch of the Survey, and its chief will report to the director. Mr Alfred H. Brooks has been made chief of the new division. REA WIRSE: volume, isthe head of the department of geology at the University of Rochester and formerly Secretary of the Geolog- ical Society of America. He is emi- nently qualified to bring the work down to date and to incorporate the latest theories and conclusions, giving propor- tionate weight to each new hypothesis advanced since the last edition of the work. One of the most important of these is the theory of Prof. I. C. Cham- berlin concerning the origin of the earth. 426 He opposes the nebular theory of the earth’s origin and asserts instead the ‘“planetesimal’’ hypothesis. Accord- ing to this theory, ‘‘the earth, and the moon as well, have grown by slow ac- cretion, or infall, of small, cold, discrete particles (planetesimals), which formed the earth-moon ring or zone. ‘The ocean and the atmosphere have slowly accu- mulated from the gases originally held in the planetesimals, being forced to the earth’s surface by interior consolidation due to gravity. The heat of the earth’s interior is, under this theory, due to gravitational compression similar to the production of the sun’s heat.’’ ‘The oceanic stage was 1eached long before the earth attained its present size. To summarize, the Chamberlin school be- lieve that the outside of the earth has always been cold, and that the heat inside is due to gravitational compres- sions. ‘The nebular theory is that the globe was once a fiery mass. ‘The out- side has cooled, but the inside is still as hot as it was eons ago. The planet- esimal theory is unsettling some long- accepted theories of geology. Geography of Commerce. By Spencer Trotter. With many maps and illus- trations. Pp. xxiv -+ 410 5%x8 inches. New York: The Macmillan Co., 1903. $1.10 net. As the author very correctly remarks in the preface of this volume, ‘‘ The un- related facts of commerce have slight educational value ; they should be made to illustrate some underlying principle, to make clear a natural law, to stand in relation to the great stream of causes and effects.’’ Dr Trotter has kept this principle in mind while writing his com- mercial geography ; when he describes the great business centers or the princi- pal producing areas of the country, he invariably explains what causes, physi- cal, political, etc., make them promi- nent. The result is he has produced a book that not only describes the special industries and occupations of the various Tue Nationa, GeocrapHic MAGAZINE sections of the United States and of the world, but also imparts a great many facts about the physical and political geography of the countries. The illus- trations, diagrams, and references are admirably chosen. The one serious criticism that might be made of the volume is that the author has tried to include too much information ; his chap- terssometimes resemble condensed cyclo- peedic articles; the style is also heavy, so that while the book will be a useful help to the teacher it may prove rather dull for the pupil. The Philippine Islands, 1493-1803. Ex- plorations by early navigators, de- scriptions of the islands and their peoples, their history, and records of the Catholic missions, as related in contemporaneous books and manu- scripts, showing the political, eco- nomic, commercial, and religious con- ditions of those islands from their earliest relations with European na- tions to the beginning of the nine- teenth century. ‘Translated from the originals (Spanish, French, Italian, Latin, etc. ), many of which are now published for the first time. Edited and annotated by Emma Helen Blair, A. M., of the State Historical Soci- ety of Wisconsin, assistant editor of The Jesuit Relations and Allied Docu- ments, and James Alexander Robert- son, Ph. B., with historical introduc- tion and notes by Edward Gaylord Bourne, Professor of History in Yale University ; also a full bibliography and analytical index. With maps, por- traits, and other illustrations. Fifty- five volumes, large 8vo, about 325 pages per volume. Cleveland, Ohio: The Arthur H.ClarkCompany. 1903. $4.00 ef per volume. The purpose of this magnificent series of volumes is to place within reach of the American public the most important of the hundreds of manuscripts, letters, and documents relating to the Philippine Islands and written between 1493 and GEOGRAPHIC 1803. The writers were mainly sol- diers, government officials, and ecclesi- astics of the various orders. Some of the letters are personal and others ad- ministrative reports and recommenda- tions. Five volumes have been pub- lished, and others will follow monthly. These five alone contain much informa- tion about the early conditions on the isl- ands that cannot be obtained elsewhere. The Spaniards in the Philippines from the very first conceived a great contempt for the Chinese across the China Sea. One general offered, with less than 60 good Spanish soldiers, to march from Canton to Peking and subdue the whole empire, though there were ‘‘ many very populous cities on the way’’ and the king was ‘‘ well prepared for war and the frontiers are well fortified with many forts with artillery and garrisons wherein strict watch is kept.’’ Other generals repeatedly urged the conquest of the Chinese Empire, and every one guar- anteed to do it with less than 2,000 or 3,000 men. This was during the last half of the sixteenth century when Spain was too much occupied with her Euro- pean designs to spare the men or money to enter China. The Training of Wild Animals. By Frank C. Bostock, edited by Ellen Velvin. Illustrated. Pp. xvii + 256. 5x7 inches. New York: The Century Co., 1903: A book on this subject by the cele- brated trainer, Frank C. Bostock, is not only interesting, but gives much in- sight about the characters of the larger animals. Temperaments and disposi- tions differ as much among lions or tigers or other animals as among men. Cruelty is useless as well as dangerous in training the great beasts. Intelli- gence, pluck, vigilance, and patience are the requisites of a trainer. “There are three essentialsin the care and feeding of wild animals—good food, cleanliness, and exercise. Food and cleanliness come first, but exercise is ~ LITERATURE AED nearly as important, and this is one of the main reasons why animals in travel- ing shows are so much healthier and stronger than-those kept in zoological paiks. In the parks they get food and cleanliness, but little exercise ; for wild animals are proverbially lazy, and, un- less compelled by hunger or force of cir- cumstances, will not exert themselves in the least, preferring to lie about and sleep rather than even to walk round their cages.’ In a chapter on ‘‘ How Wild Animals are Captured,’’ Mr Bostock tells how the natives in India catch tigers : ‘““The leaves of the sycamore and large plantain are smeared with a sticky substance and left in the trail of the tiger. The moment the animal puts his foot on one of these leaves he im- mediately rubs it over his head in order to get rid of it. This naturally makes his head sticky and uncomfortable, which causes him to roll on the ground. By doing this he becomes covered with the leaves, and when he is mad with rage the natives come cautiously up and cover him with strong nets and sack- bayer,” Texas. By George P. Garrison. With map. Pp.v+320. 5x7inches. Bos- ton: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. 1903. $1.10 nel. The book is a disappointment, or per- haps it would be more just to say the title isa misnomer. ‘The romantic his- tory of the great territory is well told, but the author stops there. A single chapter of 12 pages is all he has to say of the tremendous development of the state since 1876. A few paragraphs only are devoted to describing what Texas is today. There is hardly a word about her unrivaled natural resources, which are going to make her the great- est producer among the states. The reader wants to know not only how the Texan won his freedom, but how he developed the state after it was won and what the state is now. PROGRAM OF MEETINGS GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY, HE National Geographic Society has re- cently moved into its new home, the Gardiner Greene Hubbard Memorial Hall, Sixteenth and M streets. As the build- ing is not entirely completed, the formal open- ing of the hall will be deferred for the present. The National Geographic Society presents during the season of 1903-1904 three courses of meetings—a Popular Series of ro illustrated lectures, a Scientific Series of 1o meetings, and an Afternoon Series of 5 popular lectures. The Society aims to present in the Popular Course subjects of a geographic character that possess an immediate interest for the public. The Scientific Meetings are planned particu- larly for men actively engaged in geographic work. While thése meetings are designed for scientific workers, they have proved during the last two winters of great interest to a large number of others, who do not profess to be geographers, but who wish to follow what is being done by the scientific departments of the government and by specialists throughout the United States. POPULAR COURSE The lectures in the Popular Course will be delivered in the National Rifles Armory, 920 G street, at 8 p. m., on the following dates : Saturday, October 24.—‘‘Arctic Exploration.’’ By Commander Robert E. Peary, U. S. N. Illustrated. Friday, November 13.—‘‘On the action of Radium, Roentgen Rays, and Ultra Violet Light upon minerals, with radium of 300,000 and 1,800,000 activity.’’ By Mr George F. Kunz and Dr Charles Baskerville. Friday, November 27.—‘‘ Taking the Census of the Filipinos.’? By Mr Henry Gannett, of the U. S. Geological Survey Illustrated. Saturday, December 12. — ‘‘ Marches and Movements of Arnold and André.’ By Mr W.W. Ellsworth, of the Century Co. Illus- trated. Announcement of definite dates for the fol- lowing lectures in this course will be made later: “Joys of the Trail,’ by Mr Hamlin Gar- land, author of ‘‘The Captain of the Gray Horse Troop,’’ etc. Illustrated. “‘Conditions in Macedonia,’’? by Dr Edwin A. Grosvenor, of Amherst College. Illustrated. “The Louisiana Purchase Exposition,’’ by Hon. David R. Francis, President of the Lou- isiana Purchase Exposition. Illustrated. “Travels in Arabia and Along the Persian Gulf,’ by David G. Fairchild, Special Agent of the U. S. Department of Agriculture. Il- lustrated. Provisional arrangements have also been made for addresses on— Little Known Peoples of Mexico. Russia and Japan in Korea. The Alaskan Boundary Decision. OF NATIONAL 1903-1904 SCIENTIFIC COURSE The first three meetings of this course will be held in the Assembly Hall° of the Cosmos Club, Fifteenth and H streets. The succeed- ing meetings will be at the new home of the Society, Hubbard Memorial Hall. November 20.—‘‘ European Methods of Checking Advancing Sand Dunes.”’ A. S. Hitchcock, Assistant Agrostologist, Depart- ment of Agriculture. December 4.—‘‘ The Work of the Bureau of Plant Industry.’’ Dr B. T. Galloway. December 18.—‘‘ Early Spanish Cartography of the New World,”’ by Prof. E. Ll. Stevenson, of Rutgers College. At later meetings the geographical work of the Bureau of Insular Affairs, of the U. S. Fish Commission, of the National Bureau of Stand- ards, of the Biological Survey, of the Bureau of Immigration, and of the Bureau of Statistics of the Department of Commerce and Labor will be discussed. AFTERNOON COURSE The general subject of the Afternoon Course of popular lectures is ‘‘ The Growth of Diplo- macy.’’ The special topics and the names of the speakers will be announced in a later pro- gram. The first of the series will be given on Tuesday, February 23, and the succeeding lectures on March 1, 8, 15, and 22. These lectures will be illustrated. LECTURE TICKETS Each member of the Society can purchase one season ticket, admitting two persons to all lectures, for three dollars. Persons not members of the Society may purchase one ticket, admitting two persons to all lectures, for six dollars. Single admission tickets, at fifty cents each, may be obtained at Hubbard Memorial Hall or at the lecture-hall door. APPLICATIONS FOR MEMBERSHIP Applications for membership in the Society should be sent to the Secretary, who will pre- sent all nominations to the Board of Managers for action by them. The dues for members are two doilars per annum. All members re- ceive the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE, an illustrated monthly, issued by the Society. Annual dues may be commuted and life mem- bership acquired by the payment of fifty dol- lars. The membership fee of two dollars, for persons elected to the Society in November and December, includes all dues to January 1, 1905. Office Hours: 8.30 A. M. to 5 P. M. Telephone, North 306 NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Hubbard Memorial Hall Sixteenth and M Streets, Washington, D. C. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL z President W J McGEE o o Vice-President JOHN JOY EDSON c - c ° Treasurer O. P. AUSTIN . © - Secretary ELIZA R. SCIDMORE 5 - Foreign Secretary BOARD OF MANAGERS 3901-1903 1902-1904 1903-1905 MARCUS BAKER A. GRAHAM BELL CHARLES J. BELL HENRY F. BLOUNT DAVID T. DAY GEORGE DAVIDSON F. V. COVILLE A. W. GREELY WM. M, DAVIS D. C. GILMAN ANGELO HEILPRIN JOHN JOY EDSON S. H. KAUFFMANN RUSSELL HINMAN G. K. GILBERT WILLIS L. MOORE W J McGEE A. J. HENRY ISRAEL C. RUSSELL GIFFORD PINCHOT . P, AUSTIN oO R. D. SALISBURY O. H. TITTMANN C. HART MERRIAM The National Geographic Magazine is sent free of charge to all members of the National Geographic Society Recommendation for Membership in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY The following form is enclosed for use in the nomination of persons for membership Please detach and fill in blanks and send to the Secretary DUES: Annual membership, $2; Life membership, $50. If check be enclosed, please make it payable to order of the National Geographic Society, and, if at a distance from Washington, remit by New York draft or post-office money-order. for membership in the Society. SR Neatness Punctuality Fair Prices “The Sphinx of the Twentieth Century.” ASIA AND UCD bape: | | —B Ss Comparatively few people are fa- miliar with the Chinese Empire as it exists today. In view of the con- stantly growing Oriental commerce P R | N fe E R S of the United States, everyone should : become familiar with the Chinese = : z Empire. The NEW YORK CENTRAL’S = ““Four-Track Series’? No. 28 gives 420-22 ELEVENTH ST. N. W. valuable statistics and information regarding the Flowery Kingdom, and contains a new and accurate map in WASHINGTON, D. @ colors. A copy of No. 28, “A New Map of Asia and the Chinese Empire,” sent free, post-paid on receipt of five cents in stamps by George H. Daniels, General Passenger Agent, New York Central Railroad, Grand Central Station, New Established 1868 Phone, Main 536 York. - WE make a specialty of HIGH GRADE WORK pr SCIENTIFIC 2 TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS Ses) ENGRAVERS PHILADELPHIA PLATES TO PRINT IN ONE OR MORE CoLors The fllanhattan Press-Clipping Bureau ARTHUR CASSOT, Proprietor NEW YORK (Knickerbocker Building) LONDON COR. FIFTH AVENUE AND 14TH STREET, NEW YORK Will supply you with all personal reference and clippings on any subject from all the papers and periodicals published here and abroad. Our large staff of readers can gather for you more yaluable material on any current subject than you can get in a lifetime. TERMS: 100 clippings . . $ 5.00 250 clippings . . . $ 12.00 500 clippings . . . $22.00 1,000 clippings . . . $35.00: HENRY ROMEIKE’S ' BUREAU OF PRESS CUTTINGS 33 Union Square, New York Reads every paper of importance published in the United States, and through its European agencies in London, Paris, Berlin and Vienna every paper of importance published in Europe and the British Colonies. One subscription on any given subject will bring notices from the United States, and if desired also from the European papers, WRITE FOR TERMS BACK VOLUMES OF THE National Geographic Magazine The NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE has on hand a few copies of complete back volumes which may be obtained at the following prices : Vol. 3, 1891 Se $5.10 | Vol. 9,1898 . : $2.75 NO Se O03 7 450 | yoy, Pieinog | oer es aro Vol. 6, 1894-5... 4.20 Vol. 7; 1896. ey oe WOLsT2, TOOke : 2.50 Vol. 8, 1897 ‘ 5 3.00 | Vol. 13, 1902. ‘ AP ZERO The NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE will pay the following prices for copies of certain back numbers: | — Vol. 1, 1889, No. 2, $1.00; No. 4,-$1.00 Vol. 2, 1890, No. 2, $1.00 Vol. 4, 1892, No. 1, $0.50; No. 2, $1.50; No. 3, $0.50; No. 4, $0.50; No. 5, $1.00; No. 6, $1.00 Vol: 10, 1899, No..6, $0.50; Index, $0.55 Vol. 13,1902, No. 1, $0.30 < Hubbard Memorial Hall,-- - Washington, D.C. SPECIAL IAPS PUBLISHED BY THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Map of the Philippines 6 feet 2 inches x 3 feet). Prepared under the direction of the War Department. Map of South Africa (46 x33 inches). Prepared under the direction of the: War Department. Map of Northeastern China (36x28 inches), - . Prepared under the direction of the War Department. ~ ys Map of the Chinese Empire, Japan and the Rasan-Manchoia Rail way ({1x7% inches). Map of Alaska (28x 24 inches). ass : Prepared under the direction of the U.S. Geological Survey. A Series of Twelve Maps on the Alaskan Boundary Prepared under the direction of Hon. John W. Poster, ex. Chart of the World on Mercator’s Projection (48x27 es ; Prepared under the direction of: the ee. Office: 3 es Map of Cuba (38x74 insert Prepared under the direction, of. Robert T. Hill - A Series of Twenty-five. Full-page Charts, showing storm, coast and methods of weather ing. # Prepared under the direction of Dr. Willis I;. Moore, Chief U. Ss. ‘Weather Bureau, By Mall for Twenty-five Cents Each. NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY HUBBARD METIORIAL HALL, WASHINGTON, D, Coe KODAKS, CAMERA AND PHOTOGRAPHIC SUPPLIES The Cameras and Supplies. manufactured $y the Century, Rechontee ‘Opti-. ‘cal, and Eastman Kodak Companies are. too well known to need any special recommendation. We carry the best of their several fines, thus. insuring our customers perfect satisfaction. Among these the New Film Pack Camera, made by the Rochester Optical Co., is the lightest, handiest, and simplest constructed Film Camera on the market. Size, 34x44. _ Price, $3.1 60. 2 ‘fe Film Packs, 12 exposures. $0 ! Century View: BAB wiih: carrying Poco-A, 4x5, rye one plate holder... case al one eas holder... $39 | Poney Premo B No. 446, with carrying f : case and one ete holder... + bari ene 3x4, with o Century: Model 30, 4x6, me areying: case and one plate holde ‘ Century Model 20, 5x7, with’ ‘cal case and one plate hot der... Century Model 21, te with carrying case and plate holder. Century Model 21, 5x7, with ‘Carrying case and one'piate holder Also complete lines of Trays, Graduates, String Rods, Mounts, Developing x and Toning Solutions, Films, Plates, etc. Our stock is composed. of 1903 models only, thus insuring our ‘patrons WS . of the latest improvements. Our dark room is at the disposal of our patrons. ‘Special attention Elec e hee to developing and printing. WOOPWARD & LOTHROP NEW YORK WASHINGTON — : one oN PRESS OF JUDD & DETWEILER, WASHINGTON, D. C. s. Vol. XIV DECEMBER, 1903 B CONTENTS 3 THE VALUE OF ARCTIC cv tihagierer: debates BY COMMANDER 4 ROBERT E. PEARY, U.S. . . 429 ) SURVEYING THE PHILIPPINE PHEANDS: BY GhORTe R. PUTNAM. ILLUSTRATED .. . = 437 ; MUIR GLACIER. BY C. L. ANDREWS. WITH A NOTE BY : G. K. GILBERT. ILLUSTRATED . 44t "THE GRAPE-GROWING ola aa aca OF THE eileen STATES. ILLUSTRATED ., ‘ = 445 gy PRECIOUS STONES. ILLUSTRATED . A : ; : A Pe BE "NOTES ON PANAMA AND COLOMBIA. ILLUSTRATED . . 458 rae U.S.SIGNAL CORPS ... mae eae dF DAVIDSON'S BOOK oF “THE Seana OF eae Moee: * ILLUS: TRATED ; Pe. 468 471 474 - . ’ Pesiew 'y £4 Published by the National Gebcienkic Bacinty: Hubbard Memorial Hall, ye netington, D. C. PAGE 25 me a Number ye as geet “MONTHLY, ee bythe .. NaTIonaL Grocrarnic Society, at Washing- ee Oks D. Cue Soo editorial communications oe Washikpons > Co Beene ol Mesto) a should” be addressed. to the National Coney | ea Hubbard ales pe é. ashi 3 Vere ia Baitor: eee ‘ae a . re q A iEK (38 eo oe @unerat. A.W.GREBLY > ; eee Sere saris a. s Army wa McGEE ee Wea Chief, AN, a Antbropolosy and Ethnology, Louisiana a chase. CO ae es ‘¢. HART MERRIAM | Bove Chief of the Biological ee. U. Ss. Bedecssiiiagis a TET, 3 MARCUS BAguR a ee _ Carnegie Lnstitution . WILLIS L. MOORE _ PRE PRT atl <7 Chief of the Weather Saas U. s. Ae sy One Dies of Abo PCR SOE | AASHIN GTON, z Voi. XIV, No. 12 a DHE VALUE OF ARCTIC EXPLORATION*® WASHINGTON GEOGRAP ENC MAGA ZIUNIE DECEMBER, 1903 ae By CoMMANDER RosBerT E. Peary, U. 5S. N. first public exposition of the pres- ent phase of Arctic exploration and my own plans for the coming season should be given in the National Capital and under the auspices of the National Geographic Society. It is unnecessary for me to note here the continued and unfailing interest in and courtesy to- ward my Arctic work which has been shown by this Society during the past twelve years. You are well aware of it; I am well aware of it. I shall endeavor to place clearly before you tonight the plan of my campaign, and the means by which I hope to ac- complish the object which you all know that I have before me. I hope that I may be fortunate in sending every one of you away with definite ideas, which will enable him or her to keep in touch with events as they materialize during the next two or three years. EARLY PROGRESS OF DISCOVERY if is entirely appropriate that the Before taking up present plans, let us go back a bit. Some forty-five centu- ries ago the known world lay within a little circle whose circumference touched the Black and Caspian seas, the head of the Persian Gulf and the Red Sea, and the eastern end of the Mediterranean. Centuries later the fearless Phoenicians had dared the terrors of the infinite ocean which lay beyond the Pillars of Hercules, and sailed along the coasts both north and south. East they had pioneered the way toIndia. ‘The fabled voyages of Ulysses and Jason dwindle beside their splendid distances. Still later came the work of the great explorer- conquerors, Alexander and Ceesar, open- ing up far-distant lands as the Phceni- cians opened up far-distant seas. Then came that great burst of explo- ration, the principal facts of which we know so well. Vasco de Gama to the south; Othere and the Vikings to the north, Erik and Leif, Columbus and Cabot to the west, lifted Africa, the northern headlands of Europe, and the western world from the mists. Magellan, following close upon their heels, circled the globe, and the world, as we know it now, lay revealed in its rough, broad masses. Since then exploration has, of neces- sity, been a work of large details, baring *An address before the National Geographic Society, October 24, 1903. 430 the hearts of continents, and pushing northward and southward, till today only the northern and southern apices of the earth still hide in the mists and gloom of the polar nights. A little less than four centuries ago the first expedition started out toward the North Pole. Since that time, with periods of greater or less intensity, prac- tically all the civilized nations of the earth have made attempts to reach that charmed spot. Millions have been expended in the efforts, and, though they have brought back information and accessions to sci- entific knowledge which have fully re- paid the expenditures, the main object remains still unattained. The ablest writers, scientists, geographers, states- men, and rulers have been interested in the matter, and have urged the prose- cution of the work with all the eloquence at their command. Many of their re- marks upon the subject have become historic. THREE NORTH POLAR ROUTES Asa result of all these explorations extending through nearly four centu- ries, the possible routes to the North Pole have dwindled to three. In my own personal opinion, they have dwin- dled totwo, but I notethe three. First, the drift method as devised, inaugu- rated, and put into execution by Nan- sen. The possibilities of this method are acknowledged by every one, but it by no means follows that another ship, or even the /vam herself in a second attempt, would be as fortunate as she was in the first voyage. Again, it re- quires a man of exceptional tempera- ment and a crew of almost superhuman qualities to undertake a voyage which means that for four or five years at least ship and people are but a helpless bit of flotsam entirely at the mercy of the ice in which they are drifting and practically unable to control their own fortunes or contribute by their efforts THe Nationa, GeocraPHic MaGAZzINnE to success. Presumably Nansen and Sverdrup are advocates of this route ; yet neither has, to my knowledge, ex- pressed a desire to repeat the experience of the /vam’s voyage. Bernier is re- ported as contemplating a repetition of the voyage. The second route is the so-called Franz Josef Land route. Wellman, Baldwin, and Mr Ziegler are advocates and adherents of this route. If there are others, I do not recall them at pres- ent. Payer and Weyprecht, Leigh Smith, Jackson, Wellman, Abruzzi, and Bald- win have all exploited the Franz Josef Land route with greater or less success. Of ,these various expeditions, however, Abruzzi’s is the only one that has suc- ceeded in pushing beyond the northern limit of the Franz Josef Archipelago. He is not at all in favor of this route. In fact, he uncompromisingly advocates, in words I shall quote to you later, the third—the Smith Sound, or ‘‘Ameri- can’’ route. PLANS FOR COMING EXPEDITION To come down to the present, I as- sume that all of my hearers are familiar, in a general way, with what I shall at- tempt to do and how I shall attempt to do it, but I have noticed so many mis- apprehensions as to details on the part of otherwise well-informed people, that I feel a brief exposition of certain points may not be out of place. I plan to take two ships—one a steamer with engines of maximum horse-power and minimum weight and bulk, and an auxiliary vessel to carry coal. With the steamer I plan, in the summer of 1904, to push up Smith Sound, Kennedy Channel, and Robeson Channel, and then to station her for the winter on the north coast of Grant Land, carrying her, if possible, farther north than the A/ert or the Polaris. If she can get me as far as that, I do not care what becomes of her—she will Tue Vatue or Arctic ExPpLoRaTION have served her purpose of getting me to 82° 50’, Cape Joseph Henry, which will be my base of action. ‘The second vessel will carry a large freight of coal, which will be landed on Grant Land, near the northern entrance of Robeson Channel. With this reserve of coal I will not have to economize the fuel of my steamer, but can keep the furnaces and engines going at utmost tension through the ice. ‘The reserve will also be there to take my steamer back after her work is done, if she is still alive. From Cape Joseph Henry the march toward the Pole will begin in 1905. The distance from this point to the Pole and back again is less than the average distance of my four sledging trips in 1892, 1895, Igoo, and 1902. ‘There is no reason why I should not equal this distance on my next sledging trip, thus gaining the Pole and getting back again in one season of roo days. I shall take my Eskimos with me to my northern base. On my return to Cape Joseph Henry after the polar dash, I plan to return in my steamer from that point if conditions are favorable. If the ice is impenetra- ble or my steamer is unable to carry me, I shall proceed by land southward to Cape Sabine, over the route which I laid out and which I have traveled so often in the past. At Sabine my aux- iliary vessel would meet me and bring me home. The principal departures in my new plan are: First, using a powerful steamer to force my way through the ice, instead of a sailing ship with aux- iliary engines; and, second, making my base on the shore of the Polar Sea, more than 200 miles north of my pre- vious base at Cape Sabine. Abruzzi’s remarks upon the subject of the attainment of the Pole are partic- ularly valuable as well as extremely in- teresting. His words are given in full: ‘“Tt would be useless to repeat the at- tempt (of reaching the Pole) by follow- 431 ing the same plan (the route from Franz Josef Land). It would, at most, be possible to push a few miles farther towards the north if the ice of the Arctic Ocean was jn an unusually favorable state ; but the results would not afford any compensation for the fatigue and privations undergone. While follow- ing, therefore, the invariable plan of setting out from some point on land, and not from a ship drifting on the ice, on account of the reasons put forth in the first chapter of this work, it will be necessary to find some other method of shortening the distance which has to be traveled with sledge. What I should recommend would be to sail along the western coast of Greenland to the north of Kennedy Sound, where it ought to be possible, under favorable conditions, to go to a still higher latitude than that reached by the A/er? off Grant Land.”’ This is the plan of campaign which Assistant Secretary Darling has been pleased to commend, and for the execu- tion of which he has granted the neces- sary leave. ‘This is the plan which has the approval and sympathy of President Roosevelt. Assistant Secretary Darling, in grant- ing leave for the purpose of this expe- dition, has continued the traditions of the Navy Department, and has associ- ated himself with Dobbin, Kennedy, Robeson, and Chandler, all of whose names are inscribed on our Arctic charts. He has also put himself in line with a long list of British Lords of the Ad- miralty, who have seen the moral as well as the material utility of Arctic exploration, and have fostered and en- couraged it with all the means at their command. President Roosevelt, in expressing his sympathy and approval of the work (as was naturally to be expected from his big, active temperament), associates himself with a long list of illustrious names in the past—Ferdinand of Spain, Charles V, Henry VII, Elizabeth, etc., 432 all patronsof exploration. He hasalso abundant company among foreign rulers of the present time. The expeditions of Scott, Drygalski, Nordenskjold, Nan- sen, Sverdrup, and De Gerlache have had respectively the strong personal support and approval of Edward of England, William of Germany, Oscar of Sweden and Norway, and Leopold of Belgium. Charcot’s French expedition has the lively support and approval of President Loubet. It may possibly interest you to know that up to the present time editorial com- ment from over 500 different newspapers throughout the country have come to my eye, and there is not a hostile note among them; but two or three points have been brought up in these notices which it may be well to touch upon briefly. I do not speak of them in a captious mood, but with a desire to set the points straight. One is the statement of the President of the Royal Geographical Society of London, that ‘‘ after Nansen’s voyage, there is no longer any geographical ob- ject in going to the North Pole, except for the sake of deep-sea soundings, for it is merely a point in the polar ocean, the economy of which has been made known by Nansen. ‘That great explorer finally removed the veil which concealed the secret of the Arctic regions.’’ The President of the Royal Geo- graphical Society is a strong personal friend of mine, but I cheerfully disagree with him on some points, and particu- larly the one which assumes that we have practically reached the North Pole, and, in substance, know all that is nec- essary to know about it. I have never been entirely in sympathy with the claims put forth immediately after Nan- sen’s return from his voyage in the Fram, that he had practically reached the Pole; that we now knew everything that it was necessary to know in regard to that region, and that any further efforts were not worth while. Tue Nationa GreocraPHic MacGaZIngE A distance of 260 miles from the Pole is a long ways from the actual attain- ment of the Pole, and to assert that the secret of the Pole has been penetrated and the veil lifted, at a range of 260 miles, and that the economics of the polar basin have been revealed, when 3,000,000 square miles of it have not been trodden by human foot or seen by human eye, is an enthusiastic view. ERRONEOUS THEORIES OF EXPLOR- ERS AND GEOGRAPHERS There is no portion of the earth’s sur- face where it is more distinctly impossi- ble to prophesy or forecast what is be- yond the horizon of actual vision than inthe Arctic regions. The truth of this statement has been most strikingly ex- emplified in the past. In 1818 Sir John Ross made a voyage to Baffin Bay, and returning reported that body of water to be a closed sea. To the westward, at the head of an inlet which he called Lancaster Sound, he showed on his chart a striking range of mountains. A few years later Parry entered the Sound, and before a favoring wind went spanking away to the westward beyond the hundredth meridian, and never saw these mountains. Later explorations showed the great inlet of Smith Sound extending, as we now know, to the cen- tral polar basin, and Jones Sound pene- trating far to the northwestward, also leading from this ‘‘ closed sea.’’ Again it was conclusively determined theoretically, by geographers, that the interior of Greenland was a fertile, or at least an ice-free country, surrounded by an ice barrier near the coast. Further explorations show the interior to be ab- solutely and completely buried under an enormous ice-cap. Kane and Hayes stood upon the shores of the open polar sea, as they supposed ; yet that open polar sea has not only re- treated but absolutely disappeared before the footsteps of subsequent explorers. Tue Vaturt or Arctic ExpLoRATION Petermann, one of the greatest of geographers, proved conclusively, in a theoretical way, that Greenland was one extremity of a great Arctic continent extending across the Pole, and Wrangel Land the other. Later the Corwin de- termined Wrangel ‘‘Land’’ to be an almost insignificant island of contracted dimensions, and we know now that Greenland ends 450 miles short of the Pole. For years Franz Josef Land was sup- posed to be the southern extension of an Arctic continent, yet the 77am drifted across its meridian north of it, seeing no land ; so the instances could be du- plicated. As a matter of fact, there may be land within 30 miles of Nansen’s or Abruzzi’s farthest, and yet neither of them the wiser for it. Until we reach the Pole no one can say what. there is there, whether land or water. In the light of these facts, it appears that one man’s views are as good as an- other’s, assuming the men to be of equal intellectual caliber. I feel, therefore, that the opinions of Assistant Secretary Darling are entitled to as much weight as those of Sir Clem- ents or other geographers. To a care- ful and enthusiasticstudy of Arctic voy- ages, extending over a number of years, Judge Darling brings deep thought, clear perception, exceptional ability, and the judicial bent of long legal train- ing. He is strongly impressed with the great probability of finding land in the central polar basin. For myself, as a practical worker in the field, taking what I find rather than theorizing as to what I ought to find, I recognize fully this probability; and that I have not urged it—in fact, have leaned the other way—-is due to the confirmed pessimism which long years of Arctic work and disappointments have taught me—pessimism as to any conditions which will simplify or render easier the work I have laid out for my- self. a8) The existence of land anywhere be- tween the northern shore of Grant Land and the Pole would so greatly simplify my work and reduce its difficulties that I do not let myself dwell upon it. But the possibility is there; an isolated isl- and continent, an Arctic Atlantis, with a fauna and flora of its own, with one day and one night in the year, lying there through the blinding days and opaque nights of countless geologic ages, as completely isolated from the world as if it were on Mars. Think of the satisfaction of lifting such a land out of the heart of the polar sea with the Stars and Stripes of ‘‘Old Glory.’’ Think of writing upon that land some name to endure indelibly till that day when ‘‘the heavens shall wither like a scroll,’’ to show forever that we own the top of the earth. Be- lieve me, there is room yet in this pro- saic world for a new sensation. NORTH POLE THE LAST GREAT GEO- GRAPHICAL PRIZE My statement that the North Pole is the last great geographical prize which the earth has to offer has also been crit- icised in some quarters, and it is claimed that it is nonsense to say that the North Pole is a greater prize than the South Pole. Irepeat advisedly that the North Pole is the last great geographical prize which the earth has to offer. That the particular mathematical point of the North Pole possesses greater in- terest or value than the South Pole is not asserted, but the North Pole is that apex of the earth which is in the center of the hemisphere of civilization. The North Pole has been sought by men for nearly four centuries ; the South Pole for less than a century. The North Pole has a striking place in history, in literature, in poetry, in romance. It has been the subject of infinite specula- tion, and, finally, when the North Pole has been attained, the attainment of the South Pole will follow naturally and rap- idly and will attract much less attention. 434 In this connection it is well to note also a popular misconception, namely, that the attainment of the South Pole is more difficult than the attainment of the North Pole. This is not so. In spite of the close approximation to the North Pole by recent expeditions, the actual attainment of the North Pole is avery different proposition from the at- tainment of the South Pole and much more difficult. The conditions are al- most diametrically opposite. In the case of the North Pole it is a polar sea which must be traversed and conquered. In the case of the South Pole it is a polar land which must be traversed and conquered. In the light of recent ex- plorations, the region about the South Pole offers facilities for the realization of the favorite popular ideas of attain- ing the Pole, namely, the colonization method, the method of relay stations short distances apart connected by wire, etc., ete. Plans of colonization, of re- lay stations, of telegraph connections, etc., etc., fall to the ground in the North Polar region because of the impossibil- ity of effecting anything of this kind upon the moving ice pack of the central polar sea. The attainment of the South Pole, granted sufficient funds, is only a mat- ter of time and patience. The work can be carried on in any season of the year, and each mile of advance can be permanently secured. The attainment of the North Pole means the ability to so refine and per- fect one’s equipment, supplies, and party as to be able to cover a distance of 500 miles each way without caches and without support from the country, and to cover this distance in a time limit of three or at most three and one-half months. FUNDS FOR THE EXPEDITION A partially erroneous statement has been generally disseminated which I am glad of the opportunity to correct here. Tue Nationa, GrocraPHic MAGAZINE It is to the effect that the Peary Arctic Club will furnish the funds necessary to send out the proposed expedition. This is true only to a certain degree. The Peary Arctic Club, an unincorpo- rated association of my personal friends, with Morris K. Jesup, of New York city, at its head, furnished the funds for the financing of my last four years of Arctic work. After my return last fall there was a general feeling of disinclina- tion to drop the work uncompleted, when success had been so nearly won. This feeling took form in the proposi- tion of the majority of the club to con- tribute in varying sums toward the out- fitting of another expedition. Unfor- tunately, however, the total amount which these members of the club felt they could contribute, even with the accession of some new members, was not sufficient to properly fit out an expedi- tion. Had it been sufficient I should have gone north last summer, and should now be settled down in winter quarters somewhere on the Grinnell Land coast. The same status holds today. The total amount which the continuing mem- bers of the Peary Arctic Club feel that they can contribute to another expedi- tion is insufficient to properly outfit the expedition. Additional members, either individuals or associations, are necessary to complete the total amount. And it is to be said in this connec- tion that it is essential that the total amount should be assured without de- lay ; $150,000 to $200,000 between now and the rst of January will meet all re- quirements and give ample time to properly fit out the expedition. Six months from now it will be impossible to fit the expedition even with a half- million available, because of lack of time. Somewhere in this broad country I am satisfied that the money is waiting, ready and anxious to do this work as I, if only the connection can be estab- Tue Vatue or Arctic ExPLoRATION lished. One thing is to be clearly un- derstood, the government is not financ- ing the work. The funds must come from private sources. It may be said without egotism that a practical experience equaled by that of no other worker in Arctic regions ; an interest in the work at least equal to that of any other man; the utmost assistance of the Eskimos, never before available; the time and the opportunity, thanks to Assistant Secretary Darling and the President—all these are assured; the only thing lacking is the money. I assume that if it were demonstrated that the erection of a monument costing $150,000 would redound to the great credit of its builder or builders and of the city wherein it stood, not only now, but for generations to come, it would not be a very difficult proposition to secure that amount from some public- spirited citizen or citizens in many a prosperous city in this country. The Pole is a grander monument than any structure of stone or bronze, and a name inscribed upon it would be read and known by future generations when granite and bronze had crumbled to dust and rust. There is no way by which a man of large means may win for himself in these days a more enviable and lasting name than by assuming the role of patron of some large effort to increase our knowl- edge of the earth. The principal thing we remember of Ferdinand of Spain is that he sent Co- lumbus to his life work. Allthat most of us remember of Grin- nell, of New York, is that he sent Kane to his work. To the millionaire, whether he be young and just starting in life, or elderly and retired from business, it offers a broad and elevated field. In the words of old Martin Frobisher, it is ‘‘the one thing left of this world by which a notable mind may become famous and fortunate.’’ oe CONQUEST OF THE POLE SIMPLY A BUSINESS PROPOSITION The conquest of the Pole is today a business proposition, pure and simple ; and, like any business proposition, it can be presented in three sentences of four words each. Can it be done? What will it cost? Is it worth while? Can tt be done? ‘There is not a geog- rapher, a scientist, or an intelligent per- son conversant with Arctic matters who doubts that the Pole caz be reached, and that it w7// be reached in a few years. The requirements are simply those for any large project ; sufficient money ; proper equipment ; adequate time ; en- ergy, experience, and determination. What will it cost? The cost of various Arctic expeditions has ranged from a few thousand to a million dollars each. On my plan, and with my methods, an expedition which would in all prob- ability secure the Pole, can be fitted out for two years at acost of $150,000. The only expensive item in that outfit will be a powerful ship which shall push me to the northern shore of Grant Land. There are hundreds of men in this country today who could defray the expenses of an expedition and never feel it; thousands who could defray a tenth, hundreds of thousands who could defray a hundredth. We have spent and are spending hun- dreds of thousands of dollars for an idea or a principle. Take a single example, the interna- tional yacht races. A reliable New York paper stated recently that the cost of the last yacht race to the Amer- ican side alone was in the neighborhood of $900,000, and that it has cost us to defend the cup in the last five years some $2,200,000. For less than one-fourth of the former sum, less than one-tenth of the latter, we can secure the Pole. And how do the races compare? The races for the America’s cup have been in progress for tens of years, be- 436 tween two nations; the race for the Pole hundreds of years between practically all the civilized nations of the world. There have been numbers of cup- defender syndicates, and will be num- bers more. The syndicate that lifts the Pole will have no successor and can never be beaten. The winning of the yacht race is a matter of today; the winning of the Pole is for all time. ls it worth while? Certainly it is worth while. As a matter of the valuable additions to geography and science it is worth while. The head of the Smith Sound route is the one point from which can be reached and welded the links still lack- ing to make the Arctic exploration a finished job. THE MORAL PRESTIGE OF GAINING THE POLE WORTH TEN TIMES THE COST As a matter of prestige it is worth while. Abruzzi’s expedition, costing two hundred thousand dollars, was worth many times its cost to Italy in increased prestige. Abruzzi drove home to the civilized world the fiber of which Italians are made. Nansen’s expedition, fitted out by his King, his Parliament, and wealthy pri- vate citizens, impressed the world with the material which makes up the de- scendants of the Vikings. And should you some morning read in your paper that an American had placed the Stars and Stripes upon the Pole, each one of you would feel a thrill of pride and enthusiasm, and be glad that you are an American; and every true American at home and abroad would feel the same pride, and that in- crement of justifiable pride and enthu- siasm to each of millions of citizens Tue Nationa GeocraPHic MacGaZIneE would be worth ten times the cost in dollars and cents. Asa matter of patriotism based upon the obligations of our manifest destiny, it is worth while. The North American world segment is our home, our birthright, our destiny. The boundaries of that segment are the Atlantic and the Pacific, the Isthmus and the Pole. We are fully able, I think, to take care of the Atlantic and the Pacific. Weare negotiating for the Isthmus. It would be a shame for others to find and mark the Pole for us. Believe me, the winning of the North Pole will be one of the great mile-stones of history, like the discovery of the New World by Columbus and the conquest of the Old by Alexander ; and the man, or the association, or the community, or the nation that makes its discovery possible will write its name to be read and known when, perhaps, the very civ- ilization of today is forgotten. Let us attainit, then. It is our priv- ilege and our duty. Let us capture the prize and win the race which the nations of the civilized world have been strug- gling for for nearly four centuries, the prize which is the last great geographi- cal prize the earth has to offer ; the race which is far greater than the interna- tional yacht races. ‘Then let us take a hand with England, Germany, Sweden, Scotland, and the others for the con- quest of the South Pole. As Assistant Secretary Darling well says, the attain- ment of the Poles is all that remains to complete man’s domination of the earth. Six years ago we were sleeping con- tent within our borders, drowsy of our strength and possibilities. Since then we have embraced the earth, and now right hand clasps left in the far East in a grasp never to be loosened. What a splendid feat for this great and wealthy country if, having girdled the earth, we might reach north and south and plant ““Old Glory’’ on each Pole. How the imagination stirs at the thought ! SURVEYING HAE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS By GEORGE R. PuTNAM, ASSISTANT, UNITED STATES COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY, IN CHARGE OF WorK IN THE PHILIPPINES HE work of the Coast and Geo- | detic Survey in the Philippine Islands is at present conducted under a joint arrangement between the national and insular governments, whereby each defrays certain classes of expenditures. It is under the general supervision of the Superintendent at Washington, but the local administra- tion is conducted mainly through a sub- office established at Manila. In all re- lations with the Philippine government this office acts as a bureau reporting to the Philippine department of commerce and police, in accordance with the act of the Philippine Commission passed September 6, Igor. An officer of this survey visited the islands during the summer of 1900 to make a preliminary investigation of the need of and conditions for the carrying on the work of the organization. The first survey parties arrived in Manila in December, 1900, and the present office quarters in the Intendencia build- ing were assigned and field parties com- menced work in January, 1901. At that time active military operations were in progress throughout the islands and Manila was under martiallaw. Noone Surveying Party Crossing a River on an Improvised Raft NaTIonaL GEoGRAPHIC MAGAZINE Landing from an Outrigger through the Surf was allowed on the streets of the city after ro o’clock at night without au- thority, so that it was necessary for the longitude observer to be provided with a pass. Fora while the field work was confined to the vicinity of garrisoned posts, but after a few months the gen- eral conditions in the islands greatly improved and survey operations have been extended as needed. No serious difficulty has been encountered because of the hostility on the part of the natives, although in instances parties have been in towns that were ‘“‘ shot up.’’ On several occasions the survey- ing work, and especially the triangula- tion signals, have aroused the suspicions of over-zealous local officials. In one instance an observer climbing a hill to occupy a triangulation station met the municipal police of the neighboring town coming down the hill carrying the SURVEYING THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS triangulation signal with its wide, out- spreading legs still on it; they were industriously cutting a wide path through the thicket so as to be able to produce this suspicious object intact, evidently believing it a beacon of the insurrectos. They were persuaded to carry it up the hill again. The development of the field work has necessarily been controlled by vari- ous conditions, and it has been extended along the lines which appeared most feasible with the means available and most likely to yield re- sults of immediate use- fulness. The wide extension by the Signal Corps of the telegraph system for mil- itary purposes suggested the determination of base positions, including tele- graphic longitudes and zenith telescope latitudes. It was fortunate that this work was carried out promptly, as with the passing of military neces- sity many lines have been abandoned. Thirty-six latitudes and thirty-six differences of longitude have been determined, the points being fairly well distributed over the archipelago from the north coast of Luzon to Zamboanga. These stations have all been marked and described for future reference. At most stations a meridian has been laid out or an azimuth measured, and mag- netic observations have generally been made. The surveying steamer Pathfinder, under command of J. J. Gilbert, assist- ant, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, arrived at Manila from Alaska in No- vember, 1gor1, and has since been con- tinuously at work in the islands, except during intervals when docking or repair work on the vessel has been required. aro 9} Harbor surveys at Cebu, Ormoc, and Romblon have been made, and during the past year this vessel has completed important surveys of San Bernardino Strait and Albay Gulf, and of San Pedro Bay and the south coast of Samar, as well as a thorough examination of the much-used passage southwest of Leyte, where a danger had been re- ported. The Pathfinder is a well- equipped, modern survey ship, and carries two steam launches. A small wooden steamer was pur- U.S. Coast and Geodetic Steamer Pathfinder chased in Manila and adapted to survey work. This vessel, the Research, has made a number of harbor surveys on the west and southeast coasts of Luzon and on Mindoro and Culion islands, and is at present working on the coast of Negros. Chartered launches have been em- ployed in some cases for hydrographic work, and the survey of Lingayen Gulf by this means has recently been completed. Harbor surveys have been made at a number of other places, using various means. : The abrupt coral reefs along many of 4.4.0 the coasts of the archipelago materially increase the difficulty of carrying on hydrographic work. In connection with the hydrography, tidal observations have been made at 31 places. At Manila an automatic tide- gauge has been maintained for more than two years. The tide staffs are re- ferred to bench-marks. The tide rec- ords are used in reducing the soundings and in predicting the tides, to be in- cluded in the annual Tide Tables pub- lished in Washington. A continuous triangulation has been carried along the northwest coast of Tue Narionat GeocraPpHic MaGAZINE extend to the southward among the islands. Topographic surveys with the plane- table have been carried out in connec- tion with nearly all the other work, usually executed simultaneously with the triangulation, but controlled by the latter. A scale of =i sy has generally been used for harbor work and spto5 for general coast work, though these have been varied as conditions required. The topography has been confined to the shore line and adjacent towns and highways, with the location of eleva- tions visible from the coast. In the Triangulation Party Starting Out from Manila Luzon from Lingayen Gulf to Cape Bojeador, and this is now being ex- tended eastward along the north coast. This triangulation is for the control of the coast line, and extends from the shore to the first line of hills. It is joined to the various astronomical sta- tions and is sufficiently controlled by base lines and observed azimuths. Nearly all the harbor and other survey work is based on triangulation, and is generally connected with one of the as- tronomical stations, and all the points are marked and described. A triangu- lation has been carried to the entrance of Manila Bay, which it is proposed to work along the northwest coast of Luzon native ponies were used by the observ- ers, and bull carts for the transportation of instruments. The work progressed satisfactorily under the conditions there found, which were more favorable than in many other districts. The numer- ous substantial church edifices with which the country is dotted furnish the best of artificial landmarks and are a decided assistance in all parts of the survey work. In some localities few additional signals are necessary for hy- drographic or other work. In the office of the Survey in Manila detailed plans for the field parties are Murr GLAciER arranged, the distance from Washing- ton rendering this necessary. The rec- ords and survey sheets are sent to this office, and preliminary charts are pre- pared and published by lithography in Manila. In this office there have also been compiled and published a series of seven pamphlets of Sailing Directions for the Coasts of the Philippine Islands, and from time to time there are published Notices to Mariners, giving new infor- mation of immediate importance to nav- igation, as dangers discovered, changes in aids to navigation, and other correc- tions to charts. The computations are revised and car- ried as far as may be needed for imme- diate use, the soundings are plotted or examined, and the drawings are reduced to the scale required for publication. Besides the American experts in charge of each part of the work, ten Filipino draftsmen and one Filipino computer are employed. The almost entire lack of technical education in the Philippines has been a barrier to testing the ability of the natives in the survey work in the field. To furnish a knowledge of the coasts 4.4.1 and adjacent waters that will be satis- factory to an enlightened nation will require a large amount of coast-survey work in the Philippine Islands. While considerable information exists, a care- ful examination of it proves that for only limited areas does it approximate completeness. Many parts of the coast have been only roughly sketched. A glance at the map of the islands shows that the natural highways of this region are on the water, so that a large part of the commerce of the islands will always be carried by water. A few geograph- ical facts will emphasize these condi- tions. ‘The islands have a general coast line of about 11,444 statute miles, or double that of the main part of the United States, while the total area is 115,026 square miles, or less than that of New Mexico. There is a mile of coast line to every 10 miles of area, while in the United States the propor- tion is 1 to555. There are nearly 1,700 islands having names and it is possible to count 3,000 islands and islets on the charts. Even the larger land masses are so elongated in figure that no point in any island is more than 60 miles dis- tant from some part of the coast. MUIR GLACIER OR four years it has not been pos- i sible for the excursion steamers visiting Glacier Bay to closely approach the Muir Glacier. As that glacier has been the Mecca of many of the Alaska tourists, the failure to see the glacier at close quarters has been a grievous disappointment. During the season of 1899 the conditions were un- changed, and the boats made their en- trance into Muir Inlet and landed their passengers as usual, but with the sea- son of 1900 and the following seasons they were able to get no nearer than from five to ten miles below the usual landing. From that distance it could be seen that great changes had occurred in the appearance of the front of the glacier, and that the ice had receded to a considerable extent. Desiring to know the extent of the changes, on May 5, 1903, Mr Case, a photographer, of Skagway, Alaska, and myself left Skagway for Glacier Bay in an open boat. We followed in the bay, inall probability, close on the track of Professor Muir and Reverend Young when on their exploration trip in 1879. Going through the passages between the Beardslee Islands and keeping near 442 Tue Nationa, GrocrarpHic MAGAZINE A. Muir Glacier in May, 1903 A and B give a panoramic view of the frontal cliff of the division of the glacier passing east of the nunatak. Beyond the nunatak at the left appears a part of the main or western division the east shore, we entered Muir Inlet, passed back of the small island, and reached the moraine of the glacier. At this point the ice completely blocked further progress, filling the inlet from shore to shore in a solid mass of bergs, largeandsmall. Landing here, we went up to where a view could be had of the inlet and glacier. From this point the ice in the inlet looked as though so closely packed that, from the island on the eastern shore across to the western shore and up to the front of the glacier, one might cross the inlet on the ice at almost any point. At scarcely any place could any water be seen, and to one not knowing that water extended underneath the ice, it would have been hard to believe it possible. It had the appearance of a great ice-jam in a river, except that the larger bergs were lifted above the mass higher than any jam could raise them. ‘The space of clear water which formerly extended in front of the ice, forming one of its greatest contrasts, was entirely filled. The glacier had receded until the point of the island in the center of the glacier, shown as being about three miles from the ice-front on the map of the glacier by Professor Reid, in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE, February, 1892, was clear of ice ex- cept such as lay on the water in front of it. The main branch breaks from there to the mountain at the west, and Muir GLacieR 44.3 B. Muir Glacier in May, 1903 the western tributary is entirely sepa- rated from it. On the other side of the island, or nunatak, the break of the glacier front extends toward the moun- tain above the Dirt Glacier ‘in two hol- lowing curves, leaving a point in the middle extending into the inlet as though resting on a sand-spit or other support. From there it turns west to- ward the Dirt Glacier and presents an ice-wall of perhaps 1oo feet in height or more, nearly to the place the Dirt Glacier enters the inlet. This part of the glacier presents a different front from the main branch. ‘The top of the ice is nearly level, and as it approaches the water it cracks in immense crevasses at varying distances back, and cubical blocks break from it, making much larger bergs than were formerly thrown off by the Muir. Bergs that appeared to us to be fully 75 feet out of the water were seen ro miles down Glacier Bay. The Dirt Glacier pushes its black front out into the inlet from the south- east, forming a separate glacier. This description will enable any one familiar with Professor Reid’s map, or any one who has visited the glacier, to understand the marked changes which have occurred. Judging from the appearance, it is not improbable that the end of the career of the Muir as a tidewater glacier is near at hand. Many attribute the sudden changes to the earthquakes which occurred in 44.4 September, 1899. At that time the part of Alaska in which the Muir Glacier is situated was visited by several severe shocks of earthquake. Previous to that the steamers had experienced no great difficulty in landing their passengers within a short distance of the front of the glacier, but during no season since have they been able to get nearer than five to ten miles, owing to the immense quantities of floating ice. Instead of receding a mile in seven years, as has Tue Nationa, GEocRAPHIC MAGAZINE been estimated heretofore, it has drawn back about two and one-half miles since 1899 ; consequently, to assign the changes to that cause is not at all un- reasonable. I append a sketch, based on Professor Reid’s map heretofore referred to, show- ing changes, and also photographs by Mr Case and myself, showing some of the existing conditions. Cc. lL. ANDREWS. Skagway, Alaska. ee ee yee AAW Sy) » {rw eset N : Con ey T WRIGHT NOTE BY G. K. GILBERT HE Muir Glacier is the best known and also one of the most interesting of Amer- ican glaciers. It is not a nar- row river of ice of the ordi- nary alpine type, but rather a broad lake of ice fed by trib- utary streams from many direc- tions, and discharging through an outlet valley to Glacier Bay. The bottom of this valley of discharge is below sea-level, so that whatever position in it the glacier front occupies the ice is washed by. the water of the ocean. The part of the valley not occupied by the glacier is known as Muir Inlet, and is a branch of Glacier Bay. In 1792, when this part of the coast was mapped by the En- glish navigator, Vancouver, nearly the whole of Glacier Bay was filled with ice, the Muir Glacier being tributary to a broader stream. This \\ LZ 2, LE erox (10 tw Scale ofmiles qo 2 3 4 5 ——— er ro? Sketch Map of Muir Inlet and Front of Muir Glacier, Showing Positions of the Ice Front in 1890 and in May, 1903 The main features are taken from the map published by H. F. Reid in volume tv of the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC The ice front in 1903 and the data as to the condition of the inlet in that year are by C. L,. Andrews. MAGAZINE. broader stream ended in an ice cliff at a point more than 20 miles farther seaward than the present front of Muir Glacier. In 1879 the region was visited by John Muir, who explored Glacier Bay and its various in- lets. He found the front of Muir Glacier well within Muir THe Grare-GrowInc INDusTRY Inlet, the retreat since the time of Van- couver having been more than 15 miles. In 1886 Rev. G. F. Wright madea study of the glacier, and it was surveyed and more elaborately studied by Prof. H. F. Reidin 1890 and 1892. In 1899 it was visited by the Harriman Expedition, and changes in the outline of the front were recorded in a sketch map by Mr Henry Gannett. Each successive observation up to 1890 showed the retreat of the ice front. Between 1890 and 1892 there was a slight advance, and there was a moderate amount of retreat before 1899. The history of the locality since 1899, as set forth in Mr Andrews’s letter, in- dicates that some very important change was made by the earthquake which oc- curred a few months after the visit of the Harriman Expedition. As the amount of ice thrown into the inlet was so great that approach by water is not yet possible, it is probable that the greater part, or perhaps the whole, of the falling away of the glacier front took place suddenly and as a consequence of the earthquake. Professor Reid’s map shows two nunataks, or islands of rock, projecting above the glaciera few miles 445 back from the front. The summits of these nunataks were used by him as to- pographic stations, and they were after- ward occupied for the same purpose by Mr Gannett. I also, as a member of the Harriman Expedition, visited them in 1899, and noted that the portion of the glacier lying between them and the ice front was at that time practically stagnant. The portion between them and the east wall of the basin seemed also to be nearly motionless, but there was evidence of a strong current west of the nunataks. That which has since broken away includes portions of both the inactive and the active divisions of the glacier, and the maps and photo- graphs suggest that the ice in the vicinity of the nunataks has suffered loss in depth as well as area. Where Reid mapped two small nunataks, Gannett found two of larger area, and Andrews indicates a single one, including the positions of both those observed by Reid. The retreat of the ice front has extended practically to the face of the confluent nunatak, though a remnant of ice ap- pears to cling to the rock, forming a terrace about its seaward slope. PE GRA h-GROWING INDUSTRY IN DHE UNG DS ay Adiens HE cultivation of grapes for the market, for raisins, and to make wine has become an important business of the United States during re- cent years. Two hundred million dollars of capital are invested in this and depend- ent industries. California supplies the people of the country with practically all the raisins that they eat, 100,000,000 pounds, and the same state, with New York and Ohio, produces annually 24,- 000,000 gallons of wine. ‘The annual grape crop, before any of the grapes are changed to wine or raisins, reaches $15,000,000 in value and nearly 750,000 tons in weight. The early settlers of the Atlantic coast found wild vines everywhere, but their attempts to start vineyards in the East failed miserably, as they tried to grow varietiesimported from Europe. It was not until they began to experiment with some of the wild varieties growing so luxuriantly on the coast that they had any success. About 1824 Mr John Adlum, of Georgetown, D. C., obtained the well- known Catawba grape by improving a Tue Nationa, GrocrapHic MAGAZINE 446 oo00'See av I OF ITOUL TY. ‘sadvis 10} 000‘000'S¢ 1940 Yseo Ut yo pred WwolRIOOSse ay} ZO6I JO [ey oy} UT “suOZ SNOUs SOLIOUTM posva] S}I ye pue sodv1rs Jo suo} OOO‘OST PoSNs ZO6T UI SOLIOUTM WMO S}t ye ‘WONIOOSSY OUIA\ BIUIOFYeD ayy, “Aprwad ouIM JooMs pue Ap Jo suOT]eS COo‘oCO‘ce Jnoqe soonposd ero; [PD VIUIOWVO Wt sodvir) Suryporg’ aInqNosy jo Juaurjszedad *S ‘A ‘wueursnyzy ‘D> 981009 wor 447 THe Graree-Growinc INDUSTRY ‘sodvis suryoid Avp sad pg se ys se uaaa puev o$-S¢ 03 z¥ WOIJ IYVUE PUL “MOTPENZS 9} [Oro (asouvdef ay} Ay[eioadsa) stotoqe] ssouvdef puv ssautyD oJ, “YILA pusa}uoo 0} aavt SIDMOLS OI} SULaTqord SNOLIAS SOUL ay} JO AU St HONSanb jo0qKy ay} ‘Joey UL “Y1OM oy 1OJ [OOYOS Wt0IJ pasnoxe 98 Snous aHIL[ SIV OYA UoIp[IyO [OOYIS ay} Jey} eurosoq sorjovAd sIy seYy TeTpIMLy OG ‘spreAdUTA 9} UL_JNO Orv YY} suTsTeI Jo sXe] dy} SULIAOD PUL SULUIN} OJ Moy uv sz $f pu of se LSI] Se YSv poJCOIPUL SI UIA UdT~AA pue ‘NeaIng rsTVeA,\\ eT jo suonorpeid at} Yow Siotoqey esouvdef oy} yyy uaTy stzy ‘sedevrS pue suister parap ATeyn1ed 07 aSemep spqvsapisuoo BSNL O} JOWOAON ULYSnoue suret pt ATuoNheny “surster jo punod 9uo ayvur oO} sadvas yo spunod f 07 € wosy soyey I VIUTOFIV) UL sodviny SULT IANNIS JO Juswyvdsd ‘SQ ‘uuvUsNy “Dd 981035 wo Tue Nationa, GrocraPpHic MaGAZzINne 4.48 ‘opisjno auop Aqey4ed weeq Survey toyye poysty st sursno oy} aroy ‘sasnoy Surimo savy ‘dos oY} SUL[PULY, UT OUT} OARS 07 PUL UTeI Jo UMODIR LO SutAIp UL ASTI YONU OS unt oF JOU TapAO UT ‘SHIMOIS IOSIV] OY} JOoULOG “sya 9o.11]} JMOL st suIster Jo Avr] v Surmo puv surdrp Jo suit} asvI1oav st, VIULOJ [VO UI SUISIeY sseppseg surAsq ainj[Monsy jo Juauyjrvded *§ “A ‘uuvIUsNH “D9 231099 Woy 449 Tue Grare-Growinc INDUSTRY 000‘000‘¢S 410d ut 0} Aressa9au se ‘909015) pue ureds wor spunod M 4 Sgot se ApquaeI se YSnoy}ye ‘Aj[enuue spunod uorypMM xts A[UO rod mT Mou oA "JUBA Aayy [ye Aypeoroesd yr atdoad uvorroury oy} Ajddns asa, “Ayivad surster jo spunod ooo‘ooo‘oor saonpoid erums10yeD 91n}Nosy Jo Justijzledaq "Ss °Q ‘uuet VIUTOFITV) Ul SUISTB SY SUIMUIS usny ‘Dd 25.1005 W014 450 Tue Nartrionat GeocraPHic MaGaAZINE From George C. Husmann, U. S. Department of Agriculture Packing Raisins in Layers in California wild American grape. He was exceed- ingly elated with his discovery, and in a letter toa friend says that “‘in bring- ing this grape into public notice I have rendered my country a greater service than I would have done had I paid the national debt.’’ Though the national debt was then $90,000,000, Mr Adlum probably did not exaggerate the value of his discovery: Twenty years later, in 1844, Mr Ephraim Wales Bull, of Concord, Mass., obtained the famous Concord grape from the seed of another wild variety. The Concord has since become the most widely known, most generally planted, and for all purposes the best American grape yet introduced. Nine-tenthsof the great cropof 85,000 tons of grapes from the Chautauqua grape belt on Lake Erie, in 1900, were Concords. ‘The first Con- cord vine, from which stock the millions of vines of this variety have come, still lives in the garden of Mr Bull’s cottage. In 1830 there were 88 varieties of American vines known. - Today there are at least 1,000. In California the Mission fathers suc- ceeded at an early date in growing a European grape for theirownuse. They had but one variety, which is still largely grown, and is known as the Mission. The Mission vine planted at Montecito, Cal., in 1795, was exhibited at the Centennial Exposition in Philadelphia. Some of the choicest European varieties have since been introduced and have thriven in their new home. Mr George C. Husmann, of the De- partment of Agriculture, has recently published an exceedingly valuable paper on ‘‘Grape, Raisin and Wine Produc- tion in the United States,’’ from which these facts are derived.* In the United States there are two distinct grape-producing sections—one * Year Book of the Department of Agricul- ture, 1902, pp. 407-420. Tue Grare-Growinc INDUSTRY east of the Rocky Mountains, where the American varieties are largely and profitably grown; the other in Califor- nia, where the foreign or Vinifera vari- eties have found a congenial home. To the late Senator Leland Stanford, founder of the Leland Stanford Junior University, belongs the distinction of having had the largest vineyard in the world, comprising nearly 5,000 acres and being over 7 miles long. The win- eries on the place cover more than 6 acres of roof surface, and during the years Mr Husmann had charge of them from 2% million to 3 million gallons of Wine were made annually, from 400 to 850 tons of grapes being crushed daily. Throughout California there are a num- ber of vineyards of 500 acres each. At Asti the Italian-Swiss colony has 1,700 acres in bearing vineyards. On the place are extensive wineries, with the largest wine vat of the world, hold- ing 500,000 gallons. Near Cucamonga the Italian Vineyard Company has, dur- ing the last three years, planted nearly 2,000 acres inone field. The Riverside Vineyard Company during the same time planted 2,500 acres in one vine- yard. The amount of wine made in the United States is, however, very small compared to that produced in the coun- tries of Europe. Even Turkey, whose Mohammedan population drink little wine, produces nearly twice as much wine as the United States. In 1901 France produced of wines 1, 523,233,200 gallons; Italy, 1,013,- 760,000 ; Spain, 520,080,000 ; Portugal, 451 155,760,000; Austria, 116,160,000 ; Roumania, 87,120,000 ; Chile, 85,120,- 000; Russia, 76,560,000; Bulgaria, 73,920,000 ; Germany, 60,720,000 ; Ar- gentina, 55,440,000; Turkey, 50,160,- 000; Greece, 32,300,000; Switzerland, 31,680,000 ; Uiited States, 29,500,000, and Servia, 23,760,000 gallons. ‘The industry in the United States is as yet inits infancy. A beginning has just been made in a commercial and business- like manner to improve methods and expand markets. California has pro- duced and sold annually the last ten years an average of 20 million gallons of wine, 2 million gallons of brandy, and 80 million pounds of raisins. Her wines and brandies have taken high honors at all important expositions, in- cluding that at Paris in 1900, and they are rapidly finding their way into all the principal markets of the world. So far the raisin industry of this coun- try has only supplied the small home demand of 100 million pounds, whereas the present population, were it to con- sume as much per capita as some other countries, say Great Britain, would now use 400 million pounds annually, not to say anything of extending markets and exporting to other countries. When it is considered that France in 1go1 produced 1,523,233,200 gallons of wine, while this country produced 29,500,000 gallons, and that the Golden State alone has a grape and wine pro- ducing area almost equal to the whole of France, some idea can be formed of the great possibilities of this important industry. PRECIOUS STONES HE United States can supply all the wants of its people for coal, iron,'copper, petroleum, and all the useful minerals ; gold and silver also are found in generous quantities ; but of precious stones, the diamond, the ruby, the emerald, the topaz, etc., it has prac- tically none, except what it has bought abroad. In 1902 we paid $25,000,000 to foreign countries for precious stones 452 that we imported, while during that year precious stones of the value of only $338,000 were found within our borders. These were principally sapphires from Montana, turquoises from New Mexico, Arizona, Nevada, and California, and tourmalines and chrysoprases from Cal- ifornia. The United States Geological Survey has just published a report by Mr George F. Kunz on ‘‘ The Production of Pre- cious Stones in 1902,’’** which contains much interesting information as to the origin of the different stones. Nearly all the diamonds come from the Kimberley mines. The South African mines have re- covered from the set-back of the Boer war, and apparently have an inex- haustible supply of diamonds. In the various mines a total of over 40,000,000 loads of blue or diamantiferous ground is blocked out, meaning probably more than 10,000,000 carats of diamonds. The largest pile of diamonds ever brought together was collected at the De Beers mine in South Africa in July, 1900. The directors wanted to know the quantity of diamonds necessary to fill a certain measure. Diamonds of all kinds were put in just as mined, and it was thus ascertained that a cubic meter of diamonds weighs 11,976,000 carats and has an approximate value of about $76,000,000. Up to the present time the Kimberley mines have produced more than $500,000,000 worth of uncut diamonds. The number of diamonds from Brazil has fallen considerably during the last several years, because of the crude and unsystematic methods of hunting for them. Some 5,000 people are engaged in diamond mining there, but their tools *'The Production of Precious Stones in 1902. By George F. Kunz. Extract from mineral resources of the United States, calendar year 1902: David T. Day, Chief of Division of Mining and Mineral Resources. Washington : Government Printing Office. 1903. Tue Natrrionat GrocraPpHic MaGAZINE are the commonest—a hoe, a crowbar, an iron hook on the end of a pole, or a hammer and two basins for washing the gravel. The accompanying illustra- tions show two remarkable carbons from Brazil found on one claim—the first in 1894 and the second intgo1. ‘The car- bons are split into many pieces and used for diamond drills. The present output of 2,500 carats of carbons a month can- not supply the demand for them for mining and drilling machinery. The price per carat demanded by the min- ers in the field has jumped to $11 and $11.20 for carbons, which is more than is paid for average uncut diamonds. A new diamond field is being ex- ploited in southwestern Borneo, where diamonds have long been known to exist. In the region of the Landak River, near the mouth of the Soran River, a piece of so-called serpentine has been obtained which incloses a diamond apparently in itstrue matrix. The Rajahsof Panem- bohan and Pongerans possess an im- mense belt studded with diamonds, said to be from this district, one stone weigh- ing 67 carats. It is a peculiar belief of the natives that the gold and diamonds in the earth area sort of bank, and should be worked only when they themselves need money, since they believe that gold and diamonds are always there when they desire them. The great Borneo diamond of Mattam, said to weigh 367 carats, is believed to be from this same region. India, so long renowned in history and tradition as the source of gems, produced in r902 no diamonds and no precious stones, with the exception of considerable numbers of rubies mined in Upper Burma. The leading gem dealers of Paris and Amsterdam have agents at Mandalay who buy the rubies directly from the Shans. The finest rubies go io Paris. In examining rubies the Shans never use artificial light, holding that full sunlight alone can bring out perfectly Precious STONES 45: From George F. Kunz, U. S. Geological Survey The Largest Piece of Carbon Ever Found. Actual Size The carbon was found in Brazil in 1894. It weighed 3,078 carats or 20.3 troy ounces. The finder sold it for $16,000 to a speculator, who resold it for $32,000, After it had been broken into pieces for use as a diamond drill its value was about $130,815. A Ih Tue Nationat Geocrapuic Macazine From George F. Kunz, U. S. Geological Survey Process of Breaking the Third Largest Piece of Carbon Ever Found. Weight, 750% Carats; Value, $23,600. Found in Brazil, rgor r. Outer half of the piece, showing a break diagonally across it. 2. Reverse (inner) side of 1, showing three breaks, making five pieces of the half of the carbon Precious STONES 455 From George F, Kunz, U. S$. Geological Survey The Carbon Shown on the Opposite Page as Finally Broken into Pieces for Drills I, 1a. Inner sides of upper part of the carbon shown as Fig. 2 in the preceding illustration. 2. The entire piece of carbon broken into pieces weighing from three to four carats each, the sizes generally used for diamond drills. 456 Tue Nationa, Geocrapuic Macazing From George F. Kunz, U. S. Geological Survey Diamond Sawing by a Process Recently Invented by an American The diamond is held firmly and very steadily under pressure against a rapidly revolving disk of sheet iron or ‘“‘phosphor’’ bronze. The wheels are much like those used in sawing thin sections for microscopic rock sections or for cutting jade, rock crystal, and other hard stones. Itis claimed that in thus dividing an octahedron at the center or girdle as little as 2 per cent of the weight of the crystal is lost—a great saving of material. As evidencing the wonderfully keen responsive business acumen which has always characterized the ‘‘rough’’ ' syndicate, the price of all rough diamonds that could be improved or advanced in value by such sawing was immediately advanced when the process became known. Precious STONES the color and brilliancy of the gems. Sales must therefore take place between the hours of 9 and 3, and the sky must be clear. The purchaser, placed near a window, has before him a large copper plate. The sellers come to him one by one, and each empties upon the plate his little bag of rubies. The bright copper plate has a curious use. The sunlight reflected from it through the stones brings out a color effect with true rubies different from that with red spinels and tourmalines, which are thus easily separated. The buyer and seller then go through avery peculiar method of bargaining by signs, or rather grips, in perfect silence. After agreeing on the fairness of the classifications, they join their right hands, covered with a handker- chief or a flap of a garment, and by grasps and pressures, mutually under- stood among all these dealers, they make, modify, and accept proposals. The hands are then brought out, and the prices are recorded. The larger single stones are valued according to color and shape for cutting, the very fine ones bringing high prices. A ruby of 36% carats from the Mogok mine some years ago brought 90,000 rupees ($30,000) at Calcutta. Cutting is an important industry at Mandalay, and the Burmese workmen have remarkable skill, especially in avoiding lossin weight. European cut- ting they consider very wasteful, and at Mandalay a man would not be em- ployed who sacrificed more than one- fourth of a ruby, while at Antwerp a loss of two-thirds is not uncommon. The tools are extremely simple. The stone is first shaped with a small steel chisel and wooden mallet, as far as possi- ble, according toits cleavage. The facets are then ground and polished on a cop- per wheel with ruby dust, the stone being held with wax or lac on a curved piece of ox horn. A month or six 425) J weeks may be occupied in cutting and polishing a ruby of one carat. The pale stones, cut rounded (cabo- chon) with a concave base, are much used for ornamental work, especially upon gold vessels. ‘The luster of the gold beneath appears to enrich and darken the ruby and give it the true pigeon’s-blood color. Agates, amethysts, rock crystal, and golden topazes are shipped in great quantities from Brazil. Almost all of them go to Idar and Oberstein, in Ger- many, where they are cut into orna- ments. Last year 200,000 pounds of agate and six tons of rock crystal were cut into seals, paperweights, and faceted stones. One wonderful geode yielded over 40,000 pounds of amethyst. A great quantity of sapphire of a very dark blue, almost black, color, with a greenish tint, and occasionally entirely green, was imported from Australia. The tourmaline, principally the red (tubellite) and also the aquamarine from Brazil, have been sought for, and considerable quantities of both have been sold at Idar. It is interesting to note the increasing variety of ornamental and semi-precious stones now being brought into use, and particularly the introduction of jade. This beautiful stone has from prehis- toric times been the especial favorite of uncivilized or semi-civilized peoples, and in China, Japan, and India it has yielded the choicest objects of oriental art. Atthe Paris Exposition of 1900 a remarkable exhibit was made of Sibe- rian jade wrought by European artists, and now the Oceanic jade of New Zea- land, long prized and carved by the Maoris, is becoming immensely popular with the civilized world. Great bowlders of it have recently been discovered in New Zealand, in the river beds, from one of which two pan- els, translucent and of a rich pure green color, were cut, which were over one 458 yard long, two-thirds of a yard wide, and only one-eighth of an inch thick. Nearly all the jade of New Zealand was sent to Germany and there cut into stones for rings, scarf-pins, studs, and for ordinary jewelry purposes, such as those for which sard and agate have heretofore been used. The diamond syndicate, composed of the South African mine owners, manage the sale of their diamonds very shrewdly. A purchaser must buy not only the va- riety of diamond he wants, but also all the other varieties from the mines. The syndicate sells its diamonds in par- cels or series; each parcel is made up of the different varieties of diamonds in the proportion in which each dia- NOTES ON derived its name from the native word for butterfly. Explorers of the interior tell of swarms of butterflies which at times rise on the slopes of the mountains in dense clouds, darkening the sunshine. Others maintain that the name is from an Indian word meaning abounding in fish. The Republic of Panama is believed to have about 300,000 people, living in towns and hamlets. It extends east and west for about 450 miles, with an average breadth of 70 miles from sea to sea. Its area is about 31,500 square miles. ‘Thus the population of the state about equals that of Washington, D.C., while its area is a little greater than the area of South Carolina. ‘The com- merce of Panama amounts to $3,000,000 per annum. ‘These figures are supplied by the Bureau of Statistics of the De- partment of Commerce and Labor, and are from reports of the United States consuls at Panama and Colon, which have just been received by the Bureau and are not yet published. [ is supposed by some that Panama Tue Nationa, GrocraPHic MAGAZINE mond is found. In this way the un- popular varieties are disposed of as quickly as the popular ones. The diamond-cutting industry in the United States has advanced very rapidly during recent years. American dia- mond-cutters would now be able to cut all the diamonds for this country if they could get enough rough diamonds. As it is, the rough diamonds sent over supply only one-half of the demand. The American cutters have invented a number of new mechanical labor- saving devices, which have given them a great advantage over the Kuropean cut- ters, where diamond cutting is done by the ancestral ‘‘rule of thumb’’ handed down from father to son. PANAMA AND COLOMBIA The principal ports are Panama, on the Pacific coast, and Colon, on the At- lantic side, and these ports are visited annually by more than one thousand vessels, which land over one million tons of merchandise and nearly one hundred thousand passengers, chiefly for transfer over the Panama Railway, 47 miles in length, connecting the Pacific port of Panama with the Atlantic port of Colon. Colon, sometimes called Aspinwall, has a population of about three thousand persons. It was named in honor of Co- lumbus, who discovered the bay in 1502. The city of Panama hasa population of about twenty-five thousand. It was founded in 15t9, burned in 1671, and rebuilt in 1673. During the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries Panama was one of the wealthiest of the Spanish towns in the New World, as all the plunder from the Pacific coast passed through the city. It ‘‘ had eight mon- asteries, a cathedral, and two churches, a fine hospital, 200 richly furnished houses, nearly 5,000 houses of humbler sort, a Genoese chamber of commerce, Notes oN PaNAMA AND CoLomBIA 459 Photo by Robert ‘T. Hill An Uncompleted Section of the Panama Canal Photo by Robert T. Hill Canal Cutting Through Massive Basaltic Rock 460 Tue Nationa GrocrapHic MaGaZInE Photo by Robert T. Hill Panama Bay. The Island of Toboga, Famous for its Delicious Pineapples Photo by;Robert T. Hill Washerwomen—Isthmus of Panama Photo by Robert T. Hill Panama. Interior of Ruins of Old Cathedral In the back of the picture will be seen a brick arch of about 30 feet span and less than 4 feet spring. The preservation of this arch testifies to the freedom of this region from serious earth- quake disturbances. Photo by Robert T. Hill Panama. ‘This Tower Alone Remains to Mark the Site of the Great City befor it was Sacked by Sir Henry Morgan 462 and 200 warehouses, and was, after three weeks of rapine and murder, burned February 24, 1671, by Morgan’s bucca- neers, who carried off 175 laden mules and more than 600 prisoners.’’** Colon is of much more recent date, having been founded in 1855. The population, which, as already in- dicated, amounts in number to about three hundred thousand, is composed of various elements—Spanish, Indian, Ne- gro, and a limited number of persons from the European countries and the United States, especially those engaged in commerce and transportation and the operation of the Panama Railway. Since the abolition of slavery in Jamaica a con- siderable number of blacks and mulat- toes have settled on the Isthmus as small dealers and farmers, and in some villages on the Atlantic side they are said to be in the majority, and as a result the En- glish language is much in use, especially onthe Atlantic side. Some of the native population have retained their customs, speech, and physical type, especially those in the western part of the prov- ince, and claim to be descendants of the natives found in that section by the Spaniards when they discovered and conquered the country. Of the commerce of Panama, the United States supplies a larger share than any other country. The importa- tions at the port of Colon during the fiscal year ended June 30, 1903, as shown by the report of the United States consul, amounted to $952,684,o0f which $614,179 was from the United States, $119,086 from France, $118,322 from England, $76,386 from Germany. ‘The exports to the United States from Colon in 1903 amounted to $173,370, of which $75,432 was bananas, $54,960 cocoanuts, $12,472 turtle shells, $9,400 ivory nuts, $6,460 hides, and $5.924 coffee. From the port of Panama the exports to the United States in the fiscal year 1903 amounted to $193,342, of which * Travels of Pedro de Cieza de Leon, Hakluyt Society, 1864. Tue Nationa, GeocraPHic MaGaZINnNE $56,767 was hides, $49,974 India rubber, $27,805 cocobolo nuts, $16,598 ivory nuts, $13,372 deerskins, and $6,908 cof- fee. The consul at Panama states that the imported articles come mostly from England, Germany, France, Italy, and the United States, but gives no statistics of the imports. Panama is connected with San Fran- cisco by a weekly steamer schedule oper- ated by the Pacific Mail Steamship Com- pany, and with Valparaiso by a weekly steamer schedule operated by the Pacific Steam Navigation Company and South American Steamship Company. Two passenger and two freight trains leave Panama daily for Colon, and Colon daily for Panama. ‘The time for passenger trains over the 47 miles of railway is three hours. From Panama there is one cable line north to American ports and one to the south. The actual time consumed in communicating with the United States and receiving an answer is stated by the consul to be usually about four hours. There are also lines from Colon to the United States and Europe. The money of the country is silver, the rate of exchange having averaged during the past year about 150 per cent. The climate of the isthmus of Panama has proven most deadly in the past. Even the tough negroes imported from Jamaica have quickly succumbed to the marsh fevers and tropical diseases of the country. The excessive death rate has been principally due, however, to an utter disregard of sanitary laws. A sensible and efficient administration will be able to improve conditions and to make the lives of all on the Isthmus safer. Along the route of the canal the coun- try is accurately surveyed, but there are large sections beyond which are unex- plored. COLOMBIA Colombia has more than ten times the population of Panama. ‘The last census Notes oN PaNAMA AND CoLomMBIA 463 Photo by Robert T. Hill Photo by Robert T. Hill Colon—Driveway of Christofer Colon, the Canal Suburb The ground is made from débris of the Canal dumped into the bay 464 Tue Narionat GeocraPpHic MacaZziIne Photo by Robert I. Hill Colon. Residence of the Superintendent of the Panama Railway Company at the Entrance of Limon Bay : Photo by Robert T. Hill Panama Bay. The Island of Naos, Terminus of the Pacific Mail Line Norges on PaNaMa AND COoLoMBIA was taken 32 years ago; but an official estimate made in 1881 gave her about 3,600,000, not including the people of Panama. Colombia has no army to speak of, noships, no money, only a few miles of railway, and hence no means of sending a good force against Panama. Bogota, the capital, is called the Athens of South America, and has a population of 125,000. The national university is located in the city and there is a valuable library of 50,000 volumes, an observatory, a picture gallery, and several learned institutions. An intending visitor to Bogota is landed at Barranquilla, at the mouth of the Magdalena River; thence he pro- ceeds by steamer up the river for 592% miles to Honda, then by rail 22 miles to La Dorada, then by mules 45 miles to Facatativa, and thence by rail 24 miles, when he finally reaches the Colombian capital. Colombia, exclusive of Panama, is as large as the two states of California and Texas combined. Three high moun- tain ranges cross the republic from north to south, making high table-lands be- tween, where the days the year round are scarcely hotter than those of a tem- perate zone. Onthe Bogota table-land the glass oscillates between 50° and 78° Fahr., while the annual rainfall rarely exceeds 45 inches. Inthe lowlands, of course, the tropical sun beats down with an intensity that makes those sections uninhabitable by the white man. The people are a mixture of races. At the time of the Spanish conquest the population of Colombia was esti- mated at eight million. Wholesale butch- eries and enslavement in the mines re- duced the number in a few generations to less than a million. Most of the na- tives were too helpless to resist, but ““some retaliated and in the Antioquia district poisoned the salt springs so ef- fectually that they remain poisoned to this day.’’ ‘The present Colombian na- tionality is a fusion in varying propor- tions of the aborigines with the whites 465 from various parts of Spain, includinga considerable number of baptized Jews. This’ Hebrew element is quite notice- able, especially in the province of Antio- quia, which is’ the wealthiest and most prosperous of the departments of Co- lombia. There is also a considerable African element in the population. Colombia has great wealth lying un- touched on her plains and in her forests and mountains. Dr A. H. Keane de- scribes her resources in the following glowing terms : * “So varied and abundant are its nat- ural resources, both above and below ground, that, under a firm and enlight- ened administration, Colombia, despite the insalubrious climate of many dis- tricts, might soon become one of the most prosperous regions in the world. It supplies nearly all the platinum as well as the very finest emeralds brought to the European market, while gold- bearing reefs and washings occur almost everywhere, the total annual yield be- ing about £650,000 and the yield of gold and silver since the discovery nearly £150,000,000. In I89t as many as 4,960 mines of all kinds were open, in- cluding 3,398, 794, and 571 of gold in the three departments of Antioquia, Tolima, and Cauca respectively, besides 32 of emeralds, 14 of cinnabar, 7 of manganese, and several of platinum, silver, lead, mercury, iron, coal, and salt. Extensive coal-fields and reser- voirs of petroleum occur in several districts, so that few regions can com- pare with Colombia for the astonishing variety of its underground products. Scarcely less varied are those of its for- ests and cultivated lands, including coffee, cocoa, tobacco, sugar, vegetable ivory, rubber, dye-woods, plantains, wheat, and maize; but at present only a small part of the country is under tillage, and the development of its agri- cultural resources is greatly retarded by the lack of good communications.”’ * Central and South By A. H. Keane. Vol. I, p. 152. America, Photo by Robert T. Hill Houses of the Talamancan Indians The Talamancans are a tribe of uncivilized Indians living on the borders of Panama and Colombia. They are aborigines, and are practically as wild today as in the time of Columbus Photo by Robert T. Hill Typical Vegetation of the Isthmus of Panama. ‘Two Talamancans in the Foreground HEU Sao lLGNAW CORES HE Alaskan telegraph system has been completed by the U.S. [ Signal Corps. Itis now possible to send messages by wire to Valdes, Fort Michael, and to stations along the Yukon River. At present these messages must pass over Canadian lines to the inter- national boundary near Fort Egbert, whence they are carried by the U. S. military lines to their Alaskan desti- nation. A cable has been laid from Sitka to Juneau and up the Lynn Canal to Skagway, connecting by way of White Pass with the Canadian tele- graph line, and bringing these impor- tant points into instant communication with Washington and London. Few realize the difficulties that have been overcome in building this network of 1,740 miles of wire. Most of the land lines were put in during the best working season, November to Febru- ary. The mean temperature for these four months was two degrees below zero. Sometimes it was so cold that the mercury froze solid afterit had gone as low as 61 degrees below zero. Gen. A. W. Greely, U. S. A., in his last re- port as Chief Signal Officer, says of the work: “Ttis impossible to adequately set forth the tremendous difficulties under which Alaskan military telegraph lines have been constructed and maintained. In general, it is to be premised that not 20 miles of constructed wagon road exists in the country traversed. Asarule, all material has been sledded into the in- terior in midwinter or carried by pack animals over the roughest imaginable trails. Conditions were so difficult that some coils of wire were carried 145 miles by pack. The magnitude of the work may be inferred by the statement that from Fort Egbert alone, between No- vember 20, 1902, and June 30, 1903, no less than 220 tons of supplies and ma- terial were sledded or packed into the interior, it being impossible to move a ton by wagon. ‘The conStruction parties, consisting almost entirely of enlisted men of the Signal Corps and of the line of the Army, worked steadily the entire winter, al- though the conditions under which field work was done were of the most hazard- ous and appalling character. As an illustration may be mentioned the fact that from November 1 to the end of the winter, by official reports, 60 feet and 11 inches of snow fell at Fort Liscum, ad- joining the Copper River Valley. “Tn the interior, while the snowfall was very much less, being only 4 feet 4 inches at Egbert, yet continued and terrible cold made camp life and con- struction work almost insupportable. The mean temperature at Fort Egbert from November to February, inclusive, a period of four months, was 2° below zero. ‘There were prolonged periods of extreme low temperature, when the mercury remained frozen, the minimum of 61° below zero occurring in January. While the past winter is believed to have been the most severe in Alaska for many years, yet such was the resource- fulness and endurance of the American soldier that the work of construction in the valley of the Tanana was carried on the entire winter without loss of life and with only one serious case of freez- ing. ‘““The cold and snow of the winter were, strangely enough, more favorable to completing the system than were the morasses and firesofsummer. ‘The final completion of the telegraph system was made just as an extensive forest fire de- vastated the upper valley of the Tanana, burning thousands of square miles of valuable timber and destroying more than 100 miles of telegraph line. ‘The damage was the more serious in that the roo miles of line destroyed were burnt out not as a whole section, but at vari- 468 ous points along the distance of 250 miles over which the fire extended.”’ The cable to connect Sitka and Seat- tle has been made and is now at San Francisco. It will be laid in the early spring of 1904. ‘The cable was author- ized by Congress March 3, 1903. Since that date the entire cable, 1,300 miles long, has been manufactured near New York, transported around Cape Horn, and delivered in perfect condition at San Francisco after its voyage of 16,000 miles; the complicated machinery to handle the cable and the delicate instru- ments necessary to operate it have been planned by the Signal Corps, made to order in Great Britain, and delivered in San Francisco, and the route from Se- attle to Sitka has been surveyed by GEOGRAPHIC The Island of Formosa. Past and Pres- ent. History, People, Resources, and Commercial Prospects; Tea, Cam- phor, Sugar, Gold, Coal, Sulphur, Economical Plants, and Other Pro- ductions. By James W. Davidson, F. R. G. S., consul of the United States for Formosa. With two new maps, frontispiece in color, one hun- dred and sixty-eight illustrations from photographs, and colored repro- ductions of two Chinese posters. Im- perial 8vo. Pp. 720. New York: The Macmillan Company. 1903. Mr Davidson, U. S. Consul to For- mosa since 1895, has written a very comprehensive description of Formosa, past and present. His narrative his- tory of the islanders, of their struggles against the Chinese, the Tartars, the Dutch, and the pirates, and of their frequent rebellions and continual bat- tling against the aborigines in the moun- tains, makes interesting reading. His chapters on the various industries of Formosa are specially valuable. The Tue Nationa, GeocraPpHic MAGAZINE Capt. J. F. Pratt, of the Coast and Geo- detic Survey steamer Paterson, through the courtesy of Supt. Otto H. Tittmann, of the Coast and Geodetic Survey. This is a remarkable record of achievement in seven months, March to September, inclusive. The gradual transfer of the military telegraph and cable lines in the Philip- pines to the insular government was begun during the year. It is estimated that if a fee of two cents a word had been charged for all official messages the receipts of the lines would have been $1,500,000. ‘The cost of construc- tion and maintenance was less than $500,000, so that there was a net saving to the government of over one million dollars. ; LITERATURE island is extraordinarily fertile; it has vast camphor forests, an unlimited sup- ply of coal, gold mines, salt, petroleum, sulphur, and other deposits, and many plants of economic value—indigo, fiber, and paper plants, and many others. Perhaps the most notable chapter of the volume is that describing his visit to Botel Tobago Island. Botel Tobago (Kotosho) Island is a dependency of Formosa, and some 35 miles from the south Formosan coast. The island is only some 30 miles in circumference, and consists of a single long hill, on the shores of which the savages live. To the ethnologist, the inhabitants of this little land are, per- haps, the most interesting of all the sav- ages in Japan’s new colony, and doubt- less there are few tribes in the whole East who live in such a primitive man- ner and who have had so little communi- cation with the outside world as the Botel Tobago savages. An occasional Chinese junk stops off the island to ex- change wares, but otherwise the island GEOGRAPHIC had never been visited until a Japanese commission, accompanied by Mr David- son, landed and explored it soon after the Chinese-Japanese war. Mr Davidson’s account of the island is the first that has been published. The following extracts are reprinted here with his permission. The photo- graphs have not been previously pub- lished. The inhabitants of Botel Tobago,some I,200 or 1,300 in all, occupy eight vil- lages ; Yakunawymen, the largest set- tlement, being on the west coast and containing about fifty houses. The natives are LITERATURE 469 ure is of wood, bamboo, and straw. A shelf projects level with the entrance, and the inhabitants are obliged to mount this and then crawl in on all fours, the doorway not being much larger than the entrance to a good-sized dog kennel. The room is like a large flat box, some 7 by 8 feet, and is so low that one lying down can almost touch the ceiling with uplifted hands; but the savages always squat, so the place is high enough for them. Human figures and various rather pleasing geometrical designs are engraved on the interior woodwork; the small, averaging only five feet two inches in height. ‘They are yel- lowish hrown in color, and, with one individ- ual exception, possess straight hair, black with a brownish tint. The habitations of the Botel Tobago savages are very remarkable, not tosay unique. Each family possesses a splen- did walled and stone paved compound, where- in are three distinct houses, attesting the cleverness of the na- tives and their desire to obtain the maximum of comfort. One house, built half under ground, is their winter residence. For the warmer weather they have a com- fortable building, elevated some feet above ground, and for protection against the heat of summer they have a tower- like edifice, sufficiently elevated to catch the cool breezes. These huts serve not only as habitations, but also as work- shops and storehouses. In construc- tion a considerable amount of wood is used as supports and cross-beams and for the inner floor, ceiling, and walls of thetwolargehuts. ‘The elevated struct- Landing on Botel Tobago only other decorations (for such they are considered by the natives) are rows of animal jaw-bones, hung from side to side. The roof is thatched with a strong dried grass, and a similar material ap- pears on the outer walls. The two buildings supported on piles have cir- cular boards surmounting each post to keep off the large rats that literally overrun the island at night. During my first two nights in the island I shared a tent with Major Kikuchi, but on the third night a terrific tropical downpour threatened to sweep us out into the sea, —————a - s1opueyst yo dnoz3 WV +p prens asouvdel $,1lOspraeq x1Wt ¢ (69h oSvd sag) “jvoly Touts Toy pue ‘Toy,wOM PT TUT 10; punoise10j OY} UL Stapuryst UO | PUNOTS1opuN “PUT TOF oO { aATFVU B JO SosnoT veIT]] OMT, *c AT} JO Syeoq [NJIyNvaq oT} Jo [eADAVS { aTOYsS ay} Uo Surdmey “1 VSOULIOT ‘OSeqoT, [aJ0q JO pUvIs] 9} UO soms0G uosprArd “A\ seuel Aq sojzouyd GEOGRAPHIC and we then removed to one of the native houses, which we found dry and, under the circumstances, comfortable. All the boats appear to be of one model. ‘They are beautifully rounded, and both stem and stern are shaped alike, being prolonged upward in a graceful curve ending in a point, from which, in time of festivity, is projected a bunch of feathers or some other deco- ration. It is a built-up boat, and, con- sidering the crude tools used in its con- struction, is a remarkably creditable affair. The tribe possess no saws, and consequently each plank is adzed down, thus obtaining but one plank from a tree. These planks, forming the sides of the boat, are so carefully shaped that they fit very closely. Holes are bored near the seams, through which rattan lastings are passed and drawn tightly, literally tying the parts together. The bottom planks are fastened to the strong V-shaped keel in the same manner. As in the Solomon Islands, the principal tool used is an adze. In Botel Tobago this implement is so made that it can be converted into a chisel by inserting the blade end first into the handle. There are no dogs or cats on the island, which accounts for the great pest of rats. Immense rodents as large as the American musk-rat literally over- run the villages at night. One could see them after dark, chasing about the place without the least sign of fear, as hungry hogs would overrun a garden, and it is no exaggeration to say we feared the rats more than we feared the natives. The South American Republics. By Thomas C. Dawson. In two vol- umes. Illustrated with photographs and maps. Vol. I. Pp. xvi-+ 525. 5% by 8 inches. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons. 1903. Mr Dawson has been for many years American consul to various capitals of South America. This work is in two LITERATURE ALG i parts, of which the first is out; the second will be published ina fewmonths. The present volume describes Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay, and Brazil. It is well written, interesting, and reliable and is comntended to all who are seek- ing a good book on South America. Two South American Republics, Ar- gentina and Chile, may be called pros- perous; there are evidences of an awakening in certain sections of a third, Colombia, which may bring equal good fortune to that state. Brazil is also be- coming unified, and, according to Mr Dawson, is developing a solidity as a nation which is not generally realized. Several of the author’s statements about this republic, whose area is greater than that of the United States exclud- ing Alaska, are worth quoting : ‘““ Capital is slowly accumulating, and a healthful tendency toward industri- ous habits and the employment of rea- sonable and moderate methods in ex- ploiting the great untouched natural resources of the country is evident. ‘Leaving out immigration, the Bra- zilian people have shown a steady natu- ral increase of nearly 2 per cent per annum during this century. The total population has multiplied from less than three to more than eighteen millions. Not a fiftieth part of the territory is cultivated; its resources have never been studied, much less developed.’’ The Brazilians have the additional advantage of inheriting directly a Eu- ropean civilization. They ‘‘are too firmly established, too numerous and prolific, and possess a too highly organ- ized and deeply rooted civilization to be in danger of expulsion or political ab- sorption. Immense immigration into South America is inevitable as soon as the pressure of population is strongly feltin Western Huropeand North Amer- ica. This may transform Brazil econom- ically, but the new conditions will have to fit themselves into the political and social framework already in existence.’’ 472 Mr Dawson expresses great faith in the Argentine Republic : ‘“The industrial impetus already ac- quired by the Argentine Republic is sufficient to carry it over all obstacles, and it seems assured that there will be a rapid settlement of the whole of this immense and fertile plain. Here Nature has done everything to make commu- nication easy, and a temperate climate insures crops suited to modern Euro- pean civilization. ‘“'T'wo grave perils have so far been encountered, namely, a tendency to- ward political disintegration and an abuse of the taxing power. The for- mer is now remote; for since the rail- ways began to concentrate wealth and influence at Buenos Aires and to destroy the prestige and political power of the provincial capitals, the naturalstructure built by the patriots of 1853 has stood firmer each year. “Argentina has had a bitter lesson of the evils of governmental extrava- gance and still groans under the burden of a debt which seems disproportion- ately heavy, but the growth of popula- tion and wealth will soon overtake it, and the very difficulties of meeting in- terest are the cause of an economy in administration, of which the good effects will be felt long after the debt itself has been reduced to a reasonable fer capita. A nation is in the process of formation in the Plata Valley whose material greatness is certain and whose moral and intellectual characteristics will have the widest influence on the rest of South America.”’ In Search of a Siberian Klondike. By Washington B. Vanderlip and Homer B. Hulbert. With many illustra- tions. Pp. xiv + 315. 5% by 814 inches. New York: The Century Co. 1903. $2.00 net. One of the most interestingly illus- trated books of exploration published in along time. ‘The story is well told. Occasionally the author slips up in his Tue NarionaL GeocraPHic MAGAZINE statements—as, for instance, when he recommends the United States to 1m- port their reindeer for Alaska from Kamchatka instead of from Lapland. He is apparently ignorant of the fact that the United States Government has been importing reindeer from across Bering Sea ever since 1891, and has only once brought reindeer from Lap- land, in the winter of 1898, when deer were needed immediately to rescue the miners inthe Yukon Valley. The Alas- kan and Siberian herds could not be drawn on then, because navigation had been closed by the winter ice. BOOKS RECEIVED FOR REVIEW The Book of Ser Marco Polo. Trans- lated and edited by Col. Sir Henry Yule. Thirdedition. With memoir of Henry Yule by his daughter. Profusely illustrated. Vol. I, pp. cli + 462; vol. II, xxii + 662. 6 by 9 inches. New York: Imported by Charles Scribner’s Sons. 1903. $16.00 zt. On the Polar Star in the Arctic Sea. By the Duke of the Abruzzi. 2 vols., 8vo. With maps and illustrations. New York: Dodd, Mead & Co. 1903. $10.00. Aus Insulinde, Malayische Reisebrietfe. Von Ernst Haeckel. Illustrated. Pp. xi-+ 261. 6% by 9% inches. Bonn: Verlag von Emil Strauss. 1901. Geographic Influencesin American His- tory. By Albert Perry Brigham. With many illustrations. Pp. 366. 5 by 7% inches. Boston: Ginn & Co. 1903. To California and Back. By C. A. Higgins. With many illustrations. Pp. 317. 5% by 8 inches. New York: Doubleday, Page & Co. 1903. $1.50 net. Vacation DaysinGreece. By Rufus B. Richardson. Illustrated. Pp. 240. 5% by 8% inches. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. 1903. $2.00 net. GEOGRAPHIC American Railways. By Edwin A. Pratt. Pp. 309. 5byginches. New York: The Macmillan Co. 1903. Austro-Hungarian Life in Town and Country. By Francis H. E. Palmer. Illustrated. Pp. 299. 5 by7%™% inches. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons. 1903. Handbook of Climatology. By Dr Ju- lius Hann. ‘Translated by Robert De Courcy Ward. Pp. vi + 437. 6 by g inches. New York: The Macmillan Co. 1903. $3.00 zef. Special Method in Geography. By Charles A. McMurry. Pp. vi+ 217. 5% by 7% inches. New York: The Macmillan Co. 1903. Yearbook of the Department of Agri- culture, 1902. Edited by Geo. W. Hill. Profusely illustrated. Pp. 912. 6% byginches. Washington: Goy- ernment Printing Office. 1903. The Turk and His Lost Provinces. By William Eleroy Curtis. Illus- trated. Pp. 396. 6 by g inches. New York: Fleming H. Revell Co. 1903. Winter India. By Eliza Ruhamah Scidmore. With many illustrations. Pp. xvi + 400. 6 by 8% inches. New York: Century Co. 1903. American History and its Geographic Conditions. By EllenC.Semple. Il- lustrated. Boston: Houghton, Mif- flin & Co. 1903. $1.25 net. The Texts and Versions of John De Plano Carpiniand William De Ruben- quis. As printed for the first time by Hakluyt in 1598, together with some smaller pieces. Edited by C. Raymond Beazley. Pp. 345. 5% by 8% inches. 1903. Printed for the Hakluyt Society, 1903. The Philippine Islands. 1493 to 1808. Volume VI. By Emma H. Blair and James H. Robinson,editors. Pp. 320. 6% by 9% inches. Cleveland: The Arthur H. Clark Co. 1903. LITERATURE ae] & The Heart of Japan. Glimpses of Life and Nature far from the Traveller’s Track in the Land of the Rising Sun. By Clarence Tudlow Brownell. Il- lustrated. Pp. 307. 5 by 7% inches. New York: McClure, Phillips & Co. 1903. $1.50 et. A Monograph of the Culicidae or Mos- quitoes. By Fred V. Theobald. Vol. 3. Illustrated with plates and dia- grams. Pp. xili + 359. 6 by 9 inches. Published by order of the Trustees of the British Museum. London. Report on the Collections of Natural History Made in the Antarctic Re- gions During the Voyage of the Southern Cross. Illustrated. Pp. ix + 344. 6% by 1oinches. Printed by order of the Trustees of the Brit- ish Museum. London. 1903. A Monograph of the Tsetse-Flies. By Ernest Edward Austen. With achap- ter on Mouth-Parts, by H. J. Hensen. Illustrated. Pp.ix-+ 319. 6% by 10 inches. Printed by order of the trus- tees of the British Museum. London. 1903. Proceedings of the American Associa- tion for the Advancement of Science. December, 1902—-January,1903. Pub- lished by the permanent secretary. Volume LIT. Central Europe. By Joseph Partsch. With maps and diagrams. Pp. 358. 6 by 9 inches. New York: D. Ap- pleton & Co. 1903. $2.00 net. Central Asia and Tibet. Towards the Holy City of Lassa. By Sven Hedin. In two volumes. Illustrated from drawings and photographs. Volume I. Pp. xvii+ 608. VolumelII. Pp. xiv +664. 7 by 9% inches. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. 1903. Handbook of the Saint Louis World’s Fair of 1904. By Charles M. Kurtz. Illustrated. Pp. 115. 5% by 8% inches. Saint Louis: Gottschalk Printing Company. 1903. 474 RECENT PUBLICATIONS BY THE U.S, GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE Birds of a Maryland Farm. A Local Study of Economic Ornithology: Sylves- ter D. Judd. The Animal Industry of Argentina: Frank W. Bicknell. Egyptian Irrigation. A study of irri- gation methods and administration in Egypt: Clarence T. Johnston. Japanese Bamboos and Their Intro- duction into America: David G. Fair- child. . Three New Plant Introductions from Japan: Mitsumata, a Japanese paper plant; Udo, a new winter salad ; Wasabi, the horseradish of the Japa- nese: David G. Fairchild. Tue Nationat GrocraPpHic MAGAZINE Storage of Water on Cache La Poudre and Big Thompson Rivers: C. E. Tait. The Diminished Flow of the Rock River in Wisconsin and Illinois and its Relation to the Surrounding Forests: G. Frederick Schwarz. A Working Plan for Forest Lands in Hampton and Beaufort Counties, South Carolina: Thomas H. Sherrard. U. S. FISH COMMISSION Aquatic Products in Arts and Indus- tries—Fish Oils, Fats, and Waxes, Fer- - tilizers from Aquatic Products: Charles H. Stevenson. Utilization of the Skins of Aquatic Animals: Charles H. Stevenson. Statistics of the Fisheries of the Mid- dle Atlantic States: Barton W. Ever- mann. NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY REGULAR MEETINGS OF THE SOCIETY HESE meetings will be held in the Assembly Hall of Cosmos Club at 8 p. m. until the new home of the Society, Hubbard Memorial Hall, is completed. No tickets are required for these meetings. December 4.—‘‘ The Work of the Bureau of Plant Industry.”’ Dr B. T. Galloway. December 18.—‘‘ Karly Spanish Cartography of the New World,” by Prof. E. l. Stevenson, of Rutgers College. January 8, 1904.—Annual Meeting; followed by an address by Prof. Wm. M. Davis, of Har- vard University, on ‘‘A Summerin Turkestan.” January 22.—‘‘ The Work of the Bureau of Insular Affairs.”’ Col. Clarence R. Edwards. February 5.—‘‘The Work of the Bureau of Statistics’ Hon. O. P. Austin. February 12.—‘‘ The Work of the Bureau of Fish and Fisheries.’? Dr B. W. Evermann. March 4.—‘‘The Work of the National Bu- reau of Standards.’’ Dr G. M. Stratton. March 18.—‘‘ The Work of the U. S. Biolog- ical Survey.’’ Dr C. Hart Merriam. POPULAR LECTURES The Popular Lectures will be delivered in the National Rifles’ Armory, 920 G street, at 8 p. m., on the following dates (tickets are required ): Saturday, December 12.—‘‘Marches and Movements of Arnold and André.’’ By Mr W. W. Ellsworth, of the Century Company. Illustrated. Friday, January 15, 1904.—'‘ Travels in Ara- bia and Along the Persian Gulf,” by David G. Fairchild, Special Agent of the U. S. Depart ment of Agriculture. Illustrated. Saturday, January 30—“‘ Joys of the Trail,” by Mr Hamlin Garland, author of ‘‘ The Cap- tain of the Gray Horse Troop,” etc. Illustrated. Announcement of definite dates for the fol- lowing lectures in this course will be made later : ““Conditions in Macedonia,’’ by Dr Edwin A. Grosvenor, of Amherst College. Illustrated. “‘The Louisiana Purchase Exposition.”’ By Hon. David R. Francis, President of the Lou- isiana Purchase Exposition. Illustrated. Provisional arrangements have also been made for addresses on — Little Known Peoples of Mexico. Russia and Japan in Korea. The Alaskan Boundary Decision. The general subject of the Afternoon Course of popular lectures is ‘‘ The Growth of Diplo- macy.’’ The special topics and the names of the speakers will be announced in a later pro- gram. ‘The first of the series will be given on Saturday, February 27, and the succeeding lectures on March 5, 12, 19, and 26. These lectures will be illustrated. INDEX Page Abercrombie, W. R., Work in Alaska Of...........:0..5 IoL Abruzzi, Duke of, cited on North Polar routes 431 —, Book on Arctics by... 472 Abydos, Excavations at... 358 Adams, C. C., cited on An 212 ——) TEFETIE? CO). eee e eres censceceerersencrenmnnees 292 —; United States—I_and and water: I71 445 152 I51 —, A wild variety of, found in Yucatan —, Bales of fiber ready for shipment. 156 —, Cleaning the fiber of:.. 153 —, Drying fiber of......... 155 —, Tresses of the fiber of.. - 154 —. See Sisal hemp, Henequen. Agriculture, American capital invested in.............. 35 —, Department of. See Various bureaus. —, Year Book for 1901 of —, —— — 1902 of... —'Promoted by U. Ss. “Government 35 Alaska, Coast Survey work in.. 467 > Future of....... 104 —, Gardening in s55 -, Geolo ‘ical Survey work in 255, 257) 397 -, ’ Gold discoveries in.. ~ 257 —, Importance of reinde 146 —, Map showing reindeer stations o 131 —, Notable work on. 300 —, Opening of.. 79 —, Reindeer in.. 12 —, Salmon fisheries of. 118 —, Signal Corps in.. 467 —, Telegraph system 467 —, Trade 3e noueoecagnotseend 106 —, Wrangell Mountains o + 395 Alaska Boundary Commission 116, 297 — — decision.. a 23) —— dispute.... 89, I17 ——-—, Map showing. + go Alaska frontier, Balch’s 298 Alexander, King of Servia 59 Alexander of Bulgaria ..... 54 Alexander, W. H., Bulletin on hurricanes by 44 Allen, H. T., Alaskan explorations of. 396 Amazon, Rubber forests of.. 413 Amazons, The land of.... 43 American cotton industry 120 — diplomacy in the Orient.. -. 259 American Museum of Natural History. 388, 422 American Philosophical society: recommends founding Coast Survey... 2 Amundsen, R.; ion “to” Magnetic North Pole... Andrée, y ope o Muir Glacier.. Andrews, C. L.; 44 —, Surveys of Muir Glacier by 44 Animals beforé man in America 43 Animal Industry, Bureau of... 35 Antarctic expedition, British. A x69; 210, 297 ——, German. . 109, 296 — —, Scottish. 10g, 162 — —, Swedish.... 109, 296 — explorations, Records of farthest south. . 212 aay: Commander Wilkes.. 218 — regions, American claims in. 77 WENA) Olivarasievccarsenacecacccecer - 109 Antarctica, Book by E. S. Balch 121, 217 Appalachian Forest Reserve....... 123, — streams, Measurements of southern. 167 Appalachian Mountain Club, Officers o 39 Arctic Club, Presidency of....... . 297 Arctic Expeditions ; Charcot. 217, 296 —j; Peary +» 379; 430 —; Ziegler... 82, 251, 297 Page Arctic exploration, Erroneous theories goncerning: 432 ——, History of. +» 420 ——, Value of... = 429 ——. See North Pole; Peary, Ziegler. Argentina-Chile boundary award... Argentine, Dawson’s book on. —, Present prosperity of.......... Arriaga, A. L,., cited on Guatemala volcanic di turbances.. 5 MiG 471 471 + 390 Asiatic Russia ; Book by. GF, “Wright. 121 Austin, O. P., Alaskan Report of.. 148 -, cited on internal commerce of 166 e —, Election of, as Secretary of National Geographic _ Society ; Problems of the Pacific. -, Reports of... ; United States—Her industrie Australia, White population of... Austro-Hungarian Life, Palmer’ Bacon, A. M., Book on Japanese girls by.. Bailey, Florence Merriam, Book on birds by.. Bailey, Vernon, referred tole eam Balch, E. S.; America’s claims in the Antarcti —; Book on Antarctica —, cited on South Polar regions. Balch, T. W.; Book on Alaska frontier. Balkan Peninsula, Battle ground of Europe ol 16, 298 Say DULKISH ruleline.yeeevstecssesedseesteesnece 46 Barnard, E. C., Work in California by. 78 Bauer, L. A., Magnetic tables by. 121 —, Magnetic work by....... 82 Belgrade, Capital of peereial 60 Bell, Alexander Graham, Judge of Loubat Prizes. 40 = , referred to = Tetrahedral kites of.. 204 —,; Tetrahedral principle in kite structure............ 219 —; Resignation as President of National Geo- graphic Society ct Bell, C. J., referred to. Bell, Robert, cited on Canadian forests Benguet, Igorrote rice terraces of. —, Igorrote town Of...............24 = Garden of the Philippines . Tree ferns of... —, White pines o Bertholf, E. P., Point Barrow relief expedition of. 145 —, Siberian reindeer Sesrserele by. co Birds of the Rockies.. Bingham, Utah, mining ‘district .. Blair, R. E., cited on destruction of Amazon rub- ber forests... Blount, Henry tred_ Bogoslof Volcano, Description of . 95 Bond, Fred, Wheat varieties improved by 166 Bosnia, as an Austrian province 45 — , Government enterprise in 50 — Government hotels of 50 -, Jewish cemetery of. 49 — under Turkish rule.. 46 Botel Tobago, Formosan Islan escription of..... 468 Boundary Awards. See Alaska, Argentina, Canada. Boutwell, J. M., Workin Utah . ob Brazil, Dawson's book on... =; Precious stones from. —, Rubber forest of.. —, Surveys of........... Bremner, John, cited on Alaskan exploration ° Brewster, B. B.; Expedition into Texas of Fer- nando del Bosque a Brigham, A. P., Acknowledgment to. 174 Book on Geographic Influences on American History... ep 452, 457 as) 476 Page Brigham, A. P., Book on Physical Geography by... 21 —, referred to ...... - 295 British Colonies, White. population ‘of . 360 British Columbia forests . oon 107 Brooks, Alfred H., Explorations: in Alaska Dy 237 —; Plan for climbing Mt McKinley... en LeLeHeG COmncesieeeteasecrssesren Bryant, Henry G., referred to Bubonic plague, Conquest of. Bulgaria, Capital of. —, Ferdinand of... —; Greek monastery of St John of Ryle —, People and country of. —, Rulers Off..........--.----2000--- Bull, E. W., obtains Concord grape Bureau of American’ Republics... Bureau of Chemistry, Work of.. Bureau of Forestry, Checking sand dunes. —, General work of... ne —, Report on hardy Catalpa... —, Work of, in codperation wi = * Work of,in codperation with state poreainen Ge! 213 Bureau of Statistics, Report on Dalny by .. 4 — —on Cuba........... — — onimmiigratior —— on India.......... —— on Panama......... — —on rubber industr —, General reports of... Burritt, Charles H; pines —, Work in the Philippines of.. ining Bureau of the Philip- Burroughs, John, cited on Alaska gt Calaminanes Islands, Philippines, Scenes from..... 202 California, Big things of.... 230 —, By-Ways Of........)...-. 121 —, Grape production of.. —, Hydrographic work in. —, Raisin production of.... —, Reclamation of arid lands i —, Wine production Oi ovocconcpacce Calkins, F . C.; Report on Washington State water y. Call, C. J.; Point Barrow Relief Expedition. Campbell, 'M. R. ; Reporton Pittsburg coal district. 115 Canadian Boundary; John W. Foster... p Canada, Forests of.......... ¢ —, New railway across —, White population of.. Cape Lazaref. Unimak Island.. Cape Prince of Wales, Freighting with reindeer at. 136 —, Pupils of public schools at.. ; —, Residence of Congregationa Capital Mountain, Height of... Carabao in Philippines, Importance to natives of, —, Importations of —, Hatred of white men by. —, Plague among......... Caracas, University at. —, View of... Carbons, Te argest ever found. —, Production Of sce.csceeseesee Carleton, M. A., Acknowledgment to Carnegie Institution, Grants. 82 —, Chinese expedition of.... 292 , Turkestan expedition of .. 215 Ganpentes Frank G., Book on Pp 43 Caribbeau Sea, Handbook for navigation fo} 117 Carter, C F., Book on California by .. 121 Catalpa, Hardy. Barrera 348 Castilla rubber tree 409 Catawba grape, Discovery of 445 ——, Value of. 450 Census Office, g 175 Chamberlin, T. C, cited on earth’s s origin. 425 Champ, W. on Acknowledgment Ores “414 —, member of Ziegler Polar expedition 251 Charcot, Jean, Arctic expedition of. 217 —, Antarctic expedition of.............. 296 Tue Nationa, GrocrapHic MAGAZINE Charts, Area covered by hydrographic —, Coast..... —, General. —, Harbor.. China, Census of.. Cholera scenes in the Philippine Clark, C. E., Chart made by... 64 Climatology, ward’s book on. 473, Climate, Effect on insanity of 365 Coal production of the world.. 315 Coast and Geodetic Survey, U. S Acknowledg- alent to Dye BraZilersneeseeneseneeen =» 262 = , Catalogue of publications b 83 —, Discovers Raleigh Rock. 145 —, Duties of office force of. 4 —, Field work of. ..... 6 —, General work of I —, History of... I —, Magnetic work by 8r —, Present organization o 3 —, Record of address on .. 44 —, Steamer Pathfinder of.. - 439 —, Surveying parties in the field 444 —, Work in Alaska by.... ee 468 —, Work in Philippines. 9, 437 —, Workin Porto Rico... =. 8 Work in United States.. if Collier, NS Meg Explorations 255 Coffin, Edward, Capt. Ziegler Polar Saeon 254, 414 Collins, G. N., Report on mangoes by... -- 320 Colombia, Area of... 465 —, Notes on....... 458 —, Population o 465 —, Resources... 465 Colon, Scenes i 463 —, Description of.. 458 Concord grape, Discovery o 450 IV LLCO fee eneses ce cececcanceeneiicees 450 i. a oo eD Cook, F. A., Mount McKinley expedition of.... 297, 425 Cook, O. F., Report on Castilla rubber tree 409 Copper production of the world......... oppey River Valley, Explorations of. Natural wealth off................:c2seeee000s Cornell University, Summer school of geography. 295 Cotton industry of the United States —, Long staple, grown in the United States. 36 = production of the world.. 318 Coville, F. V., referred to. 217 Cuba, Development of. 112 —, Public lands of. 113 —, Railways of...... 113 —, Telegraph system of... li2 Curry, J. L. M., Obituary notice of.... 117 Curtis, W. E.; Great Turk and his lost pr 45, —, Book on Macedonia by..........2.:+-2ssseesecceecereneeene-e 473 Dalmiya Buildin gio feces eteseeesascesssseeeeee Darling, C. H., cited on Polar exploration... —, Correspondence with Peary. —* ‘Tribute to... ..---.-------22 Davidson, James W., Book on Formosa b Davies, H.I., cited on Cuban developmen Davis, W. M., Expedition to Turkestan b Dawson, Yukon Territory, Winter freighting to... too Day, David ., referred to. 263, 292, 334, 452 —, Record of address by Dean, Bash ford, Reporton Japanese oyster ‘culture by..-. Deep sea “Soundings Del Bosque, Fernando, Texan expedition of... Denmark, Refusal by, to sell West Indian Poses sion. Departmen of £ g£ Department of Commerce and Labor Dewey, Admiral, Chart made by... Diamond-cutting industry in the United State Diamond trust Diamonds, World’s production of. INDEX Page Diller, J.S., Report on Crater Lake by.. poo ek Draga, pe OMS E Tayldveccnnnenecassseseeseceses 59 ae Chaillu, Paul, cited on reindeer feeding 137 , Obituary notice of.. 282 = Hoy CES cececenoct 283 Dunn, R. S., Mount Wrangell explorations 405 —, Attempt ‘to ascend Mount McKinley Dye, Eva E., Book on Lewis and Clarke by. Easter, S. B. ; Jade.... Eckel, E.C., referred Eddy, W. A., Kite experiments Edson, pion) Joy, referred to ohea ~ 292, 390 VII, arbitrator pusecnuine:¢ -Chile bound- Perea) ‘English, 1 Egypt, Irrigation of, Emerson, Harrington; Op Emmons, S. F., referred to Emory, Frederick, Acknowledgment to.. England. See United Kingdom. Evans, A. M., referred to Europe, Frank G. Carpenter’s book on.. Fairchild, H. L., Book on geology by Faris, Mount, View @linanosccragaaseosocccee * Farming scenes in the United States 181, 265, 266 — — —— Philippines 1gQ. 200, 202, 206 Fenneman. N. M.; Report on lakes of southeastern Wisconsin. go Fernow, B. #., Bo Fiala, Anthony, Commander Ziegler dition.. 5 ; =>, Letter to Ziegler ‘from. => HOM TEINE CSP avrercrtocens pono Fish Commission, Publications by Fisher, A. K., referred to. Fisher, Joseph, Book on No ye Flinders Petrie, W. M., Excavations at Abydos. olar expe- 297, 118, 122 8 Flood scenes.. . 286, 333 Floods of 1903 in United Siates. se» 285 Florida, Palmettos Of.............0008 174 Forbes, R. H., cited on Colorado River... 78 Forestry, Bureau of. See Bureau of Forestry. —, Economics of.. n —, European methods o —, Influence of, on lumber industry. Forests of Canada............. -..- —, White pine, of Michigan.. Formosa, Davidson's book on. Foster, John W., Book on American diplomacy i in the Orient. —, Canadian boun ary. —, Counsel for United States in Alaskan Boundary dispute OSERECODSLEOO. = C0 sCECEITHE ECO Re Pe Oo as Pere ore ie en 116 Fountain, Paul, Book on mountains and forests of South America...ccccce.--- ee France, Manufactures o Frankenfield, H.C.; The recent floods......... cs Fruits, American. exports of. Fuller, M. L. referred to Gallatin, Albert, Urges establishment of Coast Survey .. - eys of I uir Glacier by. —, Work on BHiEne census by... Gaumer, Dr; Report on sisal hemp. Geelmuyden. Prof., Acknowledgment to . Geographic Congress, International, Organization Geographic —— — University of Chicago . 163 Geographic text-books; Gilbert and Brigham’s s Physical Geography... reo 21 SS Se McMurry’ s Teachers? Manual ” 298 == = C. A. McMurry’s General Method.. 222 ae 7 Page Geographic text-books; C. A. McMurry’s Special Method in —— —; W. H. Olm’s Commercial Geography ...... 122 ———; Tarr and F. McMurry’s Complete OES: eograp f Geographic influences on American history, Brig- ham’s book on ecco ===> , Semple’s book on. Geographic Names, Decisions of Board on Geographical Society of Baltimore, Officers of....... 392 Geographical Society of California, Officers of. . 393 Geographic Society ot Chicago, Officers of... 393 Geographical Society of Lisbon.. 296 Geographical Society of New York.. 118 FROM CET S Olescsceererssececssterssecencenceless 390 Geographical Society of the Pacific, Officers of. 393 IP OheMt COL Oseresscnctoneents eacncnctreccesseensasnasess (steerer 118, 255 Geographic Society, National, Annual excursion of ae — appoints representative to China — — — on Ziegler Polar expedition —, By-laws of... —, Flag of....-.... — > Committee on Election of President. —, endorses proposition to bring Smithson’s body to America.. 255 —, Election of chairman of. ‘Geographic Congress, McGee nen —, Election of Secretary O. P. Austin. —, Excursion Committee o oo —, Meetings of................ —, Membership list of —, New home of. -, Officers of... —, referred to... 251, 297 « I, 29, 61, 117, 217, 218, 254 263, 285, 291, 292, 293, 297, 301, 331, 361 —, Resignation of chairman Geographic Congress Committee, A. W. Greely. ... —— — President Alexander Graham Bell — — — Secretary A. J. Henry —, Work of, in connection with Geographic Con- gress «Hace RECORDER SEC CoSHSeSaceCeEnobencoeoCcanccronecacoyeceg5 292, 388 Geographical Society, Royal, Award of Gill me- morial by....... —, referred to.. —, South Polar exp Geography, Erroneous theories concerning... - 432 Geological Survey, Appalachian stream measure- ments by. —, Division of Alaskan mineral resources. —, Division of Hydrology —, Economic work of.. —, Explorations in Ala —, Hydrographic work of... —, Irrigation work of...... —, Publications by.. ..... 80, 83, 116, 118, 122, 168, 216, 391 —, Report on diamonds by. FR COSLUECLERCOROCLRCICOOIOORIONLO —, Topographic maps by. —, Tribute to.. Geology, Elem 50) Gerdeau, Captain, cited on destruction o ELD DELALOTE SES oie ate aes ON RSIS eI 413 Gerdine, IT. G., Alaskan explorations of... 161, 255, 398 Germany, Cause of Denmark’s refusal to sell her West Indian possessions. o —, Coal production of... —, Copper production —, Manufactures of... —! Steel and iron production of. 317 Gilbert, G. K., Acknowledgment to. 174 —, Book on physical geography b: 21 —, Note on Muir Glacier... 444 —, referred to. - 244, 254 —, Report of, as mittee of National Geographic Society on scientific work of Ziegler Polar expedition. . oH) ss 252 Gilbert, J. J.. Discovers Raleigh Rock, 148 —, Work in Philippines of.. 439 Goode, J. P., Work of... 164 Goode, Richard U., Obituary notice of... » 424 478 Page Goode, Richard U., Portrait of... sere 424 Grand Canyon of the Colorado, Character of. - 163 —, Rock edges and waste slopes of. 0 = Survey of... "162 Great Lakes, M - 328 Grape industry of United States.. - 445 — — —, Pictures of...............:.. 446-450 Greece, Richardson’s book on were A472 Greely, A. W., referred to. » 252 —, Report of, for 1903.. a - 467 —, Resigns chairmanship Conmittee na- tional Geographic Congress... . 254 —, Work in Alaska of........... - 467 —, Work in Philippines of - 468 —, Work in Cuba of............ LL Grosvenor, Edwin A. ; Review of Foster’s Ameri- can diplomacy in Orient Grosvenor, Gilbert H.; American developm the Philippines... 197 —j; Appendix of seventy illustrations of kites and _ Siatishines used by Alexander Graham Bell....... ; Benguet, the garden of the Philippines............ 203, - "Book reviews 1S /oemoononocaeE3o 21, 42, 43, 83, I19, 120, 217 298, 299, 425-427, 468-474 —; British South Polar expedition... socoan ZAKS) —,; Conquest of bubonic plague in the hilippines. 185 —,; Geographic notes..... 26, 29, 35, 39, 40, 78-82, 109-118 162-168, 197, 213-217, 254, 292-297, 320, 348 353, 359, 386-391, 408, 422, 424, 425, 467 Grape-growing industry in the United States.. 445 i ao Notes on Panama and Colombia. - 458 —; Paul du Chaillu.. =) 282) —,; Peary and the Nor’ - 379 —,; Precious stones....... - 451 xt Reindeer in Alaska 127 —,; Rubber plantations in Mexico and Central _ America. cone (uerss«:eclersansiacrassiesseee sees 409 ; Some notes on Venezuela. 5 UG =) Suggested field for explorat: - 290 Guatemala, Maps of............... 82 — Voleani¢ disturbances in. 291, 390 Guillemot eggs 387 Hall, William L., Report on hardy catalpa by...... 348 Hamilton, William, Acknowledgment to. 138, 148 Harbors of the United States. 5 178 Sh TN ADISS @EecanconasnsononanoccedacEne - 176 Hardy catalpa, Geographic distribution o 349 —-—, Plantation of. 350 ——, Qualities of.. ... 351 —-—, Report on, by W. L. Hall. 348 = — Wood of, after lying 90 years in wate Hargrave, Laurence, Kite experiments by. Harriman Expedition, Referred to .........- Hassler, Professor, presents plan for Coast ¢ rvey. 2 Hayes, © Willard, Alaskan explorations by........ - 396 —, cited on economic work of Geological Survey... 215 —, referred to... Heilprin, Angelo, nique —, cited on Mont Pelée. -- 167, 291 Henequen (Yucatan fiber), Cultivation of........ 150, 157 —. See agave, sisal hemp. Henry, A. J., Report on wind velocity and water- ont Pelée and Marti- - 121, 167, 291 level of Lake TSI ee ncerenoccoooccanSNcooDd ORR ICAO RCeCACHO REEDS 116 —, Resignation as Secretary of the National Geo- graphic BYES S75 cccgnonchocodboodboosancbbcananenparceooICTaIeso 425 Herring fisheries, Report of H. M. Smith on 5 Ung Herron, J. S., Alaskan explorations of.. 30 High plains, Reclamation of.. 8r Hill, George W., referred to.. 120 Hill, Robert T, ‘Acknowledgn 461 —, Geologic work of.. 207 —, Photographs by,. 461 —, referred to....:...... « 291 Himalayas, Workmans’ ascents in the... 420 Holder, Charles F. ; Big things of the Wes: Hollick, A., Explorations in Alaska. Holmes, HE. S., Acknowledgment to.. Hovey, E. O., cited on St Vincent eruptions.. Tue Nationa GeocraPHic MaGAZINE Page Hovey, E. O., cited on new cone of Mont Pelée...... ie _, Expedition to Mont Pelée by... - 118, 422 Howard, L. O., Locust fungus supplied by. 197 Howe, C D., Forestry work of... - 213 Hubbard, F. Tracy, Kite picture y. - 231 Hubbard Memorial Hall... oo a 207, 428 Huggins, P. Foster, cited on St Vincent eruption... 158 Huntington, Ellsworth, Awarded Gill memorial... 217 —, Expedition to Turkestan.. Hulbert, A. B., Book on Redmen’s Roads. Hurricanes, Report on, by Wm. H. Alexan Husmann, Geo. C., Report on U. S. gra eindustry. 450 Hydrographic Office, Branch offices a. —, Charts constructed by... —, Deep sea soundings by... —, Derelicts destroyed by. 73 —, Foreign surveys by. 63 —, History of......... 61 —, Organization of... 6 —, Pilot charts issued by eam OS) -, Publications by. 67, 117 —, Tribute to.... ...... 7h, Igorrotes of Philippines. India, Commerce of........ = 183 Ingram, A. E., referred to... - 296 Insular Affairs, Bureau of, Publications by.. 112 Irrigation, Importance of underground waters to. 39 — in Egypt....-c.ccccecceees 40 — plans in five states.. -- 165 Insanity, Geographic States . 361 — in cities and towns 367 — among colored = 376 Jack, G., Forestry work of. = 213 Jackson, Sheldon, Acknowle i 148 —, Expedition to Lapland by. en - 145 —, Imports reindeer trom Siberi 127 —, Official reports by 148 = _ Urges introduction of reindeer into Alaska from Siberia. co lett Jade, ‘Aztec reverence for. 16 —, Chinese uses of............ 5 Ee Discovery of implements in Europe o Ir —, Distribution of........ eG) — from New Zealand. . - 457 —, Mines of, in Chinese Turkestan ay ta ey Museums of... ono =) 16) Jaggar, T. A., referred t Ys « 20 Japan, Bacon’s book on women of. 12 —, Brownell’s book on.... 473 —, Copper production of. 318 —, Oyster culture in...... .. eo Hy Jarvis, D. H., Mountain named in honor o 399 —, Point Barrow Relief Expedition by. 145 Jewish cemetery in Bosnia - 49 Jefferson, Thomas, Urges founding Coast an odetic Survey... Johnson, W. D., Acknowledgment to. Johnston, Sir Harry, Book on Uganda by.. Kansas, Field of watermelons in = High plains of....... cdagssccgHenucced Kassuroff, Madam, Bulgarian philanthropis Keith, Arthur, Work in Utah by.......,...0....... Kennan, George, Book on ieee of Pelée Keyser, L.S., Book on Birds of the Rockies . King, Clarence, Book ou Mountaineering in Sierra Nevada... Kirchhoff, Cc. 8 SOUICES......... 3 Kite construction with Hargrave rectangular cell. 221 — —— Bell triangular cell.. — — — — tetrahedral cell... Kite experiments by Alexander Graham Bell. ——— W. A. Eddy ............. —— —Laurence Hargrave INDEX Beee Kite experiments by C. F. Marvin. 220 SA ye ROCCHI eecceeessercceseee 220 ——— U.S Weather Bureau.. 220 Kite flying by Chinese, Japanese, and Malays. 220 Kites, Bell aérodrom 228 —, Bell floating. + 230 —, Bell miscellaneou 43, 244, 245 —, Bell multicellular gian oo Hes —, Bell non-capsizable. 239 —, Bell paddle-wheel —, Bell polygonal...... —, Bell tetrahedral boat. —, Bell tetrahedral cell 247 226, 294 —, Belltriangular box .. 222 —, Hargrave rectangular box 221 Kodak developing machine.. 216 Kunz, Geo. F., Report on precious stones by - 452 Labrador, Report of Brown Harvard Expedi UO): o scuescncrsosaanazosos ngsOsoStuaApooceasecedoD Lake Erie, Rainfall and level of. —, Testing the currents of........... Lake Linderman, Winter freighting on.. 103 Take Ontario, Traveling beach on shore o 26 Land grant colleges ...........eeceeee 36 Langhorne, Report on Dalny by. 260 Langley, S. P., cited on flying machine 229 Lansing, Robert, referred to.. 116 Leighton, W. O., Report on pollution of streams... 80 Lewis and Clarke Expedition, Mrs Dye’s book on. 121 Lindgren, W., referred to Lippincott, ‘T. B., Work in Californi 80 Lloyd's tribute to Hydrographic Office . 74 Logging methods in United States.. 382 London, Highways and byways of... 122 Loubat prizes of Columbia University 40 Lucas, F. A,; Animals before man in Americ 43 Luebkert, Otto J. J.. member National Geographic Society Excursion Committee.. Lumbering in Europe.. +. 384 Lumholtz, Carl; Book on ‘Unknown Mexico ... 121, 298 Macedonia, Lawlessness i in. eon McCormick, f. H., Secretary Geographic ‘Con- gress... +++ 292, 390 McCurdy, ‘A. W. ‘inventor kodak ‘developing ma- chine —, referred t : : 5 294 McCurdy, David George, Kite pictures b 231 McGee, W J, Book reviews by. «++ 299, 300 —elected chairman Geographic Congress Com- sees 254, 292 —, referred to. =» 44, 390 McMurry, C. A., Book on “General Geography aes soma snoncceR ee bEOgcROOSCACCLeECRLECRCGLON 192 —, ‘‘ Teacher’s Manual of Geography ”’. 298 = ) referred to... 295 MeMurry, Frank “Complete Geography ”’ by.. 299 McNeil. Angus, Book on ‘‘Egregious English”’..... 122 Magnetic declination tables co WAN Mahlo, Alaskan exploritions by - 398, 405 Mammoth found in Texas. = 389 Mango, Character of 322 (1 O)9 or ceecccoet Ceeceeeee ES 326 — fruit, showing method of packing. 324 —— — — pealing. 326 321 3 z c 325 —, Introduction of, into United States. 320 — of Porto Rico.. 320 Manila, Botanical g: 197 —, Chinese labor in.... . 197 —, Cholerascenesin 192 — , Improvements i in.. « 195 Maracaibo, Port of . 20 Markham, Clements R.,cited on Polar exploration. 432 Markham, Edward M. Work i in the Philippines by. 418 Marlott, C. L., cited on San José scale. - 168 Marwin, C. F.. Kite experiments by. 220 Mathes, F. E., Explorations of Grand Canyon by. 162 Maury, Hydrographic work of. 5 (2 Mazamas, Ounnes of for ae 168 —, Officers... 394 Page Meacham, F. R., Checks bubonic plague..........-...- 185 Meakin, Annette M. B., Book on Siberian Yailway. 43 Melville, Admiral, referred tO... ........:.ccscccecseeee ceeeee 252 Mendenhall, W. C.; gell Mountains... —, Report by, on Al —; Wrangell Mountains, Alaska. Hxplorations among Wran- Men-of-war, SurveyS DY.....cscsceecees Merriam, C. Hart, cited on Alaska — — — Timberline. —, referred to......... Merrill, Frederick J. H. map by... .... Bee Meunier, Stanis as, cited on volcanic actio Mexico, Tourin, Book by Mrs. James Edwin Morris 122 Mexico, Unknown, Book by Carl Lumbholtz..... 121, 298 Michigan Topographic maps of. 41 —, White pine forests of.. 175 Missouri, Floods of the.. 285 Mississippi, Floods of. 285 Monroe doctrine......... 39 Mont Pelée, Heilprin’s book on. 291 —, Hovey’s account of... 422 —, Kennan’s book on. .. 119 —, New cone and spine of. 422 —, referred to..»......... 272, 291 Moore, Willis L., referred to. 252, 254 —. See Weather Bureau. Moseley, E. L.; Rainfall and level of Lake Erie... 32 —; Testing the currents of Lake Erie... Mossman, R. C., cited on Autarctics.. Mount Blackburn, Height o Mount Drum, Height of. —, Picture of.. Mount Everest, Mount Gordon, Height of. Mouut Hood, View of..... Mount Jarvis, Height of. Mount McKinley, Attempreds ascent of. —, Maip Ofc. i vccarsentenseeneoee —, Plans for climbing... Mount Regal, Height of. Mount Sanford, Height of... 162, 399 Mount Sorata, Miss Peck’s attempted ascent Of. aso 425 Mount Wrangell, Height of... 162, 399 =y Picture Of. ......-.-2.s0-+--- on Mount Zanetti, Height of. Mountain climbing, World’ ords in Muir Glacier in 1903; C. L. Andrew: Ge eeGallbert: 444 — — — —, Map of........... --» 444 —— — —, Panorama of. 442, 443 — —, Recent recession of. Muir, John, Surveys of Muir Glacier by Muldrow, Robert, Alaskan surveys of..... 30 Murdoch, L. H.; Why Great Salt Lake has fallen.. 75 Naval officers, Charts made by.. Negritos of Philippines....... Nelson, BE. W., referred to.. Nery, Santa- Anna, Book on Newcomb, Simon, cited on flying machin Newell, F.H, Acknowledgment to New York city, Geologic map of... New York State, Geologic map ot. —, Grape industry @ierccesasceeepcoon0 450 —, Physical geography of (Tarr) 121 —, Topographic maps of.. 41, 168 New Zealand, Jade from 457 —, White populationo Nile, Subduing the........ 40 Niukluk River, Freight boat on. 104. Nome, Landing at. 100 Nome region.. 105 Nordenskjold, 2096 Norsemen in America 122 North Atlantic Ocean, Pilot chart. 45 293) North Magnetic Pole, Amundsen’s eapedion to —, Ross’ determination of.. 5 ond North Polar routes.. 480 Page Nore Polar expeditions. See Peary, Ziegler, Arc- ics. Sai CXDIOLALION MV Alle] Olvermsusesseseeseadeee seas eeeeeee see 429 North Pole, Conquest of, a business pEroposition 435 —, Moral prestige of gaining.. 0 436 Ohio, Grape industry of.. Ohio River floods ....1........ Olcott, George N., Judge Loubat prizes. Oregon, Grain fleet of .. =, Sand dunes of —, Wheat stacks of.. Oyster culture in Japan. Pacific, Problems of......... 117 —, Question of, Pezet’s bo 121 Palmer, T. S., referred to. 119 Palmettos of Florida... 174 Panama Canal... 459 Panama city, History| ° 458 —, Population of. 462 —, Scenes of.. 464 Panama, Repu 466 — —, Area of........ - 458 ——, Climate of.. 462 ——, Commerce of. 462 ——, Notes on....... 458 — —, Population of - 462 ——, Scenes of. 464, 466 Paraguay, Book ++ 83 Partsch, J., Book on Central Europe b 473 Patagoni ia, H. Hesketh Pritchard’s book on. 300 Patterson, Prof., Suggests need of Coast Surve Peary Arctic Club, Organization of.. —, Tribute to Peary by coccossonneccosIs05C Peary, Robert H.; Asserts Pole is atta = Be President American Geographica ciety + 29; 42 = , Tribute from Peary Arctic Club to —; Tribute from President Roosevelt ¢ ; Value of Arctic exploration, Peck, Annie S, Unsuccessful attempt to ascend PORE coocodstigonagpsoacasssasHogcaccas03000000 9 Perkins, EK. T., Work in California. 78 Peru-Chile boundary dispute... 121 Peters, W. J,, Alaskan explorations ° 398 = , Appointed National Geographic Society Repre- sentative on Ziegler Polar Expedition................ 251 messed with National Geographic Society ESF sonodooocad —, Portrait of Petroff, Ivan, ci Pezet, F. A., Book on Peru- Chile boundary. Philippine Commission, List of reports by.. Philippine Islands, Agricultural opportunities - 197, 203 —, American development o —, Blair and Robinson’s series on —, Board of Health of... ood = ’ Bubonic plague conquered in —, Carabaos of. = Census of.... —, Chinese labor in. —, Coast line of —, Cholera in —, Farming scenes i —, Garden of (Benguet) —, Gazetteer of... —, Igorrotes of. —, Mining Bureau of —, Non-Christian tribes of. —, Official reports relating O.. Tue Nationa, GrocraPHic MaGaZzINE Philippine Islands, Pygmies of (Negritos).. —, SUTVEYING ........-2.0.c20n0 —, Telegraph system of. Phillip, John W., Chart made by. Physical Geography, Gilbert and Pig iron production of the world. PAULO CHATES earsansansawensesoeenssateesnen — chart of North Atlantic Ocean 45, Pinchot, Gifford, Forestry work of (See Bureau of Forestry ) Plant Industry, Bureau of, Work o: Pogromni Volcano, Description of SHINO AC) tesaecacee-tepecoco seed Point Barrow gardening. — relief expedition......... Porter, Russell W., member Ziegler Polar (OS yanocence coasson Wapstcosacno ELD ncOIDASNOESUREKOSORAIOED COTES 252 Portland, “Oregon, “Views of.. 271 Porto Rico, Coast Survey wo 8 —, Commerce of, with United States. 294 —, Mangoes Of........ 22... -200 —, Rubber plantations for. Pratt, J. F., Alaskan work of. Precious stones, Production of .. Price, Overton W.; Influence of forestry on lumber industry Prichard, H. Hesketh. Book on Patagonia by. Prindle, L. M., Alaskan explorations by........ a Provincetown, Mass., Checking sand dunes at ...... 25 Pumpelly, Raphael, Expedition to Turkestan by.. 215 Putnam, George R.; Surveying the Philippines..... —, Tribute to... Railroads and forestry. Railways, Canada. —, United States... — —, Pratt’s book on. —, World.... Raisin consumption o — — — United States......... — production of California ——— United States......... Raleigh Rock, Discovery o —, Picture of .. Ransome, F. L., Rep Rats, Carriers of bubonic plague. => Extermination of, in Manila.. Reaburn, D: lL. ; Plan for climbing Mount McKin- ley Reclamation in California. —— Colorado. — — Wyoming o — of high plains... — service, Projects of. Redmen’s Roads, Book by A. B. Hulbert.. Reeves, W. P., cited on white population of Bri sh colonies. bnacndaccacadcare coconccddacesunaSnadocEeSDoeoon - 360 Reid, H. R., Surveys of Muir Glacier by. Reindeer express. — feeding....... — from Lapland — from Siberia.. —, Importance of, to Alaskan mission stations — industry in Alask —— — —, Future of... —— — —, Bibliography of. — loaned ‘by United States Governmen' — pictures..---.at. csr — stations in Alaska.. Ridgway, R., referred to. Riggs, Oregon, overwhelmed by sand dunes Roberts, Chalmers, cited on Egyptian irrigation... Rock carved Distal teeesneaceceeseeesendsssecieete Rohn, Oscar, Alaskan explorations by.. Roosevelt, President, compliments Peary —, Tribute to. by Peary............csscssceeeseeeene — urges importance of agricultural education. Rose, T. N., cited on mangoes.. Rossel, M. A., cited on volcanic Rotch, A. L., Kite experiments by....... INDEX SBE Rotch, A. L.., referred to ono A Roth, Filibert, forestry work of. 313 Rubber forests, Destruction of... 413 Rubber gathering, Views illustra ing . 408 Rubber plantations in Mexico and Central America 409 Rubber protection, French school for. « 41g Rubber trees, Assam 409 —, Castilla. 409 —, Para... 409 Rubber, V; 409 —, World’s supply of.. 409 Rubies, Origin of......... 452 Russell, I C., referred to. 291 ; Timberlines.... ...... 114 Russell, Mark, Alaskan e plorations by - 398 Russian River, California... 23 Sailing directions. 67 Salisbury, R. D., Geographic work by. 163 Salmon fisheries of Alaska........ccc00+0- 118 Salt Lake City, Annua! precipitation at. 75, 114 ——, Great, Why it has fallen 114 Sand dunes, Massachusetts. 25 1 OTE ZOU... cceeee eee ese eee ene 25 Sandusky Bay, Currents o 41 San José scale Lebacontecoccnsaoctan 168 Schlichter, C. S., Report on underground waters.. Schrader, Fr oh, Alaskan explorations of.. 255, Schwatka, F., Alaskan Explorations ot.. Scidmore, E. R., Book on Winter India by... Scott, Captain, English Antarctic Expedition Seattle-Sitka cable........ Sequoias, Views of giant Servia, Rulers of.... Seward Peninsula. 105 Shattuck, G. B., referred to. 213, 292 Shishaldin Volcano, Descript - Qt —, VIEWS Off........ cece ee neee ee 93. 94, 97 Siberian reindeer owners 140, 143 Siberian Railway......... 5 GB} Sierra Club, Officers of. 394 —, Outing of............... 168 Sierra Nevada, Mountaineering in. 121 Signal Corps work in Alaska - 467 — —— Cuba......... 112 —— — Philippines. 439, 468 Sisal hemp, Cultivation Of.........:0:cccceccecseceescesteeeeeees 150 —. See Agave, Henequen. Sitka-Seattle cable 20 Sloan, Wm. M., puege Loubat prizes . 40 Smith, GHOMMelERLEGRtOrserccesnncseresnee Smith, Hugh M.; Report on herring fisheries 6 Smith, Middleton ; Gardening in northern Alaska. 355 Smith, W. S. T., referred to. —, — endorsed by National Seprannies Society ; 255 —_---— Geographical Society of Pacific 255 Snider Peak, Height of .. 399 Sofia, Capital of Bulgaria P54 —, Scenes it.............. m5 7, Soil, Different ki 264 _, Origin Ch osc ecnceeCoH 263 Souffriére of st paeiceas E p = —, referred t0..-0...--..escseeeeee =, Mountains and forests of.. Southerland, W. H.H., Work of U.S. “Wydrographic Office....... Spain, Coppe Spencer, Alaskan explorations by. Spurr, J. E.. Referred to............ 316 Stambuloff, ‘Stefan, Character o —, Murder Off........-20esceceesecesssesees Stantord, Leland, Vineyards of. Steel production of the bee ee Stein, M. A., Referred to... Stone, Helen, cidnapping: of.. —, Work in Bulgaria of... Stubbs, W. J., cited on mangoe E 425 Sumatra tobacco grown in United 35 Sven Hedin, Portrait of. 27 —, Publications,of......... 473 ‘Taft, W. H., cited on agricultural wealth of Philip- g 359 Tarr, R. S.; Book on Complete Geography. —, — — Physical Geography, New York Stat —, referred to... Tea, American. Tetrahedral cell, Virtues of. — kites (See A. G. Bell, kites) .. — principle in kite coustruction ; ham Bel lereee ecco oes eecee ee oee eee Texas, Expedition of Del Bosque into —, Imperial mammoth found in Thompson, E. H.; Henequen, the Yucatan fiber... 150 Tibet, Climate of............. 354 —, Customs of people of —, Dalai Llama of........... —, Explorations in, by Zoubikov. —, Population of......... ...... —, Sven Hedin’s book on + 220-247, 294 xander Gra- =i =--- 473 DAM DEGIINCS vscsccccnseesececsenne 80, 114 Tittmann, O. H., Acknowledgment to » 468 —, Record of address by seco - ’ referred to 95, 252 —, Work of U. S. Coast aud Geodetic Survey snot I See Coast and Geodetic Survey. Trotter, Spencer; Book on Geography of Com- merce.. . 426 ‘Traus- Canadian ‘Railway Triangular cell in kite constructio Tsetse-Flies, Monograph on......... ‘Turk and His Lost Provinces ; Turkestan, Jade mines of.... —, Pumpelly expedition to.. Uganda, Book on; Sir Harry Johnston's Ulrich, EK. O., referred to... Underground waters.... Unimak Island, Map o —, Mountains on........... Unimak Pass, View of Pogromni, Faris, and West- dahl peaks from............. 98 United Kingdom, Coal pro 215, 316 —, Manufactures of......... 313, 314 —, Pig iron production in -» 317 —, Steel production in....... 317 United States an agricultural community .. 268 —, Agricultural products of... om 271, 38 —, Agriculture, Persons engaged i in. 305 —, Birds of........... o - 119 —, Climate of, Diversity of 172 —, Coal production of. 315 — * Coastal plains of. 177 —, Coast line of... 441 —, Copper production of, compared with other countries. + 318 —, Cotton pro - 120, 318 —, Farming scenes.. - 180, 266-281 —, Food supply of—Equal toincreasing population, 277 —, Foreign commerce of. -- 359 = Geographic distribution of insanity in -- 361 —, Geographic position Of...... we... - 172 —, Grape, wine, and raisin production of. 445 —, Great valley and plateaus of.. 178 —, Harbors Of.......cccscceessseeeee ars —, Immigration of, in 1903 - 391 —, Internal commerce 0 . 166 —, Lumberindustry of. 381 —, Magnetic tables o T 121 —, Manufactures of. 313, 304 —, ——, Exported., +. 306 —, ——, Imported... . 307 482 Page United States, Manufactures of, Persons employed: in.. oo =, Miles of Tailway ‘of. —, Mineral resources of. = Mountains of... —, Number of far: —, Number of farms of. —, Precious stones of..... 452 —, —— in, Production o 451 —, Population, Density of I7I —, Railroad development ir —, Rainfall of. —, Scenery of. —, Steel production of. —, Survey of coast of... —, Underground waters of.... University of Chicago, Geographic department of. 163 THMIGVER), TEESE Oh Beacecacdooccecnanoagconscn conossnocrosacaRDo06o 102, 368 Vanderlip, W. B., Book on Siberian Klondike........ Venezuela, Area of... 19 —, Climate of....... 19 —, Commerce ot .. 21 —, Discovery of, by de Ojeda... 17 -—, Geographical relation of, to Isthmian routes 18 VMermenlen Cn Cerneferned tOsm-screscesssere remanent sree Vineyards, Largest of United States and Europe Volcanic action, Theories of.. — disturbances in America. Volcanoes, Bogoslof.. 95 —, Colima....... 290 —, Mont Pelée 9 ROPERROLENIN pocndcecaceca 20s 005cc0 oan 2O0OF=LEQODUCOLDOO=cLaNDScESS 95, 98 —, Santa Maria. 290, 390 —, Shishaldin... QI. 93 —, Souffriére, St Vincen 158, 290 —, Wrangell Ward, R. D., Book on climatology DyY....-.....:1-cseseeeee 473 Washington, Wericus Lake and Dutch Miller Pass... 170 Watermelons, Field of. - 178, 179 Waters, Underground, amount of. aa Se) — —, Imporcance to irrigation o 39 ——., Motion of. 39 Watkins Glen, a gorg 22 Weather Bureau, and the recent floods 285 —, Kite experiments of. .-. 220 = ” referred to... 0d 75, 447 —, Report on West Indian hurricanes by.. meg: —, Scottish Antarctic Expedition assisted by. 162 —, Stations of, on Great Lakes 327 —, Work of. during 1902. 37, —, — —, on Lake Erie. 327 Weddell, James, Explorations by. . 162 Weddell Sea, exploration of.. 162 Weed, W. H., referred to.. 216 West, Big things of the. 279 Westdahi, Ferdinand ; Mountains on Unimak Isl- and, Alaska 04 -— Peak, Description ot 95 — —, View Of.....eeccesseeee 98 Tue Nationa, GrocraPHic MacaZziIng Weyster, G. M., Acknowledgment to.. Wheat, Improved varieties of.. White, William A. Geographical distribution of insanity in United States.. White Pass Railway... IO — population of the chief Briti: 360 Whymper, Exploration in Canadian Rockies 116 Wigmore, H. I,., Work in the Philippines of.......... Wilkes, Commander Charles, Antarctic explora- tions by — Land. Account o Willis, Bailey, Acknowledgment to 170 —, Expedition to China 293 Wilson, James, Report of, as Secretary of Agricul-—5 ture 35 Wine production of European nations 451 —-—w— United States.. 451 Wisconsin, Lakes of.. Me —, Topographic maps of............... Witherspoon, D.C., Alaskan exploration of. 161, 255, 398 Workman, Mrs F. B., Record ascents in Himalayas by —, Wm. B., Record ascents in Himalayas by. - 420: Worcester, Dean C., cited on agriculture in Phil- ippines..... co —, Report of.. Wrangell Mountains, 399 z= —, Explorations of.........0.. 22... oe 395 ——, Feasible routes for ascent Of.............. 2.2200 .See0 402 ——, Heights of .. ea 399 — —, Glaciers of... — —, Panorama of. sia” —, Surveys of Muir Glacier by Young, T. M., Book on the American cotton indus- Ets Vpremeessnconsmonsssncnecnessiepiaenysienessnar! Yucatan, Ancient civilization of, — Fiber (sisal hemp)... —, People of......... —, Prosperity o Yukon country, Development of.. Ziegler Polar expedition. — — —, Departure of.. — — —, Members of.... — — —,, Plans of work of.. ———, Portraits of officers of. —— —, Some dogs of... —— —, Steamer of.......: Ziegler. William, and the National GeograD ¢ Society... moo Za Zoubikov, Gc he ‘Explorations: in Tibet by... - 353 414 - 415 . 415 Errata. For Howard read Harvard, p. 82, 1. 27, 1st col. For parallels read meridians, p. 414, 1. 14, 2d col.; p. 416, 1. 9, 2d col. also Office Hours: 8.30 A. M. to 5 P. M. NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY Telephone, North 306 Hubbard Memorial Hall Sixteenth and M Streets, Washington, D. C. ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL . President WH MUG ge Ge Bo Vice-President JOHN JOY EDSON G 6 C c Treasurer Oo. P. AUSTIN . o ° O e e Secretary ELIZA R. SCIDMORE . - Foreign Secretary BOARD OF MANAGERS $901-1903 1902-1904 $903-1905 MARCUS BAKER A. GRAHAM BELL CHARLES J. BELL HENRY F. BLOUNT. DAVID T. DAY G ZORGE DAVIDSON F. V. COVILLE A. W. GREELY WM. M. DAVIS D. C. GILMAN ANGELO HEILPRIN JOHN JOY EDSON S. H. KAUFFMANN RUSSELL HINMAN G. K, GILBERT WILLIS L. MOORE W J McGEE A. J. HENRY ISRAEL C. RUSSELL GIFFORD PINCHOT ¥. P, AUSTIN R. D. SALISBURY HENRY GANNETT C. HART MERRIAM The National Geographic Magazine is sent free of charge to ali members of the Natigia!l Geographic Society Recommendation for Membership in the NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY The following form is enclosed for use in the nomination of persons for membership Please detach and fill in blanks and send to the Secretary Dues: Annual membership, $2; Life membership, $50. If check be enclosed, please make it payable to order of the National Geographic Society, and, if at a distance from Washington, remit by New York draft or post-office money-order. AA a (eV a es cries atOy ats la OF, To the Secretary, National Geographic Society, Washington, D. C.: Please propose CERES Gps gp em Bp pp A a a PUY Hele ee ee ee for membership in the Society. Neatness Punctuality Fair Prices “A delight from beginning to end.” A WINTER JUDD & DETWEILER PACIFIC COAST. For an eastern person there is noth- ing quite so enjoyable as a winter on |P R | ING E R S the Pacific Coast, that country being — == delightful during the winter months from Southern California to Seattle. It is reached best from the east by the 420-22 ELEVENTH ST. N. W. White which form a part of all the great transcontinental routes. Any New York Central Ticket Agent will tell you about it. WASHINGTON, D. C. A copy of No.5 of the “‘ Four-Track Series,” ““Ameriea’s Winter Resorts,” will be sent free to any address, on receipt of atwo-cent stamp, by George H. Daniels, General Passenger Established 1868 Phone, Main 536 Agent, New York. WE make a specialty of HIGH GRADE WORK for SCIENTIFIC 2 TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS [ey ENGRAVERS PHILADELPHIA PLATES To PRINT IN ONE OR MORE Cotons The fMlanhattan Press-Clipping Bureau ARTHUR CASSOT, FProprietor NEW YORK (Knickerbocker Building) LONDON COR. FIFTH AVENUE AND 14TH STREET, NEW YORK Will supply you with all personal reference and clippings on any subject from all the papers and periodicals published here and abroad. Our large staff of readers can gather for you more valuable material on any current subject than you can get in a lifetime. TERMS: 100 clippings . . $ 5.00 250 clippings . . . $ 12.00 500 clippings . . . $22.00 1,000 clippings . . . $35.00 a PRESS” CUTTINGS na bisa ce - oblenea in ihe Unies States, agencies in London, Paris, Berlin and Vienna ote published in Europe and the British “any given subject will bring notices: sired: also from. the peas papers. Map of the Philippines vies 2 ioches = 3 feet) ee : ‘Prepared under the direction of the aot Department. Map of South Africa (46 x33 inches). Prepared under the direction of the ‘War Department. Map of Northeastern China (36 x 28 inches). i e Prepared under the unt the War ‘Department. ie ‘Map of the Chinese Empite, | way (1 x7% inches), eee Map of Alaska (28 x 24 is inches). Sea i Prepared under the’ direction of Ne v. s. ‘cet ‘Sunk A Sena of Twelve Maps on the Alaskan Boundary Disp _ Prepared under the direction of Hon. John W. Foster, ex-S Chart of the World on Mercator’s Projection (48x27 ne Prepared under the direction of the Bydtogrs © Offi Map of Cuba (18x734 inches). ete Prepared under the direction Robert T Hill, A Series of Twenty-five Full-page ‘Charts, pee storm ae and methods of weather forecasting. ERA. ‘Prepared under the direction of Dr. ‘Willis L. Moore, Chief UA ey ad for: idecsks dopa Cents eat ; ‘The Cameras: and aapeilas: siniiutackubed 6s ‘the cuniey i cal, and Eastman Kodak Companies are too avail known to need any s recommendation. . We carry the best of their several iines, thus. insuring our customers perfect satisfaction. Among these the New Film Pack Cam made by the Rochester Optical Co., i ‘is the. aie handlest, and constructed Film ‘Camera, on 1 the market. Size, 3 hicuee Price, 33 Film Packs, 12) exposures. Poco-A. 4x5, with one ol ot ia Poney Premo B No. 445, shed carrying case and one plate holde é 144 a Balas Soest with or $s ¥ sssssss coun Model 20, axé. “with Site case and one pete fot der... N26. ; Century Model 20, 5x; bth cannina estereae Me case and one. ee holder....:.. 16 | Century no 21) 4x6. i with 6; ; case and plate holde 44 Century. Mode ‘el 21, Bx7, yeith, ‘carrying case and one Laat. holder. sheng cette “19 | 0 TaNSSaNSoan 753388 | = Also complete lines ‘of ‘Tra S, ‘Graduate Sy and Toning Solutions, Films, Plates, efc..— r Our stock is composed of 1903 models ‘only of the latest. improvements. Our dark room is~at the disposal of our pats to developing and printing. eS Sut ‘WOODWARD. oA NEW YORK WASHINGTON "PRESS OF JUDD & oe eet os Se j NATIONAL GEoGRAPHIC MAGAZINE: VOL. XIV. No. 11. 1903 i ——_—e MOUNTSCANGORD AIC 200 RCE ET: MOUNT WRANGELL, 14,000 FEET MOUNT BLACKBURN, 16,140 FEET Panorama of the Wrangell Mountains, taken by W. C. Mendenhall from the ridge east of the Dadina River. The picture extends about 85 miles from right to left, and covers 2125 square miles, an area greater than the State of Delaware. ‘The mountains are for the most part masses of lava and volcanic mud which have been piled up on an earlier surface. The shapes of the peaks are the combined } products of vulcanism and erosion. Mount Wrangell owes its outlines almost wholly to volcanic action. Erosion has modified its original form but little. } Mount Drum’s contour, on the contrary, is due entirely to denuding agencies. | ! The original built-up form is gone. Mount Sanford is a volcanic dome, one-half | of which has been mined away by a sapping glacier. Mount Blackburn has been Price 10 cents PILOT CHART OF THE NORTH ATLA 80" 40° (y Ifo tessssaateoncr: PRDOE CECE oo EEE Cece oe ee eee Poe eect TOE bere eee TECCEEEET etree eee eee ee fl EEE EERE EE EEEEeEEEE Eee EEE Eee Scunnsdususcssaras annus seecetana ie acess! aaa or oe se | ‘egal Wet () 2-4 3: *Sable] as. 2 31 Totater 7 Z 3300 3 | StJohns he ee fe WO OO.) Tiga GALES.—tThe figures in the center of each '| 5-degree square show for the month of Feb- 1 || ruary the percentage of days (¢. e., the num- ! | i ees || ber of days in each hundred) upon which; {| | j =| 1 | gales of force 8 and over haye been 1 ' | 3 '| Tecorded at some point within the | given square at g the 10-year peri ESE) 2 NSIS TEN cs TE Treenwich mean Lert (od 1898- 1 30 | 26] 22) 17 1 i ) TEE TCELet Basie ia | 21122) 137 10 i ' i pe rere ae Spat i ++! 24) 21) 21. 18! 12/13) 14 | 9) 4 COLE ERLE b Eco Loot SELEEoE CLLEGE Too STORM SIGNALS TOLLEbL TELCO Pennants 5 feet hoist. 12 feet fly EXPLANATION. Flags 8 feet square ra Gulf coasts of the United States from East to Brownsville, Texas, The stations at and Jupiter are national Code, a) graph the messages of passing vessels. r I 1 [ai _VI. February 13-15, 1899. _ February 16-20, 1899. February 7-10, 1900. February 5- 7, 1900. February 5- 7, 1900. February 17-20, 1900. RECOMMENDED ROUTES FOR FULL AND LOW POWERED STEAMSHIPS, Attention 1s called to. the west-bound steamship route along the parallel of 38° N. nation of the latest information in its possession leads the U. & Hydrographic Office recommend this route for the winter season for vessels of 11 knots and under, that low powered steamers will thereby keep out of the region of adverse winds and current Baltanrove and gain considerable time. Attention is also called to the routes recommended for full and low powered steamships to and from northern Europe and the Gulf of Mexico. An examination of the winds and cur rents along the routes here shown leads the U. S. Hydrographic Office to recommend them to steamships of the classes Indicated. Shipmasters are cordially invited to give their experience with these routes. | I from southerly quadrants. rete o aes By night a red light indicates easterly winds, and & = SE ag ancan white ght above a red light, westerly winds. Southportg/ !~ Winds Signal Hurricane Warnings.—Two red flags, with black (a Henry aling by the Inter- to transmit by tele- New Orleans E a | Progreso It is believed Storm Warning Flags—A red flag, with a black center, Indicates that a storm of marked violence is i expected. he pennants displayed with the fings indicate the direction of the wind: red, easterly (from northeast to | south); white, westerly (from. southwest. to north), | The pennant above the flag Indicates that the wind ts es expected to blow from the northerly quadrants; below, centers, displayed one above the other, indicate the expected approach of tropical hurricanes, and also of those extremely seyere and dangerous storms which Storm signals are displayed by the ee By eater ocstonaliy mora across the er us al tla) tc atthe Waited States trom Be port, Maine, Hurricane warnings are not displayed at night. ape | February 11-19, 1902. Anexamt e Washington, kes and northern = es Cente. od boas houin i orokontiomamn (0) T2\0F10/5.0520) ESTABLISHMENT OF TIME BALL AT BOSTON, MASS. Office, Boston, Mass. The from the roof of the Ames Building, corner oR ing in ton; t! is of b can- TRACKS OF CYCLONIO vas, 4 feet in diameter; the mast is 41 feet STORMS HIER Se Dsoe 228 feet Bis the side- walk, and 268 feet above mean low water. IN FEBRUARY. ‘The ban will be hoisted at 11.55 a. m. every and national holidays, 00m. 00s., 75th meridian February 2-10, 1897. ie @rrppt Sunde February 16-18, 1897. time. February 9-11, 1897. instant of noon, the ball will be hoisted and February 19-28, 1898. slowly lowered at 13.05. February 1—.5, 1899.- PPP January 27—February 8, 1902. New York pe TK Th. Lights: 5 ERE NL Philadelphiase Adfive Fachidly Bank STF ae ene) FOG.—The figures in the center of each one-degres square show for the month of Webruary the percent- age of days (i. ¢., the number of daysin each hundred) upon which fog has been retorded within the given square during the five-year period 1898-1902. Farewell yuu uuu x TOO ar Pa / LAN Db Dublings & S$ C/O TIL. D Glasgow 2 Fi feertrrre reer GO! GALE AND STORM SIGNALS . FOR GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND sTEsMse® ROUTES y i oe ‘ANSATLANTIC STEAMSHIP COMPAN, E ROUTES AND THEY ARE NOW ACTU ZL Nee if PeANUASGIE =a G. aT a tar 7.3 ae gu bch. PERCY & LILNE abl orn /B ol, We ™. Bermudi “, ee eee pestwouno Kb ROUTE EG sy »—O« The cone point| The cone powrt downy ds indi- cates the proba Diliy of strong winds at first trom the upwards idi- cates the proba- bility of strong winds at first from. the avre A TEECEL South (passing from S Worth (passing trom. E, to NW. through. 5) W. to SE, through N) r suspended trom the Three lights of like colo 2 lace the cone atnight. corners of a triangle rep CEE FOR FRANCE AND PORTUGAL. A cone point up- wards above the cylinder indi- cates the proba- bility of a very heaxy gale from ns cates the proba- biley of a very heavy gale from \\| ordeaux The cone poirt down ds indi- cates the proba- bility of strong winds at first trom the South (passing from S. DOT TOUGH The cone poit upwands wuli~ cates the proba- bility of strong winds at first trom, the North (passing fromN. 1] ace ETT OUGHT) << c ve) Santa | =i South America. | crossing. | crossing. EQUATOR CROSSINGS FOR SAILING PASSAGES IN THE PACIFIC OCEAN. < = ig Although the most favorable point for sailing vessels to cross the equator, during any month, may be found by inspection of the Pilot Charts for the corresponding month of the previous year, the Office publishes ox the Pilot Charts, for the benefit of mariners who have not retained their old files, a table of crossings in both the Atlantic and Pacific for certain months In advance. This table gives the data forships north bound in the Pacific from Cape Horn or west coast of Route. | Month of | Longitude of | -| 116° 40" W, (| April Bonnd for United States. || May- 118° 00" W June 118° 00’ W, 3 uy longitude 90° W.) a8 follows; April, 20¢8.; May, 25°S.; June, cep FORECAST FOR FEBRUARY.—Along the transatlantic routes foul weather with W'ly gales, high seas, and frequent snow eridian the wind will blow 69 per cent of th ent of the time from the NW. quadrant); from 40°-20° W., 63 per cent of the time from e western|semicircle (32 per cent from the/N W. quadrant); east of 20°, 58 per cent from (34 per cent from the SW, quadrant), jubchart, attaining a maximum frequency throughout the region 45°-50° N., 25°-45° W., a rule setting in at SE. and shifting in sudden and violent squalls to NW. Along the American coast north ot Hatteras winds from the northern semicirole will prevail (65 er cent). Gales frequent, as shown. Over the pastern half of the ocean the normal winds are apt to be disturbed by cyclonic coiditions, the center of the system hovering several days in succession in the vicinity of the Azores. During such periods the wind relations on the sailing routes between thd channel and the equator and north of 25° are reverse, Throughout the Caribbean Sea and the West Indies fresh trades in the Gulf pf Mexico at times reaching as far south as Colon. uent, as shown on subchart. he\Grand Banks are free from bergs, Field ice may, however, be looked for ie western|semicircle mth. SEEE EEE EEE nonths will meet the SE From Sandy Hook to the 40th m the western semicircle (44 per Gales, as shown in the dd. willprevail. Northers iS Tampa Campeche BRANCH HYDROGHAYRIC OFFICES EERE CCEET py Cee BOSTON: Cusiomhonse NEW YORK: Maritime Exchange PHILADELPHIA: Bourse Building BALTIMORE: Customhouse NORFOLK: Customhouse SAVANNAH: Customhouse NEW ORLEANS: Customhouse GAVE STON ‘Levy Building SAN FRANCISCO: Merchants'Fxchange PORTLAND, ORE! Customhouse PORT TOWNSEND: Customhouse curcaco: Masonic Temple CLEVELAND, onto: The Arcade BUFFALO, N.Y: Pradential Building STE. MARIE. uren. NewsBuildg DULUTH, MUNN.,Torrey Building... Too eee ) | ee ISOBARS AND ISOTHERMS; FOR THE MONTH OF FEBRUARY Tsobars.30 tnahes ani above —— ~|\~ Isobars below 30 inches \- | Tsothermsrin weer fi £ NY Washington Bf neipsing 4 Corrections for || temperature to be Japplied ta the read-\| of mevennal baro-|\ Fmuter's in order to compare|| the aunospherte pressures || uulicated. by them with the values itulicaled on this chart} 40 | ! 30 : i At the Branch Hydrographic OF fices barometers aru thermometers are com pared with standards fi coud the latest informa n alates oy be obtained regarding charts, lights, dangers to navigation, and all mutters of interest to mariners. Navigators of every nationality are invited to avail themselves of the benefits of these offices, and. to co- opernte with the Hydrographic Office at the Navy Depe ment in Washington by sending in prompt and. complete reports of marine data upon their arrival in port. At places outside of the United: States such communications may be handed ta the U.S. Consul who will mail them without cost to the seniler. In reporting a derelivt vessel on dnifting buoy spectal care should be taken to state its position'and give as 2 description ax possible, in order that it may he identified oY \ ws NY, § exc arfinique—- St ome L— | & Barbados ¢ ™ nl 20) The. Chart shows the average pressure and temmpera* normal conditions anticyclonic areas cover the American and) BLO BCOOLE the European continents, a connecting ridge extending across) froma W ly direction e: having its central line in latitude 30° N..A trongkh ——_Along. the 1 Seg me SW'ly (the prevailing On the equatorial slope the changes of pressure from day to are slight, and the prevailing winds (the NE. trades) are Too To Ste ax ep DERELICTS AND WRECKS — The name of’ the vessel is given.unles been ascertained: and the syinbol represents, as far as possible-her rig and the conditionin | 1 at the date set opposite to her position. The successive positions in sen seen at the dates indicated, are joined by lines of dashes whieh she has ICEBEROS AND FIELD [CE _ The shaded symbols represent reports received af ter the 20th ult. Each report of ice seen along a given (rack is represented by a straight nbols placed at the first and last positions at which ice was seen and 1 number of bergs written upon it. The numbers opposite the synibols at the ends of the line ave the dates referved to by the report | WATERSPOUT REGION OF FREQUENT FOG TO ee eee line joining the having the observ A. 4 DRIFTING BUOYS EXPLANATION OF THE SIGNIFICANGE OF THE COLORS AND SYMBOLS STORM TRACKS.—The several red lines indicate the path followed by the center of each of the more severe cyclonic storms that have occurred | 4 during the month of Febi of the storm center at Greenwich mean noon are indicated by si cireles | |] with dates set opposite to them. | in previous years. The successive itions | } it has not Thi information in BLUE gives a general meteorolog- | jeall frecast, with deductions therefrom, for the month of ‘ebrary. Thetracks of some of the more important storms that | have ocourred during February in previous years are | show in RED. | | MAGNETIC VARIATION. The lines of equal Magetic variation for every degree for the cur rare shown by lines of fine dots | rent OCEAN CURRENTS _The vearly average set of | the stream and drift curvents is shown hy the | small blaek arrows. PREVAILING WINDS AND CALMS.—The wind rose in each 6-degree square shows the character of the winds that may be expected within that square during the current month, The arrows fly with the wind. The length of the arrow, measured (from the center of the circle) on the attached scale, gives the percentage of time (number of hours in each one hundred) that the wind may be expected to blow from the given point., The number of feathers shows the average force of Beaufort scale. The figure in the center of the circle givy@ the percentage of calms, light airs and variable winds. the wind on the For EXAMPLE, the attached wind rose should beread thus: In each 100 hours the wind niay be expected to blow 18 hours from NE., average force, 3; 10hours from Hast, average force, 3; 3 hours from SE., average force, 4; 25 hours from SSE., average force, 3; 10 hours from SW., average force, 3; calms, light airs and variables, 13 hours. } 0 20 30 49 50 60 70 30 “S100 Tocco beer cho coker SCALE OF WIND PERCENTAGES REGION OF EQUATORIAL RAINS y a Amazon be s 5 i